Adding upstream version 6.1.76.upstream/6.1.76upstream

Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org>

127 files changed, 39081 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7b5964bc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======================================
+v9fs: Plan 9 Resource Sharing for Linux
+=======================================
+
+About
+=====
+
+v9fs is a Unix implementation of the Plan 9 9p remote filesystem protocol.
+
+This software was originally developed by Ron Minnich <rminnich@sandia.gov>
+and Maya Gokhale.  Additional development by Greg Watson
+<gwatson@lanl.gov> and most recently Eric Van Hensbergen
+<ericvh@gmail.com>, Latchesar Ionkov <lucho@ionkov.net> and Russ Cox
+<rsc@swtch.com>.
+
+The best detailed explanation of the Linux implementation and applications of
+the 9p client is available in the form of a USENIX paper:
+
+   https://www.usenix.org/events/usenix05/tech/freenix/hensbergen.html
+
+Other applications are described in the following papers:
+
+	* XCPU & Clustering
+	  http://xcpu.org/papers/xcpu-talk.pdf
+	* KVMFS: control file system for KVM
+	  http://xcpu.org/papers/kvmfs.pdf
+	* CellFS: A New Programming Model for the Cell BE
+	  http://xcpu.org/papers/cellfs-talk.pdf
+	* PROSE I/O: Using 9p to enable Application Partitions
+	  http://plan9.escet.urjc.es/iwp9/cready/PROSE_iwp9_2006.pdf
+	* VirtFS: A Virtualization Aware File System pass-through
+	  http://goo.gl/3WPDg
+
+Usage
+=====
+
+For remote file server::
+
+	mount -t 9p 10.10.1.2 /mnt/9
+
+For Plan 9 From User Space applications (http://swtch.com/plan9)::
+
+	mount -t 9p `namespace`/acme /mnt/9 -o trans=unix,uname=$USER
+
+For server running on QEMU host with virtio transport::
+
+	mount -t 9p -o trans=virtio <mount_tag> /mnt/9
+
+where mount_tag is the tag associated by the server to each of the exported
+mount points. Each 9P export is seen by the client as a virtio device with an
+associated "mount_tag" property. Available mount tags can be
+seen by reading /sys/bus/virtio/drivers/9pnet_virtio/virtio<n>/mount_tag files.
+
+Options
+=======
+
+  ============= ===============================================================
+  trans=name	select an alternative transport.  Valid options are
+  		currently:
+
+			========  ============================================
+			unix 	  specifying a named pipe mount point
+			tcp	  specifying a normal TCP/IP connection
+			fd   	  used passed file descriptors for connection
+                                  (see rfdno and wfdno)
+			virtio	  connect to the next virtio channel available
+				  (from QEMU with trans_virtio module)
+			rdma	  connect to a specified RDMA channel
+			========  ============================================
+
+  uname=name	user name to attempt mount as on the remote server.  The
+  		server may override or ignore this value.  Certain user
+		names may require authentication.
+
+  aname=name	aname specifies the file tree to access when the server is
+  		offering several exported file systems.
+
+  cache=mode	specifies a caching policy.  By default, no caches are used.
+
+                        none
+				default no cache policy, metadata and data
+                                alike are synchronous.
+			loose
+				no attempts are made at consistency,
+                                intended for exclusive, read-only mounts
+                        fscache
+				use FS-Cache for a persistent, read-only
+				cache backend.
+                        mmap
+				minimal cache that is only used for read-write
+                                mmap.  Northing else is cached, like cache=none
+
+  debug=n	specifies debug level.  The debug level is a bitmask.
+
+			=====   ================================
+			0x01    display verbose error messages
+			0x02    developer debug (DEBUG_CURRENT)
+			0x04    display 9p trace
+			0x08    display VFS trace
+			0x10    display Marshalling debug
+			0x20    display RPC debug
+			0x40    display transport debug
+			0x80    display allocation debug
+			0x100   display protocol message debug
+			0x200   display Fid debug
+			0x400   display packet debug
+			0x800   display fscache tracing debug
+			=====   ================================
+
+  rfdno=n	the file descriptor for reading with trans=fd
+
+  wfdno=n	the file descriptor for writing with trans=fd
+
+  msize=n	the number of bytes to use for 9p packet payload
+
+  port=n	port to connect to on the remote server
+
+  noextend	force legacy mode (no 9p2000.u or 9p2000.L semantics)
+
+  version=name	Select 9P protocol version. Valid options are:
+
+			========        ==============================
+			9p2000          Legacy mode (same as noextend)
+			9p2000.u        Use 9P2000.u protocol
+			9p2000.L        Use 9P2000.L protocol
+			========        ==============================
+
+  dfltuid	attempt to mount as a particular uid
+
+  dfltgid	attempt to mount with a particular gid
+
+  afid		security channel - used by Plan 9 authentication protocols
+
+  nodevmap	do not map special files - represent them as normal files.
+  		This can be used to share devices/named pipes/sockets between
+		hosts.  This functionality will be expanded in later versions.
+
+  access	there are four access modes.
+			user
+				if a user tries to access a file on v9fs
+			        filesystem for the first time, v9fs sends an
+			        attach command (Tattach) for that user.
+				This is the default mode.
+			<uid>
+				allows only user with uid=<uid> to access
+				the files on the mounted filesystem
+			any
+				v9fs does single attach and performs all
+				operations as one user
+			clien
+				 ACL based access check on the 9p client
+			         side for access validation
+
+  cachetag	cache tag to use the specified persistent cache.
+		cache tags for existing cache sessions can be listed at
+		/sys/fs/9p/caches. (applies only to cache=fscache)
+  ============= ===============================================================
+
+Behavior
+========
+
+This section aims at describing 9p 'quirks' that can be different
+from a local filesystem behaviors.
+
+ - Setting O_NONBLOCK on a file will make client reads return as early
+   as the server returns some data instead of trying to fill the read
+   buffer with the requested amount of bytes or end of file is reached.
+
+Resources
+=========
+
+Protocol specifications are maintained on github:
+http://ericvh.github.com/9p-rfc/
+
+9p client and server implementations are listed on
+http://9p.cat-v.org/implementations
+
+A 9p2000.L server is being developed by LLNL and can be found
+at http://code.google.com/p/diod/
+
+There are user and developer mailing lists available through the v9fs project
+on sourceforge (http://sourceforge.net/projects/v9fs).
+
+News and other information is maintained on a Wiki.
+(http://sf.net/apps/mediawiki/v9fs/index.php).
+
+Bug reports are best issued via the mailing list.
+
+For more information on the Plan 9 Operating System check out
+http://plan9.bell-labs.com/plan9
+
+For information on Plan 9 from User Space (Plan 9 applications and libraries
+ported to Linux/BSD/OSX/etc) check out https://9fans.github.io/plan9port/
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5b22cae38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============================
+Acorn Disc Filing System - ADFS
+===============================
+
+Filesystems supported by ADFS
+-----------------------------
+
+The ADFS module supports the following Filecore formats which have:
+
+- new maps
+- new directories or big directories
+
+In terms of the named formats, this means we support:
+
+- E and E+, with or without boot block
+- F and F+
+
+We fully support reading files from these filesystems, and writing to
+existing files within their existing allocation.  Essentially, we do
+not support changing any of the filesystem metadata.
+
+This is intended to support loopback mounted Linux native filesystems
+on a RISC OS Filecore filesystem, but will allow the data within files
+to be changed.
+
+If write support (ADFS_FS_RW) is configured, we allow rudimentary
+directory updates, specifically updating the access mode and timestamp.
+
+Mount options for ADFS
+----------------------
+
+  ============  ======================================================
+  uid=nnn	All files in the partition will be owned by
+		user id nnn.  Default 0 (root).
+  gid=nnn	All files in the partition will be in group
+		nnn.  Default 0 (root).
+  ownmask=nnn	The permission mask for ADFS 'owner' permissions
+		will be nnn.  Default 0700.
+  othmask=nnn	The permission mask for ADFS 'other' permissions
+		will be nnn.  Default 0077.
+  ftsuffix=n	When ftsuffix=0, no file type suffix will be applied.
+		When ftsuffix=1, a hexadecimal suffix corresponding to
+		the RISC OS file type will be added.  Default 0.
+  ============  ======================================================
+
+Mapping of ADFS permissions to Linux permissions
+------------------------------------------------
+
+  ADFS permissions consist of the following:
+
+	- Owner read
+	- Owner write
+	- Other read
+	- Other write
+
+  (In older versions, an 'execute' permission did exist, but this
+  does not hold the same meaning as the Linux 'execute' permission
+  and is now obsolete).
+
+  The mapping is performed as follows::
+
+	Owner read				-> -r--r--r--
+	Owner write				-> --w--w---w
+	Owner read and filetype UnixExec	-> ---x--x--x
+    These are then masked by ownmask, eg 700	-> -rwx------
+	Possible owner mode permissions		-> -rwx------
+
+	Other read				-> -r--r--r--
+	Other write				-> --w--w--w-
+	Other read and filetype UnixExec	-> ---x--x--x
+    These are then masked by othmask, eg 077	-> ----rwxrwx
+	Possible other mode permissions		-> ----rwxrwx
+
+  Hence, with the default masks, if a file is owner read/write, and
+  not a UnixExec filetype, then the permissions will be::
+
+			-rw-------
+
+  However, if the masks were ownmask=0770,othmask=0007, then this would
+  be modified to::
+
+			-rw-rw----
+
+  There is no restriction on what you can do with these masks.  You may
+  wish that either read bits give read access to the file for all, but
+  keep the default write protection (ownmask=0755,othmask=0577)::
+
+			-rw-r--r--
+
+  You can therefore tailor the permission translation to whatever you
+  desire the permissions should be under Linux.
+
+RISC OS file type suffix
+------------------------
+
+  RISC OS file types are stored in bits 19..8 of the file load address.
+
+  To enable non-RISC OS systems to be used to store files without losing
+  file type information, a file naming convention was devised (initially
+  for use with NFS) such that a hexadecimal suffix of the form ,xyz
+  denoted the file type: e.g. BasicFile,ffb is a BASIC (0xffb) file.  This
+  naming convention is now also used by RISC OS emulators such as RPCEmu.
+
+  Mounting an ADFS disc with option ftsuffix=1 will cause appropriate file
+  type suffixes to be appended to file names read from a directory.  If the
+  ftsuffix option is zero or omitted, no file type suffixes will be added.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/affs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/affs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5776cbd5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/affs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=============================
+Overview of Amiga Filesystems
+=============================
+
+Not all varieties of the Amiga filesystems are supported for reading and
+writing. The Amiga currently knows six different filesystems:
+
+==============	===============================================================
+DOS\0		The old or original filesystem, not really suited for
+		hard disks and normally not used on them, either.
+		Supported read/write.
+
+DOS\1		The original Fast File System. Supported read/write.
+
+DOS\2		The old "international" filesystem. International means that
+		a bug has been fixed so that accented ("international") letters
+		in file names are case-insensitive, as they ought to be.
+		Supported read/write.
+
+DOS\3		The "international" Fast File System.  Supported read/write.
+
+DOS\4		The original filesystem with directory cache. The directory
+		cache speeds up directory accesses on floppies considerably,
+		but slows down file creation/deletion. Doesn't make much
+		sense on hard disks. Supported read only.
+
+DOS\5		The Fast File System with directory cache. Supported read only.
+==============	===============================================================
+
+All of the above filesystems allow block sizes from 512 to 32K bytes.
+Supported block sizes are: 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes. Larger blocks
+speed up almost everything at the expense of wasted disk space. The speed
+gain above 4K seems not really worth the price, so you don't lose too
+much here, either.
+
+The muFS (multi user File System) equivalents of the above file systems
+are supported, too.
+
+Mount options for the AFFS
+==========================
+
+protect
+		If this option is set, the protection bits cannot be altered.
+
+setuid[=uid]
+		This sets the owner of all files and directories in the file
+		system to uid or the uid of the current user, respectively.
+
+setgid[=gid]
+		Same as above, but for gid.
+
+mode=mode
+		Sets the mode flags to the given (octal) value, regardless
+		of the original permissions. Directories will get an x
+		permission if the corresponding r bit is set.
+		This is useful since most of the plain AmigaOS files
+		will map to 600.
+
+nofilenametruncate
+		The file system will return an error when filename exceeds
+		standard maximum filename length (30 characters).
+
+reserved=num
+		Sets the number of reserved blocks at the start of the
+		partition to num. You should never need this option.
+		Default is 2.
+
+root=block
+		Sets the block number of the root block. This should never
+		be necessary.
+
+bs=blksize
+		Sets the blocksize to blksize. Valid block sizes are 512,
+		1024, 2048 and 4096. Like the root option, this should
+		never be necessary, as the affs can figure it out itself.
+
+quiet
+		The file system will not return an error for disallowed
+		mode changes.
+
+verbose
+		The volume name, file system type and block size will
+		be written to the syslog when the filesystem is mounted.
+
+mufs
+		The filesystem is really a muFS, also it doesn't
+		identify itself as one. This option is necessary if
+		the filesystem wasn't formatted as muFS, but is used
+		as one.
+
+prefix=path
+		Path will be prefixed to every absolute path name of
+		symbolic links on an AFFS partition. Default = "/".
+		(See below.)
+
+volume=name
+		When symbolic links with an absolute path are created
+		on an AFFS partition, name will be prepended as the
+		volume name. Default = "" (empty string).
+		(See below.)
+
+Handling of the Users/Groups and protection flags
+=================================================
+
+Amiga -> Linux:
+
+The Amiga protection flags RWEDRWEDHSPARWED are handled as follows:
+
+  - R maps to r for user, group and others. On directories, R implies x.
+
+  - W maps to w.
+
+  - E maps to x.
+
+  - D is ignored.
+
+  - H, S and P are always retained and ignored under Linux.
+
+  - A is cleared when a file is written to.
+
+User id and group id will be used unless set[gu]id are given as mount
+options. Since most of the Amiga file systems are single user systems
+they will be owned by root. The root directory (the mount point) of the
+Amiga filesystem will be owned by the user who actually mounts the
+filesystem (the root directory doesn't have uid/gid fields).
+
+Linux -> Amiga:
+
+The Linux rwxrwxrwx file mode is handled as follows:
+
+  - r permission will allow R for user, group and others.
+
+  - w permission will allow W for user, group and others.
+
+  - x permission of the user will allow E for plain files.
+
+  - D will be allowed for user, group and others.
+
+  - All other flags (suid, sgid, ...) are ignored and will
+    not be retained.
+
+Newly created files and directories will get the user and group ID
+of the current user and a mode according to the umask.
+
+Symbolic links
+==============
+
+Although the Amiga and Linux file systems resemble each other, there
+are some, not always subtle, differences. One of them becomes apparent
+with symbolic links. While Linux has a file system with exactly one
+root directory, the Amiga has a separate root directory for each
+file system (for example, partition, floppy disk, ...). With the Amiga,
+these entities are called "volumes". They have symbolic names which
+can be used to access them. Thus, symbolic links can point to a
+different volume. AFFS turns the volume name into a directory name
+and prepends the prefix path (see prefix option) to it.
+
+Example:
+You mount all your Amiga partitions under /amiga/<volume> (where
+<volume> is the name of the volume), and you give the option
+"prefix=/amiga/" when mounting all your AFFS partitions. (They
+might be "User", "WB" and "Graphics", the mount points /amiga/User,
+/amiga/WB and /amiga/Graphics). A symbolic link referring to
+"User:sc/include/dos/dos.h" will be followed to
+"/amiga/User/sc/include/dos/dos.h".
+
+Examples
+========
+
+Command line::
+
+    mount  Archive/Amiga/Workbench3.1.adf /mnt -t affs -o loop,verbose
+    mount  /dev/sda3 /Amiga -t affs
+
+/etc/fstab entry::
+
+    /dev/sdb5	/amiga/Workbench    affs    noauto,user,exec,verbose 0 0
+
+IMPORTANT NOTE
+==============
+
+If you boot Windows 95 (don't know about 3.x, 98 and NT) while you
+have an Amiga harddisk connected to your PC, it will overwrite
+the bytes 0x00dc..0x00df of block 0 with garbage, thus invalidating
+the Rigid Disk Block. Sheer luck has it that this is an unused
+area of the RDB, so only the checksum doesn't match anymore.
+Linux will ignore this garbage and recognize the RDB anyway, but
+before you connect that drive to your Amiga again, you must
+restore or repair your RDB. So please do make a backup copy of it
+before booting Windows!
+
+If the damage is already done, the following should fix the RDB
+(where <disk> is the device name).
+
+DO AT YOUR OWN RISK::
+
+  dd if=/dev/<disk> of=rdb.tmp count=1
+  cp rdb.tmp rdb.fixed
+  dd if=/dev/zero of=rdb.fixed bs=1 seek=220 count=4
+  dd if=rdb.fixed of=/dev/<disk>
+
+Bugs, Restrictions, Caveats
+===========================
+
+Quite a few things may not work as advertised. Not everything is
+tested, though several hundred MB have been read and written using
+this fs. For a most up-to-date list of bugs please consult
+fs/affs/Changes.
+
+By default, filenames are truncated to 30 characters without warning.
+'nofilenametruncate' mount option can change that behavior.
+
+Case is ignored by the affs in filename matching, but Linux shells
+do care about the case. Example (with /wb being an affs mounted fs)::
+
+    rm /wb/WRONGCASE
+
+will remove /mnt/wrongcase, but::
+
+    rm /wb/WR*
+
+will not since the names are matched by the shell.
+
+The block allocation is designed for hard disk partitions. If more
+than 1 process writes to a (small) diskette, the blocks are allocated
+in an ugly way (but the real AFFS doesn't do much better). This
+is also true when space gets tight.
+
+You cannot execute programs on an OFS (Old File System), since the
+program files cannot be memory mapped due to the 488 byte blocks.
+For the same reason you cannot mount an image on such a filesystem
+via the loopback device.
+
+The bitmap valid flag in the root block may not be accurate when the
+system crashes while an affs partition is mounted. There's currently
+no way to fix a garbled filesystem without an Amiga (disk validator)
+or manually (who would do this?). Maybe later.
+
+If you mount affs partitions on system startup, you may want to tell
+fsck that the fs should not be checked (place a '0' in the sixth field
+of /etc/fstab).
+
+It's not possible to read floppy disks with a normal PC or workstation
+due to an incompatibility with the Amiga floppy controller.
+
+If you are interested in an Amiga Emulator for Linux, look at
+
+http://web.archive.org/web/%2E/http://www.freiburg.linux.de/~uae/
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/afs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/afs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ca062a7f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/afs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+====================
+kAFS: AFS FILESYSTEM
+====================
+
+.. Contents:
+
+ - Overview.
+ - Usage.
+ - Mountpoints.
+ - Dynamic root.
+ - Proc filesystem.
+ - The cell database.
+ - Security.
+ - The @sys substitution.
+
+
+Overview
+========
+
+This filesystem provides a fairly simple secure AFS filesystem driver. It is
+under development and does not yet provide the full feature set.  The features
+it does support include:
+
+ (*) Security (currently only AFS kaserver and KerberosIV tickets).
+
+ (*) File reading and writing.
+
+ (*) Automounting.
+
+ (*) Local caching (via fscache).
+
+It does not yet support the following AFS features:
+
+ (*) pioctl() system call.
+
+
+Compilation
+===========
+
+The filesystem should be enabled by turning on the kernel configuration
+options::
+
+	CONFIG_AF_RXRPC		- The RxRPC protocol transport
+	CONFIG_RXKAD		- The RxRPC Kerberos security handler
+	CONFIG_AFS		- The AFS filesystem
+
+Additionally, the following can be turned on to aid debugging::
+
+	CONFIG_AF_RXRPC_DEBUG	- Permit AF_RXRPC debugging to be enabled
+	CONFIG_AFS_DEBUG	- Permit AFS debugging to be enabled
+
+They permit the debugging messages to be turned on dynamically by manipulating
+the masks in the following files::
+
+	/sys/module/af_rxrpc/parameters/debug
+	/sys/module/kafs/parameters/debug
+
+
+Usage
+=====
+
+When inserting the driver modules the root cell must be specified along with a
+list of volume location server IP addresses::
+
+	modprobe rxrpc
+	modprobe kafs rootcell=cambridge.redhat.com:172.16.18.73:172.16.18.91
+
+The first module is the AF_RXRPC network protocol driver.  This provides the
+RxRPC remote operation protocol and may also be accessed from userspace.  See:
+
+	Documentation/networking/rxrpc.rst
+
+The second module is the kerberos RxRPC security driver, and the third module
+is the actual filesystem driver for the AFS filesystem.
+
+Once the module has been loaded, more modules can be added by the following
+procedure::
+
+	echo add grand.central.org 18.9.48.14:128.2.203.61:130.237.48.87 >/proc/fs/afs/cells
+
+Where the parameters to the "add" command are the name of a cell and a list of
+volume location servers within that cell, with the latter separated by colons.
+
+Filesystems can be mounted anywhere by commands similar to the following::
+
+	mount -t afs "%cambridge.redhat.com:root.afs." /afs
+	mount -t afs "#cambridge.redhat.com:root.cell." /afs/cambridge
+	mount -t afs "#root.afs." /afs
+	mount -t afs "#root.cell." /afs/cambridge
+
+Where the initial character is either a hash or a percent symbol depending on
+whether you definitely want a R/W volume (percent) or whether you'd prefer a
+R/O volume, but are willing to use a R/W volume instead (hash).
+
+The name of the volume can be suffixes with ".backup" or ".readonly" to
+specify connection to only volumes of those types.
+
+The name of the cell is optional, and if not given during a mount, then the
+named volume will be looked up in the cell specified during modprobe.
+
+Additional cells can be added through /proc (see later section).
+
+
+Mountpoints
+===========
+
+AFS has a concept of mountpoints. In AFS terms, these are specially formatted
+symbolic links (of the same form as the "device name" passed to mount).  kAFS
+presents these to the user as directories that have a follow-link capability
+(i.e.: symbolic link semantics).  If anyone attempts to access them, they will
+automatically cause the target volume to be mounted (if possible) on that site.
+
+Automatically mounted filesystems will be automatically unmounted approximately
+twenty minutes after they were last used.  Alternatively they can be unmounted
+directly with the umount() system call.
+
+Manually unmounting an AFS volume will cause any idle submounts upon it to be
+culled first.  If all are culled, then the requested volume will also be
+unmounted, otherwise error EBUSY will be returned.
+
+This can be used by the administrator to attempt to unmount the whole AFS tree
+mounted on /afs in one go by doing::
+
+	umount /afs
+
+
+Dynamic Root
+============
+
+A mount option is available to create a serverless mount that is only usable
+for dynamic lookup.  Creating such a mount can be done by, for example::
+
+	mount -t afs none /afs -o dyn
+
+This creates a mount that just has an empty directory at the root.  Attempting
+to look up a name in this directory will cause a mountpoint to be created that
+looks up a cell of the same name, for example::
+
+	ls /afs/grand.central.org/
+
+
+Proc Filesystem
+===============
+
+The AFS module creates a "/proc/fs/afs/" directory and populates it:
+
+  (*) A "cells" file that lists cells currently known to the afs module and
+      their usage counts::
+
+	[root@andromeda ~]# cat /proc/fs/afs/cells
+	USE NAME
+	  3 cambridge.redhat.com
+
+  (*) A directory per cell that contains files that list volume location
+      servers, volumes, and active servers known within that cell::
+
+	[root@andromeda ~]# cat /proc/fs/afs/cambridge.redhat.com/servers
+	USE ADDR            STATE
+	  4 172.16.18.91        0
+	[root@andromeda ~]# cat /proc/fs/afs/cambridge.redhat.com/vlservers
+	ADDRESS
+	172.16.18.91
+	[root@andromeda ~]# cat /proc/fs/afs/cambridge.redhat.com/volumes
+	USE STT VLID[0]  VLID[1]  VLID[2]  NAME
+	  1 Val 20000000 20000001 20000002 root.afs
+
+
+The Cell Database
+=================
+
+The filesystem maintains an internal database of all the cells it knows and the
+IP addresses of the volume location servers for those cells.  The cell to which
+the system belongs is added to the database when modprobe is performed by the
+"rootcell=" argument or, if compiled in, using a "kafs.rootcell=" argument on
+the kernel command line.
+
+Further cells can be added by commands similar to the following::
+
+	echo add CELLNAME VLADDR[:VLADDR][:VLADDR]... >/proc/fs/afs/cells
+	echo add grand.central.org 18.9.48.14:128.2.203.61:130.237.48.87 >/proc/fs/afs/cells
+
+No other cell database operations are available at this time.
+
+
+Security
+========
+
+Secure operations are initiated by acquiring a key using the klog program.  A
+very primitive klog program is available at:
+
+	https://people.redhat.com/~dhowells/rxrpc/klog.c
+
+This should be compiled by::
+
+	make klog LDLIBS="-lcrypto -lcrypt -lkrb4 -lkeyutils"
+
+And then run as::
+
+	./klog
+
+Assuming it's successful, this adds a key of type RxRPC, named for the service
+and cell, e.g.: "afs@<cellname>".  This can be viewed with the keyctl program or
+by cat'ing /proc/keys::
+
+	[root@andromeda ~]# keyctl show
+	Session Keyring
+	       -3 --alswrv      0     0  keyring: _ses.3268
+		2 --alswrv      0     0   \_ keyring: _uid.0
+	111416553 --als--v      0     0   \_ rxrpc: afs@CAMBRIDGE.REDHAT.COM
+
+Currently the username, realm, password and proposed ticket lifetime are
+compiled into the program.
+
+It is not required to acquire a key before using AFS facilities, but if one is
+not acquired then all operations will be governed by the anonymous user parts
+of the ACLs.
+
+If a key is acquired, then all AFS operations, including mounts and automounts,
+made by a possessor of that key will be secured with that key.
+
+If a file is opened with a particular key and then the file descriptor is
+passed to a process that doesn't have that key (perhaps over an AF_UNIX
+socket), then the operations on the file will be made with key that was used to
+open the file.
+
+
+The @sys Substitution
+=====================
+
+The list of up to 16 @sys substitutions for the current network namespace can
+be configured by writing a list to /proc/fs/afs/sysname::
+
+	[root@andromeda ~]# echo foo amd64_linux_26 >/proc/fs/afs/sysname
+
+or cleared entirely by writing an empty list::
+
+	[root@andromeda ~]# echo >/proc/fs/afs/sysname
+
+The current list for current network namespace can be retrieved by::
+
+	[root@andromeda ~]# cat /proc/fs/afs/sysname
+	foo
+	amd64_linux_26
+
+When @sys is being substituted for, each element of the list is tried in the
+order given.
+
+By default, the list will contain one item that conforms to the pattern
+"<arch>_linux_26", amd64 being the name for x86_64.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/api-summary.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/api-summary.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..98db2ea5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/api-summary.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+=============================
+Linux Filesystems API summary
+=============================
+
+This section contains API-level documentation, mostly taken from the source
+code itself.
+
+The Linux VFS
+=============
+
+The Filesystem types
+--------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/fs.h
+   :internal:
+
+The Directory Cache
+-------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/dcache.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/dcache.h
+   :internal:
+
+Inode Handling
+--------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/inode.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/bad_inode.c
+   :export:
+
+Registration and Superblocks
+----------------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/super.c
+   :export:
+
+File Locks
+----------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/locks.c
+   :internal:
+
+Other Functions
+---------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/mpage.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/namei.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/buffer.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: block/bio.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/seq_file.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/filesystems.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/fs-writeback.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/anon_inodes.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/attr.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/d_path.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/dax.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/libfs.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/posix_acl.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/stat.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/sync.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/xattr.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/namespace.c
+   :export:
+
+The proc filesystem
+===================
+
+sysctl interface
+----------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: kernel/sysctl.c
+   :export:
+
+proc filesystem interface
+-------------------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/proc/base.c
+   :internal:
+
+Events based on file descriptors
+================================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/eventfd.c
+   :export:
+
+eventpoll (epoll) interfaces
+============================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/eventpoll.c
+   :internal:
+
+The Filesystem for Exporting Kernel Objects
+===========================================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/file.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/sysfs/symlink.c
+   :export:
+
+The debugfs filesystem
+======================
+
+debugfs interface
+-----------------
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/inode.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/debugfs/file.c
+   :export:
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs-mount-control.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs-mount-control.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b5a379d25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs-mount-control.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,410 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+====================================================================
+Miscellaneous Device control operations for the autofs kernel module
+====================================================================
+
+The problem
+===========
+
+There is a problem with active restarts in autofs (that is to say
+restarting autofs when there are busy mounts).
+
+During normal operation autofs uses a file descriptor opened on the
+directory that is being managed in order to be able to issue control
+operations. Using a file descriptor gives ioctl operations access to
+autofs specific information stored in the super block. The operations
+are things such as setting an autofs mount catatonic, setting the
+expire timeout and requesting expire checks. As is explained below,
+certain types of autofs triggered mounts can end up covering an autofs
+mount itself which prevents us being able to use open(2) to obtain a
+file descriptor for these operations if we don't already have one open.
+
+Currently autofs uses "umount -l" (lazy umount) to clear active mounts
+at restart. While using lazy umount works for most cases, anything that
+needs to walk back up the mount tree to construct a path, such as
+getcwd(2) and the proc file system /proc/<pid>/cwd, no longer works
+because the point from which the path is constructed has been detached
+from the mount tree.
+
+The actual problem with autofs is that it can't reconnect to existing
+mounts. Immediately one thinks of just adding the ability to remount
+autofs file systems would solve it, but alas, that can't work. This is
+because autofs direct mounts and the implementation of "on demand mount
+and expire" of nested mount trees have the file system mounted directly
+on top of the mount trigger directory dentry.
+
+For example, there are two types of automount maps, direct (in the kernel
+module source you will see a third type called an offset, which is just
+a direct mount in disguise) and indirect.
+
+Here is a master map with direct and indirect map entries::
+
+    /-      /etc/auto.direct
+    /test   /etc/auto.indirect
+
+and the corresponding map files::
+
+    /etc/auto.direct:
+
+    /automount/dparse/g6  budgie:/autofs/export1
+    /automount/dparse/g1  shark:/autofs/export1
+    and so on.
+
+/etc/auto.indirect::
+
+    g1    shark:/autofs/export1
+    g6    budgie:/autofs/export1
+    and so on.
+
+For the above indirect map an autofs file system is mounted on /test and
+mounts are triggered for each sub-directory key by the inode lookup
+operation. So we see a mount of shark:/autofs/export1 on /test/g1, for
+example.
+
+The way that direct mounts are handled is by making an autofs mount on
+each full path, such as /automount/dparse/g1, and using it as a mount
+trigger. So when we walk on the path we mount shark:/autofs/export1 "on
+top of this mount point". Since these are always directories we can
+use the follow_link inode operation to trigger the mount.
+
+But, each entry in direct and indirect maps can have offsets (making
+them multi-mount map entries).
+
+For example, an indirect mount map entry could also be::
+
+    g1  \
+    /        shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \
+    /s1      shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \
+    /s2      shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \
+    /s1/ss1  shark:/autofs/export1 \
+    /s2/ss2  shark:/autofs/export2
+
+and a similarly a direct mount map entry could also be::
+
+    /automount/dparse/g1 \
+	/       shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test \
+	/s1     shark:/autofs/export/testing/test/s1 \
+	/s2     shark:/autofs/export5/testing/test/s2 \
+	/s1/ss1 shark:/autofs/export2 \
+	/s2/ss2 shark:/autofs/export2
+
+One of the issues with version 4 of autofs was that, when mounting an
+entry with a large number of offsets, possibly with nesting, we needed
+to mount and umount all of the offsets as a single unit. Not really a
+problem, except for people with a large number of offsets in map entries.
+This mechanism is used for the well known "hosts" map and we have seen
+cases (in 2.4) where the available number of mounts are exhausted or
+where the number of privileged ports available is exhausted.
+
+In version 5 we mount only as we go down the tree of offsets and
+similarly for expiring them which resolves the above problem. There is
+somewhat more detail to the implementation but it isn't needed for the
+sake of the problem explanation. The one important detail is that these
+offsets are implemented using the same mechanism as the direct mounts
+above and so the mount points can be covered by a mount.
+
+The current autofs implementation uses an ioctl file descriptor opened
+on the mount point for control operations. The references held by the
+descriptor are accounted for in checks made to determine if a mount is
+in use and is also used to access autofs file system information held
+in the mount super block. So the use of a file handle needs to be
+retained.
+
+
+The Solution
+============
+
+To be able to restart autofs leaving existing direct, indirect and
+offset mounts in place we need to be able to obtain a file handle
+for these potentially covered autofs mount points. Rather than just
+implement an isolated operation it was decided to re-implement the
+existing ioctl interface and add new operations to provide this
+functionality.
+
+In addition, to be able to reconstruct a mount tree that has busy mounts,
+the uid and gid of the last user that triggered the mount needs to be
+available because these can be used as macro substitution variables in
+autofs maps. They are recorded at mount request time and an operation
+has been added to retrieve them.
+
+Since we're re-implementing the control interface, a couple of other
+problems with the existing interface have been addressed. First, when
+a mount or expire operation completes a status is returned to the
+kernel by either a "send ready" or a "send fail" operation. The
+"send fail" operation of the ioctl interface could only ever send
+ENOENT so the re-implementation allows user space to send an actual
+status. Another expensive operation in user space, for those using
+very large maps, is discovering if a mount is present. Usually this
+involves scanning /proc/mounts and since it needs to be done quite
+often it can introduce significant overhead when there are many entries
+in the mount table. An operation to lookup the mount status of a mount
+point dentry (covered or not) has also been added.
+
+Current kernel development policy recommends avoiding the use of the
+ioctl mechanism in favor of systems such as Netlink. An implementation
+using this system was attempted to evaluate its suitability and it was
+found to be inadequate, in this case. The Generic Netlink system was
+used for this as raw Netlink would lead to a significant increase in
+complexity. There's no question that the Generic Netlink system is an
+elegant solution for common case ioctl functions but it's not a complete
+replacement probably because its primary purpose in life is to be a
+message bus implementation rather than specifically an ioctl replacement.
+While it would be possible to work around this there is one concern
+that lead to the decision to not use it. This is that the autofs
+expire in the daemon has become far to complex because umount
+candidates are enumerated, almost for no other reason than to "count"
+the number of times to call the expire ioctl. This involves scanning
+the mount table which has proved to be a big overhead for users with
+large maps. The best way to improve this is try and get back to the
+way the expire was done long ago. That is, when an expire request is
+issued for a mount (file handle) we should continually call back to
+the daemon until we can't umount any more mounts, then return the
+appropriate status to the daemon. At the moment we just expire one
+mount at a time. A Generic Netlink implementation would exclude this
+possibility for future development due to the requirements of the
+message bus architecture.
+
+
+autofs Miscellaneous Device mount control interface
+====================================================
+
+The control interface is opening a device node, typically /dev/autofs.
+
+All the ioctls use a common structure to pass the needed parameter
+information and return operation results::
+
+    struct autofs_dev_ioctl {
+	    __u32 ver_major;
+	    __u32 ver_minor;
+	    __u32 size;             /* total size of data passed in
+				    * including this struct */
+	    __s32 ioctlfd;          /* automount command fd */
+
+	    /* Command parameters */
+	    union {
+		    struct args_protover		protover;
+		    struct args_protosubver		protosubver;
+		    struct args_openmount		openmount;
+		    struct args_ready		ready;
+		    struct args_fail		fail;
+		    struct args_setpipefd		setpipefd;
+		    struct args_timeout		timeout;
+		    struct args_requester		requester;
+		    struct args_expire		expire;
+		    struct args_askumount		askumount;
+		    struct args_ismountpoint	ismountpoint;
+	    };
+
+	    char path[];
+    };
+
+The ioctlfd field is a mount point file descriptor of an autofs mount
+point. It is returned by the open call and is used by all calls except
+the check for whether a given path is a mount point, where it may
+optionally be used to check a specific mount corresponding to a given
+mount point file descriptor, and when requesting the uid and gid of the
+last successful mount on a directory within the autofs file system.
+
+The union is used to communicate parameters and results of calls made
+as described below.
+
+The path field is used to pass a path where it is needed and the size field
+is used account for the increased structure length when translating the
+structure sent from user space.
+
+This structure can be initialized before setting specific fields by using
+the void function call init_autofs_dev_ioctl(``struct autofs_dev_ioctl *``).
+
+All of the ioctls perform a copy of this structure from user space to
+kernel space and return -EINVAL if the size parameter is smaller than
+the structure size itself, -ENOMEM if the kernel memory allocation fails
+or -EFAULT if the copy itself fails. Other checks include a version check
+of the compiled in user space version against the module version and a
+mismatch results in a -EINVAL return. If the size field is greater than
+the structure size then a path is assumed to be present and is checked to
+ensure it begins with a "/" and is NULL terminated, otherwise -EINVAL is
+returned. Following these checks, for all ioctl commands except
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION_CMD, AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT_CMD and
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT_CMD the ioctlfd is validated and if it is
+not a valid descriptor or doesn't correspond to an autofs mount point
+an error of -EBADF, -ENOTTY or -EINVAL (not an autofs descriptor) is
+returned.
+
+
+The ioctls
+==========
+
+An example of an implementation which uses this interface can be seen
+in autofs version 5.0.4 and later in file lib/dev-ioctl-lib.c of the
+distribution tar available for download from kernel.org in directory
+/pub/linux/daemons/autofs/v5.
+
+The device node ioctl operations implemented by this interface are:
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION
+------------------------
+
+Get the major and minor version of the autofs device ioctl kernel module
+implementation. It requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl as an
+input parameter and sets the version information in the passed in structure.
+It returns 0 on success or the error -EINVAL if a version mismatch is
+detected.
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOVER_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOSUBVER_CMD
+------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Get the major and minor version of the autofs protocol version understood
+by loaded module. This call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl
+with the ioctlfd field set to a valid autofs mount point descriptor
+and sets the requested version number in version field of struct args_protover
+or sub_version field of struct args_protosubver. These commands return
+0 on success or one of the negative error codes if validation fails.
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT
+----------------------------------------------------------
+
+Obtain and release a file descriptor for an autofs managed mount point
+path. The open call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with
+the path field set and the size field adjusted appropriately as well
+as the devid field of struct args_openmount set to the device number of
+the autofs mount. The device number can be obtained from the mount options
+shown in /proc/mounts. The close call requires an initialized struct
+autofs_dev_ioct with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained
+from the open call. The release of the file descriptor can also be done
+with close(2) so any open descriptors will also be closed at process exit.
+The close call is included in the implemented operations largely for
+completeness and to provide for a consistent user space implementation.
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_READY_CMD and AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_FAIL_CMD
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+Return mount and expire result status from user space to the kernel.
+Both of these calls require an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl
+with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open
+call and the token field of struct args_ready or struct args_fail set
+to the wait queue token number, received by user space in the foregoing
+mount or expire request. The status field of struct args_fail is set to
+the errno of the operation. It is set to 0 on success.
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_SETPIPEFD_CMD
+------------------------------
+
+Set the pipe file descriptor used for kernel communication to the daemon.
+Normally this is set at mount time using an option but when reconnecting
+to a existing mount we need to use this to tell the autofs mount about
+the new kernel pipe descriptor. In order to protect mounts against
+incorrectly setting the pipe descriptor we also require that the autofs
+mount be catatonic (see next call).
+
+The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
+ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and
+the pipefd field of struct args_setpipefd set to descriptor of the pipe.
+On success the call also sets the process group id used to identify the
+controlling process (eg. the owning automount(8) daemon) to the process
+group of the caller.
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CATATONIC_CMD
+------------------------------
+
+Make the autofs mount point catatonic. The autofs mount will no longer
+issue mount requests, the kernel communication pipe descriptor is released
+and any remaining waits in the queue released.
+
+The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
+ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call.
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_TIMEOUT_CMD
+----------------------------
+
+Set the expire timeout for mounts within an autofs mount point.
+
+The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
+ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call.
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_REQUESTER_CMD
+------------------------------
+
+Return the uid and gid of the last process to successfully trigger a the
+mount on the given path dentry.
+
+The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the path
+field set to the mount point in question and the size field adjusted
+appropriately. Upon return the uid field of struct args_requester contains
+the uid and gid field the gid.
+
+When reconstructing an autofs mount tree with active mounts we need to
+re-connect to mounts that may have used the original process uid and
+gid (or string variations of them) for mount lookups within the map entry.
+This call provides the ability to obtain this uid and gid so they may be
+used by user space for the mount map lookups.
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_EXPIRE_CMD
+---------------------------
+
+Issue an expire request to the kernel for an autofs mount. Typically
+this ioctl is called until no further expire candidates are found.
+
+The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
+ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. In
+addition an immediate expire that's independent of the mount timeout,
+and a forced expire that's independent of whether the mount is busy,
+can be requested by setting the how field of struct args_expire to
+AUTOFS_EXP_IMMEDIATE or AUTOFS_EXP_FORCED, respectively . If no
+expire candidates can be found the ioctl returns -1 with errno set to
+EAGAIN.
+
+This call causes the kernel module to check the mount corresponding
+to the given ioctlfd for mounts that can be expired, issues an expire
+request back to the daemon and waits for completion.
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ASKUMOUNT_CMD
+------------------------------
+
+Checks if an autofs mount point is in use.
+
+The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the
+ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call and
+it returns the result in the may_umount field of struct args_askumount,
+1 for busy and 0 otherwise.
+
+
+AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ISMOUNTPOINT_CMD
+---------------------------------
+
+Check if the given path is a mountpoint.
+
+The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl. There are two
+possible variations. Both use the path field set to the path of the mount
+point to check and the size field adjusted appropriately. One uses the
+ioctlfd field to identify a specific mount point to check while the other
+variation uses the path and optionally in.type field of struct args_ismountpoint
+set to an autofs mount type. The call returns 1 if this is a mount point
+and sets out.devid field to the device number of the mount and out.magic
+field to the relevant super block magic number (described below) or 0 if
+it isn't a mountpoint. In both cases the device number (as returned
+by new_encode_dev()) is returned in out.devid field.
+
+If supplied with a file descriptor we're looking for a specific mount,
+not necessarily at the top of the mounted stack. In this case the path
+the descriptor corresponds to is considered a mountpoint if it is itself
+a mountpoint or contains a mount, such as a multi-mount without a root
+mount. In this case we return 1 if the descriptor corresponds to a mount
+point and also returns the super magic of the covering mount if there
+is one or 0 if it isn't a mountpoint.
+
+If a path is supplied (and the ioctlfd field is set to -1) then the path
+is looked up and is checked to see if it is the root of a mount. If a
+type is also given we are looking for a particular autofs mount and if
+a match isn't found a fail is returned. If the located path is the
+root of a mount 1 is returned along with the super magic of the mount
+or 0 otherwise.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3b6e38e64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,580 @@
+=====================
+autofs - how it works
+=====================
+
+Purpose
+=======
+
+The goal of autofs is to provide on-demand mounting and race free
+automatic unmounting of various other filesystems.  This provides two
+key advantages:
+
+1. There is no need to delay boot until all filesystems that
+   might be needed are mounted.  Processes that try to access those
+   slow filesystems might be delayed but other processes can
+   continue freely.  This is particularly important for
+   network filesystems (e.g. NFS) or filesystems stored on
+   media with a media-changing robot.
+
+2. The names and locations of filesystems can be stored in
+   a remote database and can change at any time.  The content
+   in that data base at the time of access will be used to provide
+   a target for the access.  The interpretation of names in the
+   filesystem can even be programmatic rather than database-backed,
+   allowing wildcards for example, and can vary based on the user who
+   first accessed a name.
+
+Context
+=======
+
+The "autofs" filesystem module is only one part of an autofs system.
+There also needs to be a user-space program which looks up names
+and mounts filesystems.  This will often be the "automount" program,
+though other tools including "systemd" can make use of "autofs".
+This document describes only the kernel module and the interactions
+required with any user-space program.  Subsequent text refers to this
+as the "automount daemon" or simply "the daemon".
+
+"autofs" is a Linux kernel module which provides the "autofs"
+filesystem type.  Several "autofs" filesystems can be mounted and they
+can each be managed separately, or all managed by the same daemon.
+
+Content
+=======
+
+An autofs filesystem can contain 3 sorts of objects: directories,
+symbolic links and mount traps.  Mount traps are directories with
+extra properties as described in the next section.
+
+Objects can only be created by the automount daemon: symlinks are
+created with a regular `symlink` system call, while directories and
+mount traps are created with `mkdir`.  The determination of whether a
+directory should be a mount trap is based on a master map. This master
+map is consulted by autofs to determine which directories are mount
+points. Mount points can be *direct*/*indirect*/*offset*.
+On most systems, the default master map is located at */etc/auto.master*.
+
+If neither the *direct* or *offset* mount options are given (so the
+mount is considered to be *indirect*), then the root directory is
+always a regular directory, otherwise it is a mount trap when it is
+empty and a regular directory when not empty.  Note that *direct* and
+*offset* are treated identically so a concise summary is that the root
+directory is a mount trap only if the filesystem is mounted *direct*
+and the root is empty.
+
+Directories created in the root directory are mount traps only if the
+filesystem is mounted *indirect* and they are empty.
+
+Directories further down the tree depend on the *maxproto* mount
+option and particularly whether it is less than five or not.
+When *maxproto* is five, no directories further down the
+tree are ever mount traps, they are always regular directories.  When
+the *maxproto* is four (or three), these directories are mount traps
+precisely when they are empty.
+
+So: non-empty (i.e. non-leaf) directories are never mount traps. Empty
+directories are sometimes mount traps, and sometimes not depending on
+where in the tree they are (root, top level, or lower), the *maxproto*,
+and whether the mount was *indirect* or not.
+
+Mount Traps
+===========
+
+A core element of the implementation of autofs is the Mount Traps
+which are provided by the Linux VFS.  Any directory provided by a
+filesystem can be designated as a trap.  This involves two separate
+features that work together to allow autofs to do its job.
+
+**DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT**
+
+If a dentry has the DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT flag set (which gets set if
+the inode has S_AUTOMOUNT set, or can be set directly) then it is
+(potentially) a mount trap.  Any access to this directory beyond a
+"`stat`" will (normally) cause the `d_op->d_automount()` dentry operation
+to be called. The task of this method is to find the filesystem that
+should be mounted on the directory and to return it.  The VFS is
+responsible for actually mounting the root of this filesystem on the
+directory.
+
+autofs doesn't find the filesystem itself but sends a message to the
+automount daemon asking it to find and mount the filesystem.  The
+autofs `d_automount` method then waits for the daemon to report that
+everything is ready.  It will then return "`NULL`" indicating that the
+mount has already happened.  The VFS doesn't try to mount anything but
+follows down the mount that is already there.
+
+This functionality is sufficient for some users of mount traps such
+as NFS which creates traps so that mountpoints on the server can be
+reflected on the client.  However it is not sufficient for autofs.  As
+mounting onto a directory is considered to be "beyond a `stat`", the
+automount daemon would not be able to mount a filesystem on the 'trap'
+directory without some way to avoid getting caught in the trap.  For
+that purpose there is another flag.
+
+**DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT**
+
+If a dentry has DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT set then two very different but
+related behaviours are invoked, both using the `d_op->d_manage()`
+dentry operation.
+
+Firstly, before checking to see if any filesystem is mounted on the
+directory, d_manage() will be called with the `rcu_walk` parameter set
+to `false`.  It may return one of three things:
+
+-  A return value of zero indicates that there is nothing special
+   about this dentry and normal checks for mounts and automounts
+   should proceed.
+
+   autofs normally returns zero, but first waits for any
+   expiry (automatic unmounting of the mounted filesystem) to
+   complete.  This avoids races.
+
+-  A return value of `-EISDIR` tells the VFS to ignore any mounts
+   on the directory and to not consider calling `->d_automount()`.
+   This effectively disables the **DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT** flag
+   causing the directory not be a mount trap after all.
+
+   autofs returns this if it detects that the process performing the
+   lookup is the automount daemon and that the mount has been
+   requested but has not yet completed.  How it determines this is
+   discussed later.  This allows the automount daemon not to get
+   caught in the mount trap.
+
+   There is a subtlety here.  It is possible that a second autofs
+   filesystem can be mounted below the first and for both of them to
+   be managed by the same daemon.  For the daemon to be able to mount
+   something on the second it must be able to "walk" down past the
+   first.  This means that d_manage cannot *always* return -EISDIR for
+   the automount daemon.  It must only return it when a mount has
+   been requested, but has not yet completed.
+
+   `d_manage` also returns `-EISDIR` if the dentry shouldn't be a
+   mount trap, either because it is a symbolic link or because it is
+   not empty.
+
+-  Any other negative value is treated as an error and returned
+   to the caller.
+
+   autofs can return
+
+   - -ENOENT if the automount daemon failed to mount anything,
+   - -ENOMEM if it ran out of memory,
+   - -EINTR if a signal arrived while waiting for expiry to
+     complete
+   - or any other error sent down by the automount daemon.
+
+
+The second use case only occurs during an "RCU-walk" and so `rcu_walk`
+will be set.
+
+An RCU-walk is a fast and lightweight process for walking down a
+filename path (i.e. it is like running on tip-toes).  RCU-walk cannot
+cope with all situations so when it finds a difficulty it falls back
+to "REF-walk", which is slower but more robust.
+
+RCU-walk will never call `->d_automount`; the filesystems must already
+be mounted or RCU-walk cannot handle the path.
+To determine if a mount-trap is safe for RCU-walk mode it calls
+`->d_manage()` with `rcu_walk` set to `true`.
+
+In this case `d_manage()` must avoid blocking and should avoid taking
+spinlocks if at all possible.  Its sole purpose is to determine if it
+would be safe to follow down into any mounted directory and the only
+reason that it might not be is if an expiry of the mount is
+underway.
+
+In the `rcu_walk` case, `d_manage()` cannot return -EISDIR to tell the
+VFS that this is a directory that doesn't require d_automount.  If
+`rcu_walk` sees a dentry with DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT set but nothing
+mounted, it *will* fall back to REF-walk.  `d_manage()` cannot make the
+VFS remain in RCU-walk mode, but can only tell it to get out of
+RCU-walk mode by returning `-ECHILD`.
+
+So `d_manage()`, when called with `rcu_walk` set, should either return
+-ECHILD if there is any reason to believe it is unsafe to enter the
+mounted filesystem, otherwise it should return 0.
+
+autofs will return `-ECHILD` if an expiry of the filesystem has been
+initiated or is being considered, otherwise it returns 0.
+
+
+Mountpoint expiry
+=================
+
+The VFS has a mechanism for automatically expiring unused mounts,
+much as it can expire any unused dentry information from the dcache.
+This is guided by the MNT_SHRINKABLE flag.  This only applies to
+mounts that were created by `d_automount()` returning a filesystem to be
+mounted.  As autofs doesn't return such a filesystem but leaves the
+mounting to the automount daemon, it must involve the automount daemon
+in unmounting as well.  This also means that autofs has more control
+over expiry.
+
+The VFS also supports "expiry" of mounts using the MNT_EXPIRE flag to
+the `umount` system call.  Unmounting with MNT_EXPIRE will fail unless
+a previous attempt had been made, and the filesystem has been inactive
+and untouched since that previous attempt.  autofs does not depend on
+this but has its own internal tracking of whether filesystems were
+recently used.  This allows individual names in the autofs directory
+to expire separately.
+
+With version 4 of the protocol, the automount daemon can try to
+unmount any filesystems mounted on the autofs filesystem or remove any
+symbolic links or empty directories any time it likes.  If the unmount
+or removal is successful the filesystem will be returned to the state
+it was before the mount or creation, so that any access of the name
+will trigger normal auto-mount processing.  In particular, `rmdir` and
+`unlink` do not leave negative entries in the dcache as a normal
+filesystem would, so an attempt to access a recently-removed object is
+passed to autofs for handling.
+
+With version 5, this is not safe except for unmounting from top-level
+directories.  As lower-level directories are never mount traps, other
+processes will see an empty directory as soon as the filesystem is
+unmounted.  So it is generally safest to use the autofs expiry
+protocol described below.
+
+Normally the daemon only wants to remove entries which haven't been
+used for a while.  For this purpose autofs maintains a "`last_used`"
+time stamp on each directory or symlink.  For symlinks it genuinely
+does record the last time the symlink was "used" or followed to find
+out where it points to.  For directories the field is used slightly
+differently.  The field is updated at mount time and during expire
+checks if it is found to be in use (ie. open file descriptor or
+process working directory) and during path walks. The update done
+during path walks prevents frequent expire and immediate mount of
+frequently accessed automounts. But in the case where a GUI continually
+access or an application frequently scans an autofs directory tree
+there can be an accumulation of mounts that aren't actually being
+used. To cater for this case the "`strictexpire`" autofs mount option
+can be used to avoid the "`last_used`" update on path walk thereby
+preventing this apparent inability to expire mounts that aren't
+really in use.
+
+The daemon is able to ask autofs if anything is due to be expired,
+using an `ioctl` as discussed later.  For a *direct* mount, autofs
+considers if the entire mount-tree can be unmounted or not.  For an
+*indirect* mount, autofs considers each of the names in the top level
+directory to determine if any of those can be unmounted and cleaned
+up.
+
+There is an option with indirect mounts to consider each of the leaves
+that has been mounted on instead of considering the top-level names.
+This was originally intended for compatibility with version 4 of autofs
+and should be considered as deprecated for Sun Format automount maps.
+However, it may be used again for amd format mount maps (which are
+generally indirect maps) because the amd automounter allows for the
+setting of an expire timeout for individual mounts. But there are
+some difficulties in making the needed changes for this.
+
+When autofs considers a directory it checks the `last_used` time and
+compares it with the "timeout" value set when the filesystem was
+mounted, though this check is ignored in some cases. It also checks if
+the directory or anything below it is in use.  For symbolic links,
+only the `last_used` time is ever considered.
+
+If both appear to support expiring the directory or symlink, an action
+is taken.
+
+There are two ways to ask autofs to consider expiry.  The first is to
+use the **AUTOFS_IOC_EXPIRE** ioctl.  This only works for indirect
+mounts.  If it finds something in the root directory to expire it will
+return the name of that thing.  Once a name has been returned the
+automount daemon needs to unmount any filesystems mounted below the
+name normally.  As described above, this is unsafe for non-toplevel
+mounts in a version-5 autofs.  For this reason the current `automount(8)`
+does not use this ioctl.
+
+The second mechanism uses either the **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_EXPIRE_CMD** or
+the **AUTOFS_IOC_EXPIRE_MULTI** ioctl.  This will work for both direct and
+indirect mounts.  If it selects an object to expire, it will notify
+the daemon using the notification mechanism described below.  This
+will block until the daemon acknowledges the expiry notification.
+This implies that the "`EXPIRE`" ioctl must be sent from a different
+thread than the one which handles notification.
+
+While the ioctl is blocking, the entry is marked as "expiring" and
+`d_manage` will block until the daemon affirms that the unmount has
+completed (together with removing any directories that might have been
+necessary), or has been aborted.
+
+Communicating with autofs: detecting the daemon
+===============================================
+
+There are several forms of communication between the automount daemon
+and the filesystem.  As we have already seen, the daemon can create and
+remove directories and symlinks using normal filesystem operations.
+autofs knows whether a process requesting some operation is the daemon
+or not based on its process-group id number (see getpgid(1)).
+
+When an autofs filesystem is mounted the pgid of the mounting
+processes is recorded unless the "pgrp=" option is given, in which
+case that number is recorded instead.  Any request arriving from a
+process in that process group is considered to come from the daemon.
+If the daemon ever has to be stopped and restarted a new pgid can be
+provided through an ioctl as will be described below.
+
+Communicating with autofs: the event pipe
+=========================================
+
+When an autofs filesystem is mounted, the 'write' end of a pipe must
+be passed using the 'fd=' mount option.  autofs will write
+notification messages to this pipe for the daemon to respond to.
+For version 5, the format of the message is::
+
+	struct autofs_v5_packet {
+		struct autofs_packet_hdr hdr;
+		autofs_wqt_t wait_queue_token;
+		__u32 dev;
+		__u64 ino;
+		__u32 uid;
+		__u32 gid;
+		__u32 pid;
+		__u32 tgid;
+		__u32 len;
+		char name[NAME_MAX+1];
+        };
+
+And the format of the header is::
+
+	struct autofs_packet_hdr {
+		int proto_version;		/* Protocol version */
+		int type;			/* Type of packet */
+	};
+
+where the type is one of ::
+
+	autofs_ptype_missing_indirect
+	autofs_ptype_expire_indirect
+	autofs_ptype_missing_direct
+	autofs_ptype_expire_direct
+
+so messages can indicate that a name is missing (something tried to
+access it but it isn't there) or that it has been selected for expiry.
+
+The pipe will be set to "packet mode" (equivalent to passing
+`O_DIRECT`) to _pipe2(2)_ so that a read from the pipe will return at
+most one packet, and any unread portion of a packet will be discarded.
+
+The `wait_queue_token` is a unique number which can identify a
+particular request to be acknowledged.  When a message is sent over
+the pipe the affected dentry is marked as either "active" or
+"expiring" and other accesses to it block until the message is
+acknowledged using one of the ioctls below with the relevant
+`wait_queue_token`.
+
+Communicating with autofs: root directory ioctls
+================================================
+
+The root directory of an autofs filesystem will respond to a number of
+ioctls.  The process issuing the ioctl must have the CAP_SYS_ADMIN
+capability, or must be the automount daemon.
+
+The available ioctl commands are:
+
+- **AUTOFS_IOC_READY**:
+	a notification has been handled.  The argument
+	to the ioctl command is the "wait_queue_token" number
+	corresponding to the notification being acknowledged.
+- **AUTOFS_IOC_FAIL**:
+	similar to above, but indicates failure with
+	the error code `ENOENT`.
+- **AUTOFS_IOC_CATATONIC**:
+	Causes the autofs to enter "catatonic"
+	mode meaning that it stops sending notifications to the daemon.
+	This mode is also entered if a write to the pipe fails.
+- **AUTOFS_IOC_PROTOVER**:
+	This returns the protocol version in use.
+- **AUTOFS_IOC_PROTOSUBVER**:
+	Returns the protocol sub-version which
+	is really a version number for the implementation.
+- **AUTOFS_IOC_SETTIMEOUT**:
+	This passes a pointer to an unsigned
+	long.  The value is used to set the timeout for expiry, and
+	the current timeout value is stored back through the pointer.
+- **AUTOFS_IOC_ASKUMOUNT**:
+	Returns, in the pointed-to `int`, 1 if
+	the filesystem could be unmounted.  This is only a hint as
+	the situation could change at any instant.  This call can be
+	used to avoid a more expensive full unmount attempt.
+- **AUTOFS_IOC_EXPIRE**:
+	as described above, this asks if there is
+	anything suitable to expire.  A pointer to a packet::
+
+		struct autofs_packet_expire_multi {
+			struct autofs_packet_hdr hdr;
+			autofs_wqt_t wait_queue_token;
+			int len;
+			char name[NAME_MAX+1];
+		};
+
+	is required.  This is filled in with the name of something
+	that can be unmounted or removed.  If nothing can be expired,
+	`errno` is set to `EAGAIN`.  Even though a `wait_queue_token`
+	is present in the structure, no "wait queue" is established
+	and no acknowledgment is needed.
+- **AUTOFS_IOC_EXPIRE_MULTI**:
+	This is similar to
+	**AUTOFS_IOC_EXPIRE** except that it causes notification to be
+	sent to the daemon, and it blocks until the daemon acknowledges.
+	The argument is an integer which can contain two different flags.
+
+	**AUTOFS_EXP_IMMEDIATE** causes `last_used` time to be ignored
+	and objects are expired if the are not in use.
+
+	**AUTOFS_EXP_FORCED** causes the in use status to be ignored
+	and objects are expired ieven if they are in use. This assumes
+	that the daemon has requested this because it is capable of
+	performing the umount.
+
+	**AUTOFS_EXP_LEAVES** will select a leaf rather than a top-level
+	name to expire.  This is only safe when *maxproto* is 4.
+
+Communicating with autofs: char-device ioctls
+=============================================
+
+It is not always possible to open the root of an autofs filesystem,
+particularly a *direct* mounted filesystem.  If the automount daemon
+is restarted there is no way for it to regain control of existing
+mounts using any of the above communication channels.  To address this
+need there is a "miscellaneous" character device (major 10, minor 235)
+which can be used to communicate directly with the autofs filesystem.
+It requires CAP_SYS_ADMIN for access.
+
+The 'ioctl's that can be used on this device are described in a separate
+document `autofs-mount-control.txt`, and are summarised briefly here.
+Each ioctl is passed a pointer to an `autofs_dev_ioctl` structure::
+
+        struct autofs_dev_ioctl {
+                __u32 ver_major;
+                __u32 ver_minor;
+                __u32 size;             /* total size of data passed in
+                                         * including this struct */
+                __s32 ioctlfd;          /* automount command fd */
+
+		/* Command parameters */
+		union {
+			struct args_protover		protover;
+			struct args_protosubver		protosubver;
+			struct args_openmount		openmount;
+			struct args_ready		ready;
+			struct args_fail		fail;
+			struct args_setpipefd		setpipefd;
+			struct args_timeout		timeout;
+			struct args_requester		requester;
+			struct args_expire		expire;
+			struct args_askumount		askumount;
+			struct args_ismountpoint	ismountpoint;
+		};
+
+                char path[];
+        };
+
+For the **OPEN_MOUNT** and **IS_MOUNTPOINT** commands, the target
+filesystem is identified by the `path`.  All other commands identify
+the filesystem by the `ioctlfd` which is a file descriptor open on the
+root, and which can be returned by **OPEN_MOUNT**.
+
+The `ver_major` and `ver_minor` are in/out parameters which check that
+the requested version is supported, and report the maximum version
+that the kernel module can support.
+
+Commands are:
+
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_VERSION_CMD**:
+	does nothing, except validate and
+	set version numbers.
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT_CMD**:
+	return an open file descriptor
+	on the root of an autofs filesystem.  The filesystem is identified
+	by name and device number, which is stored in `openmount.devid`.
+	Device numbers for existing filesystems can be found in
+	`/proc/self/mountinfo`.
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CLOSEMOUNT_CMD**:
+	same as `close(ioctlfd)`.
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_SETPIPEFD_CMD**:
+	if the filesystem is in
+	catatonic mode, this can provide the write end of a new pipe
+	in `setpipefd.pipefd` to re-establish communication with a daemon.
+	The process group of the calling process is used to identify the
+	daemon.
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_REQUESTER_CMD**:
+	`path` should be a
+	name within the filesystem that has been auto-mounted on.
+	On successful return, `requester.uid` and `requester.gid` will be
+	the UID and GID of the process which triggered that mount.
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ISMOUNTPOINT_CMD**:
+	Check if path is a
+	mountpoint of a particular type - see separate documentation for
+	details.
+
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOVER_CMD**
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_PROTOSUBVER_CMD**
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_READY_CMD**
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_FAIL_CMD**
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_CATATONIC_CMD**
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_TIMEOUT_CMD**
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_EXPIRE_CMD**
+- **AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_ASKUMOUNT_CMD**
+
+These all have the same
+function as the similarly named **AUTOFS_IOC** ioctls, except
+that **FAIL** can be given an explicit error number in `fail.status`
+instead of assuming `ENOENT`, and this **EXPIRE** command
+corresponds to **AUTOFS_IOC_EXPIRE_MULTI**.
+
+Catatonic mode
+==============
+
+As mentioned, an autofs mount can enter "catatonic" mode.  This
+happens if a write to the notification pipe fails, or if it is
+explicitly requested by an `ioctl`.
+
+When entering catatonic mode, the pipe is closed and any pending
+notifications are acknowledged with the error `ENOENT`.
+
+Once in catatonic mode attempts to access non-existing names will
+result in `ENOENT` while attempts to access existing directories will
+be treated in the same way as if they came from the daemon, so mount
+traps will not fire.
+
+When the filesystem is mounted a _uid_ and _gid_ can be given which
+set the ownership of directories and symbolic links.  When the
+filesystem is in catatonic mode, any process with a matching UID can
+create directories or symlinks in the root directory, but not in other
+directories.
+
+Catatonic mode can only be left via the
+**AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_OPENMOUNT_CMD** ioctl on the `/dev/autofs`.
+
+The "ignore" mount option
+=========================
+
+The "ignore" mount option can be used to provide a generic indicator
+to applications that the mount entry should be ignored when displaying
+mount information.
+
+In other OSes that provide autofs and that provide a mount list to user
+space based on the kernel mount list a no-op mount option ("ignore" is
+the one use on the most common OSes) is allowed so that autofs file
+system users can optionally use it.
+
+This is intended to be used by user space programs to exclude autofs
+mounts from consideration when reading the mounts list.
+
+autofs, name spaces, and shared mounts
+======================================
+
+With bind mounts and name spaces it is possible for an autofs
+filesystem to appear at multiple places in one or more filesystem
+name spaces.  For this to work sensibly, the autofs filesystem should
+always be mounted "shared". e.g. ::
+
+	mount --make-shared /autofs/mount/point
+
+The automount daemon is only able to manage a single mount location for
+an autofs filesystem and if mounts on that are not 'shared', other
+locations will not behave as expected.  In particular access to those
+other locations will likely result in the `ELOOP` error ::
+
+	Too many levels of symbolic links
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/automount-support.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/automount-support.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..430f0b407
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/automount-support.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=================
+Automount Support
+=================
+
+
+Support is available for filesystems that wish to do automounting
+support (such as kAFS which can be found in fs/afs/ and NFS in
+fs/nfs/). This facility includes allowing in-kernel mounts to be
+performed and mountpoint degradation to be requested. The latter can
+also be requested by userspace.
+
+
+In-Kernel Automounting
+======================
+
+See section "Mount Traps" of  Documentation/filesystems/autofs.rst
+
+Then from userspace, you can just do something like::
+
+	[root@andromeda root]# mount -t afs \#root.afs. /afs
+	[root@andromeda root]# ls /afs
+	asd  cambridge  cambridge.redhat.com  grand.central.org
+	[root@andromeda root]# ls /afs/cambridge
+	afsdoc
+	[root@andromeda root]# ls /afs/cambridge/afsdoc/
+	ChangeLog  html  LICENSE  pdf  RELNOTES-1.2.2
+
+And then if you look in the mountpoint catalogue, you'll see something like::
+
+	[root@andromeda root]# cat /proc/mounts
+	...
+	#root.afs. /afs afs rw 0 0
+	#root.cell. /afs/cambridge.redhat.com afs rw 0 0
+	#afsdoc. /afs/cambridge.redhat.com/afsdoc afs rw 0 0
+
+
+Automatic Mountpoint Expiry
+===========================
+
+Automatic expiration of mountpoints is easy, provided you've mounted the
+mountpoint to be expired in the automounting procedure outlined separately.
+
+To do expiration, you need to follow these steps:
+
+ (1) Create at least one list off which the vfsmounts to be expired can be
+     hung.
+
+ (2) When a new mountpoint is created in the ->d_automount method, add
+     the mnt to the list using mnt_set_expiry()::
+
+             mnt_set_expiry(newmnt, &afs_vfsmounts);
+
+ (3) When you want mountpoints to be expired, call mark_mounts_for_expiry()
+     with a pointer to this list. This will process the list, marking every
+     vfsmount thereon for potential expiry on the next call.
+
+     If a vfsmount was already flagged for expiry, and if its usage count is 1
+     (it's only referenced by its parent vfsmount), then it will be deleted
+     from the namespace and thrown away (effectively unmounted).
+
+     It may prove simplest to simply call this at regular intervals, using
+     some sort of timed event to drive it.
+
+The expiration flag is cleared by calls to mntput. This means that expiration
+will only happen on the second expiration request after the last time the
+mountpoint was accessed.
+
+If a mountpoint is moved, it gets removed from the expiration list. If a bind
+mount is made on an expirable mount, the new vfsmount will not be on the
+expiration list and will not expire.
+
+If a namespace is copied, all mountpoints contained therein will be copied,
+and the copies of those that are on an expiration list will be added to the
+same expiration list.
+
+
+Userspace Driven Expiry
+=======================
+
+As an alternative, it is possible for userspace to request expiry of any
+mountpoint (though some will be rejected - the current process's idea of the
+rootfs for example). It does this by passing the MNT_EXPIRE flag to
+umount(). This flag is considered incompatible with MNT_FORCE and MNT_DETACH.
+
+If the mountpoint in question is in referenced by something other than
+umount() or its parent mountpoint, an EBUSY error will be returned and the
+mountpoint will not be marked for expiration or unmounted.
+
+If the mountpoint was not already marked for expiry at that time, an EAGAIN
+error will be given and it won't be unmounted.
+
+Otherwise if it was already marked and it wasn't referenced, unmounting will
+take place as usual.
+
+Again, the expiration flag is cleared every time anything other than umount()
+looks at a mountpoint.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/befs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/befs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..79f9740d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/befs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================
+BeOS filesystem for Linux
+=========================
+
+Document last updated: Dec 6, 2001
+
+Warning
+=======
+Make sure you understand that this is alpha software.  This means that the
+implementation is neither complete nor well-tested.
+
+I DISCLAIM ALL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY POSSIBLE BAD EFFECTS OF THIS CODE!
+
+License
+=======
+This software is covered by the GNU General Public License.
+See the file COPYING for the complete text of the license.
+Or the GNU website: <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/licenses.html>
+
+Author
+======
+The largest part of the code written by Will Dyson <will_dyson@pobox.com>
+He has been working on the code since Aug 13, 2001. See the changelog for
+details.
+
+Original Author: Makoto Kato <m_kato@ga2.so-net.ne.jp>
+
+His original code can still be found at:
+<http://hp.vector.co.jp/authors/VA008030/bfs/>
+
+Does anyone know of a more current email address for Makoto? He doesn't
+respond to the address given above...
+
+This filesystem doesn't have a maintainer.
+
+What is this Driver?
+====================
+This module implements the native filesystem of BeOS http://www.beincorporated.com/
+for the linux 2.4.1 and later kernels. Currently it is a read-only
+implementation.
+
+Which is it, BFS or BEFS?
+=========================
+Be, Inc said, "BeOS Filesystem is officially called BFS, not BeFS".
+But Unixware Boot Filesystem is called bfs, too. And they are already in
+the kernel. Because of this naming conflict, on Linux the BeOS
+filesystem is called befs.
+
+How to Install
+==============
+step 1.  Install the BeFS  patch into the source code tree of linux.
+
+Apply the patchfile to your kernel source tree.
+Assuming that your kernel source is in /foo/bar/linux and the patchfile
+is called patch-befs-xxx, you would do the following:
+
+	cd /foo/bar/linux
+	patch -p1 < /path/to/patch-befs-xxx
+
+if the patching step fails (i.e. there are rejected hunks), you can try to
+figure it out yourself (it shouldn't be hard), or mail the maintainer
+(Will Dyson <will_dyson@pobox.com>) for help.
+
+step 2.  Configuration & make kernel
+
+The linux kernel has many compile-time options. Most of them are beyond the
+scope of this document. I suggest the Kernel-HOWTO document as a good general
+reference on this topic. http://www.linuxdocs.org/HOWTOs/Kernel-HOWTO-4.html
+
+However, to use the BeFS module, you must enable it at configure time::
+
+	cd /foo/bar/linux
+	make menuconfig (or xconfig)
+
+The BeFS module is not a standard part of the linux kernel, so you must first
+enable support for experimental code under the "Code maturity level" menu.
+
+Then, under the "Filesystems" menu will be an option called "BeFS
+filesystem (experimental)", or something like that. Enable that option
+(it is fine to make it a module).
+
+Save your kernel configuration and then build your kernel.
+
+step 3.  Install
+
+See the kernel howto <http://www.linux.com/howto/Kernel-HOWTO.html> for
+instructions on this critical step.
+
+Using BFS
+=========
+To use the BeOS filesystem, use filesystem type 'befs'.
+
+ex::
+
+    mount -t befs /dev/fd0 /beos
+
+Mount Options
+=============
+
+=============  ===========================================================
+uid=nnn        All files in the partition will be owned by user id nnn.
+gid=nnn	       All files in the partition will be in group nnn.
+iocharset=xxx  Use xxx as the name of the NLS translation table.
+debug          The driver will output debugging information to the syslog.
+=============  ===========================================================
+
+How to Get Lastest Version
+==========================
+
+The latest version is currently available at:
+<http://befs-driver.sourceforge.net/>
+
+Any Known Bugs?
+===============
+As of Jan 20, 2002:
+
+	None
+
+Special Thanks
+==============
+Dominic Giampalo ... Writing "Practical file system design with Be filesystem"
+
+Hiroyuki Yamada  ... Testing LinuxPPC.
+
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ce14b9018
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+========================
+BFS Filesystem for Linux
+========================
+
+The BFS filesystem is used by SCO UnixWare OS for the /stand slice, which
+usually contains the kernel image and a few other files required for the
+boot process.
+
+In order to access /stand partition under Linux you obviously need to
+know the partition number and the kernel must support UnixWare disk slices
+(CONFIG_UNIXWARE_DISKLABEL config option). However BFS support does not
+depend on having UnixWare disklabel support because one can also mount
+BFS filesystem via loopback::
+
+    # losetup /dev/loop0 stand.img
+    # mount -t bfs /dev/loop0 /mnt/stand
+
+where stand.img is a file containing the image of BFS filesystem.
+When you have finished using it and umounted you need to also deallocate
+/dev/loop0 device by::
+
+    # losetup -d /dev/loop0
+
+You can simplify mounting by just typing::
+
+    # mount -t bfs -o loop stand.img /mnt/stand
+
+this will allocate the first available loopback device (and load loop.o
+kernel module if necessary) automatically. If the loopback driver is not
+loaded automatically, make sure that you have compiled the module and
+that modprobe is functioning. Beware that umount will not deallocate
+/dev/loopN device if /etc/mtab file on your system is a symbolic link to
+/proc/mounts. You will need to do it manually using "-d" switch of
+losetup(8). Read losetup(8) manpage for more info.
+
+To create the BFS image under UnixWare you need to find out first which
+slice contains it. The command prtvtoc(1M) is your friend::
+
+    # prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/c0b0t0d0s0
+
+(assuming your root disk is on target=0, lun=0, bus=0, controller=0). Then you
+look for the slice with tag "STAND", which is usually slice 10. With this
+information you can use dd(1) to create the BFS image::
+
+    # umount /stand
+    # dd if=/dev/rdsk/c0b0t0d0sa of=stand.img bs=512
+
+Just in case, you can verify that you have done the right thing by checking
+the magic number::
+
+    # od -Ad -tx4 stand.img | more
+
+The first 4 bytes should be 0x1badface.
+
+If you have any patches, questions or suggestions regarding this BFS
+implementation please contact the author:
+
+Tigran Aivazian <aivazian.tigran@gmail.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..992eddb0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====
+BTRFS
+=====
+
+Btrfs is a copy on write filesystem for Linux aimed at implementing advanced
+features while focusing on fault tolerance, repair and easy administration.
+Jointly developed by several companies, licensed under the GPL and open for
+contribution from anyone.
+
+The main Btrfs features include:
+
+    * Extent based file storage (2^64 max file size)
+    * Space efficient packing of small files
+    * Space efficient indexed directories
+    * Dynamic inode allocation
+    * Writable snapshots
+    * Subvolumes (separate internal filesystem roots)
+    * Object level mirroring and striping
+    * Checksums on data and metadata (multiple algorithms available)
+    * Compression (multiple algorithms available)
+    * Reflink, deduplication
+    * Scrub (on-line checksum verification)
+    * Hierarchical quota groups (subvolume and snapshot support)
+    * Integrated multiple device support, with several raid algorithms
+    * Offline filesystem check
+    * Efficient incremental backup and FS mirroring (send/receive)
+    * Trim/discard
+    * Online filesystem defragmentation
+    * Swapfile support
+    * Zoned mode
+    * Read/write metadata verification
+    * Online resize (shrink, grow)
+
+For more information please refer to the documentation site or wiki
+
+  https://btrfs.readthedocs.io
+
+  https://btrfs.wiki.kernel.org
+
+that maintains information about administration tasks, frequently asked
+questions, use cases, mount options, comprehensible changelogs, features,
+manual pages, source code repositories, contacts etc.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3a199fc50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,479 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=================
+Cache Backend API
+=================
+
+The FS-Cache system provides an API by which actual caches can be supplied to
+FS-Cache for it to then serve out to network filesystems and other interested
+parties.  This API is used by::
+
+	#include <linux/fscache-cache.h>.
+
+
+Overview
+========
+
+Interaction with the API is handled on three levels: cache, volume and data
+storage, and each level has its own type of cookie object:
+
+	=======================	=======================
+	COOKIE			C TYPE
+	=======================	=======================
+	Cache cookie		struct fscache_cache
+	Volume cookie		struct fscache_volume
+	Data storage cookie	struct fscache_cookie
+	=======================	=======================
+
+Cookies are used to provide some filesystem data to the cache, manage state and
+pin the cache during access in addition to acting as reference points for the
+API functions.  Each cookie has a debugging ID that is included in trace points
+to make it easier to correlate traces.  Note, though, that debugging IDs are
+simply allocated from incrementing counters and will eventually wrap.
+
+The cache backend and the network filesystem can both ask for cache cookies -
+and if they ask for one of the same name, they'll get the same cookie.  Volume
+and data cookies, however, are created at the behest of the filesystem only.
+
+
+Cache Cookies
+=============
+
+Caches are represented in the API by cache cookies.  These are objects of
+type::
+
+	struct fscache_cache {
+		void		*cache_priv;
+		unsigned int	debug_id;
+		char		*name;
+		...
+	};
+
+There are a few fields that the cache backend might be interested in.  The
+``debug_id`` can be used in tracing to match lines referring to the same cache
+and ``name`` is the name the cache was registered with.  The ``cache_priv``
+member is private data provided by the cache when it is brought online.  The
+other fields are for internal use.
+
+
+Registering a Cache
+===================
+
+When a cache backend wants to bring a cache online, it should first register
+the cache name and that will get it a cache cookie.  This is done with::
+
+	struct fscache_cache *fscache_acquire_cache(const char *name);
+
+This will look up and potentially create a cache cookie.  The cache cookie may
+have already been created by a network filesystem looking for it, in which case
+that cache cookie will be used.  If the cache cookie is not in use by another
+cache, it will be moved into the preparing state, otherwise it will return
+busy.
+
+If successful, the cache backend can then start setting up the cache.  In the
+event that the initialisation fails, the cache backend should call::
+
+	void fscache_relinquish_cache(struct fscache_cache *cache);
+
+to reset and discard the cookie.
+
+
+Bringing a Cache Online
+=======================
+
+Once the cache is set up, it can be brought online by calling::
+
+	int fscache_add_cache(struct fscache_cache *cache,
+			      const struct fscache_cache_ops *ops,
+			      void *cache_priv);
+
+This stores the cache operations table pointer and cache private data into the
+cache cookie and moves the cache to the active state, thereby allowing accesses
+to take place.
+
+
+Withdrawing a Cache From Service
+================================
+
+The cache backend can withdraw a cache from service by calling this function::
+
+	void fscache_withdraw_cache(struct fscache_cache *cache);
+
+This moves the cache to the withdrawn state to prevent new cache- and
+volume-level accesses from starting and then waits for outstanding cache-level
+accesses to complete.
+
+The cache must then go through the data storage objects it has and tell fscache
+to withdraw them, calling::
+
+	void fscache_withdraw_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+on the cookie that each object belongs to.  This schedules the specified cookie
+for withdrawal.  This gets offloaded to a workqueue.  The cache backend can
+wait for completion by calling::
+
+	void fscache_wait_for_objects(struct fscache_cache *cache);
+
+Once all the cookies are withdrawn, a cache backend can withdraw all the
+volumes, calling::
+
+	void fscache_withdraw_volume(struct fscache_volume *volume);
+
+to tell fscache that a volume has been withdrawn.  This waits for all
+outstanding accesses on the volume to complete before returning.
+
+When the cache is completely withdrawn, fscache should be notified by
+calling::
+
+	void fscache_relinquish_cache(struct fscache_cache *cache);
+
+to clear fields in the cookie and discard the caller's ref on it.
+
+
+Volume Cookies
+==============
+
+Within a cache, the data storage objects are organised into logical volumes.
+These are represented in the API as objects of type::
+
+	struct fscache_volume {
+		struct fscache_cache		*cache;
+		void				*cache_priv;
+		unsigned int			debug_id;
+		char				*key;
+		unsigned int			key_hash;
+		...
+		u8				coherency_len;
+		u8				coherency[];
+	};
+
+There are a number of fields here that are of interest to the caching backend:
+
+   * ``cache`` - The parent cache cookie.
+
+   * ``cache_priv`` - A place for the cache to stash private data.
+
+   * ``debug_id`` - A debugging ID for logging in tracepoints.
+
+   * ``key`` - A printable string with no '/' characters in it that represents
+     the index key for the volume.  The key is NUL-terminated and padded out to
+     a multiple of 4 bytes.
+
+   * ``key_hash`` - A hash of the index key.  This should work out the same, no
+     matter the cpu arch and endianness.
+
+   * ``coherency`` - A piece of coherency data that should be checked when the
+     volume is bound to in the cache.
+
+   * ``coherency_len`` - The amount of data in the coherency buffer.
+
+
+Data Storage Cookies
+====================
+
+A volume is a logical group of data storage objects, each of which is
+represented to the network filesystem by a cookie.  Cookies are represented in
+the API as objects of type::
+
+	struct fscache_cookie {
+		struct fscache_volume		*volume;
+		void				*cache_priv;
+		unsigned long			flags;
+		unsigned int			debug_id;
+		unsigned int			inval_counter;
+		loff_t				object_size;
+		u8				advice;
+		u32				key_hash;
+		u8				key_len;
+		u8				aux_len;
+		...
+	};
+
+The fields in the cookie that are of interest to the cache backend are:
+
+   * ``volume`` - The parent volume cookie.
+
+   * ``cache_priv`` - A place for the cache to stash private data.
+
+   * ``flags`` - A collection of bit flags, including:
+
+      * FSCACHE_COOKIE_NO_DATA_TO_READ - There is no data available in the
+	cache to be read as the cookie has been created or invalidated.
+
+      * FSCACHE_COOKIE_NEEDS_UPDATE - The coherency data and/or object size has
+	been changed and needs committing.
+
+      * FSCACHE_COOKIE_LOCAL_WRITE - The netfs's data has been modified
+	locally, so the cache object may be in an incoherent state with respect
+	to the server.
+
+      * FSCACHE_COOKIE_HAVE_DATA - The backend should set this if it
+	successfully stores data into the cache.
+
+      * FSCACHE_COOKIE_RETIRED - The cookie was invalidated when it was
+	relinquished and the cached data should be discarded.
+
+   * ``debug_id`` - A debugging ID for logging in tracepoints.
+
+   * ``inval_counter`` - The number of invalidations done on the cookie.
+
+   * ``advice`` - Information about how the cookie is to be used.
+
+   * ``key_hash`` - A hash of the index key.  This should work out the same, no
+     matter the cpu arch and endianness.
+
+   * ``key_len`` - The length of the index key.
+
+   * ``aux_len`` - The length of the coherency data buffer.
+
+Each cookie has an index key, which may be stored inline to the cookie or
+elsewhere.  A pointer to this can be obtained by calling::
+
+	void *fscache_get_key(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+The index key is a binary blob, the storage for which is padded out to a
+multiple of 4 bytes.
+
+Each cookie also has a buffer for coherency data.  This may also be inline or
+detached from the cookie and a pointer is obtained by calling::
+
+	void *fscache_get_aux(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+
+
+Cookie Accounting
+=================
+
+Data storage cookies are counted and this is used to block cache withdrawal
+completion until all objects have been destroyed.  The following functions are
+provided to the cache to deal with that::
+
+	void fscache_count_object(struct fscache_cache *cache);
+	void fscache_uncount_object(struct fscache_cache *cache);
+	void fscache_wait_for_objects(struct fscache_cache *cache);
+
+The count function records the allocation of an object in a cache and the
+uncount function records its destruction.  Warning: by the time the uncount
+function returns, the cache may have been destroyed.
+
+The wait function can be used during the withdrawal procedure to wait for
+fscache to finish withdrawing all the objects in the cache.  When it completes,
+there will be no remaining objects referring to the cache object or any volume
+objects.
+
+
+Cache Management API
+====================
+
+The cache backend implements the cache management API by providing a table of
+operations that fscache can use to manage various aspects of the cache.  These
+are held in a structure of type::
+
+	struct fscache_cache_ops {
+		const char *name;
+		...
+	};
+
+This contains a printable name for the cache backend driver plus a number of
+pointers to methods to allow fscache to request management of the cache:
+
+   * Set up a volume cookie [optional]::
+
+	void (*acquire_volume)(struct fscache_volume *volume);
+
+     This method is called when a volume cookie is being created.  The caller
+     holds a cache-level access pin to prevent the cache from going away for
+     the duration.  This method should set up the resources to access a volume
+     in the cache and should not return until it has done so.
+
+     If successful, it can set ``cache_priv`` to its own data.
+
+
+   * Clean up volume cookie [optional]::
+
+       void (*free_volume)(struct fscache_volume *volume);
+
+     This method is called when a volume cookie is being released if
+     ``cache_priv`` is set.
+
+
+   * Look up a cookie in the cache [mandatory]::
+
+	bool (*lookup_cookie)(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+     This method is called to look up/create the resources needed to access the
+     data storage for a cookie.  It is called from a worker thread with a
+     volume-level access pin in the cache to prevent it from being withdrawn.
+
+     True should be returned if successful and false otherwise.  If false is
+     returned, the withdraw_cookie op (see below) will be called.
+
+     If lookup fails, but the object could still be created (e.g. it hasn't
+     been cached before), then::
+
+		void fscache_cookie_lookup_negative(
+			struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+     can be called to let the network filesystem proceed and start downloading
+     stuff whilst the cache backend gets on with the job of creating things.
+
+     If successful, ``cookie->cache_priv`` can be set.
+
+
+   * Withdraw an object without any cookie access counts held [mandatory]::
+
+	void (*withdraw_cookie)(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+     This method is called to withdraw a cookie from service.  It will be
+     called when the cookie is relinquished by the netfs, withdrawn or culled
+     by the cache backend or closed after a period of non-use by fscache.
+
+     The caller doesn't hold any access pins, but it is called from a
+     non-reentrant work item to manage races between the various ways
+     withdrawal can occur.
+
+     The cookie will have the ``FSCACHE_COOKIE_RETIRED`` flag set on it if the
+     associated data is to be removed from the cache.
+
+
+   * Change the size of a data storage object [mandatory]::
+
+	void (*resize_cookie)(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+			      loff_t new_size);
+
+     This method is called to inform the cache backend of a change in size of
+     the netfs file due to local truncation.  The cache backend should make all
+     of the changes it needs to make before returning as this is done under the
+     netfs inode mutex.
+
+     The caller holds a cookie-level access pin to prevent a race with
+     withdrawal and the netfs must have the cookie marked in-use to prevent
+     garbage collection or culling from removing any resources.
+
+
+   * Invalidate a data storage object [mandatory]::
+
+	bool (*invalidate_cookie)(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+     This is called when the network filesystem detects a third-party
+     modification or when an O_DIRECT write is made locally.  This requests
+     that the cache backend should throw away all the data in the cache for
+     this object and start afresh.  It should return true if successful and
+     false otherwise.
+
+     On entry, new I O/operations are blocked.  Once the cache is in a position
+     to accept I/O again, the backend should release the block by calling::
+
+	void fscache_resume_after_invalidation(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+     If the method returns false, caching will be withdrawn for this cookie.
+
+
+   * Prepare to make local modifications to the cache [mandatory]::
+
+	void (*prepare_to_write)(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+     This method is called when the network filesystem finds that it is going
+     to need to modify the contents of the cache due to local writes or
+     truncations.  This gives the cache a chance to note that a cache object
+     may be incoherent with respect to the server and may need writing back
+     later.  This may also cause the cached data to be scrapped on later
+     rebinding if not properly committed.
+
+
+   * Begin an operation for the netfs lib [mandatory]::
+
+	bool (*begin_operation)(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+				enum fscache_want_state want_state);
+
+     This method is called when an I/O operation is being set up (read, write
+     or resize).  The caller holds an access pin on the cookie and must have
+     marked the cookie as in-use.
+
+     If it can, the backend should attach any resources it needs to keep around
+     to the netfs_cache_resources object and return true.
+
+     If it can't complete the setup, it should return false.
+
+     The want_state parameter indicates the state the caller needs the cache
+     object to be in and what it wants to do during the operation:
+
+	* ``FSCACHE_WANT_PARAMS`` - The caller just wants to access cache
+	  object parameters; it doesn't need to do data I/O yet.
+
+	* ``FSCACHE_WANT_READ`` - The caller wants to read data.
+
+	* ``FSCACHE_WANT_WRITE`` - The caller wants to write to or resize the
+          cache object.
+
+     Note that there won't necessarily be anything attached to the cookie's
+     cache_priv yet if the cookie is still being created.
+
+
+Data I/O API
+============
+
+A cache backend provides a data I/O API by through the netfs library's ``struct
+netfs_cache_ops`` attached to a ``struct netfs_cache_resources`` by the
+``begin_operation`` method described above.
+
+See the Documentation/filesystems/netfs_library.rst for a description.
+
+
+Miscellaneous Functions
+=======================
+
+FS-Cache provides some utilities that a cache backend may make use of:
+
+   * Note occurrence of an I/O error in a cache::
+
+	void fscache_io_error(struct fscache_cache *cache);
+
+     This tells FS-Cache that an I/O error occurred in the cache.  This
+     prevents any new I/O from being started on the cache.
+
+     This does not actually withdraw the cache.  That must be done separately.
+
+   * Note cessation of caching on a cookie due to failure::
+
+	void fscache_caching_failed(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+     This notes that a the caching that was being done on a cookie failed in
+     some way, for instance the backing storage failed to be created or
+     invalidation failed and that no further I/O operations should take place
+     on it until the cache is reset.
+
+   * Count I/O requests::
+
+	void fscache_count_read(void);
+	void fscache_count_write(void);
+
+     These record reads and writes from/to the cache.  The numbers are
+     displayed in /proc/fs/fscache/stats.
+
+   * Count out-of-space errors::
+
+	void fscache_count_no_write_space(void);
+	void fscache_count_no_create_space(void);
+
+     These record ENOSPC errors in the cache, divided into failures of data
+     writes and failures of filesystem object creations (e.g. mkdir).
+
+   * Count objects culled::
+
+	void fscache_count_culled(void);
+
+     This records the culling of an object.
+
+   * Get the cookie from a set of cache resources::
+
+	struct fscache_cookie *fscache_cres_cookie(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres)
+
+     Pull a pointer to the cookie from the cache resources.  This may return a
+     NULL cookie if no cookie was set.
+
+
+API Function Reference
+======================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/fscache-cache.h
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/cachefiles.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/cachefiles.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fc7abf712
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/cachefiles.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,662 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===================================
+Cache on Already Mounted Filesystem
+===================================
+
+.. Contents:
+
+ (*) Overview.
+
+ (*) Requirements.
+
+ (*) Configuration.
+
+ (*) Starting the cache.
+
+ (*) Things to avoid.
+
+ (*) Cache culling.
+
+ (*) Cache structure.
+
+ (*) Security model and SELinux.
+
+ (*) A note on security.
+
+ (*) Statistical information.
+
+ (*) Debugging.
+
+ (*) On-demand Read.
+
+
+Overview
+========
+
+CacheFiles is a caching backend that's meant to use as a cache a directory on
+an already mounted filesystem of a local type (such as Ext3).
+
+CacheFiles uses a userspace daemon to do some of the cache management - such as
+reaping stale nodes and culling.  This is called cachefilesd and lives in
+/sbin.
+
+The filesystem and data integrity of the cache are only as good as those of the
+filesystem providing the backing services.  Note that CacheFiles does not
+attempt to journal anything since the journalling interfaces of the various
+filesystems are very specific in nature.
+
+CacheFiles creates a misc character device - "/dev/cachefiles" - that is used
+to communication with the daemon.  Only one thing may have this open at once,
+and while it is open, a cache is at least partially in existence.  The daemon
+opens this and sends commands down it to control the cache.
+
+CacheFiles is currently limited to a single cache.
+
+CacheFiles attempts to maintain at least a certain percentage of free space on
+the filesystem, shrinking the cache by culling the objects it contains to make
+space if necessary - see the "Cache Culling" section.  This means it can be
+placed on the same medium as a live set of data, and will expand to make use of
+spare space and automatically contract when the set of data requires more
+space.
+
+
+
+Requirements
+============
+
+The use of CacheFiles and its daemon requires the following features to be
+available in the system and in the cache filesystem:
+
+	- dnotify.
+
+	- extended attributes (xattrs).
+
+	- openat() and friends.
+
+	- bmap() support on files in the filesystem (FIBMAP ioctl).
+
+	- The use of bmap() to detect a partial page at the end of the file.
+
+It is strongly recommended that the "dir_index" option is enabled on Ext3
+filesystems being used as a cache.
+
+
+Configuration
+=============
+
+The cache is configured by a script in /etc/cachefilesd.conf.  These commands
+set up cache ready for use.  The following script commands are available:
+
+ brun <N>%, bcull <N>%, bstop <N>%, frun <N>%, fcull <N>%, fstop <N>%
+	Configure the culling limits.  Optional.  See the section on culling
+	The defaults are 7% (run), 5% (cull) and 1% (stop) respectively.
+
+	The commands beginning with a 'b' are file space (block) limits, those
+	beginning with an 'f' are file count limits.
+
+ dir <path>
+	Specify the directory containing the root of the cache.  Mandatory.
+
+ tag <name>
+	Specify a tag to FS-Cache to use in distinguishing multiple caches.
+	Optional.  The default is "CacheFiles".
+
+ debug <mask>
+	Specify a numeric bitmask to control debugging in the kernel module.
+	Optional.  The default is zero (all off).  The following values can be
+	OR'd into the mask to collect various information:
+
+		==	=================================================
+		1	Turn on trace of function entry (_enter() macros)
+		2	Turn on trace of function exit (_leave() macros)
+		4	Turn on trace of internal debug points (_debug())
+		==	=================================================
+
+	This mask can also be set through sysfs, eg::
+
+		echo 5 >/sys/modules/cachefiles/parameters/debug
+
+
+Starting the Cache
+==================
+
+The cache is started by running the daemon.  The daemon opens the cache device,
+configures the cache and tells it to begin caching.  At that point the cache
+binds to fscache and the cache becomes live.
+
+The daemon is run as follows::
+
+	/sbin/cachefilesd [-d]* [-s] [-n] [-f <configfile>]
+
+The flags are:
+
+ ``-d``
+	Increase the debugging level.  This can be specified multiple times and
+	is cumulative with itself.
+
+ ``-s``
+	Send messages to stderr instead of syslog.
+
+ ``-n``
+	Don't daemonise and go into background.
+
+ ``-f <configfile>``
+	Use an alternative configuration file rather than the default one.
+
+
+Things to Avoid
+===============
+
+Do not mount other things within the cache as this will cause problems.  The
+kernel module contains its own very cut-down path walking facility that ignores
+mountpoints, but the daemon can't avoid them.
+
+Do not create, rename or unlink files and directories in the cache while the
+cache is active, as this may cause the state to become uncertain.
+
+Renaming files in the cache might make objects appear to be other objects (the
+filename is part of the lookup key).
+
+Do not change or remove the extended attributes attached to cache files by the
+cache as this will cause the cache state management to get confused.
+
+Do not create files or directories in the cache, lest the cache get confused or
+serve incorrect data.
+
+Do not chmod files in the cache.  The module creates things with minimal
+permissions to prevent random users being able to access them directly.
+
+
+Cache Culling
+=============
+
+The cache may need culling occasionally to make space.  This involves
+discarding objects from the cache that have been used less recently than
+anything else.  Culling is based on the access time of data objects.  Empty
+directories are culled if not in use.
+
+Cache culling is done on the basis of the percentage of blocks and the
+percentage of files available in the underlying filesystem.  There are six
+"limits":
+
+ brun, frun
+     If the amount of free space and the number of available files in the cache
+     rises above both these limits, then culling is turned off.
+
+ bcull, fcull
+     If the amount of available space or the number of available files in the
+     cache falls below either of these limits, then culling is started.
+
+ bstop, fstop
+     If the amount of available space or the number of available files in the
+     cache falls below either of these limits, then no further allocation of
+     disk space or files is permitted until culling has raised things above
+     these limits again.
+
+These must be configured thusly::
+
+	0 <= bstop < bcull < brun < 100
+	0 <= fstop < fcull < frun < 100
+
+Note that these are percentages of available space and available files, and do
+_not_ appear as 100 minus the percentage displayed by the "df" program.
+
+The userspace daemon scans the cache to build up a table of cullable objects.
+These are then culled in least recently used order.  A new scan of the cache is
+started as soon as space is made in the table.  Objects will be skipped if
+their atimes have changed or if the kernel module says it is still using them.
+
+
+Cache Structure
+===============
+
+The CacheFiles module will create two directories in the directory it was
+given:
+
+ * cache/
+ * graveyard/
+
+The active cache objects all reside in the first directory.  The CacheFiles
+kernel module moves any retired or culled objects that it can't simply unlink
+to the graveyard from which the daemon will actually delete them.
+
+The daemon uses dnotify to monitor the graveyard directory, and will delete
+anything that appears therein.
+
+
+The module represents index objects as directories with the filename "I..." or
+"J...".  Note that the "cache/" directory is itself a special index.
+
+Data objects are represented as files if they have no children, or directories
+if they do.  Their filenames all begin "D..." or "E...".  If represented as a
+directory, data objects will have a file in the directory called "data" that
+actually holds the data.
+
+Special objects are similar to data objects, except their filenames begin
+"S..." or "T...".
+
+
+If an object has children, then it will be represented as a directory.
+Immediately in the representative directory are a collection of directories
+named for hash values of the child object keys with an '@' prepended.  Into
+this directory, if possible, will be placed the representations of the child
+objects::
+
+	 /INDEX    /INDEX     /INDEX                            /DATA FILES
+	/=========/==========/=================================/================
+	cache/@4a/I03nfs/@30/Ji000000000000000--fHg8hi8400
+	cache/@4a/I03nfs/@30/Ji000000000000000--fHg8hi8400/@75/Es0g000w...DB1ry
+	cache/@4a/I03nfs/@30/Ji000000000000000--fHg8hi8400/@75/Es0g000w...N22ry
+	cache/@4a/I03nfs/@30/Ji000000000000000--fHg8hi8400/@75/Es0g000w...FP1ry
+
+
+If the key is so long that it exceeds NAME_MAX with the decorations added on to
+it, then it will be cut into pieces, the first few of which will be used to
+make a nest of directories, and the last one of which will be the objects
+inside the last directory.  The names of the intermediate directories will have
+'+' prepended::
+
+	J1223/@23/+xy...z/+kl...m/Epqr
+
+
+Note that keys are raw data, and not only may they exceed NAME_MAX in size,
+they may also contain things like '/' and NUL characters, and so they may not
+be suitable for turning directly into a filename.
+
+To handle this, CacheFiles will use a suitably printable filename directly and
+"base-64" encode ones that aren't directly suitable.  The two versions of
+object filenames indicate the encoding:
+
+	===============	===============	===============
+	OBJECT TYPE	PRINTABLE	ENCODED
+	===============	===============	===============
+	Index		"I..."		"J..."
+	Data		"D..."		"E..."
+	Special		"S..."		"T..."
+	===============	===============	===============
+
+Intermediate directories are always "@" or "+" as appropriate.
+
+
+Each object in the cache has an extended attribute label that holds the object
+type ID (required to distinguish special objects) and the auxiliary data from
+the netfs.  The latter is used to detect stale objects in the cache and update
+or retire them.
+
+
+Note that CacheFiles will erase from the cache any file it doesn't recognise or
+any file of an incorrect type (such as a FIFO file or a device file).
+
+
+Security Model and SELinux
+==========================
+
+CacheFiles is implemented to deal properly with the LSM security features of
+the Linux kernel and the SELinux facility.
+
+One of the problems that CacheFiles faces is that it is generally acting on
+behalf of a process, and running in that process's context, and that includes a
+security context that is not appropriate for accessing the cache - either
+because the files in the cache are inaccessible to that process, or because if
+the process creates a file in the cache, that file may be inaccessible to other
+processes.
+
+The way CacheFiles works is to temporarily change the security context (fsuid,
+fsgid and actor security label) that the process acts as - without changing the
+security context of the process when it the target of an operation performed by
+some other process (so signalling and suchlike still work correctly).
+
+
+When the CacheFiles module is asked to bind to its cache, it:
+
+ (1) Finds the security label attached to the root cache directory and uses
+     that as the security label with which it will create files.  By default,
+     this is::
+
+	cachefiles_var_t
+
+ (2) Finds the security label of the process which issued the bind request
+     (presumed to be the cachefilesd daemon), which by default will be::
+
+	cachefilesd_t
+
+     and asks LSM to supply a security ID as which it should act given the
+     daemon's label.  By default, this will be::
+
+	cachefiles_kernel_t
+
+     SELinux transitions the daemon's security ID to the module's security ID
+     based on a rule of this form in the policy::
+
+	type_transition <daemon's-ID> kernel_t : process <module's-ID>;
+
+     For instance::
+
+	type_transition cachefilesd_t kernel_t : process cachefiles_kernel_t;
+
+
+The module's security ID gives it permission to create, move and remove files
+and directories in the cache, to find and access directories and files in the
+cache, to set and access extended attributes on cache objects, and to read and
+write files in the cache.
+
+The daemon's security ID gives it only a very restricted set of permissions: it
+may scan directories, stat files and erase files and directories.  It may
+not read or write files in the cache, and so it is precluded from accessing the
+data cached therein; nor is it permitted to create new files in the cache.
+
+
+There are policy source files available in:
+
+	https://people.redhat.com/~dhowells/fscache/cachefilesd-0.8.tar.bz2
+
+and later versions.  In that tarball, see the files::
+
+	cachefilesd.te
+	cachefilesd.fc
+	cachefilesd.if
+
+They are built and installed directly by the RPM.
+
+If a non-RPM based system is being used, then copy the above files to their own
+directory and run::
+
+	make -f /usr/share/selinux/devel/Makefile
+	semodule -i cachefilesd.pp
+
+You will need checkpolicy and selinux-policy-devel installed prior to the
+build.
+
+
+By default, the cache is located in /var/fscache, but if it is desirable that
+it should be elsewhere, than either the above policy files must be altered, or
+an auxiliary policy must be installed to label the alternate location of the
+cache.
+
+For instructions on how to add an auxiliary policy to enable the cache to be
+located elsewhere when SELinux is in enforcing mode, please see::
+
+	/usr/share/doc/cachefilesd-*/move-cache.txt
+
+When the cachefilesd rpm is installed; alternatively, the document can be found
+in the sources.
+
+
+A Note on Security
+==================
+
+CacheFiles makes use of the split security in the task_struct.  It allocates
+its own task_security structure, and redirects current->cred to point to it
+when it acts on behalf of another process, in that process's context.
+
+The reason it does this is that it calls vfs_mkdir() and suchlike rather than
+bypassing security and calling inode ops directly.  Therefore the VFS and LSM
+may deny the CacheFiles access to the cache data because under some
+circumstances the caching code is running in the security context of whatever
+process issued the original syscall on the netfs.
+
+Furthermore, should CacheFiles create a file or directory, the security
+parameters with that object is created (UID, GID, security label) would be
+derived from that process that issued the system call, thus potentially
+preventing other processes from accessing the cache - including CacheFiles's
+cache management daemon (cachefilesd).
+
+What is required is to temporarily override the security of the process that
+issued the system call.  We can't, however, just do an in-place change of the
+security data as that affects the process as an object, not just as a subject.
+This means it may lose signals or ptrace events for example, and affects what
+the process looks like in /proc.
+
+So CacheFiles makes use of a logical split in the security between the
+objective security (task->real_cred) and the subjective security (task->cred).
+The objective security holds the intrinsic security properties of a process and
+is never overridden.  This is what appears in /proc, and is what is used when a
+process is the target of an operation by some other process (SIGKILL for
+example).
+
+The subjective security holds the active security properties of a process, and
+may be overridden.  This is not seen externally, and is used whan a process
+acts upon another object, for example SIGKILLing another process or opening a
+file.
+
+LSM hooks exist that allow SELinux (or Smack or whatever) to reject a request
+for CacheFiles to run in a context of a specific security label, or to create
+files and directories with another security label.
+
+
+Statistical Information
+=======================
+
+If FS-Cache is compiled with the following option enabled::
+
+	CONFIG_CACHEFILES_HISTOGRAM=y
+
+then it will gather certain statistics and display them through a proc file.
+
+ /proc/fs/cachefiles/histogram
+
+     ::
+
+	cat /proc/fs/cachefiles/histogram
+	JIFS  SECS  LOOKUPS   MKDIRS    CREATES
+	===== ===== ========= ========= =========
+
+     This shows the breakdown of the number of times each amount of time
+     between 0 jiffies and HZ-1 jiffies a variety of tasks took to run.  The
+     columns are as follows:
+
+	=======		=======================================================
+	COLUMN		TIME MEASUREMENT
+	=======		=======================================================
+	LOOKUPS		Length of time to perform a lookup on the backing fs
+	MKDIRS		Length of time to perform a mkdir on the backing fs
+	CREATES		Length of time to perform a create on the backing fs
+	=======		=======================================================
+
+     Each row shows the number of events that took a particular range of times.
+     Each step is 1 jiffy in size.  The JIFS column indicates the particular
+     jiffy range covered, and the SECS field the equivalent number of seconds.
+
+
+Debugging
+=========
+
+If CONFIG_CACHEFILES_DEBUG is enabled, the CacheFiles facility can have runtime
+debugging enabled by adjusting the value in::
+
+	/sys/module/cachefiles/parameters/debug
+
+This is a bitmask of debugging streams to enable:
+
+	=======	=======	===============================	=======================
+	BIT	VALUE	STREAM				POINT
+	=======	=======	===============================	=======================
+	0	1	General				Function entry trace
+	1	2					Function exit trace
+	2	4					General
+	=======	=======	===============================	=======================
+
+The appropriate set of values should be OR'd together and the result written to
+the control file.  For example::
+
+	echo $((1|4|8)) >/sys/module/cachefiles/parameters/debug
+
+will turn on all function entry debugging.
+
+
+On-demand Read
+==============
+
+When working in its original mode, CacheFiles serves as a local cache for a
+remote networking fs - while in on-demand read mode, CacheFiles can boost the
+scenario where on-demand read semantics are needed, e.g. container image
+distribution.
+
+The essential difference between these two modes is seen when a cache miss
+occurs: In the original mode, the netfs will fetch the data from the remote
+server and then write it to the cache file; in on-demand read mode, fetching
+the data and writing it into the cache is delegated to a user daemon.
+
+``CONFIG_CACHEFILES_ONDEMAND`` should be enabled to support on-demand read mode.
+
+
+Protocol Communication
+----------------------
+
+The on-demand read mode uses a simple protocol for communication between kernel
+and user daemon. The protocol can be modeled as::
+
+	kernel --[request]--> user daemon --[reply]--> kernel
+
+CacheFiles will send requests to the user daemon when needed.  The user daemon
+should poll the devnode ('/dev/cachefiles') to check if there's a pending
+request to be processed.  A POLLIN event will be returned when there's a pending
+request.
+
+The user daemon then reads the devnode to fetch a request to process.  It should
+be noted that each read only gets one request. When it has finished processing
+the request, the user daemon should write the reply to the devnode.
+
+Each request starts with a message header of the form::
+
+	struct cachefiles_msg {
+		__u32 msg_id;
+		__u32 opcode;
+		__u32 len;
+		__u32 object_id;
+		__u8  data[];
+	};
+
+where:
+
+	* ``msg_id`` is a unique ID identifying this request among all pending
+	  requests.
+
+	* ``opcode`` indicates the type of this request.
+
+	* ``object_id`` is a unique ID identifying the cache file operated on.
+
+	* ``data`` indicates the payload of this request.
+
+	* ``len`` indicates the whole length of this request, including the
+	  header and following type-specific payload.
+
+
+Turning on On-demand Mode
+-------------------------
+
+An optional parameter becomes available to the "bind" command::
+
+	bind [ondemand]
+
+When the "bind" command is given no argument, it defaults to the original mode.
+When it is given the "ondemand" argument, i.e. "bind ondemand", on-demand read
+mode will be enabled.
+
+
+The OPEN Request
+----------------
+
+When the netfs opens a cache file for the first time, a request with the
+CACHEFILES_OP_OPEN opcode, a.k.a an OPEN request will be sent to the user
+daemon.  The payload format is of the form::
+
+	struct cachefiles_open {
+		__u32 volume_key_size;
+		__u32 cookie_key_size;
+		__u32 fd;
+		__u32 flags;
+		__u8  data[];
+	};
+
+where:
+
+	* ``data`` contains the volume_key followed directly by the cookie_key.
+	  The volume key is a NUL-terminated string; the cookie key is binary
+	  data.
+
+	* ``volume_key_size`` indicates the size of the volume key in bytes.
+
+	* ``cookie_key_size`` indicates the size of the cookie key in bytes.
+
+	* ``fd`` indicates an anonymous fd referring to the cache file, through
+	  which the user daemon can perform write/llseek file operations on the
+	  cache file.
+
+
+The user daemon can use the given (volume_key, cookie_key) pair to distinguish
+the requested cache file.  With the given anonymous fd, the user daemon can
+fetch the data and write it to the cache file in the background, even when
+kernel has not triggered a cache miss yet.
+
+Be noted that each cache file has a unique object_id, while it may have multiple
+anonymous fds.  The user daemon may duplicate anonymous fds from the initial
+anonymous fd indicated by the @fd field through dup().  Thus each object_id can
+be mapped to multiple anonymous fds, while the usr daemon itself needs to
+maintain the mapping.
+
+When implementing a user daemon, please be careful of RLIMIT_NOFILE,
+``/proc/sys/fs/nr_open`` and ``/proc/sys/fs/file-max``.  Typically these needn't
+be huge since they're related to the number of open device blobs rather than
+open files of each individual filesystem.
+
+The user daemon should reply the OPEN request by issuing a "copen" (complete
+open) command on the devnode::
+
+	copen <msg_id>,<cache_size>
+
+where:
+
+	* ``msg_id`` must match the msg_id field of the OPEN request.
+
+	* When >= 0, ``cache_size`` indicates the size of the cache file;
+	  when < 0, ``cache_size`` indicates any error code encountered by the
+	  user daemon.
+
+
+The CLOSE Request
+-----------------
+
+When a cookie withdrawn, a CLOSE request (opcode CACHEFILES_OP_CLOSE) will be
+sent to the user daemon.  This tells the user daemon to close all anonymous fds
+associated with the given object_id.  The CLOSE request has no extra payload,
+and shouldn't be replied.
+
+
+The READ Request
+----------------
+
+When a cache miss is encountered in on-demand read mode, CacheFiles will send a
+READ request (opcode CACHEFILES_OP_READ) to the user daemon. This tells the user
+daemon to fetch the contents of the requested file range.  The payload is of the
+form::
+
+	struct cachefiles_read {
+		__u64 off;
+		__u64 len;
+	};
+
+where:
+
+	* ``off`` indicates the starting offset of the requested file range.
+
+	* ``len`` indicates the length of the requested file range.
+
+
+When it receives a READ request, the user daemon should fetch the requested data
+and write it to the cache file identified by object_id.
+
+When it has finished processing the READ request, the user daemon should reply
+by using the CACHEFILES_IOC_READ_COMPLETE ioctl on one of the anonymous fds
+associated with the object_id given in the READ request.  The ioctl is of the
+form::
+
+	ioctl(fd, CACHEFILES_IOC_READ_COMPLETE, msg_id);
+
+where:
+
+	* ``fd`` is one of the anonymous fds associated with the object_id
+	  given.
+
+	* ``msg_id`` must match the msg_id field of the READ request.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/fscache.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/fscache.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a74d7b052
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/fscache.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,348 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==========================
+General Filesystem Caching
+==========================
+
+Overview
+========
+
+This facility is a general purpose cache for network filesystems, though it
+could be used for caching other things such as ISO9660 filesystems too.
+
+FS-Cache mediates between cache backends (such as CacheFiles) and network
+filesystems::
+
+	+---------+
+	|         |                                    +--------------+
+	|   NFS   |--+                                 |              |
+	|         |  |                             +-->|   CacheFS    |
+	+---------+  |               +----------+  |   |  /dev/hda5   |
+	             |               |          |  |   +--------------+
+	+---------+  +-------------->|          |  |
+	|         |      +-------+   |          |--+
+	|   AFS   |----->|       |   | FS-Cache |
+	|         |      | netfs |-->|          |--+
+	+---------+  +-->|  lib  |   |          |  |
+	             |   |       |   |          |  |   +--------------+
+	+---------+  |   +-------+   +----------+  |   |              |
+	|         |  |                             +-->|  CacheFiles  |
+	|   9P    |--+                                 |  /var/cache  |
+	|         |                                    +--------------+
+	+---------+
+
+Or to look at it another way, FS-Cache is a module that provides a caching
+facility to a network filesystem such that the cache is transparent to the
+user::
+
+	+---------+
+	|         |
+	| Server  |
+	|         |
+	+---------+
+	     |                  NETWORK
+	~~~~~|~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+	     |
+	     |           +----------+
+	     V           |          |
+	+---------+      |          |
+	|         |      |          |
+	|   NFS   |----->| FS-Cache |
+	|         |      |          |--+
+	+---------+      |          |  |   +--------------+   +--------------+
+	     |           |          |  |   |              |   |              |
+	     V           +----------+  +-->|  CacheFiles  |-->|  Ext3        |
+	+---------+                        |  /var/cache  |   |  /dev/sda6   |
+	|         |                        +--------------+   +--------------+
+	|   VFS   |                                ^                     ^
+	|         |                                |                     |
+	+---------+                                +--------------+      |
+	     |                  KERNEL SPACE                      |      |
+	~~~~~|~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~|~~~~~~|~~~~
+	     |                  USER SPACE                        |      |
+	     V                                                    |      |
+	+---------+                                           +--------------+
+	|         |                                           |              |
+	| Process |                                           | cachefilesd  |
+	|         |                                           |              |
+	+---------+                                           +--------------+
+
+
+FS-Cache does not follow the idea of completely loading every netfs file
+opened in its entirety into a cache before permitting it to be accessed and
+then serving the pages out of that cache rather than the netfs inode because:
+
+ (1) It must be practical to operate without a cache.
+
+ (2) The size of any accessible file must not be limited to the size of the
+     cache.
+
+ (3) The combined size of all opened files (this includes mapped libraries)
+     must not be limited to the size of the cache.
+
+ (4) The user should not be forced to download an entire file just to do a
+     one-off access of a small portion of it (such as might be done with the
+     "file" program).
+
+It instead serves the cache out in chunks as and when requested by the netfs
+using it.
+
+
+FS-Cache provides the following facilities:
+
+   * More than one cache can be used at once.  Caches can be selected
+     explicitly by use of tags.
+
+   * Caches can be added / removed at any time, even whilst being accessed.
+
+   * The netfs is provided with an interface that allows either party to
+     withdraw caching facilities from a file (required for (2)).
+
+   * The interface to the netfs returns as few errors as possible, preferring
+     rather to let the netfs remain oblivious.
+
+   * There are three types of cookie: cache, volume and data file cookies.
+     Cache cookies represent the cache as a whole and are not normally visible
+     to the netfs; the netfs gets a volume cookie to represent a collection of
+     files (typically something that a netfs would get for a superblock); and
+     data file cookies are used to cache data (something that would be got for
+     an inode).
+
+   * Volumes are matched using a key.  This is a printable string that is used
+     to encode all the information that might be needed to distinguish one
+     superblock, say, from another.  This would be a compound of things like
+     cell name or server address, volume name or share path.  It must be a
+     valid pathname.
+
+   * Cookies are matched using a key.  This is a binary blob and is used to
+     represent the object within a volume (so the volume key need not form
+     part of the blob).  This might include things like an inode number and
+     uniquifier or a file handle.
+
+   * Cookie resources are set up and pinned by marking the cookie in-use.
+     This prevents the backing resources from being culled.  Timed garbage
+     collection is employed to eliminate cookies that haven't been used for a
+     short while, thereby reducing resource overload.  This is intended to be
+     used when a file is opened or closed.
+
+     A cookie can be marked in-use multiple times simultaneously; each mark
+     must be unused.
+
+   * Begin/end access functions are provided to delay cache withdrawal for the
+     duration of an operation and prevent structs from being freed whilst
+     we're looking at them.
+
+   * Data I/O is done by asynchronous DIO to/from a buffer described by the
+     netfs using an iov_iter.
+
+   * An invalidation facility is available to discard data from the cache and
+     to deal with I/O that's in progress that is accessing old data.
+
+   * Cookies can be "retired" upon release, thereby causing the object to be
+     removed from the cache.
+
+
+The netfs API to FS-Cache can be found in:
+
+	Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.rst
+
+The cache backend API to FS-Cache can be found in:
+
+	Documentation/filesystems/caching/backend-api.rst
+
+
+Statistical Information
+=======================
+
+If FS-Cache is compiled with the following options enabled::
+
+	CONFIG_FSCACHE_STATS=y
+
+then it will gather certain statistics and display them through:
+
+	/proc/fs/fscache/stats
+
+This shows counts of a number of events that can happen in FS-Cache:
+
++--------------+-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|CLASS         |EVENT  |MEANING                                                |
++==============+=======+=======================================================+
+|Cookies       |n=N    |Number of data storage cookies allocated               |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |v=N    |Number of volume index cookies allocated               |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |vcol=N |Number of volume index key collisions                  |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |voom=N |Number of OOM events when allocating volume cookies    |
++--------------+-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|Acquire       |n=N    |Number of acquire cookie requests seen                 |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |ok=N   |Number of acq reqs succeeded                           |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |oom=N  |Number of acq reqs failed on ENOMEM                    |
++--------------+-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|LRU           |n=N    |Number of cookies currently on the LRU                 |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |exp=N  |Number of cookies expired off of the LRU               |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |rmv=N  |Number of cookies removed from the LRU                 |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |drp=N  |Number of LRU'd cookies relinquished/withdrawn         |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |at=N   |Time till next LRU cull (jiffies)                      |
++--------------+-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|Invals        |n=N    |Number of invalidations                                |
++--------------+-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|Updates       |n=N    |Number of update cookie requests seen                  |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |rsz=N  |Number of resize requests                              |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |rsn=N  |Number of skipped resize requests                      |
++--------------+-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|Relinqs       |n=N    |Number of relinquish cookie requests seen              |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |rtr=N  |Number of rlq reqs with retire=true                    |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |drop=N |Number of cookies no longer blocking re-acquisition    |
++--------------+-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|NoSpace       |nwr=N  |Number of write requests refused due to lack of space  |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |ncr=N  |Number of create requests refused due to lack of space |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |cull=N |Number of objects culled to make space                 |
++--------------+-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|IO            |rd=N   |Number of read operations in the cache                 |
++              +-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+|              |wr=N   |Number of write operations in the cache                |
++--------------+-------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Netfslib will also add some stats counters of its own.
+
+
+Cache List
+==========
+
+FS-Cache provides a list of cache cookies:
+
+	/proc/fs/fscache/cookies
+
+This will look something like::
+
+	# cat /proc/fs/fscache/caches
+	CACHE    REF   VOLS  OBJS  ACCES S NAME
+	======== ===== ===== ===== ===== = ===============
+	00000001     2     1  2123     1 A default
+
+where the columns are:
+
+	=======	===============================================================
+	COLUMN	DESCRIPTION
+	=======	===============================================================
+	CACHE	Cache cookie debug ID (also appears in traces)
+	REF	Number of references on the cache cookie
+	VOLS	Number of volumes cookies in this cache
+	OBJS	Number of cache objects in use
+	ACCES	Number of accesses pinning the cache
+	S	State
+	NAME	Name of the cache.
+	=======	===============================================================
+
+The state can be (-) Inactive, (P)reparing, (A)ctive, (E)rror or (W)ithdrawing.
+
+
+Volume List
+===========
+
+FS-Cache provides a list of volume cookies:
+
+	/proc/fs/fscache/volumes
+
+This will look something like::
+
+	VOLUME   REF   nCOOK ACC FL CACHE           KEY
+	======== ===== ===== === == =============== ================
+	00000001    55    54   1 00 default         afs,example.com,100058
+
+where the columns are:
+
+	=======	===============================================================
+	COLUMN	DESCRIPTION
+	=======	===============================================================
+	VOLUME	The volume cookie debug ID (also appears in traces)
+	REF	Number of references on the volume cookie
+	nCOOK	Number of cookies in the volume
+	ACC	Number of accesses pinning the cache
+	FL	Flags on the volume cookie
+	CACHE	Name of the cache or "-"
+	KEY	The indexing key for the volume
+	=======	===============================================================
+
+
+Cookie List
+===========
+
+FS-Cache provides a list of cookies:
+
+	/proc/fs/fscache/cookies
+
+This will look something like::
+
+	# head /proc/fs/fscache/cookies
+	COOKIE   VOLUME   REF ACT ACC S FL DEF
+	======== ======== === === === = == ================
+	00000435 00000001   1   0  -1 - 08 0000000201d080070000000000000000, 0000000000000000
+	00000436 00000001   1   0  -1 - 00 0000005601d080080000000000000000, 0000000000000051
+	00000437 00000001   1   0  -1 - 08 00023b3001d0823f0000000000000000, 0000000000000000
+	00000438 00000001   1   0  -1 - 08 0000005801d0807b0000000000000000, 0000000000000000
+	00000439 00000001   1   0  -1 - 08 00023b3201d080a10000000000000000, 0000000000000000
+	0000043a 00000001   1   0  -1 - 08 00023b3401d080a30000000000000000, 0000000000000000
+	0000043b 00000001   1   0  -1 - 08 00023b3601d080b30000000000000000, 0000000000000000
+	0000043c 00000001   1   0  -1 - 08 00023b3801d080b40000000000000000, 0000000000000000
+
+where the columns are:
+
+	=======	===============================================================
+	COLUMN	DESCRIPTION
+	=======	===============================================================
+	COOKIE	The cookie debug ID (also appears in traces)
+	VOLUME	The parent volume cookie debug ID
+	REF	Number of references on the volume cookie
+	ACT	Number of times the cookie is marked for in use
+	ACC	Number of access pins in the cookie
+	S	State of the cookie
+	FL	Flags on the cookie
+	DEF	Key, auxiliary data
+	=======	===============================================================
+
+
+Debugging
+=========
+
+If CONFIG_FSCACHE_DEBUG is enabled, the FS-Cache facility can have runtime
+debugging enabled by adjusting the value in::
+
+	/sys/module/fscache/parameters/debug
+
+This is a bitmask of debugging streams to enable:
+
+	=======	=======	===============================	=======================
+	BIT	VALUE	STREAM				POINT
+	=======	=======	===============================	=======================
+	0	1	Cache management		Function entry trace
+	1	2					Function exit trace
+	2	4					General
+	3	8	Cookie management		Function entry trace
+	4	16					Function exit trace
+	5	32					General
+	6-8						(Not used)
+	9	512	I/O operation management	Function entry trace
+	10	1024					Function exit trace
+	11	2048					General
+	=======	=======	===============================	=======================
+
+The appropriate set of values should be OR'd together and the result written to
+the control file.  For example::
+
+	echo $((1|8|512)) >/sys/module/fscache/parameters/debug
+
+will turn on all function entry debugging.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df4307124
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Filesystem Caching
+==================
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   fscache
+   netfs-api
+   backend-api
+   cachefiles
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1d18e9def
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,452 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============================
+Network Filesystem Caching API
+==============================
+
+Fscache provides an API by which a network filesystem can make use of local
+caching facilities.  The API is arranged around a number of principles:
+
+ (1) A cache is logically organised into volumes and data storage objects
+     within those volumes.
+
+ (2) Volumes and data storage objects are represented by various types of
+     cookie.
+
+ (3) Cookies have keys that distinguish them from their peers.
+
+ (4) Cookies have coherency data that allows a cache to determine if the
+     cached data is still valid.
+
+ (5) I/O is done asynchronously where possible.
+
+This API is used by::
+
+	#include <linux/fscache.h>.
+
+.. This document contains the following sections:
+
+	 (1) Overview
+	 (2) Volume registration
+	 (3) Data file registration
+	 (4) Declaring a cookie to be in use
+	 (5) Resizing a data file (truncation)
+	 (6) Data I/O API
+	 (7) Data file coherency
+	 (8) Data file invalidation
+	 (9) Write back resource management
+	(10) Caching of local modifications
+	(11) Page release and invalidation
+
+
+Overview
+========
+
+The fscache hierarchy is organised on two levels from a network filesystem's
+point of view.  The upper level represents "volumes" and the lower level
+represents "data storage objects".  These are represented by two types of
+cookie, hereafter referred to as "volume cookies" and "cookies".
+
+A network filesystem acquires a volume cookie for a volume using a volume key,
+which represents all the information that defines that volume (e.g. cell name
+or server address, volume ID or share name).  This must be rendered as a
+printable string that can be used as a directory name (ie. no '/' characters
+and shouldn't begin with a '.').  The maximum name length is one less than the
+maximum size of a filename component (allowing the cache backend one char for
+its own purposes).
+
+A filesystem would typically have a volume cookie for each superblock.
+
+The filesystem then acquires a cookie for each file within that volume using an
+object key.  Object keys are binary blobs and only need to be unique within
+their parent volume.  The cache backend is reponsible for rendering the binary
+blob into something it can use and may employ hash tables, trees or whatever to
+improve its ability to find an object.  This is transparent to the network
+filesystem.
+
+A filesystem would typically have a cookie for each inode, and would acquire it
+in iget and relinquish it when evicting the cookie.
+
+Once it has a cookie, the filesystem needs to mark the cookie as being in use.
+This causes fscache to send the cache backend off to look up/create resources
+for the cookie in the background, to check its coherency and, if necessary, to
+mark the object as being under modification.
+
+A filesystem would typically "use" the cookie in its file open routine and
+unuse it in file release and it needs to use the cookie around calls to
+truncate the cookie locally.  It *also* needs to use the cookie when the
+pagecache becomes dirty and unuse it when writeback is complete.  This is
+slightly tricky, and provision is made for it.
+
+When performing a read, write or resize on a cookie, the filesystem must first
+begin an operation.  This copies the resources into a holding struct and puts
+extra pins into the cache to stop cache withdrawal from tearing down the
+structures being used.  The actual operation can then be issued and conflicting
+invalidations can be detected upon completion.
+
+The filesystem is expected to use netfslib to access the cache, but that's not
+actually required and it can use the fscache I/O API directly.
+
+
+Volume Registration
+===================
+
+The first step for a network filsystem is to acquire a volume cookie for the
+volume it wants to access::
+
+	struct fscache_volume *
+	fscache_acquire_volume(const char *volume_key,
+			       const char *cache_name,
+			       const void *coherency_data,
+			       size_t coherency_len);
+
+This function creates a volume cookie with the specified volume key as its name
+and notes the coherency data.
+
+The volume key must be a printable string with no '/' characters in it.  It
+should begin with the name of the filesystem and should be no longer than 254
+characters.  It should uniquely represent the volume and will be matched with
+what's stored in the cache.
+
+The caller may also specify the name of the cache to use.  If specified,
+fscache will look up or create a cache cookie of that name and will use a cache
+of that name if it is online or comes online.  If no cache name is specified,
+it will use the first cache that comes to hand and set the name to that.
+
+The specified coherency data is stored in the cookie and will be matched
+against coherency data stored on disk.  The data pointer may be NULL if no data
+is provided.  If the coherency data doesn't match, the entire cache volume will
+be invalidated.
+
+This function can return errors such as EBUSY if the volume key is already in
+use by an acquired volume or ENOMEM if an allocation failure occured.  It may
+also return a NULL volume cookie if fscache is not enabled.  It is safe to
+pass a NULL cookie to any function that takes a volume cookie.  This will
+cause that function to do nothing.
+
+
+When the network filesystem has finished with a volume, it should relinquish it
+by calling::
+
+	void fscache_relinquish_volume(struct fscache_volume *volume,
+				       const void *coherency_data,
+				       bool invalidate);
+
+This will cause the volume to be committed or removed, and if sealed the
+coherency data will be set to the value supplied.  The amount of coherency data
+must match the length specified when the volume was acquired.  Note that all
+data cookies obtained in this volume must be relinquished before the volume is
+relinquished.
+
+
+Data File Registration
+======================
+
+Once it has a volume cookie, a network filesystem can use it to acquire a
+cookie for data storage::
+
+	struct fscache_cookie *
+	fscache_acquire_cookie(struct fscache_volume *volume,
+			       u8 advice,
+			       const void *index_key,
+			       size_t index_key_len,
+			       const void *aux_data,
+			       size_t aux_data_len,
+			       loff_t object_size)
+
+This creates the cookie in the volume using the specified index key.  The index
+key is a binary blob of the given length and must be unique for the volume.
+This is saved into the cookie.  There are no restrictions on the content, but
+its length shouldn't exceed about three quarters of the maximum filename length
+to allow for encoding.
+
+The caller should also pass in a piece of coherency data in aux_data.  A buffer
+of size aux_data_len will be allocated and the coherency data copied in.  It is
+assumed that the size is invariant over time.  The coherency data is used to
+check the validity of data in the cache.  Functions are provided by which the
+coherency data can be updated.
+
+The file size of the object being cached should also be provided.  This may be
+used to trim the data and will be stored with the coherency data.
+
+This function never returns an error, though it may return a NULL cookie on
+allocation failure or if fscache is not enabled.  It is safe to pass in a NULL
+volume cookie and pass the NULL cookie returned to any function that takes it.
+This will cause that function to do nothing.
+
+
+When the network filesystem has finished with a cookie, it should relinquish it
+by calling::
+
+	void fscache_relinquish_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *cookie,
+				       bool retire);
+
+This will cause fscache to either commit the storage backing the cookie or
+delete it.
+
+
+Marking A Cookie In-Use
+=======================
+
+Once a cookie has been acquired by a network filesystem, the filesystem should
+tell fscache when it intends to use the cookie (typically done on file open)
+and should say when it has finished with it (typically on file close)::
+
+	void fscache_use_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *cookie,
+				bool will_modify);
+	void fscache_unuse_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *cookie,
+				  const void *aux_data,
+				  const loff_t *object_size);
+
+The *use* function tells fscache that it will use the cookie and, additionally,
+indicate if the user is intending to modify the contents locally.  If not yet
+done, this will trigger the cache backend to go and gather the resources it
+needs to access/store data in the cache.  This is done in the background, and
+so may not be complete by the time the function returns.
+
+The *unuse* function indicates that a filesystem has finished using a cookie.
+It optionally updates the stored coherency data and object size and then
+decreases the in-use counter.  When the last user unuses the cookie, it is
+scheduled for garbage collection.  If not reused within a short time, the
+resources will be released to reduce system resource consumption.
+
+A cookie must be marked in-use before it can be accessed for read, write or
+resize - and an in-use mark must be kept whilst there is dirty data in the
+pagecache in order to avoid an oops due to trying to open a file during process
+exit.
+
+Note that in-use marks are cumulative.  For each time a cookie is marked
+in-use, it must be unused.
+
+
+Resizing A Data File (Truncation)
+=================================
+
+If a network filesystem file is resized locally by truncation, the following
+should be called to notify the cache::
+
+	void fscache_resize_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *cookie,
+				   loff_t new_size);
+
+The caller must have first marked the cookie in-use.  The cookie and the new
+size are passed in and the cache is synchronously resized.  This is expected to
+be called from ``->setattr()`` inode operation under the inode lock.
+
+
+Data I/O API
+============
+
+To do data I/O operations directly through a cookie, the following functions
+are available::
+
+	int fscache_begin_read_operation(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+					 struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+	int fscache_read(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+			 loff_t start_pos,
+			 struct iov_iter *iter,
+			 enum netfs_read_from_hole read_hole,
+			 netfs_io_terminated_t term_func,
+			 void *term_func_priv);
+	int fscache_write(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+			  loff_t start_pos,
+			  struct iov_iter *iter,
+			  netfs_io_terminated_t term_func,
+			  void *term_func_priv);
+
+The *begin* function sets up an operation, attaching the resources required to
+the cache resources block from the cookie.  Assuming it doesn't return an error
+(for instance, it will return -ENOBUFS if given a NULL cookie, but otherwise do
+nothing), then one of the other two functions can be issued.
+
+The *read* and *write* functions initiate a direct-IO operation.  Both take the
+previously set up cache resources block, an indication of the start file
+position, and an I/O iterator that describes buffer and indicates the amount of
+data.
+
+The read function also takes a parameter to indicate how it should handle a
+partially populated region (a hole) in the disk content.  This may be to ignore
+it, skip over an initial hole and place zeros in the buffer or give an error.
+
+The read and write functions can be given an optional termination function that
+will be run on completion::
+
+	typedef
+	void (*netfs_io_terminated_t)(void *priv, ssize_t transferred_or_error,
+				      bool was_async);
+
+If a termination function is given, the operation will be run asynchronously
+and the termination function will be called upon completion.  If not given, the
+operation will be run synchronously.  Note that in the asynchronous case, it is
+possible for the operation to complete before the function returns.
+
+Both the read and write functions end the operation when they complete,
+detaching any pinned resources.
+
+The read operation will fail with ESTALE if invalidation occurred whilst the
+operation was ongoing.
+
+
+Data File Coherency
+===================
+
+To request an update of the coherency data and file size on a cookie, the
+following should be called::
+
+	void fscache_update_cookie(struct fscache_cookie *cookie,
+				   const void *aux_data,
+				   const loff_t *object_size);
+
+This will update the cookie's coherency data and/or file size.
+
+
+Data File Invalidation
+======================
+
+Sometimes it will be necessary to invalidate an object that contains data.
+Typically this will be necessary when the server informs the network filesystem
+of a remote third-party change - at which point the filesystem has to throw
+away the state and cached data that it had for an file and reload from the
+server.
+
+To indicate that a cache object should be invalidated, the following should be
+called::
+
+	void fscache_invalidate(struct fscache_cookie *cookie,
+				const void *aux_data,
+				loff_t size,
+				unsigned int flags);
+
+This increases the invalidation counter in the cookie to cause outstanding
+reads to fail with -ESTALE, sets the coherency data and file size from the
+information supplied, blocks new I/O on the cookie and dispatches the cache to
+go and get rid of the old data.
+
+Invalidation runs asynchronously in a worker thread so that it doesn't block
+too much.
+
+
+Write-Back Resource Management
+==============================
+
+To write data to the cache from network filesystem writeback, the cache
+resources required need to be pinned at the point the modification is made (for
+instance when the page is marked dirty) as it's not possible to open a file in
+a thread that's exiting.
+
+The following facilities are provided to manage this:
+
+ * An inode flag, ``I_PINNING_FSCACHE_WB``, is provided to indicate that an
+   in-use is held on the cookie for this inode.  It can only be changed if the
+   the inode lock is held.
+
+ * A flag, ``unpinned_fscache_wb`` is placed in the ``writeback_control``
+   struct that gets set if ``__writeback_single_inode()`` clears
+   ``I_PINNING_FSCACHE_WB`` because all the dirty pages were cleared.
+
+To support this, the following functions are provided::
+
+	bool fscache_dirty_folio(struct address_space *mapping,
+				 struct folio *folio,
+				 struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+	void fscache_unpin_writeback(struct writeback_control *wbc,
+				     struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+	void fscache_clear_inode_writeback(struct fscache_cookie *cookie,
+					   struct inode *inode,
+					   const void *aux);
+
+The *set* function is intended to be called from the filesystem's
+``dirty_folio`` address space operation.  If ``I_PINNING_FSCACHE_WB`` is not
+set, it sets that flag and increments the use count on the cookie (the caller
+must already have called ``fscache_use_cookie()``).
+
+The *unpin* function is intended to be called from the filesystem's
+``write_inode`` superblock operation.  It cleans up after writing by unusing
+the cookie if unpinned_fscache_wb is set in the writeback_control struct.
+
+The *clear* function is intended to be called from the netfs's ``evict_inode``
+superblock operation.  It must be called *after*
+``truncate_inode_pages_final()``, but *before* ``clear_inode()``.  This cleans
+up any hanging ``I_PINNING_FSCACHE_WB``.  It also allows the coherency data to
+be updated.
+
+
+Caching of Local Modifications
+==============================
+
+If a network filesystem has locally modified data that it wants to write to the
+cache, it needs to mark the pages to indicate that a write is in progress, and
+if the mark is already present, it needs to wait for it to be removed first
+(presumably due to an already in-progress operation).  This prevents multiple
+competing DIO writes to the same storage in the cache.
+
+Firstly, the netfs should determine if caching is available by doing something
+like::
+
+	bool caching = fscache_cookie_enabled(cookie);
+
+If caching is to be attempted, pages should be waited for and then marked using
+the following functions provided by the netfs helper library::
+
+	void set_page_fscache(struct page *page);
+	void wait_on_page_fscache(struct page *page);
+	int wait_on_page_fscache_killable(struct page *page);
+
+Once all the pages in the span are marked, the netfs can ask fscache to
+schedule a write of that region::
+
+	void fscache_write_to_cache(struct fscache_cookie *cookie,
+				    struct address_space *mapping,
+				    loff_t start, size_t len, loff_t i_size,
+				    netfs_io_terminated_t term_func,
+				    void *term_func_priv,
+				    bool caching)
+
+And if an error occurs before that point is reached, the marks can be removed
+by calling::
+
+	void fscache_clear_page_bits(struct address_space *mapping,
+				     loff_t start, size_t len,
+				     bool caching)
+
+In these functions, a pointer to the mapping to which the source pages are
+attached is passed in and start and len indicate the size of the region that's
+going to be written (it doesn't have to align to page boundaries necessarily,
+but it does have to align to DIO boundaries on the backing filesystem).  The
+caching parameter indicates if caching should be skipped, and if false, the
+functions do nothing.
+
+The write function takes some additional parameters: the cookie representing
+the cache object to be written to, i_size indicates the size of the netfs file
+and term_func indicates an optional completion function, to which
+term_func_priv will be passed, along with the error or amount written.
+
+Note that the write function will always run asynchronously and will unmark all
+the pages upon completion before calling term_func.
+
+
+Page Release and Invalidation
+=============================
+
+Fscache keeps track of whether we have any data in the cache yet for a cache
+object we've just created.  It knows it doesn't have to do any reading until it
+has done a write and then the page it wrote from has been released by the VM,
+after which it *has* to look in the cache.
+
+To inform fscache that a page might now be in the cache, the following function
+should be called from the ``release_folio`` address space op::
+
+	void fscache_note_page_release(struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+if the page has been released (ie. release_folio returned true).
+
+Page release and page invalidation should also wait for any mark left on the
+page to say that a DIO write is underway from that page::
+
+	void wait_on_page_fscache(struct page *page);
+	int wait_on_page_fscache_killable(struct page *page);
+
+
+API Function Reference
+======================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/fscache.h
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..76ce938e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ceph.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================
+Ceph Distributed File System
+============================
+
+Ceph is a distributed network file system designed to provide good
+performance, reliability, and scalability.
+
+Basic features include:
+
+ * POSIX semantics
+ * Seamless scaling from 1 to many thousands of nodes
+ * High availability and reliability.  No single point of failure.
+ * N-way replication of data across storage nodes
+ * Fast recovery from node failures
+ * Automatic rebalancing of data on node addition/removal
+ * Easy deployment: most FS components are userspace daemons
+
+Also,
+
+ * Flexible snapshots (on any directory)
+ * Recursive accounting (nested files, directories, bytes)
+
+In contrast to cluster filesystems like GFS, OCFS2, and GPFS that rely
+on symmetric access by all clients to shared block devices, Ceph
+separates data and metadata management into independent server
+clusters, similar to Lustre.  Unlike Lustre, however, metadata and
+storage nodes run entirely as user space daemons.  File data is striped
+across storage nodes in large chunks to distribute workload and
+facilitate high throughputs.  When storage nodes fail, data is
+re-replicated in a distributed fashion by the storage nodes themselves
+(with some minimal coordination from a cluster monitor), making the
+system extremely efficient and scalable.
+
+Metadata servers effectively form a large, consistent, distributed
+in-memory cache above the file namespace that is extremely scalable,
+dynamically redistributes metadata in response to workload changes,
+and can tolerate arbitrary (well, non-Byzantine) node failures.  The
+metadata server takes a somewhat unconventional approach to metadata
+storage to significantly improve performance for common workloads.  In
+particular, inodes with only a single link are embedded in
+directories, allowing entire directories of dentries and inodes to be
+loaded into its cache with a single I/O operation.  The contents of
+extremely large directories can be fragmented and managed by
+independent metadata servers, allowing scalable concurrent access.
+
+The system offers automatic data rebalancing/migration when scaling
+from a small cluster of just a few nodes to many hundreds, without
+requiring an administrator carve the data set into static volumes or
+go through the tedious process of migrating data between servers.
+When the file system approaches full, new nodes can be easily added
+and things will "just work."
+
+Ceph includes flexible snapshot mechanism that allows a user to create
+a snapshot on any subdirectory (and its nested contents) in the
+system.  Snapshot creation and deletion are as simple as 'mkdir
+.snap/foo' and 'rmdir .snap/foo'.
+
+Ceph also provides some recursive accounting on directories for nested
+files and bytes.  That is, a 'getfattr -d foo' on any directory in the
+system will reveal the total number of nested regular files and
+subdirectories, and a summation of all nested file sizes.  This makes
+the identification of large disk space consumers relatively quick, as
+no 'du' or similar recursive scan of the file system is required.
+
+Finally, Ceph also allows quotas to be set on any directory in the system.
+The quota can restrict the number of bytes or the number of files stored
+beneath that point in the directory hierarchy.  Quotas can be set using
+extended attributes 'ceph.quota.max_files' and 'ceph.quota.max_bytes', eg::
+
+ setfattr -n ceph.quota.max_bytes -v 100000000 /some/dir
+ getfattr -n ceph.quota.max_bytes /some/dir
+
+A limitation of the current quotas implementation is that it relies on the
+cooperation of the client mounting the file system to stop writers when a
+limit is reached.  A modified or adversarial client cannot be prevented
+from writing as much data as it needs.
+
+Mount Syntax
+============
+
+The basic mount syntax is::
+
+ # mount -t ceph user@fsid.fs_name=/[subdir] mnt -o mon_addr=monip1[:port][/monip2[:port]]
+
+You only need to specify a single monitor, as the client will get the
+full list when it connects.  (However, if the monitor you specify
+happens to be down, the mount won't succeed.)  The port can be left
+off if the monitor is using the default.  So if the monitor is at
+1.2.3.4::
+
+ # mount -t ceph cephuser@07fe3187-00d9-42a3-814b-72a4d5e7d5be.cephfs=/ /mnt/ceph -o mon_addr=1.2.3.4
+
+is sufficient.  If /sbin/mount.ceph is installed, a hostname can be
+used instead of an IP address and the cluster FSID can be left out
+(as the mount helper will fill it in by reading the ceph configuration
+file)::
+
+  # mount -t ceph cephuser@cephfs=/ /mnt/ceph -o mon_addr=mon-addr
+
+Multiple monitor addresses can be passed by separating each address with a slash (`/`)::
+
+  # mount -t ceph cephuser@cephfs=/ /mnt/ceph -o mon_addr=192.168.1.100/192.168.1.101
+
+When using the mount helper, monitor address can be read from ceph
+configuration file if available. Note that, the cluster FSID (passed as part
+of the device string) is validated by checking it with the FSID reported by
+the monitor.
+
+Mount Options
+=============
+
+  mon_addr=ip_address[:port][/ip_address[:port]]
+	Monitor address to the cluster. This is used to bootstrap the
+        connection to the cluster. Once connection is established, the
+        monitor addresses in the monitor map are followed.
+
+  fsid=cluster-id
+	FSID of the cluster (from `ceph fsid` command).
+
+  ip=A.B.C.D[:N]
+	Specify the IP and/or port the client should bind to locally.
+	There is normally not much reason to do this.  If the IP is not
+	specified, the client's IP address is determined by looking at the
+	address its connection to the monitor originates from.
+
+  wsize=X
+	Specify the maximum write size in bytes.  Default: 64 MB.
+
+  rsize=X
+	Specify the maximum read size in bytes.  Default: 64 MB.
+
+  rasize=X
+	Specify the maximum readahead size in bytes.  Default: 8 MB.
+
+  mount_timeout=X
+	Specify the timeout value for mount (in seconds), in the case
+	of a non-responsive Ceph file system.  The default is 60
+	seconds.
+
+  caps_max=X
+	Specify the maximum number of caps to hold. Unused caps are released
+	when number of caps exceeds the limit. The default is 0 (no limit)
+
+  rbytes
+	When stat() is called on a directory, set st_size to 'rbytes',
+	the summation of file sizes over all files nested beneath that
+	directory.  This is the default.
+
+  norbytes
+	When stat() is called on a directory, set st_size to the
+	number of entries in that directory.
+
+  nocrc
+	Disable CRC32C calculation for data writes.  If set, the storage node
+	must rely on TCP's error correction to detect data corruption
+	in the data payload.
+
+  dcache
+        Use the dcache contents to perform negative lookups and
+        readdir when the client has the entire directory contents in
+        its cache.  (This does not change correctness; the client uses
+        cached metadata only when a lease or capability ensures it is
+        valid.)
+
+  nodcache
+        Do not use the dcache as above.  This avoids a significant amount of
+        complex code, sacrificing performance without affecting correctness,
+        and is useful for tracking down bugs.
+
+  noasyncreaddir
+	Do not use the dcache as above for readdir.
+
+  noquotadf
+        Report overall filesystem usage in statfs instead of using the root
+        directory quota.
+
+  nocopyfrom
+        Don't use the RADOS 'copy-from' operation to perform remote object
+        copies.  Currently, it's only used in copy_file_range, which will revert
+        to the default VFS implementation if this option is used.
+
+  recover_session=<no|clean>
+	Set auto reconnect mode in the case where the client is blocklisted. The
+	available modes are "no" and "clean". The default is "no".
+
+	* no: never attempt to reconnect when client detects that it has been
+	  blocklisted. Operations will generally fail after being blocklisted.
+
+	* clean: client reconnects to the ceph cluster automatically when it
+	  detects that it has been blocklisted. During reconnect, client drops
+	  dirty data/metadata, invalidates page caches and writable file handles.
+	  After reconnect, file locks become stale because the MDS loses track
+	  of them. If an inode contains any stale file locks, read/write on the
+	  inode is not allowed until applications release all stale file locks.
+
+More Information
+================
+
+For more information on Ceph, see the home page at
+	https://ceph.com/
+
+The Linux kernel client source tree is available at
+	- https://github.com/ceph/ceph-client.git
+
+and the source for the full system is at
+	https://github.com/ceph/ceph.git
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifsroot.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifsroot.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4930bb443
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/cifsroot.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================================
+Mounting root file system via SMB (cifs.ko)
+===========================================
+
+Written 2019 by Paulo Alcantara <palcantara@suse.de>
+
+Written 2019 by Aurelien Aptel <aaptel@suse.com>
+
+The CONFIG_CIFS_ROOT option enables experimental root file system
+support over the SMB protocol via cifs.ko.
+
+It introduces a new kernel command-line option called 'cifsroot='
+which will tell the kernel to mount the root file system over the
+network by utilizing SMB or CIFS protocol.
+
+In order to mount, the network stack will also need to be set up by
+using 'ip=' config option. For more details, see
+Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfsroot.rst.
+
+A CIFS root mount currently requires the use of SMB1+UNIX Extensions
+which is only supported by the Samba server. SMB1 is the older
+deprecated version of the protocol but it has been extended to support
+POSIX features (See [1]). The equivalent extensions for the newer
+recommended version of the protocol (SMB3) have not been fully
+implemented yet which means SMB3 doesn't support some required POSIX
+file system objects (e.g. block devices, pipes, sockets).
+
+As a result, a CIFS root will default to SMB1 for now but the version
+to use can nonetheless be changed via the 'vers=' mount option.  This
+default will change once the SMB3 POSIX extensions are fully
+implemented.
+
+Server configuration
+====================
+
+To enable SMB1+UNIX extensions you will need to set these global
+settings in Samba smb.conf::
+
+    [global]
+    server min protocol = NT1
+    unix extension = yes        # default
+
+Kernel command line
+===================
+
+::
+
+    root=/dev/cifs
+
+This is just a virtual device that basically tells the kernel to mount
+the root file system via SMB protocol.
+
+::
+
+    cifsroot=//<server-ip>/<share>[,options]
+
+Enables the kernel to mount the root file system via SMB that are
+located in the <server-ip> and <share> specified in this option.
+
+The default mount options are set in fs/cifs/cifsroot.c.
+
+server-ip
+	IPv4 address of the server.
+
+share
+	Path to SMB share (rootfs).
+
+options
+	Optional mount options. For more information, see mount.cifs(8).
+
+Examples
+========
+
+Export root file system as a Samba share in smb.conf file::
+
+    ...
+    [linux]
+	    path = /path/to/rootfs
+	    read only = no
+	    guest ok = yes
+	    force user = root
+	    force group = root
+	    browseable = yes
+	    writeable = yes
+	    admin users = root
+	    public = yes
+	    create mask = 0777
+	    directory mask = 0777
+    ...
+
+Restart smb service::
+
+    # systemctl restart smb
+
+Test it under QEMU on a kernel built with CONFIG_CIFS_ROOT and
+CONFIG_IP_PNP options enabled::
+
+    # qemu-system-x86_64 -enable-kvm -cpu host -m 1024 \
+    -kernel /path/to/linux/arch/x86/boot/bzImage -nographic \
+    -append "root=/dev/cifs rw ip=dhcp cifsroot=//10.0.2.2/linux,username=foo,password=bar console=ttyS0 3"
+
+
+1: https://wiki.samba.org/index.php/UNIX_Extensions
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1c8597a67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+===============================
+CIFS
+===============================
+
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   ksmbd
+   cifsroot
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/ksmbd.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/ksmbd.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7bed96d79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/ksmbd.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==========================
+KSMBD - SMB3 Kernel Server
+==========================
+
+KSMBD is a linux kernel server which implements SMB3 protocol in kernel space
+for sharing files over network.
+
+KSMBD architecture
+==================
+
+The subset of performance related operations belong in kernelspace and
+the other subset which belong to operations which are not really related with
+performance in userspace. So, DCE/RPC management that has historically resulted
+into number of buffer overflow issues and dangerous security bugs and user
+account management are implemented in user space as ksmbd.mountd.
+File operations that are related with performance (open/read/write/close etc.)
+in kernel space (ksmbd). This also allows for easier integration with VFS
+interface for all file operations.
+
+ksmbd (kernel daemon)
+---------------------
+
+When the server daemon is started, It starts up a forker thread
+(ksmbd/interface name) at initialization time and open a dedicated port 445
+for listening to SMB requests. Whenever new clients make request, Forker
+thread will accept the client connection and fork a new thread for dedicated
+communication channel between the client and the server. It allows for parallel
+processing of SMB requests(commands) from clients as well as allowing for new
+clients to make new connections. Each instance is named ksmbd/1~n(port number)
+to indicate connected clients. Depending on the SMB request types, each new
+thread can decide to pass through the commands to the user space (ksmbd.mountd),
+currently DCE/RPC commands are identified to be handled through the user space.
+To further utilize the linux kernel, it has been chosen to process the commands
+as workitems and to be executed in the handlers of the ksmbd-io kworker threads.
+It allows for multiplexing of the handlers as the kernel take care of initiating
+extra worker threads if the load is increased and vice versa, if the load is
+decreased it destroys the extra worker threads. So, after connection is
+established with client. Dedicated ksmbd/1..n(port number) takes complete
+ownership of receiving/parsing of SMB commands. Each received command is worked
+in parallel i.e., There can be multiple clients commands which are worked in
+parallel. After receiving each command a separated kernel workitem is prepared
+for each command which is further queued to be handled by ksmbd-io kworkers.
+So, each SMB workitem is queued to the kworkers. This allows the benefit of load
+sharing to be managed optimally by the default kernel and optimizing client
+performance by handling client commands in parallel.
+
+ksmbd.mountd (user space daemon)
+--------------------------------
+
+ksmbd.mountd is userspace process to, transfer user account and password that
+are registered using ksmbd.adduser (part of utils for user space). Further it
+allows sharing information parameters that parsed from smb.conf to ksmbd in
+kernel. For the execution part it has a daemon which is continuously running
+and connected to the kernel interface using netlink socket, it waits for the
+requests (dcerpc and share/user info). It handles RPC calls (at a minimum few
+dozen) that are most important for file server from NetShareEnum and
+NetServerGetInfo. Complete DCE/RPC response is prepared from the user space
+and passed over to the associated kernel thread for the client.
+
+
+KSMBD Feature Status
+====================
+
+============================== =================================================
+Feature name                   Status
+============================== =================================================
+Dialects                       Supported. SMB2.1 SMB3.0, SMB3.1.1 dialects
+                               (intentionally excludes security vulnerable SMB1
+                               dialect).
+Auto Negotiation               Supported.
+Compound Request               Supported.
+Oplock Cache Mechanism         Supported.
+SMB2 leases(v1 lease)          Supported.
+Directory leases(v2 lease)     Planned for future.
+Multi-credits                  Supported.
+NTLM/NTLMv2                    Supported.
+HMAC-SHA256 Signing            Supported.
+Secure negotiate               Supported.
+Signing Update                 Supported.
+Pre-authentication integrity   Supported.
+SMB3 encryption(CCM, GCM)      Supported. (CCM and GCM128 supported, GCM256 in
+                               progress)
+SMB direct(RDMA)               Supported.
+SMB3 Multi-channel             Partially Supported. Planned to implement
+                               replay/retry mechanisms for future.
+Receive Side Scaling mode      Supported.
+SMB3.1.1 POSIX extension       Supported.
+ACLs                           Partially Supported. only DACLs available, SACLs
+                               (auditing) is planned for the future. For
+                               ownership (SIDs) ksmbd generates random subauth
+                               values(then store it to disk) and use uid/gid
+                               get from inode as RID for local domain SID.
+                               The current acl implementation is limited to
+                               standalone server, not a domain member.
+                               Integration with Samba tools is being worked on
+                               to allow future support for running as a domain
+                               member.
+Kerberos                       Supported.
+Durable handle v1,v2           Planned for future.
+Persistent handle              Planned for future.
+SMB2 notify                    Planned for future.
+Sparse file support            Supported.
+DCE/RPC support                Partially Supported. a few calls(NetShareEnumAll,
+                               NetServerGetInfo, SAMR, LSARPC) that are needed
+                               for file server handled via netlink interface
+                               from ksmbd.mountd. Additional integration with
+                               Samba tools and libraries via upcall is being
+                               investigated to allow support for additional
+                               DCE/RPC management calls (and future support
+                               for Witness protocol e.g.)
+ksmbd/nfsd interoperability    Planned for future. The features that ksmbd
+                               support are Leases, Notify, ACLs and Share modes.
+============================== =================================================
+
+
+How to run
+==========
+
+1. Download ksmbd-tools(https://github.com/cifsd-team/ksmbd-tools/releases) and
+   compile them.
+
+   - Refer README(https://github.com/cifsd-team/ksmbd-tools/blob/master/README.md)
+     to know how to use ksmbd.mountd/adduser/addshare/control utils
+
+     $ ./autogen.sh
+     $ ./configure --with-rundir=/run
+     $ make && sudo make install
+
+2. Create /usr/local/etc/ksmbd/ksmbd.conf file, add SMB share in ksmbd.conf file.
+
+   - Refer ksmbd.conf.example in ksmbd-utils, See ksmbd.conf manpage
+     for details to configure shares.
+
+        $ man ksmbd.conf
+
+3. Create user/password for SMB share.
+
+   - See ksmbd.adduser manpage.
+
+     $ man ksmbd.adduser
+     $ sudo ksmbd.adduser -a <Enter USERNAME for SMB share access>
+
+4. Insert ksmbd.ko module after build your kernel. No need to load module
+   if ksmbd is built into the kernel.
+
+   - Set ksmbd in menuconfig(e.g. $ make menuconfig)
+       [*] Network File Systems  --->
+           <M> SMB3 server support (EXPERIMENTAL)
+
+	$ sudo modprobe ksmbd.ko
+
+5. Start ksmbd user space daemon
+
+	$ sudo ksmbd.mountd
+
+6. Access share from Windows or Linux using SMB3 client (cifs.ko or smbclient of samba)
+
+Shutdown KSMBD
+==============
+
+1. kill user and kernel space daemon
+	# sudo ksmbd.control -s
+
+How to turn debug print on
+==========================
+
+Each layer
+/sys/class/ksmbd-control/debug
+
+1. Enable all component prints
+	# sudo ksmbd.control -d "all"
+
+2. Enable one of components (smb, auth, vfs, oplock, ipc, conn, rdma)
+	# sudo ksmbd.control -d "smb"
+
+3. Show what prints are enabled.
+	# cat /sys/class/ksmbd-control/debug
+	  [smb] auth vfs oplock ipc conn [rdma]
+
+4. Disable prints:
+	If you try the selected component once more, It is disabled without brackets.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/coda.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/coda.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bdde7e4e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/coda.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,1670 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================
+Coda Kernel-Venus Interface
+===========================
+
+.. Note::
+
+   This is one of the technical documents describing a component of
+   Coda -- this document describes the client kernel-Venus interface.
+
+For more information:
+
+  http://www.coda.cs.cmu.edu
+
+For user level software needed to run Coda:
+
+  ftp://ftp.coda.cs.cmu.edu
+
+To run Coda you need to get a user level cache manager for the client,
+named Venus, as well as tools to manipulate ACLs, to log in, etc.  The
+client needs to have the Coda filesystem selected in the kernel
+configuration.
+
+The server needs a user level server and at present does not depend on
+kernel support.
+
+  The Venus kernel interface
+
+  Peter J. Braam
+
+  v1.0, Nov 9, 1997
+
+  This document describes the communication between Venus and kernel
+  level filesystem code needed for the operation of the Coda file sys-
+  tem.  This document version is meant to describe the current interface
+  (version 1.0) as well as improvements we envisage.
+
+.. Table of Contents
+
+  1. Introduction
+
+  2. Servicing Coda filesystem calls
+
+  3. The message layer
+
+     3.1 Implementation details
+
+  4. The interface at the call level
+
+     4.1 Data structures shared by the kernel and Venus
+     4.2 The pioctl interface
+     4.3 root
+     4.4 lookup
+     4.5 getattr
+     4.6 setattr
+     4.7 access
+     4.8 create
+     4.9 mkdir
+     4.10 link
+     4.11 symlink
+     4.12 remove
+     4.13 rmdir
+     4.14 readlink
+     4.15 open
+     4.16 close
+     4.17 ioctl
+     4.18 rename
+     4.19 readdir
+     4.20 vget
+     4.21 fsync
+     4.22 inactive
+     4.23 rdwr
+     4.24 odymount
+     4.25 ody_lookup
+     4.26 ody_expand
+     4.27 prefetch
+     4.28 signal
+
+  5. The minicache and downcalls
+
+     5.1 INVALIDATE
+     5.2 FLUSH
+     5.3 PURGEUSER
+     5.4 ZAPFILE
+     5.5 ZAPDIR
+     5.6 ZAPVNODE
+     5.7 PURGEFID
+     5.8 REPLACE
+
+  6. Initialization and cleanup
+
+     6.1 Requirements
+
+1. Introduction
+===============
+
+  A key component in the Coda Distributed File System is the cache
+  manager, Venus.
+
+  When processes on a Coda enabled system access files in the Coda
+  filesystem, requests are directed at the filesystem layer in the
+  operating system. The operating system will communicate with Venus to
+  service the request for the process.  Venus manages a persistent
+  client cache and makes remote procedure calls to Coda file servers and
+  related servers (such as authentication servers) to service these
+  requests it receives from the operating system.  When Venus has
+  serviced a request it replies to the operating system with appropriate
+  return codes, and other data related to the request.  Optionally the
+  kernel support for Coda may maintain a minicache of recently processed
+  requests to limit the number of interactions with Venus.  Venus
+  possesses the facility to inform the kernel when elements from its
+  minicache are no longer valid.
+
+  This document describes precisely this communication between the
+  kernel and Venus.  The definitions of so called upcalls and downcalls
+  will be given with the format of the data they handle. We shall also
+  describe the semantic invariants resulting from the calls.
+
+  Historically Coda was implemented in a BSD file system in Mach 2.6.
+  The interface between the kernel and Venus is very similar to the BSD
+  VFS interface.  Similar functionality is provided, and the format of
+  the parameters and returned data is very similar to the BSD VFS.  This
+  leads to an almost natural environment for implementing a kernel-level
+  filesystem driver for Coda in a BSD system.  However, other operating
+  systems such as Linux and Windows 95 and NT have virtual filesystem
+  with different interfaces.
+
+  To implement Coda on these systems some reverse engineering of the
+  Venus/Kernel protocol is necessary.  Also it came to light that other
+  systems could profit significantly from certain small optimizations
+  and modifications to the protocol. To facilitate this work as well as
+  to make future ports easier, communication between Venus and the
+  kernel should be documented in great detail.  This is the aim of this
+  document.
+
+2.  Servicing Coda filesystem calls
+===================================
+
+  The service of a request for a Coda file system service originates in
+  a process P which accessing a Coda file. It makes a system call which
+  traps to the OS kernel. Examples of such calls trapping to the kernel
+  are ``read``, ``write``, ``open``, ``close``, ``create``, ``mkdir``,
+  ``rmdir``, ``chmod`` in a Unix ontext.  Similar calls exist in the Win32
+  environment, and are named ``CreateFile``.
+
+  Generally the operating system handles the request in a virtual
+  filesystem (VFS) layer, which is named I/O Manager in NT and IFS
+  manager in Windows 95.  The VFS is responsible for partial processing
+  of the request and for locating the specific filesystem(s) which will
+  service parts of the request.  Usually the information in the path
+  assists in locating the correct FS drivers.  Sometimes after extensive
+  pre-processing, the VFS starts invoking exported routines in the FS
+  driver.  This is the point where the FS specific processing of the
+  request starts, and here the Coda specific kernel code comes into
+  play.
+
+  The FS layer for Coda must expose and implement several interfaces.
+  First and foremost the VFS must be able to make all necessary calls to
+  the Coda FS layer, so the Coda FS driver must expose the VFS interface
+  as applicable in the operating system. These differ very significantly
+  among operating systems, but share features such as facilities to
+  read/write and create and remove objects.  The Coda FS layer services
+  such VFS requests by invoking one or more well defined services
+  offered by the cache manager Venus.  When the replies from Venus have
+  come back to the FS driver, servicing of the VFS call continues and
+  finishes with a reply to the kernel's VFS. Finally the VFS layer
+  returns to the process.
+
+  As a result of this design a basic interface exposed by the FS driver
+  must allow Venus to manage message traffic.  In particular Venus must
+  be able to retrieve and place messages and to be notified of the
+  arrival of a new message. The notification must be through a mechanism
+  which does not block Venus since Venus must attend to other tasks even
+  when no messages are waiting or being processed.
+
+  **Interfaces of the Coda FS Driver**
+
+  Furthermore the FS layer provides for a special path of communication
+  between a user process and Venus, called the pioctl interface. The
+  pioctl interface is used for Coda specific services, such as
+  requesting detailed information about the persistent cache managed by
+  Venus. Here the involvement of the kernel is minimal.  It identifies
+  the calling process and passes the information on to Venus.  When
+  Venus replies the response is passed back to the caller in unmodified
+  form.
+
+  Finally Venus allows the kernel FS driver to cache the results from
+  certain services.  This is done to avoid excessive context switches
+  and results in an efficient system.  However, Venus may acquire
+  information, for example from the network which implies that cached
+  information must be flushed or replaced. Venus then makes a downcall
+  to the Coda FS layer to request flushes or updates in the cache.  The
+  kernel FS driver handles such requests synchronously.
+
+  Among these interfaces the VFS interface and the facility to place,
+  receive and be notified of messages are platform specific.  We will
+  not go into the calls exported to the VFS layer but we will state the
+  requirements of the message exchange mechanism.
+
+
+3.  The message layer
+=====================
+
+  At the lowest level the communication between Venus and the FS driver
+  proceeds through messages.  The synchronization between processes
+  requesting Coda file service and Venus relies on blocking and waking
+  up processes.  The Coda FS driver processes VFS- and pioctl-requests
+  on behalf of a process P, creates messages for Venus, awaits replies
+  and finally returns to the caller.  The implementation of the exchange
+  of messages is platform specific, but the semantics have (so far)
+  appeared to be generally applicable.  Data buffers are created by the
+  FS Driver in kernel memory on behalf of P and copied to user memory in
+  Venus.
+
+  The FS Driver while servicing P makes upcalls to Venus.  Such an
+  upcall is dispatched to Venus by creating a message structure.  The
+  structure contains the identification of P, the message sequence
+  number, the size of the request and a pointer to the data in kernel
+  memory for the request.  Since the data buffer is re-used to hold the
+  reply from Venus, there is a field for the size of the reply.  A flags
+  field is used in the message to precisely record the status of the
+  message.  Additional platform dependent structures involve pointers to
+  determine the position of the message on queues and pointers to
+  synchronization objects.  In the upcall routine the message structure
+  is filled in, flags are set to 0, and it is placed on the *pending*
+  queue.  The routine calling upcall is responsible for allocating the
+  data buffer; its structure will be described in the next section.
+
+  A facility must exist to notify Venus that the message has been
+  created, and implemented using available synchronization objects in
+  the OS. This notification is done in the upcall context of the process
+  P. When the message is on the pending queue, process P cannot proceed
+  in upcall.  The (kernel mode) processing of P in the filesystem
+  request routine must be suspended until Venus has replied.  Therefore
+  the calling thread in P is blocked in upcall.  A pointer in the
+  message structure will locate the synchronization object on which P is
+  sleeping.
+
+  Venus detects the notification that a message has arrived, and the FS
+  driver allow Venus to retrieve the message with a getmsg_from_kernel
+  call. This action finishes in the kernel by putting the message on the
+  queue of processing messages and setting flags to READ.  Venus is
+  passed the contents of the data buffer. The getmsg_from_kernel call
+  now returns and Venus processes the request.
+
+  At some later point the FS driver receives a message from Venus,
+  namely when Venus calls sendmsg_to_kernel.  At this moment the Coda FS
+  driver looks at the contents of the message and decides if:
+
+
+  *  the message is a reply for a suspended thread P.  If so it removes
+     the message from the processing queue and marks the message as
+     WRITTEN.  Finally, the FS driver unblocks P (still in the kernel
+     mode context of Venus) and the sendmsg_to_kernel call returns to
+     Venus.  The process P will be scheduled at some point and continues
+     processing its upcall with the data buffer replaced with the reply
+     from Venus.
+
+  *  The message is a ``downcall``.  A downcall is a request from Venus to
+     the FS Driver. The FS driver processes the request immediately
+     (usually a cache eviction or replacement) and when it finishes
+     sendmsg_to_kernel returns.
+
+  Now P awakes and continues processing upcall.  There are some
+  subtleties to take account of. First P will determine if it was woken
+  up in upcall by a signal from some other source (for example an
+  attempt to terminate P) or as is normally the case by Venus in its
+  sendmsg_to_kernel call.  In the normal case, the upcall routine will
+  deallocate the message structure and return.  The FS routine can proceed
+  with its processing.
+
+
+  **Sleeping and IPC arrangements**
+
+  In case P is woken up by a signal and not by Venus, it will first look
+  at the flags field.  If the message is not yet READ, the process P can
+  handle its signal without notifying Venus.  If Venus has READ, and
+  the request should not be processed, P can send Venus a signal message
+  to indicate that it should disregard the previous message.  Such
+  signals are put in the queue at the head, and read first by Venus.  If
+  the message is already marked as WRITTEN it is too late to stop the
+  processing.  The VFS routine will now continue.  (-- If a VFS request
+  involves more than one upcall, this can lead to complicated state, an
+  extra field "handle_signals" could be added in the message structure
+  to indicate points of no return have been passed.--)
+
+
+
+3.1.  Implementation details
+----------------------------
+
+  The Unix implementation of this mechanism has been through the
+  implementation of a character device associated with Coda.  Venus
+  retrieves messages by doing a read on the device, replies are sent
+  with a write and notification is through the select system call on the
+  file descriptor for the device.  The process P is kept waiting on an
+  interruptible wait queue object.
+
+  In Windows NT and the DPMI Windows 95 implementation a DeviceIoControl
+  call is used.  The DeviceIoControl call is designed to copy buffers
+  from user memory to kernel memory with OPCODES. The sendmsg_to_kernel
+  is issued as a synchronous call, while the getmsg_from_kernel call is
+  asynchronous.  Windows EventObjects are used for notification of
+  message arrival.  The process P is kept waiting on a KernelEvent
+  object in NT and a semaphore in Windows 95.
+
+
+4.  The interface at the call level
+===================================
+
+
+  This section describes the upcalls a Coda FS driver can make to Venus.
+  Each of these upcalls make use of two structures: inputArgs and
+  outputArgs.   In pseudo BNF form the structures take the following
+  form::
+
+
+	struct inputArgs {
+	    u_long opcode;
+	    u_long unique;     /* Keep multiple outstanding msgs distinct */
+	    u_short pid;                 /* Common to all */
+	    u_short pgid;                /* Common to all */
+	    struct CodaCred cred;        /* Common to all */
+
+	    <union "in" of call dependent parts of inputArgs>
+	};
+
+	struct outputArgs {
+	    u_long opcode;
+	    u_long unique;       /* Keep multiple outstanding msgs distinct */
+	    u_long result;
+
+	    <union "out" of call dependent parts of inputArgs>
+	};
+
+
+
+  Before going on let us elucidate the role of the various fields. The
+  inputArgs start with the opcode which defines the type of service
+  requested from Venus. There are approximately 30 upcalls at present
+  which we will discuss.   The unique field labels the inputArg with a
+  unique number which will identify the message uniquely.  A process and
+  process group id are passed.  Finally the credentials of the caller
+  are included.
+
+  Before delving into the specific calls we need to discuss a variety of
+  data structures shared by the kernel and Venus.
+
+
+
+
+4.1.  Data structures shared by the kernel and Venus
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+
+  The CodaCred structure defines a variety of user and group ids as
+  they are set for the calling process. The vuid_t and vgid_t are 32 bit
+  unsigned integers.  It also defines group membership in an array.  On
+  Unix the CodaCred has proven sufficient to implement good security
+  semantics for Coda but the structure may have to undergo modification
+  for the Windows environment when these mature::
+
+	struct CodaCred {
+	    vuid_t cr_uid, cr_euid, cr_suid, cr_fsuid; /* Real, effective, set, fs uid */
+	    vgid_t cr_gid, cr_egid, cr_sgid, cr_fsgid; /* same for groups */
+	    vgid_t cr_groups[NGROUPS];        /* Group membership for caller */
+	};
+
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     It is questionable if we need CodaCreds in Venus. Finally Venus
+     doesn't know about groups, although it does create files with the
+     default uid/gid.  Perhaps the list of group membership is superfluous.
+
+
+  The next item is the fundamental identifier used to identify Coda
+  files, the ViceFid.  A fid of a file uniquely defines a file or
+  directory in the Coda filesystem within a cell [1]_::
+
+	typedef struct ViceFid {
+	    VolumeId Volume;
+	    VnodeId Vnode;
+	    Unique_t Unique;
+	} ViceFid;
+
+  .. [1] A cell is agroup of Coda servers acting under the aegis of a single
+	 system control machine or SCM. See the Coda Administration manual
+	 for a detailed description of the role of the SCM.
+
+  Each of the constituent fields: VolumeId, VnodeId and Unique_t are
+  unsigned 32 bit integers.  We envisage that a further field will need
+  to be prefixed to identify the Coda cell; this will probably take the
+  form of a Ipv6 size IP address naming the Coda cell through DNS.
+
+  The next important structure shared between Venus and the kernel is
+  the attributes of the file.  The following structure is used to
+  exchange information.  It has room for future extensions such as
+  support for device files (currently not present in Coda)::
+
+
+	struct coda_timespec {
+		int64_t         tv_sec;         /* seconds */
+		long            tv_nsec;        /* nanoseconds */
+	};
+
+	struct coda_vattr {
+		enum coda_vtype va_type;        /* vnode type (for create) */
+		u_short         va_mode;        /* files access mode and type */
+		short           va_nlink;       /* number of references to file */
+		vuid_t          va_uid;         /* owner user id */
+		vgid_t          va_gid;         /* owner group id */
+		long            va_fsid;        /* file system id (dev for now) */
+		long            va_fileid;      /* file id */
+		u_quad_t        va_size;        /* file size in bytes */
+		long            va_blocksize;   /* blocksize preferred for i/o */
+		struct coda_timespec va_atime;  /* time of last access */
+		struct coda_timespec va_mtime;  /* time of last modification */
+		struct coda_timespec va_ctime;  /* time file changed */
+		u_long          va_gen;         /* generation number of file */
+		u_long          va_flags;       /* flags defined for file */
+		dev_t           va_rdev;        /* device special file represents */
+		u_quad_t        va_bytes;       /* bytes of disk space held by file */
+		u_quad_t        va_filerev;     /* file modification number */
+		u_int           va_vaflags;     /* operations flags, see below */
+		long            va_spare;       /* remain quad aligned */
+	};
+
+
+4.2.  The pioctl interface
+--------------------------
+
+
+  Coda specific requests can be made by application through the pioctl
+  interface. The pioctl is implemented as an ordinary ioctl on a
+  fictitious file /coda/.CONTROL.  The pioctl call opens this file, gets
+  a file handle and makes the ioctl call. Finally it closes the file.
+
+  The kernel involvement in this is limited to providing the facility to
+  open and close and pass the ioctl message and to verify that a path in
+  the pioctl data buffers is a file in a Coda filesystem.
+
+  The kernel is handed a data packet of the form::
+
+	struct {
+	    const char *path;
+	    struct ViceIoctl vidata;
+	    int follow;
+	} data;
+
+
+
+  where::
+
+
+	struct ViceIoctl {
+		caddr_t in, out;        /* Data to be transferred in, or out */
+		short in_size;          /* Size of input buffer <= 2K */
+		short out_size;         /* Maximum size of output buffer, <= 2K */
+	};
+
+
+
+  The path must be a Coda file, otherwise the ioctl upcall will not be
+  made.
+
+  .. Note:: The data structures and code are a mess.  We need to clean this up.
+
+
+**We now proceed to document the individual calls**:
+
+
+4.3.  root
+----------
+
+
+  Arguments
+     in
+
+	empty
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_root_out {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		} cfs_root;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This call is made to Venus during the initialization of
+    the Coda filesystem. If the result is zero, the cfs_root structure
+    contains the ViceFid of the root of the Coda filesystem. If a non-zero
+    result is generated, its value is a platform dependent error code
+    indicating the difficulty Venus encountered in locating the root of
+    the Coda filesystem.
+
+4.4.  lookup
+------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Find the ViceFid and type of an object in a directory if it exists.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct  cfs_lookup_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;
+		    char        *name;          /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_lookup;
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_lookup_out {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		    int vtype;
+		} cfs_lookup;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This call is made to determine the ViceFid and filetype of
+    a directory entry.  The directory entry requested carries name 'name'
+    and Venus will search the directory identified by cfs_lookup_in.VFid.
+    The result may indicate that the name does not exist, or that
+    difficulty was encountered in finding it (e.g. due to disconnection).
+    If the result is zero, the field cfs_lookup_out.VFid contains the
+    targets ViceFid and cfs_lookup_out.vtype the coda_vtype giving the
+    type of object the name designates.
+
+  The name of the object is an 8 bit character string of maximum length
+  CFS_MAXNAMLEN, currently set to 256 (including a 0 terminator.)
+
+  It is extremely important to realize that Venus bitwise ors the field
+  cfs_lookup.vtype with CFS_NOCACHE to indicate that the object should
+  not be put in the kernel name cache.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     The type of the vtype is currently wrong.  It should be
+     coda_vtype. Linux does not take note of CFS_NOCACHE.  It should.
+
+
+4.5.  getattr
+-------------
+
+
+  Summary Get the attributes of a file.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_getattr_in {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		    struct coda_vattr attr; /* XXXXX */
+		} cfs_getattr;
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_getattr_out {
+		    struct coda_vattr attr;
+		} cfs_getattr;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This call returns the attributes of the file identified by fid.
+
+  Errors
+    Errors can occur if the object with fid does not exist, is
+    unaccessible or if the caller does not have permission to fetch
+    attributes.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     Many kernel FS drivers (Linux, NT and Windows 95) need to acquire
+     the attributes as well as the Fid for the instantiation of an internal
+     "inode" or "FileHandle".  A significant improvement in performance on
+     such systems could be made by combining the lookup and getattr calls
+     both at the Venus/kernel interaction level and at the RPC level.
+
+  The vattr structure included in the input arguments is superfluous and
+  should be removed.
+
+
+4.6.  setattr
+-------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Set the attributes of a file.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_setattr_in {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		    struct coda_vattr attr;
+		} cfs_setattr;
+
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	empty
+
+  Description
+    The structure attr is filled with attributes to be changed
+    in BSD style.  Attributes not to be changed are set to -1, apart from
+    vtype which is set to VNON. Other are set to the value to be assigned.
+    The only attributes which the FS driver may request to change are the
+    mode, owner, groupid, atime, mtime and ctime.  The return value
+    indicates success or failure.
+
+  Errors
+    A variety of errors can occur.  The object may not exist, may
+    be inaccessible, or permission may not be granted by Venus.
+
+
+4.7.  access
+------------
+
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_access_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;
+		    int flags;
+		} cfs_access;
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	empty
+
+  Description
+    Verify if access to the object identified by VFid for
+    operations described by flags is permitted.  The result indicates if
+    access will be granted.  It is important to remember that Coda uses
+    ACLs to enforce protection and that ultimately the servers, not the
+    clients enforce the security of the system.  The result of this call
+    will depend on whether a token is held by the user.
+
+  Errors
+    The object may not exist, or the ACL describing the protection
+    may not be accessible.
+
+
+4.8.  create
+------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Invoked to create a file
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_create_in {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		    struct coda_vattr attr;
+		    int excl;
+		    int mode;
+		    char        *name;          /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_create;
+
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_create_out {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		    struct coda_vattr attr;
+		} cfs_create;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This upcall is invoked to request creation of a file.
+    The file will be created in the directory identified by VFid, its name
+    will be name, and the mode will be mode.  If excl is set an error will
+    be returned if the file already exists.  If the size field in attr is
+    set to zero the file will be truncated.  The uid and gid of the file
+    are set by converting the CodaCred to a uid using a macro CRTOUID
+    (this macro is platform dependent).  Upon success the VFid and
+    attributes of the file are returned.  The Coda FS Driver will normally
+    instantiate a vnode, inode or file handle at kernel level for the new
+    object.
+
+
+  Errors
+    A variety of errors can occur. Permissions may be insufficient.
+    If the object exists and is not a file the error EISDIR is returned
+    under Unix.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     The packing of parameters is very inefficient and appears to
+     indicate confusion between the system call creat and the VFS operation
+     create. The VFS operation create is only called to create new objects.
+     This create call differs from the Unix one in that it is not invoked
+     to return a file descriptor. The truncate and exclusive options,
+     together with the mode, could simply be part of the mode as it is
+     under Unix.  There should be no flags argument; this is used in open
+     (2) to return a file descriptor for READ or WRITE mode.
+
+  The attributes of the directory should be returned too, since the size
+  and mtime changed.
+
+
+4.9.  mkdir
+-----------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Create a new directory.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_mkdir_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;
+		    struct coda_vattr attr;
+		    char        *name;          /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_mkdir;
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_mkdir_out {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		    struct coda_vattr attr;
+		} cfs_mkdir;
+
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This call is similar to create but creates a directory.
+    Only the mode field in the input parameters is used for creation.
+    Upon successful creation, the attr returned contains the attributes of
+    the new directory.
+
+  Errors
+    As for create.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     The input parameter should be changed to mode instead of
+     attributes.
+
+  The attributes of the parent should be returned since the size and
+  mtime changes.
+
+
+4.10.  link
+-----------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Create a link to an existing file.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_link_in {
+		    ViceFid sourceFid;          /* cnode to link *to* */
+		    ViceFid destFid;            /* Directory in which to place link */
+		    char        *tname;         /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_link;
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	empty
+
+  Description
+    This call creates a link to the sourceFid in the directory
+    identified by destFid with name tname.  The source must reside in the
+    target's parent, i.e. the source must be have parent destFid, i.e. Coda
+    does not support cross directory hard links.  Only the return value is
+    relevant.  It indicates success or the type of failure.
+
+  Errors
+    The usual errors can occur.
+
+
+4.11.  symlink
+--------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    create a symbolic link
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_symlink_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;          /* Directory to put symlink in */
+		    char        *srcname;
+		    struct coda_vattr attr;
+		    char        *tname;
+		} cfs_symlink;
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	none
+
+  Description
+    Create a symbolic link. The link is to be placed in the
+    directory identified by VFid and named tname.  It should point to the
+    pathname srcname.  The attributes of the newly created object are to
+    be set to attr.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     The attributes of the target directory should be returned since
+     its size changed.
+
+
+4.12.  remove
+-------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Remove a file
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_remove_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;
+		    char        *name;          /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_remove;
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	none
+
+  Description
+    Remove file named cfs_remove_in.name in directory
+    identified by   VFid.
+
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     The attributes of the directory should be returned since its
+     mtime and size may change.
+
+
+4.13.  rmdir
+------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Remove a directory
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_rmdir_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;
+		    char        *name;          /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_rmdir;
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	none
+
+  Description
+    Remove the directory with name 'name' from the directory
+    identified by VFid.
+
+  .. Note:: The attributes of the parent directory should be returned since
+	    its mtime and size may change.
+
+
+4.14.  readlink
+---------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Read the value of a symbolic link.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_readlink_in {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		} cfs_readlink;
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_readlink_out {
+		    int count;
+		    caddr_t     data;           /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_readlink;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This routine reads the contents of symbolic link
+    identified by VFid into the buffer data.  The buffer data must be able
+    to hold any name up to CFS_MAXNAMLEN (PATH or NAM??).
+
+  Errors
+    No unusual errors.
+
+
+4.15.  open
+-----------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Open a file.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_open_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;
+		    int flags;
+		} cfs_open;
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_open_out {
+		    dev_t       dev;
+		    ino_t       inode;
+		} cfs_open;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This request asks Venus to place the file identified by
+    VFid in its cache and to note that the calling process wishes to open
+    it with flags as in open(2).  The return value to the kernel differs
+    for Unix and Windows systems.  For Unix systems the Coda FS Driver is
+    informed of the device and inode number of the container file in the
+    fields dev and inode.  For Windows the path of the container file is
+    returned to the kernel.
+
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     Currently the cfs_open_out structure is not properly adapted to
+     deal with the Windows case.  It might be best to implement two
+     upcalls, one to open aiming at a container file name, the other at a
+     container file inode.
+
+
+4.16.  close
+------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Close a file, update it on the servers.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_close_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;
+		    int flags;
+		} cfs_close;
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	none
+
+  Description
+    Close the file identified by VFid.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     The flags argument is bogus and not used.  However, Venus' code
+     has room to deal with an execp input field, probably this field should
+     be used to inform Venus that the file was closed but is still memory
+     mapped for execution.  There are comments about fetching versus not
+     fetching the data in Venus vproc_vfscalls.  This seems silly.  If a
+     file is being closed, the data in the container file is to be the new
+     data.  Here again the execp flag might be in play to create confusion:
+     currently Venus might think a file can be flushed from the cache when
+     it is still memory mapped.  This needs to be understood.
+
+
+4.17.  ioctl
+------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Do an ioctl on a file. This includes the pioctl interface.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_ioctl_in {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		    int cmd;
+		    int len;
+		    int rwflag;
+		    char *data;                 /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_ioctl;
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+
+		struct cfs_ioctl_out {
+		    int len;
+		    caddr_t     data;           /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_ioctl;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    Do an ioctl operation on a file.  The command, len and
+    data arguments are filled as usual.  flags is not used by Venus.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     Another bogus parameter.  flags is not used.  What is the
+     business about PREFETCHING in the Venus code?
+
+
+
+4.18.  rename
+-------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Rename a fid.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_rename_in {
+		    ViceFid     sourceFid;
+		    char        *srcname;
+		    ViceFid destFid;
+		    char        *destname;
+		} cfs_rename;
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	none
+
+  Description
+    Rename the object with name srcname in directory
+    sourceFid to destname in destFid.   It is important that the names
+    srcname and destname are 0 terminated strings.  Strings in Unix
+    kernels are not always null terminated.
+
+
+4.19.  readdir
+--------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Read directory entries.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_readdir_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;
+		    int count;
+		    int offset;
+		} cfs_readdir;
+
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_readdir_out {
+		    int size;
+		    caddr_t     data;           /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_readdir;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    Read directory entries from VFid starting at offset and
+    read at most count bytes.  Returns the data in data and returns
+    the size in size.
+
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     This call is not used.  Readdir operations exploit container
+     files.  We will re-evaluate this during the directory revamp which is
+     about to take place.
+
+
+4.20.  vget
+-----------
+
+
+  Summary
+    instructs Venus to do an FSDB->Get.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_vget_in {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		} cfs_vget;
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_vget_out {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		    int vtype;
+		} cfs_vget;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This upcall asks Venus to do a get operation on an fsobj
+    labelled by VFid.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     This operation is not used.  However, it is extremely useful
+     since it can be used to deal with read/write memory mapped files.
+     These can be "pinned" in the Venus cache using vget and released with
+     inactive.
+
+
+4.21.  fsync
+------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Tell Venus to update the RVM attributes of a file.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_fsync_in {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		} cfs_fsync;
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	none
+
+  Description
+    Ask Venus to update RVM attributes of object VFid. This
+    should be called as part of kernel level fsync type calls.  The
+    result indicates if the syncing was successful.
+
+  .. Note:: Linux does not implement this call. It should.
+
+
+4.22.  inactive
+---------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Tell Venus a vnode is no longer in use.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_inactive_in {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		} cfs_inactive;
+
+
+
+     out
+
+	none
+
+  Description
+    This operation returns EOPNOTSUPP.
+
+  .. Note:: This should perhaps be removed.
+
+
+4.23.  rdwr
+-----------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Read or write from a file
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct cfs_rdwr_in {
+		    ViceFid     VFid;
+		    int rwflag;
+		    int count;
+		    int offset;
+		    int ioflag;
+		    caddr_t     data;           /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_rdwr;
+
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct cfs_rdwr_out {
+		    int rwflag;
+		    int count;
+		    caddr_t     data;   /* Place holder for data. */
+		} cfs_rdwr;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This upcall asks Venus to read or write from a file.
+
+
+  .. Note::
+
+    It should be removed since it is against the Coda philosophy that
+    read/write operations never reach Venus.  I have been told the
+    operation does not work.  It is not currently used.
+
+
+
+4.24.  odymount
+---------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Allows mounting multiple Coda "filesystems" on one Unix mount point.
+
+  Arguments
+     in::
+
+		struct ody_mount_in {
+		    char        *name;          /* Place holder for data. */
+		} ody_mount;
+
+
+
+     out::
+
+		struct ody_mount_out {
+		    ViceFid VFid;
+		} ody_mount;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    Asks Venus to return the rootfid of a Coda system named
+    name.  The fid is returned in VFid.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     This call was used by David for dynamic sets.  It should be
+     removed since it causes a jungle of pointers in the VFS mounting area.
+     It is not used by Coda proper.  Call is not implemented by Venus.
+
+
+4.25.  ody_lookup
+-----------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Looks up something.
+
+  Arguments
+     in
+
+	irrelevant
+
+
+     out
+
+	irrelevant
+
+
+  .. Note:: Gut it. Call is not implemented by Venus.
+
+
+4.26.  ody_expand
+-----------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    expands something in a dynamic set.
+
+  Arguments
+     in
+
+	irrelevant
+
+     out
+
+	irrelevant
+
+  .. Note:: Gut it. Call is not implemented by Venus.
+
+
+4.27.  prefetch
+---------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Prefetch a dynamic set.
+
+  Arguments
+
+     in
+
+	Not documented.
+
+     out
+
+	Not documented.
+
+  Description
+    Venus worker.cc has support for this call, although it is
+    noted that it doesn't work.  Not surprising, since the kernel does not
+    have support for it. (ODY_PREFETCH is not a defined operation).
+
+
+  .. Note:: Gut it. It isn't working and isn't used by Coda.
+
+
+
+4.28.  signal
+-------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Send Venus a signal about an upcall.
+
+  Arguments
+     in
+
+	none
+
+     out
+
+	not applicable.
+
+  Description
+    This is an out-of-band upcall to Venus to inform Venus
+    that the calling process received a signal after Venus read the
+    message from the input queue.  Venus is supposed to clean up the
+    operation.
+
+  Errors
+    No reply is given.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     We need to better understand what Venus needs to clean up and if
+     it is doing this correctly.  Also we need to handle multiple upcall
+     per system call situations correctly.  It would be important to know
+     what state changes in Venus take place after an upcall for which the
+     kernel is responsible for notifying Venus to clean up (e.g. open
+     definitely is such a state change, but many others are maybe not).
+
+
+5.  The minicache and downcalls
+===============================
+
+
+  The Coda FS Driver can cache results of lookup and access upcalls, to
+  limit the frequency of upcalls.  Upcalls carry a price since a process
+  context switch needs to take place.  The counterpart of caching the
+  information is that Venus will notify the FS Driver that cached
+  entries must be flushed or renamed.
+
+  The kernel code generally has to maintain a structure which links the
+  internal file handles (called vnodes in BSD, inodes in Linux and
+  FileHandles in Windows) with the ViceFid's which Venus maintains.  The
+  reason is that frequent translations back and forth are needed in
+  order to make upcalls and use the results of upcalls.  Such linking
+  objects are called cnodes.
+
+  The current minicache implementations have cache entries which record
+  the following:
+
+  1. the name of the file
+
+  2. the cnode of the directory containing the object
+
+  3. a list of CodaCred's for which the lookup is permitted.
+
+  4. the cnode of the object
+
+  The lookup call in the Coda FS Driver may request the cnode of the
+  desired object from the cache, by passing its name, directory and the
+  CodaCred's of the caller.  The cache will return the cnode or indicate
+  that it cannot be found.  The Coda FS Driver must be careful to
+  invalidate cache entries when it modifies or removes objects.
+
+  When Venus obtains information that indicates that cache entries are
+  no longer valid, it will make a downcall to the kernel.  Downcalls are
+  intercepted by the Coda FS Driver and lead to cache invalidations of
+  the kind described below.  The Coda FS Driver does not return an error
+  unless the downcall data could not be read into kernel memory.
+
+
+5.1.  INVALIDATE
+----------------
+
+
+  No information is available on this call.
+
+
+5.2.  FLUSH
+-----------
+
+
+
+  Arguments
+    None
+
+  Summary
+    Flush the name cache entirely.
+
+  Description
+    Venus issues this call upon startup and when it dies. This
+    is to prevent stale cache information being held.  Some operating
+    systems allow the kernel name cache to be switched off dynamically.
+    When this is done, this downcall is made.
+
+
+5.3.  PURGEUSER
+---------------
+
+
+  Arguments
+    ::
+
+	  struct cfs_purgeuser_out {/* CFS_PURGEUSER is a venus->kernel call */
+	      struct CodaCred cred;
+	  } cfs_purgeuser;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    Remove all entries in the cache carrying the Cred.  This
+    call is issued when tokens for a user expire or are flushed.
+
+
+5.4.  ZAPFILE
+-------------
+
+
+  Arguments
+    ::
+
+	  struct cfs_zapfile_out {  /* CFS_ZAPFILE is a venus->kernel call */
+	      ViceFid CodaFid;
+	  } cfs_zapfile;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    Remove all entries which have the (dir vnode, name) pair.
+    This is issued as a result of an invalidation of cached attributes of
+    a vnode.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     Call is not named correctly in NetBSD and Mach.  The minicache
+     zapfile routine takes different arguments. Linux does not implement
+     the invalidation of attributes correctly.
+
+
+
+5.5.  ZAPDIR
+------------
+
+
+  Arguments
+    ::
+
+	  struct cfs_zapdir_out {   /* CFS_ZAPDIR is a venus->kernel call */
+	      ViceFid CodaFid;
+	  } cfs_zapdir;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    Remove all entries in the cache lying in a directory
+    CodaFid, and all children of this directory. This call is issued when
+    Venus receives a callback on the directory.
+
+
+5.6.  ZAPVNODE
+--------------
+
+
+
+  Arguments
+    ::
+
+	  struct cfs_zapvnode_out { /* CFS_ZAPVNODE is a venus->kernel call */
+	      struct CodaCred cred;
+	      ViceFid VFid;
+	  } cfs_zapvnode;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    Remove all entries in the cache carrying the cred and VFid
+    as in the arguments. This downcall is probably never issued.
+
+
+5.7.  PURGEFID
+--------------
+
+
+  Arguments
+    ::
+
+	  struct cfs_purgefid_out { /* CFS_PURGEFID is a venus->kernel call */
+	      ViceFid CodaFid;
+	  } cfs_purgefid;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    Flush the attribute for the file. If it is a dir (odd
+    vnode), purge its children from the namecache and remove the file from the
+    namecache.
+
+
+
+5.8.  REPLACE
+-------------
+
+
+  Summary
+    Replace the Fid's for a collection of names.
+
+  Arguments
+    ::
+
+	  struct cfs_replace_out { /* cfs_replace is a venus->kernel call */
+	      ViceFid NewFid;
+	      ViceFid OldFid;
+	  } cfs_replace;
+
+
+
+  Description
+    This routine replaces a ViceFid in the name cache with
+    another.  It is added to allow Venus during reintegration to replace
+    locally allocated temp fids while disconnected with global fids even
+    when the reference counts on those fids are not zero.
+
+
+6.  Initialization and cleanup
+==============================
+
+
+  This section gives brief hints as to desirable features for the Coda
+  FS Driver at startup and upon shutdown or Venus failures.  Before
+  entering the discussion it is useful to repeat that the Coda FS Driver
+  maintains the following data:
+
+
+  1. message queues
+
+  2. cnodes
+
+  3. name cache entries
+
+     The name cache entries are entirely private to the driver, so they
+     can easily be manipulated.   The message queues will generally have
+     clear points of initialization and destruction.  The cnodes are
+     much more delicate.  User processes hold reference counts in Coda
+     filesystems and it can be difficult to clean up the cnodes.
+
+  It can expect requests through:
+
+  1. the message subsystem
+
+  2. the VFS layer
+
+  3. pioctl interface
+
+     Currently the pioctl passes through the VFS for Coda so we can
+     treat these similarly.
+
+
+6.1.  Requirements
+------------------
+
+
+  The following requirements should be accommodated:
+
+  1. The message queues should have open and close routines.  On Unix
+     the opening of the character devices are such routines.
+
+    -  Before opening, no messages can be placed.
+
+    -  Opening will remove any old messages still pending.
+
+    -  Close will notify any sleeping processes that their upcall cannot
+       be completed.
+
+    -  Close will free all memory allocated by the message queues.
+
+
+  2. At open the namecache shall be initialized to empty state.
+
+  3. Before the message queues are open, all VFS operations will fail.
+     Fortunately this can be achieved by making sure than mounting the
+     Coda filesystem cannot succeed before opening.
+
+  4. After closing of the queues, no VFS operations can succeed.  Here
+     one needs to be careful, since a few operations (lookup,
+     read/write, readdir) can proceed without upcalls.  These must be
+     explicitly blocked.
+
+  5. Upon closing the namecache shall be flushed and disabled.
+
+  6. All memory held by cnodes can be freed without relying on upcalls.
+
+  7. Unmounting the file system can be done without relying on upcalls.
+
+  8. Mounting the Coda filesystem should fail gracefully if Venus cannot
+     get the rootfid or the attributes of the rootfid.  The latter is
+     best implemented by Venus fetching these objects before attempting
+     to mount.
+
+  .. Note::
+
+     NetBSD in particular but also Linux have not implemented the
+     above requirements fully.  For smooth operation this needs to be
+     corrected.
+
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1d3d6f4a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,535 @@
+=======================================================
+Configfs - Userspace-driven Kernel Object Configuration
+=======================================================
+
+Joel Becker <joel.becker@oracle.com>
+
+Updated: 31 March 2005
+
+Copyright (c) 2005 Oracle Corporation,
+	Joel Becker <joel.becker@oracle.com>
+
+
+What is configfs?
+=================
+
+configfs is a ram-based filesystem that provides the converse of
+sysfs's functionality.  Where sysfs is a filesystem-based view of
+kernel objects, configfs is a filesystem-based manager of kernel
+objects, or config_items.
+
+With sysfs, an object is created in kernel (for example, when a device
+is discovered) and it is registered with sysfs.  Its attributes then
+appear in sysfs, allowing userspace to read the attributes via
+readdir(3)/read(2).  It may allow some attributes to be modified via
+write(2).  The important point is that the object is created and
+destroyed in kernel, the kernel controls the lifecycle of the sysfs
+representation, and sysfs is merely a window on all this.
+
+A configfs config_item is created via an explicit userspace operation:
+mkdir(2).  It is destroyed via rmdir(2).  The attributes appear at
+mkdir(2) time, and can be read or modified via read(2) and write(2).
+As with sysfs, readdir(3) queries the list of items and/or attributes.
+symlink(2) can be used to group items together.  Unlike sysfs, the
+lifetime of the representation is completely driven by userspace.  The
+kernel modules backing the items must respond to this.
+
+Both sysfs and configfs can and should exist together on the same
+system.  One is not a replacement for the other.
+
+Using configfs
+==============
+
+configfs can be compiled as a module or into the kernel.  You can access
+it by doing::
+
+	mount -t configfs none /config
+
+The configfs tree will be empty unless client modules are also loaded.
+These are modules that register their item types with configfs as
+subsystems.  Once a client subsystem is loaded, it will appear as a
+subdirectory (or more than one) under /config.  Like sysfs, the
+configfs tree is always there, whether mounted on /config or not.
+
+An item is created via mkdir(2).  The item's attributes will also
+appear at this time.  readdir(3) can determine what the attributes are,
+read(2) can query their default values, and write(2) can store new
+values.  Don't mix more than one attribute in one attribute file.
+
+There are two types of configfs attributes:
+
+* Normal attributes, which similar to sysfs attributes, are small ASCII text
+  files, with a maximum size of one page (PAGE_SIZE, 4096 on i386).  Preferably
+  only one value per file should be used, and the same caveats from sysfs apply.
+  Configfs expects write(2) to store the entire buffer at once.  When writing to
+  normal configfs attributes, userspace processes should first read the entire
+  file, modify the portions they wish to change, and then write the entire
+  buffer back.
+
+* Binary attributes, which are somewhat similar to sysfs binary attributes,
+  but with a few slight changes to semantics.  The PAGE_SIZE limitation does not
+  apply, but the whole binary item must fit in single kernel vmalloc'ed buffer.
+  The write(2) calls from user space are buffered, and the attributes'
+  write_bin_attribute method will be invoked on the final close, therefore it is
+  imperative for user-space to check the return code of close(2) in order to
+  verify that the operation finished successfully.
+  To avoid a malicious user OOMing the kernel, there's a per-binary attribute
+  maximum buffer value.
+
+When an item needs to be destroyed, remove it with rmdir(2).  An
+item cannot be destroyed if any other item has a link to it (via
+symlink(2)).  Links can be removed via unlink(2).
+
+Configuring FakeNBD: an Example
+===============================
+
+Imagine there's a Network Block Device (NBD) driver that allows you to
+access remote block devices.  Call it FakeNBD.  FakeNBD uses configfs
+for its configuration.  Obviously, there will be a nice program that
+sysadmins use to configure FakeNBD, but somehow that program has to tell
+the driver about it.  Here's where configfs comes in.
+
+When the FakeNBD driver is loaded, it registers itself with configfs.
+readdir(3) sees this just fine::
+
+	# ls /config
+	fakenbd
+
+A fakenbd connection can be created with mkdir(2).  The name is
+arbitrary, but likely the tool will make some use of the name.  Perhaps
+it is a uuid or a disk name::
+
+	# mkdir /config/fakenbd/disk1
+	# ls /config/fakenbd/disk1
+	target device rw
+
+The target attribute contains the IP address of the server FakeNBD will
+connect to.  The device attribute is the device on the server.
+Predictably, the rw attribute determines whether the connection is
+read-only or read-write::
+
+	# echo 10.0.0.1 > /config/fakenbd/disk1/target
+	# echo /dev/sda1 > /config/fakenbd/disk1/device
+	# echo 1 > /config/fakenbd/disk1/rw
+
+That's it.  That's all there is.  Now the device is configured, via the
+shell no less.
+
+Coding With configfs
+====================
+
+Every object in configfs is a config_item.  A config_item reflects an
+object in the subsystem.  It has attributes that match values on that
+object.  configfs handles the filesystem representation of that object
+and its attributes, allowing the subsystem to ignore all but the
+basic show/store interaction.
+
+Items are created and destroyed inside a config_group.  A group is a
+collection of items that share the same attributes and operations.
+Items are created by mkdir(2) and removed by rmdir(2), but configfs
+handles that.  The group has a set of operations to perform these tasks
+
+A subsystem is the top level of a client module.  During initialization,
+the client module registers the subsystem with configfs, the subsystem
+appears as a directory at the top of the configfs filesystem.  A
+subsystem is also a config_group, and can do everything a config_group
+can.
+
+struct config_item
+==================
+
+::
+
+	struct config_item {
+		char                    *ci_name;
+		char                    ci_namebuf[UOBJ_NAME_LEN];
+		struct kref             ci_kref;
+		struct list_head        ci_entry;
+		struct config_item      *ci_parent;
+		struct config_group     *ci_group;
+		struct config_item_type *ci_type;
+		struct dentry           *ci_dentry;
+	};
+
+	void config_item_init(struct config_item *);
+	void config_item_init_type_name(struct config_item *,
+					const char *name,
+					struct config_item_type *type);
+	struct config_item *config_item_get(struct config_item *);
+	void config_item_put(struct config_item *);
+
+Generally, struct config_item is embedded in a container structure, a
+structure that actually represents what the subsystem is doing.  The
+config_item portion of that structure is how the object interacts with
+configfs.
+
+Whether statically defined in a source file or created by a parent
+config_group, a config_item must have one of the _init() functions
+called on it.  This initializes the reference count and sets up the
+appropriate fields.
+
+All users of a config_item should have a reference on it via
+config_item_get(), and drop the reference when they are done via
+config_item_put().
+
+By itself, a config_item cannot do much more than appear in configfs.
+Usually a subsystem wants the item to display and/or store attributes,
+among other things.  For that, it needs a type.
+
+struct config_item_type
+=======================
+
+::
+
+	struct configfs_item_operations {
+		void (*release)(struct config_item *);
+		int (*allow_link)(struct config_item *src,
+				  struct config_item *target);
+		void (*drop_link)(struct config_item *src,
+				 struct config_item *target);
+	};
+
+	struct config_item_type {
+		struct module                           *ct_owner;
+		struct configfs_item_operations         *ct_item_ops;
+		struct configfs_group_operations        *ct_group_ops;
+		struct configfs_attribute               **ct_attrs;
+		struct configfs_bin_attribute		**ct_bin_attrs;
+	};
+
+The most basic function of a config_item_type is to define what
+operations can be performed on a config_item.  All items that have been
+allocated dynamically will need to provide the ct_item_ops->release()
+method.  This method is called when the config_item's reference count
+reaches zero.
+
+struct configfs_attribute
+=========================
+
+::
+
+	struct configfs_attribute {
+		char                    *ca_name;
+		struct module           *ca_owner;
+		umode_t                  ca_mode;
+		ssize_t (*show)(struct config_item *, char *);
+		ssize_t (*store)(struct config_item *, const char *, size_t);
+	};
+
+When a config_item wants an attribute to appear as a file in the item's
+configfs directory, it must define a configfs_attribute describing it.
+It then adds the attribute to the NULL-terminated array
+config_item_type->ct_attrs.  When the item appears in configfs, the
+attribute file will appear with the configfs_attribute->ca_name
+filename.  configfs_attribute->ca_mode specifies the file permissions.
+
+If an attribute is readable and provides a ->show method, that method will
+be called whenever userspace asks for a read(2) on the attribute.  If an
+attribute is writable and provides a ->store  method, that method will be
+called whenever userspace asks for a write(2) on the attribute.
+
+struct configfs_bin_attribute
+=============================
+
+::
+
+	struct configfs_bin_attribute {
+		struct configfs_attribute	cb_attr;
+		void				*cb_private;
+		size_t				cb_max_size;
+	};
+
+The binary attribute is used when the one needs to use binary blob to
+appear as the contents of a file in the item's configfs directory.
+To do so add the binary attribute to the NULL-terminated array
+config_item_type->ct_bin_attrs, and the item appears in configfs, the
+attribute file will appear with the configfs_bin_attribute->cb_attr.ca_name
+filename.  configfs_bin_attribute->cb_attr.ca_mode specifies the file
+permissions.
+The cb_private member is provided for use by the driver, while the
+cb_max_size member specifies the maximum amount of vmalloc buffer
+to be used.
+
+If binary attribute is readable and the config_item provides a
+ct_item_ops->read_bin_attribute() method, that method will be called
+whenever userspace asks for a read(2) on the attribute.  The converse
+will happen for write(2). The reads/writes are bufferred so only a
+single read/write will occur; the attributes' need not concern itself
+with it.
+
+struct config_group
+===================
+
+A config_item cannot live in a vacuum.  The only way one can be created
+is via mkdir(2) on a config_group.  This will trigger creation of a
+child item::
+
+	struct config_group {
+		struct config_item		cg_item;
+		struct list_head		cg_children;
+		struct configfs_subsystem 	*cg_subsys;
+		struct list_head		default_groups;
+		struct list_head		group_entry;
+	};
+
+	void config_group_init(struct config_group *group);
+	void config_group_init_type_name(struct config_group *group,
+					 const char *name,
+					 struct config_item_type *type);
+
+
+The config_group structure contains a config_item.  Properly configuring
+that item means that a group can behave as an item in its own right.
+However, it can do more: it can create child items or groups.  This is
+accomplished via the group operations specified on the group's
+config_item_type::
+
+	struct configfs_group_operations {
+		struct config_item *(*make_item)(struct config_group *group,
+						 const char *name);
+		struct config_group *(*make_group)(struct config_group *group,
+						   const char *name);
+		int (*commit_item)(struct config_item *item);
+		void (*disconnect_notify)(struct config_group *group,
+					  struct config_item *item);
+		void (*drop_item)(struct config_group *group,
+				  struct config_item *item);
+	};
+
+A group creates child items by providing the
+ct_group_ops->make_item() method.  If provided, this method is called from
+mkdir(2) in the group's directory.  The subsystem allocates a new
+config_item (or more likely, its container structure), initializes it,
+and returns it to configfs.  Configfs will then populate the filesystem
+tree to reflect the new item.
+
+If the subsystem wants the child to be a group itself, the subsystem
+provides ct_group_ops->make_group().  Everything else behaves the same,
+using the group _init() functions on the group.
+
+Finally, when userspace calls rmdir(2) on the item or group,
+ct_group_ops->drop_item() is called.  As a config_group is also a
+config_item, it is not necessary for a separate drop_group() method.
+The subsystem must config_item_put() the reference that was initialized
+upon item allocation.  If a subsystem has no work to do, it may omit
+the ct_group_ops->drop_item() method, and configfs will call
+config_item_put() on the item on behalf of the subsystem.
+
+Important:
+   drop_item() is void, and as such cannot fail.  When rmdir(2)
+   is called, configfs WILL remove the item from the filesystem tree
+   (assuming that it has no children to keep it busy).  The subsystem is
+   responsible for responding to this.  If the subsystem has references to
+   the item in other threads, the memory is safe.  It may take some time
+   for the item to actually disappear from the subsystem's usage.  But it
+   is gone from configfs.
+
+When drop_item() is called, the item's linkage has already been torn
+down.  It no longer has a reference on its parent and has no place in
+the item hierarchy.  If a client needs to do some cleanup before this
+teardown happens, the subsystem can implement the
+ct_group_ops->disconnect_notify() method.  The method is called after
+configfs has removed the item from the filesystem view but before the
+item is removed from its parent group.  Like drop_item(),
+disconnect_notify() is void and cannot fail.  Client subsystems should
+not drop any references here, as they still must do it in drop_item().
+
+A config_group cannot be removed while it still has child items.  This
+is implemented in the configfs rmdir(2) code.  ->drop_item() will not be
+called, as the item has not been dropped.  rmdir(2) will fail, as the
+directory is not empty.
+
+struct configfs_subsystem
+=========================
+
+A subsystem must register itself, usually at module_init time.  This
+tells configfs to make the subsystem appear in the file tree::
+
+	struct configfs_subsystem {
+		struct config_group	su_group;
+		struct mutex		su_mutex;
+	};
+
+	int configfs_register_subsystem(struct configfs_subsystem *subsys);
+	void configfs_unregister_subsystem(struct configfs_subsystem *subsys);
+
+A subsystem consists of a toplevel config_group and a mutex.
+The group is where child config_items are created.  For a subsystem,
+this group is usually defined statically.  Before calling
+configfs_register_subsystem(), the subsystem must have initialized the
+group via the usual group _init() functions, and it must also have
+initialized the mutex.
+
+When the register call returns, the subsystem is live, and it
+will be visible via configfs.  At that point, mkdir(2) can be called and
+the subsystem must be ready for it.
+
+An Example
+==========
+
+The best example of these basic concepts is the simple_children
+subsystem/group and the simple_child item in
+samples/configfs/configfs_sample.c. It shows a trivial object displaying
+and storing an attribute, and a simple group creating and destroying
+these children.
+
+Hierarchy Navigation and the Subsystem Mutex
+============================================
+
+There is an extra bonus that configfs provides.  The config_groups and
+config_items are arranged in a hierarchy due to the fact that they
+appear in a filesystem.  A subsystem is NEVER to touch the filesystem
+parts, but the subsystem might be interested in this hierarchy.  For
+this reason, the hierarchy is mirrored via the config_group->cg_children
+and config_item->ci_parent structure members.
+
+A subsystem can navigate the cg_children list and the ci_parent pointer
+to see the tree created by the subsystem.  This can race with configfs'
+management of the hierarchy, so configfs uses the subsystem mutex to
+protect modifications.  Whenever a subsystem wants to navigate the
+hierarchy, it must do so under the protection of the subsystem
+mutex.
+
+A subsystem will be prevented from acquiring the mutex while a newly
+allocated item has not been linked into this hierarchy.   Similarly, it
+will not be able to acquire the mutex while a dropping item has not
+yet been unlinked.  This means that an item's ci_parent pointer will
+never be NULL while the item is in configfs, and that an item will only
+be in its parent's cg_children list for the same duration.  This allows
+a subsystem to trust ci_parent and cg_children while they hold the
+mutex.
+
+Item Aggregation Via symlink(2)
+===============================
+
+configfs provides a simple group via the group->item parent/child
+relationship.  Often, however, a larger environment requires aggregation
+outside of the parent/child connection.  This is implemented via
+symlink(2).
+
+A config_item may provide the ct_item_ops->allow_link() and
+ct_item_ops->drop_link() methods.  If the ->allow_link() method exists,
+symlink(2) may be called with the config_item as the source of the link.
+These links are only allowed between configfs config_items.  Any
+symlink(2) attempt outside the configfs filesystem will be denied.
+
+When symlink(2) is called, the source config_item's ->allow_link()
+method is called with itself and a target item.  If the source item
+allows linking to target item, it returns 0.  A source item may wish to
+reject a link if it only wants links to a certain type of object (say,
+in its own subsystem).
+
+When unlink(2) is called on the symbolic link, the source item is
+notified via the ->drop_link() method.  Like the ->drop_item() method,
+this is a void function and cannot return failure.  The subsystem is
+responsible for responding to the change.
+
+A config_item cannot be removed while it links to any other item, nor
+can it be removed while an item links to it.  Dangling symlinks are not
+allowed in configfs.
+
+Automatically Created Subgroups
+===============================
+
+A new config_group may want to have two types of child config_items.
+While this could be codified by magic names in ->make_item(), it is much
+more explicit to have a method whereby userspace sees this divergence.
+
+Rather than have a group where some items behave differently than
+others, configfs provides a method whereby one or many subgroups are
+automatically created inside the parent at its creation.  Thus,
+mkdir("parent") results in "parent", "parent/subgroup1", up through
+"parent/subgroupN".  Items of type 1 can now be created in
+"parent/subgroup1", and items of type N can be created in
+"parent/subgroupN".
+
+These automatic subgroups, or default groups, do not preclude other
+children of the parent group.  If ct_group_ops->make_group() exists,
+other child groups can be created on the parent group directly.
+
+A configfs subsystem specifies default groups by adding them using the
+configfs_add_default_group() function to the parent config_group
+structure.  Each added group is populated in the configfs tree at the same
+time as the parent group.  Similarly, they are removed at the same time
+as the parent.  No extra notification is provided.  When a ->drop_item()
+method call notifies the subsystem the parent group is going away, it
+also means every default group child associated with that parent group.
+
+As a consequence of this, default groups cannot be removed directly via
+rmdir(2).  They also are not considered when rmdir(2) on the parent
+group is checking for children.
+
+Dependent Subsystems
+====================
+
+Sometimes other drivers depend on particular configfs items.  For
+example, ocfs2 mounts depend on a heartbeat region item.  If that
+region item is removed with rmdir(2), the ocfs2 mount must BUG or go
+readonly.  Not happy.
+
+configfs provides two additional API calls: configfs_depend_item() and
+configfs_undepend_item().  A client driver can call
+configfs_depend_item() on an existing item to tell configfs that it is
+depended on.  configfs will then return -EBUSY from rmdir(2) for that
+item.  When the item is no longer depended on, the client driver calls
+configfs_undepend_item() on it.
+
+These API cannot be called underneath any configfs callbacks, as
+they will conflict.  They can block and allocate.  A client driver
+probably shouldn't calling them of its own gumption.  Rather it should
+be providing an API that external subsystems call.
+
+How does this work?  Imagine the ocfs2 mount process.  When it mounts,
+it asks for a heartbeat region item.  This is done via a call into the
+heartbeat code.  Inside the heartbeat code, the region item is looked
+up.  Here, the heartbeat code calls configfs_depend_item().  If it
+succeeds, then heartbeat knows the region is safe to give to ocfs2.
+If it fails, it was being torn down anyway, and heartbeat can gracefully
+pass up an error.
+
+Committable Items
+=================
+
+Note:
+     Committable items are currently unimplemented.
+
+Some config_items cannot have a valid initial state.  That is, no
+default values can be specified for the item's attributes such that the
+item can do its work.  Userspace must configure one or more attributes,
+after which the subsystem can start whatever entity this item
+represents.
+
+Consider the FakeNBD device from above.  Without a target address *and*
+a target device, the subsystem has no idea what block device to import.
+The simple example assumes that the subsystem merely waits until all the
+appropriate attributes are configured, and then connects.  This will,
+indeed, work, but now every attribute store must check if the attributes
+are initialized.  Every attribute store must fire off the connection if
+that condition is met.
+
+Far better would be an explicit action notifying the subsystem that the
+config_item is ready to go.  More importantly, an explicit action allows
+the subsystem to provide feedback as to whether the attributes are
+initialized in a way that makes sense.  configfs provides this as
+committable items.
+
+configfs still uses only normal filesystem operations.  An item is
+committed via rename(2).  The item is moved from a directory where it
+can be modified to a directory where it cannot.
+
+Any group that provides the ct_group_ops->commit_item() method has
+committable items.  When this group appears in configfs, mkdir(2) will
+not work directly in the group.  Instead, the group will have two
+subdirectories: "live" and "pending".  The "live" directory does not
+support mkdir(2) or rmdir(2) either.  It only allows rename(2).  The
+"pending" directory does allow mkdir(2) and rmdir(2).  An item is
+created in the "pending" directory.  Its attributes can be modified at
+will.  Userspace commits the item by renaming it into the "live"
+directory.  At this point, the subsystem receives the ->commit_item()
+callback.  If all required attributes are filled to satisfaction, the
+method returns zero and the item is moved to the "live" directory.
+
+As rmdir(2) does not work in the "live" directory, an item must be
+shutdown, or "uncommitted".  Again, this is done via rename(2), this
+time from the "live" directory back to the "pending" one.  The subsystem
+is notified by the ct_group_ops->uncommit_object() method.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cramfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/cramfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..afbdbde98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cramfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================================
+Cramfs - cram a filesystem onto a small ROM
+===========================================
+
+cramfs is designed to be simple and small, and to compress things well.
+
+It uses the zlib routines to compress a file one page at a time, and
+allows random page access.  The meta-data is not compressed, but is
+expressed in a very terse representation to make it use much less
+diskspace than traditional filesystems.
+
+You can't write to a cramfs filesystem (making it compressible and
+compact also makes it _very_ hard to update on-the-fly), so you have to
+create the disk image with the "mkcramfs" utility.
+
+
+Usage Notes
+-----------
+
+File sizes are limited to less than 16MB.
+
+Maximum filesystem size is a little over 256MB.  (The last file on the
+filesystem is allowed to extend past 256MB.)
+
+Only the low 8 bits of gid are stored.  The current version of
+mkcramfs simply truncates to 8 bits, which is a potential security
+issue.
+
+Hard links are supported, but hard linked files
+will still have a link count of 1 in the cramfs image.
+
+Cramfs directories have no ``.`` or ``..`` entries.  Directories (like
+every other file on cramfs) always have a link count of 1.  (There's
+no need to use -noleaf in ``find``, btw.)
+
+No timestamps are stored in a cramfs, so these default to the epoch
+(1970 GMT).  Recently-accessed files may have updated timestamps, but
+the update lasts only as long as the inode is cached in memory, after
+which the timestamp reverts to 1970, i.e. moves backwards in time.
+
+Currently, cramfs must be written and read with architectures of the
+same endianness, and can be read only by kernels with PAGE_SIZE
+== 4096.  At least the latter of these is a bug, but it hasn't been
+decided what the best fix is.  For the moment if you have larger pages
+you can just change the #define in mkcramfs.c, so long as you don't
+mind the filesystem becoming unreadable to future kernels.
+
+
+Memory Mapped cramfs image
+--------------------------
+
+The CRAMFS_MTD Kconfig option adds support for loading data directly from
+a physical linear memory range (usually non volatile memory like Flash)
+instead of going through the block device layer. This saves some memory
+since no intermediate buffering is necessary to hold the data before
+decompressing.
+
+And when data blocks are kept uncompressed and properly aligned, they will
+automatically be mapped directly into user space whenever possible providing
+eXecute-In-Place (XIP) from ROM of read-only segments. Data segments mapped
+read-write (hence they have to be copied to RAM) may still be compressed in
+the cramfs image in the same file along with non compressed read-only
+segments. Both MMU and no-MMU systems are supported. This is particularly
+handy for tiny embedded systems with very tight memory constraints.
+
+The location of the cramfs image in memory is system dependent. You must
+know the proper physical address where the cramfs image is located and
+configure an MTD device for it. Also, that MTD device must be supported
+by a map driver that implements the "point" method. Examples of such
+MTD drivers are cfi_cmdset_0001 (Intel/Sharp CFI flash) or physmap
+(Flash device in physical memory map). MTD partitions based on such devices
+are fine too. Then that device should be specified with the "mtd:" prefix
+as the mount device argument. For example, to mount the MTD device named
+"fs_partition" on the /mnt directory::
+
+    $ mount -t cramfs mtd:fs_partition /mnt
+
+To boot a kernel with this as root filesystem, suffice to specify
+something like "root=mtd:fs_partition" on the kernel command line.
+
+
+Tools
+-----
+
+A version of mkcramfs that can take advantage of the latest capabilities
+described above can be found here:
+
+https://github.com/npitre/cramfs-tools
+
+
+For /usr/share/magic
+--------------------
+
+=====	=======================	=======================
+0	ulelong	0x28cd3d45	Linux cramfs offset 0
+>4	ulelong	x		size %d
+>8	ulelong	x		flags 0x%x
+>12	ulelong	x		future 0x%x
+>16	string	>\0		signature "%.16s"
+>32	ulelong	x		fsid.crc 0x%x
+>36	ulelong	x		fsid.edition %d
+>40	ulelong	x		fsid.blocks %d
+>44	ulelong	x		fsid.files %d
+>48	string	>\0		name "%.16s"
+512	ulelong	0x28cd3d45	Linux cramfs offset 512
+>516	ulelong	x		size %d
+>520	ulelong	x		flags 0x%x
+>524	ulelong	x		future 0x%x
+>528	string	>\0		signature "%.16s"
+>544	ulelong	x		fsid.crc 0x%x
+>548	ulelong	x		fsid.edition %d
+>552	ulelong	x		fsid.blocks %d
+>556	ulelong	x		fsid.files %d
+>560	string	>\0		name "%.16s"
+=====	=======================	=======================
+
+
+Hacker Notes
+------------
+
+See fs/cramfs/README for filesystem layout and implementation notes.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/dax.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/dax.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c04609d8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/dax.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,307 @@
+=======================
+Direct Access for files
+=======================
+
+Motivation
+----------
+
+The page cache is usually used to buffer reads and writes to files.
+It is also used to provide the pages which are mapped into userspace
+by a call to mmap.
+
+For block devices that are memory-like, the page cache pages would be
+unnecessary copies of the original storage.  The `DAX` code removes the
+extra copy by performing reads and writes directly to the storage device.
+For file mappings, the storage device is mapped directly into userspace.
+
+
+Usage
+-----
+
+If you have a block device which supports `DAX`, you can make a filesystem
+on it as usual.  The `DAX` code currently only supports files with a block
+size equal to your kernel's `PAGE_SIZE`, so you may need to specify a block
+size when creating the filesystem.
+
+Currently 5 filesystems support `DAX`: ext2, ext4, xfs, virtiofs and erofs.
+Enabling `DAX` on them is different.
+
+Enabling DAX on ext2 and erofs
+------------------------------
+
+When mounting the filesystem, use the ``-o dax`` option on the command line or
+add 'dax' to the options in ``/etc/fstab``.  This works to enable `DAX` on all files
+within the filesystem.  It is equivalent to the ``-o dax=always`` behavior below.
+
+
+Enabling DAX on xfs and ext4
+----------------------------
+
+Summary
+-------
+
+ 1. There exists an in-kernel file access mode flag `S_DAX` that corresponds to
+    the statx flag `STATX_ATTR_DAX`.  See the manpage for statx(2) for details
+    about this access mode.
+
+ 2. There exists a persistent flag `FS_XFLAG_DAX` that can be applied to regular
+    files and directories. This advisory flag can be set or cleared at any
+    time, but doing so does not immediately affect the `S_DAX` state.
+
+ 3. If the persistent `FS_XFLAG_DAX` flag is set on a directory, this flag will
+    be inherited by all regular files and subdirectories that are subsequently
+    created in this directory. Files and subdirectories that exist at the time
+    this flag is set or cleared on the parent directory are not modified by
+    this modification of the parent directory.
+
+ 4. There exist dax mount options which can override `FS_XFLAG_DAX` in the
+    setting of the `S_DAX` flag.  Given underlying storage which supports `DAX` the
+    following hold:
+
+    ``-o dax=inode``  means "follow `FS_XFLAG_DAX`" and is the default.
+
+    ``-o dax=never``  means "never set `S_DAX`, ignore `FS_XFLAG_DAX`."
+
+    ``-o dax=always`` means "always set `S_DAX` ignore `FS_XFLAG_DAX`."
+
+    ``-o dax``      is a legacy option which is an alias for ``dax=always``.
+
+    .. warning::
+
+      The option ``-o dax`` may be removed in the future so ``-o dax=always`` is
+      the preferred method for specifying this behavior.
+
+    .. note::
+
+      Modifications to and the inheritance behavior of `FS_XFLAG_DAX` remain
+      the same even when the filesystem is mounted with a dax option.  However,
+      in-core inode state (`S_DAX`) will be overridden until the filesystem is
+      remounted with dax=inode and the inode is evicted from kernel memory.
+
+ 5. The `S_DAX` policy can be changed via:
+
+    a) Setting the parent directory `FS_XFLAG_DAX` as needed before files are
+       created
+
+    b) Setting the appropriate dax="foo" mount option
+
+    c) Changing the `FS_XFLAG_DAX` flag on existing regular files and
+       directories.  This has runtime constraints and limitations that are
+       described in 6) below.
+
+ 6. When changing the `S_DAX` policy via toggling the persistent `FS_XFLAG_DAX`
+    flag, the change to existing regular files won't take effect until the
+    files are closed by all processes.
+
+
+Details
+-------
+
+There are 2 per-file dax flags.  One is a persistent inode setting (`FS_XFLAG_DAX`)
+and the other is a volatile flag indicating the active state of the feature
+(`S_DAX`).
+
+`FS_XFLAG_DAX` is preserved within the filesystem.  This persistent config
+setting can be set, cleared and/or queried using the `FS_IOC_FS`[`GS`]`ETXATTR` ioctl
+(see ioctl_xfs_fsgetxattr(2)) or an utility such as 'xfs_io'.
+
+New files and directories automatically inherit `FS_XFLAG_DAX` from
+their parent directory **when created**.  Therefore, setting `FS_XFLAG_DAX` at
+directory creation time can be used to set a default behavior for an entire
+sub-tree.
+
+To clarify inheritance, here are 3 examples:
+
+Example A:
+
+.. code-block:: shell
+
+  mkdir -p a/b/c
+  xfs_io -c 'chattr +x' a
+  mkdir a/b/c/d
+  mkdir a/e
+
+  ------[outcome]------
+
+  dax: a,e
+  no dax: b,c,d
+
+Example B:
+
+.. code-block:: shell
+
+  mkdir a
+  xfs_io -c 'chattr +x' a
+  mkdir -p a/b/c/d
+
+  ------[outcome]------
+
+  dax: a,b,c,d
+  no dax:
+
+Example C:
+
+.. code-block:: shell
+
+  mkdir -p a/b/c
+  xfs_io -c 'chattr +x' c
+  mkdir a/b/c/d
+
+  ------[outcome]------
+
+  dax: c,d
+  no dax: a,b
+
+The current enabled state (`S_DAX`) is set when a file inode is instantiated in
+memory by the kernel.  It is set based on the underlying media support, the
+value of `FS_XFLAG_DAX` and the filesystem's dax mount option.
+
+statx can be used to query `S_DAX`.
+
+.. note::
+
+  That only regular files will ever have `S_DAX` set and therefore statx
+  will never indicate that `S_DAX` is set on directories.
+
+Setting the `FS_XFLAG_DAX` flag (specifically or through inheritance) occurs even
+if the underlying media does not support dax and/or the filesystem is
+overridden with a mount option.
+
+
+Enabling DAX on virtiofs
+----------------------------
+The semantic of DAX on virtiofs is basically equal to that on ext4 and xfs,
+except that when '-o dax=inode' is specified, virtiofs client derives the hint
+whether DAX shall be enabled or not from virtiofs server through FUSE protocol,
+rather than the persistent `FS_XFLAG_DAX` flag. That is, whether DAX shall be
+enabled or not is completely determined by virtiofs server, while virtiofs
+server itself may deploy various algorithm making this decision, e.g. depending
+on the persistent `FS_XFLAG_DAX` flag on the host.
+
+It is still supported to set or clear persistent `FS_XFLAG_DAX` flag inside
+guest, but it is not guaranteed that DAX will be enabled or disabled for
+corresponding file then. Users inside guest still need to call statx(2) and
+check the statx flag `STATX_ATTR_DAX` to see if DAX is enabled for this file.
+
+
+Implementation Tips for Block Driver Writers
+--------------------------------------------
+
+To support `DAX` in your block driver, implement the 'direct_access'
+block device operation.  It is used to translate the sector number
+(expressed in units of 512-byte sectors) to a page frame number (pfn)
+that identifies the physical page for the memory.  It also returns a
+kernel virtual address that can be used to access the memory.
+
+The direct_access method takes a 'size' parameter that indicates the
+number of bytes being requested.  The function should return the number
+of bytes that can be contiguously accessed at that offset.  It may also
+return a negative errno if an error occurs.
+
+In order to support this method, the storage must be byte-accessible by
+the CPU at all times.  If your device uses paging techniques to expose
+a large amount of memory through a smaller window, then you cannot
+implement direct_access.  Equally, if your device can occasionally
+stall the CPU for an extended period, you should also not attempt to
+implement direct_access.
+
+These block devices may be used for inspiration:
+- brd: RAM backed block device driver
+- dcssblk: s390 dcss block device driver
+- pmem: NVDIMM persistent memory driver
+
+
+Implementation Tips for Filesystem Writers
+------------------------------------------
+
+Filesystem support consists of:
+
+* Adding support to mark inodes as being `DAX` by setting the `S_DAX` flag in
+  i_flags
+* Implementing ->read_iter and ->write_iter operations which use
+  :c:func:`dax_iomap_rw()` when inode has `S_DAX` flag set
+* Implementing an mmap file operation for `DAX` files which sets the
+  `VM_MIXEDMAP` and `VM_HUGEPAGE` flags on the `VMA`, and setting the vm_ops to
+  include handlers for fault, pmd_fault, page_mkwrite, pfn_mkwrite. These
+  handlers should probably call :c:func:`dax_iomap_fault()` passing the
+  appropriate fault size and iomap operations.
+* Calling :c:func:`iomap_zero_range()` passing appropriate iomap operations
+  instead of :c:func:`block_truncate_page()` for `DAX` files
+* Ensuring that there is sufficient locking between reads, writes,
+  truncates and page faults
+
+The iomap handlers for allocating blocks must make sure that allocated blocks
+are zeroed out and converted to written extents before being returned to avoid
+exposure of uninitialized data through mmap.
+
+These filesystems may be used for inspiration:
+
+.. seealso::
+
+  ext2: see Documentation/filesystems/ext2.rst
+
+.. seealso::
+
+  xfs:  see Documentation/admin-guide/xfs.rst
+
+.. seealso::
+
+  ext4: see Documentation/filesystems/ext4/
+
+
+Handling Media Errors
+---------------------
+
+The libnvdimm subsystem stores a record of known media error locations for
+each pmem block device (in gendisk->badblocks). If we fault at such location,
+or one with a latent error not yet discovered, the application can expect
+to receive a `SIGBUS`. Libnvdimm also allows clearing of these errors by simply
+writing the affected sectors (through the pmem driver, and if the underlying
+NVDIMM supports the clear_poison DSM defined by ACPI).
+
+Since `DAX` IO normally doesn't go through the ``driver/bio`` path, applications or
+sysadmins have an option to restore the lost data from a prior ``backup/inbuilt``
+redundancy in the following ways:
+
+1. Delete the affected file, and restore from a backup (sysadmin route):
+   This will free the filesystem blocks that were being used by the file,
+   and the next time they're allocated, they will be zeroed first, which
+   happens through the driver, and will clear bad sectors.
+
+2. Truncate or hole-punch the part of the file that has a bad-block (at least
+   an entire aligned sector has to be hole-punched, but not necessarily an
+   entire filesystem block).
+
+These are the two basic paths that allow `DAX` filesystems to continue operating
+in the presence of media errors. More robust error recovery mechanisms can be
+built on top of this in the future, for example, involving redundancy/mirroring
+provided at the block layer through DM, or additionally, at the filesystem
+level. These would have to rely on the above two tenets, that error clearing
+can happen either by sending an IO through the driver, or zeroing (also through
+the driver).
+
+
+Shortcomings
+------------
+
+Even if the kernel or its modules are stored on a filesystem that supports
+`DAX` on a block device that supports `DAX`, they will still be copied into RAM.
+
+The DAX code does not work correctly on architectures which have virtually
+mapped caches such as ARM, MIPS and SPARC.
+
+Calling :c:func:`get_user_pages()` on a range of user memory that has been
+mmaped from a `DAX` file will fail when there are no 'struct page' to describe
+those pages.  This problem has been addressed in some device drivers
+by adding optional struct page support for pages under the control of
+the driver (see `CONFIG_NVDIMM_PFN` in ``drivers/nvdimm`` for an example of
+how to do this). In the non struct page cases `O_DIRECT` reads/writes to
+those memory ranges from a non-`DAX` file will fail 
+
+
+.. note::
+
+  `O_DIRECT` reads/writes _of a `DAX` file do work, it is the memory that
+  is being accessed that is key here).  Other things that will not work in
+  the non struct page case include RDMA, :c:func:`sendfile()` and
+  :c:func:`splice()`.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..71b1fee56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=======
+DebugFS
+=======
+
+Copyright |copy| 2009 Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net>
+
+Debugfs exists as a simple way for kernel developers to make information
+available to user space.  Unlike /proc, which is only meant for information
+about a process, or sysfs, which has strict one-value-per-file rules,
+debugfs has no rules at all.  Developers can put any information they want
+there.  The debugfs filesystem is also intended to not serve as a stable
+ABI to user space; in theory, there are no stability constraints placed on
+files exported there.  The real world is not always so simple, though [1]_;
+even debugfs interfaces are best designed with the idea that they will need
+to be maintained forever.
+
+Debugfs is typically mounted with a command like::
+
+    mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
+
+(Or an equivalent /etc/fstab line).
+The debugfs root directory is accessible only to the root user by
+default. To change access to the tree the "uid", "gid" and "mode" mount
+options can be used.
+
+Note that the debugfs API is exported GPL-only to modules.
+
+Code using debugfs should include <linux/debugfs.h>.  Then, the first order
+of business will be to create at least one directory to hold a set of
+debugfs files::
+
+    struct dentry *debugfs_create_dir(const char *name, struct dentry *parent);
+
+This call, if successful, will make a directory called name underneath the
+indicated parent directory.  If parent is NULL, the directory will be
+created in the debugfs root.  On success, the return value is a struct
+dentry pointer which can be used to create files in the directory (and to
+clean it up at the end).  An ERR_PTR(-ERROR) return value indicates that
+something went wrong.  If ERR_PTR(-ENODEV) is returned, that is an
+indication that the kernel has been built without debugfs support and none
+of the functions described below will work.
+
+The most general way to create a file within a debugfs directory is with::
+
+    struct dentry *debugfs_create_file(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+				       struct dentry *parent, void *data,
+				       const struct file_operations *fops);
+
+Here, name is the name of the file to create, mode describes the access
+permissions the file should have, parent indicates the directory which
+should hold the file, data will be stored in the i_private field of the
+resulting inode structure, and fops is a set of file operations which
+implement the file's behavior.  At a minimum, the read() and/or write()
+operations should be provided; others can be included as needed.  Again,
+the return value will be a dentry pointer to the created file,
+ERR_PTR(-ERROR) on error, or ERR_PTR(-ENODEV) if debugfs support is
+missing.
+
+Create a file with an initial size, the following function can be used
+instead::
+
+    void debugfs_create_file_size(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+				  struct dentry *parent, void *data,
+				  const struct file_operations *fops,
+				  loff_t file_size);
+
+file_size is the initial file size. The other parameters are the same
+as the function debugfs_create_file.
+
+In a number of cases, the creation of a set of file operations is not
+actually necessary; the debugfs code provides a number of helper functions
+for simple situations.  Files containing a single integer value can be
+created with any of::
+
+    void debugfs_create_u8(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			   struct dentry *parent, u8 *value);
+    void debugfs_create_u16(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			    struct dentry *parent, u16 *value);
+    void debugfs_create_u32(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			    struct dentry *parent, u32 *value);
+    void debugfs_create_u64(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			    struct dentry *parent, u64 *value);
+
+These files support both reading and writing the given value; if a specific
+file should not be written to, simply set the mode bits accordingly.  The
+values in these files are in decimal; if hexadecimal is more appropriate,
+the following functions can be used instead::
+
+    void debugfs_create_x8(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			   struct dentry *parent, u8 *value);
+    void debugfs_create_x16(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			    struct dentry *parent, u16 *value);
+    void debugfs_create_x32(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			    struct dentry *parent, u32 *value);
+    void debugfs_create_x64(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			    struct dentry *parent, u64 *value);
+
+These functions are useful as long as the developer knows the size of the
+value to be exported.  Some types can have different widths on different
+architectures, though, complicating the situation somewhat.  There are
+functions meant to help out in such special cases::
+
+    void debugfs_create_size_t(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			       struct dentry *parent, size_t *value);
+
+As might be expected, this function will create a debugfs file to represent
+a variable of type size_t.
+
+Similarly, there are helpers for variables of type unsigned long, in decimal
+and hexadecimal::
+
+    struct dentry *debugfs_create_ulong(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+					struct dentry *parent,
+					unsigned long *value);
+    void debugfs_create_xul(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			    struct dentry *parent, unsigned long *value);
+
+Boolean values can be placed in debugfs with::
+
+    void debugfs_create_bool(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+                             struct dentry *parent, bool *value);
+
+A read on the resulting file will yield either Y (for non-zero values) or
+N, followed by a newline.  If written to, it will accept either upper- or
+lower-case values, or 1 or 0.  Any other input will be silently ignored.
+
+Also, atomic_t values can be placed in debugfs with::
+
+    void debugfs_create_atomic_t(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+				 struct dentry *parent, atomic_t *value)
+
+A read of this file will get atomic_t values, and a write of this file
+will set atomic_t values.
+
+Another option is exporting a block of arbitrary binary data, with
+this structure and function::
+
+    struct debugfs_blob_wrapper {
+	void *data;
+	unsigned long size;
+    };
+
+    struct dentry *debugfs_create_blob(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+				       struct dentry *parent,
+				       struct debugfs_blob_wrapper *blob);
+
+A read of this file will return the data pointed to by the
+debugfs_blob_wrapper structure.  Some drivers use "blobs" as a simple way
+to return several lines of (static) formatted text output.  This function
+can be used to export binary information, but there does not appear to be
+any code which does so in the mainline.  Note that all files created with
+debugfs_create_blob() are read-only.
+
+If you want to dump a block of registers (something that happens quite
+often during development, even if little such code reaches mainline.
+Debugfs offers two functions: one to make a registers-only file, and
+another to insert a register block in the middle of another sequential
+file::
+
+    struct debugfs_reg32 {
+	char *name;
+	unsigned long offset;
+    };
+
+    struct debugfs_regset32 {
+	const struct debugfs_reg32 *regs;
+	int nregs;
+	void __iomem *base;
+	struct device *dev;     /* Optional device for Runtime PM */
+    };
+
+    debugfs_create_regset32(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			    struct dentry *parent,
+			    struct debugfs_regset32 *regset);
+
+    void debugfs_print_regs32(struct seq_file *s, const struct debugfs_reg32 *regs,
+			 int nregs, void __iomem *base, char *prefix);
+
+The "base" argument may be 0, but you may want to build the reg32 array
+using __stringify, and a number of register names (macros) are actually
+byte offsets over a base for the register block.
+
+If you want to dump an u32 array in debugfs, you can create file with::
+
+    struct debugfs_u32_array {
+	u32 *array;
+	u32 n_elements;
+    };
+
+    void debugfs_create_u32_array(const char *name, umode_t mode,
+			struct dentry *parent,
+			struct debugfs_u32_array *array);
+
+The "array" argument wraps a pointer to the array's data and the number
+of its elements. Note: Once array is created its size can not be changed.
+
+There is a helper function to create device related seq_file::
+
+   void debugfs_create_devm_seqfile(struct device *dev,
+				const char *name,
+				struct dentry *parent,
+				int (*read_fn)(struct seq_file *s,
+					void *data));
+
+The "dev" argument is the device related to this debugfs file, and
+the "read_fn" is a function pointer which to be called to print the
+seq_file content.
+
+There are a couple of other directory-oriented helper functions::
+
+    struct dentry *debugfs_rename(struct dentry *old_dir,
+    				  struct dentry *old_dentry,
+		                  struct dentry *new_dir,
+				  const char *new_name);
+
+    struct dentry *debugfs_create_symlink(const char *name,
+                                          struct dentry *parent,
+				      	  const char *target);
+
+A call to debugfs_rename() will give a new name to an existing debugfs
+file, possibly in a different directory.  The new_name must not exist prior
+to the call; the return value is old_dentry with updated information.
+Symbolic links can be created with debugfs_create_symlink().
+
+There is one important thing that all debugfs users must take into account:
+there is no automatic cleanup of any directories created in debugfs.  If a
+module is unloaded without explicitly removing debugfs entries, the result
+will be a lot of stale pointers and no end of highly antisocial behavior.
+So all debugfs users - at least those which can be built as modules - must
+be prepared to remove all files and directories they create there.  A file
+can be removed with::
+
+    void debugfs_remove(struct dentry *dentry);
+
+The dentry value can be NULL or an error value, in which case nothing will
+be removed.
+
+Once upon a time, debugfs users were required to remember the dentry
+pointer for every debugfs file they created so that all files could be
+cleaned up.  We live in more civilized times now, though, and debugfs users
+can call::
+
+    void debugfs_remove_recursive(struct dentry *dentry);
+
+If this function is passed a pointer for the dentry corresponding to the
+top-level directory, the entire hierarchy below that directory will be
+removed.
+
+.. [1] http://lwn.net/Articles/309298/
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/devpts.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/devpts.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a03248ddf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/devpts.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================
+The Devpts Filesystem
+=====================
+
+Each mount of the devpts filesystem is now distinct such that ptys
+and their indicies allocated in one mount are independent from ptys
+and their indicies in all other mounts.
+
+All mounts of the devpts filesystem now create a ``/dev/pts/ptmx`` node
+with permissions ``0000``.
+
+To retain backwards compatibility the a ptmx device node (aka any node
+created with ``mknod name c 5 2``) when opened will look for an instance
+of devpts under the name ``pts`` in the same directory as the ptmx device
+node.
+
+As an option instead of placing a ``/dev/ptmx`` device node at ``/dev/ptmx``
+it is possible to place a symlink to ``/dev/pts/ptmx`` at ``/dev/ptmx`` or
+to bind mount ``/dev/ptx/ptmx`` to ``/dev/ptmx``.  If you opt for using
+the devpts filesystem in this manner devpts should be mounted with
+the ``ptmxmode=0666``, or ``chmod 0666 /dev/pts/ptmx`` should be called.
+
+Total count of pty pairs in all instances is limited by sysctls::
+
+    kernel.pty.max = 4096	- global limit
+    kernel.pty.reserve = 1024	- reserved for filesystems mounted from the initial mount namespace
+    kernel.pty.nr		- current count of ptys
+
+Per-instance limit could be set by adding mount option ``max=<count>``.
+
+This feature was added in kernel 3.4 together with
+``sysctl kernel.pty.reserve``.
+
+In kernels older than 3.4 sysctl ``kernel.pty.max`` works as per-instance limit.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/directory-locking.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/directory-locking.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..193c22687
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/directory-locking.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+=================
+Directory Locking
+=================
+
+
+Locking scheme used for directory operations is based on two
+kinds of locks - per-inode (->i_rwsem) and per-filesystem
+(->s_vfs_rename_mutex).
+
+When taking the i_rwsem on multiple non-directory objects, we
+always acquire the locks in order by increasing address.  We'll call
+that "inode pointer" order in the following.
+
+For our purposes all operations fall in 5 classes:
+
+1) read access.  Locking rules: caller locks directory we are accessing.
+The lock is taken shared.
+
+2) object creation.  Locking rules: same as above, but the lock is taken
+exclusive.
+
+3) object removal.  Locking rules: caller locks parent, finds victim,
+locks victim and calls the method.  Locks are exclusive.
+
+4) rename() that is _not_ cross-directory.  Locking rules: caller locks
+the parent and finds source and target.  Then we decide which of the
+source and target need to be locked.  Source needs to be locked if it's a
+non-directory; target - if it's a non-directory or about to be removed.
+Take the locks that need to be taken, in inode pointer order if need
+to take both (that can happen only when both source and target are
+non-directories - the source because it wouldn't be locked otherwise
+and the target because mixing directory and non-directory is allowed
+only with RENAME_EXCHANGE, and that won't be removing the target).
+After the locks had been taken, call the method.  All locks are exclusive.
+
+5) link creation.  Locking rules:
+
+	* lock parent
+	* check that source is not a directory
+	* lock source
+	* call the method.
+
+All locks are exclusive.
+
+6) cross-directory rename.  The trickiest in the whole bunch.  Locking
+rules:
+
+	* lock the filesystem
+	* lock parents in "ancestors first" order. If one is not ancestor of
+	  the other, lock the parent of source first.
+	* find source and target.
+	* if old parent is equal to or is a descendent of target
+	  fail with -ENOTEMPTY
+	* if new parent is equal to or is a descendent of source
+	  fail with -ELOOP
+	* Lock subdirectories involved (source before target).
+	* Lock non-directories involved, in inode pointer order.
+	* call the method.
+
+All ->i_rwsem are taken exclusive.
+
+The rules above obviously guarantee that all directories that are going to be
+read, modified or removed by method will be locked by caller.
+
+
+If no directory is its own ancestor, the scheme above is deadlock-free.
+
+Proof:
+
+[XXX: will be updated once we are done massaging the lock_rename()]
+	First of all, at any moment we have a linear ordering of the
+	objects - A < B iff (A is an ancestor of B) or (B is not an ancestor
+        of A and ptr(A) < ptr(B)).
+
+	That ordering can change.  However, the following is true:
+
+(1) if object removal or non-cross-directory rename holds lock on A and
+    attempts to acquire lock on B, A will remain the parent of B until we
+    acquire the lock on B.  (Proof: only cross-directory rename can change
+    the parent of object and it would have to lock the parent).
+
+(2) if cross-directory rename holds the lock on filesystem, order will not
+    change until rename acquires all locks.  (Proof: other cross-directory
+    renames will be blocked on filesystem lock and we don't start changing
+    the order until we had acquired all locks).
+
+(3) locks on non-directory objects are acquired only after locks on
+    directory objects, and are acquired in inode pointer order.
+    (Proof: all operations but renames take lock on at most one
+    non-directory object, except renames, which take locks on source and
+    target in inode pointer order in the case they are not directories.)
+
+Now consider the minimal deadlock.  Each process is blocked on
+attempt to acquire some lock and already holds at least one lock.  Let's
+consider the set of contended locks.  First of all, filesystem lock is
+not contended, since any process blocked on it is not holding any locks.
+Thus all processes are blocked on ->i_rwsem.
+
+By (3), any process holding a non-directory lock can only be
+waiting on another non-directory lock with a larger address.  Therefore
+the process holding the "largest" such lock can always make progress, and
+non-directory objects are not included in the set of contended locks.
+
+Thus link creation can't be a part of deadlock - it can't be
+blocked on source and it means that it doesn't hold any locks.
+
+Any contended object is either held by cross-directory rename or
+has a child that is also contended.  Indeed, suppose that it is held by
+operation other than cross-directory rename.  Then the lock this operation
+is blocked on belongs to child of that object due to (1).
+
+It means that one of the operations is cross-directory rename.
+Otherwise the set of contended objects would be infinite - each of them
+would have a contended child and we had assumed that no object is its
+own descendent.  Moreover, there is exactly one cross-directory rename
+(see above).
+
+Consider the object blocking the cross-directory rename.  One
+of its descendents is locked by cross-directory rename (otherwise we
+would again have an infinite set of contended objects).  But that
+means that cross-directory rename is taking locks out of order.  Due
+to (2) the order hadn't changed since we had acquired filesystem lock.
+But locking rules for cross-directory rename guarantee that we do not
+try to acquire lock on descendent before the lock on ancestor.
+Contradiction.  I.e.  deadlock is impossible.  Q.E.D.
+
+
+These operations are guaranteed to avoid loop creation.  Indeed,
+the only operation that could introduce loops is cross-directory rename.
+Since the only new (parent, child) pair added by rename() is (new parent,
+source), such loop would have to contain these objects and the rest of it
+would have to exist before rename().  I.e. at the moment of loop creation
+rename() responsible for that would be holding filesystem lock and new parent
+would have to be equal to or a descendent of source.  But that means that
+new parent had been equal to or a descendent of source since the moment when
+we had acquired filesystem lock and rename() would fail with -ELOOP in that
+case.
+
+While this locking scheme works for arbitrary DAGs, it relies on
+ability to check that directory is a descendent of another object.  Current
+implementation assumes that directory graph is a tree.  This assumption is
+also preserved by all operations (cross-directory rename on a tree that would
+not introduce a cycle will leave it a tree and link() fails for directories).
+
+Notice that "directory" in the above == "anything that might have
+children", so if we are going to introduce hybrid objects we will need
+either to make sure that link(2) doesn't work for them or to make changes
+in is_subdir() that would make it work even in presence of such beasts.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/dlmfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/dlmfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..28dd41a63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/dlmfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=====
+DLMFS
+=====
+
+A minimal DLM userspace interface implemented via a virtual file
+system.
+
+dlmfs is built with OCFS2 as it requires most of its infrastructure.
+
+:Project web page:    http://ocfs2.wiki.kernel.org
+:Tools web page:      https://github.com/markfasheh/ocfs2-tools
+:OCFS2 mailing lists: https://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2/mailman/
+
+All code copyright 2005 Oracle except when otherwise noted.
+
+Credits
+=======
+
+Some code taken from ramfs which is Copyright |copy| 2000 Linus Torvalds
+and Transmeta Corp.
+
+Mark Fasheh <mark.fasheh@oracle.com>
+
+Caveats
+=======
+- Right now it only works with the OCFS2 DLM, though support for other
+  DLM implementations should not be a major issue.
+
+Mount options
+=============
+None
+
+Usage
+=====
+
+If you're just interested in OCFS2, then please see ocfs2.txt. The
+rest of this document will be geared towards those who want to use
+dlmfs for easy to setup and easy to use clustered locking in
+userspace.
+
+Setup
+=====
+
+dlmfs requires that the OCFS2 cluster infrastructure be in
+place. Please download ocfs2-tools from the above url and configure a
+cluster.
+
+You'll want to start heartbeating on a volume which all the nodes in
+your lockspace can access. The easiest way to do this is via
+ocfs2_hb_ctl (distributed with ocfs2-tools). Right now it requires
+that an OCFS2 file system be in place so that it can automatically
+find its heartbeat area, though it will eventually support heartbeat
+against raw disks.
+
+Please see the ocfs2_hb_ctl and mkfs.ocfs2 manual pages distributed
+with ocfs2-tools.
+
+Once you're heartbeating, DLM lock 'domains' can be easily created /
+destroyed and locks within them accessed.
+
+Locking
+=======
+
+Users may access dlmfs via standard file system calls, or they can use
+'libo2dlm' (distributed with ocfs2-tools) which abstracts the file
+system calls and presents a more traditional locking api.
+
+dlmfs handles lock caching automatically for the user, so a lock
+request for an already acquired lock will not generate another DLM
+call. Userspace programs are assumed to handle their own local
+locking.
+
+Two levels of locks are supported - Shared Read, and Exclusive.
+Also supported is a Trylock operation.
+
+For information on the libo2dlm interface, please see o2dlm.h,
+distributed with ocfs2-tools.
+
+Lock value blocks can be read and written to a resource via read(2)
+and write(2) against the fd obtained via your open(2) call. The
+maximum currently supported LVB length is 64 bytes (though that is an
+OCFS2 DLM limitation). Through this mechanism, users of dlmfs can share
+small amounts of data amongst their nodes.
+
+mkdir(2) signals dlmfs to join a domain (which will have the same name
+as the resulting directory)
+
+rmdir(2) signals dlmfs to leave the domain
+
+Locks for a given domain are represented by regular inodes inside the
+domain directory.  Locking against them is done via the open(2) system
+call.
+
+The open(2) call will not return until your lock has been granted or
+an error has occurred, unless it has been instructed to do a trylock
+operation. If the lock succeeds, you'll get an fd.
+
+open(2) with O_CREAT to ensure the resource inode is created - dlmfs does
+not automatically create inodes for existing lock resources.
+
+============  ===========================
+Open Flag     Lock Request Type
+============  ===========================
+O_RDONLY      Shared Read
+O_RDWR        Exclusive
+============  ===========================
+
+
+============  ===========================
+Open Flag     Resulting Locking Behavior
+============  ===========================
+O_NONBLOCK    Trylock operation
+============  ===========================
+
+You must provide exactly one of O_RDONLY or O_RDWR.
+
+If O_NONBLOCK is also provided and the trylock operation was valid but
+could not lock the resource then open(2) will return ETXTBUSY.
+
+close(2) drops the lock associated with your fd.
+
+Modes passed to mkdir(2) or open(2) are adhered to locally. Chown is
+supported locally as well. This means you can use them to restrict
+access to the resources via dlmfs on your local node only.
+
+The resource LVB may be read from the fd in either Shared Read or
+Exclusive modes via the read(2) system call. It can be written via
+write(2) only when open in Exclusive mode.
+
+Once written, an LVB will be visible to other nodes who obtain Read
+Only or higher level locks on the resource.
+
+See Also
+========
+http://opendlm.sourceforge.net/cvsmirror/opendlm/docs/dlmbook_final.pdf
+
+For more information on the VMS distributed locking API.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a28a1f9ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================
+Linux Directory Notification
+============================
+
+	   Stephen Rothwell <sfr@canb.auug.org.au>
+
+The intention of directory notification is to allow user applications
+to be notified when a directory, or any of the files in it, are changed.
+The basic mechanism involves the application registering for notification
+on a directory using a fcntl(2) call and the notifications themselves
+being delivered using signals.
+
+The application decides which "events" it wants to be notified about.
+The currently defined events are:
+
+	=========	=====================================================
+	DN_ACCESS	A file in the directory was accessed (read)
+	DN_MODIFY	A file in the directory was modified (write,truncate)
+	DN_CREATE	A file was created in the directory
+	DN_DELETE	A file was unlinked from directory
+	DN_RENAME	A file in the directory was renamed
+	DN_ATTRIB	A file in the directory had its attributes
+			changed (chmod,chown)
+	=========	=====================================================
+
+Usually, the application must reregister after each notification, but
+if DN_MULTISHOT is or'ed with the event mask, then the registration will
+remain until explicitly removed (by registering for no events).
+
+By default, SIGIO will be delivered to the process and no other useful
+information.  However, if the F_SETSIG fcntl(2) call is used to let the
+kernel know which signal to deliver, a siginfo structure will be passed to
+the signal handler and the si_fd member of that structure will contain the
+file descriptor associated with the directory in which the event occurred.
+
+Preferably the application will choose one of the real time signals
+(SIGRTMIN + <n>) so that the notifications may be queued.  This is
+especially important if DN_MULTISHOT is specified.  Note that SIGRTMIN
+is often blocked, so it is better to use (at least) SIGRTMIN + 1.
+
+Implementation expectations (features and bugs :-))
+---------------------------------------------------
+
+The notification should work for any local access to files even if the
+actual file system is on a remote server.  This implies that remote
+access to files served by local user mode servers should be notified.
+Also, remote accesses to files served by a local kernel NFS server should
+be notified.
+
+In order to make the impact on the file system code as small as possible,
+the problem of hard links to files has been ignored.  So if a file (x)
+exists in two directories (a and b) then a change to the file using the
+name "a/x" should be notified to a program expecting notifications on
+directory "a", but will not be notified to one expecting notifications on
+directory "b".
+
+Also, files that are unlinked, will still cause notifications in the
+last directory that they were linked to.
+
+Configuration
+-------------
+
+Dnotify is controlled via the CONFIG_DNOTIFY configuration option.  When
+disabled, fcntl(fd, F_NOTIFY, ...) will return -EINVAL.
+
+Example
+-------
+See tools/testing/selftests/filesystems/dnotify_test.c for an example.
+
+NOTE
+----
+Beginning with Linux 2.6.13, dnotify has been replaced by inotify.
+See Documentation/filesystems/inotify.rst for more information on it.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ecryptfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ecryptfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1f2edef4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ecryptfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================================================
+eCryptfs: A stacked cryptographic filesystem for Linux
+======================================================
+
+eCryptfs is free software. Please see the file COPYING for details.
+For documentation, please see the files in the doc/ subdirectory.  For
+building and installation instructions please see the INSTALL file.
+
+:Maintainer: Phillip Hellewell
+:Lead developer: Michael A. Halcrow <mhalcrow@us.ibm.com>
+:Developers: Michael C. Thompson
+             Kent Yoder
+:Web Site: http://ecryptfs.sf.net
+
+This software is currently undergoing development. Make sure to
+maintain a backup copy of any data you write into eCryptfs.
+
+eCryptfs requires the userspace tools downloadable from the
+SourceForge site:
+
+http://sourceforge.net/projects/ecryptfs/
+
+Userspace requirements include:
+
+- David Howells' userspace keyring headers and libraries (version
+  1.0 or higher), obtainable from
+  http://people.redhat.com/~dhowells/keyutils/
+- Libgcrypt
+
+
+.. note::
+
+   In the beta/experimental releases of eCryptfs, when you upgrade
+   eCryptfs, you should copy the files to an unencrypted location and
+   then copy the files back into the new eCryptfs mount to migrate the
+   files.
+
+
+Mount-wide Passphrase
+=====================
+
+Create a new directory into which eCryptfs will write its encrypted
+files (i.e., /root/crypt).  Then, create the mount point directory
+(i.e., /mnt/crypt).  Now it's time to mount eCryptfs::
+
+    mount -t ecryptfs /root/crypt /mnt/crypt
+
+You should be prompted for a passphrase and a salt (the salt may be
+blank).
+
+Try writing a new file::
+
+    echo "Hello, World" > /mnt/crypt/hello.txt
+
+The operation will complete.  Notice that there is a new file in
+/root/crypt that is at least 12288 bytes in size (depending on your
+host page size).  This is the encrypted underlying file for what you
+just wrote.  To test reading, from start to finish, you need to clear
+the user session keyring:
+
+keyctl clear @u
+
+Then umount /mnt/crypt and mount again per the instructions given
+above.
+
+::
+
+    cat /mnt/crypt/hello.txt
+
+
+Notes
+=====
+
+eCryptfs version 0.1 should only be mounted on (1) empty directories
+or (2) directories containing files only created by eCryptfs. If you
+mount a directory that has pre-existing files not created by eCryptfs,
+then behavior is undefined. Do not run eCryptfs in higher verbosity
+levels unless you are doing so for the sole purpose of debugging or
+development, since secret values will be written out to the system log
+in that case.
+
+
+Mike Halcrow
+mhalcrow@us.ibm.com
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/efivarfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/efivarfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..055198582
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/efivarfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======================================
+efivarfs - a (U)EFI variable filesystem
+=======================================
+
+The efivarfs filesystem was created to address the shortcomings of
+using entries in sysfs to maintain EFI variables. The old sysfs EFI
+variables code only supported variables of up to 1024 bytes. This
+limitation existed in version 0.99 of the EFI specification, but was
+removed before any full releases. Since variables can now be larger
+than a single page, sysfs isn't the best interface for this.
+
+Variables can be created, deleted and modified with the efivarfs
+filesystem.
+
+efivarfs is typically mounted like this::
+
+	mount -t efivarfs none /sys/firmware/efi/efivars
+
+Due to the presence of numerous firmware bugs where removing non-standard
+UEFI variables causes the system firmware to fail to POST, efivarfs
+files that are not well-known standardized variables are created
+as immutable files.  This doesn't prevent removal - "chattr -i" will work -
+but it does prevent this kind of failure from being accomplished
+accidentally.
+
+.. warning ::
+      When a content of an UEFI variable in /sys/firmware/efi/efivars is
+      displayed, for example using "hexdump", pay attention that the first
+      4 bytes of the output represent the UEFI variable attributes,
+      in little-endian format.
+
+      Practically the output of each efivar is composed of:
+
+          +-----------------------------------+
+          |4_bytes_of_attributes + efivar_data|
+          +-----------------------------------+
+
+*See also:*
+
+- Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/ssdt-overlays.rst
+- Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/erofs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/erofs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..05e03d54a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/erofs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,316 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================================
+EROFS - Enhanced Read-Only File System
+======================================
+
+Overview
+========
+
+EROFS filesystem stands for Enhanced Read-Only File System.  It aims to form a
+generic read-only filesystem solution for various read-only use cases instead
+of just focusing on storage space saving without considering any side effects
+of runtime performance.
+
+It is designed to meet the needs of flexibility, feature extendability and user
+payload friendly, etc.  Apart from those, it is still kept as a simple
+random-access friendly high-performance filesystem to get rid of unneeded I/O
+amplification and memory-resident overhead compared to similar approaches.
+
+It is implemented to be a better choice for the following scenarios:
+
+ - read-only storage media or
+
+ - part of a fully trusted read-only solution, which means it needs to be
+   immutable and bit-for-bit identical to the official golden image for
+   their releases due to security or other considerations and
+
+ - hope to minimize extra storage space with guaranteed end-to-end performance
+   by using compact layout, transparent file compression and direct access,
+   especially for those embedded devices with limited memory and high-density
+   hosts with numerous containers.
+
+Here is the main features of EROFS:
+
+ - Little endian on-disk design;
+
+ - 4KiB block size and 32-bit block addresses, therefore 16TiB address space
+   at most for now;
+
+ - Two inode layouts for different requirements:
+
+   =====================  ============  ======================================
+                          compact (v1)  extended (v2)
+   =====================  ============  ======================================
+   Inode metadata size    32 bytes      64 bytes
+   Max file size          4 GiB         16 EiB (also limited by max. vol size)
+   Max uids/gids          65536         4294967296
+   Per-inode timestamp    no            yes (64 + 32-bit timestamp)
+   Max hardlinks          65536         4294967296
+   Metadata reserved      8 bytes       18 bytes
+   =====================  ============  ======================================
+
+ - Metadata and data could be mixed as an option;
+
+ - Support extended attributes (xattrs) as an option;
+
+ - Support tailpacking data and xattr inline compared to byte-addressed
+   unaligned metadata or smaller block size alternatives;
+
+ - Support POSIX.1e ACLs by using xattrs;
+
+ - Support transparent data compression as an option:
+   LZ4 and MicroLZMA algorithms can be used on a per-file basis; In addition,
+   inplace decompression is also supported to avoid bounce compressed buffers
+   and page cache thrashing.
+
+ - Support direct I/O on uncompressed files to avoid double caching for loop
+   devices;
+
+ - Support FSDAX on uncompressed images for secure containers and ramdisks in
+   order to get rid of unnecessary page cache.
+
+ - Support multiple devices for multi blob container images;
+
+ - Support file-based on-demand loading with the Fscache infrastructure.
+
+The following git tree provides the file system user-space tools under
+development, such as a formatting tool (mkfs.erofs), an on-disk consistency &
+compatibility checking tool (fsck.erofs), and a debugging tool (dump.erofs):
+
+- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/xiang/erofs-utils.git
+
+Bugs and patches are welcome, please kindly help us and send to the following
+linux-erofs mailing list:
+
+- linux-erofs mailing list   <linux-erofs@lists.ozlabs.org>
+
+Mount options
+=============
+
+===================    =========================================================
+(no)user_xattr         Setup Extended User Attributes. Note: xattr is enabled
+                       by default if CONFIG_EROFS_FS_XATTR is selected.
+(no)acl                Setup POSIX Access Control List. Note: acl is enabled
+                       by default if CONFIG_EROFS_FS_POSIX_ACL is selected.
+cache_strategy=%s      Select a strategy for cached decompression from now on:
+
+		       ==========  =============================================
+                         disabled  In-place I/O decompression only;
+                        readahead  Cache the last incomplete compressed physical
+                                   cluster for further reading. It still does
+                                   in-place I/O decompression for the rest
+                                   compressed physical clusters;
+                       readaround  Cache the both ends of incomplete compressed
+                                   physical clusters for further reading.
+                                   It still does in-place I/O decompression
+                                   for the rest compressed physical clusters.
+		       ==========  =============================================
+dax={always,never}     Use direct access (no page cache).  See
+                       Documentation/filesystems/dax.rst.
+dax                    A legacy option which is an alias for ``dax=always``.
+device=%s              Specify a path to an extra device to be used together.
+fsid=%s                Specify a filesystem image ID for Fscache back-end.
+===================    =========================================================
+
+Sysfs Entries
+=============
+
+Information about mounted erofs file systems can be found in /sys/fs/erofs.
+Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in /sys/fs/erofs based on its
+device name (i.e., /sys/fs/erofs/sda).
+(see also Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-erofs)
+
+On-disk details
+===============
+
+Summary
+-------
+Different from other read-only file systems, an EROFS volume is designed
+to be as simple as possible::
+
+                                |-> aligned with the block size
+   ____________________________________________________________
+  | |SB| | ... | Metadata | ... | Data | Metadata | ... | Data |
+  |_|__|_|_____|__________|_____|______|__________|_____|______|
+  0 +1K
+
+All data areas should be aligned with the block size, but metadata areas
+may not. All metadatas can be now observed in two different spaces (views):
+
+ 1. Inode metadata space
+
+    Each valid inode should be aligned with an inode slot, which is a fixed
+    value (32 bytes) and designed to be kept in line with compact inode size.
+
+    Each inode can be directly found with the following formula:
+         inode offset = meta_blkaddr * block_size + 32 * nid
+
+    ::
+
+                                 |-> aligned with 8B
+                                            |-> followed closely
+     + meta_blkaddr blocks                                      |-> another slot
+       _____________________________________________________________________
+     |  ...   | inode |  xattrs  | extents  | data inline | ... | inode ...
+     |________|_______|(optional)|(optional)|__(optional)_|_____|__________
+              |-> aligned with the inode slot size
+                   .                   .
+                 .                         .
+               .                              .
+             .                                    .
+           .                                         .
+         .                                              .
+       .____________________________________________________|-> aligned with 4B
+       | xattr_ibody_header | shared xattrs | inline xattrs |
+       |____________________|_______________|_______________|
+       |->    12 bytes    <-|->x * 4 bytes<-|               .
+                           .                .                 .
+                     .                      .                   .
+                .                           .                     .
+            ._______________________________.______________________.
+            | id | id | id | id |  ... | id | ent | ... | ent| ... |
+            |____|____|____|____|______|____|_____|_____|____|_____|
+                                            |-> aligned with 4B
+                                                        |-> aligned with 4B
+
+    Inode could be 32 or 64 bytes, which can be distinguished from a common
+    field which all inode versions have -- i_format::
+
+        __________________               __________________
+       |     i_format     |             |     i_format     |
+       |__________________|             |__________________|
+       |        ...       |             |        ...       |
+       |                  |             |                  |
+       |__________________| 32 bytes    |                  |
+                                        |                  |
+                                        |__________________| 64 bytes
+
+    Xattrs, extents, data inline are followed by the corresponding inode with
+    proper alignment, and they could be optional for different data mappings.
+    _currently_ total 5 data layouts are supported:
+
+    ==  ====================================================================
+     0  flat file data without data inline (no extent);
+     1  fixed-sized output data compression (with non-compacted indexes);
+     2  flat file data with tail packing data inline (no extent);
+     3  fixed-sized output data compression (with compacted indexes, v5.3+);
+     4  chunk-based file (v5.15+).
+    ==  ====================================================================
+
+    The size of the optional xattrs is indicated by i_xattr_count in inode
+    header. Large xattrs or xattrs shared by many different files can be
+    stored in shared xattrs metadata rather than inlined right after inode.
+
+ 2. Shared xattrs metadata space
+
+    Shared xattrs space is similar to the above inode space, started with
+    a specific block indicated by xattr_blkaddr, organized one by one with
+    proper align.
+
+    Each share xattr can also be directly found by the following formula:
+         xattr offset = xattr_blkaddr * block_size + 4 * xattr_id
+
+::
+
+                           |-> aligned by  4 bytes
+    + xattr_blkaddr blocks                     |-> aligned with 4 bytes
+     _________________________________________________________________________
+    |  ...   | xattr_entry |  xattr data | ... |  xattr_entry | xattr data  ...
+    |________|_____________|_____________|_____|______________|_______________
+
+Directories
+-----------
+All directories are now organized in a compact on-disk format. Note that
+each directory block is divided into index and name areas in order to support
+random file lookup, and all directory entries are _strictly_ recorded in
+alphabetical order in order to support improved prefix binary search
+algorithm (could refer to the related source code).
+
+::
+
+                  ___________________________
+                 /                           |
+                /              ______________|________________
+               /              /              | nameoff1       | nameoffN-1
+  ____________.______________._______________v________________v__________
+ | dirent | dirent | ... | dirent | filename | filename | ... | filename |
+ |___.0___|____1___|_____|___N-1__|____0_____|____1_____|_____|___N-1____|
+      \                           ^
+       \                          |                           * could have
+        \                         |                             trailing '\0'
+         \________________________| nameoff0
+                             Directory block
+
+Note that apart from the offset of the first filename, nameoff0 also indicates
+the total number of directory entries in this block since it is no need to
+introduce another on-disk field at all.
+
+Chunk-based files
+-----------------
+In order to support chunk-based data deduplication, a new inode data layout has
+been supported since Linux v5.15: Files are split in equal-sized data chunks
+with ``extents`` area of the inode metadata indicating how to get the chunk
+data: these can be simply as a 4-byte block address array or in the 8-byte
+chunk index form (see struct erofs_inode_chunk_index in erofs_fs.h for more
+details.)
+
+By the way, chunk-based files are all uncompressed for now.
+
+Data compression
+----------------
+EROFS implements LZ4 fixed-sized output compression which generates fixed-sized
+compressed data blocks from variable-sized input in contrast to other existing
+fixed-sized input solutions. Relatively higher compression ratios can be gotten
+by using fixed-sized output compression since nowadays popular data compression
+algorithms are mostly LZ77-based and such fixed-sized output approach can be
+benefited from the historical dictionary (aka. sliding window).
+
+In details, original (uncompressed) data is turned into several variable-sized
+extents and in the meanwhile, compressed into physical clusters (pclusters).
+In order to record each variable-sized extent, logical clusters (lclusters) are
+introduced as the basic unit of compress indexes to indicate whether a new
+extent is generated within the range (HEAD) or not (NONHEAD). Lclusters are now
+fixed in block size, as illustrated below::
+
+          |<-    variable-sized extent    ->|<-       VLE         ->|
+        clusterofs                        clusterofs              clusterofs
+          |                                 |                       |
+ _________v_________________________________v_______________________v________
+ ... |    .         |              |        .     |              |  .   ...
+ ____|____._________|______________|________.___ _|______________|__.________
+     |-> lcluster <-|-> lcluster <-|-> lcluster <-|-> lcluster <-|
+          (HEAD)        (NONHEAD)       (HEAD)        (NONHEAD)    .
+           .             CBLKCNT            .                    .
+            .                               .                  .
+             .                              .                .
+       _______._____________________________.______________._________________
+          ... |              |              |              | ...
+       _______|______________|______________|______________|_________________
+              |->      big pcluster       <-|-> pcluster <-|
+
+A physical cluster can be seen as a container of physical compressed blocks
+which contains compressed data. Previously, only lcluster-sized (4KB) pclusters
+were supported. After big pcluster feature is introduced (available since
+Linux v5.13), pcluster can be a multiple of lcluster size.
+
+For each HEAD lcluster, clusterofs is recorded to indicate where a new extent
+starts and blkaddr is used to seek the compressed data. For each NONHEAD
+lcluster, delta0 and delta1 are available instead of blkaddr to indicate the
+distance to its HEAD lcluster and the next HEAD lcluster. A PLAIN lcluster is
+also a HEAD lcluster except that its data is uncompressed. See the comments
+around "struct z_erofs_vle_decompressed_index" in erofs_fs.h for more details.
+
+If big pcluster is enabled, pcluster size in lclusters needs to be recorded as
+well. Let the delta0 of the first NONHEAD lcluster store the compressed block
+count with a special flag as a new called CBLKCNT NONHEAD lcluster. It's easy
+to understand its delta0 is constantly 1, as illustrated below::
+
+   __________________________________________________________
+  | HEAD |  NONHEAD  | NONHEAD | ... | NONHEAD | HEAD | HEAD |
+  |__:___|_(CBLKCNT)_|_________|_____|_________|__:___|____:_|
+     |<----- a big pcluster (with CBLKCNT) ------>|<--  -->|
+           a lcluster-sized pcluster (without CBLKCNT) ^
+
+If another HEAD follows a HEAD lcluster, there is no room to record CBLKCNT,
+but it's easy to know the size of such pcluster is 1 lcluster as well.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext2.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext2.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..92aae683e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext2.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,398 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+
+==============================
+The Second Extended Filesystem
+==============================
+
+ext2 was originally released in January 1993.  Written by R\'emy Card,
+Theodore Ts'o and Stephen Tweedie, it was a major rewrite of the
+Extended Filesystem.  It is currently still (April 2001) the predominant
+filesystem in use by Linux.  There are also implementations available
+for NetBSD, FreeBSD, the GNU HURD, Windows 95/98/NT, OS/2 and RISC OS.
+
+Options
+=======
+
+Most defaults are determined by the filesystem superblock, and can be
+set using tune2fs(8). Kernel-determined defaults are indicated by (*).
+
+====================    ===     ================================================
+bsddf			(*)	Makes ``df`` act like BSD.
+minixdf				Makes ``df`` act like Minix.
+
+check=none, nocheck	(*)	Don't do extra checking of bitmaps on mount
+				(check=normal and check=strict options removed)
+
+dax				Use direct access (no page cache).  See
+				Documentation/filesystems/dax.rst.
+
+debug				Extra debugging information is sent to the
+				kernel syslog.  Useful for developers.
+
+errors=continue			Keep going on a filesystem error.
+errors=remount-ro		Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
+errors=panic			Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
+
+grpid, bsdgroups		Give objects the same group ID as their parent.
+nogrpid, sysvgroups		New objects have the group ID of their creator.
+
+nouid32				Use 16-bit UIDs and GIDs.
+
+oldalloc			Enable the old block allocator. Orlov should
+				have better performance, we'd like to get some
+				feedback if it's the contrary for you.
+orlov			(*)	Use the Orlov block allocator.
+				(See http://lwn.net/Articles/14633/ and
+				http://lwn.net/Articles/14446/.)
+
+resuid=n			The user ID which may use the reserved blocks.
+resgid=n			The group ID which may use the reserved blocks.
+
+sb=n				Use alternate superblock at this location.
+
+user_xattr			Enable "user." POSIX Extended Attributes
+				(requires CONFIG_EXT2_FS_XATTR).
+nouser_xattr			Don't support "user." extended attributes.
+
+acl				Enable POSIX Access Control Lists support
+				(requires CONFIG_EXT2_FS_POSIX_ACL).
+noacl				Don't support POSIX ACLs.
+
+quota, usrquota			Enable user disk quota support
+				(requires CONFIG_QUOTA).
+
+grpquota			Enable group disk quota support
+				(requires CONFIG_QUOTA).
+====================    ===     ================================================
+
+noquota option ls silently ignored by ext2.
+
+
+Specification
+=============
+
+ext2 shares many properties with traditional Unix filesystems.  It has
+the concepts of blocks, inodes and directories.  It has space in the
+specification for Access Control Lists (ACLs), fragments, undeletion and
+compression though these are not yet implemented (some are available as
+separate patches).  There is also a versioning mechanism to allow new
+features (such as journalling) to be added in a maximally compatible
+manner.
+
+Blocks
+------
+
+The space in the device or file is split up into blocks.  These are
+a fixed size, of 1024, 2048 or 4096 bytes (8192 bytes on Alpha systems),
+which is decided when the filesystem is created.  Smaller blocks mean
+less wasted space per file, but require slightly more accounting overhead,
+and also impose other limits on the size of files and the filesystem.
+
+Block Groups
+------------
+
+Blocks are clustered into block groups in order to reduce fragmentation
+and minimise the amount of head seeking when reading a large amount
+of consecutive data.  Information about each block group is kept in a
+descriptor table stored in the block(s) immediately after the superblock.
+Two blocks near the start of each group are reserved for the block usage
+bitmap and the inode usage bitmap which show which blocks and inodes
+are in use.  Since each bitmap is limited to a single block, this means
+that the maximum size of a block group is 8 times the size of a block.
+
+The block(s) following the bitmaps in each block group are designated
+as the inode table for that block group and the remainder are the data
+blocks.  The block allocation algorithm attempts to allocate data blocks
+in the same block group as the inode which contains them.
+
+The Superblock
+--------------
+
+The superblock contains all the information about the configuration of
+the filing system.  The primary copy of the superblock is stored at an
+offset of 1024 bytes from the start of the device, and it is essential
+to mounting the filesystem.  Since it is so important, backup copies of
+the superblock are stored in block groups throughout the filesystem.
+The first version of ext2 (revision 0) stores a copy at the start of
+every block group, along with backups of the group descriptor block(s).
+Because this can consume a considerable amount of space for large
+filesystems, later revisions can optionally reduce the number of backup
+copies by only putting backups in specific groups (this is the sparse
+superblock feature).  The groups chosen are 0, 1 and powers of 3, 5 and 7.
+
+The information in the superblock contains fields such as the total
+number of inodes and blocks in the filesystem and how many are free,
+how many inodes and blocks are in each block group, when the filesystem
+was mounted (and if it was cleanly unmounted), when it was modified,
+what version of the filesystem it is (see the Revisions section below)
+and which OS created it.
+
+If the filesystem is revision 1 or higher, then there are extra fields,
+such as a volume name, a unique identification number, the inode size,
+and space for optional filesystem features to store configuration info.
+
+All fields in the superblock (as in all other ext2 structures) are stored
+on the disc in little endian format, so a filesystem is portable between
+machines without having to know what machine it was created on.
+
+Inodes
+------
+
+The inode (index node) is a fundamental concept in the ext2 filesystem.
+Each object in the filesystem is represented by an inode.  The inode
+structure contains pointers to the filesystem blocks which contain the
+data held in the object and all of the metadata about an object except
+its name.  The metadata about an object includes the permissions, owner,
+group, flags, size, number of blocks used, access time, change time,
+modification time, deletion time, number of links, fragments, version
+(for NFS) and extended attributes (EAs) and/or Access Control Lists (ACLs).
+
+There are some reserved fields which are currently unused in the inode
+structure and several which are overloaded.  One field is reserved for the
+directory ACL if the inode is a directory and alternately for the top 32
+bits of the file size if the inode is a regular file (allowing file sizes
+larger than 2GB).  The translator field is unused under Linux, but is used
+by the HURD to reference the inode of a program which will be used to
+interpret this object.  Most of the remaining reserved fields have been
+used up for both Linux and the HURD for larger owner and group fields,
+The HURD also has a larger mode field so it uses another of the remaining
+fields to store the extra more bits.
+
+There are pointers to the first 12 blocks which contain the file's data
+in the inode.  There is a pointer to an indirect block (which contains
+pointers to the next set of blocks), a pointer to a doubly-indirect
+block (which contains pointers to indirect blocks) and a pointer to a
+trebly-indirect block (which contains pointers to doubly-indirect blocks).
+
+The flags field contains some ext2-specific flags which aren't catered
+for by the standard chmod flags.  These flags can be listed with lsattr
+and changed with the chattr command, and allow specific filesystem
+behaviour on a per-file basis.  There are flags for secure deletion,
+undeletable, compression, synchronous updates, immutability, append-only,
+dumpable, no-atime, indexed directories, and data-journaling.  Not all
+of these are supported yet.
+
+Directories
+-----------
+
+A directory is a filesystem object and has an inode just like a file.
+It is a specially formatted file containing records which associate
+each name with an inode number.  Later revisions of the filesystem also
+encode the type of the object (file, directory, symlink, device, fifo,
+socket) to avoid the need to check the inode itself for this information
+(support for taking advantage of this feature does not yet exist in
+Glibc 2.2).
+
+The inode allocation code tries to assign inodes which are in the same
+block group as the directory in which they are first created.
+
+The current implementation of ext2 uses a singly-linked list to store
+the filenames in the directory; a pending enhancement uses hashing of the
+filenames to allow lookup without the need to scan the entire directory.
+
+The current implementation never removes empty directory blocks once they
+have been allocated to hold more files.
+
+Special files
+-------------
+
+Symbolic links are also filesystem objects with inodes.  They deserve
+special mention because the data for them is stored within the inode
+itself if the symlink is less than 60 bytes long.  It uses the fields
+which would normally be used to store the pointers to data blocks.
+This is a worthwhile optimisation as it we avoid allocating a full
+block for the symlink, and most symlinks are less than 60 characters long.
+
+Character and block special devices never have data blocks assigned to
+them.  Instead, their device number is stored in the inode, again reusing
+the fields which would be used to point to the data blocks.
+
+Reserved Space
+--------------
+
+In ext2, there is a mechanism for reserving a certain number of blocks
+for a particular user (normally the super-user).  This is intended to
+allow for the system to continue functioning even if non-privileged users
+fill up all the space available to them (this is independent of filesystem
+quotas).  It also keeps the filesystem from filling up entirely which
+helps combat fragmentation.
+
+Filesystem check
+----------------
+
+At boot time, most systems run a consistency check (e2fsck) on their
+filesystems.  The superblock of the ext2 filesystem contains several
+fields which indicate whether fsck should actually run (since checking
+the filesystem at boot can take a long time if it is large).  fsck will
+run if the filesystem was not cleanly unmounted, if the maximum mount
+count has been exceeded or if the maximum time between checks has been
+exceeded.
+
+Feature Compatibility
+---------------------
+
+The compatibility feature mechanism used in ext2 is sophisticated.
+It safely allows features to be added to the filesystem, without
+unnecessarily sacrificing compatibility with older versions of the
+filesystem code.  The feature compatibility mechanism is not supported by
+the original revision 0 (EXT2_GOOD_OLD_REV) of ext2, but was introduced in
+revision 1.  There are three 32-bit fields, one for compatible features
+(COMPAT), one for read-only compatible (RO_COMPAT) features and one for
+incompatible (INCOMPAT) features.
+
+These feature flags have specific meanings for the kernel as follows:
+
+A COMPAT flag indicates that a feature is present in the filesystem,
+but the on-disk format is 100% compatible with older on-disk formats, so
+a kernel which didn't know anything about this feature could read/write
+the filesystem without any chance of corrupting the filesystem (or even
+making it inconsistent).  This is essentially just a flag which says
+"this filesystem has a (hidden) feature" that the kernel or e2fsck may
+want to be aware of (more on e2fsck and feature flags later).  The ext3
+HAS_JOURNAL feature is a COMPAT flag because the ext3 journal is simply
+a regular file with data blocks in it so the kernel does not need to
+take any special notice of it if it doesn't understand ext3 journaling.
+
+An RO_COMPAT flag indicates that the on-disk format is 100% compatible
+with older on-disk formats for reading (i.e. the feature does not change
+the visible on-disk format).  However, an old kernel writing to such a
+filesystem would/could corrupt the filesystem, so this is prevented. The
+most common such feature, SPARSE_SUPER, is an RO_COMPAT feature because
+sparse groups allow file data blocks where superblock/group descriptor
+backups used to live, and ext2_free_blocks() refuses to free these blocks,
+which would leading to inconsistent bitmaps.  An old kernel would also
+get an error if it tried to free a series of blocks which crossed a group
+boundary, but this is a legitimate layout in a SPARSE_SUPER filesystem.
+
+An INCOMPAT flag indicates the on-disk format has changed in some
+way that makes it unreadable by older kernels, or would otherwise
+cause a problem if an old kernel tried to mount it.  FILETYPE is an
+INCOMPAT flag because older kernels would think a filename was longer
+than 256 characters, which would lead to corrupt directory listings.
+The COMPRESSION flag is an obvious INCOMPAT flag - if the kernel
+doesn't understand compression, you would just get garbage back from
+read() instead of it automatically decompressing your data.  The ext3
+RECOVER flag is needed to prevent a kernel which does not understand the
+ext3 journal from mounting the filesystem without replaying the journal.
+
+For e2fsck, it needs to be more strict with the handling of these
+flags than the kernel.  If it doesn't understand ANY of the COMPAT,
+RO_COMPAT, or INCOMPAT flags it will refuse to check the filesystem,
+because it has no way of verifying whether a given feature is valid
+or not.  Allowing e2fsck to succeed on a filesystem with an unknown
+feature is a false sense of security for the user.  Refusing to check
+a filesystem with unknown features is a good incentive for the user to
+update to the latest e2fsck.  This also means that anyone adding feature
+flags to ext2 also needs to update e2fsck to verify these features.
+
+Metadata
+--------
+
+It is frequently claimed that the ext2 implementation of writing
+asynchronous metadata is faster than the ffs synchronous metadata
+scheme but less reliable.  Both methods are equally resolvable by their
+respective fsck programs.
+
+If you're exceptionally paranoid, there are 3 ways of making metadata
+writes synchronous on ext2:
+
+- per-file if you have the program source: use the O_SYNC flag to open()
+- per-file if you don't have the source: use "chattr +S" on the file
+- per-filesystem: add the "sync" option to mount (or in /etc/fstab)
+
+the first and last are not ext2 specific but do force the metadata to
+be written synchronously.  See also Journaling below.
+
+Limitations
+-----------
+
+There are various limits imposed by the on-disk layout of ext2.  Other
+limits are imposed by the current implementation of the kernel code.
+Many of the limits are determined at the time the filesystem is first
+created, and depend upon the block size chosen.  The ratio of inodes to
+data blocks is fixed at filesystem creation time, so the only way to
+increase the number of inodes is to increase the size of the filesystem.
+No tools currently exist which can change the ratio of inodes to blocks.
+
+Most of these limits could be overcome with slight changes in the on-disk
+format and using a compatibility flag to signal the format change (at
+the expense of some compatibility).
+
+=====================  =======    =======    =======   ========
+Filesystem block size      1kB        2kB        4kB        8kB
+=====================  =======    =======    =======   ========
+File size limit           16GB      256GB     2048GB     2048GB
+Filesystem size limit   2047GB     8192GB    16384GB    32768GB
+=====================  =======    =======    =======   ========
+
+There is a 2.4 kernel limit of 2048GB for a single block device, so no
+filesystem larger than that can be created at this time.  There is also
+an upper limit on the block size imposed by the page size of the kernel,
+so 8kB blocks are only allowed on Alpha systems (and other architectures
+which support larger pages).
+
+There is an upper limit of 32000 subdirectories in a single directory.
+
+There is a "soft" upper limit of about 10-15k files in a single directory
+with the current linear linked-list directory implementation.  This limit
+stems from performance problems when creating and deleting (and also
+finding) files in such large directories.  Using a hashed directory index
+(under development) allows 100k-1M+ files in a single directory without
+performance problems (although RAM size becomes an issue at this point).
+
+The (meaningless) absolute upper limit of files in a single directory
+(imposed by the file size, the realistic limit is obviously much less)
+is over 130 trillion files.  It would be higher except there are not
+enough 4-character names to make up unique directory entries, so they
+have to be 8 character filenames, even then we are fairly close to
+running out of unique filenames.
+
+Journaling
+----------
+
+A journaling extension to the ext2 code has been developed by Stephen
+Tweedie.  It avoids the risks of metadata corruption and the need to
+wait for e2fsck to complete after a crash, without requiring a change
+to the on-disk ext2 layout.  In a nutshell, the journal is a regular
+file which stores whole metadata (and optionally data) blocks that have
+been modified, prior to writing them into the filesystem.  This means
+it is possible to add a journal to an existing ext2 filesystem without
+the need for data conversion.
+
+When changes to the filesystem (e.g. a file is renamed) they are stored in
+a transaction in the journal and can either be complete or incomplete at
+the time of a crash.  If a transaction is complete at the time of a crash
+(or in the normal case where the system does not crash), then any blocks
+in that transaction are guaranteed to represent a valid filesystem state,
+and are copied into the filesystem.  If a transaction is incomplete at
+the time of the crash, then there is no guarantee of consistency for
+the blocks in that transaction so they are discarded (which means any
+filesystem changes they represent are also lost).
+Check Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ if you want to read more about
+ext4 and journaling.
+
+References
+==========
+
+=======================	===============================================
+The kernel source	file:/usr/src/linux/fs/ext2/
+e2fsprogs (e2fsck)	http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net/
+Design & Implementation	http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net/ext2intro.html
+Journaling (ext3)	ftp://ftp.uk.linux.org/pub/linux/sct/fs/jfs/
+Filesystem Resizing	http://ext2resize.sourceforge.net/
+Compression [1]_	http://e2compr.sourceforge.net/
+=======================	===============================================
+
+Implementations for:
+
+=======================	===========================================================
+Windows 95/98/NT/2000	http://www.chrysocome.net/explore2fs
+Windows 95 [1]_		http://www.yipton.net/content.html#FSDEXT2
+DOS client [1]_		ftp://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/system/filesystems/ext2/
+OS/2 [2]_		ftp://metalab.unc.edu/pub/Linux/system/filesystems/ext2/
+RISC OS client		http://www.esw-heim.tu-clausthal.de/~marco/smorbrod/IscaFS/
+=======================	===========================================================
+
+.. [1] no longer actively developed/supported (as of Apr 2001)
+.. [2] no longer actively developed/supported (as of Mar 2009)
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c06cec3a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============
+Ext3 Filesystem
+===============
+
+Ext3 was originally released in September 1999. Written by Stephen Tweedie
+for the 2.2 branch, and ported to 2.4 kernels by Peter Braam, Andreas Dilger,
+Andrew Morton, Alexander Viro, Ted Ts'o and Stephen Tweedie.
+
+Ext3 is the ext2 filesystem enhanced with journalling capabilities. The
+filesystem is a subset of ext4 filesystem so use ext4 driver for accessing
+ext3 filesystems.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/about.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/about.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cc76b577d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/about.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+About this Book
+===============
+
+This document attempts to describe the on-disk format for ext4
+filesystems. The same general ideas should apply to ext2/3 filesystems
+as well, though they do not support all the features that ext4 supports,
+and the fields will be shorter.
+
+**NOTE**: This is a work in progress, based on notes that the author
+(djwong) made while picking apart a filesystem by hand. The data
+structure definitions should be current as of Linux 4.18 and
+e2fsprogs-1.44. All comments and corrections are welcome, since there is
+undoubtedly plenty of lore that might not be reflected in freshly
+created demonstration filesystems.
+
+License
+-------
+This book is licensed under the terms of the GNU Public License, v2.
+
+Terminology
+-----------
+
+ext4 divides a storage device into an array of logical blocks both to
+reduce bookkeeping overhead and to increase throughput by forcing larger
+transfer sizes. Generally, the block size will be 4KiB (the same size as
+pages on x86 and the block layer's default block size), though the
+actual size is calculated as 2 ^ (10 + ``sb.s_log_block_size``) bytes.
+Throughout this document, disk locations are given in terms of these
+logical blocks, not raw LBAs, and not 1024-byte blocks. For the sake of
+convenience, the logical block size will be referred to as
+``$block_size`` throughout the rest of the document.
+
+When referenced in ``preformatted text`` blocks, ``sb`` refers to fields
+in the super block, and ``inode`` refers to fields in an inode table
+entry.
+
+Other References
+----------------
+
+Also see https://www.nongnu.org/ext2-doc/ for quite a collection of
+information about ext2/3. Here's another old reference:
+http://wiki.osdev.org/Ext2
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/allocators.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/allocators.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7aa85152a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/allocators.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Block and Inode Allocation Policy
+---------------------------------
+
+ext4 recognizes (better than ext3, anyway) that data locality is
+generally a desirably quality of a filesystem. On a spinning disk,
+keeping related blocks near each other reduces the amount of movement
+that the head actuator and disk must perform to access a data block,
+thus speeding up disk IO. On an SSD there of course are no moving parts,
+but locality can increase the size of each transfer request while
+reducing the total number of requests. This locality may also have the
+effect of concentrating writes on a single erase block, which can speed
+up file rewrites significantly. Therefore, it is useful to reduce
+fragmentation whenever possible.
+
+The first tool that ext4 uses to combat fragmentation is the multi-block
+allocator. When a file is first created, the block allocator
+speculatively allocates 8KiB of disk space to the file on the assumption
+that the space will get written soon. When the file is closed, the
+unused speculative allocations are of course freed, but if the
+speculation is correct (typically the case for full writes of small
+files) then the file data gets written out in a single multi-block
+extent. A second related trick that ext4 uses is delayed allocation.
+Under this scheme, when a file needs more blocks to absorb file writes,
+the filesystem defers deciding the exact placement on the disk until all
+the dirty buffers are being written out to disk. By not committing to a
+particular placement until it's absolutely necessary (the commit timeout
+is hit, or sync() is called, or the kernel runs out of memory), the hope
+is that the filesystem can make better location decisions.
+
+The third trick that ext4 (and ext3) uses is that it tries to keep a
+file's data blocks in the same block group as its inode. This cuts down
+on the seek penalty when the filesystem first has to read a file's inode
+to learn where the file's data blocks live and then seek over to the
+file's data blocks to begin I/O operations.
+
+The fourth trick is that all the inodes in a directory are placed in the
+same block group as the directory, when feasible. The working assumption
+here is that all the files in a directory might be related, therefore it
+is useful to try to keep them all together.
+
+The fifth trick is that the disk volume is cut up into 128MB block
+groups; these mini-containers are used as outlined above to try to
+maintain data locality. However, there is a deliberate quirk -- when a
+directory is created in the root directory, the inode allocator scans
+the block groups and puts that directory into the least heavily loaded
+block group that it can find. This encourages directories to spread out
+over a disk; as the top-level directory/file blobs fill up one block
+group, the allocators simply move on to the next block group. Allegedly
+this scheme evens out the loading on the block groups, though the author
+suspects that the directories which are so unlucky as to land towards
+the end of a spinning drive get a raw deal performance-wise.
+
+Of course if all of these mechanisms fail, one can always use e4defrag
+to defragment files.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/attributes.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/attributes.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..87814696a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/attributes.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Extended Attributes
+-------------------
+
+Extended attributes (xattrs) are typically stored in a separate data
+block on the disk and referenced from inodes via ``inode.i_file_acl*``.
+The first use of extended attributes seems to have been for storing file
+ACLs and other security data (selinux). With the ``user_xattr`` mount
+option it is possible for users to store extended attributes so long as
+all attribute names begin with “user”; this restriction seems to have
+disappeared as of Linux 3.0.
+
+There are two places where extended attributes can be found. The first
+place is between the end of each inode entry and the beginning of the
+next inode entry. For example, if inode.i_extra_isize = 28 and
+sb.inode_size = 256, then there are 256 - (128 + 28) = 100 bytes
+available for in-inode extended attribute storage. The second place
+where extended attributes can be found is in the block pointed to by
+``inode.i_file_acl``. As of Linux 3.11, it is not possible for this
+block to contain a pointer to a second extended attribute block (or even
+the remaining blocks of a cluster). In theory it is possible for each
+attribute's value to be stored in a separate data block, though as of
+Linux 3.11 the code does not permit this.
+
+Keys are generally assumed to be ASCIIZ strings, whereas values can be
+strings or binary data.
+
+Extended attributes, when stored after the inode, have a header
+``ext4_xattr_ibody_header`` that is 4 bytes long:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - h_magic
+     - Magic number for identification, 0xEA020000. This value is set by the
+       Linux driver, though e2fsprogs doesn't seem to check it(?)
+
+The beginning of an extended attribute block is in
+``struct ext4_xattr_header``, which is 32 bytes long:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - h_magic
+     - Magic number for identification, 0xEA020000.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - h_refcount
+     - Reference count.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le32
+     - h_blocks
+     - Number of disk blocks used.
+   * - 0xC
+     - __le32
+     - h_hash
+     - Hash value of all attributes.
+   * - 0x10
+     - __le32
+     - h_checksum
+     - Checksum of the extended attribute block.
+   * - 0x14
+     - __u32
+     - h_reserved[3]
+     - Zero.
+
+The checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the 64-bit block number
+of the extended attribute block, and the entire block (header +
+entries).
+
+Following the ``struct ext4_xattr_header`` or
+``struct ext4_xattr_ibody_header`` is an array of
+``struct ext4_xattr_entry``; each of these entries is at least 16 bytes
+long. When stored in an external block, the ``struct ext4_xattr_entry``
+entries must be stored in sorted order. The sort order is
+``e_name_index``, then ``e_name_len``, and finally ``e_name``.
+Attributes stored inside an inode do not need be stored in sorted order.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __u8
+     - e_name_len
+     - Length of name.
+   * - 0x1
+     - __u8
+     - e_name_index
+     - Attribute name index. There is a discussion of this below.
+   * - 0x2
+     - __le16
+     - e_value_offs
+     - Location of this attribute's value on the disk block where it is stored.
+       Multiple attributes can share the same value. For an inode attribute
+       this value is relative to the start of the first entry; for a block this
+       value is relative to the start of the block (i.e. the header).
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - e_value_inum
+     - The inode where the value is stored. Zero indicates the value is in the
+       same block as this entry. This field is only used if the
+       INCOMPAT_EA_INODE feature is enabled.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le32
+     - e_value_size
+     - Length of attribute value.
+   * - 0xC
+     - __le32
+     - e_hash
+     - Hash value of attribute name and attribute value. The kernel doesn't
+       update the hash for in-inode attributes, so for that case this value
+       must be zero, because e2fsck validates any non-zero hash regardless of
+       where the xattr lives.
+   * - 0x10
+     - char
+     - e_name[e_name_len]
+     - Attribute name. Does not include trailing NULL.
+
+Attribute values can follow the end of the entry table. There appears to
+be a requirement that they be aligned to 4-byte boundaries. The values
+are stored starting at the end of the block and grow towards the
+xattr_header/xattr_entry table. When the two collide, the overflow is
+put into a separate disk block. If the disk block fills up, the
+filesystem returns -ENOSPC.
+
+The first four fields of the ``ext4_xattr_entry`` are set to zero to
+mark the end of the key list.
+
+Attribute Name Indices
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Logically speaking, extended attributes are a series of key=value pairs.
+The keys are assumed to be NULL-terminated strings. To reduce the amount
+of on-disk space that the keys consume, the beginning of the key string
+is matched against the attribute name index. If a match is found, the
+attribute name index field is set, and matching string is removed from
+the key name. Here is a map of name index values to key prefixes:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Name Index
+     - Key Prefix
+   * - 0
+     - (no prefix)
+   * - 1
+     - “user.”
+   * - 2
+     - “system.posix_acl_access”
+   * - 3
+     - “system.posix_acl_default”
+   * - 4
+     - “trusted.”
+   * - 6
+     - “security.”
+   * - 7
+     - “system.” (inline_data only?)
+   * - 8
+     - “system.richacl” (SuSE kernels only?)
+
+For example, if the attribute key is “user.fubar”, the attribute name
+index is set to 1 and the “fubar” name is recorded on disk.
+
+POSIX ACLs
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+POSIX ACLs are stored in a reduced version of the Linux kernel (and
+libacl's) internal ACL format. The key difference is that the version
+number is different (1) and the ``e_id`` field is only stored for named
+user and group ACLs.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/bigalloc.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/bigalloc.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..976a180b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/bigalloc.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Bigalloc
+--------
+
+At the moment, the default size of a block is 4KiB, which is a commonly
+supported page size on most MMU-capable hardware. This is fortunate, as
+ext4 code is not prepared to handle the case where the block size
+exceeds the page size. However, for a filesystem of mostly huge files,
+it is desirable to be able to allocate disk blocks in units of multiple
+blocks to reduce both fragmentation and metadata overhead. The
+bigalloc feature provides exactly this ability.
+
+The bigalloc feature (EXT4_FEATURE_RO_COMPAT_BIGALLOC) changes ext4 to
+use clustered allocation, so that each bit in the ext4 block allocation
+bitmap addresses a power of two number of blocks. For example, if the
+file system is mainly going to be storing large files in the 4-32
+megabyte range, it might make sense to set a cluster size of 1 megabyte.
+This means that each bit in the block allocation bitmap now addresses
+256 4k blocks. This shrinks the total size of the block allocation
+bitmaps for a 2T file system from 64 megabytes to 256 kilobytes. It also
+means that a block group addresses 32 gigabytes instead of 128 megabytes,
+also shrinking the amount of file system overhead for metadata.
+
+The administrator can set a block cluster size at mkfs time (which is
+stored in the s_log_cluster_size field in the superblock); from then
+on, the block bitmaps track clusters, not individual blocks. This means
+that block groups can be several gigabytes in size (instead of just
+128MiB); however, the minimum allocation unit becomes a cluster, not a
+block, even for directories. TaoBao had a patchset to extend the “use
+units of clusters instead of blocks” to the extent tree, though it is
+not clear where those patches went-- they eventually morphed into
+“extent tree v2” but that code has not landed as of May 2015.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/bitmaps.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/bitmaps.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..91c45d86e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/bitmaps.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Block and inode Bitmaps
+-----------------------
+
+The data block bitmap tracks the usage of data blocks within the block
+group.
+
+The inode bitmap records which entries in the inode table are in use.
+
+As with most bitmaps, one bit represents the usage status of one data
+block or inode table entry. This implies a block group size of 8 *
+number_of_bytes_in_a_logical_block.
+
+NOTE: If ``BLOCK_UNINIT`` is set for a given block group, various parts
+of the kernel and e2fsprogs code pretends that the block bitmap contains
+zeros (i.e. all blocks in the group are free). However, it is not
+necessarily the case that no blocks are in use -- if ``meta_bg`` is set,
+the bitmaps and group descriptor live inside the group. Unfortunately,
+ext2fs_test_block_bitmap2() will return '0' for those locations,
+which produces confusing debugfs output.
+
+Inode Table
+-----------
+Inode tables are statically allocated at mkfs time.  Each block group
+descriptor points to the start of the table, and the superblock records
+the number of inodes per group.  See the section on inodes for more
+information.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blockgroup.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blockgroup.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..46d78f860
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blockgroup.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Layout
+------
+
+The layout of a standard block group is approximately as follows (each
+of these fields is discussed in a separate section below):
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Group 0 Padding
+     - ext4 Super Block
+     - Group Descriptors
+     - Reserved GDT Blocks
+     - Data Block Bitmap
+     - inode Bitmap
+     - inode Table
+     - Data Blocks
+   * - 1024 bytes
+     - 1 block
+     - many blocks
+     - many blocks
+     - 1 block
+     - 1 block
+     - many blocks
+     - many more blocks
+
+For the special case of block group 0, the first 1024 bytes are unused,
+to allow for the installation of x86 boot sectors and other oddities.
+The superblock will start at offset 1024 bytes, whichever block that
+happens to be (usually 0). However, if for some reason the block size =
+1024, then block 0 is marked in use and the superblock goes in block 1.
+For all other block groups, there is no padding.
+
+The ext4 driver primarily works with the superblock and the group
+descriptors that are found in block group 0. Redundant copies of the
+superblock and group descriptors are written to some of the block groups
+across the disk in case the beginning of the disk gets trashed, though
+not all block groups necessarily host a redundant copy (see following
+paragraph for more details). If the group does not have a redundant
+copy, the block group begins with the data block bitmap. Note also that
+when the filesystem is freshly formatted, mkfs will allocate “reserve
+GDT block” space after the block group descriptors and before the start
+of the block bitmaps to allow for future expansion of the filesystem. By
+default, a filesystem is allowed to increase in size by a factor of
+1024x over the original filesystem size.
+
+The location of the inode table is given by ``grp.bg_inode_table_*``. It
+is continuous range of blocks large enough to contain
+``sb.s_inodes_per_group * sb.s_inode_size`` bytes.
+
+As for the ordering of items in a block group, it is generally
+established that the super block and the group descriptor table, if
+present, will be at the beginning of the block group. The bitmaps and
+the inode table can be anywhere, and it is quite possible for the
+bitmaps to come after the inode table, or for both to be in different
+groups (flex_bg). Leftover space is used for file data blocks, indirect
+block maps, extent tree blocks, and extended attributes.
+
+Flexible Block Groups
+---------------------
+
+Starting in ext4, there is a new feature called flexible block groups
+(flex_bg). In a flex_bg, several block groups are tied together as one
+logical block group; the bitmap spaces and the inode table space in the
+first block group of the flex_bg are expanded to include the bitmaps
+and inode tables of all other block groups in the flex_bg. For example,
+if the flex_bg size is 4, then group 0 will contain (in order) the
+superblock, group descriptors, data block bitmaps for groups 0-3, inode
+bitmaps for groups 0-3, inode tables for groups 0-3, and the remaining
+space in group 0 is for file data. The effect of this is to group the
+block group metadata close together for faster loading, and to enable
+large files to be continuous on disk. Backup copies of the superblock
+and group descriptors are always at the beginning of block groups, even
+if flex_bg is enabled. The number of block groups that make up a
+flex_bg is given by 2 ^ ``sb.s_log_groups_per_flex``.
+
+Meta Block Groups
+-----------------
+
+Without the option META_BG, for safety concerns, all block group
+descriptors copies are kept in the first block group. Given the default
+128MiB(2^27 bytes) block group size and 64-byte group descriptors, ext4
+can have at most 2^27/64 = 2^21 block groups. This limits the entire
+filesystem size to 2^21 * 2^27 = 2^48bytes or 256TiB.
+
+The solution to this problem is to use the metablock group feature
+(META_BG), which is already in ext3 for all 2.6 releases. With the
+META_BG feature, ext4 filesystems are partitioned into many metablock
+groups. Each metablock group is a cluster of block groups whose group
+descriptor structures can be stored in a single disk block. For ext4
+filesystems with 4 KB block size, a single metablock group partition
+includes 64 block groups, or 8 GiB of disk space. The metablock group
+feature moves the location of the group descriptors from the congested
+first block group of the whole filesystem into the first group of each
+metablock group itself. The backups are in the second and last group of
+each metablock group. This increases the 2^21 maximum block groups limit
+to the hard limit 2^32, allowing support for a 512PiB filesystem.
+
+The change in the filesystem format replaces the current scheme where
+the superblock is followed by a variable-length set of block group
+descriptors. Instead, the superblock and a single block group descriptor
+block is placed at the beginning of the first, second, and last block
+groups in a meta-block group. A meta-block group is a collection of
+block groups which can be described by a single block group descriptor
+block. Since the size of the block group descriptor structure is 32
+bytes, a meta-block group contains 32 block groups for filesystems with
+a 1KB block size, and 128 block groups for filesystems with a 4KB
+blocksize. Filesystems can either be created using this new block group
+descriptor layout, or existing filesystems can be resized on-line, and
+the field s_first_meta_bg in the superblock will indicate the first
+block group using this new layout.
+
+Please see an important note about ``BLOCK_UNINIT`` in the section about
+block and inode bitmaps.
+
+Lazy Block Group Initialization
+-------------------------------
+
+A new feature for ext4 are three block group descriptor flags that
+enable mkfs to skip initializing other parts of the block group
+metadata. Specifically, the INODE_UNINIT and BLOCK_UNINIT flags mean
+that the inode and block bitmaps for that group can be calculated and
+therefore the on-disk bitmap blocks are not initialized. This is
+generally the case for an empty block group or a block group containing
+only fixed-location block group metadata. The INODE_ZEROED flag means
+that the inode table has been initialized; mkfs will unset this flag and
+rely on the kernel to initialize the inode tables in the background.
+
+By not writing zeroes to the bitmaps and inode table, mkfs time is
+reduced considerably. Note the feature flag is RO_COMPAT_GDT_CSUM,
+but the dumpe2fs output prints this as “uninit_bg”. They are the same
+thing.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blockmap.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blockmap.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cc596541c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blockmap.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| i.i_block Offset    | Where It Points                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
++=====================+==============================================================================================================================================================================================================================+
+| 0 to 11             | Direct map to file blocks 0 to 11.                                                                                                                                                                                           |
++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| 12                  | Indirect block: (file blocks 12 to (``$block_size`` / 4) + 11, or 12 to 1035 if 4KiB blocks)                                                                                                                                 |
+|                     |                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
+|                     | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+                                                                                                                        |
+|                     | | Indirect Block Offset        | Where It Points                                                    |                                                                                                                        |
+|                     | +==============================+====================================================================+                                                                                                                        |
+|                     | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4)   | Direct map to (``$block_size`` / 4) blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks)   |                                                                                                                        |
+|                     | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+                                                                                                                        |
++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| 13                  | Double-indirect block: (file blocks ``$block_size``/4 + 12 to (``$block_size`` / 4) ^ 2 + (``$block_size`` / 4) + 11, or 1036 to 1049611 if 4KiB blocks)                                                                     |
+|                     |                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
+|                     | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+                                                                                 |
+|                     | | Double Indirect Block Offset   | Where It Points                                                                                         |                                                                                 |
+|                     | +================================+=========================================================================================================+                                                                                 |
+|                     | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4)     | Map to (``$block_size`` / 4) indirect blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks)                                      |                                                                                 |
+|                     | |                                |                                                                                                         |                                                                                 |
+|                     | |                                | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+   |                                                                                 |
+|                     | |                                | | Indirect Block Offset        | Where It Points                                                    |   |                                                                                 |
+|                     | |                                | +==============================+====================================================================+   |                                                                                 |
+|                     | |                                | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4)   | Direct map to (``$block_size`` / 4) blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks)   |   |                                                                                 |
+|                     | |                                | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+   |                                                                                 |
+|                     | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+                                                                                 |
++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| 14                  | Triple-indirect block: (file blocks (``$block_size`` / 4) ^ 2 + (``$block_size`` / 4) + 12 to (``$block_size`` / 4) ^ 3 + (``$block_size`` / 4) ^ 2 + (``$block_size`` / 4) + 12, or 1049612 to 1074791436 if 4KiB blocks)   |
+|                     |                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
+|                     | +--------------------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+                                          |
+|                     | | Triple Indirect Block Offset   | Where It Points                                                                                                                                |                                          |
+|                     | +================================+================================================================================================================================================+                                          |
+|                     | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4)     | Map to (``$block_size`` / 4) double indirect blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks)                                                                      |                                          |
+|                     | |                                |                                                                                                                                                |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | | Double Indirect Block Offset   | Where It Points                                                                                         |   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | +================================+=========================================================================================================+   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4)     | Map to (``$block_size`` / 4) indirect blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks)                                      |   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | |                                |                                                                                                         |   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | |                                | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+   |   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | |                                | | Indirect Block Offset        | Where It Points                                                    |   |   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | |                                | +==============================+====================================================================+   |   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | |                                | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4)   | Direct map to (``$block_size`` / 4) blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks)   |   |   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | |                                | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+   |   |                                          |
+|                     | |                                | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+   |                                          |
+|                     | +--------------------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+                                          |
++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blocks.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blocks.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b0f80ea87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blocks.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Blocks
+------
+
+ext4 allocates storage space in units of “blocks”. A block is a group of
+sectors between 1KiB and 64KiB, and the number of sectors must be an
+integral power of 2. Blocks are in turn grouped into larger units called
+block groups. Block size is specified at mkfs time and typically is
+4KiB. You may experience mounting problems if block size is greater than
+page size (i.e. 64KiB blocks on a i386 which only has 4KiB memory
+pages). By default a filesystem can contain 2^32 blocks; if the '64bit'
+feature is enabled, then a filesystem can have 2^64 blocks. The location
+of structures is stored in terms of the block number the structure lives
+in and not the absolute offset on disk.
+
+For 32-bit filesystems, limits are as follows:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 1 1 1 1 1
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Item
+     - 1KiB
+     - 2KiB
+     - 4KiB
+     - 64KiB
+   * - Blocks
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+   * - Inodes
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+   * - File System Size
+     - 4TiB
+     - 8TiB
+     - 16TiB
+     - 256TiB
+   * - Blocks Per Block Group
+     - 8,192
+     - 16,384
+     - 32,768
+     - 524,288
+   * - Inodes Per Block Group
+     - 8,192
+     - 16,384
+     - 32,768
+     - 524,288
+   * - Block Group Size
+     - 8MiB
+     - 32MiB
+     - 128MiB
+     - 32GiB
+   * - Blocks Per File, Extents
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+   * - Blocks Per File, Block Maps
+     - 16,843,020
+     - 134,480,396
+     - 1,074,791,436
+     - 4,398,314,962,956 (really 2^32 due to field size limitations)
+   * - File Size, Extents
+     - 4TiB
+     - 8TiB
+     - 16TiB
+     - 256TiB
+   * - File Size, Block Maps
+     - 16GiB
+     - 256GiB
+     - 4TiB
+     - 256TiB
+
+For 64-bit filesystems, limits are as follows:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 1 1 1 1 1
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Item
+     - 1KiB
+     - 2KiB
+     - 4KiB
+     - 64KiB
+   * - Blocks
+     - 2^64
+     - 2^64
+     - 2^64
+     - 2^64
+   * - Inodes
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+   * - File System Size
+     - 16ZiB
+     - 32ZiB
+     - 64ZiB
+     - 1YiB
+   * - Blocks Per Block Group
+     - 8,192
+     - 16,384
+     - 32,768
+     - 524,288
+   * - Inodes Per Block Group
+     - 8,192
+     - 16,384
+     - 32,768
+     - 524,288
+   * - Block Group Size
+     - 8MiB
+     - 32MiB
+     - 128MiB
+     - 32GiB
+   * - Blocks Per File, Extents
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+     - 2^32
+   * - Blocks Per File, Block Maps
+     - 16,843,020
+     - 134,480,396
+     - 1,074,791,436
+     - 4,398,314,962,956 (really 2^32 due to field size limitations)
+   * - File Size, Extents
+     - 4TiB
+     - 8TiB
+     - 16TiB
+     - 256TiB
+   * - File Size, Block Maps
+     - 16GiB
+     - 256GiB
+     - 4TiB
+     - 256TiB
+
+Note: Files not using extents (i.e. files using block maps) must be
+placed within the first 2^32 blocks of a filesystem. Files with extents
+must be placed within the first 2^48 blocks of a filesystem. It's not
+clear what happens with larger filesystems.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/checksums.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/checksums.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e232749da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/checksums.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Checksums
+---------
+
+Starting in early 2012, metadata checksums were added to all major ext4
+and jbd2 data structures. The associated feature flag is metadata_csum.
+The desired checksum algorithm is indicated in the superblock, though as
+of October 2012 the only supported algorithm is crc32c. Some data
+structures did not have space to fit a full 32-bit checksum, so only the
+lower 16 bits are stored. Enabling the 64bit feature increases the data
+structure size so that full 32-bit checksums can be stored for many data
+structures. However, existing 32-bit filesystems cannot be extended to
+enable 64bit mode, at least not without the experimental resize2fs
+patches to do so.
+
+Existing filesystems can have checksumming added by running
+``tune2fs -O metadata_csum`` against the underlying device. If tune2fs
+encounters directory blocks that lack sufficient empty space to add a
+checksum, it will request that you run ``e2fsck -D`` to have the
+directories rebuilt with checksums. This has the added benefit of
+removing slack space from the directory files and rebalancing the htree
+indexes. If you _ignore_ this step, your directories will not be
+protected by a checksum!
+
+The following table describes the data elements that go into each type
+of checksum. The checksum function is whatever the superblock describes
+(crc32c as of October 2013) unless noted otherwise.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 20 8 50
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Metadata
+     - Length
+     - Ingredients
+   * - Superblock
+     - __le32
+     - The entire superblock up to the checksum field. The UUID lives inside
+       the superblock.
+   * - MMP
+     - __le32
+     - UUID + the entire MMP block up to the checksum field.
+   * - Extended Attributes
+     - __le32
+     - UUID + the entire extended attribute block. The checksum field is set to
+       zero.
+   * - Directory Entries
+     - __le32
+     - UUID + inode number + inode generation + the directory block up to the
+       fake entry enclosing the checksum field.
+   * - HTREE Nodes
+     - __le32
+     - UUID + inode number + inode generation + all valid extents + HTREE tail.
+       The checksum field is set to zero.
+   * - Extents
+     - __le32
+     - UUID + inode number + inode generation + the entire extent block up to
+       the checksum field.
+   * - Bitmaps
+     - __le32 or __le16
+     - UUID + the entire bitmap. Checksums are stored in the group descriptor,
+       and truncated if the group descriptor size is 32 bytes (i.e. ^64bit)
+   * - Inodes
+     - __le32
+     - UUID + inode number + inode generation + the entire inode. The checksum
+       field is set to zero. Each inode has its own checksum.
+   * - Group Descriptors
+     - __le16
+     - If metadata_csum, then UUID + group number + the entire descriptor;
+       else if gdt_csum, then crc16(UUID + group number + the entire
+       descriptor). In all cases, only the lower 16 bits are stored.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/directory.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/directory.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6eece8e31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/directory.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,453 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Directory Entries
+-----------------
+
+In an ext4 filesystem, a directory is more or less a flat file that maps
+an arbitrary byte string (usually ASCII) to an inode number on the
+filesystem. There can be many directory entries across the filesystem
+that reference the same inode number--these are known as hard links, and
+that is why hard links cannot reference files on other filesystems. As
+such, directory entries are found by reading the data block(s)
+associated with a directory file for the particular directory entry that
+is desired.
+
+Linear (Classic) Directories
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+By default, each directory lists its entries in an “almost-linear”
+array. I write “almost” because it's not a linear array in the memory
+sense because directory entries are not split across filesystem blocks.
+Therefore, it is more accurate to say that a directory is a series of
+data blocks and that each block contains a linear array of directory
+entries. The end of each per-block array is signified by reaching the
+end of the block; the last entry in the block has a record length that
+takes it all the way to the end of the block. The end of the entire
+directory is of course signified by reaching the end of the file. Unused
+directory entries are signified by inode = 0. By default the filesystem
+uses ``struct ext4_dir_entry_2`` for directory entries unless the
+“filetype” feature flag is not set, in which case it uses
+``struct ext4_dir_entry``.
+
+The original directory entry format is ``struct ext4_dir_entry``, which
+is at most 263 bytes long, though on disk you'll need to reference
+``dirent.rec_len`` to know for sure.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - inode
+     - Number of the inode that this directory entry points to.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le16
+     - rec_len
+     - Length of this directory entry. Must be a multiple of 4.
+   * - 0x6
+     - __le16
+     - name_len
+     - Length of the file name.
+   * - 0x8
+     - char
+     - name[EXT4_NAME_LEN]
+     - File name.
+
+Since file names cannot be longer than 255 bytes, the new directory
+entry format shortens the name_len field and uses the space for a file
+type flag, probably to avoid having to load every inode during directory
+tree traversal. This format is ``ext4_dir_entry_2``, which is at most
+263 bytes long, though on disk you'll need to reference
+``dirent.rec_len`` to know for sure.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - inode
+     - Number of the inode that this directory entry points to.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le16
+     - rec_len
+     - Length of this directory entry.
+   * - 0x6
+     - __u8
+     - name_len
+     - Length of the file name.
+   * - 0x7
+     - __u8
+     - file_type
+     - File type code, see ftype_ table below.
+   * - 0x8
+     - char
+     - name[EXT4_NAME_LEN]
+     - File name.
+
+.. _ftype:
+
+The directory file type is one of the following values:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - Unknown.
+   * - 0x1
+     - Regular file.
+   * - 0x2
+     - Directory.
+   * - 0x3
+     - Character device file.
+   * - 0x4
+     - Block device file.
+   * - 0x5
+     - FIFO.
+   * - 0x6
+     - Socket.
+   * - 0x7
+     - Symbolic link.
+
+To support directories that are both encrypted and casefolded directories, we
+must also include hash information in the directory entry. We append
+``ext4_extended_dir_entry_2`` to ``ext4_dir_entry_2`` except for the entries
+for dot and dotdot, which are kept the same. The structure follows immediately
+after ``name`` and is included in the size listed by ``rec_len`` If a directory
+entry uses this extension, it may be up to 271 bytes.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - hash
+     - The hash of the directory name
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - minor_hash
+     - The minor hash of the directory name
+
+
+In order to add checksums to these classic directory blocks, a phony
+``struct ext4_dir_entry`` is placed at the end of each leaf block to
+hold the checksum. The directory entry is 12 bytes long. The inode
+number and name_len fields are set to zero to fool old software into
+ignoring an apparently empty directory entry, and the checksum is stored
+in the place where the name normally goes. The structure is
+``struct ext4_dir_entry_tail``:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - det_reserved_zero1
+     - Inode number, which must be zero.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le16
+     - det_rec_len
+     - Length of this directory entry, which must be 12.
+   * - 0x6
+     - __u8
+     - det_reserved_zero2
+     - Length of the file name, which must be zero.
+   * - 0x7
+     - __u8
+     - det_reserved_ft
+     - File type, which must be 0xDE.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le32
+     - det_checksum
+     - Directory leaf block checksum.
+
+The leaf directory block checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the
+directory's inode number, the directory's inode generation number, and
+the entire directory entry block up to (but not including) the fake
+directory entry.
+
+Hash Tree Directories
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A linear array of directory entries isn't great for performance, so a
+new feature was added to ext3 to provide a faster (but peculiar)
+balanced tree keyed off a hash of the directory entry name. If the
+EXT4_INDEX_FL (0x1000) flag is set in the inode, this directory uses a
+hashed btree (htree) to organize and find directory entries. For
+backwards read-only compatibility with ext2, this tree is actually
+hidden inside the directory file, masquerading as “empty” directory data
+blocks! It was stated previously that the end of the linear directory
+entry table was signified with an entry pointing to inode 0; this is
+(ab)used to fool the old linear-scan algorithm into thinking that the
+rest of the directory block is empty so that it moves on.
+
+The root of the tree always lives in the first data block of the
+directory. By ext2 custom, the '.' and '..' entries must appear at the
+beginning of this first block, so they are put here as two
+``struct ext4_dir_entry_2`` s and not stored in the tree. The rest of
+the root node contains metadata about the tree and finally a hash->block
+map to find nodes that are lower in the htree. If
+``dx_root.info.indirect_levels`` is non-zero then the htree has two
+levels; the data block pointed to by the root node's map is an interior
+node, which is indexed by a minor hash. Interior nodes in this tree
+contains a zeroed out ``struct ext4_dir_entry_2`` followed by a
+minor_hash->block map to find leafe nodes. Leaf nodes contain a linear
+array of all ``struct ext4_dir_entry_2``; all of these entries
+(presumably) hash to the same value. If there is an overflow, the
+entries simply overflow into the next leaf node, and the
+least-significant bit of the hash (in the interior node map) that gets
+us to this next leaf node is set.
+
+To traverse the directory as a htree, the code calculates the hash of
+the desired file name and uses it to find the corresponding block
+number. If the tree is flat, the block is a linear array of directory
+entries that can be searched; otherwise, the minor hash of the file name
+is computed and used against this second block to find the corresponding
+third block number. That third block number will be a linear array of
+directory entries.
+
+To traverse the directory as a linear array (such as the old code does),
+the code simply reads every data block in the directory. The blocks used
+for the htree will appear to have no entries (aside from '.' and '..')
+and so only the leaf nodes will appear to have any interesting content.
+
+The root of the htree is in ``struct dx_root``, which is the full length
+of a data block:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - dot.inode
+     - inode number of this directory.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le16
+     - dot.rec_len
+     - Length of this record, 12.
+   * - 0x6
+     - u8
+     - dot.name_len
+     - Length of the name, 1.
+   * - 0x7
+     - u8
+     - dot.file_type
+     - File type of this entry, 0x2 (directory) (if the feature flag is set).
+   * - 0x8
+     - char
+     - dot.name[4]
+     - “.\0\0\0”
+   * - 0xC
+     - __le32
+     - dotdot.inode
+     - inode number of parent directory.
+   * - 0x10
+     - __le16
+     - dotdot.rec_len
+     - block_size - 12. The record length is long enough to cover all htree
+       data.
+   * - 0x12
+     - u8
+     - dotdot.name_len
+     - Length of the name, 2.
+   * - 0x13
+     - u8
+     - dotdot.file_type
+     - File type of this entry, 0x2 (directory) (if the feature flag is set).
+   * - 0x14
+     - char
+     - dotdot_name[4]
+     - “..\0\0”
+   * - 0x18
+     - __le32
+     - struct dx_root_info.reserved_zero
+     - Zero.
+   * - 0x1C
+     - u8
+     - struct dx_root_info.hash_version
+     - Hash type, see dirhash_ table below.
+   * - 0x1D
+     - u8
+     - struct dx_root_info.info_length
+     - Length of the tree information, 0x8.
+   * - 0x1E
+     - u8
+     - struct dx_root_info.indirect_levels
+     - Depth of the htree. Cannot be larger than 3 if the INCOMPAT_LARGEDIR
+       feature is set; cannot be larger than 2 otherwise.
+   * - 0x1F
+     - u8
+     - struct dx_root_info.unused_flags
+     -
+   * - 0x20
+     - __le16
+     - limit
+     - Maximum number of dx_entries that can follow this header, plus 1 for
+       the header itself.
+   * - 0x22
+     - __le16
+     - count
+     - Actual number of dx_entries that follow this header, plus 1 for the
+       header itself.
+   * - 0x24
+     - __le32
+     - block
+     - The block number (within the directory file) that goes with hash=0.
+   * - 0x28
+     - struct dx_entry
+     - entries[0]
+     - As many 8-byte ``struct dx_entry`` as fits in the rest of the data block.
+
+.. _dirhash:
+
+The directory hash is one of the following values:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - Legacy.
+   * - 0x1
+     - Half MD4.
+   * - 0x2
+     - Tea.
+   * - 0x3
+     - Legacy, unsigned.
+   * - 0x4
+     - Half MD4, unsigned.
+   * - 0x5
+     - Tea, unsigned.
+   * - 0x6
+     - Siphash.
+
+Interior nodes of an htree are recorded as ``struct dx_node``, which is
+also the full length of a data block:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - fake.inode
+     - Zero, to make it look like this entry is not in use.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le16
+     - fake.rec_len
+     - The size of the block, in order to hide all of the dx_node data.
+   * - 0x6
+     - u8
+     - name_len
+     - Zero. There is no name for this “unused” directory entry.
+   * - 0x7
+     - u8
+     - file_type
+     - Zero. There is no file type for this “unused” directory entry.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le16
+     - limit
+     - Maximum number of dx_entries that can follow this header, plus 1 for
+       the header itself.
+   * - 0xA
+     - __le16
+     - count
+     - Actual number of dx_entries that follow this header, plus 1 for the
+       header itself.
+   * - 0xE
+     - __le32
+     - block
+     - The block number (within the directory file) that goes with the lowest
+       hash value of this block. This value is stored in the parent block.
+   * - 0x12
+     - struct dx_entry
+     - entries[0]
+     - As many 8-byte ``struct dx_entry`` as fits in the rest of the data block.
+
+The hash maps that exist in both ``struct dx_root`` and
+``struct dx_node`` are recorded as ``struct dx_entry``, which is 8 bytes
+long:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - hash
+     - Hash code.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - block
+     - Block number (within the directory file, not filesystem blocks) of the
+       next node in the htree.
+
+(If you think this is all quite clever and peculiar, so does the
+author.)
+
+If metadata checksums are enabled, the last 8 bytes of the directory
+block (precisely the length of one dx_entry) are used to store a
+``struct dx_tail``, which contains the checksum. The ``limit`` and
+``count`` entries in the dx_root/dx_node structures are adjusted as
+necessary to fit the dx_tail into the block. If there is no space for
+the dx_tail, the user is notified to run e2fsck -D to rebuild the
+directory index (which will ensure that there's space for the checksum.
+The dx_tail structure is 8 bytes long and looks like this:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - u32
+     - dt_reserved
+     - Zero.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - dt_checksum
+     - Checksum of the htree directory block.
+
+The checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the htree index header
+(dx_root or dx_node), all of the htree indices (dx_entry) that are in
+use, and the tail block (dx_tail).
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/dynamic.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/dynamic.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bb0c84333
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/dynamic.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Dynamic Structures
+==================
+
+Dynamic metadata are created on the fly when files and blocks are
+allocated to files.
+
+.. include:: inodes.rst
+.. include:: ifork.rst
+.. include:: directory.rst
+.. include:: attributes.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/eainode.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/eainode.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7a2ef26b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/eainode.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Large Extended Attribute Values
+-------------------------------
+
+To enable ext4 to store extended attribute values that do not fit in the
+inode or in the single extended attribute block attached to an inode,
+the EA_INODE feature allows us to store the value in the data blocks of
+a regular file inode. This “EA inode” is linked only from the extended
+attribute name index and must not appear in a directory entry. The
+inode's i_atime field is used to store a checksum of the xattr value;
+and i_ctime/i_version store a 64-bit reference count, which enables
+sharing of large xattr values between multiple owning inodes. For
+backward compatibility with older versions of this feature, the
+i_mtime/i_generation *may* store a back-reference to the inode number
+and i_generation of the **one** owning inode (in cases where the EA
+inode is not referenced by multiple inodes) to verify that the EA inode
+is the correct one being accessed.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/globals.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/globals.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b17418974
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/globals.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Global Structures
+=================
+
+The filesystem is sharded into a number of block groups, each of which
+have static metadata at fixed locations.
+
+.. include:: super.rst
+.. include:: group_descr.rst
+.. include:: bitmaps.rst
+.. include:: mmp.rst
+.. include:: journal.rst
+.. include:: orphan.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/group_descr.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/group_descr.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..392ec44f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/group_descr.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Block Group Descriptors
+-----------------------
+
+Each block group on the filesystem has one of these descriptors
+associated with it. As noted in the Layout section above, the group
+descriptors (if present) are the second item in the block group. The
+standard configuration is for each block group to contain a full copy of
+the block group descriptor table unless the sparse_super feature flag
+is set.
+
+Notice how the group descriptor records the location of both bitmaps and
+the inode table (i.e. they can float). This means that within a block
+group, the only data structures with fixed locations are the superblock
+and the group descriptor table. The flex_bg mechanism uses this
+property to group several block groups into a flex group and lay out all
+of the groups' bitmaps and inode tables into one long run in the first
+group of the flex group.
+
+If the meta_bg feature flag is set, then several block groups are
+grouped together into a meta group. Note that in the meta_bg case,
+however, the first and last two block groups within the larger meta
+group contain only group descriptors for the groups inside the meta
+group.
+
+flex_bg and meta_bg do not appear to be mutually exclusive features.
+
+In ext2, ext3, and ext4 (when the 64bit feature is not enabled), the
+block group descriptor was only 32 bytes long and therefore ends at
+bg_checksum. On an ext4 filesystem with the 64bit feature enabled, the
+block group descriptor expands to at least the 64 bytes described below;
+the size is stored in the superblock.
+
+If gdt_csum is set and metadata_csum is not set, the block group
+checksum is the crc16 of the FS UUID, the group number, and the group
+descriptor structure. If metadata_csum is set, then the block group
+checksum is the lower 16 bits of the checksum of the FS UUID, the group
+number, and the group descriptor structure. Both block and inode bitmap
+checksums are calculated against the FS UUID, the group number, and the
+entire bitmap.
+
+The block group descriptor is laid out in ``struct ext4_group_desc``.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - bg_block_bitmap_lo
+     - Lower 32-bits of location of block bitmap.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - bg_inode_bitmap_lo
+     - Lower 32-bits of location of inode bitmap.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le32
+     - bg_inode_table_lo
+     - Lower 32-bits of location of inode table.
+   * - 0xC
+     - __le16
+     - bg_free_blocks_count_lo
+     - Lower 16-bits of free block count.
+   * - 0xE
+     - __le16
+     - bg_free_inodes_count_lo
+     - Lower 16-bits of free inode count.
+   * - 0x10
+     - __le16
+     - bg_used_dirs_count_lo
+     - Lower 16-bits of directory count.
+   * - 0x12
+     - __le16
+     - bg_flags
+     - Block group flags. See the bgflags_ table below.
+   * - 0x14
+     - __le32
+     - bg_exclude_bitmap_lo
+     - Lower 32-bits of location of snapshot exclusion bitmap.
+   * - 0x18
+     - __le16
+     - bg_block_bitmap_csum_lo
+     - Lower 16-bits of the block bitmap checksum.
+   * - 0x1A
+     - __le16
+     - bg_inode_bitmap_csum_lo
+     - Lower 16-bits of the inode bitmap checksum.
+   * - 0x1C
+     - __le16
+     - bg_itable_unused_lo
+     - Lower 16-bits of unused inode count. If set, we needn't scan past the
+       ``(sb.s_inodes_per_group - gdt.bg_itable_unused)`` th entry in the
+       inode table for this group.
+   * - 0x1E
+     - __le16
+     - bg_checksum
+     - Group descriptor checksum; crc16(sb_uuid+group_num+bg_desc) if the
+       RO_COMPAT_GDT_CSUM feature is set, or
+       crc32c(sb_uuid+group_num+bg_desc) & 0xFFFF if the
+       RO_COMPAT_METADATA_CSUM feature is set.  The bg_checksum
+       field in bg_desc is skipped when calculating crc16 checksum,
+       and set to zero if crc32c checksum is used.
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - These fields only exist if the 64bit feature is enabled and s_desc_size
+       > 32.
+   * - 0x20
+     - __le32
+     - bg_block_bitmap_hi
+     - Upper 32-bits of location of block bitmap.
+   * - 0x24
+     - __le32
+     - bg_inode_bitmap_hi
+     - Upper 32-bits of location of inodes bitmap.
+   * - 0x28
+     - __le32
+     - bg_inode_table_hi
+     - Upper 32-bits of location of inodes table.
+   * - 0x2C
+     - __le16
+     - bg_free_blocks_count_hi
+     - Upper 16-bits of free block count.
+   * - 0x2E
+     - __le16
+     - bg_free_inodes_count_hi
+     - Upper 16-bits of free inode count.
+   * - 0x30
+     - __le16
+     - bg_used_dirs_count_hi
+     - Upper 16-bits of directory count.
+   * - 0x32
+     - __le16
+     - bg_itable_unused_hi
+     - Upper 16-bits of unused inode count.
+   * - 0x34
+     - __le32
+     - bg_exclude_bitmap_hi
+     - Upper 32-bits of location of snapshot exclusion bitmap.
+   * - 0x38
+     - __le16
+     - bg_block_bitmap_csum_hi
+     - Upper 16-bits of the block bitmap checksum.
+   * - 0x3A
+     - __le16
+     - bg_inode_bitmap_csum_hi
+     - Upper 16-bits of the inode bitmap checksum.
+   * - 0x3C
+     - __u32
+     - bg_reserved
+     - Padding to 64 bytes.
+
+.. _bgflags:
+
+Block group flags can be any combination of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x1
+     - inode table and bitmap are not initialized (EXT4_BG_INODE_UNINIT).
+   * - 0x2
+     - block bitmap is not initialized (EXT4_BG_BLOCK_UNINIT).
+   * - 0x4
+     - inode table is zeroed (EXT4_BG_INODE_ZEROED).
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ifork.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ifork.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dc31f505e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ifork.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+The Contents of inode.i_block
+------------------------------
+
+Depending on the type of file an inode describes, the 60 bytes of
+storage in ``inode.i_block`` can be used in different ways. In general,
+regular files and directories will use it for file block indexing
+information, and special files will use it for special purposes.
+
+Symbolic Links
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The target of a symbolic link will be stored in this field if the target
+string is less than 60 bytes long. Otherwise, either extents or block
+maps will be used to allocate data blocks to store the link target.
+
+Direct/Indirect Block Addressing
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+In ext2/3, file block numbers were mapped to logical block numbers by
+means of an (up to) three level 1-1 block map. To find the logical block
+that stores a particular file block, the code would navigate through
+this increasingly complicated structure. Notice that there is neither a
+magic number nor a checksum to provide any level of confidence that the
+block isn't full of garbage.
+
+.. ifconfig:: builder != 'latex'
+
+   .. include:: blockmap.rst
+
+.. ifconfig:: builder == 'latex'
+
+   [Table omitted because LaTeX doesn't support nested tables.]
+
+Note that with this block mapping scheme, it is necessary to fill out a
+lot of mapping data even for a large contiguous file! This inefficiency
+led to the creation of the extent mapping scheme, discussed below.
+
+Notice also that a file using this mapping scheme cannot be placed
+higher than 2^32 blocks.
+
+Extent Tree
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+In ext4, the file to logical block map has been replaced with an extent
+tree. Under the old scheme, allocating a contiguous run of 1,000 blocks
+requires an indirect block to map all 1,000 entries; with extents, the
+mapping is reduced to a single ``struct ext4_extent`` with
+``ee_len = 1000``. If flex_bg is enabled, it is possible to allocate
+very large files with a single extent, at a considerable reduction in
+metadata block use, and some improvement in disk efficiency. The inode
+must have the extents flag (0x80000) flag set for this feature to be in
+use.
+
+Extents are arranged as a tree. Each node of the tree begins with a
+``struct ext4_extent_header``. If the node is an interior node
+(``eh.eh_depth`` > 0), the header is followed by ``eh.eh_entries``
+instances of ``struct ext4_extent_idx``; each of these index entries
+points to a block containing more nodes in the extent tree. If the node
+is a leaf node (``eh.eh_depth == 0``), then the header is followed by
+``eh.eh_entries`` instances of ``struct ext4_extent``; these instances
+point to the file's data blocks. The root node of the extent tree is
+stored in ``inode.i_block``, which allows for the first four extents to
+be recorded without the use of extra metadata blocks.
+
+The extent tree header is recorded in ``struct ext4_extent_header``,
+which is 12 bytes long:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le16
+     - eh_magic
+     - Magic number, 0xF30A.
+   * - 0x2
+     - __le16
+     - eh_entries
+     - Number of valid entries following the header.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le16
+     - eh_max
+     - Maximum number of entries that could follow the header.
+   * - 0x6
+     - __le16
+     - eh_depth
+     - Depth of this extent node in the extent tree. 0 = this extent node
+       points to data blocks; otherwise, this extent node points to other
+       extent nodes. The extent tree can be at most 5 levels deep: a logical
+       block number can be at most ``2^32``, and the smallest ``n`` that
+       satisfies ``4*(((blocksize - 12)/12)^n) >= 2^32`` is 5.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le32
+     - eh_generation
+     - Generation of the tree. (Used by Lustre, but not standard ext4).
+
+Internal nodes of the extent tree, also known as index nodes, are
+recorded as ``struct ext4_extent_idx``, and are 12 bytes long:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - ei_block
+     - This index node covers file blocks from 'block' onward.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - ei_leaf_lo
+     - Lower 32-bits of the block number of the extent node that is the next
+       level lower in the tree. The tree node pointed to can be either another
+       internal node or a leaf node, described below.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le16
+     - ei_leaf_hi
+     - Upper 16-bits of the previous field.
+   * - 0xA
+     - __u16
+     - ei_unused
+     -
+
+Leaf nodes of the extent tree are recorded as ``struct ext4_extent``,
+and are also 12 bytes long:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - ee_block
+     - First file block number that this extent covers.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le16
+     - ee_len
+     - Number of blocks covered by extent. If the value of this field is <=
+       32768, the extent is initialized. If the value of the field is > 32768,
+       the extent is uninitialized and the actual extent length is ``ee_len`` -
+       32768. Therefore, the maximum length of a initialized extent is 32768
+       blocks, and the maximum length of an uninitialized extent is 32767.
+   * - 0x6
+     - __le16
+     - ee_start_hi
+     - Upper 16-bits of the block number to which this extent points.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le32
+     - ee_start_lo
+     - Lower 32-bits of the block number to which this extent points.
+
+Prior to the introduction of metadata checksums, the extent header +
+extent entries always left at least 4 bytes of unallocated space at the
+end of each extent tree data block (because (2^x % 12) >= 4). Therefore,
+the 32-bit checksum is inserted into this space. The 4 extents in the
+inode do not need checksumming, since the inode is already checksummed.
+The checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the inode number, the
+inode generation, and the entire extent block leading up to (but not
+including) the checksum itself.
+
+``struct ext4_extent_tail`` is 4 bytes long:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - eb_checksum
+     - Checksum of the extent block, crc32c(uuid+inum+igeneration+extentblock)
+
+Inline Data
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+If the inline data feature is enabled for the filesystem and the flag is
+set for the inode, it is possible that the first 60 bytes of the file
+data are stored here.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..705d813d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===================================
+ext4 Data Structures and Algorithms
+===================================
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 6
+   :numbered:
+
+   about
+   overview
+   globals
+   dynamic
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/inlinedata.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/inlinedata.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a728af0d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/inlinedata.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Inline Data
+-----------
+
+The inline data feature was designed to handle the case that a file's
+data is so tiny that it readily fits inside the inode, which
+(theoretically) reduces disk block consumption and reduces seeks. If the
+file is smaller than 60 bytes, then the data are stored inline in
+``inode.i_block``. If the rest of the file would fit inside the extended
+attribute space, then it might be found as an extended attribute
+“system.data” within the inode body (“ibody EA”). This of course
+constrains the amount of extended attributes one can attach to an inode.
+If the data size increases beyond i_block + ibody EA, a regular block
+is allocated and the contents moved to that block.
+
+Pending a change to compact the extended attribute key used to store
+inline data, one ought to be able to store 160 bytes of data in a
+256-byte inode (as of June 2015, when i_extra_isize is 28). Prior to
+that, the limit was 156 bytes due to inefficient use of inode space.
+
+The inline data feature requires the presence of an extended attribute
+for “system.data”, even if the attribute value is zero length.
+
+Inline Directories
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The first four bytes of i_block are the inode number of the parent
+directory. Following that is a 56-byte space for an array of directory
+entries; see ``struct ext4_dir_entry``. If there is a “system.data”
+attribute in the inode body, the EA value is an array of
+``struct ext4_dir_entry`` as well. Note that for inline directories, the
+i_block and EA space are treated as separate dirent blocks; directory
+entries cannot span the two.
+
+Inline directory entries are not checksummed, as the inode checksum
+should protect all inline data contents.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/inodes.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/inodes.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cfc6c1659
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/inodes.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,578 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Index Nodes
+-----------
+
+In a regular UNIX filesystem, the inode stores all the metadata
+pertaining to the file (time stamps, block maps, extended attributes,
+etc), not the directory entry. To find the information associated with a
+file, one must traverse the directory files to find the directory entry
+associated with a file, then load the inode to find the metadata for
+that file. ext4 appears to cheat (for performance reasons) a little bit
+by storing a copy of the file type (normally stored in the inode) in the
+directory entry. (Compare all this to FAT, which stores all the file
+information directly in the directory entry, but does not support hard
+links and is in general more seek-happy than ext4 due to its simpler
+block allocator and extensive use of linked lists.)
+
+The inode table is a linear array of ``struct ext4_inode``. The table is
+sized to have enough blocks to store at least
+``sb.s_inode_size * sb.s_inodes_per_group`` bytes. The number of the
+block group containing an inode can be calculated as
+``(inode_number - 1) / sb.s_inodes_per_group``, and the offset into the
+group's table is ``(inode_number - 1) % sb.s_inodes_per_group``. There
+is no inode 0.
+
+The inode checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the inode number,
+and the inode structure itself.
+
+The inode table entry is laid out in ``struct ext4_inode``.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+   :class: longtable
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le16
+     - i_mode
+     - File mode. See the table i_mode_ below.
+   * - 0x2
+     - __le16
+     - i_uid
+     - Lower 16-bits of Owner UID.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - i_size_lo
+     - Lower 32-bits of size in bytes.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le32
+     - i_atime
+     - Last access time, in seconds since the epoch. However, if the EA_INODE
+       inode flag is set, this inode stores an extended attribute value and
+       this field contains the checksum of the value.
+   * - 0xC
+     - __le32
+     - i_ctime
+     - Last inode change time, in seconds since the epoch. However, if the
+       EA_INODE inode flag is set, this inode stores an extended attribute
+       value and this field contains the lower 32 bits of the attribute value's
+       reference count.
+   * - 0x10
+     - __le32
+     - i_mtime
+     - Last data modification time, in seconds since the epoch. However, if the
+       EA_INODE inode flag is set, this inode stores an extended attribute
+       value and this field contains the number of the inode that owns the
+       extended attribute.
+   * - 0x14
+     - __le32
+     - i_dtime
+     - Deletion Time, in seconds since the epoch.
+   * - 0x18
+     - __le16
+     - i_gid
+     - Lower 16-bits of GID.
+   * - 0x1A
+     - __le16
+     - i_links_count
+     - Hard link count. Normally, ext4 does not permit an inode to have more
+       than 65,000 hard links. This applies to files as well as directories,
+       which means that there cannot be more than 64,998 subdirectories in a
+       directory (each subdirectory's '..' entry counts as a hard link, as does
+       the '.' entry in the directory itself). With the DIR_NLINK feature
+       enabled, ext4 supports more than 64,998 subdirectories by setting this
+       field to 1 to indicate that the number of hard links is not known.
+   * - 0x1C
+     - __le32
+     - i_blocks_lo
+     - Lower 32-bits of “block” count. If the huge_file feature flag is not
+       set on the filesystem, the file consumes ``i_blocks_lo`` 512-byte blocks
+       on disk. If huge_file is set and EXT4_HUGE_FILE_FL is NOT set in
+       ``inode.i_flags``, then the file consumes ``i_blocks_lo + (i_blocks_hi
+       << 32)`` 512-byte blocks on disk. If huge_file is set and
+       EXT4_HUGE_FILE_FL IS set in ``inode.i_flags``, then this file
+       consumes (``i_blocks_lo + i_blocks_hi`` << 32) filesystem blocks on
+       disk.
+   * - 0x20
+     - __le32
+     - i_flags
+     - Inode flags. See the table i_flags_ below.
+   * - 0x24
+     - 4 bytes
+     - i_osd1
+     - See the table i_osd1_ for more details.
+   * - 0x28
+     - 60 bytes
+     - i_block[EXT4_N_BLOCKS=15]
+     - Block map or extent tree. See the section “The Contents of inode.i_block”.
+   * - 0x64
+     - __le32
+     - i_generation
+     - File version (for NFS).
+   * - 0x68
+     - __le32
+     - i_file_acl_lo
+     - Lower 32-bits of extended attribute block. ACLs are of course one of
+       many possible extended attributes; I think the name of this field is a
+       result of the first use of extended attributes being for ACLs.
+   * - 0x6C
+     - __le32
+     - i_size_high / i_dir_acl
+     - Upper 32-bits of file/directory size. In ext2/3 this field was named
+       i_dir_acl, though it was usually set to zero and never used.
+   * - 0x70
+     - __le32
+     - i_obso_faddr
+     - (Obsolete) fragment address.
+   * - 0x74
+     - 12 bytes
+     - i_osd2
+     - See the table i_osd2_ for more details.
+   * - 0x80
+     - __le16
+     - i_extra_isize
+     - Size of this inode - 128. Alternately, the size of the extended inode
+       fields beyond the original ext2 inode, including this field.
+   * - 0x82
+     - __le16
+     - i_checksum_hi
+     - Upper 16-bits of the inode checksum.
+   * - 0x84
+     - __le32
+     - i_ctime_extra
+     - Extra change time bits. This provides sub-second precision. See Inode
+       Timestamps section.
+   * - 0x88
+     - __le32
+     - i_mtime_extra
+     - Extra modification time bits. This provides sub-second precision.
+   * - 0x8C
+     - __le32
+     - i_atime_extra
+     - Extra access time bits. This provides sub-second precision.
+   * - 0x90
+     - __le32
+     - i_crtime
+     - File creation time, in seconds since the epoch.
+   * - 0x94
+     - __le32
+     - i_crtime_extra
+     - Extra file creation time bits. This provides sub-second precision.
+   * - 0x98
+     - __le32
+     - i_version_hi
+     - Upper 32-bits for version number.
+   * - 0x9C
+     - __le32
+     - i_projid
+     - Project ID.
+
+.. _i_mode:
+
+The ``i_mode`` value is a combination of the following flags:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x1
+     - S_IXOTH (Others may execute)
+   * - 0x2
+     - S_IWOTH (Others may write)
+   * - 0x4
+     - S_IROTH (Others may read)
+   * - 0x8
+     - S_IXGRP (Group members may execute)
+   * - 0x10
+     - S_IWGRP (Group members may write)
+   * - 0x20
+     - S_IRGRP (Group members may read)
+   * - 0x40
+     - S_IXUSR (Owner may execute)
+   * - 0x80
+     - S_IWUSR (Owner may write)
+   * - 0x100
+     - S_IRUSR (Owner may read)
+   * - 0x200
+     - S_ISVTX (Sticky bit)
+   * - 0x400
+     - S_ISGID (Set GID)
+   * - 0x800
+     - S_ISUID (Set UID)
+   * -
+     - These are mutually-exclusive file types:
+   * - 0x1000
+     - S_IFIFO (FIFO)
+   * - 0x2000
+     - S_IFCHR (Character device)
+   * - 0x4000
+     - S_IFDIR (Directory)
+   * - 0x6000
+     - S_IFBLK (Block device)
+   * - 0x8000
+     - S_IFREG (Regular file)
+   * - 0xA000
+     - S_IFLNK (Symbolic link)
+   * - 0xC000
+     - S_IFSOCK (Socket)
+
+.. _i_flags:
+
+The ``i_flags`` field is a combination of these values:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x1
+     - This file requires secure deletion (EXT4_SECRM_FL). (not implemented)
+   * - 0x2
+     - This file should be preserved, should undeletion be desired
+       (EXT4_UNRM_FL). (not implemented)
+   * - 0x4
+     - File is compressed (EXT4_COMPR_FL). (not really implemented)
+   * - 0x8
+     - All writes to the file must be synchronous (EXT4_SYNC_FL).
+   * - 0x10
+     - File is immutable (EXT4_IMMUTABLE_FL).
+   * - 0x20
+     - File can only be appended (EXT4_APPEND_FL).
+   * - 0x40
+     - The dump(1) utility should not dump this file (EXT4_NODUMP_FL).
+   * - 0x80
+     - Do not update access time (EXT4_NOATIME_FL).
+   * - 0x100
+     - Dirty compressed file (EXT4_DIRTY_FL). (not used)
+   * - 0x200
+     - File has one or more compressed clusters (EXT4_COMPRBLK_FL). (not used)
+   * - 0x400
+     - Do not compress file (EXT4_NOCOMPR_FL). (not used)
+   * - 0x800
+     - Encrypted inode (EXT4_ENCRYPT_FL). This bit value previously was
+       EXT4_ECOMPR_FL (compression error), which was never used.
+   * - 0x1000
+     - Directory has hashed indexes (EXT4_INDEX_FL).
+   * - 0x2000
+     - AFS magic directory (EXT4_IMAGIC_FL).
+   * - 0x4000
+     - File data must always be written through the journal
+       (EXT4_JOURNAL_DATA_FL).
+   * - 0x8000
+     - File tail should not be merged (EXT4_NOTAIL_FL). (not used by ext4)
+   * - 0x10000
+     - All directory entry data should be written synchronously (see
+       ``dirsync``) (EXT4_DIRSYNC_FL).
+   * - 0x20000
+     - Top of directory hierarchy (EXT4_TOPDIR_FL).
+   * - 0x40000
+     - This is a huge file (EXT4_HUGE_FILE_FL).
+   * - 0x80000
+     - Inode uses extents (EXT4_EXTENTS_FL).
+   * - 0x100000
+     - Verity protected file (EXT4_VERITY_FL).
+   * - 0x200000
+     - Inode stores a large extended attribute value in its data blocks
+       (EXT4_EA_INODE_FL).
+   * - 0x400000
+     - This file has blocks allocated past EOF (EXT4_EOFBLOCKS_FL).
+       (deprecated)
+   * - 0x01000000
+     - Inode is a snapshot (``EXT4_SNAPFILE_FL``). (not in mainline)
+   * - 0x04000000
+     - Snapshot is being deleted (``EXT4_SNAPFILE_DELETED_FL``). (not in
+       mainline)
+   * - 0x08000000
+     - Snapshot shrink has completed (``EXT4_SNAPFILE_SHRUNK_FL``). (not in
+       mainline)
+   * - 0x10000000
+     - Inode has inline data (EXT4_INLINE_DATA_FL).
+   * - 0x20000000
+     - Create children with the same project ID (EXT4_PROJINHERIT_FL).
+   * - 0x80000000
+     - Reserved for ext4 library (EXT4_RESERVED_FL).
+   * -
+     - Aggregate flags:
+   * - 0x705BDFFF
+     - User-visible flags.
+   * - 0x604BC0FF
+     - User-modifiable flags. Note that while EXT4_JOURNAL_DATA_FL and
+       EXT4_EXTENTS_FL can be set with setattr, they are not in the kernel's
+       EXT4_FL_USER_MODIFIABLE mask, since it needs to handle the setting of
+       these flags in a special manner and they are masked out of the set of
+       flags that are saved directly to i_flags.
+
+.. _i_osd1:
+
+The ``osd1`` field has multiple meanings depending on the creator:
+
+Linux:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - l_i_version
+     - Inode version. However, if the EA_INODE inode flag is set, this inode
+       stores an extended attribute value and this field contains the upper 32
+       bits of the attribute value's reference count.
+
+Hurd:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - h_i_translator
+     - ??
+
+Masix:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - m_i_reserved
+     - ??
+
+.. _i_osd2:
+
+The ``osd2`` field has multiple meanings depending on the filesystem creator:
+
+Linux:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le16
+     - l_i_blocks_high
+     - Upper 16-bits of the block count. Please see the note attached to
+       i_blocks_lo.
+   * - 0x2
+     - __le16
+     - l_i_file_acl_high
+     - Upper 16-bits of the extended attribute block (historically, the file
+       ACL location). See the Extended Attributes section below.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le16
+     - l_i_uid_high
+     - Upper 16-bits of the Owner UID.
+   * - 0x6
+     - __le16
+     - l_i_gid_high
+     - Upper 16-bits of the GID.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le16
+     - l_i_checksum_lo
+     - Lower 16-bits of the inode checksum.
+   * - 0xA
+     - __le16
+     - l_i_reserved
+     - Unused.
+
+Hurd:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le16
+     - h_i_reserved1
+     - ??
+   * - 0x2
+     - __u16
+     - h_i_mode_high
+     - Upper 16-bits of the file mode.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le16
+     - h_i_uid_high
+     - Upper 16-bits of the Owner UID.
+   * - 0x6
+     - __le16
+     - h_i_gid_high
+     - Upper 16-bits of the GID.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __u32
+     - h_i_author
+     - Author code?
+
+Masix:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le16
+     - h_i_reserved1
+     - ??
+   * - 0x2
+     - __u16
+     - m_i_file_acl_high
+     - Upper 16-bits of the extended attribute block (historically, the file
+       ACL location).
+   * - 0x4
+     - __u32
+     - m_i_reserved2[2]
+     - ??
+
+Inode Size
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+In ext2 and ext3, the inode structure size was fixed at 128 bytes
+(``EXT2_GOOD_OLD_INODE_SIZE``) and each inode had a disk record size of
+128 bytes. Starting with ext4, it is possible to allocate a larger
+on-disk inode at format time for all inodes in the filesystem to provide
+space beyond the end of the original ext2 inode. The on-disk inode
+record size is recorded in the superblock as ``s_inode_size``. The
+number of bytes actually used by struct ext4_inode beyond the original
+128-byte ext2 inode is recorded in the ``i_extra_isize`` field for each
+inode, which allows struct ext4_inode to grow for a new kernel without
+having to upgrade all of the on-disk inodes. Access to fields beyond
+EXT2_GOOD_OLD_INODE_SIZE should be verified to be within
+``i_extra_isize``. By default, ext4 inode records are 256 bytes, and (as
+of August 2019) the inode structure is 160 bytes
+(``i_extra_isize = 32``). The extra space between the end of the inode
+structure and the end of the inode record can be used to store extended
+attributes. Each inode record can be as large as the filesystem block
+size, though this is not terribly efficient.
+
+Finding an Inode
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Each block group contains ``sb->s_inodes_per_group`` inodes. Because
+inode 0 is defined not to exist, this formula can be used to find the
+block group that an inode lives in:
+``bg = (inode_num - 1) / sb->s_inodes_per_group``. The particular inode
+can be found within the block group's inode table at
+``index = (inode_num - 1) % sb->s_inodes_per_group``. To get the byte
+address within the inode table, use
+``offset = index * sb->s_inode_size``.
+
+Inode Timestamps
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Four timestamps are recorded in the lower 128 bytes of the inode
+structure -- inode change time (ctime), access time (atime), data
+modification time (mtime), and deletion time (dtime). The four fields
+are 32-bit signed integers that represent seconds since the Unix epoch
+(1970-01-01 00:00:00 GMT), which means that the fields will overflow in
+January 2038. If the filesystem does not have orphan_file feature, inodes
+that are not linked from any directory but are still open (orphan inodes) have
+the dtime field overloaded for use with the orphan list. The superblock field
+``s_last_orphan`` points to the first inode in the orphan list; dtime is then
+the number of the next orphaned inode, or zero if there are no more orphans.
+
+If the inode structure size ``sb->s_inode_size`` is larger than 128
+bytes and the ``i_inode_extra`` field is large enough to encompass the
+respective ``i_[cma]time_extra`` field, the ctime, atime, and mtime
+inode fields are widened to 64 bits. Within this “extra” 32-bit field,
+the lower two bits are used to extend the 32-bit seconds field to be 34
+bit wide; the upper 30 bits are used to provide nanosecond timestamp
+accuracy. Therefore, timestamps should not overflow until May 2446.
+dtime was not widened. There is also a fifth timestamp to record inode
+creation time (crtime); this field is 64-bits wide and decoded in the
+same manner as 64-bit [cma]time. Neither crtime nor dtime are accessible
+through the regular stat() interface, though debugfs will report them.
+
+We use the 32-bit signed time value plus (2^32 * (extra epoch bits)).
+In other words:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 20 20 20 20 20
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Extra epoch bits
+     - MSB of 32-bit time
+     - Adjustment for signed 32-bit to 64-bit tv_sec
+     - Decoded 64-bit tv_sec
+     - valid time range
+   * - 0 0
+     - 1
+     - 0
+     - ``-0x80000000 - -0x00000001``
+     - 1901-12-13 to 1969-12-31
+   * - 0 0
+     - 0
+     - 0
+     - ``0x000000000 - 0x07fffffff``
+     - 1970-01-01 to 2038-01-19
+   * - 0 1
+     - 1
+     - 0x100000000
+     - ``0x080000000 - 0x0ffffffff``
+     - 2038-01-19 to 2106-02-07
+   * - 0 1
+     - 0
+     - 0x100000000
+     - ``0x100000000 - 0x17fffffff``
+     - 2106-02-07 to 2174-02-25
+   * - 1 0
+     - 1
+     - 0x200000000
+     - ``0x180000000 - 0x1ffffffff``
+     - 2174-02-25 to 2242-03-16
+   * - 1 0
+     - 0
+     - 0x200000000
+     - ``0x200000000 - 0x27fffffff``
+     - 2242-03-16 to 2310-04-04
+   * - 1 1
+     - 1
+     - 0x300000000
+     - ``0x280000000 - 0x2ffffffff``
+     - 2310-04-04 to 2378-04-22
+   * - 1 1
+     - 0
+     - 0x300000000
+     - ``0x300000000 - 0x37fffffff``
+     - 2378-04-22 to 2446-05-10
+
+This is a somewhat odd encoding since there are effectively seven times
+as many positive values as negative values. There have also been
+long-standing bugs decoding and encoding dates beyond 2038, which don't
+seem to be fixed as of kernel 3.12 and e2fsprogs 1.42.8. 64-bit kernels
+incorrectly use the extra epoch bits 1,1 for dates between 1901 and
+1970. At some point the kernel will be fixed and e2fsck will fix this
+situation, assuming that it is run before 2310.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/journal.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/journal.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a6bef5293
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/journal.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,756 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Journal (jbd2)
+--------------
+
+Introduced in ext3, the ext4 filesystem employs a journal to protect the
+filesystem against metadata inconsistencies in the case of a system crash. Up
+to 10,240,000 file system blocks (see man mke2fs(8) for more details on journal
+size limits) can be reserved inside the filesystem as a place to land
+“important” data writes on-disk as quickly as possible. Once the important
+data transaction is fully written to the disk and flushed from the disk write
+cache, a record of the data being committed is also written to the journal. At
+some later point in time, the journal code writes the transactions to their
+final locations on disk (this could involve a lot of seeking or a lot of small
+read-write-erases) before erasing the commit record. Should the system
+crash during the second slow write, the journal can be replayed all the
+way to the latest commit record, guaranteeing the atomicity of whatever
+gets written through the journal to the disk. The effect of this is to
+guarantee that the filesystem does not become stuck midway through a
+metadata update.
+
+For performance reasons, ext4 by default only writes filesystem metadata
+through the journal. This means that file data blocks are /not/
+guaranteed to be in any consistent state after a crash. If this default
+guarantee level (``data=ordered``) is not satisfactory, there is a mount
+option to control journal behavior. If ``data=journal``, all data and
+metadata are written to disk through the journal. This is slower but
+safest. If ``data=writeback``, dirty data blocks are not flushed to the
+disk before the metadata are written to disk through the journal.
+
+In case of ``data=ordered`` mode, Ext4 also supports fast commits which
+help reduce commit latency significantly. The default ``data=ordered``
+mode works by logging metadata blocks to the journal. In fast commit
+mode, Ext4 only stores the minimal delta needed to recreate the
+affected metadata in fast commit space that is shared with JBD2.
+Once the fast commit area fills in or if fast commit is not possible
+or if JBD2 commit timer goes off, Ext4 performs a traditional full commit.
+A full commit invalidates all the fast commits that happened before
+it and thus it makes the fast commit area empty for further fast
+commits. This feature needs to be enabled at mkfs time.
+
+The journal inode is typically inode 8. The first 68 bytes of the
+journal inode are replicated in the ext4 superblock. The journal itself
+is normal (but hidden) file within the filesystem. The file usually
+consumes an entire block group, though mke2fs tries to put it in the
+middle of the disk.
+
+All fields in jbd2 are written to disk in big-endian order. This is the
+opposite of ext4.
+
+NOTE: Both ext4 and ocfs2 use jbd2.
+
+The maximum size of a journal embedded in an ext4 filesystem is 2^32
+blocks. jbd2 itself does not seem to care.
+
+Layout
+~~~~~~
+
+Generally speaking, the journal has this format:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 48 16
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Superblock
+     - descriptor_block (data_blocks or revocation_block) [more data or
+       revocations] commmit_block
+     - [more transactions...]
+   * - 
+     - One transaction
+     -
+
+Notice that a transaction begins with either a descriptor and some data,
+or a block revocation list. A finished transaction always ends with a
+commit. If there is no commit record (or the checksums don't match), the
+transaction will be discarded during replay.
+
+External Journal
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Optionally, an ext4 filesystem can be created with an external journal
+device (as opposed to an internal journal, which uses a reserved inode).
+In this case, on the filesystem device, ``s_journal_inum`` should be
+zero and ``s_journal_uuid`` should be set. On the journal device there
+will be an ext4 super block in the usual place, with a matching UUID.
+The journal superblock will be in the next full block after the
+superblock.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 12 12 12 32 12
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - 1024 bytes of padding
+     - ext4 Superblock
+     - Journal Superblock
+     - descriptor_block (data_blocks or revocation_block) [more data or
+       revocations] commmit_block
+     - [more transactions...]
+   * - 
+     -
+     -
+     - One transaction
+     -
+
+Block Header
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Every block in the journal starts with a common 12-byte header
+``struct journal_header_s``:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __be32
+     - h_magic
+     - jbd2 magic number, 0xC03B3998.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __be32
+     - h_blocktype
+     - Description of what this block contains. See the jbd2_blocktype_ table
+       below.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __be32
+     - h_sequence
+     - The transaction ID that goes with this block.
+
+.. _jbd2_blocktype:
+
+The journal block type can be any one of:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 1
+     - Descriptor. This block precedes a series of data blocks that were
+       written through the journal during a transaction.
+   * - 2
+     - Block commit record. This block signifies the completion of a
+       transaction.
+   * - 3
+     - Journal superblock, v1.
+   * - 4
+     - Journal superblock, v2.
+   * - 5
+     - Block revocation records. This speeds up recovery by enabling the
+       journal to skip writing blocks that were subsequently rewritten.
+
+Super Block
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The super block for the journal is much simpler as compared to ext4's.
+The key data kept within are size of the journal, and where to find the
+start of the log of transactions.
+
+The journal superblock is recorded as ``struct journal_superblock_s``,
+which is 1024 bytes long:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - Static information describing the journal.
+   * - 0x0
+     - journal_header_t (12 bytes)
+     - s_header
+     - Common header identifying this as a superblock.
+   * - 0xC
+     - __be32
+     - s_blocksize
+     - Journal device block size.
+   * - 0x10
+     - __be32
+     - s_maxlen
+     - Total number of blocks in this journal.
+   * - 0x14
+     - __be32
+     - s_first
+     - First block of log information.
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - Dynamic information describing the current state of the log.
+   * - 0x18
+     - __be32
+     - s_sequence
+     - First commit ID expected in log.
+   * - 0x1C
+     - __be32
+     - s_start
+     - Block number of the start of log. Contrary to the comments, this field
+       being zero does not imply that the journal is clean!
+   * - 0x20
+     - __be32
+     - s_errno
+     - Error value, as set by jbd2_journal_abort().
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - The remaining fields are only valid in a v2 superblock.
+   * - 0x24
+     - __be32
+     - s_feature_compat;
+     - Compatible feature set. See the table jbd2_compat_ below.
+   * - 0x28
+     - __be32
+     - s_feature_incompat
+     - Incompatible feature set. See the table jbd2_incompat_ below.
+   * - 0x2C
+     - __be32
+     - s_feature_ro_compat
+     - Read-only compatible feature set. There aren't any of these currently.
+   * - 0x30
+     - __u8
+     - s_uuid[16]
+     - 128-bit uuid for journal. This is compared against the copy in the ext4
+       super block at mount time.
+   * - 0x40
+     - __be32
+     - s_nr_users
+     - Number of file systems sharing this journal.
+   * - 0x44
+     - __be32
+     - s_dynsuper
+     - Location of dynamic super block copy. (Not used?)
+   * - 0x48
+     - __be32
+     - s_max_transaction
+     - Limit of journal blocks per transaction. (Not used?)
+   * - 0x4C
+     - __be32
+     - s_max_trans_data
+     - Limit of data blocks per transaction. (Not used?)
+   * - 0x50
+     - __u8
+     - s_checksum_type
+     - Checksum algorithm used for the journal.  See jbd2_checksum_type_ for
+       more info.
+   * - 0x51
+     - __u8[3]
+     - s_padding2
+     -
+   * - 0x54
+     - __be32
+     - s_num_fc_blocks
+     - Number of fast commit blocks in the journal.
+   * - 0x58
+     - __u32
+     - s_padding[42]
+     -
+   * - 0xFC
+     - __be32
+     - s_checksum
+     - Checksum of the entire superblock, with this field set to zero.
+   * - 0x100
+     - __u8
+     - s_users[16*48]
+     - ids of all file systems sharing the log. e2fsprogs/Linux don't allow
+       shared external journals, but I imagine Lustre (or ocfs2?), which use
+       the jbd2 code, might.
+
+.. _jbd2_compat:
+
+The journal compat features are any combination of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x1
+     - Journal maintains checksums on the data blocks.
+       (JBD2_FEATURE_COMPAT_CHECKSUM)
+
+.. _jbd2_incompat:
+
+The journal incompat features are any combination of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x1
+     - Journal has block revocation records. (JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_REVOKE)
+   * - 0x2
+     - Journal can deal with 64-bit block numbers.
+       (JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_64BIT)
+   * - 0x4
+     - Journal commits asynchronously. (JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_ASYNC_COMMIT)
+   * - 0x8
+     - This journal uses v2 of the checksum on-disk format. Each journal
+       metadata block gets its own checksum, and the block tags in the
+       descriptor table contain checksums for each of the data blocks in the
+       journal. (JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V2)
+   * - 0x10
+     - This journal uses v3 of the checksum on-disk format. This is the same as
+       v2, but the journal block tag size is fixed regardless of the size of
+       block numbers. (JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V3)
+   * - 0x20
+     - Journal has fast commit blocks. (JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_FAST_COMMIT)
+
+.. _jbd2_checksum_type:
+
+Journal checksum type codes are one of the following.  crc32 or crc32c are the
+most likely choices.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 1
+     - CRC32
+   * - 2
+     - MD5
+   * - 3
+     - SHA1
+   * - 4
+     - CRC32C
+
+Descriptor Block
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The descriptor block contains an array of journal block tags that
+describe the final locations of the data blocks that follow in the
+journal. Descriptor blocks are open-coded instead of being completely
+described by a data structure, but here is the block structure anyway.
+Descriptor blocks consume at least 36 bytes, but use a full block:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Descriptor
+   * - 0x0
+     - journal_header_t
+     - (open coded)
+     - Common block header.
+   * - 0xC
+     - struct journal_block_tag_s
+     - open coded array[]
+     - Enough tags either to fill up the block or to describe all the data
+       blocks that follow this descriptor block.
+
+Journal block tags have any of the following formats, depending on which
+journal feature and block tag flags are set.
+
+If JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V3 is set, the journal block tag is
+defined as ``struct journal_block_tag3_s``, which looks like the
+following. The size is 16 or 32 bytes.
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Descriptor
+   * - 0x0
+     - __be32
+     - t_blocknr
+     - Lower 32-bits of the location of where the corresponding data block
+       should end up on disk.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __be32
+     - t_flags
+     - Flags that go with the descriptor. See the table jbd2_tag_flags_ for
+       more info.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __be32
+     - t_blocknr_high
+     - Upper 32-bits of the location of where the corresponding data block
+       should end up on disk. This is zero if JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_64BIT is
+       not enabled.
+   * - 0xC
+     - __be32
+     - t_checksum
+     - Checksum of the journal UUID, the sequence number, and the data block.
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - This field appears to be open coded. It always comes at the end of the
+       tag, after t_checksum. This field is not present if the "same UUID" flag
+       is set.
+   * - 0x8 or 0xC
+     - char
+     - uuid[16]
+     - A UUID to go with this tag. This field appears to be copied from the
+       ``j_uuid`` field in ``struct journal_s``, but only tune2fs touches that
+       field.
+
+.. _jbd2_tag_flags:
+
+The journal tag flags are any combination of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x1
+     - On-disk block is escaped. The first four bytes of the data block just
+       happened to match the jbd2 magic number.
+   * - 0x2
+     - This block has the same UUID as previous, therefore the UUID field is
+       omitted.
+   * - 0x4
+     - The data block was deleted by the transaction. (Not used?)
+   * - 0x8
+     - This is the last tag in this descriptor block.
+
+If JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V3 is NOT set, the journal block tag
+is defined as ``struct journal_block_tag_s``, which looks like the
+following. The size is 8, 12, 24, or 28 bytes:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Descriptor
+   * - 0x0
+     - __be32
+     - t_blocknr
+     - Lower 32-bits of the location of where the corresponding data block
+       should end up on disk.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __be16
+     - t_checksum
+     - Checksum of the journal UUID, the sequence number, and the data block.
+       Note that only the lower 16 bits are stored.
+   * - 0x6
+     - __be16
+     - t_flags
+     - Flags that go with the descriptor. See the table jbd2_tag_flags_ for
+       more info.
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - This next field is only present if the super block indicates support for
+       64-bit block numbers.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __be32
+     - t_blocknr_high
+     - Upper 32-bits of the location of where the corresponding data block
+       should end up on disk.
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - This field appears to be open coded. It always comes at the end of the
+       tag, after t_flags or t_blocknr_high. This field is not present if the
+       "same UUID" flag is set.
+   * - 0x8 or 0xC
+     - char
+     - uuid[16]
+     - A UUID to go with this tag. This field appears to be copied from the
+       ``j_uuid`` field in ``struct journal_s``, but only tune2fs touches that
+       field.
+
+If JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V2 or
+JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V3 are set, the end of the block is a
+``struct jbd2_journal_block_tail``, which looks like this:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Descriptor
+   * - 0x0
+     - __be32
+     - t_checksum
+     - Checksum of the journal UUID + the descriptor block, with this field set
+       to zero.
+
+Data Block
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+In general, the data blocks being written to disk through the journal
+are written verbatim into the journal file after the descriptor block.
+However, if the first four bytes of the block match the jbd2 magic
+number then those four bytes are replaced with zeroes and the “escaped”
+flag is set in the descriptor block tag.
+
+Revocation Block
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A revocation block is used to prevent replay of a block in an earlier
+transaction. This is used to mark blocks that were journalled at one
+time but are no longer journalled. Typically this happens if a metadata
+block is freed and re-allocated as a file data block; in this case, a
+journal replay after the file block was written to disk will cause
+corruption.
+
+**NOTE**: This mechanism is NOT used to express “this journal block is
+superseded by this other journal block”, as the author (djwong)
+mistakenly thought. Any block being added to a transaction will cause
+the removal of all existing revocation records for that block.
+
+Revocation blocks are described in
+``struct jbd2_journal_revoke_header_s``, are at least 16 bytes in
+length, but use a full block:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - journal_header_t
+     - r_header
+     - Common block header.
+   * - 0xC
+     - __be32
+     - r_count
+     - Number of bytes used in this block.
+   * - 0x10
+     - __be32 or __be64
+     - blocks[0]
+     - Blocks to revoke.
+
+After r_count is a linear array of block numbers that are effectively
+revoked by this transaction. The size of each block number is 8 bytes if
+the superblock advertises 64-bit block number support, or 4 bytes
+otherwise.
+
+If JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V2 or
+JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V3 are set, the end of the revocation
+block is a ``struct jbd2_journal_revoke_tail``, which has this format:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __be32
+     - r_checksum
+     - Checksum of the journal UUID + revocation block
+
+Commit Block
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The commit block is a sentry that indicates that a transaction has been
+completely written to the journal. Once this commit block reaches the
+journal, the data stored with this transaction can be written to their
+final locations on disk.
+
+The commit block is described by ``struct commit_header``, which is 32
+bytes long (but uses a full block):
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Descriptor
+   * - 0x0
+     - journal_header_s
+     - (open coded)
+     - Common block header.
+   * - 0xC
+     - unsigned char
+     - h_chksum_type
+     - The type of checksum to use to verify the integrity of the data blocks
+       in the transaction. See jbd2_checksum_type_ for more info.
+   * - 0xD
+     - unsigned char
+     - h_chksum_size
+     - The number of bytes used by the checksum. Most likely 4.
+   * - 0xE
+     - unsigned char
+     - h_padding[2]
+     -
+   * - 0x10
+     - __be32
+     - h_chksum[JBD2_CHECKSUM_BYTES]
+     - 32 bytes of space to store checksums. If
+       JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V2 or JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_CSUM_V3
+       are set, the first ``__be32`` is the checksum of the journal UUID and
+       the entire commit block, with this field zeroed. If
+       JBD2_FEATURE_COMPAT_CHECKSUM is set, the first ``__be32`` is the
+       crc32 of all the blocks already written to the transaction.
+   * - 0x30
+     - __be64
+     - h_commit_sec
+     - The time that the transaction was committed, in seconds since the epoch.
+   * - 0x38
+     - __be32
+     - h_commit_nsec
+     - Nanoseconds component of the above timestamp.
+
+Fast commits
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Fast commit area is organized as a log of tag length values. Each TLV has
+a ``struct ext4_fc_tl`` in the beginning which stores the tag and the length
+of the entire field. It is followed by variable length tag specific value.
+Here is the list of supported tags and their meanings:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 20 20 32
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Tag
+     - Meaning
+     - Value struct
+     - Description
+   * - EXT4_FC_TAG_HEAD
+     - Fast commit area header
+     - ``struct ext4_fc_head``
+     - Stores the TID of the transaction after which these fast commits should
+       be applied.
+   * - EXT4_FC_TAG_ADD_RANGE
+     - Add extent to inode
+     - ``struct ext4_fc_add_range``
+     - Stores the inode number and extent to be added in this inode
+   * - EXT4_FC_TAG_DEL_RANGE
+     - Remove logical offsets to inode
+     - ``struct ext4_fc_del_range``
+     - Stores the inode number and the logical offset range that needs to be
+       removed
+   * - EXT4_FC_TAG_CREAT
+     - Create directory entry for a newly created file
+     - ``struct ext4_fc_dentry_info``
+     - Stores the parent inode number, inode number and directory entry of the
+       newly created file
+   * - EXT4_FC_TAG_LINK
+     - Link a directory entry to an inode
+     - ``struct ext4_fc_dentry_info``
+     - Stores the parent inode number, inode number and directory entry
+   * - EXT4_FC_TAG_UNLINK
+     - Unlink a directory entry of an inode
+     - ``struct ext4_fc_dentry_info``
+     - Stores the parent inode number, inode number and directory entry
+
+   * - EXT4_FC_TAG_PAD
+     - Padding (unused area)
+     - None
+     - Unused bytes in the fast commit area.
+
+   * - EXT4_FC_TAG_TAIL
+     - Mark the end of a fast commit
+     - ``struct ext4_fc_tail``
+     - Stores the TID of the commit, CRC of the fast commit of which this tag
+       represents the end of
+
+Fast Commit Replay Idempotence
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Fast commits tags are idempotent in nature provided the recovery code follows
+certain rules. The guiding principle that the commit path follows while
+committing is that it stores the result of a particular operation instead of
+storing the procedure.
+
+Let's consider this rename operation: 'mv /a /b'. Let's assume dirent '/a'
+was associated with inode 10. During fast commit, instead of storing this
+operation as a procedure "rename a to b", we store the resulting file system
+state as a "series" of outcomes:
+
+- Link dirent b to inode 10
+- Unlink dirent a
+- Inode 10 with valid refcount
+
+Now when recovery code runs, it needs "enforce" this state on the file
+system. This is what guarantees idempotence of fast commit replay.
+
+Let's take an example of a procedure that is not idempotent and see how fast
+commits make it idempotent. Consider following sequence of operations:
+
+1) rm A
+2) mv B A
+3) read A
+
+If we store this sequence of operations as is then the replay is not idempotent.
+Let's say while in replay, we crash after (2). During the second replay,
+file A (which was actually created as a result of "mv B A" operation) would get
+deleted. Thus, file named A would be absent when we try to read A. So, this
+sequence of operations is not idempotent. However, as mentioned above, instead
+of storing the procedure fast commits store the outcome of each procedure. Thus
+the fast commit log for above procedure would be as follows:
+
+(Let's assume dirent A was linked to inode 10 and dirent B was linked to
+inode 11 before the replay)
+
+1) Unlink A
+2) Link A to inode 11
+3) Unlink B
+4) Inode 11
+
+If we crash after (3) we will have file A linked to inode 11. During the second
+replay, we will remove file A (inode 11). But we will create it back and make
+it point to inode 11. We won't find B, so we'll just skip that step. At this
+point, the refcount for inode 11 is not reliable, but that gets fixed by the
+replay of last inode 11 tag. Thus, by converting a non-idempotent procedure
+into a series of idempotent outcomes, fast commits ensured idempotence during
+the replay.
+
+Journal Checkpoint
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Checkpointing the journal ensures all transactions and their associated buffers
+are submitted to the disk. In-progress transactions are waited upon and included
+in the checkpoint. Checkpointing is used internally during critical updates to
+the filesystem including journal recovery, filesystem resizing, and freeing of
+the journal_t structure.
+
+A journal checkpoint can be triggered from userspace via the ioctl
+EXT4_IOC_CHECKPOINT. This ioctl takes a single, u64 argument for flags.
+Currently, three flags are supported. First, EXT4_IOC_CHECKPOINT_FLAG_DRY_RUN
+can be used to verify input to the ioctl. It returns error if there is any
+invalid input, otherwise it returns success without performing
+any checkpointing. This can be used to check whether the ioctl exists on a
+system and to verify there are no issues with arguments or flags. The
+other two flags are EXT4_IOC_CHECKPOINT_FLAG_DISCARD and
+EXT4_IOC_CHECKPOINT_FLAG_ZEROOUT. These flags cause the journal blocks to be
+discarded or zero-filled, respectively, after the journal checkpoint is
+complete. EXT4_IOC_CHECKPOINT_FLAG_DISCARD and EXT4_IOC_CHECKPOINT_FLAG_ZEROOUT
+cannot both be set. The ioctl may be useful when snapshotting a system or for
+complying with content deletion SLOs.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/mmp.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/mmp.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..174dd6538
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/mmp.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Multiple Mount Protection
+-------------------------
+
+Multiple mount protection (MMP) is a feature that protects the
+filesystem against multiple hosts trying to use the filesystem
+simultaneously. When a filesystem is opened (for mounting, or fsck,
+etc.), the MMP code running on the node (call it node A) checks a
+sequence number. If the sequence number is EXT4_MMP_SEQ_CLEAN, the
+open continues. If the sequence number is EXT4_MMP_SEQ_FSCK, then
+fsck is (hopefully) running, and open fails immediately. Otherwise, the
+open code will wait for twice the specified MMP check interval and check
+the sequence number again. If the sequence number has changed, then the
+filesystem is active on another machine and the open fails. If the MMP
+code passes all of those checks, a new MMP sequence number is generated
+and written to the MMP block, and the mount proceeds.
+
+While the filesystem is live, the kernel sets up a timer to re-check the
+MMP block at the specified MMP check interval. To perform the re-check,
+the MMP sequence number is re-read; if it does not match the in-memory
+MMP sequence number, then another node (node B) has mounted the
+filesystem, and node A remounts the filesystem read-only. If the
+sequence numbers match, the sequence number is incremented both in
+memory and on disk, and the re-check is complete.
+
+The hostname and device filename are written into the MMP block whenever
+an open operation succeeds. The MMP code does not use these values; they
+are provided purely for informational purposes.
+
+The checksum is calculated against the FS UUID and the MMP structure.
+The MMP structure (``struct mmp_struct``) is as follows:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 12 20 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Type
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - mmp_magic
+     - Magic number for MMP, 0x004D4D50 (“MMP”).
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - mmp_seq
+     - Sequence number, updated periodically.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le64
+     - mmp_time
+     - Time that the MMP block was last updated.
+   * - 0x10
+     - char[64]
+     - mmp_nodename
+     - Hostname of the node that opened the filesystem.
+   * - 0x50
+     - char[32]
+     - mmp_bdevname
+     - Block device name of the filesystem.
+   * - 0x70
+     - __le16
+     - mmp_check_interval
+     - The MMP re-check interval, in seconds.
+   * - 0x72
+     - __le16
+     - mmp_pad1
+     - Zero.
+   * - 0x74
+     - __le32[226]
+     - mmp_pad2
+     - Zero.
+   * - 0x3FC
+     - __le32
+     - mmp_checksum
+     - Checksum of the MMP block.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/orphan.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/orphan.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..03cca1788
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/orphan.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Orphan file
+-----------
+
+In unix there can inodes that are unlinked from directory hierarchy but that
+are still alive because they are open. In case of crash the filesystem has to
+clean up these inodes as otherwise they (and the blocks referenced from them)
+would leak. Similarly if we truncate or extend the file, we need not be able
+to perform the operation in a single journalling transaction. In such case we
+track the inode as orphan so that in case of crash extra blocks allocated to
+the file get truncated.
+
+Traditionally ext4 tracks orphan inodes in a form of single linked list where
+superblock contains the inode number of the last orphan inode (s_last_orphan
+field) and then each inode contains inode number of the previously orphaned
+inode (we overload i_dtime inode field for this). However this filesystem
+global single linked list is a scalability bottleneck for workloads that result
+in heavy creation of orphan inodes. When orphan file feature
+(COMPAT_ORPHAN_FILE) is enabled, the filesystem has a special inode
+(referenced from the superblock through s_orphan_file_inum) with several
+blocks. Each of these blocks has a structure:
+
+============= ================ =============== ===============================
+Offset        Type             Name            Description
+============= ================ =============== ===============================
+0x0           Array of         Orphan inode    Each __le32 entry is either
+              __le32 entries   entries         empty (0) or it contains
+	                                       inode number of an orphan
+					       inode.
+blocksize-8   __le32           ob_magic        Magic value stored in orphan
+                                               block tail (0x0b10ca04)
+blocksize-4   __le32           ob_checksum     Checksum of the orphan block.
+============= ================ =============== ===============================
+
+When a filesystem with orphan file feature is writeably mounted, we set
+RO_COMPAT_ORPHAN_PRESENT feature in the superblock to indicate there may
+be valid orphan entries. In case we see this feature when mounting the
+filesystem, we read the whole orphan file and process all orphan inodes found
+there as usual. When cleanly unmounting the filesystem we remove the
+RO_COMPAT_ORPHAN_PRESENT feature to avoid unnecessary scanning of the orphan
+file and also make the filesystem fully compatible with older kernels.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/overview.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/overview.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0fad6eda6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/overview.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+High Level Design
+=================
+
+An ext4 file system is split into a series of block groups. To reduce
+performance difficulties due to fragmentation, the block allocator tries
+very hard to keep each file's blocks within the same group, thereby
+reducing seek times. The size of a block group is specified in
+``sb.s_blocks_per_group`` blocks, though it can also calculated as 8 *
+``block_size_in_bytes``. With the default block size of 4KiB, each group
+will contain 32,768 blocks, for a length of 128MiB. The number of block
+groups is the size of the device divided by the size of a block group.
+
+All fields in ext4 are written to disk in little-endian order. HOWEVER,
+all fields in jbd2 (the journal) are written to disk in big-endian
+order.
+
+.. include:: blocks.rst
+.. include:: blockgroup.rst
+.. include:: special_inodes.rst
+.. include:: allocators.rst
+.. include:: checksums.rst
+.. include:: bigalloc.rst
+.. include:: inlinedata.rst
+.. include:: eainode.rst
+.. include:: verity.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/special_inodes.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/special_inodes.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fc0636901
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/special_inodes.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Special inodes
+--------------
+
+ext4 reserves some inode for special features, as follows:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 6 70
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - inode Number
+     - Purpose
+   * - 0
+     - Doesn't exist; there is no inode 0.
+   * - 1
+     - List of defective blocks.
+   * - 2
+     - Root directory.
+   * - 3
+     - User quota.
+   * - 4
+     - Group quota.
+   * - 5
+     - Boot loader.
+   * - 6
+     - Undelete directory.
+   * - 7
+     - Reserved group descriptors inode. (“resize inode”)
+   * - 8
+     - Journal inode.
+   * - 9
+     - The “exclude” inode, for snapshots(?)
+   * - 10
+     - Replica inode, used for some non-upstream feature?
+   * - 11
+     - Traditional first non-reserved inode. Usually this is the lost+found directory. See s_first_ino in the superblock.
+
+Note that there are also some inodes allocated from non-reserved inode numbers
+for other filesystem features which are not referenced from standard directory
+hierarchy. These are generally reference from the superblock. They are:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 20 50
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Superblock field
+     - Description
+
+   * - s_lpf_ino
+     - Inode number of lost+found directory.
+   * - s_prj_quota_inum
+     - Inode number of quota file tracking project quotas
+   * - s_orphan_file_inum
+     - Inode number of file tracking orphan inodes.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/super.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/super.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0152888ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/super.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,831 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Super Block
+-----------
+
+The superblock records various information about the enclosing
+filesystem, such as block counts, inode counts, supported features,
+maintenance information, and more.
+
+If the sparse_super feature flag is set, redundant copies of the
+superblock and group descriptors are kept only in the groups whose group
+number is either 0 or a power of 3, 5, or 7. If the flag is not set,
+redundant copies are kept in all groups.
+
+The superblock checksum is calculated against the superblock structure,
+which includes the FS UUID.
+
+The ext4 superblock is laid out as follows in
+``struct ext4_super_block``:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 8 24 40
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Offset
+     - Size
+     - Name
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - __le32
+     - s_inodes_count
+     - Total inode count.
+   * - 0x4
+     - __le32
+     - s_blocks_count_lo
+     - Total block count.
+   * - 0x8
+     - __le32
+     - s_r_blocks_count_lo
+     - This number of blocks can only be allocated by the super-user.
+   * - 0xC
+     - __le32
+     - s_free_blocks_count_lo
+     - Free block count.
+   * - 0x10
+     - __le32
+     - s_free_inodes_count
+     - Free inode count.
+   * - 0x14
+     - __le32
+     - s_first_data_block
+     - First data block. This must be at least 1 for 1k-block filesystems and
+       is typically 0 for all other block sizes.
+   * - 0x18
+     - __le32
+     - s_log_block_size
+     - Block size is 2 ^ (10 + s_log_block_size).
+   * - 0x1C
+     - __le32
+     - s_log_cluster_size
+     - Cluster size is 2 ^ (10 + s_log_cluster_size) blocks if bigalloc is
+       enabled. Otherwise s_log_cluster_size must equal s_log_block_size.
+   * - 0x20
+     - __le32
+     - s_blocks_per_group
+     - Blocks per group.
+   * - 0x24
+     - __le32
+     - s_clusters_per_group
+     - Clusters per group, if bigalloc is enabled. Otherwise
+       s_clusters_per_group must equal s_blocks_per_group.
+   * - 0x28
+     - __le32
+     - s_inodes_per_group
+     - Inodes per group.
+   * - 0x2C
+     - __le32
+     - s_mtime
+     - Mount time, in seconds since the epoch.
+   * - 0x30
+     - __le32
+     - s_wtime
+     - Write time, in seconds since the epoch.
+   * - 0x34
+     - __le16
+     - s_mnt_count
+     - Number of mounts since the last fsck.
+   * - 0x36
+     - __le16
+     - s_max_mnt_count
+     - Number of mounts beyond which a fsck is needed.
+   * - 0x38
+     - __le16
+     - s_magic
+     - Magic signature, 0xEF53
+   * - 0x3A
+     - __le16
+     - s_state
+     - File system state. See super_state_ for more info.
+   * - 0x3C
+     - __le16
+     - s_errors
+     - Behaviour when detecting errors. See super_errors_ for more info.
+   * - 0x3E
+     - __le16
+     - s_minor_rev_level
+     - Minor revision level.
+   * - 0x40
+     - __le32
+     - s_lastcheck
+     - Time of last check, in seconds since the epoch.
+   * - 0x44
+     - __le32
+     - s_checkinterval
+     - Maximum time between checks, in seconds.
+   * - 0x48
+     - __le32
+     - s_creator_os
+     - Creator OS. See the table super_creator_ for more info.
+   * - 0x4C
+     - __le32
+     - s_rev_level
+     - Revision level. See the table super_revision_ for more info.
+   * - 0x50
+     - __le16
+     - s_def_resuid
+     - Default uid for reserved blocks.
+   * - 0x52
+     - __le16
+     - s_def_resgid
+     - Default gid for reserved blocks.
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - These fields are for EXT4_DYNAMIC_REV superblocks only.
+       
+       Note: the difference between the compatible feature set and the
+       incompatible feature set is that if there is a bit set in the
+       incompatible feature set that the kernel doesn't know about, it should
+       refuse to mount the filesystem.
+       
+       e2fsck's requirements are more strict; if it doesn't know
+       about a feature in either the compatible or incompatible feature set, it
+       must abort and not try to meddle with things it doesn't understand...
+   * - 0x54
+     - __le32
+     - s_first_ino
+     - First non-reserved inode.
+   * - 0x58
+     - __le16
+     - s_inode_size
+     - Size of inode structure, in bytes.
+   * - 0x5A
+     - __le16
+     - s_block_group_nr
+     - Block group # of this superblock.
+   * - 0x5C
+     - __le32
+     - s_feature_compat
+     - Compatible feature set flags. Kernel can still read/write this fs even
+       if it doesn't understand a flag; fsck should not do that. See the
+       super_compat_ table for more info.
+   * - 0x60
+     - __le32
+     - s_feature_incompat
+     - Incompatible feature set. If the kernel or fsck doesn't understand one
+       of these bits, it should stop. See the super_incompat_ table for more
+       info.
+   * - 0x64
+     - __le32
+     - s_feature_ro_compat
+     - Readonly-compatible feature set. If the kernel doesn't understand one of
+       these bits, it can still mount read-only. See the super_rocompat_ table
+       for more info.
+   * - 0x68
+     - __u8
+     - s_uuid[16]
+     - 128-bit UUID for volume.
+   * - 0x78
+     - char
+     - s_volume_name[16]
+     - Volume label.
+   * - 0x88
+     - char
+     - s_last_mounted[64]
+     - Directory where filesystem was last mounted.
+   * - 0xC8
+     - __le32
+     - s_algorithm_usage_bitmap
+     - For compression (Not used in e2fsprogs/Linux)
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - Performance hints.  Directory preallocation should only happen if the
+       EXT4_FEATURE_COMPAT_DIR_PREALLOC flag is on.
+   * - 0xCC
+     - __u8
+     - s_prealloc_blocks
+     - #. of blocks to try to preallocate for ... files? (Not used in
+       e2fsprogs/Linux)
+   * - 0xCD
+     - __u8
+     - s_prealloc_dir_blocks
+     - #. of blocks to preallocate for directories. (Not used in
+       e2fsprogs/Linux)
+   * - 0xCE
+     - __le16
+     - s_reserved_gdt_blocks
+     - Number of reserved GDT entries for future filesystem expansion.
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - Journalling support is valid only if EXT4_FEATURE_COMPAT_HAS_JOURNAL is
+       set.
+   * - 0xD0
+     - __u8
+     - s_journal_uuid[16]
+     - UUID of journal superblock
+   * - 0xE0
+     - __le32
+     - s_journal_inum
+     - inode number of journal file.
+   * - 0xE4
+     - __le32
+     - s_journal_dev
+     - Device number of journal file, if the external journal feature flag is
+       set.
+   * - 0xE8
+     - __le32
+     - s_last_orphan
+     - Start of list of orphaned inodes to delete.
+   * - 0xEC
+     - __le32
+     - s_hash_seed[4]
+     - HTREE hash seed.
+   * - 0xFC
+     - __u8
+     - s_def_hash_version
+     - Default hash algorithm to use for directory hashes. See super_def_hash_
+       for more info.
+   * - 0xFD
+     - __u8
+     - s_jnl_backup_type
+     - If this value is 0 or EXT3_JNL_BACKUP_BLOCKS (1), then the
+       ``s_jnl_blocks`` field contains a duplicate copy of the inode's
+       ``i_block[]`` array and ``i_size``.
+   * - 0xFE
+     - __le16
+     - s_desc_size
+     - Size of group descriptors, in bytes, if the 64bit incompat feature flag
+       is set.
+   * - 0x100
+     - __le32
+     - s_default_mount_opts
+     - Default mount options. See the super_mountopts_ table for more info.
+   * - 0x104
+     - __le32
+     - s_first_meta_bg
+     - First metablock block group, if the meta_bg feature is enabled.
+   * - 0x108
+     - __le32
+     - s_mkfs_time
+     - When the filesystem was created, in seconds since the epoch.
+   * - 0x10C
+     - __le32
+     - s_jnl_blocks[17]
+     - Backup copy of the journal inode's ``i_block[]`` array in the first 15
+       elements and i_size_high and i_size in the 16th and 17th elements,
+       respectively.
+   * -
+     -
+     -
+     - 64bit support is valid only if EXT4_FEATURE_COMPAT_64BIT is set.
+   * - 0x150
+     - __le32
+     - s_blocks_count_hi
+     - High 32-bits of the block count.
+   * - 0x154
+     - __le32
+     - s_r_blocks_count_hi
+     - High 32-bits of the reserved block count.
+   * - 0x158
+     - __le32
+     - s_free_blocks_count_hi
+     - High 32-bits of the free block count.
+   * - 0x15C
+     - __le16
+     - s_min_extra_isize
+     - All inodes have at least # bytes.
+   * - 0x15E
+     - __le16
+     - s_want_extra_isize
+     - New inodes should reserve # bytes.
+   * - 0x160
+     - __le32
+     - s_flags
+     - Miscellaneous flags. See the super_flags_ table for more info.
+   * - 0x164
+     - __le16
+     - s_raid_stride
+     - RAID stride. This is the number of logical blocks read from or written
+       to the disk before moving to the next disk. This affects the placement
+       of filesystem metadata, which will hopefully make RAID storage faster.
+   * - 0x166
+     - __le16
+     - s_mmp_interval
+     - #. seconds to wait in multi-mount prevention (MMP) checking. In theory,
+       MMP is a mechanism to record in the superblock which host and device
+       have mounted the filesystem, in order to prevent multiple mounts. This
+       feature does not seem to be implemented...
+   * - 0x168
+     - __le64
+     - s_mmp_block
+     - Block # for multi-mount protection data.
+   * - 0x170
+     - __le32
+     - s_raid_stripe_width
+     - RAID stripe width. This is the number of logical blocks read from or
+       written to the disk before coming back to the current disk. This is used
+       by the block allocator to try to reduce the number of read-modify-write
+       operations in a RAID5/6.
+   * - 0x174
+     - __u8
+     - s_log_groups_per_flex
+     - Size of a flexible block group is 2 ^ ``s_log_groups_per_flex``.
+   * - 0x175
+     - __u8
+     - s_checksum_type
+     - Metadata checksum algorithm type. The only valid value is 1 (crc32c).
+   * - 0x176
+     - __le16
+     - s_reserved_pad
+     -
+   * - 0x178
+     - __le64
+     - s_kbytes_written
+     - Number of KiB written to this filesystem over its lifetime.
+   * - 0x180
+     - __le32
+     - s_snapshot_inum
+     - inode number of active snapshot. (Not used in e2fsprogs/Linux.)
+   * - 0x184
+     - __le32
+     - s_snapshot_id
+     - Sequential ID of active snapshot. (Not used in e2fsprogs/Linux.)
+   * - 0x188
+     - __le64
+     - s_snapshot_r_blocks_count
+     - Number of blocks reserved for active snapshot's future use. (Not used in
+       e2fsprogs/Linux.)
+   * - 0x190
+     - __le32
+     - s_snapshot_list
+     - inode number of the head of the on-disk snapshot list. (Not used in
+       e2fsprogs/Linux.)
+   * - 0x194
+     - __le32
+     - s_error_count
+     - Number of errors seen.
+   * - 0x198
+     - __le32
+     - s_first_error_time
+     - First time an error happened, in seconds since the epoch.
+   * - 0x19C
+     - __le32
+     - s_first_error_ino
+     - inode involved in first error.
+   * - 0x1A0
+     - __le64
+     - s_first_error_block
+     - Number of block involved of first error.
+   * - 0x1A8
+     - __u8
+     - s_first_error_func[32]
+     - Name of function where the error happened.
+   * - 0x1C8
+     - __le32
+     - s_first_error_line
+     - Line number where error happened.
+   * - 0x1CC
+     - __le32
+     - s_last_error_time
+     - Time of most recent error, in seconds since the epoch.
+   * - 0x1D0
+     - __le32
+     - s_last_error_ino
+     - inode involved in most recent error.
+   * - 0x1D4
+     - __le32
+     - s_last_error_line
+     - Line number where most recent error happened.
+   * - 0x1D8
+     - __le64
+     - s_last_error_block
+     - Number of block involved in most recent error.
+   * - 0x1E0
+     - __u8
+     - s_last_error_func[32]
+     - Name of function where the most recent error happened.
+   * - 0x200
+     - __u8
+     - s_mount_opts[64]
+     - ASCIIZ string of mount options.
+   * - 0x240
+     - __le32
+     - s_usr_quota_inum
+     - Inode number of user `quota <quota>`__ file.
+   * - 0x244
+     - __le32
+     - s_grp_quota_inum
+     - Inode number of group `quota <quota>`__ file.
+   * - 0x248
+     - __le32
+     - s_overhead_blocks
+     - Overhead blocks/clusters in fs. (Huh? This field is always zero, which
+       means that the kernel calculates it dynamically.)
+   * - 0x24C
+     - __le32
+     - s_backup_bgs[2]
+     - Block groups containing superblock backups (if sparse_super2)
+   * - 0x254
+     - __u8
+     - s_encrypt_algos[4]
+     - Encryption algorithms in use. There can be up to four algorithms in use
+       at any time; valid algorithm codes are given in the super_encrypt_ table
+       below.
+   * - 0x258
+     - __u8
+     - s_encrypt_pw_salt[16]
+     - Salt for the string2key algorithm for encryption.
+   * - 0x268
+     - __le32
+     - s_lpf_ino
+     - Inode number of lost+found
+   * - 0x26C
+     - __le32
+     - s_prj_quota_inum
+     - Inode that tracks project quotas.
+   * - 0x270
+     - __le32
+     - s_checksum_seed
+     - Checksum seed used for metadata_csum calculations. This value is
+       crc32c(~0, $orig_fs_uuid).
+   * - 0x274
+     - __u8
+     - s_wtime_hi
+     - Upper 8 bits of the s_wtime field.
+   * - 0x275
+     - __u8
+     - s_mtime_hi
+     - Upper 8 bits of the s_mtime field.
+   * - 0x276
+     - __u8
+     - s_mkfs_time_hi
+     - Upper 8 bits of the s_mkfs_time field.
+   * - 0x277
+     - __u8
+     - s_lastcheck_hi
+     - Upper 8 bits of the s_lastcheck field.
+   * - 0x278
+     - __u8
+     - s_first_error_time_hi
+     - Upper 8 bits of the s_first_error_time field.
+   * - 0x279
+     - __u8
+     - s_last_error_time_hi
+     - Upper 8 bits of the s_last_error_time field.
+   * - 0x27A
+     - __u8
+     - s_pad[2]
+     - Zero padding.
+   * - 0x27C
+     - __le16
+     - s_encoding
+     - Filename charset encoding.
+   * - 0x27E
+     - __le16
+     - s_encoding_flags
+     - Filename charset encoding flags.
+   * - 0x280
+     - __le32
+     - s_orphan_file_inum
+     - Orphan file inode number.
+   * - 0x284
+     - __le32
+     - s_reserved[94]
+     - Padding to the end of the block.
+   * - 0x3FC
+     - __le32
+     - s_checksum
+     - Superblock checksum.
+
+.. _super_state:
+
+The superblock state is some combination of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 72
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0001
+     - Cleanly umounted
+   * - 0x0002
+     - Errors detected
+   * - 0x0004
+     - Orphans being recovered
+
+.. _super_errors:
+
+The superblock error policy is one of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 72
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 1
+     - Continue
+   * - 2
+     - Remount read-only
+   * - 3
+     - Panic
+
+.. _super_creator:
+
+The filesystem creator is one of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 72
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0
+     - Linux
+   * - 1
+     - Hurd
+   * - 2
+     - Masix
+   * - 3
+     - FreeBSD
+   * - 4
+     - Lites
+
+.. _super_revision:
+
+The superblock revision is one of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 72
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0
+     - Original format
+   * - 1
+     - v2 format w/ dynamic inode sizes
+
+Note that ``EXT4_DYNAMIC_REV`` refers to a revision 1 or newer filesystem.
+
+.. _super_compat:
+
+The superblock compatible features field is a combination of any of the
+following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x1
+     - Directory preallocation (COMPAT_DIR_PREALLOC).
+   * - 0x2
+     - “imagic inodes”. Not clear from the code what this does
+       (COMPAT_IMAGIC_INODES).
+   * - 0x4
+     - Has a journal (COMPAT_HAS_JOURNAL).
+   * - 0x8
+     - Supports extended attributes (COMPAT_EXT_ATTR).
+   * - 0x10
+     - Has reserved GDT blocks for filesystem expansion
+       (COMPAT_RESIZE_INODE). Requires RO_COMPAT_SPARSE_SUPER.
+   * - 0x20
+     - Has directory indices (COMPAT_DIR_INDEX).
+   * - 0x40
+     - “Lazy BG”. Not in Linux kernel, seems to have been for uninitialized
+       block groups? (COMPAT_LAZY_BG)
+   * - 0x80
+     - “Exclude inode”. Not used. (COMPAT_EXCLUDE_INODE).
+   * - 0x100
+     - “Exclude bitmap”. Seems to be used to indicate the presence of
+       snapshot-related exclude bitmaps? Not defined in kernel or used in
+       e2fsprogs (COMPAT_EXCLUDE_BITMAP).
+   * - 0x200
+     - Sparse Super Block, v2. If this flag is set, the SB field s_backup_bgs
+       points to the two block groups that contain backup superblocks
+       (COMPAT_SPARSE_SUPER2).
+   * - 0x400
+     - Fast commits supported. Although fast commits blocks are
+       backward incompatible, fast commit blocks are not always
+       present in the journal. If fast commit blocks are present in
+       the journal, JBD2 incompat feature
+       (JBD2_FEATURE_INCOMPAT_FAST_COMMIT) gets
+       set (COMPAT_FAST_COMMIT).
+   * - 0x1000
+     - Orphan file allocated. This is the special file for more efficient
+       tracking of unlinked but still open inodes. When there may be any
+       entries in the file, we additionally set proper rocompat feature
+       (RO_COMPAT_ORPHAN_PRESENT).
+
+.. _super_incompat:
+
+The superblock incompatible features field is a combination of any of the
+following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x1
+     - Compression (INCOMPAT_COMPRESSION).
+   * - 0x2
+     - Directory entries record the file type. See ext4_dir_entry_2 below
+       (INCOMPAT_FILETYPE).
+   * - 0x4
+     - Filesystem needs recovery (INCOMPAT_RECOVER).
+   * - 0x8
+     - Filesystem has a separate journal device (INCOMPAT_JOURNAL_DEV).
+   * - 0x10
+     - Meta block groups. See the earlier discussion of this feature
+       (INCOMPAT_META_BG).
+   * - 0x40
+     - Files in this filesystem use extents (INCOMPAT_EXTENTS).
+   * - 0x80
+     - Enable a filesystem size of 2^64 blocks (INCOMPAT_64BIT).
+   * - 0x100
+     - Multiple mount protection (INCOMPAT_MMP).
+   * - 0x200
+     - Flexible block groups. See the earlier discussion of this feature
+       (INCOMPAT_FLEX_BG).
+   * - 0x400
+     - Inodes can be used to store large extended attribute values
+       (INCOMPAT_EA_INODE).
+   * - 0x1000
+     - Data in directory entry (INCOMPAT_DIRDATA). (Not implemented?)
+   * - 0x2000
+     - Metadata checksum seed is stored in the superblock. This feature enables
+       the administrator to change the UUID of a metadata_csum filesystem
+       while the filesystem is mounted; without it, the checksum definition
+       requires all metadata blocks to be rewritten (INCOMPAT_CSUM_SEED).
+   * - 0x4000
+     - Large directory >2GB or 3-level htree (INCOMPAT_LARGEDIR). Prior to
+       this feature, directories could not be larger than 4GiB and could not
+       have an htree more than 2 levels deep. If this feature is enabled,
+       directories can be larger than 4GiB and have a maximum htree depth of 3.
+   * - 0x8000
+     - Data in inode (INCOMPAT_INLINE_DATA).
+   * - 0x10000
+     - Encrypted inodes are present on the filesystem. (INCOMPAT_ENCRYPT).
+
+.. _super_rocompat:
+
+The superblock read-only compatible features field is a combination of any of
+the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 16 64
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x1
+     - Sparse superblocks. See the earlier discussion of this feature
+       (RO_COMPAT_SPARSE_SUPER).
+   * - 0x2
+     - This filesystem has been used to store a file greater than 2GiB
+       (RO_COMPAT_LARGE_FILE).
+   * - 0x4
+     - Not used in kernel or e2fsprogs (RO_COMPAT_BTREE_DIR).
+   * - 0x8
+     - This filesystem has files whose sizes are represented in units of
+       logical blocks, not 512-byte sectors. This implies a very large file
+       indeed! (RO_COMPAT_HUGE_FILE)
+   * - 0x10
+     - Group descriptors have checksums. In addition to detecting corruption,
+       this is useful for lazy formatting with uninitialized groups
+       (RO_COMPAT_GDT_CSUM).
+   * - 0x20
+     - Indicates that the old ext3 32,000 subdirectory limit no longer applies
+       (RO_COMPAT_DIR_NLINK). A directory's i_links_count will be set to 1
+       if it is incremented past 64,999.
+   * - 0x40
+     - Indicates that large inodes exist on this filesystem
+       (RO_COMPAT_EXTRA_ISIZE).
+   * - 0x80
+     - This filesystem has a snapshot (RO_COMPAT_HAS_SNAPSHOT).
+   * - 0x100
+     - `Quota <Quota>`__ (RO_COMPAT_QUOTA).
+   * - 0x200
+     - This filesystem supports “bigalloc”, which means that file extents are
+       tracked in units of clusters (of blocks) instead of blocks
+       (RO_COMPAT_BIGALLOC).
+   * - 0x400
+     - This filesystem supports metadata checksumming.
+       (RO_COMPAT_METADATA_CSUM; implies RO_COMPAT_GDT_CSUM, though
+       GDT_CSUM must not be set)
+   * - 0x800
+     - Filesystem supports replicas. This feature is neither in the kernel nor
+       e2fsprogs. (RO_COMPAT_REPLICA)
+   * - 0x1000
+     - Read-only filesystem image; the kernel will not mount this image
+       read-write and most tools will refuse to write to the image.
+       (RO_COMPAT_READONLY)
+   * - 0x2000
+     - Filesystem tracks project quotas. (RO_COMPAT_PROJECT)
+   * - 0x8000
+     - Verity inodes may be present on the filesystem. (RO_COMPAT_VERITY)
+   * - 0x10000
+     - Indicates orphan file may have valid orphan entries and thus we need
+       to clean them up when mounting the filesystem
+       (RO_COMPAT_ORPHAN_PRESENT).
+
+.. _super_def_hash:
+
+The ``s_def_hash_version`` field is one of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 72
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0
+     - Legacy.
+   * - 0x1
+     - Half MD4.
+   * - 0x2
+     - Tea.
+   * - 0x3
+     - Legacy, unsigned.
+   * - 0x4
+     - Half MD4, unsigned.
+   * - 0x5
+     - Tea, unsigned.
+
+.. _super_mountopts:
+
+The ``s_default_mount_opts`` field is any combination of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 72
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0001
+     - Print debugging info upon (re)mount. (EXT4_DEFM_DEBUG)
+   * - 0x0002
+     - New files take the gid of the containing directory (instead of the fsgid
+       of the current process). (EXT4_DEFM_BSDGROUPS)
+   * - 0x0004
+     - Support userspace-provided extended attributes. (EXT4_DEFM_XATTR_USER)
+   * - 0x0008
+     - Support POSIX access control lists (ACLs). (EXT4_DEFM_ACL)
+   * - 0x0010
+     - Do not support 32-bit UIDs. (EXT4_DEFM_UID16)
+   * - 0x0020
+     - All data and metadata are commited to the journal.
+       (EXT4_DEFM_JMODE_DATA)
+   * - 0x0040
+     - All data are flushed to the disk before metadata are committed to the
+       journal. (EXT4_DEFM_JMODE_ORDERED)
+   * - 0x0060
+     - Data ordering is not preserved; data may be written after the metadata
+       has been written. (EXT4_DEFM_JMODE_WBACK)
+   * - 0x0100
+     - Disable write flushes. (EXT4_DEFM_NOBARRIER)
+   * - 0x0200
+     - Track which blocks in a filesystem are metadata and therefore should not
+       be used as data blocks. This option will be enabled by default on 3.18,
+       hopefully. (EXT4_DEFM_BLOCK_VALIDITY)
+   * - 0x0400
+     - Enable DISCARD support, where the storage device is told about blocks
+       becoming unused. (EXT4_DEFM_DISCARD)
+   * - 0x0800
+     - Disable delayed allocation. (EXT4_DEFM_NODELALLOC)
+
+.. _super_flags:
+
+The ``s_flags`` field is any combination of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 72
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0x0001
+     - Signed directory hash in use.
+   * - 0x0002
+     - Unsigned directory hash in use.
+   * - 0x0004
+     - To test development code.
+
+.. _super_encrypt:
+
+The ``s_encrypt_algos`` list can contain any of the following:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 8 72
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * - Value
+     - Description
+   * - 0
+     - Invalid algorithm (ENCRYPTION_MODE_INVALID).
+   * - 1
+     - 256-bit AES in XTS mode (ENCRYPTION_MODE_AES_256_XTS).
+   * - 2
+     - 256-bit AES in GCM mode (ENCRYPTION_MODE_AES_256_GCM).
+   * - 3
+     - 256-bit AES in CBC mode (ENCRYPTION_MODE_AES_256_CBC).
+
+Total size of the superblock is 1024 bytes.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/verity.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/verity.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e99ff3fd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/verity.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Verity files
+------------
+
+ext4 supports fs-verity, which is a filesystem feature that provides
+Merkle tree based hashing for individual readonly files.  Most of
+fs-verity is common to all filesystems that support it; see
+:ref:`Documentation/filesystems/fsverity.rst <fsverity>` for the
+fs-verity documentation.  However, the on-disk layout of the verity
+metadata is filesystem-specific.  On ext4, the verity metadata is
+stored after the end of the file data itself, in the following format:
+
+- Zero-padding to the next 65536-byte boundary.  This padding need not
+  actually be allocated on-disk, i.e. it may be a hole.
+
+- The Merkle tree, as documented in
+  :ref:`Documentation/filesystems/fsverity.rst
+  <fsverity_merkle_tree>`, with the tree levels stored in order from
+  root to leaf, and the tree blocks within each level stored in their
+  natural order.
+
+- Zero-padding to the next filesystem block boundary.
+
+- The verity descriptor, as documented in
+  :ref:`Documentation/filesystems/fsverity.rst <fsverity_descriptor>`,
+  with optionally appended signature blob.
+
+- Zero-padding to the next offset that is 4 bytes before a filesystem
+  block boundary.
+
+- The size of the verity descriptor in bytes, as a 4-byte little
+  endian integer.
+
+Verity inodes have EXT4_VERITY_FL set, and they must use extents, i.e.
+EXT4_EXTENTS_FL must be set and EXT4_INLINE_DATA_FL must be clear.
+They can have EXT4_ENCRYPT_FL set, in which case the verity metadata
+is encrypted as well as the data itself.
+
+Verity files cannot have blocks allocated past the end of the verity
+metadata.
+
+Verity and DAX are not compatible and attempts to set both of these flags
+on a file will fail.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..17df9a02c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,891 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==========================================
+WHAT IS Flash-Friendly File System (F2FS)?
+==========================================
+
+NAND flash memory-based storage devices, such as SSD, eMMC, and SD cards, have
+been equipped on a variety systems ranging from mobile to server systems. Since
+they are known to have different characteristics from the conventional rotating
+disks, a file system, an upper layer to the storage device, should adapt to the
+changes from the sketch in the design level.
+
+F2FS is a file system exploiting NAND flash memory-based storage devices, which
+is based on Log-structured File System (LFS). The design has been focused on
+addressing the fundamental issues in LFS, which are snowball effect of wandering
+tree and high cleaning overhead.
+
+Since a NAND flash memory-based storage device shows different characteristic
+according to its internal geometry or flash memory management scheme, namely FTL,
+F2FS and its tools support various parameters not only for configuring on-disk
+layout, but also for selecting allocation and cleaning algorithms.
+
+The following git tree provides the file system formatting tool (mkfs.f2fs),
+a consistency checking tool (fsck.f2fs), and a debugging tool (dump.f2fs).
+
+- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jaegeuk/f2fs-tools.git
+
+For reporting bugs and sending patches, please use the following mailing list:
+
+- linux-f2fs-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
+
+Background and Design issues
+============================
+
+Log-structured File System (LFS)
+--------------------------------
+"A log-structured file system writes all modifications to disk sequentially in
+a log-like structure, thereby speeding up  both file writing and crash recovery.
+The log is the only structure on disk; it contains indexing information so that
+files can be read back from the log efficiently. In order to maintain large free
+areas on disk for fast writing, we divide  the log into segments and use a
+segment cleaner to compress the live information from heavily fragmented
+segments." from Rosenblum, M. and Ousterhout, J. K., 1992, "The design and
+implementation of a log-structured file system", ACM Trans. Computer Systems
+10, 1, 26–52.
+
+Wandering Tree Problem
+----------------------
+In LFS, when a file data is updated and written to the end of log, its direct
+pointer block is updated due to the changed location. Then the indirect pointer
+block is also updated due to the direct pointer block update. In this manner,
+the upper index structures such as inode, inode map, and checkpoint block are
+also updated recursively. This problem is called as wandering tree problem [1],
+and in order to enhance the performance, it should eliminate or relax the update
+propagation as much as possible.
+
+[1] Bityutskiy, A. 2005. JFFS3 design issues. http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/
+
+Cleaning Overhead
+-----------------
+Since LFS is based on out-of-place writes, it produces so many obsolete blocks
+scattered across the whole storage. In order to serve new empty log space, it
+needs to reclaim these obsolete blocks seamlessly to users. This job is called
+as a cleaning process.
+
+The process consists of three operations as follows.
+
+1. A victim segment is selected through referencing segment usage table.
+2. It loads parent index structures of all the data in the victim identified by
+   segment summary blocks.
+3. It checks the cross-reference between the data and its parent index structure.
+4. It moves valid data selectively.
+
+This cleaning job may cause unexpected long delays, so the most important goal
+is to hide the latencies to users. And also definitely, it should reduce the
+amount of valid data to be moved, and move them quickly as well.
+
+Key Features
+============
+
+Flash Awareness
+---------------
+- Enlarge the random write area for better performance, but provide the high
+  spatial locality
+- Align FS data structures to the operational units in FTL as best efforts
+
+Wandering Tree Problem
+----------------------
+- Use a term, “node”, that represents inodes as well as various pointer blocks
+- Introduce Node Address Table (NAT) containing the locations of all the “node”
+  blocks; this will cut off the update propagation.
+
+Cleaning Overhead
+-----------------
+- Support a background cleaning process
+- Support greedy and cost-benefit algorithms for victim selection policies
+- Support multi-head logs for static/dynamic hot and cold data separation
+- Introduce adaptive logging for efficient block allocation
+
+Mount Options
+=============
+
+
+======================== ============================================================
+background_gc=%s	 Turn on/off cleaning operations, namely garbage
+			 collection, triggered in background when I/O subsystem is
+			 idle. If background_gc=on, it will turn on the garbage
+			 collection and if background_gc=off, garbage collection
+			 will be turned off. If background_gc=sync, it will turn
+			 on synchronous garbage collection running in background.
+			 Default value for this option is on. So garbage
+			 collection is on by default.
+gc_merge		 When background_gc is on, this option can be enabled to
+			 let background GC thread to handle foreground GC requests,
+			 it can eliminate the sluggish issue caused by slow foreground
+			 GC operation when GC is triggered from a process with limited
+			 I/O and CPU resources.
+nogc_merge		 Disable GC merge feature.
+disable_roll_forward	 Disable the roll-forward recovery routine
+norecovery		 Disable the roll-forward recovery routine, mounted read-
+			 only (i.e., -o ro,disable_roll_forward)
+discard/nodiscard	 Enable/disable real-time discard in f2fs, if discard is
+			 enabled, f2fs will issue discard/TRIM commands when a
+			 segment is cleaned.
+no_heap			 Disable heap-style segment allocation which finds free
+			 segments for data from the beginning of main area, while
+			 for node from the end of main area.
+nouser_xattr		 Disable Extended User Attributes. Note: xattr is enabled
+			 by default if CONFIG_F2FS_FS_XATTR is selected.
+noacl			 Disable POSIX Access Control List. Note: acl is enabled
+			 by default if CONFIG_F2FS_FS_POSIX_ACL is selected.
+active_logs=%u		 Support configuring the number of active logs. In the
+			 current design, f2fs supports only 2, 4, and 6 logs.
+			 Default number is 6.
+disable_ext_identify	 Disable the extension list configured by mkfs, so f2fs
+			 is not aware of cold files such as media files.
+inline_xattr		 Enable the inline xattrs feature.
+noinline_xattr		 Disable the inline xattrs feature.
+inline_xattr_size=%u	 Support configuring inline xattr size, it depends on
+			 flexible inline xattr feature.
+inline_data		 Enable the inline data feature: Newly created small (<~3.4k)
+			 files can be written into inode block.
+inline_dentry		 Enable the inline dir feature: data in newly created
+			 directory entries can be written into inode block. The
+			 space of inode block which is used to store inline
+			 dentries is limited to ~3.4k.
+noinline_dentry		 Disable the inline dentry feature.
+flush_merge		 Merge concurrent cache_flush commands as much as possible
+			 to eliminate redundant command issues. If the underlying
+			 device handles the cache_flush command relatively slowly,
+			 recommend to enable this option.
+nobarrier		 This option can be used if underlying storage guarantees
+			 its cached data should be written to the novolatile area.
+			 If this option is set, no cache_flush commands are issued
+			 but f2fs still guarantees the write ordering of all the
+			 data writes.
+fastboot		 This option is used when a system wants to reduce mount
+			 time as much as possible, even though normal performance
+			 can be sacrificed.
+extent_cache		 Enable an extent cache based on rb-tree, it can cache
+			 as many as extent which map between contiguous logical
+			 address and physical address per inode, resulting in
+			 increasing the cache hit ratio. Set by default.
+noextent_cache		 Disable an extent cache based on rb-tree explicitly, see
+			 the above extent_cache mount option.
+noinline_data		 Disable the inline data feature, inline data feature is
+			 enabled by default.
+data_flush		 Enable data flushing before checkpoint in order to
+			 persist data of regular and symlink.
+reserve_root=%d		 Support configuring reserved space which is used for
+			 allocation from a privileged user with specified uid or
+			 gid, unit: 4KB, the default limit is 0.2% of user blocks.
+resuid=%d		 The user ID which may use the reserved blocks.
+resgid=%d		 The group ID which may use the reserved blocks.
+fault_injection=%d	 Enable fault injection in all supported types with
+			 specified injection rate.
+fault_type=%d		 Support configuring fault injection type, should be
+			 enabled with fault_injection option, fault type value
+			 is shown below, it supports single or combined type.
+
+			 ===================	  ===========
+			 Type_Name		  Type_Value
+			 ===================	  ===========
+			 FAULT_KMALLOC		  0x000000001
+			 FAULT_KVMALLOC		  0x000000002
+			 FAULT_PAGE_ALLOC	  0x000000004
+			 FAULT_PAGE_GET		  0x000000008
+			 FAULT_ALLOC_BIO	  0x000000010 (obsolete)
+			 FAULT_ALLOC_NID	  0x000000020
+			 FAULT_ORPHAN		  0x000000040
+			 FAULT_BLOCK		  0x000000080
+			 FAULT_DIR_DEPTH	  0x000000100
+			 FAULT_EVICT_INODE	  0x000000200
+			 FAULT_TRUNCATE		  0x000000400
+			 FAULT_READ_IO		  0x000000800
+			 FAULT_CHECKPOINT	  0x000001000
+			 FAULT_DISCARD		  0x000002000
+			 FAULT_WRITE_IO		  0x000004000
+			 FAULT_SLAB_ALLOC	  0x000008000
+			 FAULT_DQUOT_INIT	  0x000010000
+			 FAULT_LOCK_OP		  0x000020000
+			 ===================	  ===========
+mode=%s			 Control block allocation mode which supports "adaptive"
+			 and "lfs". In "lfs" mode, there should be no random
+			 writes towards main area.
+			 "fragment:segment" and "fragment:block" are newly added here.
+			 These are developer options for experiments to simulate filesystem
+			 fragmentation/after-GC situation itself. The developers use these
+			 modes to understand filesystem fragmentation/after-GC condition well,
+			 and eventually get some insights to handle them better.
+			 In "fragment:segment", f2fs allocates a new segment in ramdom
+			 position. With this, we can simulate the after-GC condition.
+			 In "fragment:block", we can scatter block allocation with
+			 "max_fragment_chunk" and "max_fragment_hole" sysfs nodes.
+			 We added some randomness to both chunk and hole size to make
+			 it close to realistic IO pattern. So, in this mode, f2fs will allocate
+			 1..<max_fragment_chunk> blocks in a chunk and make a hole in the
+			 length of 1..<max_fragment_hole> by turns. With this, the newly
+			 allocated blocks will be scattered throughout the whole partition.
+			 Note that "fragment:block" implicitly enables "fragment:segment"
+			 option for more randomness.
+			 Please, use these options for your experiments and we strongly
+			 recommend to re-format the filesystem after using these options.
+io_bits=%u		 Set the bit size of write IO requests. It should be set
+			 with "mode=lfs".
+usrquota		 Enable plain user disk quota accounting.
+grpquota		 Enable plain group disk quota accounting.
+prjquota		 Enable plain project quota accounting.
+usrjquota=<file>	 Appoint specified file and type during mount, so that quota
+grpjquota=<file>	 information can be properly updated during recovery flow,
+prjjquota=<file>	 <quota file>: must be in root directory;
+jqfmt=<quota type>	 <quota type>: [vfsold,vfsv0,vfsv1].
+offusrjquota		 Turn off user journalled quota.
+offgrpjquota		 Turn off group journalled quota.
+offprjjquota		 Turn off project journalled quota.
+quota			 Enable plain user disk quota accounting.
+noquota			 Disable all plain disk quota option.
+alloc_mode=%s		 Adjust block allocation policy, which supports "reuse"
+			 and "default".
+fsync_mode=%s		 Control the policy of fsync. Currently supports "posix",
+			 "strict", and "nobarrier". In "posix" mode, which is
+			 default, fsync will follow POSIX semantics and does a
+			 light operation to improve the filesystem performance.
+			 In "strict" mode, fsync will be heavy and behaves in line
+			 with xfs, ext4 and btrfs, where xfstest generic/342 will
+			 pass, but the performance will regress. "nobarrier" is
+			 based on "posix", but doesn't issue flush command for
+			 non-atomic files likewise "nobarrier" mount option.
+test_dummy_encryption
+test_dummy_encryption=%s
+			 Enable dummy encryption, which provides a fake fscrypt
+			 context. The fake fscrypt context is used by xfstests.
+			 The argument may be either "v1" or "v2", in order to
+			 select the corresponding fscrypt policy version.
+checkpoint=%s[:%u[%]]	 Set to "disable" to turn off checkpointing. Set to "enable"
+			 to reenable checkpointing. Is enabled by default. While
+			 disabled, any unmounting or unexpected shutdowns will cause
+			 the filesystem contents to appear as they did when the
+			 filesystem was mounted with that option.
+			 While mounting with checkpoint=disabled, the filesystem must
+			 run garbage collection to ensure that all available space can
+			 be used. If this takes too much time, the mount may return
+			 EAGAIN. You may optionally add a value to indicate how much
+			 of the disk you would be willing to temporarily give up to
+			 avoid additional garbage collection. This can be given as a
+			 number of blocks, or as a percent. For instance, mounting
+			 with checkpoint=disable:100% would always succeed, but it may
+			 hide up to all remaining free space. The actual space that
+			 would be unusable can be viewed at /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/unusable
+			 This space is reclaimed once checkpoint=enable.
+checkpoint_merge	 When checkpoint is enabled, this can be used to create a kernel
+			 daemon and make it to merge concurrent checkpoint requests as
+			 much as possible to eliminate redundant checkpoint issues. Plus,
+			 we can eliminate the sluggish issue caused by slow checkpoint
+			 operation when the checkpoint is done in a process context in
+			 a cgroup having low i/o budget and cpu shares. To make this
+			 do better, we set the default i/o priority of the kernel daemon
+			 to "3", to give one higher priority than other kernel threads.
+			 This is the same way to give a I/O priority to the jbd2
+			 journaling thread of ext4 filesystem.
+nocheckpoint_merge	 Disable checkpoint merge feature.
+compress_algorithm=%s	 Control compress algorithm, currently f2fs supports "lzo",
+			 "lz4", "zstd" and "lzo-rle" algorithm.
+compress_algorithm=%s:%d Control compress algorithm and its compress level, now, only
+			 "lz4" and "zstd" support compress level config.
+			 algorithm	level range
+			 lz4		3 - 16
+			 zstd		1 - 22
+compress_log_size=%u	 Support configuring compress cluster size. The size will
+			 be 4KB * (1 << %u). The default and minimum sizes are 16KB.
+compress_extension=%s	 Support adding specified extension, so that f2fs can enable
+			 compression on those corresponding files, e.g. if all files
+			 with '.ext' has high compression rate, we can set the '.ext'
+			 on compression extension list and enable compression on
+			 these file by default rather than to enable it via ioctl.
+			 For other files, we can still enable compression via ioctl.
+			 Note that, there is one reserved special extension '*', it
+			 can be set to enable compression for all files.
+nocompress_extension=%s	 Support adding specified extension, so that f2fs can disable
+			 compression on those corresponding files, just contrary to compression extension.
+			 If you know exactly which files cannot be compressed, you can use this.
+			 The same extension name can't appear in both compress and nocompress
+			 extension at the same time.
+			 If the compress extension specifies all files, the types specified by the
+			 nocompress extension will be treated as special cases and will not be compressed.
+			 Don't allow use '*' to specifie all file in nocompress extension.
+			 After add nocompress_extension, the priority should be:
+			 dir_flag < comp_extention,nocompress_extension < comp_file_flag,no_comp_file_flag.
+			 See more in compression sections.
+
+compress_chksum		 Support verifying chksum of raw data in compressed cluster.
+compress_mode=%s	 Control file compression mode. This supports "fs" and "user"
+			 modes. In "fs" mode (default), f2fs does automatic compression
+			 on the compression enabled files. In "user" mode, f2fs disables
+			 the automaic compression and gives the user discretion of
+			 choosing the target file and the timing. The user can do manual
+			 compression/decompression on the compression enabled files using
+			 ioctls.
+compress_cache		 Support to use address space of a filesystem managed inode to
+			 cache compressed block, in order to improve cache hit ratio of
+			 random read.
+inlinecrypt		 When possible, encrypt/decrypt the contents of encrypted
+			 files using the blk-crypto framework rather than
+			 filesystem-layer encryption. This allows the use of
+			 inline encryption hardware. The on-disk format is
+			 unaffected. For more details, see
+			 Documentation/block/inline-encryption.rst.
+atgc			 Enable age-threshold garbage collection, it provides high
+			 effectiveness and efficiency on background GC.
+discard_unit=%s		 Control discard unit, the argument can be "block", "segment"
+			 and "section", issued discard command's offset/size will be
+			 aligned to the unit, by default, "discard_unit=block" is set,
+			 so that small discard functionality is enabled.
+			 For blkzoned device, "discard_unit=section" will be set by
+			 default, it is helpful for large sized SMR or ZNS devices to
+			 reduce memory cost by getting rid of fs metadata supports small
+			 discard.
+memory=%s		 Control memory mode. This supports "normal" and "low" modes.
+			 "low" mode is introduced to support low memory devices.
+			 Because of the nature of low memory devices, in this mode, f2fs
+			 will try to save memory sometimes by sacrificing performance.
+			 "normal" mode is the default mode and same as before.
+======================== ============================================================
+
+Debugfs Entries
+===============
+
+/sys/kernel/debug/f2fs/ contains information about all the partitions mounted as
+f2fs. Each file shows the whole f2fs information.
+
+/sys/kernel/debug/f2fs/status includes:
+
+ - major file system information managed by f2fs currently
+ - average SIT information about whole segments
+ - current memory footprint consumed by f2fs.
+
+Sysfs Entries
+=============
+
+Information about mounted f2fs file systems can be found in
+/sys/fs/f2fs.  Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in
+/sys/fs/f2fs based on its device name (i.e., /sys/fs/f2fs/sda).
+The files in each per-device directory are shown in table below.
+
+Files in /sys/fs/f2fs/<devname>
+(see also Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs)
+
+Usage
+=====
+
+1. Download userland tools and compile them.
+
+2. Skip, if f2fs was compiled statically inside kernel.
+   Otherwise, insert the f2fs.ko module::
+
+	# insmod f2fs.ko
+
+3. Create a directory to use when mounting::
+
+	# mkdir /mnt/f2fs
+
+4. Format the block device, and then mount as f2fs::
+
+	# mkfs.f2fs -l label /dev/block_device
+	# mount -t f2fs /dev/block_device /mnt/f2fs
+
+mkfs.f2fs
+---------
+The mkfs.f2fs is for the use of formatting a partition as the f2fs filesystem,
+which builds a basic on-disk layout.
+
+The quick options consist of:
+
+===============    ===========================================================
+``-l [label]``     Give a volume label, up to 512 unicode name.
+``-a [0 or 1]``    Split start location of each area for heap-based allocation.
+
+                   1 is set by default, which performs this.
+``-o [int]``       Set overprovision ratio in percent over volume size.
+
+                   5 is set by default.
+``-s [int]``       Set the number of segments per section.
+
+                   1 is set by default.
+``-z [int]``       Set the number of sections per zone.
+
+                   1 is set by default.
+``-e [str]``       Set basic extension list. e.g. "mp3,gif,mov"
+``-t [0 or 1]``    Disable discard command or not.
+
+                   1 is set by default, which conducts discard.
+===============    ===========================================================
+
+Note: please refer to the manpage of mkfs.f2fs(8) to get full option list.
+
+fsck.f2fs
+---------
+The fsck.f2fs is a tool to check the consistency of an f2fs-formatted
+partition, which examines whether the filesystem metadata and user-made data
+are cross-referenced correctly or not.
+Note that, initial version of the tool does not fix any inconsistency.
+
+The quick options consist of::
+
+  -d debug level [default:0]
+
+Note: please refer to the manpage of fsck.f2fs(8) to get full option list.
+
+dump.f2fs
+---------
+The dump.f2fs shows the information of specific inode and dumps SSA and SIT to
+file. Each file is dump_ssa and dump_sit.
+
+The dump.f2fs is used to debug on-disk data structures of the f2fs filesystem.
+It shows on-disk inode information recognized by a given inode number, and is
+able to dump all the SSA and SIT entries into predefined files, ./dump_ssa and
+./dump_sit respectively.
+
+The options consist of::
+
+  -d debug level [default:0]
+  -i inode no (hex)
+  -s [SIT dump segno from #1~#2 (decimal), for all 0~-1]
+  -a [SSA dump segno from #1~#2 (decimal), for all 0~-1]
+
+Examples::
+
+    # dump.f2fs -i [ino] /dev/sdx
+    # dump.f2fs -s 0~-1 /dev/sdx (SIT dump)
+    # dump.f2fs -a 0~-1 /dev/sdx (SSA dump)
+
+Note: please refer to the manpage of dump.f2fs(8) to get full option list.
+
+sload.f2fs
+----------
+The sload.f2fs gives a way to insert files and directories in the exisiting disk
+image. This tool is useful when building f2fs images given compiled files.
+
+Note: please refer to the manpage of sload.f2fs(8) to get full option list.
+
+resize.f2fs
+-----------
+The resize.f2fs lets a user resize the f2fs-formatted disk image, while preserving
+all the files and directories stored in the image.
+
+Note: please refer to the manpage of resize.f2fs(8) to get full option list.
+
+defrag.f2fs
+-----------
+The defrag.f2fs can be used to defragment scattered written data as well as
+filesystem metadata across the disk. This can improve the write speed by giving
+more free consecutive space.
+
+Note: please refer to the manpage of defrag.f2fs(8) to get full option list.
+
+f2fs_io
+-------
+The f2fs_io is a simple tool to issue various filesystem APIs as well as
+f2fs-specific ones, which is very useful for QA tests.
+
+Note: please refer to the manpage of f2fs_io(8) to get full option list.
+
+Design
+======
+
+On-disk Layout
+--------------
+
+F2FS divides the whole volume into a number of segments, each of which is fixed
+to 2MB in size. A section is composed of consecutive segments, and a zone
+consists of a set of sections. By default, section and zone sizes are set to one
+segment size identically, but users can easily modify the sizes by mkfs.
+
+F2FS splits the entire volume into six areas, and all the areas except superblock
+consist of multiple segments as described below::
+
+                                            align with the zone size <-|
+                 |-> align with the segment size
+     _________________________________________________________________________
+    |            |            |   Segment   |    Node     |   Segment  |      |
+    | Superblock | Checkpoint |    Info.    |   Address   |   Summary  | Main |
+    |    (SB)    |   (CP)     | Table (SIT) | Table (NAT) | Area (SSA) |      |
+    |____________|_____2______|______N______|______N______|______N_____|__N___|
+                                                                       .      .
+                                                             .                .
+                                                 .                            .
+                                    ._________________________________________.
+                                    |_Segment_|_..._|_Segment_|_..._|_Segment_|
+                                    .           .
+                                    ._________._________
+                                    |_section_|__...__|_
+                                    .            .
+		                    .________.
+	                            |__zone__|
+
+- Superblock (SB)
+   It is located at the beginning of the partition, and there exist two copies
+   to avoid file system crash. It contains basic partition information and some
+   default parameters of f2fs.
+
+- Checkpoint (CP)
+   It contains file system information, bitmaps for valid NAT/SIT sets, orphan
+   inode lists, and summary entries of current active segments.
+
+- Segment Information Table (SIT)
+   It contains segment information such as valid block count and bitmap for the
+   validity of all the blocks.
+
+- Node Address Table (NAT)
+   It is composed of a block address table for all the node blocks stored in
+   Main area.
+
+- Segment Summary Area (SSA)
+   It contains summary entries which contains the owner information of all the
+   data and node blocks stored in Main area.
+
+- Main Area
+   It contains file and directory data including their indices.
+
+In order to avoid misalignment between file system and flash-based storage, F2FS
+aligns the start block address of CP with the segment size. Also, it aligns the
+start block address of Main area with the zone size by reserving some segments
+in SSA area.
+
+Reference the following survey for additional technical details.
+https://wiki.linaro.org/WorkingGroups/Kernel/Projects/FlashCardSurvey
+
+File System Metadata Structure
+------------------------------
+
+F2FS adopts the checkpointing scheme to maintain file system consistency. At
+mount time, F2FS first tries to find the last valid checkpoint data by scanning
+CP area. In order to reduce the scanning time, F2FS uses only two copies of CP.
+One of them always indicates the last valid data, which is called as shadow copy
+mechanism. In addition to CP, NAT and SIT also adopt the shadow copy mechanism.
+
+For file system consistency, each CP points to which NAT and SIT copies are
+valid, as shown as below::
+
+  +--------+----------+---------+
+  |   CP   |    SIT   |   NAT   |
+  +--------+----------+---------+
+  .         .          .          .
+  .            .              .              .
+  .               .                 .                 .
+  +-------+-------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+  | CP #0 | CP #1 | SIT #0 | SIT #1 | NAT #0 | NAT #1 |
+  +-------+-------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+     |             ^                          ^
+     |             |                          |
+     `----------------------------------------'
+
+Index Structure
+---------------
+
+The key data structure to manage the data locations is a "node". Similar to
+traditional file structures, F2FS has three types of node: inode, direct node,
+indirect node. F2FS assigns 4KB to an inode block which contains 923 data block
+indices, two direct node pointers, two indirect node pointers, and one double
+indirect node pointer as described below. One direct node block contains 1018
+data blocks, and one indirect node block contains also 1018 node blocks. Thus,
+one inode block (i.e., a file) covers::
+
+  4KB * (923 + 2 * 1018 + 2 * 1018 * 1018 + 1018 * 1018 * 1018) := 3.94TB.
+
+   Inode block (4KB)
+     |- data (923)
+     |- direct node (2)
+     |          `- data (1018)
+     |- indirect node (2)
+     |            `- direct node (1018)
+     |                       `- data (1018)
+     `- double indirect node (1)
+                         `- indirect node (1018)
+			              `- direct node (1018)
+	                                         `- data (1018)
+
+Note that all the node blocks are mapped by NAT which means the location of
+each node is translated by the NAT table. In the consideration of the wandering
+tree problem, F2FS is able to cut off the propagation of node updates caused by
+leaf data writes.
+
+Directory Structure
+-------------------
+
+A directory entry occupies 11 bytes, which consists of the following attributes.
+
+- hash		hash value of the file name
+- ino		inode number
+- len		the length of file name
+- type		file type such as directory, symlink, etc
+
+A dentry block consists of 214 dentry slots and file names. Therein a bitmap is
+used to represent whether each dentry is valid or not. A dentry block occupies
+4KB with the following composition.
+
+::
+
+  Dentry Block(4 K) = bitmap (27 bytes) + reserved (3 bytes) +
+	              dentries(11 * 214 bytes) + file name (8 * 214 bytes)
+
+                         [Bucket]
+             +--------------------------------+
+             |dentry block 1 | dentry block 2 |
+             +--------------------------------+
+             .               .
+       .                             .
+  .       [Dentry Block Structure: 4KB]       .
+  +--------+----------+----------+------------+
+  | bitmap | reserved | dentries | file names |
+  +--------+----------+----------+------------+
+  [Dentry Block: 4KB] .   .
+		 .               .
+            .                          .
+            +------+------+-----+------+
+            | hash | ino  | len | type |
+            +------+------+-----+------+
+            [Dentry Structure: 11 bytes]
+
+F2FS implements multi-level hash tables for directory structure. Each level has
+a hash table with dedicated number of hash buckets as shown below. Note that
+"A(2B)" means a bucket includes 2 data blocks.
+
+::
+
+    ----------------------
+    A : bucket
+    B : block
+    N : MAX_DIR_HASH_DEPTH
+    ----------------------
+
+    level #0   | A(2B)
+	    |
+    level #1   | A(2B) - A(2B)
+	    |
+    level #2   | A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B)
+	.     |   .       .       .       .
+    level #N/2 | A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B) - A(2B) - ... - A(2B)
+	.     |   .       .       .       .
+    level #N   | A(4B) - A(4B) - A(4B) - A(4B) - A(4B) - ... - A(4B)
+
+The number of blocks and buckets are determined by::
+
+                            ,- 2, if n < MAX_DIR_HASH_DEPTH / 2,
+  # of blocks in level #n = |
+                            `- 4, Otherwise
+
+                             ,- 2^(n + dir_level),
+			     |        if n + dir_level < MAX_DIR_HASH_DEPTH / 2,
+  # of buckets in level #n = |
+                             `- 2^((MAX_DIR_HASH_DEPTH / 2) - 1),
+			              Otherwise
+
+When F2FS finds a file name in a directory, at first a hash value of the file
+name is calculated. Then, F2FS scans the hash table in level #0 to find the
+dentry consisting of the file name and its inode number. If not found, F2FS
+scans the next hash table in level #1. In this way, F2FS scans hash tables in
+each levels incrementally from 1 to N. In each level F2FS needs to scan only
+one bucket determined by the following equation, which shows O(log(# of files))
+complexity::
+
+  bucket number to scan in level #n = (hash value) % (# of buckets in level #n)
+
+In the case of file creation, F2FS finds empty consecutive slots that cover the
+file name. F2FS searches the empty slots in the hash tables of whole levels from
+1 to N in the same way as the lookup operation.
+
+The following figure shows an example of two cases holding children::
+
+       --------------> Dir <--------------
+       |                                 |
+    child                             child
+
+    child - child                     [hole] - child
+
+    child - child - child             [hole] - [hole] - child
+
+   Case 1:                           Case 2:
+   Number of children = 6,           Number of children = 3,
+   File size = 7                     File size = 7
+
+Default Block Allocation
+------------------------
+
+At runtime, F2FS manages six active logs inside "Main" area: Hot/Warm/Cold node
+and Hot/Warm/Cold data.
+
+- Hot node	contains direct node blocks of directories.
+- Warm node	contains direct node blocks except hot node blocks.
+- Cold node	contains indirect node blocks
+- Hot data	contains dentry blocks
+- Warm data	contains data blocks except hot and cold data blocks
+- Cold data	contains multimedia data or migrated data blocks
+
+LFS has two schemes for free space management: threaded log and copy-and-compac-
+tion. The copy-and-compaction scheme which is known as cleaning, is well-suited
+for devices showing very good sequential write performance, since free segments
+are served all the time for writing new data. However, it suffers from cleaning
+overhead under high utilization. Contrarily, the threaded log scheme suffers
+from random writes, but no cleaning process is needed. F2FS adopts a hybrid
+scheme where the copy-and-compaction scheme is adopted by default, but the
+policy is dynamically changed to the threaded log scheme according to the file
+system status.
+
+In order to align F2FS with underlying flash-based storage, F2FS allocates a
+segment in a unit of section. F2FS expects that the section size would be the
+same as the unit size of garbage collection in FTL. Furthermore, with respect
+to the mapping granularity in FTL, F2FS allocates each section of the active
+logs from different zones as much as possible, since FTL can write the data in
+the active logs into one allocation unit according to its mapping granularity.
+
+Cleaning process
+----------------
+
+F2FS does cleaning both on demand and in the background. On-demand cleaning is
+triggered when there are not enough free segments to serve VFS calls. Background
+cleaner is operated by a kernel thread, and triggers the cleaning job when the
+system is idle.
+
+F2FS supports two victim selection policies: greedy and cost-benefit algorithms.
+In the greedy algorithm, F2FS selects a victim segment having the smallest number
+of valid blocks. In the cost-benefit algorithm, F2FS selects a victim segment
+according to the segment age and the number of valid blocks in order to address
+log block thrashing problem in the greedy algorithm. F2FS adopts the greedy
+algorithm for on-demand cleaner, while background cleaner adopts cost-benefit
+algorithm.
+
+In order to identify whether the data in the victim segment are valid or not,
+F2FS manages a bitmap. Each bit represents the validity of a block, and the
+bitmap is composed of a bit stream covering whole blocks in main area.
+
+Fallocate(2) Policy
+-------------------
+
+The default policy follows the below POSIX rule.
+
+Allocating disk space
+    The default operation (i.e., mode is zero) of fallocate() allocates
+    the disk space within the range specified by offset and len.  The
+    file size (as reported by stat(2)) will be changed if offset+len is
+    greater than the file size.  Any subregion within the range specified
+    by offset and len that did not contain data before the call will be
+    initialized to zero.  This default behavior closely resembles the
+    behavior of the posix_fallocate(3) library function, and is intended
+    as a method of optimally implementing that function.
+
+However, once F2FS receives ioctl(fd, F2FS_IOC_SET_PIN_FILE) in prior to
+fallocate(fd, DEFAULT_MODE), it allocates on-disk block addressess having
+zero or random data, which is useful to the below scenario where:
+
+ 1. create(fd)
+ 2. ioctl(fd, F2FS_IOC_SET_PIN_FILE)
+ 3. fallocate(fd, 0, 0, size)
+ 4. address = fibmap(fd, offset)
+ 5. open(blkdev)
+ 6. write(blkdev, address)
+
+Compression implementation
+--------------------------
+
+- New term named cluster is defined as basic unit of compression, file can
+  be divided into multiple clusters logically. One cluster includes 4 << n
+  (n >= 0) logical pages, compression size is also cluster size, each of
+  cluster can be compressed or not.
+
+- In cluster metadata layout, one special block address is used to indicate
+  a cluster is a compressed one or normal one; for compressed cluster, following
+  metadata maps cluster to [1, 4 << n - 1] physical blocks, in where f2fs
+  stores data including compress header and compressed data.
+
+- In order to eliminate write amplification during overwrite, F2FS only
+  support compression on write-once file, data can be compressed only when
+  all logical blocks in cluster contain valid data and compress ratio of
+  cluster data is lower than specified threshold.
+
+- To enable compression on regular inode, there are four ways:
+
+  * chattr +c file
+  * chattr +c dir; touch dir/file
+  * mount w/ -o compress_extension=ext; touch file.ext
+  * mount w/ -o compress_extension=*; touch any_file
+
+- To disable compression on regular inode, there are two ways:
+
+  * chattr -c file
+  * mount w/ -o nocompress_extension=ext; touch file.ext
+
+- Priority in between FS_COMPR_FL, FS_NOCOMP_FS, extensions:
+
+  * compress_extension=so; nocompress_extension=zip; chattr +c dir; touch
+    dir/foo.so; touch dir/bar.zip; touch dir/baz.txt; then foo.so and baz.txt
+    should be compresse, bar.zip should be non-compressed. chattr +c dir/bar.zip
+    can enable compress on bar.zip.
+  * compress_extension=so; nocompress_extension=zip; chattr -c dir; touch
+    dir/foo.so; touch dir/bar.zip; touch dir/baz.txt; then foo.so should be
+    compresse, bar.zip and baz.txt should be non-compressed.
+    chattr+c dir/bar.zip; chattr+c dir/baz.txt; can enable compress on bar.zip
+    and baz.txt.
+
+- At this point, compression feature doesn't expose compressed space to user
+  directly in order to guarantee potential data updates later to the space.
+  Instead, the main goal is to reduce data writes to flash disk as much as
+  possible, resulting in extending disk life time as well as relaxing IO
+  congestion. Alternatively, we've added ioctl(F2FS_IOC_RELEASE_COMPRESS_BLOCKS)
+  interface to reclaim compressed space and show it to user after setting a
+  special flag to the inode. Once the compressed space is released, the flag
+  will block writing data to the file until either the compressed space is
+  reserved via ioctl(F2FS_IOC_RESERVE_COMPRESS_BLOCKS) or the file size is
+  truncated to zero.
+
+Compress metadata layout::
+
+				[Dnode Structure]
+		+-----------------------------------------------+
+		| cluster 1 | cluster 2 | ......... | cluster N |
+		+-----------------------------------------------+
+		.           .                       .           .
+	  .                      .                .                      .
+    .         Compressed Cluster       .        .        Normal Cluster            .
+    +----------+---------+---------+---------+  +---------+---------+---------+---------+
+    |compr flag| block 1 | block 2 | block 3 |  | block 1 | block 2 | block 3 | block 4 |
+    +----------+---------+---------+---------+  +---------+---------+---------+---------+
+	       .                             .
+	    .                                           .
+	.                                                           .
+	+-------------+-------------+----------+----------------------------+
+	| data length | data chksum | reserved |      compressed data       |
+	+-------------+-------------+----------+----------------------------+
+
+Compression mode
+--------------------------
+
+f2fs supports "fs" and "user" compression modes with "compression_mode" mount option.
+With this option, f2fs provides a choice to select the way how to compress the
+compression enabled files (refer to "Compression implementation" section for how to
+enable compression on a regular inode).
+
+1) compress_mode=fs
+This is the default option. f2fs does automatic compression in the writeback of the
+compression enabled files.
+
+2) compress_mode=user
+This disables the automatic compression and gives the user discretion of choosing the
+target file and the timing. The user can do manual compression/decompression on the
+compression enabled files using F2FS_IOC_DECOMPRESS_FILE and F2FS_IOC_COMPRESS_FILE
+ioctls like the below.
+
+To decompress a file,
+
+fd = open(filename, O_WRONLY, 0);
+ret = ioctl(fd, F2FS_IOC_DECOMPRESS_FILE);
+
+To compress a file,
+
+fd = open(filename, O_WRONLY, 0);
+ret = ioctl(fd, F2FS_IOC_COMPRESS_FILE);
+
+NVMe Zoned Namespace devices
+----------------------------
+
+- ZNS defines a per-zone capacity which can be equal or less than the
+  zone-size. Zone-capacity is the number of usable blocks in the zone.
+  F2FS checks if zone-capacity is less than zone-size, if it is, then any
+  segment which starts after the zone-capacity is marked as not-free in
+  the free segment bitmap at initial mount time. These segments are marked
+  as permanently used so they are not allocated for writes and
+  consequently are not needed to be garbage collected. In case the
+  zone-capacity is not aligned to default segment size(2MB), then a segment
+  can start before the zone-capacity and span across zone-capacity boundary.
+  Such spanning segments are also considered as usable segments. All blocks
+  past the zone-capacity are considered unusable in these segments.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..93fc96f76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============
+Fiemap Ioctl
+============
+
+The fiemap ioctl is an efficient method for userspace to get file
+extent mappings. Instead of block-by-block mapping (such as bmap), fiemap
+returns a list of extents.
+
+
+Request Basics
+--------------
+
+A fiemap request is encoded within struct fiemap::
+
+  struct fiemap {
+	__u64	fm_start;	 /* logical offset (inclusive) at
+				  * which to start mapping (in) */
+	__u64	fm_length;	 /* logical length of mapping which
+				  * userspace cares about (in) */
+	__u32	fm_flags;	 /* FIEMAP_FLAG_* flags for request (in/out) */
+	__u32	fm_mapped_extents; /* number of extents that were
+				    * mapped (out) */
+	__u32	fm_extent_count; /* size of fm_extents array (in) */
+	__u32	fm_reserved;
+	struct fiemap_extent fm_extents[0]; /* array of mapped extents (out) */
+  };
+
+
+fm_start, and fm_length specify the logical range within the file
+which the process would like mappings for. Extents returned mirror
+those on disk - that is, the logical offset of the 1st returned extent
+may start before fm_start, and the range covered by the last returned
+extent may end after fm_length. All offsets and lengths are in bytes.
+
+Certain flags to modify the way in which mappings are looked up can be
+set in fm_flags. If the kernel doesn't understand some particular
+flags, it will return EBADR and the contents of fm_flags will contain
+the set of flags which caused the error. If the kernel is compatible
+with all flags passed, the contents of fm_flags will be unmodified.
+It is up to userspace to determine whether rejection of a particular
+flag is fatal to its operation. This scheme is intended to allow the
+fiemap interface to grow in the future but without losing
+compatibility with old software.
+
+fm_extent_count specifies the number of elements in the fm_extents[] array
+that can be used to return extents.  If fm_extent_count is zero, then the
+fm_extents[] array is ignored (no extents will be returned), and the
+fm_mapped_extents count will hold the number of extents needed in
+fm_extents[] to hold the file's current mapping.  Note that there is
+nothing to prevent the file from changing between calls to FIEMAP.
+
+The following flags can be set in fm_flags:
+
+FIEMAP_FLAG_SYNC
+  If this flag is set, the kernel will sync the file before mapping extents.
+
+FIEMAP_FLAG_XATTR
+  If this flag is set, the extents returned will describe the inodes
+  extended attribute lookup tree, instead of its data tree.
+
+
+Extent Mapping
+--------------
+
+Extent information is returned within the embedded fm_extents array
+which userspace must allocate along with the fiemap structure. The
+number of elements in the fiemap_extents[] array should be passed via
+fm_extent_count. The number of extents mapped by kernel will be
+returned via fm_mapped_extents. If the number of fiemap_extents
+allocated is less than would be required to map the requested range,
+the maximum number of extents that can be mapped in the fm_extent[]
+array will be returned and fm_mapped_extents will be equal to
+fm_extent_count. In that case, the last extent in the array will not
+complete the requested range and will not have the FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST
+flag set (see the next section on extent flags).
+
+Each extent is described by a single fiemap_extent structure as
+returned in fm_extents::
+
+    struct fiemap_extent {
+	    __u64	fe_logical;  /* logical offset in bytes for the start of
+				* the extent */
+	    __u64	fe_physical; /* physical offset in bytes for the start
+				* of the extent */
+	    __u64	fe_length;   /* length in bytes for the extent */
+	    __u64	fe_reserved64[2];
+	    __u32	fe_flags;    /* FIEMAP_EXTENT_* flags for this extent */
+	    __u32	fe_reserved[3];
+    };
+
+All offsets and lengths are in bytes and mirror those on disk.  It is valid
+for an extents logical offset to start before the request or its logical
+length to extend past the request.  Unless FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED is
+returned, fe_logical, fe_physical, and fe_length will be aligned to the
+block size of the file system.  With the exception of extents flagged as
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED, adjacent extents will not be merged.
+
+The fe_flags field contains flags which describe the extent returned.
+A special flag, FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST is always set on the last extent in
+the file so that the process making fiemap calls can determine when no
+more extents are available, without having to call the ioctl again.
+
+Some flags are intentionally vague and will always be set in the
+presence of other more specific flags. This way a program looking for
+a general property does not have to know all existing and future flags
+which imply that property.
+
+For example, if FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE or FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL
+are set, FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED will also be set. A program looking
+for inline or tail-packed data can key on the specific flag. Software
+which simply cares not to try operating on non-aligned extents
+however, can just key on FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED, and not have to
+worry about all present and future flags which might imply unaligned
+data. Note that the opposite is not true - it would be valid for
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED to appear alone.
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_LAST
+  This is generally the last extent in the file. A mapping attempt past
+  this extent may return nothing. Some implementations set this flag to
+  indicate this extent is the last one in the range queried by the user
+  (via fiemap->fm_length).
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN
+  The location of this extent is currently unknown. This may indicate
+  the data is stored on an inaccessible volume or that no storage has
+  been allocated for the file yet.
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_DELALLOC
+  This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN.
+
+  Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, its
+  physical location has not been allocated yet.
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED
+  This extent does not consist of plain filesystem blocks but is
+  encoded (e.g. encrypted or compressed).  Reading the data in this
+  extent via I/O to the block device will have undefined results.
+
+Note that it is *always* undefined to try to update the data
+in-place by writing to the indicated location without the
+assistance of the filesystem, or to access the data using the
+information returned by the FIEMAP interface while the filesystem
+is mounted.  In other words, user applications may only read the
+extent data via I/O to the block device while the filesystem is
+unmounted, and then only if the FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED flag is
+clear; user applications must not try reading or writing to the
+filesystem via the block device under any other circumstances.
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_ENCRYPTED
+  This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED
+  The data in this extent has been encrypted by the file system.
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED
+  Extent offsets and length are not guaranteed to be block aligned.
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_INLINE
+  This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED
+  Data is located within a meta data block.
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_DATA_TAIL
+  This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED
+  Data is packed into a block with data from other files.
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNWRITTEN
+  Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but its data has not been
+  initialized.  This indicates the extent's data will be all zero if read
+  through the filesystem but the contents are undefined if read directly from
+  the device.
+
+FIEMAP_EXTENT_MERGED
+  This will be set when a file does not support extents, i.e., it uses a block
+  based addressing scheme.  Since returning an extent for each block back to
+  userspace would be highly inefficient, the kernel will try to merge most
+  adjacent blocks into 'extents'.
+
+
+VFS -> File System Implementation
+---------------------------------
+
+File systems wishing to support fiemap must implement a ->fiemap callback on
+their inode_operations structure. The fs ->fiemap call is responsible for
+defining its set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on
+each discovered extent::
+
+  struct inode_operations {
+       ...
+
+       int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start,
+                     u64 len);
+
+->fiemap is passed struct fiemap_extent_info which describes the
+fiemap request::
+
+  struct fiemap_extent_info {
+	unsigned int fi_flags;		/* Flags as passed from user */
+	unsigned int fi_extents_mapped;	/* Number of mapped extents */
+	unsigned int fi_extents_max;	/* Size of fiemap_extent array */
+	struct fiemap_extent *fi_extents_start;	/* Start of fiemap_extent array */
+  };
+
+It is intended that the file system should not need to access any of this
+structure directly. Filesystem handlers should be tolerant to signals and return
+EINTR once fatal signal received.
+
+
+Flag checking should be done at the beginning of the ->fiemap callback via the
+fiemap_prep() helper::
+
+  int fiemap_prep(struct inode *inode, struct fiemap_extent_info *fieinfo,
+		  u64 start, u64 *len, u32 supported_flags);
+
+The struct fieinfo should be passed in as received from ioctl_fiemap(). The
+set of fiemap flags which the fs understands should be passed via fs_flags. If
+fiemap_prep finds invalid user flags, it will place the bad values in
+fieinfo->fi_flags and return -EBADR. If the file system gets -EBADR, from
+fiemap_prep(), it should immediately exit, returning that error back to
+ioctl_fiemap().  Additionally the range is validate against the supported
+maximum file size.
+
+
+For each extent in the request range, the file system should call
+the helper function, fiemap_fill_next_extent()::
+
+  int fiemap_fill_next_extent(struct fiemap_extent_info *info, u64 logical,
+			      u64 phys, u64 len, u32 flags, u32 dev);
+
+fiemap_fill_next_extent() will use the passed values to populate the
+next free extent in the fm_extents array. 'General' extent flags will
+automatically be set from specific flags on behalf of the calling file
+system so that the userspace API is not broken.
+
+fiemap_fill_next_extent() returns 0 on success, and 1 when the
+user-supplied fm_extents array is full. If an error is encountered
+while copying the extent to user memory, -EFAULT will be returned.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/files.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/files.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bcf844599
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/files.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===================================
+File management in the Linux kernel
+===================================
+
+This document describes how locking for files (struct file)
+and file descriptor table (struct files) works.
+
+Up until 2.6.12, the file descriptor table has been protected
+with a lock (files->file_lock) and reference count (files->count).
+->file_lock protected accesses to all the file related fields
+of the table. ->count was used for sharing the file descriptor
+table between tasks cloned with CLONE_FILES flag. Typically
+this would be the case for posix threads. As with the common
+refcounting model in the kernel, the last task doing
+a put_files_struct() frees the file descriptor (fd) table.
+The files (struct file) themselves are protected using
+reference count (->f_count).
+
+In the new lock-free model of file descriptor management,
+the reference counting is similar, but the locking is
+based on RCU. The file descriptor table contains multiple
+elements - the fd sets (open_fds and close_on_exec, the
+array of file pointers, the sizes of the sets and the array
+etc.). In order for the updates to appear atomic to
+a lock-free reader, all the elements of the file descriptor
+table are in a separate structure - struct fdtable.
+files_struct contains a pointer to struct fdtable through
+which the actual fd table is accessed. Initially the
+fdtable is embedded in files_struct itself. On a subsequent
+expansion of fdtable, a new fdtable structure is allocated
+and files->fdtab points to the new structure. The fdtable
+structure is freed with RCU and lock-free readers either
+see the old fdtable or the new fdtable making the update
+appear atomic. Here are the locking rules for
+the fdtable structure -
+
+1. All references to the fdtable must be done through
+   the files_fdtable() macro::
+
+	struct fdtable *fdt;
+
+	rcu_read_lock();
+
+	fdt = files_fdtable(files);
+	....
+	if (n <= fdt->max_fds)
+		....
+	...
+	rcu_read_unlock();
+
+   files_fdtable() uses rcu_dereference() macro which takes care of
+   the memory barrier requirements for lock-free dereference.
+   The fdtable pointer must be read within the read-side
+   critical section.
+
+2. Reading of the fdtable as described above must be protected
+   by rcu_read_lock()/rcu_read_unlock().
+
+3. For any update to the fd table, files->file_lock must
+   be held.
+
+4. To look up the file structure given an fd, a reader
+   must use either lookup_fd_rcu() or files_lookup_fd_rcu() APIs. These
+   take care of barrier requirements due to lock-free lookup.
+
+   An example::
+
+	struct file *file;
+
+	rcu_read_lock();
+	file = lookup_fd_rcu(fd);
+	if (file) {
+		...
+	}
+	....
+	rcu_read_unlock();
+
+5. Handling of the file structures is special. Since the look-up
+   of the fd (fget()/fget_light()) are lock-free, it is possible
+   that look-up may race with the last put() operation on the
+   file structure. This is avoided using atomic_long_inc_not_zero()
+   on ->f_count::
+
+	rcu_read_lock();
+	file = files_lookup_fd_rcu(files, fd);
+	if (file) {
+		if (atomic_long_inc_not_zero(&file->f_count))
+			*fput_needed = 1;
+		else
+		/* Didn't get the reference, someone's freed */
+			file = NULL;
+	}
+	rcu_read_unlock();
+	....
+	return file;
+
+   atomic_long_inc_not_zero() detects if refcounts is already zero or
+   goes to zero during increment. If it does, we fail
+   fget()/fget_light().
+
+6. Since both fdtable and file structures can be looked up
+   lock-free, they must be installed using rcu_assign_pointer()
+   API. If they are looked up lock-free, rcu_dereference()
+   must be used. However it is advisable to use files_fdtable()
+   and lookup_fd_rcu()/files_lookup_fd_rcu() which take care of these issues.
+
+7. While updating, the fdtable pointer must be looked up while
+   holding files->file_lock. If ->file_lock is dropped, then
+   another thread expand the files thereby creating a new
+   fdtable and making the earlier fdtable pointer stale.
+
+   For example::
+
+	spin_lock(&files->file_lock);
+	fd = locate_fd(files, file, start);
+	if (fd >= 0) {
+		/* locate_fd() may have expanded fdtable, load the ptr */
+		fdt = files_fdtable(files);
+		__set_open_fd(fd, fdt);
+		__clear_close_on_exec(fd, fdt);
+		spin_unlock(&files->file_lock);
+	.....
+
+   Since locate_fd() can drop ->file_lock (and reacquire ->file_lock),
+   the fdtable pointer (fdt) must be loaded after locate_fd().
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5ba5817c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,1367 @@
+=====================================
+Filesystem-level encryption (fscrypt)
+=====================================
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+fscrypt is a library which filesystems can hook into to support
+transparent encryption of files and directories.
+
+Note: "fscrypt" in this document refers to the kernel-level portion,
+implemented in ``fs/crypto/``, as opposed to the userspace tool
+`fscrypt <https://github.com/google/fscrypt>`_.  This document only
+covers the kernel-level portion.  For command-line examples of how to
+use encryption, see the documentation for the userspace tool `fscrypt
+<https://github.com/google/fscrypt>`_.  Also, it is recommended to use
+the fscrypt userspace tool, or other existing userspace tools such as
+`fscryptctl <https://github.com/google/fscryptctl>`_ or `Android's key
+management system
+<https://source.android.com/security/encryption/file-based>`_, over
+using the kernel's API directly.  Using existing tools reduces the
+chance of introducing your own security bugs.  (Nevertheless, for
+completeness this documentation covers the kernel's API anyway.)
+
+Unlike dm-crypt, fscrypt operates at the filesystem level rather than
+at the block device level.  This allows it to encrypt different files
+with different keys and to have unencrypted files on the same
+filesystem.  This is useful for multi-user systems where each user's
+data-at-rest needs to be cryptographically isolated from the others.
+However, except for filenames, fscrypt does not encrypt filesystem
+metadata.
+
+Unlike eCryptfs, which is a stacked filesystem, fscrypt is integrated
+directly into supported filesystems --- currently ext4, F2FS, and
+UBIFS.  This allows encrypted files to be read and written without
+caching both the decrypted and encrypted pages in the pagecache,
+thereby nearly halving the memory used and bringing it in line with
+unencrypted files.  Similarly, half as many dentries and inodes are
+needed.  eCryptfs also limits encrypted filenames to 143 bytes,
+causing application compatibility issues; fscrypt allows the full 255
+bytes (NAME_MAX).  Finally, unlike eCryptfs, the fscrypt API can be
+used by unprivileged users, with no need to mount anything.
+
+fscrypt does not support encrypting files in-place.  Instead, it
+supports marking an empty directory as encrypted.  Then, after
+userspace provides the key, all regular files, directories, and
+symbolic links created in that directory tree are transparently
+encrypted.
+
+Threat model
+============
+
+Offline attacks
+---------------
+
+Provided that userspace chooses a strong encryption key, fscrypt
+protects the confidentiality of file contents and filenames in the
+event of a single point-in-time permanent offline compromise of the
+block device content.  fscrypt does not protect the confidentiality of
+non-filename metadata, e.g. file sizes, file permissions, file
+timestamps, and extended attributes.  Also, the existence and location
+of holes (unallocated blocks which logically contain all zeroes) in
+files is not protected.
+
+fscrypt is not guaranteed to protect confidentiality or authenticity
+if an attacker is able to manipulate the filesystem offline prior to
+an authorized user later accessing the filesystem.
+
+Online attacks
+--------------
+
+fscrypt (and storage encryption in general) can only provide limited
+protection, if any at all, against online attacks.  In detail:
+
+Side-channel attacks
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+fscrypt is only resistant to side-channel attacks, such as timing or
+electromagnetic attacks, to the extent that the underlying Linux
+Cryptographic API algorithms or inline encryption hardware are.  If a
+vulnerable algorithm is used, such as a table-based implementation of
+AES, it may be possible for an attacker to mount a side channel attack
+against the online system.  Side channel attacks may also be mounted
+against applications consuming decrypted data.
+
+Unauthorized file access
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+After an encryption key has been added, fscrypt does not hide the
+plaintext file contents or filenames from other users on the same
+system.  Instead, existing access control mechanisms such as file mode
+bits, POSIX ACLs, LSMs, or namespaces should be used for this purpose.
+
+(For the reasoning behind this, understand that while the key is
+added, the confidentiality of the data, from the perspective of the
+system itself, is *not* protected by the mathematical properties of
+encryption but rather only by the correctness of the kernel.
+Therefore, any encryption-specific access control checks would merely
+be enforced by kernel *code* and therefore would be largely redundant
+with the wide variety of access control mechanisms already available.)
+
+Kernel memory compromise
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+An attacker who compromises the system enough to read from arbitrary
+memory, e.g. by mounting a physical attack or by exploiting a kernel
+security vulnerability, can compromise all encryption keys that are
+currently in use.
+
+However, fscrypt allows encryption keys to be removed from the kernel,
+which may protect them from later compromise.
+
+In more detail, the FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY ioctl (or the
+FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY_ALL_USERS ioctl) can wipe a master
+encryption key from kernel memory.  If it does so, it will also try to
+evict all cached inodes which had been "unlocked" using the key,
+thereby wiping their per-file keys and making them once again appear
+"locked", i.e. in ciphertext or encrypted form.
+
+However, these ioctls have some limitations:
+
+- Per-file keys for in-use files will *not* be removed or wiped.
+  Therefore, for maximum effect, userspace should close the relevant
+  encrypted files and directories before removing a master key, as
+  well as kill any processes whose working directory is in an affected
+  encrypted directory.
+
+- The kernel cannot magically wipe copies of the master key(s) that
+  userspace might have as well.  Therefore, userspace must wipe all
+  copies of the master key(s) it makes as well; normally this should
+  be done immediately after FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY, without waiting
+  for FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY.  Naturally, the same also applies
+  to all higher levels in the key hierarchy.  Userspace should also
+  follow other security precautions such as mlock()ing memory
+  containing keys to prevent it from being swapped out.
+
+- In general, decrypted contents and filenames in the kernel VFS
+  caches are freed but not wiped.  Therefore, portions thereof may be
+  recoverable from freed memory, even after the corresponding key(s)
+  were wiped.  To partially solve this, you can set
+  CONFIG_PAGE_POISONING=y in your kernel config and add page_poison=1
+  to your kernel command line.  However, this has a performance cost.
+
+- Secret keys might still exist in CPU registers, in crypto
+  accelerator hardware (if used by the crypto API to implement any of
+  the algorithms), or in other places not explicitly considered here.
+
+Limitations of v1 policies
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+v1 encryption policies have some weaknesses with respect to online
+attacks:
+
+- There is no verification that the provided master key is correct.
+  Therefore, a malicious user can temporarily associate the wrong key
+  with another user's encrypted files to which they have read-only
+  access.  Because of filesystem caching, the wrong key will then be
+  used by the other user's accesses to those files, even if the other
+  user has the correct key in their own keyring.  This violates the
+  meaning of "read-only access".
+
+- A compromise of a per-file key also compromises the master key from
+  which it was derived.
+
+- Non-root users cannot securely remove encryption keys.
+
+All the above problems are fixed with v2 encryption policies.  For
+this reason among others, it is recommended to use v2 encryption
+policies on all new encrypted directories.
+
+Key hierarchy
+=============
+
+Master Keys
+-----------
+
+Each encrypted directory tree is protected by a *master key*.  Master
+keys can be up to 64 bytes long, and must be at least as long as the
+greater of the security strength of the contents and filenames
+encryption modes being used.  For example, if any AES-256 mode is
+used, the master key must be at least 256 bits, i.e. 32 bytes.  A
+stricter requirement applies if the key is used by a v1 encryption
+policy and AES-256-XTS is used; such keys must be 64 bytes.
+
+To "unlock" an encrypted directory tree, userspace must provide the
+appropriate master key.  There can be any number of master keys, each
+of which protects any number of directory trees on any number of
+filesystems.
+
+Master keys must be real cryptographic keys, i.e. indistinguishable
+from random bytestrings of the same length.  This implies that users
+**must not** directly use a password as a master key, zero-pad a
+shorter key, or repeat a shorter key.  Security cannot be guaranteed
+if userspace makes any such error, as the cryptographic proofs and
+analysis would no longer apply.
+
+Instead, users should generate master keys either using a
+cryptographically secure random number generator, or by using a KDF
+(Key Derivation Function).  The kernel does not do any key stretching;
+therefore, if userspace derives the key from a low-entropy secret such
+as a passphrase, it is critical that a KDF designed for this purpose
+be used, such as scrypt, PBKDF2, or Argon2.
+
+Key derivation function
+-----------------------
+
+With one exception, fscrypt never uses the master key(s) for
+encryption directly.  Instead, they are only used as input to a KDF
+(Key Derivation Function) to derive the actual keys.
+
+The KDF used for a particular master key differs depending on whether
+the key is used for v1 encryption policies or for v2 encryption
+policies.  Users **must not** use the same key for both v1 and v2
+encryption policies.  (No real-world attack is currently known on this
+specific case of key reuse, but its security cannot be guaranteed
+since the cryptographic proofs and analysis would no longer apply.)
+
+For v1 encryption policies, the KDF only supports deriving per-file
+encryption keys.  It works by encrypting the master key with
+AES-128-ECB, using the file's 16-byte nonce as the AES key.  The
+resulting ciphertext is used as the derived key.  If the ciphertext is
+longer than needed, then it is truncated to the needed length.
+
+For v2 encryption policies, the KDF is HKDF-SHA512.  The master key is
+passed as the "input keying material", no salt is used, and a distinct
+"application-specific information string" is used for each distinct
+key to be derived.  For example, when a per-file encryption key is
+derived, the application-specific information string is the file's
+nonce prefixed with "fscrypt\\0" and a context byte.  Different
+context bytes are used for other types of derived keys.
+
+HKDF-SHA512 is preferred to the original AES-128-ECB based KDF because
+HKDF is more flexible, is nonreversible, and evenly distributes
+entropy from the master key.  HKDF is also standardized and widely
+used by other software, whereas the AES-128-ECB based KDF is ad-hoc.
+
+Per-file encryption keys
+------------------------
+
+Since each master key can protect many files, it is necessary to
+"tweak" the encryption of each file so that the same plaintext in two
+files doesn't map to the same ciphertext, or vice versa.  In most
+cases, fscrypt does this by deriving per-file keys.  When a new
+encrypted inode (regular file, directory, or symlink) is created,
+fscrypt randomly generates a 16-byte nonce and stores it in the
+inode's encryption xattr.  Then, it uses a KDF (as described in `Key
+derivation function`_) to derive the file's key from the master key
+and nonce.
+
+Key derivation was chosen over key wrapping because wrapped keys would
+require larger xattrs which would be less likely to fit in-line in the
+filesystem's inode table, and there didn't appear to be any
+significant advantages to key wrapping.  In particular, currently
+there is no requirement to support unlocking a file with multiple
+alternative master keys or to support rotating master keys.  Instead,
+the master keys may be wrapped in userspace, e.g. as is done by the
+`fscrypt <https://github.com/google/fscrypt>`_ tool.
+
+DIRECT_KEY policies
+-------------------
+
+The Adiantum encryption mode (see `Encryption modes and usage`_) is
+suitable for both contents and filenames encryption, and it accepts
+long IVs --- long enough to hold both an 8-byte logical block number
+and a 16-byte per-file nonce.  Also, the overhead of each Adiantum key
+is greater than that of an AES-256-XTS key.
+
+Therefore, to improve performance and save memory, for Adiantum a
+"direct key" configuration is supported.  When the user has enabled
+this by setting FSCRYPT_POLICY_FLAG_DIRECT_KEY in the fscrypt policy,
+per-file encryption keys are not used.  Instead, whenever any data
+(contents or filenames) is encrypted, the file's 16-byte nonce is
+included in the IV.  Moreover:
+
+- For v1 encryption policies, the encryption is done directly with the
+  master key.  Because of this, users **must not** use the same master
+  key for any other purpose, even for other v1 policies.
+
+- For v2 encryption policies, the encryption is done with a per-mode
+  key derived using the KDF.  Users may use the same master key for
+  other v2 encryption policies.
+
+IV_INO_LBLK_64 policies
+-----------------------
+
+When FSCRYPT_POLICY_FLAG_IV_INO_LBLK_64 is set in the fscrypt policy,
+the encryption keys are derived from the master key, encryption mode
+number, and filesystem UUID.  This normally results in all files
+protected by the same master key sharing a single contents encryption
+key and a single filenames encryption key.  To still encrypt different
+files' data differently, inode numbers are included in the IVs.
+Consequently, shrinking the filesystem may not be allowed.
+
+This format is optimized for use with inline encryption hardware
+compliant with the UFS standard, which supports only 64 IV bits per
+I/O request and may have only a small number of keyslots.
+
+IV_INO_LBLK_32 policies
+-----------------------
+
+IV_INO_LBLK_32 policies work like IV_INO_LBLK_64, except that for
+IV_INO_LBLK_32, the inode number is hashed with SipHash-2-4 (where the
+SipHash key is derived from the master key) and added to the file
+logical block number mod 2^32 to produce a 32-bit IV.
+
+This format is optimized for use with inline encryption hardware
+compliant with the eMMC v5.2 standard, which supports only 32 IV bits
+per I/O request and may have only a small number of keyslots.  This
+format results in some level of IV reuse, so it should only be used
+when necessary due to hardware limitations.
+
+Key identifiers
+---------------
+
+For master keys used for v2 encryption policies, a unique 16-byte "key
+identifier" is also derived using the KDF.  This value is stored in
+the clear, since it is needed to reliably identify the key itself.
+
+Dirhash keys
+------------
+
+For directories that are indexed using a secret-keyed dirhash over the
+plaintext filenames, the KDF is also used to derive a 128-bit
+SipHash-2-4 key per directory in order to hash filenames.  This works
+just like deriving a per-file encryption key, except that a different
+KDF context is used.  Currently, only casefolded ("case-insensitive")
+encrypted directories use this style of hashing.
+
+Encryption modes and usage
+==========================
+
+fscrypt allows one encryption mode to be specified for file contents
+and one encryption mode to be specified for filenames.  Different
+directory trees are permitted to use different encryption modes.
+Currently, the following pairs of encryption modes are supported:
+
+- AES-256-XTS for contents and AES-256-CTS-CBC for filenames
+- AES-128-CBC for contents and AES-128-CTS-CBC for filenames
+- Adiantum for both contents and filenames
+- AES-256-XTS for contents and AES-256-HCTR2 for filenames (v2 policies only)
+
+If unsure, you should use the (AES-256-XTS, AES-256-CTS-CBC) pair.
+
+AES-128-CBC was added only for low-powered embedded devices with
+crypto accelerators such as CAAM or CESA that do not support XTS.  To
+use AES-128-CBC, CONFIG_CRYPTO_ESSIV and CONFIG_CRYPTO_SHA256 (or
+another SHA-256 implementation) must be enabled so that ESSIV can be
+used.
+
+Adiantum is a (primarily) stream cipher-based mode that is fast even
+on CPUs without dedicated crypto instructions.  It's also a true
+wide-block mode, unlike XTS.  It can also eliminate the need to derive
+per-file encryption keys.  However, it depends on the security of two
+primitives, XChaCha12 and AES-256, rather than just one.  See the
+paper "Adiantum: length-preserving encryption for entry-level
+processors" (https://eprint.iacr.org/2018/720.pdf) for more details.
+To use Adiantum, CONFIG_CRYPTO_ADIANTUM must be enabled.  Also, fast
+implementations of ChaCha and NHPoly1305 should be enabled, e.g.
+CONFIG_CRYPTO_CHACHA20_NEON and CONFIG_CRYPTO_NHPOLY1305_NEON for ARM.
+
+AES-256-HCTR2 is another true wide-block encryption mode that is intended for
+use on CPUs with dedicated crypto instructions.  AES-256-HCTR2 has the property
+that a bitflip in the plaintext changes the entire ciphertext.  This property
+makes it desirable for filename encryption since initialization vectors are
+reused within a directory.  For more details on AES-256-HCTR2, see the paper
+"Length-preserving encryption with HCTR2"
+(https://eprint.iacr.org/2021/1441.pdf).  To use AES-256-HCTR2,
+CONFIG_CRYPTO_HCTR2 must be enabled.  Also, fast implementations of XCTR and
+POLYVAL should be enabled, e.g. CRYPTO_POLYVAL_ARM64_CE and
+CRYPTO_AES_ARM64_CE_BLK for ARM64.
+
+New encryption modes can be added relatively easily, without changes
+to individual filesystems.  However, authenticated encryption (AE)
+modes are not currently supported because of the difficulty of dealing
+with ciphertext expansion.
+
+Contents encryption
+-------------------
+
+For file contents, each filesystem block is encrypted independently.
+Starting from Linux kernel 5.5, encryption of filesystems with block
+size less than system's page size is supported.
+
+Each block's IV is set to the logical block number within the file as
+a little endian number, except that:
+
+- With CBC mode encryption, ESSIV is also used.  Specifically, each IV
+  is encrypted with AES-256 where the AES-256 key is the SHA-256 hash
+  of the file's data encryption key.
+
+- With `DIRECT_KEY policies`_, the file's nonce is appended to the IV.
+  Currently this is only allowed with the Adiantum encryption mode.
+
+- With `IV_INO_LBLK_64 policies`_, the logical block number is limited
+  to 32 bits and is placed in bits 0-31 of the IV.  The inode number
+  (which is also limited to 32 bits) is placed in bits 32-63.
+
+- With `IV_INO_LBLK_32 policies`_, the logical block number is limited
+  to 32 bits and is placed in bits 0-31 of the IV.  The inode number
+  is then hashed and added mod 2^32.
+
+Note that because file logical block numbers are included in the IVs,
+filesystems must enforce that blocks are never shifted around within
+encrypted files, e.g. via "collapse range" or "insert range".
+
+Filenames encryption
+--------------------
+
+For filenames, each full filename is encrypted at once.  Because of
+the requirements to retain support for efficient directory lookups and
+filenames of up to 255 bytes, the same IV is used for every filename
+in a directory.
+
+However, each encrypted directory still uses a unique key, or
+alternatively has the file's nonce (for `DIRECT_KEY policies`_) or
+inode number (for `IV_INO_LBLK_64 policies`_) included in the IVs.
+Thus, IV reuse is limited to within a single directory.
+
+With CTS-CBC, the IV reuse means that when the plaintext filenames share a
+common prefix at least as long as the cipher block size (16 bytes for AES), the
+corresponding encrypted filenames will also share a common prefix.  This is
+undesirable.  Adiantum and HCTR2 do not have this weakness, as they are
+wide-block encryption modes.
+
+All supported filenames encryption modes accept any plaintext length
+>= 16 bytes; cipher block alignment is not required.  However,
+filenames shorter than 16 bytes are NUL-padded to 16 bytes before
+being encrypted.  In addition, to reduce leakage of filename lengths
+via their ciphertexts, all filenames are NUL-padded to the next 4, 8,
+16, or 32-byte boundary (configurable).  32 is recommended since this
+provides the best confidentiality, at the cost of making directory
+entries consume slightly more space.  Note that since NUL (``\0``) is
+not otherwise a valid character in filenames, the padding will never
+produce duplicate plaintexts.
+
+Symbolic link targets are considered a type of filename and are
+encrypted in the same way as filenames in directory entries, except
+that IV reuse is not a problem as each symlink has its own inode.
+
+User API
+========
+
+Setting an encryption policy
+----------------------------
+
+FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY ioctl sets an encryption policy on an
+empty directory or verifies that a directory or regular file already
+has the specified encryption policy.  It takes in a pointer to
+struct fscrypt_policy_v1 or struct fscrypt_policy_v2, defined as
+follows::
+
+    #define FSCRYPT_POLICY_V1               0
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE     8
+    struct fscrypt_policy_v1 {
+            __u8 version;
+            __u8 contents_encryption_mode;
+            __u8 filenames_encryption_mode;
+            __u8 flags;
+            __u8 master_key_descriptor[FSCRYPT_KEY_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE];
+    };
+    #define fscrypt_policy  fscrypt_policy_v1
+
+    #define FSCRYPT_POLICY_V2               2
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_IDENTIFIER_SIZE     16
+    struct fscrypt_policy_v2 {
+            __u8 version;
+            __u8 contents_encryption_mode;
+            __u8 filenames_encryption_mode;
+            __u8 flags;
+            __u8 __reserved[4];
+            __u8 master_key_identifier[FSCRYPT_KEY_IDENTIFIER_SIZE];
+    };
+
+This structure must be initialized as follows:
+
+- ``version`` must be FSCRYPT_POLICY_V1 (0) if
+  struct fscrypt_policy_v1 is used or FSCRYPT_POLICY_V2 (2) if
+  struct fscrypt_policy_v2 is used. (Note: we refer to the original
+  policy version as "v1", though its version code is really 0.)
+  For new encrypted directories, use v2 policies.
+
+- ``contents_encryption_mode`` and ``filenames_encryption_mode`` must
+  be set to constants from ``<linux/fscrypt.h>`` which identify the
+  encryption modes to use.  If unsure, use FSCRYPT_MODE_AES_256_XTS
+  (1) for ``contents_encryption_mode`` and FSCRYPT_MODE_AES_256_CTS
+  (4) for ``filenames_encryption_mode``.
+
+- ``flags`` contains optional flags from ``<linux/fscrypt.h>``:
+
+  - FSCRYPT_POLICY_FLAGS_PAD_*: The amount of NUL padding to use when
+    encrypting filenames.  If unsure, use FSCRYPT_POLICY_FLAGS_PAD_32
+    (0x3).
+  - FSCRYPT_POLICY_FLAG_DIRECT_KEY: See `DIRECT_KEY policies`_.
+  - FSCRYPT_POLICY_FLAG_IV_INO_LBLK_64: See `IV_INO_LBLK_64
+    policies`_.
+  - FSCRYPT_POLICY_FLAG_IV_INO_LBLK_32: See `IV_INO_LBLK_32
+    policies`_.
+
+  v1 encryption policies only support the PAD_* and DIRECT_KEY flags.
+  The other flags are only supported by v2 encryption policies.
+
+  The DIRECT_KEY, IV_INO_LBLK_64, and IV_INO_LBLK_32 flags are
+  mutually exclusive.
+
+- For v2 encryption policies, ``__reserved`` must be zeroed.
+
+- For v1 encryption policies, ``master_key_descriptor`` specifies how
+  to find the master key in a keyring; see `Adding keys`_.  It is up
+  to userspace to choose a unique ``master_key_descriptor`` for each
+  master key.  The e4crypt and fscrypt tools use the first 8 bytes of
+  ``SHA-512(SHA-512(master_key))``, but this particular scheme is not
+  required.  Also, the master key need not be in the keyring yet when
+  FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY is executed.  However, it must be added
+  before any files can be created in the encrypted directory.
+
+  For v2 encryption policies, ``master_key_descriptor`` has been
+  replaced with ``master_key_identifier``, which is longer and cannot
+  be arbitrarily chosen.  Instead, the key must first be added using
+  `FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY`_.  Then, the ``key_spec.u.identifier``
+  the kernel returned in the struct fscrypt_add_key_arg must
+  be used as the ``master_key_identifier`` in
+  struct fscrypt_policy_v2.
+
+If the file is not yet encrypted, then FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY
+verifies that the file is an empty directory.  If so, the specified
+encryption policy is assigned to the directory, turning it into an
+encrypted directory.  After that, and after providing the
+corresponding master key as described in `Adding keys`_, all regular
+files, directories (recursively), and symlinks created in the
+directory will be encrypted, inheriting the same encryption policy.
+The filenames in the directory's entries will be encrypted as well.
+
+Alternatively, if the file is already encrypted, then
+FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY validates that the specified encryption
+policy exactly matches the actual one.  If they match, then the ioctl
+returns 0.  Otherwise, it fails with EEXIST.  This works on both
+regular files and directories, including nonempty directories.
+
+When a v2 encryption policy is assigned to a directory, it is also
+required that either the specified key has been added by the current
+user or that the caller has CAP_FOWNER in the initial user namespace.
+(This is needed to prevent a user from encrypting their data with
+another user's key.)  The key must remain added while
+FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY is executing.  However, if the new
+encrypted directory does not need to be accessed immediately, then the
+key can be removed right away afterwards.
+
+Note that the ext4 filesystem does not allow the root directory to be
+encrypted, even if it is empty.  Users who want to encrypt an entire
+filesystem with one key should consider using dm-crypt instead.
+
+FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY can fail with the following errors:
+
+- ``EACCES``: the file is not owned by the process's uid, nor does the
+  process have the CAP_FOWNER capability in a namespace with the file
+  owner's uid mapped
+- ``EEXIST``: the file is already encrypted with an encryption policy
+  different from the one specified
+- ``EINVAL``: an invalid encryption policy was specified (invalid
+  version, mode(s), or flags; or reserved bits were set); or a v1
+  encryption policy was specified but the directory has the casefold
+  flag enabled (casefolding is incompatible with v1 policies).
+- ``ENOKEY``: a v2 encryption policy was specified, but the key with
+  the specified ``master_key_identifier`` has not been added, nor does
+  the process have the CAP_FOWNER capability in the initial user
+  namespace
+- ``ENOTDIR``: the file is unencrypted and is a regular file, not a
+  directory
+- ``ENOTEMPTY``: the file is unencrypted and is a nonempty directory
+- ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement encryption
+- ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with encryption
+  support for filesystems, or the filesystem superblock has not
+  had encryption enabled on it.  (For example, to use encryption on an
+  ext4 filesystem, CONFIG_FS_ENCRYPTION must be enabled in the
+  kernel config, and the superblock must have had the "encrypt"
+  feature flag enabled using ``tune2fs -O encrypt`` or ``mkfs.ext4 -O
+  encrypt``.)
+- ``EPERM``: this directory may not be encrypted, e.g. because it is
+  the root directory of an ext4 filesystem
+- ``EROFS``: the filesystem is readonly
+
+Getting an encryption policy
+----------------------------
+
+Two ioctls are available to get a file's encryption policy:
+
+- `FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY_EX`_
+- `FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY`_
+
+The extended (_EX) version of the ioctl is more general and is
+recommended to use when possible.  However, on older kernels only the
+original ioctl is available.  Applications should try the extended
+version, and if it fails with ENOTTY fall back to the original
+version.
+
+FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY_EX
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY_EX ioctl retrieves the encryption
+policy, if any, for a directory or regular file.  No additional
+permissions are required beyond the ability to open the file.  It
+takes in a pointer to struct fscrypt_get_policy_ex_arg,
+defined as follows::
+
+    struct fscrypt_get_policy_ex_arg {
+            __u64 policy_size; /* input/output */
+            union {
+                    __u8 version;
+                    struct fscrypt_policy_v1 v1;
+                    struct fscrypt_policy_v2 v2;
+            } policy; /* output */
+    };
+
+The caller must initialize ``policy_size`` to the size available for
+the policy struct, i.e. ``sizeof(arg.policy)``.
+
+On success, the policy struct is returned in ``policy``, and its
+actual size is returned in ``policy_size``.  ``policy.version`` should
+be checked to determine the version of policy returned.  Note that the
+version code for the "v1" policy is actually 0 (FSCRYPT_POLICY_V1).
+
+FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY_EX can fail with the following errors:
+
+- ``EINVAL``: the file is encrypted, but it uses an unrecognized
+  encryption policy version
+- ``ENODATA``: the file is not encrypted
+- ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement encryption,
+  or this kernel is too old to support FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY_EX
+  (try FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY instead)
+- ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with encryption
+  support for this filesystem, or the filesystem superblock has not
+  had encryption enabled on it
+- ``EOVERFLOW``: the file is encrypted and uses a recognized
+  encryption policy version, but the policy struct does not fit into
+  the provided buffer
+
+Note: if you only need to know whether a file is encrypted or not, on
+most filesystems it is also possible to use the FS_IOC_GETFLAGS ioctl
+and check for FS_ENCRYPT_FL, or to use the statx() system call and
+check for STATX_ATTR_ENCRYPTED in stx_attributes.
+
+FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY ioctl can also retrieve the
+encryption policy, if any, for a directory or regular file.  However,
+unlike `FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY_EX`_,
+FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY only supports the original policy
+version.  It takes in a pointer directly to struct fscrypt_policy_v1
+rather than struct fscrypt_get_policy_ex_arg.
+
+The error codes for FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY are the same as those
+for FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY_EX, except that
+FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY also returns ``EINVAL`` if the file is
+encrypted using a newer encryption policy version.
+
+Getting the per-filesystem salt
+-------------------------------
+
+Some filesystems, such as ext4 and F2FS, also support the deprecated
+ioctl FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_PWSALT.  This ioctl retrieves a randomly
+generated 16-byte value stored in the filesystem superblock.  This
+value is intended to used as a salt when deriving an encryption key
+from a passphrase or other low-entropy user credential.
+
+FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_PWSALT is deprecated.  Instead, prefer to
+generate and manage any needed salt(s) in userspace.
+
+Getting a file's encryption nonce
+---------------------------------
+
+Since Linux v5.7, the ioctl FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_NONCE is supported.
+On encrypted files and directories it gets the inode's 16-byte nonce.
+On unencrypted files and directories, it fails with ENODATA.
+
+This ioctl can be useful for automated tests which verify that the
+encryption is being done correctly.  It is not needed for normal use
+of fscrypt.
+
+Adding keys
+-----------
+
+FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY ioctl adds a master encryption key to
+the filesystem, making all files on the filesystem which were
+encrypted using that key appear "unlocked", i.e. in plaintext form.
+It can be executed on any file or directory on the target filesystem,
+but using the filesystem's root directory is recommended.  It takes in
+a pointer to struct fscrypt_add_key_arg, defined as follows::
+
+    struct fscrypt_add_key_arg {
+            struct fscrypt_key_specifier key_spec;
+            __u32 raw_size;
+            __u32 key_id;
+            __u32 __reserved[8];
+            __u8 raw[];
+    };
+
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR        1
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_IDENTIFIER        2
+
+    struct fscrypt_key_specifier {
+            __u32 type;     /* one of FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_* */
+            __u32 __reserved;
+            union {
+                    __u8 __reserved[32]; /* reserve some extra space */
+                    __u8 descriptor[FSCRYPT_KEY_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE];
+                    __u8 identifier[FSCRYPT_KEY_IDENTIFIER_SIZE];
+            } u;
+    };
+
+    struct fscrypt_provisioning_key_payload {
+            __u32 type;
+            __u32 __reserved;
+            __u8 raw[];
+    };
+
+struct fscrypt_add_key_arg must be zeroed, then initialized
+as follows:
+
+- If the key is being added for use by v1 encryption policies, then
+  ``key_spec.type`` must contain FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR, and
+  ``key_spec.u.descriptor`` must contain the descriptor of the key
+  being added, corresponding to the value in the
+  ``master_key_descriptor`` field of struct fscrypt_policy_v1.
+  To add this type of key, the calling process must have the
+  CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability in the initial user namespace.
+
+  Alternatively, if the key is being added for use by v2 encryption
+  policies, then ``key_spec.type`` must contain
+  FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_IDENTIFIER, and ``key_spec.u.identifier`` is
+  an *output* field which the kernel fills in with a cryptographic
+  hash of the key.  To add this type of key, the calling process does
+  not need any privileges.  However, the number of keys that can be
+  added is limited by the user's quota for the keyrings service (see
+  ``Documentation/security/keys/core.rst``).
+
+- ``raw_size`` must be the size of the ``raw`` key provided, in bytes.
+  Alternatively, if ``key_id`` is nonzero, this field must be 0, since
+  in that case the size is implied by the specified Linux keyring key.
+
+- ``key_id`` is 0 if the raw key is given directly in the ``raw``
+  field.  Otherwise ``key_id`` is the ID of a Linux keyring key of
+  type "fscrypt-provisioning" whose payload is
+  struct fscrypt_provisioning_key_payload whose ``raw`` field contains
+  the raw key and whose ``type`` field matches ``key_spec.type``.
+  Since ``raw`` is variable-length, the total size of this key's
+  payload must be ``sizeof(struct fscrypt_provisioning_key_payload)``
+  plus the raw key size.  The process must have Search permission on
+  this key.
+
+  Most users should leave this 0 and specify the raw key directly.
+  The support for specifying a Linux keyring key is intended mainly to
+  allow re-adding keys after a filesystem is unmounted and re-mounted,
+  without having to store the raw keys in userspace memory.
+
+- ``raw`` is a variable-length field which must contain the actual
+  key, ``raw_size`` bytes long.  Alternatively, if ``key_id`` is
+  nonzero, then this field is unused.
+
+For v2 policy keys, the kernel keeps track of which user (identified
+by effective user ID) added the key, and only allows the key to be
+removed by that user --- or by "root", if they use
+`FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY_ALL_USERS`_.
+
+However, if another user has added the key, it may be desirable to
+prevent that other user from unexpectedly removing it.  Therefore,
+FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY may also be used to add a v2 policy key
+*again*, even if it's already added by other user(s).  In this case,
+FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY will just install a claim to the key for the
+current user, rather than actually add the key again (but the raw key
+must still be provided, as a proof of knowledge).
+
+FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY returns 0 if either the key or a claim to
+the key was either added or already exists.
+
+FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY can fail with the following errors:
+
+- ``EACCES``: FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR was specified, but the
+  caller does not have the CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability in the initial
+  user namespace; or the raw key was specified by Linux key ID but the
+  process lacks Search permission on the key.
+- ``EDQUOT``: the key quota for this user would be exceeded by adding
+  the key
+- ``EINVAL``: invalid key size or key specifier type, or reserved bits
+  were set
+- ``EKEYREJECTED``: the raw key was specified by Linux key ID, but the
+  key has the wrong type
+- ``ENOKEY``: the raw key was specified by Linux key ID, but no key
+  exists with that ID
+- ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement encryption
+- ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with encryption
+  support for this filesystem, or the filesystem superblock has not
+  had encryption enabled on it
+
+Legacy method
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+For v1 encryption policies, a master encryption key can also be
+provided by adding it to a process-subscribed keyring, e.g. to a
+session keyring, or to a user keyring if the user keyring is linked
+into the session keyring.
+
+This method is deprecated (and not supported for v2 encryption
+policies) for several reasons.  First, it cannot be used in
+combination with FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY (see `Removing keys`_),
+so for removing a key a workaround such as keyctl_unlink() in
+combination with ``sync; echo 2 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches`` would
+have to be used.  Second, it doesn't match the fact that the
+locked/unlocked status of encrypted files (i.e. whether they appear to
+be in plaintext form or in ciphertext form) is global.  This mismatch
+has caused much confusion as well as real problems when processes
+running under different UIDs, such as a ``sudo`` command, need to
+access encrypted files.
+
+Nevertheless, to add a key to one of the process-subscribed keyrings,
+the add_key() system call can be used (see:
+``Documentation/security/keys/core.rst``).  The key type must be
+"logon"; keys of this type are kept in kernel memory and cannot be
+read back by userspace.  The key description must be "fscrypt:"
+followed by the 16-character lower case hex representation of the
+``master_key_descriptor`` that was set in the encryption policy.  The
+key payload must conform to the following structure::
+
+    #define FSCRYPT_MAX_KEY_SIZE            64
+
+    struct fscrypt_key {
+            __u32 mode;
+            __u8 raw[FSCRYPT_MAX_KEY_SIZE];
+            __u32 size;
+    };
+
+``mode`` is ignored; just set it to 0.  The actual key is provided in
+``raw`` with ``size`` indicating its size in bytes.  That is, the
+bytes ``raw[0..size-1]`` (inclusive) are the actual key.
+
+The key description prefix "fscrypt:" may alternatively be replaced
+with a filesystem-specific prefix such as "ext4:".  However, the
+filesystem-specific prefixes are deprecated and should not be used in
+new programs.
+
+Removing keys
+-------------
+
+Two ioctls are available for removing a key that was added by
+`FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY`_:
+
+- `FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY`_
+- `FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY_ALL_USERS`_
+
+These two ioctls differ only in cases where v2 policy keys are added
+or removed by non-root users.
+
+These ioctls don't work on keys that were added via the legacy
+process-subscribed keyrings mechanism.
+
+Before using these ioctls, read the `Kernel memory compromise`_
+section for a discussion of the security goals and limitations of
+these ioctls.
+
+FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY ioctl removes a claim to a master
+encryption key from the filesystem, and possibly removes the key
+itself.  It can be executed on any file or directory on the target
+filesystem, but using the filesystem's root directory is recommended.
+It takes in a pointer to struct fscrypt_remove_key_arg, defined
+as follows::
+
+    struct fscrypt_remove_key_arg {
+            struct fscrypt_key_specifier key_spec;
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_REMOVAL_STATUS_FLAG_FILES_BUSY      0x00000001
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_REMOVAL_STATUS_FLAG_OTHER_USERS     0x00000002
+            __u32 removal_status_flags;     /* output */
+            __u32 __reserved[5];
+    };
+
+This structure must be zeroed, then initialized as follows:
+
+- The key to remove is specified by ``key_spec``:
+
+    - To remove a key used by v1 encryption policies, set
+      ``key_spec.type`` to FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR and fill
+      in ``key_spec.u.descriptor``.  To remove this type of key, the
+      calling process must have the CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability in the
+      initial user namespace.
+
+    - To remove a key used by v2 encryption policies, set
+      ``key_spec.type`` to FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_IDENTIFIER and fill
+      in ``key_spec.u.identifier``.
+
+For v2 policy keys, this ioctl is usable by non-root users.  However,
+to make this possible, it actually just removes the current user's
+claim to the key, undoing a single call to FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY.
+Only after all claims are removed is the key really removed.
+
+For example, if FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY was called with uid 1000,
+then the key will be "claimed" by uid 1000, and
+FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY will only succeed as uid 1000.  Or, if
+both uids 1000 and 2000 added the key, then for each uid
+FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY will only remove their own claim.  Only
+once *both* are removed is the key really removed.  (Think of it like
+unlinking a file that may have hard links.)
+
+If FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY really removes the key, it will also
+try to "lock" all files that had been unlocked with the key.  It won't
+lock files that are still in-use, so this ioctl is expected to be used
+in cooperation with userspace ensuring that none of the files are
+still open.  However, if necessary, this ioctl can be executed again
+later to retry locking any remaining files.
+
+FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY returns 0 if either the key was removed
+(but may still have files remaining to be locked), the user's claim to
+the key was removed, or the key was already removed but had files
+remaining to be the locked so the ioctl retried locking them.  In any
+of these cases, ``removal_status_flags`` is filled in with the
+following informational status flags:
+
+- ``FSCRYPT_KEY_REMOVAL_STATUS_FLAG_FILES_BUSY``: set if some file(s)
+  are still in-use.  Not guaranteed to be set in the case where only
+  the user's claim to the key was removed.
+- ``FSCRYPT_KEY_REMOVAL_STATUS_FLAG_OTHER_USERS``: set if only the
+  user's claim to the key was removed, not the key itself
+
+FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY can fail with the following errors:
+
+- ``EACCES``: The FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR key specifier type
+  was specified, but the caller does not have the CAP_SYS_ADMIN
+  capability in the initial user namespace
+- ``EINVAL``: invalid key specifier type, or reserved bits were set
+- ``ENOKEY``: the key object was not found at all, i.e. it was never
+  added in the first place or was already fully removed including all
+  files locked; or, the user does not have a claim to the key (but
+  someone else does).
+- ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement encryption
+- ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with encryption
+  support for this filesystem, or the filesystem superblock has not
+  had encryption enabled on it
+
+FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY_ALL_USERS
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY_ALL_USERS is exactly the same as
+`FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY`_, except that for v2 policy keys, the
+ALL_USERS version of the ioctl will remove all users' claims to the
+key, not just the current user's.  I.e., the key itself will always be
+removed, no matter how many users have added it.  This difference is
+only meaningful if non-root users are adding and removing keys.
+
+Because of this, FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY_ALL_USERS also requires
+"root", namely the CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability in the initial user
+namespace.  Otherwise it will fail with EACCES.
+
+Getting key status
+------------------
+
+FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_KEY_STATUS
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_KEY_STATUS ioctl retrieves the status of a
+master encryption key.  It can be executed on any file or directory on
+the target filesystem, but using the filesystem's root directory is
+recommended.  It takes in a pointer to
+struct fscrypt_get_key_status_arg, defined as follows::
+
+    struct fscrypt_get_key_status_arg {
+            /* input */
+            struct fscrypt_key_specifier key_spec;
+            __u32 __reserved[6];
+
+            /* output */
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_STATUS_ABSENT               1
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_STATUS_PRESENT              2
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_STATUS_INCOMPLETELY_REMOVED 3
+            __u32 status;
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_STATUS_FLAG_ADDED_BY_SELF   0x00000001
+            __u32 status_flags;
+            __u32 user_count;
+            __u32 __out_reserved[13];
+    };
+
+The caller must zero all input fields, then fill in ``key_spec``:
+
+    - To get the status of a key for v1 encryption policies, set
+      ``key_spec.type`` to FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR and fill
+      in ``key_spec.u.descriptor``.
+
+    - To get the status of a key for v2 encryption policies, set
+      ``key_spec.type`` to FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_IDENTIFIER and fill
+      in ``key_spec.u.identifier``.
+
+On success, 0 is returned and the kernel fills in the output fields:
+
+- ``status`` indicates whether the key is absent, present, or
+  incompletely removed.  Incompletely removed means that the master
+  secret has been removed, but some files are still in use; i.e.,
+  `FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY`_ returned 0 but set the informational
+  status flag FSCRYPT_KEY_REMOVAL_STATUS_FLAG_FILES_BUSY.
+
+- ``status_flags`` can contain the following flags:
+
+    - ``FSCRYPT_KEY_STATUS_FLAG_ADDED_BY_SELF`` indicates that the key
+      has added by the current user.  This is only set for keys
+      identified by ``identifier`` rather than by ``descriptor``.
+
+- ``user_count`` specifies the number of users who have added the key.
+  This is only set for keys identified by ``identifier`` rather than
+  by ``descriptor``.
+
+FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_KEY_STATUS can fail with the following errors:
+
+- ``EINVAL``: invalid key specifier type, or reserved bits were set
+- ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement encryption
+- ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with encryption
+  support for this filesystem, or the filesystem superblock has not
+  had encryption enabled on it
+
+Among other use cases, FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_KEY_STATUS can be useful
+for determining whether the key for a given encrypted directory needs
+to be added before prompting the user for the passphrase needed to
+derive the key.
+
+FS_IOC_GET_ENCRYPTION_KEY_STATUS can only get the status of keys in
+the filesystem-level keyring, i.e. the keyring managed by
+`FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY`_ and `FS_IOC_REMOVE_ENCRYPTION_KEY`_.  It
+cannot get the status of a key that has only been added for use by v1
+encryption policies using the legacy mechanism involving
+process-subscribed keyrings.
+
+Access semantics
+================
+
+With the key
+------------
+
+With the encryption key, encrypted regular files, directories, and
+symlinks behave very similarly to their unencrypted counterparts ---
+after all, the encryption is intended to be transparent.  However,
+astute users may notice some differences in behavior:
+
+- Unencrypted files, or files encrypted with a different encryption
+  policy (i.e. different key, modes, or flags), cannot be renamed or
+  linked into an encrypted directory; see `Encryption policy
+  enforcement`_.  Attempts to do so will fail with EXDEV.  However,
+  encrypted files can be renamed within an encrypted directory, or
+  into an unencrypted directory.
+
+  Note: "moving" an unencrypted file into an encrypted directory, e.g.
+  with the `mv` program, is implemented in userspace by a copy
+  followed by a delete.  Be aware that the original unencrypted data
+  may remain recoverable from free space on the disk; prefer to keep
+  all files encrypted from the very beginning.  The `shred` program
+  may be used to overwrite the source files but isn't guaranteed to be
+  effective on all filesystems and storage devices.
+
+- Direct I/O is supported on encrypted files only under some
+  circumstances.  For details, see `Direct I/O support`_.
+
+- The fallocate operations FALLOC_FL_COLLAPSE_RANGE and
+  FALLOC_FL_INSERT_RANGE are not supported on encrypted files and will
+  fail with EOPNOTSUPP.
+
+- Online defragmentation of encrypted files is not supported.  The
+  EXT4_IOC_MOVE_EXT and F2FS_IOC_MOVE_RANGE ioctls will fail with
+  EOPNOTSUPP.
+
+- The ext4 filesystem does not support data journaling with encrypted
+  regular files.  It will fall back to ordered data mode instead.
+
+- DAX (Direct Access) is not supported on encrypted files.
+
+- The maximum length of an encrypted symlink is 2 bytes shorter than
+  the maximum length of an unencrypted symlink.  For example, on an
+  EXT4 filesystem with a 4K block size, unencrypted symlinks can be up
+  to 4095 bytes long, while encrypted symlinks can only be up to 4093
+  bytes long (both lengths excluding the terminating null).
+
+Note that mmap *is* supported.  This is possible because the pagecache
+for an encrypted file contains the plaintext, not the ciphertext.
+
+Without the key
+---------------
+
+Some filesystem operations may be performed on encrypted regular
+files, directories, and symlinks even before their encryption key has
+been added, or after their encryption key has been removed:
+
+- File metadata may be read, e.g. using stat().
+
+- Directories may be listed, in which case the filenames will be
+  listed in an encoded form derived from their ciphertext.  The
+  current encoding algorithm is described in `Filename hashing and
+  encoding`_.  The algorithm is subject to change, but it is
+  guaranteed that the presented filenames will be no longer than
+  NAME_MAX bytes, will not contain the ``/`` or ``\0`` characters, and
+  will uniquely identify directory entries.
+
+  The ``.`` and ``..`` directory entries are special.  They are always
+  present and are not encrypted or encoded.
+
+- Files may be deleted.  That is, nondirectory files may be deleted
+  with unlink() as usual, and empty directories may be deleted with
+  rmdir() as usual.  Therefore, ``rm`` and ``rm -r`` will work as
+  expected.
+
+- Symlink targets may be read and followed, but they will be presented
+  in encrypted form, similar to filenames in directories.  Hence, they
+  are unlikely to point to anywhere useful.
+
+Without the key, regular files cannot be opened or truncated.
+Attempts to do so will fail with ENOKEY.  This implies that any
+regular file operations that require a file descriptor, such as
+read(), write(), mmap(), fallocate(), and ioctl(), are also forbidden.
+
+Also without the key, files of any type (including directories) cannot
+be created or linked into an encrypted directory, nor can a name in an
+encrypted directory be the source or target of a rename, nor can an
+O_TMPFILE temporary file be created in an encrypted directory.  All
+such operations will fail with ENOKEY.
+
+It is not currently possible to backup and restore encrypted files
+without the encryption key.  This would require special APIs which
+have not yet been implemented.
+
+Encryption policy enforcement
+=============================
+
+After an encryption policy has been set on a directory, all regular
+files, directories, and symbolic links created in that directory
+(recursively) will inherit that encryption policy.  Special files ---
+that is, named pipes, device nodes, and UNIX domain sockets --- will
+not be encrypted.
+
+Except for those special files, it is forbidden to have unencrypted
+files, or files encrypted with a different encryption policy, in an
+encrypted directory tree.  Attempts to link or rename such a file into
+an encrypted directory will fail with EXDEV.  This is also enforced
+during ->lookup() to provide limited protection against offline
+attacks that try to disable or downgrade encryption in known locations
+where applications may later write sensitive data.  It is recommended
+that systems implementing a form of "verified boot" take advantage of
+this by validating all top-level encryption policies prior to access.
+
+Inline encryption support
+=========================
+
+By default, fscrypt uses the kernel crypto API for all cryptographic
+operations (other than HKDF, which fscrypt partially implements
+itself).  The kernel crypto API supports hardware crypto accelerators,
+but only ones that work in the traditional way where all inputs and
+outputs (e.g. plaintexts and ciphertexts) are in memory.  fscrypt can
+take advantage of such hardware, but the traditional acceleration
+model isn't particularly efficient and fscrypt hasn't been optimized
+for it.
+
+Instead, many newer systems (especially mobile SoCs) have *inline
+encryption hardware* that can encrypt/decrypt data while it is on its
+way to/from the storage device.  Linux supports inline encryption
+through a set of extensions to the block layer called *blk-crypto*.
+blk-crypto allows filesystems to attach encryption contexts to bios
+(I/O requests) to specify how the data will be encrypted or decrypted
+in-line.  For more information about blk-crypto, see
+:ref:`Documentation/block/inline-encryption.rst <inline_encryption>`.
+
+On supported filesystems (currently ext4 and f2fs), fscrypt can use
+blk-crypto instead of the kernel crypto API to encrypt/decrypt file
+contents.  To enable this, set CONFIG_FS_ENCRYPTION_INLINE_CRYPT=y in
+the kernel configuration, and specify the "inlinecrypt" mount option
+when mounting the filesystem.
+
+Note that the "inlinecrypt" mount option just specifies to use inline
+encryption when possible; it doesn't force its use.  fscrypt will
+still fall back to using the kernel crypto API on files where the
+inline encryption hardware doesn't have the needed crypto capabilities
+(e.g. support for the needed encryption algorithm and data unit size)
+and where blk-crypto-fallback is unusable.  (For blk-crypto-fallback
+to be usable, it must be enabled in the kernel configuration with
+CONFIG_BLK_INLINE_ENCRYPTION_FALLBACK=y.)
+
+Currently fscrypt always uses the filesystem block size (which is
+usually 4096 bytes) as the data unit size.  Therefore, it can only use
+inline encryption hardware that supports that data unit size.
+
+Inline encryption doesn't affect the ciphertext or other aspects of
+the on-disk format, so users may freely switch back and forth between
+using "inlinecrypt" and not using "inlinecrypt".
+
+Direct I/O support
+==================
+
+For direct I/O on an encrypted file to work, the following conditions
+must be met (in addition to the conditions for direct I/O on an
+unencrypted file):
+
+* The file must be using inline encryption.  Usually this means that
+  the filesystem must be mounted with ``-o inlinecrypt`` and inline
+  encryption hardware must be present.  However, a software fallback
+  is also available.  For details, see `Inline encryption support`_.
+
+* The I/O request must be fully aligned to the filesystem block size.
+  This means that the file position the I/O is targeting, the lengths
+  of all I/O segments, and the memory addresses of all I/O buffers
+  must be multiples of this value.  Note that the filesystem block
+  size may be greater than the logical block size of the block device.
+
+If either of the above conditions is not met, then direct I/O on the
+encrypted file will fall back to buffered I/O.
+
+Implementation details
+======================
+
+Encryption context
+------------------
+
+An encryption policy is represented on-disk by
+struct fscrypt_context_v1 or struct fscrypt_context_v2.  It is up to
+individual filesystems to decide where to store it, but normally it
+would be stored in a hidden extended attribute.  It should *not* be
+exposed by the xattr-related system calls such as getxattr() and
+setxattr() because of the special semantics of the encryption xattr.
+(In particular, there would be much confusion if an encryption policy
+were to be added to or removed from anything other than an empty
+directory.)  These structs are defined as follows::
+
+    #define FSCRYPT_FILE_NONCE_SIZE 16
+
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE  8
+    struct fscrypt_context_v1 {
+            u8 version;
+            u8 contents_encryption_mode;
+            u8 filenames_encryption_mode;
+            u8 flags;
+            u8 master_key_descriptor[FSCRYPT_KEY_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE];
+            u8 nonce[FSCRYPT_FILE_NONCE_SIZE];
+    };
+
+    #define FSCRYPT_KEY_IDENTIFIER_SIZE  16
+    struct fscrypt_context_v2 {
+            u8 version;
+            u8 contents_encryption_mode;
+            u8 filenames_encryption_mode;
+            u8 flags;
+            u8 __reserved[4];
+            u8 master_key_identifier[FSCRYPT_KEY_IDENTIFIER_SIZE];
+            u8 nonce[FSCRYPT_FILE_NONCE_SIZE];
+    };
+
+The context structs contain the same information as the corresponding
+policy structs (see `Setting an encryption policy`_), except that the
+context structs also contain a nonce.  The nonce is randomly generated
+by the kernel and is used as KDF input or as a tweak to cause
+different files to be encrypted differently; see `Per-file encryption
+keys`_ and `DIRECT_KEY policies`_.
+
+Data path changes
+-----------------
+
+When inline encryption is used, filesystems just need to associate
+encryption contexts with bios to specify how the block layer or the
+inline encryption hardware will encrypt/decrypt the file contents.
+
+When inline encryption isn't used, filesystems must encrypt/decrypt
+the file contents themselves, as described below:
+
+For the read path (->read_folio()) of regular files, filesystems can
+read the ciphertext into the page cache and decrypt it in-place.  The
+page lock must be held until decryption has finished, to prevent the
+page from becoming visible to userspace prematurely.
+
+For the write path (->writepage()) of regular files, filesystems
+cannot encrypt data in-place in the page cache, since the cached
+plaintext must be preserved.  Instead, filesystems must encrypt into a
+temporary buffer or "bounce page", then write out the temporary
+buffer.  Some filesystems, such as UBIFS, already use temporary
+buffers regardless of encryption.  Other filesystems, such as ext4 and
+F2FS, have to allocate bounce pages specially for encryption.
+
+Filename hashing and encoding
+-----------------------------
+
+Modern filesystems accelerate directory lookups by using indexed
+directories.  An indexed directory is organized as a tree keyed by
+filename hashes.  When a ->lookup() is requested, the filesystem
+normally hashes the filename being looked up so that it can quickly
+find the corresponding directory entry, if any.
+
+With encryption, lookups must be supported and efficient both with and
+without the encryption key.  Clearly, it would not work to hash the
+plaintext filenames, since the plaintext filenames are unavailable
+without the key.  (Hashing the plaintext filenames would also make it
+impossible for the filesystem's fsck tool to optimize encrypted
+directories.)  Instead, filesystems hash the ciphertext filenames,
+i.e. the bytes actually stored on-disk in the directory entries.  When
+asked to do a ->lookup() with the key, the filesystem just encrypts
+the user-supplied name to get the ciphertext.
+
+Lookups without the key are more complicated.  The raw ciphertext may
+contain the ``\0`` and ``/`` characters, which are illegal in
+filenames.  Therefore, readdir() must base64url-encode the ciphertext
+for presentation.  For most filenames, this works fine; on ->lookup(),
+the filesystem just base64url-decodes the user-supplied name to get
+back to the raw ciphertext.
+
+However, for very long filenames, base64url encoding would cause the
+filename length to exceed NAME_MAX.  To prevent this, readdir()
+actually presents long filenames in an abbreviated form which encodes
+a strong "hash" of the ciphertext filename, along with the optional
+filesystem-specific hash(es) needed for directory lookups.  This
+allows the filesystem to still, with a high degree of confidence, map
+the filename given in ->lookup() back to a particular directory entry
+that was previously listed by readdir().  See
+struct fscrypt_nokey_name in the source for more details.
+
+Note that the precise way that filenames are presented to userspace
+without the key is subject to change in the future.  It is only meant
+as a way to temporarily present valid filenames so that commands like
+``rm -r`` work as expected on encrypted directories.
+
+Tests
+=====
+
+To test fscrypt, use xfstests, which is Linux's de facto standard
+filesystem test suite.  First, run all the tests in the "encrypt"
+group on the relevant filesystem(s).  One can also run the tests
+with the 'inlinecrypt' mount option to test the implementation for
+inline encryption support.  For example, to test ext4 and
+f2fs encryption using `kvm-xfstests
+<https://github.com/tytso/xfstests-bld/blob/master/Documentation/kvm-quickstart.md>`_::
+
+    kvm-xfstests -c ext4,f2fs -g encrypt
+    kvm-xfstests -c ext4,f2fs -g encrypt -m inlinecrypt
+
+UBIFS encryption can also be tested this way, but it should be done in
+a separate command, and it takes some time for kvm-xfstests to set up
+emulated UBI volumes::
+
+    kvm-xfstests -c ubifs -g encrypt
+
+No tests should fail.  However, tests that use non-default encryption
+modes (e.g. generic/549 and generic/550) will be skipped if the needed
+algorithms were not built into the kernel's crypto API.  Also, tests
+that access the raw block device (e.g. generic/399, generic/548,
+generic/549, generic/550) will be skipped on UBIFS.
+
+Besides running the "encrypt" group tests, for ext4 and f2fs it's also
+possible to run most xfstests with the "test_dummy_encryption" mount
+option.  This option causes all new files to be automatically
+encrypted with a dummy key, without having to make any API calls.
+This tests the encrypted I/O paths more thoroughly.  To do this with
+kvm-xfstests, use the "encrypt" filesystem configuration::
+
+    kvm-xfstests -c ext4/encrypt,f2fs/encrypt -g auto
+    kvm-xfstests -c ext4/encrypt,f2fs/encrypt -g auto -m inlinecrypt
+
+Because this runs many more tests than "-g encrypt" does, it takes
+much longer to run; so also consider using `gce-xfstests
+<https://github.com/tytso/xfstests-bld/blob/master/Documentation/gce-xfstests.md>`_
+instead of kvm-xfstests::
+
+    gce-xfstests -c ext4/encrypt,f2fs/encrypt -g auto
+    gce-xfstests -c ext4/encrypt,f2fs/encrypt -g auto -m inlinecrypt
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fsverity.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/fsverity.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cb8e75738
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fsverity.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,824 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. _fsverity:
+
+=======================================================
+fs-verity: read-only file-based authenticity protection
+=======================================================
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+fs-verity (``fs/verity/``) is a support layer that filesystems can
+hook into to support transparent integrity and authenticity protection
+of read-only files.  Currently, it is supported by the ext4, f2fs, and
+btrfs filesystems.  Like fscrypt, not too much filesystem-specific
+code is needed to support fs-verity.
+
+fs-verity is similar to `dm-verity
+<https://www.kernel.org/doc/Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt>`_
+but works on files rather than block devices.  On regular files on
+filesystems supporting fs-verity, userspace can execute an ioctl that
+causes the filesystem to build a Merkle tree for the file and persist
+it to a filesystem-specific location associated with the file.
+
+After this, the file is made readonly, and all reads from the file are
+automatically verified against the file's Merkle tree.  Reads of any
+corrupted data, including mmap reads, will fail.
+
+Userspace can use another ioctl to retrieve the root hash (actually
+the "fs-verity file digest", which is a hash that includes the Merkle
+tree root hash) that fs-verity is enforcing for the file.  This ioctl
+executes in constant time, regardless of the file size.
+
+fs-verity is essentially a way to hash a file in constant time,
+subject to the caveat that reads which would violate the hash will
+fail at runtime.
+
+Use cases
+=========
+
+By itself, the base fs-verity feature only provides integrity
+protection, i.e. detection of accidental (non-malicious) corruption.
+
+However, because fs-verity makes retrieving the file hash extremely
+efficient, it's primarily meant to be used as a tool to support
+authentication (detection of malicious modifications) or auditing
+(logging file hashes before use).
+
+Trusted userspace code (e.g. operating system code running on a
+read-only partition that is itself authenticated by dm-verity) can
+authenticate the contents of an fs-verity file by using the
+`FS_IOC_MEASURE_VERITY`_ ioctl to retrieve its hash, then verifying a
+digital signature of it.
+
+A standard file hash could be used instead of fs-verity.  However,
+this is inefficient if the file is large and only a small portion may
+be accessed.  This is often the case for Android application package
+(APK) files, for example.  These typically contain many translations,
+classes, and other resources that are infrequently or even never
+accessed on a particular device.  It would be slow and wasteful to
+read and hash the entire file before starting the application.
+
+Unlike an ahead-of-time hash, fs-verity also re-verifies data each
+time it's paged in.  This ensures that malicious disk firmware can't
+undetectably change the contents of the file at runtime.
+
+fs-verity does not replace or obsolete dm-verity.  dm-verity should
+still be used on read-only filesystems.  fs-verity is for files that
+must live on a read-write filesystem because they are independently
+updated and potentially user-installed, so dm-verity cannot be used.
+
+The base fs-verity feature is a hashing mechanism only; actually
+authenticating the files may be done by:
+
+* Userspace-only
+
+* Builtin signature verification + userspace policy
+
+  fs-verity optionally supports a simple signature verification
+  mechanism where users can configure the kernel to require that
+  all fs-verity files be signed by a key loaded into a keyring;
+  see `Built-in signature verification`_.
+
+* Integrity Measurement Architecture (IMA)
+
+  IMA supports including fs-verity file digests and signatures in the
+  IMA measurement list and verifying fs-verity based file signatures
+  stored as security.ima xattrs, based on policy.
+
+
+User API
+========
+
+FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY
+--------------------
+
+The FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY ioctl enables fs-verity on a file.  It takes
+in a pointer to a struct fsverity_enable_arg, defined as
+follows::
+
+    struct fsverity_enable_arg {
+            __u32 version;
+            __u32 hash_algorithm;
+            __u32 block_size;
+            __u32 salt_size;
+            __u64 salt_ptr;
+            __u32 sig_size;
+            __u32 __reserved1;
+            __u64 sig_ptr;
+            __u64 __reserved2[11];
+    };
+
+This structure contains the parameters of the Merkle tree to build for
+the file, and optionally contains a signature.  It must be initialized
+as follows:
+
+- ``version`` must be 1.
+- ``hash_algorithm`` must be the identifier for the hash algorithm to
+  use for the Merkle tree, such as FS_VERITY_HASH_ALG_SHA256.  See
+  ``include/uapi/linux/fsverity.h`` for the list of possible values.
+- ``block_size`` must be the Merkle tree block size.  Currently, this
+  must be equal to the system page size, which is usually 4096 bytes.
+  Other sizes may be supported in the future.  This value is not
+  necessarily the same as the filesystem block size.
+- ``salt_size`` is the size of the salt in bytes, or 0 if no salt is
+  provided.  The salt is a value that is prepended to every hashed
+  block; it can be used to personalize the hashing for a particular
+  file or device.  Currently the maximum salt size is 32 bytes.
+- ``salt_ptr`` is the pointer to the salt, or NULL if no salt is
+  provided.
+- ``sig_size`` is the size of the signature in bytes, or 0 if no
+  signature is provided.  Currently the signature is (somewhat
+  arbitrarily) limited to 16128 bytes.  See `Built-in signature
+  verification`_ for more information.
+- ``sig_ptr``  is the pointer to the signature, or NULL if no
+  signature is provided.
+- All reserved fields must be zeroed.
+
+FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY causes the filesystem to build a Merkle tree for
+the file and persist it to a filesystem-specific location associated
+with the file, then mark the file as a verity file.  This ioctl may
+take a long time to execute on large files, and it is interruptible by
+fatal signals.
+
+FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY checks for write access to the inode.  However,
+it must be executed on an O_RDONLY file descriptor and no processes
+can have the file open for writing.  Attempts to open the file for
+writing while this ioctl is executing will fail with ETXTBSY.  (This
+is necessary to guarantee that no writable file descriptors will exist
+after verity is enabled, and to guarantee that the file's contents are
+stable while the Merkle tree is being built over it.)
+
+On success, FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY returns 0, and the file becomes a
+verity file.  On failure (including the case of interruption by a
+fatal signal), no changes are made to the file.
+
+FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY can fail with the following errors:
+
+- ``EACCES``: the process does not have write access to the file
+- ``EBADMSG``: the signature is malformed
+- ``EBUSY``: this ioctl is already running on the file
+- ``EEXIST``: the file already has verity enabled
+- ``EFAULT``: the caller provided inaccessible memory
+- ``EINTR``: the operation was interrupted by a fatal signal
+- ``EINVAL``: unsupported version, hash algorithm, or block size; or
+  reserved bits are set; or the file descriptor refers to neither a
+  regular file nor a directory.
+- ``EISDIR``: the file descriptor refers to a directory
+- ``EKEYREJECTED``: the signature doesn't match the file
+- ``EMSGSIZE``: the salt or signature is too long
+- ``ENOKEY``: the fs-verity keyring doesn't contain the certificate
+  needed to verify the signature
+- ``ENOPKG``: fs-verity recognizes the hash algorithm, but it's not
+  available in the kernel's crypto API as currently configured (e.g.
+  for SHA-512, missing CONFIG_CRYPTO_SHA512).
+- ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement fs-verity
+- ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with fs-verity
+  support; or the filesystem superblock has not had the 'verity'
+  feature enabled on it; or the filesystem does not support fs-verity
+  on this file.  (See `Filesystem support`_.)
+- ``EPERM``: the file is append-only; or, a signature is required and
+  one was not provided.
+- ``EROFS``: the filesystem is read-only
+- ``ETXTBSY``: someone has the file open for writing.  This can be the
+  caller's file descriptor, another open file descriptor, or the file
+  reference held by a writable memory map.
+
+FS_IOC_MEASURE_VERITY
+---------------------
+
+The FS_IOC_MEASURE_VERITY ioctl retrieves the digest of a verity file.
+The fs-verity file digest is a cryptographic digest that identifies
+the file contents that are being enforced on reads; it is computed via
+a Merkle tree and is different from a traditional full-file digest.
+
+This ioctl takes in a pointer to a variable-length structure::
+
+    struct fsverity_digest {
+            __u16 digest_algorithm;
+            __u16 digest_size; /* input/output */
+            __u8 digest[];
+    };
+
+``digest_size`` is an input/output field.  On input, it must be
+initialized to the number of bytes allocated for the variable-length
+``digest`` field.
+
+On success, 0 is returned and the kernel fills in the structure as
+follows:
+
+- ``digest_algorithm`` will be the hash algorithm used for the file
+  digest.  It will match ``fsverity_enable_arg::hash_algorithm``.
+- ``digest_size`` will be the size of the digest in bytes, e.g. 32
+  for SHA-256.  (This can be redundant with ``digest_algorithm``.)
+- ``digest`` will be the actual bytes of the digest.
+
+FS_IOC_MEASURE_VERITY is guaranteed to execute in constant time,
+regardless of the size of the file.
+
+FS_IOC_MEASURE_VERITY can fail with the following errors:
+
+- ``EFAULT``: the caller provided inaccessible memory
+- ``ENODATA``: the file is not a verity file
+- ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement fs-verity
+- ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with fs-verity
+  support, or the filesystem superblock has not had the 'verity'
+  feature enabled on it.  (See `Filesystem support`_.)
+- ``EOVERFLOW``: the digest is longer than the specified
+  ``digest_size`` bytes.  Try providing a larger buffer.
+
+FS_IOC_READ_VERITY_METADATA
+---------------------------
+
+The FS_IOC_READ_VERITY_METADATA ioctl reads verity metadata from a
+verity file.  This ioctl is available since Linux v5.12.
+
+This ioctl allows writing a server program that takes a verity file
+and serves it to a client program, such that the client can do its own
+fs-verity compatible verification of the file.  This only makes sense
+if the client doesn't trust the server and if the server needs to
+provide the storage for the client.
+
+This is a fairly specialized use case, and most fs-verity users won't
+need this ioctl.
+
+This ioctl takes in a pointer to the following structure::
+
+   #define FS_VERITY_METADATA_TYPE_MERKLE_TREE     1
+   #define FS_VERITY_METADATA_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR      2
+   #define FS_VERITY_METADATA_TYPE_SIGNATURE       3
+
+   struct fsverity_read_metadata_arg {
+           __u64 metadata_type;
+           __u64 offset;
+           __u64 length;
+           __u64 buf_ptr;
+           __u64 __reserved;
+   };
+
+``metadata_type`` specifies the type of metadata to read:
+
+- ``FS_VERITY_METADATA_TYPE_MERKLE_TREE`` reads the blocks of the
+  Merkle tree.  The blocks are returned in order from the root level
+  to the leaf level.  Within each level, the blocks are returned in
+  the same order that their hashes are themselves hashed.
+  See `Merkle tree`_ for more information.
+
+- ``FS_VERITY_METADATA_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR`` reads the fs-verity
+  descriptor.  See `fs-verity descriptor`_.
+
+- ``FS_VERITY_METADATA_TYPE_SIGNATURE`` reads the signature which was
+  passed to FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY, if any.  See `Built-in signature
+  verification`_.
+
+The semantics are similar to those of ``pread()``.  ``offset``
+specifies the offset in bytes into the metadata item to read from, and
+``length`` specifies the maximum number of bytes to read from the
+metadata item.  ``buf_ptr`` is the pointer to the buffer to read into,
+cast to a 64-bit integer.  ``__reserved`` must be 0.  On success, the
+number of bytes read is returned.  0 is returned at the end of the
+metadata item.  The returned length may be less than ``length``, for
+example if the ioctl is interrupted.
+
+The metadata returned by FS_IOC_READ_VERITY_METADATA isn't guaranteed
+to be authenticated against the file digest that would be returned by
+`FS_IOC_MEASURE_VERITY`_, as the metadata is expected to be used to
+implement fs-verity compatible verification anyway (though absent a
+malicious disk, the metadata will indeed match).  E.g. to implement
+this ioctl, the filesystem is allowed to just read the Merkle tree
+blocks from disk without actually verifying the path to the root node.
+
+FS_IOC_READ_VERITY_METADATA can fail with the following errors:
+
+- ``EFAULT``: the caller provided inaccessible memory
+- ``EINTR``: the ioctl was interrupted before any data was read
+- ``EINVAL``: reserved fields were set, or ``offset + length``
+  overflowed
+- ``ENODATA``: the file is not a verity file, or
+  FS_VERITY_METADATA_TYPE_SIGNATURE was requested but the file doesn't
+  have a built-in signature
+- ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement fs-verity, or
+  this ioctl is not yet implemented on it
+- ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with fs-verity
+  support, or the filesystem superblock has not had the 'verity'
+  feature enabled on it.  (See `Filesystem support`_.)
+
+FS_IOC_GETFLAGS
+---------------
+
+The existing ioctl FS_IOC_GETFLAGS (which isn't specific to fs-verity)
+can also be used to check whether a file has fs-verity enabled or not.
+To do so, check for FS_VERITY_FL (0x00100000) in the returned flags.
+
+The verity flag is not settable via FS_IOC_SETFLAGS.  You must use
+FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY instead, since parameters must be provided.
+
+statx
+-----
+
+Since Linux v5.5, the statx() system call sets STATX_ATTR_VERITY if
+the file has fs-verity enabled.  This can perform better than
+FS_IOC_GETFLAGS and FS_IOC_MEASURE_VERITY because it doesn't require
+opening the file, and opening verity files can be expensive.
+
+Accessing verity files
+======================
+
+Applications can transparently access a verity file just like a
+non-verity one, with the following exceptions:
+
+- Verity files are readonly.  They cannot be opened for writing or
+  truncate()d, even if the file mode bits allow it.  Attempts to do
+  one of these things will fail with EPERM.  However, changes to
+  metadata such as owner, mode, timestamps, and xattrs are still
+  allowed, since these are not measured by fs-verity.  Verity files
+  can also still be renamed, deleted, and linked to.
+
+- Direct I/O is not supported on verity files.  Attempts to use direct
+  I/O on such files will fall back to buffered I/O.
+
+- DAX (Direct Access) is not supported on verity files, because this
+  would circumvent the data verification.
+
+- Reads of data that doesn't match the verity Merkle tree will fail
+  with EIO (for read()) or SIGBUS (for mmap() reads).
+
+- If the sysctl "fs.verity.require_signatures" is set to 1 and the
+  file is not signed by a key in the fs-verity keyring, then opening
+  the file will fail.  See `Built-in signature verification`_.
+
+Direct access to the Merkle tree is not supported.  Therefore, if a
+verity file is copied, or is backed up and restored, then it will lose
+its "verity"-ness.  fs-verity is primarily meant for files like
+executables that are managed by a package manager.
+
+File digest computation
+=======================
+
+This section describes how fs-verity hashes the file contents using a
+Merkle tree to produce the digest which cryptographically identifies
+the file contents.  This algorithm is the same for all filesystems
+that support fs-verity.
+
+Userspace only needs to be aware of this algorithm if it needs to
+compute fs-verity file digests itself, e.g. in order to sign files.
+
+.. _fsverity_merkle_tree:
+
+Merkle tree
+-----------
+
+The file contents is divided into blocks, where the block size is
+configurable but is usually 4096 bytes.  The end of the last block is
+zero-padded if needed.  Each block is then hashed, producing the first
+level of hashes.  Then, the hashes in this first level are grouped
+into 'blocksize'-byte blocks (zero-padding the ends as needed) and
+these blocks are hashed, producing the second level of hashes.  This
+proceeds up the tree until only a single block remains.  The hash of
+this block is the "Merkle tree root hash".
+
+If the file fits in one block and is nonempty, then the "Merkle tree
+root hash" is simply the hash of the single data block.  If the file
+is empty, then the "Merkle tree root hash" is all zeroes.
+
+The "blocks" here are not necessarily the same as "filesystem blocks".
+
+If a salt was specified, then it's zero-padded to the closest multiple
+of the input size of the hash algorithm's compression function, e.g.
+64 bytes for SHA-256 or 128 bytes for SHA-512.  The padded salt is
+prepended to every data or Merkle tree block that is hashed.
+
+The purpose of the block padding is to cause every hash to be taken
+over the same amount of data, which simplifies the implementation and
+keeps open more possibilities for hardware acceleration.  The purpose
+of the salt padding is to make the salting "free" when the salted hash
+state is precomputed, then imported for each hash.
+
+Example: in the recommended configuration of SHA-256 and 4K blocks,
+128 hash values fit in each block.  Thus, each level of the Merkle
+tree is approximately 128 times smaller than the previous, and for
+large files the Merkle tree's size converges to approximately 1/127 of
+the original file size.  However, for small files, the padding is
+significant, making the space overhead proportionally more.
+
+.. _fsverity_descriptor:
+
+fs-verity descriptor
+--------------------
+
+By itself, the Merkle tree root hash is ambiguous.  For example, it
+can't a distinguish a large file from a small second file whose data
+is exactly the top-level hash block of the first file.  Ambiguities
+also arise from the convention of padding to the next block boundary.
+
+To solve this problem, the fs-verity file digest is actually computed
+as a hash of the following structure, which contains the Merkle tree
+root hash as well as other fields such as the file size::
+
+    struct fsverity_descriptor {
+            __u8 version;           /* must be 1 */
+            __u8 hash_algorithm;    /* Merkle tree hash algorithm */
+            __u8 log_blocksize;     /* log2 of size of data and tree blocks */
+            __u8 salt_size;         /* size of salt in bytes; 0 if none */
+            __le32 __reserved_0x04; /* must be 0 */
+            __le64 data_size;       /* size of file the Merkle tree is built over */
+            __u8 root_hash[64];     /* Merkle tree root hash */
+            __u8 salt[32];          /* salt prepended to each hashed block */
+            __u8 __reserved[144];   /* must be 0's */
+    };
+
+Built-in signature verification
+===============================
+
+With CONFIG_FS_VERITY_BUILTIN_SIGNATURES=y, fs-verity supports putting
+a portion of an authentication policy (see `Use cases`_) in the
+kernel.  Specifically, it adds support for:
+
+1. At fs-verity module initialization time, a keyring ".fs-verity" is
+   created.  The root user can add trusted X.509 certificates to this
+   keyring using the add_key() system call, then (when done)
+   optionally use keyctl_restrict_keyring() to prevent additional
+   certificates from being added.
+
+2. `FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY`_ accepts a pointer to a PKCS#7 formatted
+   detached signature in DER format of the file's fs-verity digest.
+   On success, this signature is persisted alongside the Merkle tree.
+   Then, any time the file is opened, the kernel will verify the
+   file's actual digest against this signature, using the certificates
+   in the ".fs-verity" keyring.
+
+3. A new sysctl "fs.verity.require_signatures" is made available.
+   When set to 1, the kernel requires that all verity files have a
+   correctly signed digest as described in (2).
+
+fs-verity file digests must be signed in the following format, which
+is similar to the structure used by `FS_IOC_MEASURE_VERITY`_::
+
+    struct fsverity_formatted_digest {
+            char magic[8];                  /* must be "FSVerity" */
+            __le16 digest_algorithm;
+            __le16 digest_size;
+            __u8 digest[];
+    };
+
+fs-verity's built-in signature verification support is meant as a
+relatively simple mechanism that can be used to provide some level of
+authenticity protection for verity files, as an alternative to doing
+the signature verification in userspace or using IMA-appraisal.
+However, with this mechanism, userspace programs still need to check
+that the verity bit is set, and there is no protection against verity
+files being swapped around.
+
+Filesystem support
+==================
+
+fs-verity is supported by several filesystems, described below.  The
+CONFIG_FS_VERITY kconfig option must be enabled to use fs-verity on
+any of these filesystems.
+
+``include/linux/fsverity.h`` declares the interface between the
+``fs/verity/`` support layer and filesystems.  Briefly, filesystems
+must provide an ``fsverity_operations`` structure that provides
+methods to read and write the verity metadata to a filesystem-specific
+location, including the Merkle tree blocks and
+``fsverity_descriptor``.  Filesystems must also call functions in
+``fs/verity/`` at certain times, such as when a file is opened or when
+pages have been read into the pagecache.  (See `Verifying data`_.)
+
+ext4
+----
+
+ext4 supports fs-verity since Linux v5.4 and e2fsprogs v1.45.2.
+
+To create verity files on an ext4 filesystem, the filesystem must have
+been formatted with ``-O verity`` or had ``tune2fs -O verity`` run on
+it.  "verity" is an RO_COMPAT filesystem feature, so once set, old
+kernels will only be able to mount the filesystem readonly, and old
+versions of e2fsck will be unable to check the filesystem.  Moreover,
+currently ext4 only supports mounting a filesystem with the "verity"
+feature when its block size is equal to PAGE_SIZE (often 4096 bytes).
+
+ext4 sets the EXT4_VERITY_FL on-disk inode flag on verity files.  It
+can only be set by `FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY`_, and it cannot be cleared.
+
+ext4 also supports encryption, which can be used simultaneously with
+fs-verity.  In this case, the plaintext data is verified rather than
+the ciphertext.  This is necessary in order to make the fs-verity file
+digest meaningful, since every file is encrypted differently.
+
+ext4 stores the verity metadata (Merkle tree and fsverity_descriptor)
+past the end of the file, starting at the first 64K boundary beyond
+i_size.  This approach works because (a) verity files are readonly,
+and (b) pages fully beyond i_size aren't visible to userspace but can
+be read/written internally by ext4 with only some relatively small
+changes to ext4.  This approach avoids having to depend on the
+EA_INODE feature and on rearchitecturing ext4's xattr support to
+support paging multi-gigabyte xattrs into memory, and to support
+encrypting xattrs.  Note that the verity metadata *must* be encrypted
+when the file is, since it contains hashes of the plaintext data.
+
+Currently, ext4 verity only supports the case where the Merkle tree
+block size, filesystem block size, and page size are all the same.  It
+also only supports extent-based files.
+
+f2fs
+----
+
+f2fs supports fs-verity since Linux v5.4 and f2fs-tools v1.11.0.
+
+To create verity files on an f2fs filesystem, the filesystem must have
+been formatted with ``-O verity``.
+
+f2fs sets the FADVISE_VERITY_BIT on-disk inode flag on verity files.
+It can only be set by `FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY`_, and it cannot be
+cleared.
+
+Like ext4, f2fs stores the verity metadata (Merkle tree and
+fsverity_descriptor) past the end of the file, starting at the first
+64K boundary beyond i_size.  See explanation for ext4 above.
+Moreover, f2fs supports at most 4096 bytes of xattr entries per inode
+which wouldn't be enough for even a single Merkle tree block.
+
+Currently, f2fs verity only supports a Merkle tree block size of 4096.
+Also, f2fs doesn't support enabling verity on files that currently
+have atomic or volatile writes pending.
+
+btrfs
+-----
+
+btrfs supports fs-verity since Linux v5.15.  Verity-enabled inodes are
+marked with a RO_COMPAT inode flag, and the verity metadata is stored
+in separate btree items.
+
+Implementation details
+======================
+
+Verifying data
+--------------
+
+fs-verity ensures that all reads of a verity file's data are verified,
+regardless of which syscall is used to do the read (e.g. mmap(),
+read(), pread()) and regardless of whether it's the first read or a
+later read (unless the later read can return cached data that was
+already verified).  Below, we describe how filesystems implement this.
+
+Pagecache
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+For filesystems using Linux's pagecache, the ``->read_folio()`` and
+``->readahead()`` methods must be modified to verify pages before they
+are marked Uptodate.  Merely hooking ``->read_iter()`` would be
+insufficient, since ``->read_iter()`` is not used for memory maps.
+
+Therefore, fs/verity/ provides a function fsverity_verify_page() which
+verifies a page that has been read into the pagecache of a verity
+inode, but is still locked and not Uptodate, so it's not yet readable
+by userspace.  As needed to do the verification,
+fsverity_verify_page() will call back into the filesystem to read
+Merkle tree pages via fsverity_operations::read_merkle_tree_page().
+
+fsverity_verify_page() returns false if verification failed; in this
+case, the filesystem must not set the page Uptodate.  Following this,
+as per the usual Linux pagecache behavior, attempts by userspace to
+read() from the part of the file containing the page will fail with
+EIO, and accesses to the page within a memory map will raise SIGBUS.
+
+fsverity_verify_page() currently only supports the case where the
+Merkle tree block size is equal to PAGE_SIZE (often 4096 bytes).
+
+In principle, fsverity_verify_page() verifies the entire path in the
+Merkle tree from the data page to the root hash.  However, for
+efficiency the filesystem may cache the hash pages.  Therefore,
+fsverity_verify_page() only ascends the tree reading hash pages until
+an already-verified hash page is seen, as indicated by the PageChecked
+bit being set.  It then verifies the path to that page.
+
+This optimization, which is also used by dm-verity, results in
+excellent sequential read performance.  This is because usually (e.g.
+127 in 128 times for 4K blocks and SHA-256) the hash page from the
+bottom level of the tree will already be cached and checked from
+reading a previous data page.  However, random reads perform worse.
+
+Block device based filesystems
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Block device based filesystems (e.g. ext4 and f2fs) in Linux also use
+the pagecache, so the above subsection applies too.  However, they
+also usually read many pages from a file at once, grouped into a
+structure called a "bio".  To make it easier for these types of
+filesystems to support fs-verity, fs/verity/ also provides a function
+fsverity_verify_bio() which verifies all pages in a bio.
+
+ext4 and f2fs also support encryption.  If a verity file is also
+encrypted, the pages must be decrypted before being verified.  To
+support this, these filesystems allocate a "post-read context" for
+each bio and store it in ``->bi_private``::
+
+    struct bio_post_read_ctx {
+           struct bio *bio;
+           struct work_struct work;
+           unsigned int cur_step;
+           unsigned int enabled_steps;
+    };
+
+``enabled_steps`` is a bitmask that specifies whether decryption,
+verity, or both is enabled.  After the bio completes, for each needed
+postprocessing step the filesystem enqueues the bio_post_read_ctx on a
+workqueue, and then the workqueue work does the decryption or
+verification.  Finally, pages where no decryption or verity error
+occurred are marked Uptodate, and the pages are unlocked.
+
+On many filesystems, files can contain holes.  Normally,
+``->readahead()`` simply zeroes holes and sets the corresponding pages
+Uptodate; no bios are issued.  To prevent this case from bypassing
+fs-verity, these filesystems use fsverity_verify_page() to verify hole
+pages.
+
+Filesystems also disable direct I/O on verity files, since otherwise
+direct I/O would bypass fs-verity.
+
+Userspace utility
+=================
+
+This document focuses on the kernel, but a userspace utility for
+fs-verity can be found at:
+
+	https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/ebiggers/fsverity-utils.git
+
+See the README.md file in the fsverity-utils source tree for details,
+including examples of setting up fs-verity protected files.
+
+Tests
+=====
+
+To test fs-verity, use xfstests.  For example, using `kvm-xfstests
+<https://github.com/tytso/xfstests-bld/blob/master/Documentation/kvm-quickstart.md>`_::
+
+    kvm-xfstests -c ext4,f2fs,btrfs -g verity
+
+FAQ
+===
+
+This section answers frequently asked questions about fs-verity that
+weren't already directly answered in other parts of this document.
+
+:Q: Why isn't fs-verity part of IMA?
+:A: fs-verity and IMA (Integrity Measurement Architecture) have
+    different focuses.  fs-verity is a filesystem-level mechanism for
+    hashing individual files using a Merkle tree.  In contrast, IMA
+    specifies a system-wide policy that specifies which files are
+    hashed and what to do with those hashes, such as log them,
+    authenticate them, or add them to a measurement list.
+
+    IMA supports the fs-verity hashing mechanism as an alternative
+    to full file hashes, for those who want the performance and
+    security benefits of the Merkle tree based hash.  However, it
+    doesn't make sense to force all uses of fs-verity to be through
+    IMA.  fs-verity already meets many users' needs even as a
+    standalone filesystem feature, and it's testable like other
+    filesystem features e.g. with xfstests.
+
+:Q: Isn't fs-verity useless because the attacker can just modify the
+    hashes in the Merkle tree, which is stored on-disk?
+:A: To verify the authenticity of an fs-verity file you must verify
+    the authenticity of the "fs-verity file digest", which
+    incorporates the root hash of the Merkle tree.  See `Use cases`_.
+
+:Q: Isn't fs-verity useless because the attacker can just replace a
+    verity file with a non-verity one?
+:A: See `Use cases`_.  In the initial use case, it's really trusted
+    userspace code that authenticates the files; fs-verity is just a
+    tool to do this job efficiently and securely.  The trusted
+    userspace code will consider non-verity files to be inauthentic.
+
+:Q: Why does the Merkle tree need to be stored on-disk?  Couldn't you
+    store just the root hash?
+:A: If the Merkle tree wasn't stored on-disk, then you'd have to
+    compute the entire tree when the file is first accessed, even if
+    just one byte is being read.  This is a fundamental consequence of
+    how Merkle tree hashing works.  To verify a leaf node, you need to
+    verify the whole path to the root hash, including the root node
+    (the thing which the root hash is a hash of).  But if the root
+    node isn't stored on-disk, you have to compute it by hashing its
+    children, and so on until you've actually hashed the entire file.
+
+    That defeats most of the point of doing a Merkle tree-based hash,
+    since if you have to hash the whole file ahead of time anyway,
+    then you could simply do sha256(file) instead.  That would be much
+    simpler, and a bit faster too.
+
+    It's true that an in-memory Merkle tree could still provide the
+    advantage of verification on every read rather than just on the
+    first read.  However, it would be inefficient because every time a
+    hash page gets evicted (you can't pin the entire Merkle tree into
+    memory, since it may be very large), in order to restore it you
+    again need to hash everything below it in the tree.  This again
+    defeats most of the point of doing a Merkle tree-based hash, since
+    a single block read could trigger re-hashing gigabytes of data.
+
+:Q: But couldn't you store just the leaf nodes and compute the rest?
+:A: See previous answer; this really just moves up one level, since
+    one could alternatively interpret the data blocks as being the
+    leaf nodes of the Merkle tree.  It's true that the tree can be
+    computed much faster if the leaf level is stored rather than just
+    the data, but that's only because each level is less than 1% the
+    size of the level below (assuming the recommended settings of
+    SHA-256 and 4K blocks).  For the exact same reason, by storing
+    "just the leaf nodes" you'd already be storing over 99% of the
+    tree, so you might as well simply store the whole tree.
+
+:Q: Can the Merkle tree be built ahead of time, e.g. distributed as
+    part of a package that is installed to many computers?
+:A: This isn't currently supported.  It was part of the original
+    design, but was removed to simplify the kernel UAPI and because it
+    wasn't a critical use case.  Files are usually installed once and
+    used many times, and cryptographic hashing is somewhat fast on
+    most modern processors.
+
+:Q: Why doesn't fs-verity support writes?
+:A: Write support would be very difficult and would require a
+    completely different design, so it's well outside the scope of
+    fs-verity.  Write support would require:
+
+    - A way to maintain consistency between the data and hashes,
+      including all levels of hashes, since corruption after a crash
+      (especially of potentially the entire file!) is unacceptable.
+      The main options for solving this are data journalling,
+      copy-on-write, and log-structured volume.  But it's very hard to
+      retrofit existing filesystems with new consistency mechanisms.
+      Data journalling is available on ext4, but is very slow.
+
+    - Rebuilding the Merkle tree after every write, which would be
+      extremely inefficient.  Alternatively, a different authenticated
+      dictionary structure such as an "authenticated skiplist" could
+      be used.  However, this would be far more complex.
+
+    Compare it to dm-verity vs. dm-integrity.  dm-verity is very
+    simple: the kernel just verifies read-only data against a
+    read-only Merkle tree.  In contrast, dm-integrity supports writes
+    but is slow, is much more complex, and doesn't actually support
+    full-device authentication since it authenticates each sector
+    independently, i.e. there is no "root hash".  It doesn't really
+    make sense for the same device-mapper target to support these two
+    very different cases; the same applies to fs-verity.
+
+:Q: Since verity files are immutable, why isn't the immutable bit set?
+:A: The existing "immutable" bit (FS_IMMUTABLE_FL) already has a
+    specific set of semantics which not only make the file contents
+    read-only, but also prevent the file from being deleted, renamed,
+    linked to, or having its owner or mode changed.  These extra
+    properties are unwanted for fs-verity, so reusing the immutable
+    bit isn't appropriate.
+
+:Q: Why does the API use ioctls instead of setxattr() and getxattr()?
+:A: Abusing the xattr interface for basically arbitrary syscalls is
+    heavily frowned upon by most of the Linux filesystem developers.
+    An xattr should really just be an xattr on-disk, not an API to
+    e.g. magically trigger construction of a Merkle tree.
+
+:Q: Does fs-verity support remote filesystems?
+:A: So far all filesystems that have implemented fs-verity support are
+    local filesystems, but in principle any filesystem that can store
+    per-file verity metadata can support fs-verity, regardless of
+    whether it's local or remote.  Some filesystems may have fewer
+    options of where to store the verity metadata; one possibility is
+    to store it past the end of the file and "hide" it from userspace
+    by manipulating i_size.  The data verification functions provided
+    by ``fs/verity/`` also assume that the filesystem uses the Linux
+    pagecache, but both local and remote filesystems normally do so.
+
+:Q: Why is anything filesystem-specific at all?  Shouldn't fs-verity
+    be implemented entirely at the VFS level?
+:A: There are many reasons why this is not possible or would be very
+    difficult, including the following:
+
+    - To prevent bypassing verification, pages must not be marked
+      Uptodate until they've been verified.  Currently, each
+      filesystem is responsible for marking pages Uptodate via
+      ``->readahead()``.  Therefore, currently it's not possible for
+      the VFS to do the verification on its own.  Changing this would
+      require significant changes to the VFS and all filesystems.
+
+    - It would require defining a filesystem-independent way to store
+      the verity metadata.  Extended attributes don't work for this
+      because (a) the Merkle tree may be gigabytes, but many
+      filesystems assume that all xattrs fit into a single 4K
+      filesystem block, and (b) ext4 and f2fs encryption doesn't
+      encrypt xattrs, yet the Merkle tree *must* be encrypted when the
+      file contents are, because it stores hashes of the plaintext
+      file contents.
+
+      So the verity metadata would have to be stored in an actual
+      file.  Using a separate file would be very ugly, since the
+      metadata is fundamentally part of the file to be protected, and
+      it could cause problems where users could delete the real file
+      but not the metadata file or vice versa.  On the other hand,
+      having it be in the same file would break applications unless
+      filesystems' notion of i_size were divorced from the VFS's,
+      which would be complex and require changes to all filesystems.
+
+    - It's desirable that FS_IOC_ENABLE_VERITY uses the filesystem's
+      transaction mechanism so that either the file ends up with
+      verity enabled, or no changes were made.  Allowing intermediate
+      states to occur after a crash may cause problems.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fuse-io.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/fuse-io.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..255a368fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fuse-io.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============
+Fuse I/O Modes
+==============
+
+Fuse supports the following I/O modes:
+
+- direct-io
+- cached
+  + write-through
+  + writeback-cache
+
+The direct-io mode can be selected with the FOPEN_DIRECT_IO flag in the
+FUSE_OPEN reply.
+
+In direct-io mode the page cache is completely bypassed for reads and writes.
+No read-ahead takes place. Shared mmap is disabled.
+
+In cached mode reads may be satisfied from the page cache, and data may be
+read-ahead by the kernel to fill the cache.  The cache is always kept consistent
+after any writes to the file.  All mmap modes are supported.
+
+The cached mode has two sub modes controlling how writes are handled.  The
+write-through mode is the default and is supported on all kernels.  The
+writeback-cache mode may be selected by the FUSE_WRITEBACK_CACHE flag in the
+FUSE_INIT reply.
+
+In write-through mode each write is immediately sent to userspace as one or more
+WRITE requests, as well as updating any cached pages (and caching previously
+uncached, but fully written pages).  No READ requests are ever sent for writes,
+so when an uncached page is partially written, the page is discarded.
+
+In writeback-cache mode (enabled by the FUSE_WRITEBACK_CACHE flag) writes go to
+the cache only, which means that the write(2) syscall can often complete very
+fast.  Dirty pages are written back implicitly (background writeback or page
+reclaim on memory pressure) or explicitly (invoked by close(2), fsync(2) and
+when the last ref to the file is being released on munmap(2)).  This mode
+assumes that all changes to the filesystem go through the FUSE kernel module
+(size and atime/ctime/mtime attributes are kept up-to-date by the kernel), so
+it's generally not suitable for network filesystems.  If a partial page is
+written, then the page needs to be first read from userspace.  This means, that
+even for files opened for O_WRONLY it is possible that READ requests will be
+generated by the kernel.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fuse.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/fuse.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1e31e87ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fuse.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,426 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+====
+FUSE
+====
+
+Definitions
+===========
+
+Userspace filesystem:
+  A filesystem in which data and metadata are provided by an ordinary
+  userspace process.  The filesystem can be accessed normally through
+  the kernel interface.
+
+Filesystem daemon:
+  The process(es) providing the data and metadata of the filesystem.
+
+Non-privileged mount (or user mount):
+  A userspace filesystem mounted by a non-privileged (non-root) user.
+  The filesystem daemon is running with the privileges of the mounting
+  user.  NOTE: this is not the same as mounts allowed with the "user"
+  option in /etc/fstab, which is not discussed here.
+
+Filesystem connection:
+  A connection between the filesystem daemon and the kernel.  The
+  connection exists until either the daemon dies, or the filesystem is
+  umounted.  Note that detaching (or lazy umounting) the filesystem
+  does *not* break the connection, in this case it will exist until
+  the last reference to the filesystem is released.
+
+Mount owner:
+  The user who does the mounting.
+
+User:
+  The user who is performing filesystem operations.
+
+What is FUSE?
+=============
+
+FUSE is a userspace filesystem framework.  It consists of a kernel
+module (fuse.ko), a userspace library (libfuse.*) and a mount utility
+(fusermount).
+
+One of the most important features of FUSE is allowing secure,
+non-privileged mounts.  This opens up new possibilities for the use of
+filesystems.  A good example is sshfs: a secure network filesystem
+using the sftp protocol.
+
+The userspace library and utilities are available from the
+`FUSE homepage: <https://github.com/libfuse/>`_
+
+Filesystem type
+===============
+
+The filesystem type given to mount(2) can be one of the following:
+
+    fuse
+      This is the usual way to mount a FUSE filesystem.  The first
+      argument of the mount system call may contain an arbitrary string,
+      which is not interpreted by the kernel.
+
+    fuseblk
+      The filesystem is block device based.  The first argument of the
+      mount system call is interpreted as the name of the device.
+
+Mount options
+=============
+
+fd=N
+  The file descriptor to use for communication between the userspace
+  filesystem and the kernel.  The file descriptor must have been
+  obtained by opening the FUSE device ('/dev/fuse').
+
+rootmode=M
+  The file mode of the filesystem's root in octal representation.
+
+user_id=N
+  The numeric user id of the mount owner.
+
+group_id=N
+  The numeric group id of the mount owner.
+
+default_permissions
+  By default FUSE doesn't check file access permissions, the
+  filesystem is free to implement its access policy or leave it to
+  the underlying file access mechanism (e.g. in case of network
+  filesystems).  This option enables permission checking, restricting
+  access based on file mode.  It is usually useful together with the
+  'allow_other' mount option.
+
+allow_other
+  This option overrides the security measure restricting file access
+  to the user mounting the filesystem.  This option is by default only
+  allowed to root, but this restriction can be removed with a
+  (userspace) configuration option.
+
+max_read=N
+  With this option the maximum size of read operations can be set.
+  The default is infinite.  Note that the size of read requests is
+  limited anyway to 32 pages (which is 128kbyte on i386).
+
+blksize=N
+  Set the block size for the filesystem.  The default is 512.  This
+  option is only valid for 'fuseblk' type mounts.
+
+Control filesystem
+==================
+
+There's a control filesystem for FUSE, which can be mounted by::
+
+  mount -t fusectl none /sys/fs/fuse/connections
+
+Mounting it under the '/sys/fs/fuse/connections' directory makes it
+backwards compatible with earlier versions.
+
+Under the fuse control filesystem each connection has a directory
+named by a unique number.
+
+For each connection the following files exist within this directory:
+
+	waiting
+	  The number of requests which are waiting to be transferred to
+	  userspace or being processed by the filesystem daemon.  If there is
+	  no filesystem activity and 'waiting' is non-zero, then the
+	  filesystem is hung or deadlocked.
+
+	abort
+	  Writing anything into this file will abort the filesystem
+	  connection.  This means that all waiting requests will be aborted an
+	  error returned for all aborted and new requests.
+
+Only the owner of the mount may read or write these files.
+
+Interrupting filesystem operations
+##################################
+
+If a process issuing a FUSE filesystem request is interrupted, the
+following will happen:
+
+  -  If the request is not yet sent to userspace AND the signal is
+     fatal (SIGKILL or unhandled fatal signal), then the request is
+     dequeued and returns immediately.
+
+  -  If the request is not yet sent to userspace AND the signal is not
+     fatal, then an interrupted flag is set for the request.  When
+     the request has been successfully transferred to userspace and
+     this flag is set, an INTERRUPT request is queued.
+
+  -  If the request is already sent to userspace, then an INTERRUPT
+     request is queued.
+
+INTERRUPT requests take precedence over other requests, so the
+userspace filesystem will receive queued INTERRUPTs before any others.
+
+The userspace filesystem may ignore the INTERRUPT requests entirely,
+or may honor them by sending a reply to the *original* request, with
+the error set to EINTR.
+
+It is also possible that there's a race between processing the
+original request and its INTERRUPT request.  There are two possibilities:
+
+  1. The INTERRUPT request is processed before the original request is
+     processed
+
+  2. The INTERRUPT request is processed after the original request has
+     been answered
+
+If the filesystem cannot find the original request, it should wait for
+some timeout and/or a number of new requests to arrive, after which it
+should reply to the INTERRUPT request with an EAGAIN error.  In case
+1) the INTERRUPT request will be requeued.  In case 2) the INTERRUPT
+reply will be ignored.
+
+Aborting a filesystem connection
+================================
+
+It is possible to get into certain situations where the filesystem is
+not responding.  Reasons for this may be:
+
+  a) Broken userspace filesystem implementation
+
+  b) Network connection down
+
+  c) Accidental deadlock
+
+  d) Malicious deadlock
+
+(For more on c) and d) see later sections)
+
+In either of these cases it may be useful to abort the connection to
+the filesystem.  There are several ways to do this:
+
+  - Kill the filesystem daemon.  Works in case of a) and b)
+
+  - Kill the filesystem daemon and all users of the filesystem.  Works
+    in all cases except some malicious deadlocks
+
+  - Use forced umount (umount -f).  Works in all cases but only if
+    filesystem is still attached (it hasn't been lazy unmounted)
+
+  - Abort filesystem through the FUSE control filesystem.  Most
+    powerful method, always works.
+
+How do non-privileged mounts work?
+==================================
+
+Since the mount() system call is a privileged operation, a helper
+program (fusermount) is needed, which is installed setuid root.
+
+The implication of providing non-privileged mounts is that the mount
+owner must not be able to use this capability to compromise the
+system.  Obvious requirements arising from this are:
+
+ A) mount owner should not be able to get elevated privileges with the
+    help of the mounted filesystem
+
+ B) mount owner should not get illegitimate access to information from
+    other users' and the super user's processes
+
+ C) mount owner should not be able to induce undesired behavior in
+    other users' or the super user's processes
+
+How are requirements fulfilled?
+===============================
+
+ A) The mount owner could gain elevated privileges by either:
+
+    1. creating a filesystem containing a device file, then opening this device
+
+    2. creating a filesystem containing a suid or sgid application, then executing this application
+
+    The solution is not to allow opening device files and ignore
+    setuid and setgid bits when executing programs.  To ensure this
+    fusermount always adds "nosuid" and "nodev" to the mount options
+    for non-privileged mounts.
+
+ B) If another user is accessing files or directories in the
+    filesystem, the filesystem daemon serving requests can record the
+    exact sequence and timing of operations performed.  This
+    information is otherwise inaccessible to the mount owner, so this
+    counts as an information leak.
+
+    The solution to this problem will be presented in point 2) of C).
+
+ C) There are several ways in which the mount owner can induce
+    undesired behavior in other users' processes, such as:
+
+     1) mounting a filesystem over a file or directory which the mount
+        owner could otherwise not be able to modify (or could only
+        make limited modifications).
+
+        This is solved in fusermount, by checking the access
+        permissions on the mountpoint and only allowing the mount if
+        the mount owner can do unlimited modification (has write
+        access to the mountpoint, and mountpoint is not a "sticky"
+        directory)
+
+     2) Even if 1) is solved the mount owner can change the behavior
+        of other users' processes.
+
+         i) It can slow down or indefinitely delay the execution of a
+            filesystem operation creating a DoS against the user or the
+            whole system.  For example a suid application locking a
+            system file, and then accessing a file on the mount owner's
+            filesystem could be stopped, and thus causing the system
+            file to be locked forever.
+
+         ii) It can present files or directories of unlimited length, or
+             directory structures of unlimited depth, possibly causing a
+             system process to eat up diskspace, memory or other
+             resources, again causing *DoS*.
+
+	The solution to this as well as B) is not to allow processes
+	to access the filesystem, which could otherwise not be
+	monitored or manipulated by the mount owner.  Since if the
+	mount owner can ptrace a process, it can do all of the above
+	without using a FUSE mount, the same criteria as used in
+	ptrace can be used to check if a process is allowed to access
+	the filesystem or not.
+
+	Note that the *ptrace* check is not strictly necessary to
+	prevent C/2/i, it is enough to check if mount owner has enough
+	privilege to send signal to the process accessing the
+	filesystem, since *SIGSTOP* can be used to get a similar effect.
+
+I think these limitations are unacceptable?
+===========================================
+
+If a sysadmin trusts the users enough, or can ensure through other
+measures, that system processes will never enter non-privileged
+mounts, it can relax the last limitation in several ways:
+
+  - With the 'user_allow_other' config option. If this config option is
+    set, the mounting user can add the 'allow_other' mount option which
+    disables the check for other users' processes.
+
+    User namespaces have an unintuitive interaction with 'allow_other':
+    an unprivileged user - normally restricted from mounting with
+    'allow_other' - could do so in a user namespace where they're
+    privileged. If any process could access such an 'allow_other' mount
+    this would give the mounting user the ability to manipulate
+    processes in user namespaces where they're unprivileged. For this
+    reason 'allow_other' restricts access to users in the same userns
+    or a descendant.
+
+  - With the 'allow_sys_admin_access' module option. If this option is
+    set, super user's processes have unrestricted access to mounts
+    irrespective of allow_other setting or user namespace of the
+    mounting user.
+
+Note that both of these relaxations expose the system to potential
+information leak or *DoS* as described in points B and C/2/i-ii in the
+preceding section.
+
+Kernel - userspace interface
+============================
+
+The following diagram shows how a filesystem operation (in this
+example unlink) is performed in FUSE. ::
+
+
+ |  "rm /mnt/fuse/file"               |  FUSE filesystem daemon
+ |                                    |
+ |                                    |  >sys_read()
+ |                                    |    >fuse_dev_read()
+ |                                    |      >request_wait()
+ |                                    |        [sleep on fc->waitq]
+ |                                    |
+ |  >sys_unlink()                     |
+ |    >fuse_unlink()                  |
+ |      [get request from             |
+ |       fc->unused_list]             |
+ |      >request_send()               |
+ |        [queue req on fc->pending]  |
+ |        [wake up fc->waitq]         |        [woken up]
+ |        >request_wait_answer()      |
+ |          [sleep on req->waitq]     |
+ |                                    |      <request_wait()
+ |                                    |      [remove req from fc->pending]
+ |                                    |      [copy req to read buffer]
+ |                                    |      [add req to fc->processing]
+ |                                    |    <fuse_dev_read()
+ |                                    |  <sys_read()
+ |                                    |
+ |                                    |  [perform unlink]
+ |                                    |
+ |                                    |  >sys_write()
+ |                                    |    >fuse_dev_write()
+ |                                    |      [look up req in fc->processing]
+ |                                    |      [remove from fc->processing]
+ |                                    |      [copy write buffer to req]
+ |          [woken up]                |      [wake up req->waitq]
+ |                                    |    <fuse_dev_write()
+ |                                    |  <sys_write()
+ |        <request_wait_answer()      |
+ |      <request_send()               |
+ |      [add request to               |
+ |       fc->unused_list]             |
+ |    <fuse_unlink()                  |
+ |  <sys_unlink()                     |
+
+.. note:: Everything in the description above is greatly simplified
+
+There are a couple of ways in which to deadlock a FUSE filesystem.
+Since we are talking about unprivileged userspace programs,
+something must be done about these.
+
+**Scenario 1 -  Simple deadlock**::
+
+ |  "rm /mnt/fuse/file"               |  FUSE filesystem daemon
+ |                                    |
+ |  >sys_unlink("/mnt/fuse/file")     |
+ |    [acquire inode semaphore        |
+ |     for "file"]                    |
+ |    >fuse_unlink()                  |
+ |      [sleep on req->waitq]         |
+ |                                    |  <sys_read()
+ |                                    |  >sys_unlink("/mnt/fuse/file")
+ |                                    |    [acquire inode semaphore
+ |                                    |     for "file"]
+ |                                    |    *DEADLOCK*
+
+The solution for this is to allow the filesystem to be aborted.
+
+**Scenario 2 - Tricky deadlock**
+
+
+This one needs a carefully crafted filesystem.  It's a variation on
+the above, only the call back to the filesystem is not explicit,
+but is caused by a pagefault. ::
+
+ |  Kamikaze filesystem thread 1      |  Kamikaze filesystem thread 2
+ |                                    |
+ |  [fd = open("/mnt/fuse/file")]     |  [request served normally]
+ |  [mmap fd to 'addr']               |
+ |  [close fd]                        |  [FLUSH triggers 'magic' flag]
+ |  [read a byte from addr]           |
+ |    >do_page_fault()                |
+ |      [find or create page]         |
+ |      [lock page]                   |
+ |      >fuse_readpage()              |
+ |         [queue READ request]       |
+ |         [sleep on req->waitq]      |
+ |                                    |  [read request to buffer]
+ |                                    |  [create reply header before addr]
+ |                                    |  >sys_write(addr - headerlength)
+ |                                    |    >fuse_dev_write()
+ |                                    |      [look up req in fc->processing]
+ |                                    |      [remove from fc->processing]
+ |                                    |      [copy write buffer to req]
+ |                                    |        >do_page_fault()
+ |                                    |           [find or create page]
+ |                                    |           [lock page]
+ |                                    |           * DEADLOCK *
+
+The solution is basically the same as above.
+
+An additional problem is that while the write buffer is being copied
+to the request, the request must not be interrupted/aborted.  This is
+because the destination address of the copy may not be valid after the
+request has returned.
+
+This is solved with doing the copy atomically, and allowing abort
+while the page(s) belonging to the write buffer are faulted with
+get_user_pages().  The 'req->locked' flag indicates when the copy is
+taking place, and abort is delayed until this flag is unset.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-glocks.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-glocks.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d14f230f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-glocks.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,253 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================
+Glock internal locking rules
+============================
+
+This documents the basic principles of the glock state machine
+internals. Each glock (struct gfs2_glock in fs/gfs2/incore.h)
+has two main (internal) locks:
+
+ 1. A spinlock (gl_lockref.lock) which protects the internal state such
+    as gl_state, gl_target and the list of holders (gl_holders)
+ 2. A non-blocking bit lock, GLF_LOCK, which is used to prevent other
+    threads from making calls to the DLM, etc. at the same time. If a
+    thread takes this lock, it must then call run_queue (usually via the
+    workqueue) when it releases it in order to ensure any pending tasks
+    are completed.
+
+The gl_holders list contains all the queued lock requests (not
+just the holders) associated with the glock. If there are any
+held locks, then they will be contiguous entries at the head
+of the list. Locks are granted in strictly the order that they
+are queued, except for those marked LM_FLAG_PRIORITY which are
+used only during recovery, and even then only for journal locks.
+
+There are three lock states that users of the glock layer can request,
+namely shared (SH), deferred (DF) and exclusive (EX). Those translate
+to the following DLM lock modes:
+
+==========	====== =====================================================
+Glock mode      DLM    lock mode
+==========	====== =====================================================
+    UN          IV/NL  Unlocked (no DLM lock associated with glock) or NL
+    SH          PR     (Protected read)
+    DF          CW     (Concurrent write)
+    EX          EX     (Exclusive)
+==========	====== =====================================================
+
+Thus DF is basically a shared mode which is incompatible with the "normal"
+shared lock mode, SH. In GFS2 the DF mode is used exclusively for direct I/O
+operations. The glocks are basically a lock plus some routines which deal
+with cache management. The following rules apply for the cache:
+
+==========      ==========   ==============   ==========   ==============
+Glock mode      Cache data   Cache Metadata   Dirty Data   Dirty Metadata
+==========      ==========   ==============   ==========   ==============
+    UN             No              No             No            No
+    SH             Yes             Yes            No            No
+    DF             No              Yes            No            No
+    EX             Yes             Yes            Yes           Yes
+==========      ==========   ==============   ==========   ==============
+
+These rules are implemented using the various glock operations which
+are defined for each type of glock. Not all types of glocks use
+all the modes. Only inode glocks use the DF mode for example.
+
+Table of glock operations and per type constants:
+
+=============      =============================================================
+Field              Purpose
+=============      =============================================================
+go_xmote_th        Called before remote state change (e.g. to sync dirty data)
+go_xmote_bh        Called after remote state change (e.g. to refill cache)
+go_inval           Called if remote state change requires invalidating the cache
+go_demote_ok       Returns boolean value of whether its ok to demote a glock
+                   (e.g. checks timeout, and that there is no cached data)
+go_lock            Called for the first local holder of a lock
+go_unlock          Called on the final local unlock of a lock
+go_dump            Called to print content of object for debugfs file, or on
+                   error to dump glock to the log.
+go_type            The type of the glock, ``LM_TYPE_*``
+go_callback	   Called if the DLM sends a callback to drop this lock
+go_flags	   GLOF_ASPACE is set, if the glock has an address space
+                   associated with it
+=============      =============================================================
+
+The minimum hold time for each lock is the time after a remote lock
+grant for which we ignore remote demote requests. This is in order to
+prevent a situation where locks are being bounced around the cluster
+from node to node with none of the nodes making any progress. This
+tends to show up most with shared mmaped files which are being written
+to by multiple nodes. By delaying the demotion in response to a
+remote callback, that gives the userspace program time to make
+some progress before the pages are unmapped.
+
+There is a plan to try and remove the go_lock and go_unlock callbacks
+if possible, in order to try and speed up the fast path though the locking.
+Also, eventually we hope to make the glock "EX" mode locally shared
+such that any local locking will be done with the i_mutex as required
+rather than via the glock.
+
+Locking rules for glock operations:
+
+=============    ======================    =============================
+Operation        GLF_LOCK bit lock held    gl_lockref.lock spinlock held
+=============    ======================    =============================
+go_xmote_th           Yes                       No
+go_xmote_bh           Yes                       No
+go_inval              Yes                       No
+go_demote_ok          Sometimes                 Yes
+go_lock               Yes                       No
+go_unlock             Yes                       No
+go_dump               Sometimes                 Yes
+go_callback           Sometimes (N/A)           Yes
+=============    ======================    =============================
+
+.. Note::
+
+   Operations must not drop either the bit lock or the spinlock
+   if its held on entry. go_dump and do_demote_ok must never block.
+   Note that go_dump will only be called if the glock's state
+   indicates that it is caching uptodate data.
+
+Glock locking order within GFS2:
+
+ 1. i_rwsem (if required)
+ 2. Rename glock (for rename only)
+ 3. Inode glock(s)
+    (Parents before children, inodes at "same level" with same parent in
+    lock number order)
+ 4. Rgrp glock(s) (for (de)allocation operations)
+ 5. Transaction glock (via gfs2_trans_begin) for non-read operations
+ 6. i_rw_mutex (if required)
+ 7. Page lock  (always last, very important!)
+
+There are two glocks per inode. One deals with access to the inode
+itself (locking order as above), and the other, known as the iopen
+glock is used in conjunction with the i_nlink field in the inode to
+determine the lifetime of the inode in question. Locking of inodes
+is on a per-inode basis. Locking of rgrps is on a per rgrp basis.
+In general we prefer to lock local locks prior to cluster locks.
+
+Glock Statistics
+----------------
+
+The stats are divided into two sets: those relating to the
+super block and those relating to an individual glock. The
+super block stats are done on a per cpu basis in order to
+try and reduce the overhead of gathering them. They are also
+further divided by glock type. All timings are in nanoseconds.
+
+In the case of both the super block and glock statistics,
+the same information is gathered in each case. The super
+block timing statistics are used to provide default values for
+the glock timing statistics, so that newly created glocks
+should have, as far as possible, a sensible starting point.
+The per-glock counters are initialised to zero when the
+glock is created. The per-glock statistics are lost when
+the glock is ejected from memory.
+
+The statistics are divided into three pairs of mean and
+variance, plus two counters. The mean/variance pairs are
+smoothed exponential estimates and the algorithm used is
+one which will be very familiar to those used to calculation
+of round trip times in network code. See "TCP/IP Illustrated,
+Volume 1", W. Richard Stevens, sect 21.3, "Round-Trip Time Measurement",
+p. 299 and onwards. Also, Volume 2, Sect. 25.10, p. 838 and onwards.
+Unlike the TCP/IP Illustrated case, the mean and variance are
+not scaled, but are in units of integer nanoseconds.
+
+The three pairs of mean/variance measure the following
+things:
+
+ 1. DLM lock time (non-blocking requests)
+ 2. DLM lock time (blocking requests)
+ 3. Inter-request time (again to the DLM)
+
+A non-blocking request is one which will complete right
+away, whatever the state of the DLM lock in question. That
+currently means any requests when (a) the current state of
+the lock is exclusive, i.e. a lock demotion (b) the requested
+state is either null or unlocked (again, a demotion) or (c) the
+"try lock" flag is set. A blocking request covers all the other
+lock requests.
+
+There are two counters. The first is there primarily to show
+how many lock requests have been made, and thus how much data
+has gone into the mean/variance calculations. The other counter
+is counting queuing of holders at the top layer of the glock
+code. Hopefully that number will be a lot larger than the number
+of dlm lock requests issued.
+
+So why gather these statistics? There are several reasons
+we'd like to get a better idea of these timings:
+
+1. To be able to better set the glock "min hold time"
+2. To spot performance issues more easily
+3. To improve the algorithm for selecting resource groups for
+   allocation (to base it on lock wait time, rather than blindly
+   using a "try lock")
+
+Due to the smoothing action of the updates, a step change in
+some input quantity being sampled will only fully be taken
+into account after 8 samples (or 4 for the variance) and this
+needs to be carefully considered when interpreting the
+results.
+
+Knowing both the time it takes a lock request to complete and
+the average time between lock requests for a glock means we
+can compute the total percentage of the time for which the
+node is able to use a glock vs. time that the rest of the
+cluster has its share. That will be very useful when setting
+the lock min hold time.
+
+Great care has been taken to ensure that we
+measure exactly the quantities that we want, as accurately
+as possible. There are always inaccuracies in any
+measuring system, but I hope this is as accurate as we
+can reasonably make it.
+
+Per sb stats can be found here::
+
+    /sys/kernel/debug/gfs2/<fsname>/sbstats
+
+Per glock stats can be found here::
+
+    /sys/kernel/debug/gfs2/<fsname>/glstats
+
+Assuming that debugfs is mounted on /sys/kernel/debug and also
+that <fsname> is replaced with the name of the gfs2 filesystem
+in question.
+
+The abbreviations used in the output as are follows:
+
+=========  ================================================================
+srtt       Smoothed round trip time for non blocking dlm requests
+srttvar    Variance estimate for srtt
+srttb      Smoothed round trip time for (potentially) blocking dlm requests
+srttvarb   Variance estimate for srttb
+sirt       Smoothed inter request time (for dlm requests)
+sirtvar    Variance estimate for sirt
+dlm        Number of dlm requests made (dcnt in glstats file)
+queue      Number of glock requests queued (qcnt in glstats file)
+=========  ================================================================
+
+The sbstats file contains a set of these stats for each glock type (so 8 lines
+for each type) and for each cpu (one column per cpu). The glstats file contains
+a set of these stats for each glock in a similar format to the glocks file, but
+using the format mean/variance for each of the timing stats.
+
+The gfs2_glock_lock_time tracepoint prints out the current values of the stats
+for the glock in question, along with some addition information on each dlm
+reply that is received:
+
+======   =======================================
+status   The status of the dlm request
+flags    The dlm request flags
+tdiff    The time taken by this specific request
+======   =======================================
+
+(remaining fields as per above list)
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f162a2c76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================
+uevents and GFS2
+================
+
+During the lifetime of a GFS2 mount, a number of uevents are generated.
+This document explains what the events are and what they are used
+for (by gfs_controld in gfs2-utils).
+
+A list of GFS2 uevents
+======================
+
+1. ADD
+------
+
+The ADD event occurs at mount time. It will always be the first
+uevent generated by the newly created filesystem. If the mount
+is successful, an ONLINE uevent will follow.  If it is not successful
+then a REMOVE uevent will follow.
+
+The ADD uevent has two environment variables: SPECTATOR=[0|1]
+and RDONLY=[0|1] that specify the spectator status (a read-only mount
+with no journal assigned), and read-only (with journal assigned) status
+of the filesystem respectively.
+
+2. ONLINE
+---------
+
+The ONLINE uevent is generated after a successful mount or remount. It
+has the same environment variables as the ADD uevent. The ONLINE
+uevent, along with the two environment variables for spectator and
+RDONLY are a relatively recent addition (2.6.32-rc+) and will not
+be generated by older kernels.
+
+3. CHANGE
+---------
+
+The CHANGE uevent is used in two places. One is when reporting the
+successful mount of the filesystem by the first node (FIRSTMOUNT=Done).
+This is used as a signal by gfs_controld that it is then ok for other
+nodes in the cluster to mount the filesystem.
+
+The other CHANGE uevent is used to inform of the completion
+of journal recovery for one of the filesystems journals. It has
+two environment variables, JID= which specifies the journal id which
+has just been recovered, and RECOVERY=[Done|Failed] to indicate the
+success (or otherwise) of the operation. These uevents are generated
+for every journal recovered, whether it is during the initial mount
+process or as the result of gfs_controld requesting a specific journal
+recovery via the /sys/fs/gfs2/<fsname>/lock_module/recovery file.
+
+Because the CHANGE uevent was used (in early versions of gfs_controld)
+without checking the environment variables to discover the state, we
+cannot add any more functions to it without running the risk of
+someone using an older version of the user tools and breaking their
+cluster. For this reason the ONLINE uevent was used when adding a new
+uevent for a successful mount or remount.
+
+4. OFFLINE
+----------
+
+The OFFLINE uevent is only generated due to filesystem errors and is used
+as part of the "withdraw" mechanism. Currently this doesn't give any
+information about what the error is, which is something that needs to
+be fixed.
+
+5. REMOVE
+---------
+
+The REMOVE uevent is generated at the end of an unsuccessful mount
+or at the end of a umount of the filesystem. All REMOVE uevents will
+have been preceded by at least an ADD uevent for the same filesystem,
+and unlike the other uevents is generated automatically by the kernel's
+kobject subsystem.
+
+
+Information common to all GFS2 uevents (uevent environment variables)
+=====================================================================
+
+1. LOCKTABLE=
+--------------
+
+The LOCKTABLE is a string, as supplied on the mount command
+line (locktable=) or via fstab. It is used as a filesystem label
+as well as providing the information for a lock_dlm mount to be
+able to join the cluster.
+
+2. LOCKPROTO=
+-------------
+
+The LOCKPROTO is a string, and its value depends on what is set
+on the mount command line, or via fstab. It will be either
+lock_nolock or lock_dlm. In the future other lock managers
+may be supported.
+
+3. JOURNALID=
+-------------
+
+If a journal is in use by the filesystem (journals are not
+assigned for spectator mounts) then this will give the
+numeric journal id in all GFS2 uevents.
+
+4. UUID=
+--------
+
+With recent versions of gfs2-utils, mkfs.gfs2 writes a UUID
+into the filesystem superblock. If it exists, this will
+be included in every uevent relating to the filesystem.
+
+
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1bc48a134
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+====================
+Global File System 2
+====================
+
+GFS2 is a cluster file system. It allows a cluster of computers to
+simultaneously use a block device that is shared between them (with FC,
+iSCSI, NBD, etc).  GFS2 reads and writes to the block device like a local
+file system, but also uses a lock module to allow the computers coordinate
+their I/O so file system consistency is maintained.  One of the nifty
+features of GFS2 is perfect consistency -- changes made to the file system
+on one machine show up immediately on all other machines in the cluster.
+
+GFS2 uses interchangeable inter-node locking mechanisms, the currently
+supported mechanisms are:
+
+  lock_nolock
+    - allows GFS2 to be used as a local file system
+
+  lock_dlm
+    - uses the distributed lock manager (dlm) for inter-node locking.
+      The dlm is found at linux/fs/dlm/
+
+lock_dlm depends on user space cluster management systems found
+at the URL above.
+
+To use GFS2 as a local file system, no external clustering systems are
+needed, simply::
+
+  $ mkfs -t gfs2 -p lock_nolock -j 1 /dev/block_device
+  $ mount -t gfs2 /dev/block_device /dir
+
+The gfs2-utils package is required on all cluster nodes and, for lock_dlm, you
+will also need the dlm and corosync user space utilities configured as per the
+documentation.
+
+gfs2-utils can be found at https://pagure.io/gfs2-utils
+
+GFS2 is not on-disk compatible with previous versions of GFS, but it
+is pretty close.
+
+The following man pages are available from gfs2-utils:
+
+  ============		=============================================
+  fsck.gfs2		to repair a filesystem
+  gfs2_grow		to expand a filesystem online
+  gfs2_jadd		to add journals to a filesystem online
+  tunegfs2		to manipulate, examine and tune a filesystem
+  gfs2_convert		to convert a gfs filesystem to GFS2 in-place
+  mkfs.gfs2		to make a filesystem
+  ============		=============================================
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/hfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/hfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..776015c80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/hfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==================================
+Macintosh HFS Filesystem for Linux
+==================================
+
+
+.. Note:: This filesystem doesn't have a maintainer.
+
+
+HFS stands for ``Hierarchical File System`` and is the filesystem used
+by the Mac Plus and all later Macintosh models.  Earlier Macintosh
+models used MFS (``Macintosh File System``), which is not supported,
+MacOS 8.1 and newer support a filesystem called HFS+ that's similar to
+HFS but is extended in various areas.  Use the hfsplus filesystem driver
+to access such filesystems from Linux.
+
+
+Mount options
+=============
+
+When mounting an HFS filesystem, the following options are accepted:
+
+  creator=cccc, type=cccc
+	Specifies the creator/type values as shown by the MacOS finder
+	used for creating new files.  Default values: '????'.
+
+  uid=n, gid=n
+  	Specifies the user/group that owns all files on the filesystems.
+	Default:  user/group id of the mounting process.
+
+  dir_umask=n, file_umask=n, umask=n
+	Specifies the umask used for all files , all directories or all
+	files and directories.  Defaults to the umask of the mounting process.
+
+  session=n
+  	Select the CDROM session to mount as HFS filesystem.  Defaults to
+	leaving that decision to the CDROM driver.  This option will fail
+	with anything but a CDROM as underlying devices.
+
+  part=n
+  	Select partition number n from the devices.  Does only makes
+	sense for CDROMS because they can't be partitioned under Linux.
+	For disk devices the generic partition parsing code does this
+	for us.  Defaults to not parsing the partition table at all.
+
+  quiet
+  	Ignore invalid mount options instead of complaining.
+
+
+Writing to HFS Filesystems
+==========================
+
+HFS is not a UNIX filesystem, thus it does not have the usual features you'd
+expect:
+
+ * You can't modify the set-uid, set-gid, sticky or executable bits or the uid
+   and gid of files.
+ * You can't create hard- or symlinks, device files, sockets or FIFOs.
+
+HFS does on the other have the concepts of multiple forks per file.  These
+non-standard forks are represented as hidden additional files in the normal
+filesystems namespace which is kind of a cludge and makes the semantics for
+the a little strange:
+
+ * You can't create, delete or rename resource forks of files or the
+   Finder's metadata.
+ * They are however created (with default values), deleted and renamed
+   along with the corresponding data fork or directory.
+ * Copying files to a different filesystem will loose those attributes
+   that are essential for MacOS to work.
+
+
+Creating HFS filesystems
+========================
+
+The hfsutils package from Robert Leslie contains a program called
+hformat that can be used to create HFS filesystem. See
+<https://www.mars.org/home/rob/proj/hfs/> for details.
+
+
+Credits
+=======
+
+The HFS drivers was written by Paul H. Hargrovea (hargrove@sccm.Stanford.EDU).
+Roman Zippel (roman@ardistech.com) rewrote large parts of the code and brought
+in btree routines derived from Brad Boyer's hfsplus driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/hfsplus.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/hfsplus.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f02f4f5fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/hfsplus.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================================
+Macintosh HFSPlus Filesystem for Linux
+======================================
+
+HFSPlus is a filesystem first introduced in MacOS 8.1.
+HFSPlus has several extensions to HFS, including 32-bit allocation
+blocks, 255-character unicode filenames, and file sizes of 2^63 bytes.
+
+
+Mount options
+=============
+
+When mounting an HFSPlus filesystem, the following options are accepted:
+
+  creator=cccc, type=cccc
+	Specifies the creator/type values as shown by the MacOS finder
+	used for creating new files.  Default values: '????'.
+
+  uid=n, gid=n
+	Specifies the user/group that owns all files on the filesystem
+	that have uninitialized permissions structures.
+	Default:  user/group id of the mounting process.
+
+  umask=n
+	Specifies the umask (in octal) used for files and directories
+	that have uninitialized permissions structures.
+	Default:  umask of the mounting process.
+
+  session=n
+	Select the CDROM session to mount as HFSPlus filesystem.  Defaults to
+	leaving that decision to the CDROM driver.  This option will fail
+	with anything but a CDROM as underlying devices.
+
+  part=n
+	Select partition number n from the devices.  This option only makes
+	sense for CDROMs because they can't be partitioned under Linux.
+	For disk devices the generic partition parsing code does this
+	for us.  Defaults to not parsing the partition table at all.
+
+  decompose
+	Decompose file name characters.
+
+  nodecompose
+	Do not decompose file name characters.
+
+  force
+	Used to force write access to volumes that are marked as journalled
+	or locked.  Use at your own risk.
+
+  nls=cccc
+	Encoding to use when presenting file names.
+
+
+References
+==========
+
+kernel source:		<file:fs/hfsplus>
+
+Apple Technote 1150	https://developer.apple.com/legacy/library/technotes/tn/tn1150.html
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/hpfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/hpfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7e0dd2f43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/hpfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,353 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+====================
+Read/Write HPFS 2.09
+====================
+
+1998-2004, Mikulas Patocka
+
+:email: mikulas@artax.karlin.mff.cuni.cz
+:homepage: https://artax.karlin.mff.cuni.cz/~mikulas/vyplody/hpfs/index-e.cgi
+
+Credits
+=======
+Chris Smith, 1993, original read-only HPFS, some code and hpfs structures file
+	is taken from it
+
+Jacques Gelinas, MSDos mmap, Inspired by fs/nfs/mmap.c (Jon Tombs 15 Aug 1993)
+
+Werner Almesberger, 1992, 1993, MSDos option parser & CR/LF conversion
+
+Mount options
+
+uid=xxx,gid=xxx,umask=xxx (default uid=gid=0 umask=default_system_umask)
+	Set owner/group/mode for files that do not have it specified in extended
+	attributes. Mode is inverted umask - for example umask 027 gives owner
+	all permission, group read permission and anybody else no access. Note
+	that for files mode is anded with 0666. If you want files to have 'x'
+	rights, you must use extended attributes.
+case=lower,asis (default asis)
+	File name lowercasing in readdir.
+conv=binary,text,auto (default binary)
+	CR/LF -> LF conversion, if auto, decision is made according to extension
+	- there is a list of text extensions (I thing it's better to not convert
+	text file than to damage binary file). If you want to change that list,
+	change it in the source. Original readonly HPFS contained some strange
+	heuristic algorithm that I removed. I thing it's danger to let the
+	computer decide whether file is text or binary. For example, DJGPP
+	binaries contain small text message at the beginning and they could be
+	misidentified and damaged under some circumstances.
+check=none,normal,strict (default normal)
+	Check level. Selecting none will cause only little speedup and big
+	danger. I tried to write it so that it won't crash if check=normal on
+	corrupted filesystems. check=strict means many superfluous checks -
+	used for debugging (for example it checks if file is allocated in
+	bitmaps when accessing it).
+errors=continue,remount-ro,panic (default remount-ro)
+	Behaviour when filesystem errors found.
+chkdsk=no,errors,always (default errors)
+	When to mark filesystem dirty so that OS/2 checks it.
+eas=no,ro,rw (default rw)
+	What to do with extended attributes. 'no' - ignore them and use always
+	values specified in uid/gid/mode options. 'ro' - read extended
+	attributes but do not create them. 'rw' - create extended attributes
+	when you use chmod/chown/chgrp/mknod/ln -s on the filesystem.
+timeshift=(-)nnn (default 0)
+	Shifts the time by nnn seconds. For example, if you see under linux
+	one hour more, than under os/2, use timeshift=-3600.
+
+
+File names
+==========
+
+As in OS/2, filenames are case insensitive. However, shell thinks that names
+are case sensitive, so for example when you create a file FOO, you can use
+'cat FOO', 'cat Foo', 'cat foo' or 'cat F*' but not 'cat f*'. Note, that you
+also won't be able to compile linux kernel (and maybe other things) on HPFS
+because kernel creates different files with names like bootsect.S and
+bootsect.s. When searching for file thats name has characters >= 128, codepages
+are used - see below.
+OS/2 ignores dots and spaces at the end of file name, so this driver does as
+well. If you create 'a. ...', the file 'a' will be created, but you can still
+access it under names 'a.', 'a..', 'a .  . . ' etc.
+
+
+Extended attributes
+===================
+
+On HPFS partitions, OS/2 can associate to each file a special information called
+extended attributes. Extended attributes are pairs of (key,value) where key is
+an ascii string identifying that attribute and value is any string of bytes of
+variable length. OS/2 stores window and icon positions and file types there. So
+why not use it for unix-specific info like file owner or access rights? This
+driver can do it. If you chown/chgrp/chmod on a hpfs partition, extended
+attributes with keys "UID", "GID" or "MODE" and 2-byte values are created. Only
+that extended attributes those value differs from defaults specified in mount
+options are created. Once created, the extended attributes are never deleted,
+they're just changed. It means that when your default uid=0 and you type
+something like 'chown luser file; chown root file' the file will contain
+extended attribute UID=0. And when you umount the fs and mount it again with
+uid=luser_uid, the file will be still owned by root! If you chmod file to 444,
+extended attribute "MODE" will not be set, this special case is done by setting
+read-only flag. When you mknod a block or char device, besides "MODE", the
+special 4-byte extended attribute "DEV" will be created containing the device
+number. Currently this driver cannot resize extended attributes - it means
+that if somebody (I don't know who?) has set "UID", "GID", "MODE" or "DEV"
+attributes with different sizes, they won't be rewritten and changing these
+values doesn't work.
+
+
+Symlinks
+========
+
+You can do symlinks on HPFS partition, symlinks are achieved by setting extended
+attribute named "SYMLINK" with symlink value. Like on ext2, you can chown and
+chgrp symlinks but I don't know what is it good for. chmoding symlink results
+in chmoding file where symlink points. These symlinks are just for Linux use and
+incompatible with OS/2. OS/2 PmShell symlinks are not supported because they are
+stored in very crazy way. They tried to do it so that link changes when file is
+moved ... sometimes it works. But the link is partly stored in directory
+extended attributes and partly in OS2SYS.INI. I don't want (and don't know how)
+to analyze or change OS2SYS.INI.
+
+
+Codepages
+=========
+
+HPFS can contain several uppercasing tables for several codepages and each
+file has a pointer to codepage its name is in. However OS/2 was created in
+America where people don't care much about codepages and so multiple codepages
+support is quite buggy. I have Czech OS/2 working in codepage 852 on my disk.
+Once I booted English OS/2 working in cp 850 and I created a file on my 852
+partition. It marked file name codepage as 850 - good. But when I again booted
+Czech OS/2, the file was completely inaccessible under any name. It seems that
+OS/2 uppercases the search pattern with its system code page (852) and file
+name it's comparing to with its code page (850). These could never match. Is it
+really what IBM developers wanted? But problems continued. When I created in
+Czech OS/2 another file in that directory, that file was inaccessible too. OS/2
+probably uses different uppercasing method when searching where to place a file
+(note, that files in HPFS directory must be sorted) and when searching for
+a file. Finally when I opened this directory in PmShell, PmShell crashed (the
+funny thing was that, when rebooted, PmShell tried to reopen this directory
+again :-). chkdsk happily ignores these errors and only low-level disk
+modification saved me.  Never mix different language versions of OS/2 on one
+system although HPFS was designed to allow that.
+OK, I could implement complex codepage support to this driver but I think it
+would cause more problems than benefit with such buggy implementation in OS/2.
+So this driver simply uses first codepage it finds for uppercasing and
+lowercasing no matter what's file codepage index. Usually all file names are in
+this codepage - if you don't try to do what I described above :-)
+
+
+Known bugs
+==========
+
+HPFS386 on OS/2 server is not supported. HPFS386 installed on normal OS/2 client
+should work. If you have OS/2 server, use only read-only mode. I don't know how
+to handle some HPFS386 structures like access control list or extended perm
+list, I don't know how to delete them when file is deleted and how to not
+overwrite them with extended attributes. Send me some info on these structures
+and I'll make it. However, this driver should detect presence of HPFS386
+structures, remount read-only and not destroy them (I hope).
+
+When there's not enough space for extended attributes, they will be truncated
+and no error is returned.
+
+OS/2 can't access files if the path is longer than about 256 chars but this
+driver allows you to do it. chkdsk ignores such errors.
+
+Sometimes you won't be able to delete some files on a very full filesystem
+(returning error ENOSPC). That's because file in non-leaf node in directory tree
+(one directory, if it's large, has dirents in tree on HPFS) must be replaced
+with another node when deleted. And that new file might have larger name than
+the old one so the new name doesn't fit in directory node (dnode). And that
+would result in directory tree splitting, that takes disk space. Workaround is
+to delete other files that are leaf (probability that the file is non-leaf is
+about 1/50) or to truncate file first to make some space.
+You encounter this problem only if you have many directories so that
+preallocated directory band is full i.e.::
+
+	number_of_directories / size_of_filesystem_in_mb > 4.
+
+You can't delete open directories.
+
+You can't rename over directories (what is it good for?).
+
+Renaming files so that only case changes doesn't work. This driver supports it
+but vfs doesn't. Something like 'mv file FILE' won't work.
+
+All atimes and directory mtimes are not updated. That's because of performance
+reasons. If you extremely wish to update them, let me know, I'll write it (but
+it will be slow).
+
+When the system is out of memory and swap, it may slightly corrupt filesystem
+(lost files, unbalanced directories). (I guess all filesystem may do it).
+
+When compiled, you get warning: function declaration isn't a prototype. Does
+anybody know what does it mean?
+
+
+What does "unbalanced tree" message mean?
+=========================================
+
+Old versions of this driver created sometimes unbalanced dnode trees. OS/2
+chkdsk doesn't scream if the tree is unbalanced (and sometimes creates
+unbalanced trees too :-) but both HPFS and HPFS386 contain bug that it rarely
+crashes when the tree is not balanced. This driver handles unbalanced trees
+correctly and writes warning if it finds them. If you see this message, this is
+probably because of directories created with old version of this driver.
+Workaround is to move all files from that directory to another and then back
+again. Do it in Linux, not OS/2! If you see this message in directory that is
+whole created by this driver, it is BUG - let me know about it.
+
+
+Bugs in OS/2
+============
+
+When you have two (or more) lost directories pointing each to other, chkdsk
+locks up when repairing filesystem.
+
+Sometimes (I think it's random) when you create a file with one-char name under
+OS/2, OS/2 marks it as 'long'. chkdsk then removes this flag saying "Minor fs
+error corrected".
+
+File names like "a .b" are marked as 'long' by OS/2 but chkdsk "corrects" it and
+marks them as short (and writes "minor fs error corrected"). This bug is not in
+HPFS386.
+
+Codepage bugs described above
+=============================
+
+If you don't install fixpacks, there are many, many more...
+
+
+History
+=======
+
+====== =========================================================================
+0.90   First public release
+0.91   Fixed bug that caused shooting to memory when write_inode was called on
+       open inode (rarely happened)
+0.92   Fixed a little memory leak in freeing directory inodes
+0.93   Fixed bug that locked up the machine when there were too many filenames
+       with first 15 characters same
+       Fixed write_file to zero file when writing behind file end
+0.94   Fixed a little memory leak when trying to delete busy file or directory
+0.95   Fixed a bug that i_hpfs_parent_dir was not updated when moving files
+1.90   First version for 2.1.1xx kernels
+1.91   Fixed a bug that chk_sectors failed when sectors were at the end of disk
+       Fixed a race-condition when write_inode is called while deleting file
+       Fixed a bug that could possibly happen (with very low probability) when
+       using 0xff in filenames.
+
+       Rewritten locking to avoid race-conditions
+
+       Mount option 'eas' now works
+
+       Fsync no longer returns error
+
+       Files beginning with '.' are marked hidden
+
+       Remount support added
+
+       Alloc is not so slow when filesystem becomes full
+
+       Atimes are no more updated because it slows down operation
+
+       Code cleanup (removed all commented debug prints)
+1.92   Corrected a bug when sync was called just before closing file
+1.93   Modified, so that it works with kernels >= 2.1.131, I don't know if it
+       works with previous versions
+
+       Fixed a possible problem with disks > 64G (but I don't have one, so I can't
+       test it)
+
+       Fixed a file overflow at 2G
+
+       Added new option 'timeshift'
+
+       Changed behaviour on HPFS386: It is now possible to operate on HPFS386 in
+       read-only mode
+
+       Fixed a bug that slowed down alloc and prevented allocating 100% space
+       (this bug was not destructive)
+1.94   Added workaround for one bug in Linux
+
+       Fixed one buffer leak
+
+       Fixed some incompatibilities with large extended attributes (but it's still
+       not 100% ok, I have no info on it and OS/2 doesn't want to create them)
+
+       Rewritten allocation
+
+       Fixed a bug with i_blocks (du sometimes didn't display correct values)
+
+       Directories have no longer archive attribute set (some programs don't like
+       it)
+
+       Fixed a bug that it set badly one flag in large anode tree (it was not
+       destructive)
+1.95   Fixed one buffer leak, that could happen on corrupted filesystem
+
+       Fixed one bug in allocation in 1.94
+1.96   Added workaround for one bug in OS/2 (HPFS locked up, HPFS386 reported
+       error sometimes when opening directories in PMSHELL)
+
+       Fixed a possible bitmap race
+
+       Fixed possible problem on large disks
+
+       You can now delete open files
+
+       Fixed a nondestructive race in rename
+1.97   Support for HPFS v3 (on large partitions)
+
+       ZFixed a bug that it didn't allow creation of files > 128M
+       (it should be 2G)
+1.97.1 Changed names of global symbols
+
+       Fixed a bug when chmoding or chowning root directory
+1.98   Fixed a deadlock when using old_readdir
+       Better directory handling; workaround for "unbalanced tree" bug in OS/2
+1.99   Corrected a possible problem when there's not enough space while deleting
+       file
+
+       Now it tries to truncate the file if there's not enough space when
+       deleting
+
+       Removed a lot of redundant code
+2.00   Fixed a bug in rename (it was there since 1.96)
+       Better anti-fragmentation strategy
+2.01   Fixed problem with directory listing over NFS
+
+       Directory lseek now checks for proper parameters
+
+       Fixed race-condition in buffer code - it is in all filesystems in Linux;
+       when reading device (cat /dev/hda) while creating files on it, files
+       could be damaged
+2.02   Workaround for bug in breada in Linux. breada could cause accesses beyond
+       end of partition
+2.03   Char, block devices and pipes are correctly created
+
+       Fixed non-crashing race in unlink (Alexander Viro)
+
+       Now it works with Japanese version of OS/2
+2.04   Fixed error when ftruncate used to extend file
+2.05   Fixed crash when got mount parameters without =
+
+       Fixed crash when allocation of anode failed due to full disk
+
+       Fixed some crashes when block io or inode allocation failed
+2.06   Fixed some crash on corrupted disk structures
+
+       Better allocation strategy
+
+       Reschedule points added so that it doesn't lock CPU long time
+
+       It should work in read-only mode on Warp Server
+2.07   More fixes for Warp Server. Now it really works
+2.08   Creating new files is not so slow on large disks
+
+       An attempt to sync deleted file does not generate filesystem error
+2.09   Fixed error on extremely fragmented files
+====== =========================================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/idmappings.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/idmappings.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b9b31066a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/idmappings.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,959 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Idmappings
+==========
+
+Most filesystem developers will have encountered idmappings. They are used when
+reading from or writing ownership to disk, reporting ownership to userspace, or
+for permission checking. This document is aimed at filesystem developers that
+want to know how idmappings work.
+
+Formal notes
+------------
+
+An idmapping is essentially a translation of a range of ids into another or the
+same range of ids. The notational convention for idmappings that is widely used
+in userspace is::
+
+ u:k:r
+
+``u`` indicates the first element in the upper idmapset ``U`` and ``k``
+indicates the first element in the lower idmapset ``K``. The ``r`` parameter
+indicates the range of the idmapping, i.e. how many ids are mapped. From now
+on, we will always prefix ids with ``u`` or ``k`` to make it clear whether
+we're talking about an id in the upper or lower idmapset.
+
+To see what this looks like in practice, let's take the following idmapping::
+
+ u22:k10000:r3
+
+and write down the mappings it will generate::
+
+ u22 -> k10000
+ u23 -> k10001
+ u24 -> k10002
+
+From a mathematical viewpoint ``U`` and ``K`` are well-ordered sets and an
+idmapping is an order isomorphism from ``U`` into ``K``. So ``U`` and ``K`` are
+order isomorphic. In fact, ``U`` and ``K`` are always well-ordered subsets of
+the set of all possible ids useable on a given system.
+
+Looking at this mathematically briefly will help us highlight some properties
+that make it easier to understand how we can translate between idmappings. For
+example, we know that the inverse idmapping is an order isomorphism as well::
+
+ k10000 -> u22
+ k10001 -> u23
+ k10002 -> u24
+
+Given that we are dealing with order isomorphisms plus the fact that we're
+dealing with subsets we can embedd idmappings into each other, i.e. we can
+sensibly translate between different idmappings. For example, assume we've been
+given the three idmappings::
+
+ 1. u0:k10000:r10000
+ 2. u0:k20000:r10000
+ 3. u0:k30000:r10000
+
+and id ``k11000`` which has been generated by the first idmapping by mapping
+``u1000`` from the upper idmapset down to ``k11000`` in the lower idmapset.
+
+Because we're dealing with order isomorphic subsets it is meaningful to ask
+what id ``k11000`` corresponds to in the second or third idmapping. The
+straightfoward algorithm to use is to apply the inverse of the first idmapping,
+mapping ``k11000`` up to ``u1000``. Afterwards, we can map ``u1000`` down using
+either the second idmapping mapping or third idmapping mapping. The second
+idmapping would map ``u1000`` down to ``21000``. The third idmapping would map
+``u1000`` down to ``u31000``.
+
+If we were given the same task for the following three idmappings::
+
+ 1. u0:k10000:r10000
+ 2. u0:k20000:r200
+ 3. u0:k30000:r300
+
+we would fail to translate as the sets aren't order isomorphic over the full
+range of the first idmapping anymore (However they are order isomorphic over
+the full range of the second idmapping.). Neither the second or third idmapping
+contain ``u1000`` in the upper idmapset ``U``. This is equivalent to not having
+an id mapped. We can simply say that ``u1000`` is unmapped in the second and
+third idmapping. The kernel will report unmapped ids as the overflowuid
+``(uid_t)-1`` or overflowgid ``(gid_t)-1`` to userspace.
+
+The algorithm to calculate what a given id maps to is pretty simple. First, we
+need to verify that the range can contain our target id. We will skip this step
+for simplicity. After that if we want to know what ``id`` maps to we can do
+simple calculations:
+
+- If we want to map from left to right::
+
+   u:k:r
+   id - u + k = n
+
+- If we want to map from right to left::
+
+   u:k:r
+   id - k + u = n
+
+Instead of "left to right" we can also say "down" and instead of "right to
+left" we can also say "up". Obviously mapping down and up invert each other.
+
+To see whether the simple formulas above work, consider the following two
+idmappings::
+
+ 1. u0:k20000:r10000
+ 2. u500:k30000:r10000
+
+Assume we are given ``k21000`` in the lower idmapset of the first idmapping. We
+want to know what id this was mapped from in the upper idmapset of the first
+idmapping. So we're mapping up in the first idmapping::
+
+ id     - k      + u  = n
+ k21000 - k20000 + u0 = u1000
+
+Now assume we are given the id ``u1100`` in the upper idmapset of the second
+idmapping and we want to know what this id maps down to in the lower idmapset
+of the second idmapping. This means we're mapping down in the second
+idmapping::
+
+ id    - u    + k      = n
+ u1100 - u500 + k30000 = k30600
+
+General notes
+-------------
+
+In the context of the kernel an idmapping can be interpreted as mapping a range
+of userspace ids into a range of kernel ids::
+
+ userspace-id:kernel-id:range
+
+A userspace id is always an element in the upper idmapset of an idmapping of
+type ``uid_t`` or ``gid_t`` and a kernel id is always an element in the lower
+idmapset of an idmapping of type ``kuid_t`` or ``kgid_t``. From now on
+"userspace id" will be used to refer to the well known ``uid_t`` and ``gid_t``
+types and "kernel id" will be used to refer to ``kuid_t`` and ``kgid_t``.
+
+The kernel is mostly concerned with kernel ids. They are used when performing
+permission checks and are stored in an inode's ``i_uid`` and ``i_gid`` field.
+A userspace id on the other hand is an id that is reported to userspace by the
+kernel, or is passed by userspace to the kernel, or a raw device id that is
+written or read from disk.
+
+Note that we are only concerned with idmappings as the kernel stores them not
+how userspace would specify them.
+
+For the rest of this document we will prefix all userspace ids with ``u`` and
+all kernel ids with ``k``. Ranges of idmappings will be prefixed with ``r``. So
+an idmapping will be written as ``u0:k10000:r10000``.
+
+For example, the id ``u1000`` is an id in the upper idmapset or "userspace
+idmapset" starting with ``u1000``. And it is mapped to ``k11000`` which is a
+kernel id in the lower idmapset or "kernel idmapset" starting with ``k10000``.
+
+A kernel id is always created by an idmapping. Such idmappings are associated
+with user namespaces. Since we mainly care about how idmappings work we're not
+going to be concerned with how idmappings are created nor how they are used
+outside of the filesystem context. This is best left to an explanation of user
+namespaces.
+
+The initial user namespace is special. It always has an idmapping of the
+following form::
+
+ u0:k0:r4294967295
+
+which is an identity idmapping over the full range of ids available on this
+system.
+
+Other user namespaces usually have non-identity idmappings such as::
+
+ u0:k10000:r10000
+
+When a process creates or wants to change ownership of a file, or when the
+ownership of a file is read from disk by a filesystem, the userspace id is
+immediately translated into a kernel id according to the idmapping associated
+with the relevant user namespace.
+
+For instance, consider a file that is stored on disk by a filesystem as being
+owned by ``u1000``:
+
+- If a filesystem were to be mounted in the initial user namespaces (as most
+  filesystems are) then the initial idmapping will be used. As we saw this is
+  simply the identity idmapping. This would mean id ``u1000`` read from disk
+  would be mapped to id ``k1000``. So an inode's ``i_uid`` and ``i_gid`` field
+  would contain ``k1000``.
+
+- If a filesystem were to be mounted with an idmapping of ``u0:k10000:r10000``
+  then ``u1000`` read from disk would be mapped to ``k11000``. So an inode's
+  ``i_uid`` and ``i_gid`` would contain ``k11000``.
+
+Translation algorithms
+----------------------
+
+We've already seen briefly that it is possible to translate between different
+idmappings. We'll now take a closer look how that works.
+
+Crossmapping
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This translation algorithm is used by the kernel in quite a few places. For
+example, it is used when reporting back the ownership of a file to userspace
+via the ``stat()`` system call family.
+
+If we've been given ``k11000`` from one idmapping we can map that id up in
+another idmapping. In order for this to work both idmappings need to contain
+the same kernel id in their kernel idmapsets. For example, consider the
+following idmappings::
+
+ 1. u0:k10000:r10000
+ 2. u20000:k10000:r10000
+
+and we are mapping ``u1000`` down to ``k11000`` in the first idmapping . We can
+then translate ``k11000`` into a userspace id in the second idmapping using the
+kernel idmapset of the second idmapping::
+
+ /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the second idmapping. */
+ from_kuid(u20000:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u21000
+
+Note, how we can get back to the kernel id in the first idmapping by inverting
+the algorithm::
+
+ /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the second idmapping. */
+ make_kuid(u20000:k10000:r10000, u21000) = k11000
+
+ /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the first idmapping. */
+ from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u1000
+
+This algorithm allows us to answer the question what userspace id a given
+kernel id corresponds to in a given idmapping. In order to be able to answer
+this question both idmappings need to contain the same kernel id in their
+respective kernel idmapsets.
+
+For example, when the kernel reads a raw userspace id from disk it maps it down
+into a kernel id according to the idmapping associated with the filesystem.
+Let's assume the filesystem was mounted with an idmapping of
+``u0:k20000:r10000`` and it reads a file owned by ``u1000`` from disk. This
+means ``u1000`` will be mapped to ``k21000`` which is what will be stored in
+the inode's ``i_uid`` and ``i_gid`` field.
+
+When someone in userspace calls ``stat()`` or a related function to get
+ownership information about the file the kernel can't simply map the id back up
+according to the filesystem's idmapping as this would give the wrong owner if
+the caller is using an idmapping.
+
+So the kernel will map the id back up in the idmapping of the caller. Let's
+assume the caller has the slighly unconventional idmapping
+``u3000:k20000:r10000`` then ``k21000`` would map back up to ``u4000``.
+Consequently the user would see that this file is owned by ``u4000``.
+
+Remapping
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+It is possible to translate a kernel id from one idmapping to another one via
+the userspace idmapset of the two idmappings. This is equivalent to remapping
+a kernel id.
+
+Let's look at an example. We are given the following two idmappings::
+
+ 1. u0:k10000:r10000
+ 2. u0:k20000:r10000
+
+and we are given ``k11000`` in the first idmapping. In order to translate this
+kernel id in the first idmapping into a kernel id in the second idmapping we
+need to perform two steps:
+
+1. Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the first idmapping::
+
+    /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the first idmapping. */
+    from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u1000
+
+2. Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the second idmapping::
+
+    /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the second idmapping. */
+    make_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, u1000) = k21000
+
+As you can see we used the userspace idmapset in both idmappings to translate
+the kernel id in one idmapping to a kernel id in another idmapping.
+
+This allows us to answer the question what kernel id we would need to use to
+get the same userspace id in another idmapping. In order to be able to answer
+this question both idmappings need to contain the same userspace id in their
+respective userspace idmapsets.
+
+Note, how we can easily get back to the kernel id in the first idmapping by
+inverting the algorithm:
+
+1. Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the second idmapping::
+
+    /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the second idmapping. */
+    from_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, k21000) = u1000
+
+2. Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the first idmapping::
+
+    /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the first idmapping. */
+    make_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, u1000) = k11000
+
+Another way to look at this translation is to treat it as inverting one
+idmapping and applying another idmapping if both idmappings have the relevant
+userspace id mapped. This will come in handy when working with idmapped mounts.
+
+Invalid translations
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+It is never valid to use an id in the kernel idmapset of one idmapping as the
+id in the userspace idmapset of another or the same idmapping. While the kernel
+idmapset always indicates an idmapset in the kernel id space the userspace
+idmapset indicates a userspace id. So the following translations are forbidden::
+
+ /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the first idmapping. */
+ make_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, u1000) = k11000
+
+ /* INVALID: Map the kernel id down into a kernel id in the second idmapping. */
+ make_kuid(u10000:k20000:r10000, k110000) = k21000
+                                 ~~~~~~~
+
+and equally wrong::
+
+ /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the first idmapping. */
+ from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u1000
+
+ /* INVALID: Map the userspace id up into a userspace id in the second idmapping. */
+ from_kuid(u20000:k0:r10000, u1000) = k21000
+                             ~~~~~
+
+Idmappings when creating filesystem objects
+-------------------------------------------
+
+The concepts of mapping an id down or mapping an id up are expressed in the two
+kernel functions filesystem developers are rather familiar with and which we've
+already used in this document::
+
+ /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id. */
+ make_kuid(idmapping, uid)
+
+ /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id. */
+ from_kuid(idmapping, kuid)
+
+We will take an abbreviated look into how idmappings figure into creating
+filesystem objects. For simplicity we will only look at what happens when the
+VFS has already completed path lookup right before it calls into the filesystem
+itself. So we're concerned with what happens when e.g. ``vfs_mkdir()`` is
+called. We will also assume that the directory we're creating filesystem
+objects in is readable and writable for everyone.
+
+When creating a filesystem object the caller will look at the caller's
+filesystem ids. These are just regular ``uid_t`` and ``gid_t`` userspace ids
+but they are exclusively used when determining file ownership which is why they
+are called "filesystem ids". They are usually identical to the uid and gid of
+the caller but can differ. We will just assume they are always identical to not
+get lost in too many details.
+
+When the caller enters the kernel two things happen:
+
+1. Map the caller's userspace ids down into kernel ids in the caller's
+   idmapping.
+   (To be precise, the kernel will simply look at the kernel ids stashed in the
+   credentials of the current task but for our education we'll pretend this
+   translation happens just in time.)
+2. Verify that the caller's kernel ids can be mapped up to userspace ids in the
+   filesystem's idmapping.
+
+The second step is important as regular filesystem will ultimately need to map
+the kernel id back up into a userspace id when writing to disk.
+So with the second step the kernel guarantees that a valid userspace id can be
+written to disk. If it can't the kernel will refuse the creation request to not
+even remotely risk filesystem corruption.
+
+The astute reader will have realized that this is simply a varation of the
+crossmapping algorithm we mentioned above in a previous section. First, the
+kernel maps the caller's userspace id down into a kernel id according to the
+caller's idmapping and then maps that kernel id up according to the
+filesystem's idmapping.
+
+Let's see some examples with caller/filesystem idmapping but without mount
+idmappings. This will exhibit some problems we can hit. After that we will
+revisit/reconsider these examples, this time using mount idmappings, to see how
+they can solve the problems we observed before.
+
+Example 1
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ caller id:            u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k0:r4294967295
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k0:r4294967295
+
+Both the caller and the filesystem use the identity idmapping:
+
+1. Map the caller's userspace ids into kernel ids in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, u1000) = k1000
+
+2. Verify that the caller's kernel ids can be mapped to userspace ids in the
+   filesystem's idmapping.
+
+   For this second step the kernel will call the function
+   ``fsuidgid_has_mapping()`` which ultimately boils down to calling
+   ``from_kuid()``::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, k1000) = u1000
+
+In this example both idmappings are the same so there's nothing exciting going
+on. Ultimately the userspace id that lands on disk will be ``u1000``.
+
+Example 2
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ caller id:            u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k10000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k20000:r10000
+
+1. Map the caller's userspace ids down into kernel ids in the caller's
+   idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, u1000) = k11000
+
+2. Verify that the caller's kernel ids can be mapped up to userspace ids in the
+   filesystem's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, k11000) = u-1
+
+It's immediately clear that while the caller's userspace id could be
+successfully mapped down into kernel ids in the caller's idmapping the kernel
+ids could not be mapped up according to the filesystem's idmapping. So the
+kernel will deny this creation request.
+
+Note that while this example is less common, because most filesystem can't be
+mounted with non-initial idmappings this is a general problem as we can see in
+the next examples.
+
+Example 3
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ caller id:            u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k10000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k0:r4294967295
+
+1. Map the caller's userspace ids down into kernel ids in the caller's
+   idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, u1000) = k11000
+
+2. Verify that the caller's kernel ids can be mapped up to userspace ids in the
+   filesystem's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, k11000) = u11000
+
+We can see that the translation always succeeds. The userspace id that the
+filesystem will ultimately put to disk will always be identical to the value of
+the kernel id that was created in the caller's idmapping. This has mainly two
+consequences.
+
+First, that we can't allow a caller to ultimately write to disk with another
+userspace id. We could only do this if we were to mount the whole fileystem
+with the caller's or another idmapping. But that solution is limited to a few
+filesystems and not very flexible. But this is a use-case that is pretty
+important in containerized workloads.
+
+Second, the caller will usually not be able to create any files or access
+directories that have stricter permissions because none of the filesystem's
+kernel ids map up into valid userspace ids in the caller's idmapping
+
+1. Map raw userspace ids down to kernel ids in the filesystem's idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, u1000) = k1000
+
+2. Map kernel ids up to userspace ids in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k1000) = u-1
+
+Example 4
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ file id:              u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k10000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k0:r4294967295
+
+In order to report ownership to userspace the kernel uses the crossmapping
+algorithm introduced in a previous section:
+
+1. Map the userspace id on disk down into a kernel id in the filesystem's
+   idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, u1000) = k1000
+
+2. Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k1000) = u-1
+
+The crossmapping algorithm fails in this case because the kernel id in the
+filesystem idmapping cannot be mapped up to a userspace id in the caller's
+idmapping. Thus, the kernel will report the ownership of this file as the
+overflowid.
+
+Example 5
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ file id:              u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k10000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k20000:r10000
+
+In order to report ownership to userspace the kernel uses the crossmapping
+algorithm introduced in a previous section:
+
+1. Map the userspace id on disk down into a kernel id in the filesystem's
+   idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, u1000) = k21000
+
+2. Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k21000) = u-1
+
+Again, the crossmapping algorithm fails in this case because the kernel id in
+the filesystem idmapping cannot be mapped to a userspace id in the caller's
+idmapping. Thus, the kernel will report the ownership of this file as the
+overflowid.
+
+Note how in the last two examples things would be simple if the caller would be
+using the initial idmapping. For a filesystem mounted with the initial
+idmapping it would be trivial. So we only consider a filesystem with an
+idmapping of ``u0:k20000:r10000``:
+
+1. Map the userspace id on disk down into a kernel id in the filesystem's
+   idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, u1000) = k21000
+
+2. Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, k21000) = u21000
+
+Idmappings on idmapped mounts
+-----------------------------
+
+The examples we've seen in the previous section where the caller's idmapping
+and the filesystem's idmapping are incompatible causes various issues for
+workloads. For a more complex but common example, consider two containers
+started on the host. To completely prevent the two containers from affecting
+each other, an administrator may often use different non-overlapping idmappings
+for the two containers::
+
+ container1 idmapping:  u0:k10000:r10000
+ container2 idmapping:  u0:k20000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping:  u0:k30000:r10000
+
+An administrator wanting to provide easy read-write access to the following set
+of files::
+
+ dir id:       u0
+ dir/file1 id: u1000
+ dir/file2 id: u2000
+
+to both containers currently can't.
+
+Of course the administrator has the option to recursively change ownership via
+``chown()``. For example, they could change ownership so that ``dir`` and all
+files below it can be crossmapped from the filesystem's into the container's
+idmapping. Let's assume they change ownership so it is compatible with the
+first container's idmapping::
+
+ dir id:       u10000
+ dir/file1 id: u11000
+ dir/file2 id: u12000
+
+This would still leave ``dir`` rather useless to the second container. In fact,
+``dir`` and all files below it would continue to appear owned by the overflowid
+for the second container.
+
+Or consider another increasingly popular example. Some service managers such as
+systemd implement a concept called "portable home directories". A user may want
+to use their home directories on different machines where they are assigned
+different login userspace ids. Most users will have ``u1000`` as the login id
+on their machine at home and all files in their home directory will usually be
+owned by ``u1000``. At uni or at work they may have another login id such as
+``u1125``. This makes it rather difficult to interact with their home directory
+on their work machine.
+
+In both cases changing ownership recursively has grave implications. The most
+obvious one is that ownership is changed globally and permanently. In the home
+directory case this change in ownership would even need to happen everytime the
+user switches from their home to their work machine. For really large sets of
+files this becomes increasingly costly.
+
+If the user is lucky, they are dealing with a filesystem that is mountable
+inside user namespaces. But this would also change ownership globally and the
+change in ownership is tied to the lifetime of the filesystem mount, i.e. the
+superblock. The only way to change ownership is to completely unmount the
+filesystem and mount it again in another user namespace. This is usually
+impossible because it would mean that all users currently accessing the
+filesystem can't anymore. And it means that ``dir`` still can't be shared
+between two containers with different idmappings.
+But usually the user doesn't even have this option since most filesystems
+aren't mountable inside containers. And not having them mountable might be
+desirable as it doesn't require the filesystem to deal with malicious
+filesystem images.
+
+But the usecases mentioned above and more can be handled by idmapped mounts.
+They allow to expose the same set of dentries with different ownership at
+different mounts. This is achieved by marking the mounts with a user namespace
+through the ``mount_setattr()`` system call. The idmapping associated with it
+is then used to translate from the caller's idmapping to the filesystem's
+idmapping and vica versa using the remapping algorithm we introduced above.
+
+Idmapped mounts make it possible to change ownership in a temporary and
+localized way. The ownership changes are restricted to a specific mount and the
+ownership changes are tied to the lifetime of the mount. All other users and
+locations where the filesystem is exposed are unaffected.
+
+Filesystems that support idmapped mounts don't have any real reason to support
+being mountable inside user namespaces. A filesystem could be exposed
+completely under an idmapped mount to get the same effect. This has the
+advantage that filesystems can leave the creation of the superblock to
+privileged users in the initial user namespace.
+
+However, it is perfectly possible to combine idmapped mounts with filesystems
+mountable inside user namespaces. We will touch on this further below.
+
+Remapping helpers
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Idmapping functions were added that translate between idmappings. They make use
+of the remapping algorithm we've introduced earlier. We're going to look at
+two:
+
+- ``i_uid_into_mnt()`` and ``i_gid_into_mnt()``
+
+  The ``i_*id_into_mnt()`` functions translate filesystem's kernel ids into
+  kernel ids in the mount's idmapping::
+
+   /* Map the filesystem's kernel id up into a userspace id in the filesystem's idmapping. */
+   from_kuid(filesystem, kid) = uid
+
+   /* Map the filesystem's userspace id down ito a kernel id in the mount's idmapping. */
+   make_kuid(mount, uid) = kuid
+
+- ``mapped_fsuid()`` and ``mapped_fsgid()``
+
+  The ``mapped_fs*id()`` functions translate the caller's kernel ids into
+  kernel ids in the filesystem's idmapping. This translation is achieved by
+  remapping the caller's kernel ids using the mount's idmapping::
+
+   /* Map the caller's kernel id up into a userspace id in the mount's idmapping. */
+   from_kuid(mount, kid) = uid
+
+   /* Map the mount's userspace id down into a kernel id in the filesystem's idmapping. */
+   make_kuid(filesystem, uid) = kuid
+
+Note that these two functions invert each other. Consider the following
+idmappings::
+
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k10000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k20000:r10000
+ mount idmapping:      u0:k10000:r10000
+
+Assume a file owned by ``u1000`` is read from disk. The filesystem maps this id
+to ``k21000`` according to its idmapping. This is what is stored in the
+inode's ``i_uid`` and ``i_gid`` fields.
+
+When the caller queries the ownership of this file via ``stat()`` the kernel
+would usually simply use the crossmapping algorithm and map the filesystem's
+kernel id up to a userspace id in the caller's idmapping.
+
+But when the caller is accessing the file on an idmapped mount the kernel will
+first call ``i_uid_into_mnt()`` thereby translating the filesystem's kernel id
+into a kernel id in the mount's idmapping::
+
+ i_uid_into_mnt(k21000):
+   /* Map the filesystem's kernel id up into a userspace id. */
+   from_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, k21000) = u1000
+
+   /* Map the filesystem's userspace id down ito a kernel id in the mount's idmapping. */
+   make_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, u1000) = k11000
+
+Finally, when the kernel reports the owner to the caller it will turn the
+kernel id in the mount's idmapping into a userspace id in the caller's
+idmapping::
+
+  from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u1000
+
+We can test whether this algorithm really works by verifying what happens when
+we create a new file. Let's say the user is creating a file with ``u1000``.
+
+The kernel maps this to ``k11000`` in the caller's idmapping. Usually the
+kernel would now apply the crossmapping, verifying that ``k11000`` can be
+mapped to a userspace id in the filesystem's idmapping. Since ``k11000`` can't
+be mapped up in the filesystem's idmapping directly this creation request
+fails.
+
+But when the caller is accessing the file on an idmapped mount the kernel will
+first call ``mapped_fs*id()`` thereby translating the caller's kernel id into
+a kernel id according to the mount's idmapping::
+
+ mapped_fsuid(k11000):
+    /* Map the caller's kernel id up into a userspace id in the mount's idmapping. */
+    from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u1000
+
+    /* Map the mount's userspace id down into a kernel id in the filesystem's idmapping. */
+    make_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, u1000) = k21000
+
+When finally writing to disk the kernel will then map ``k21000`` up into a
+userspace id in the filesystem's idmapping::
+
+   from_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, k21000) = u1000
+
+As we can see, we end up with an invertible and therefore information
+preserving algorithm. A file created from ``u1000`` on an idmapped mount will
+also be reported as being owned by ``u1000`` and vica versa.
+
+Let's now briefly reconsider the failing examples from earlier in the context
+of idmapped mounts.
+
+Example 2 reconsidered
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ caller id:            u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k10000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k20000:r10000
+ mount idmapping:      u0:k10000:r10000
+
+When the caller is using a non-initial idmapping the common case is to attach
+the same idmapping to the mount. We now perform three steps:
+
+1. Map the caller's userspace ids into kernel ids in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, u1000) = k11000
+
+2. Translate the caller's kernel id into a kernel id in the filesystem's
+   idmapping::
+
+    mapped_fsuid(k11000):
+      /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the mount's idmapping. */
+      from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u1000
+
+      /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the filesystem's idmapping. */
+      make_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, u1000) = k21000
+
+2. Verify that the caller's kernel ids can be mapped to userspace ids in the
+   filesystem's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, k21000) = u1000
+
+So the ownership that lands on disk will be ``u1000``.
+
+Example 3 reconsidered
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ caller id:            u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k10000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k0:r4294967295
+ mount idmapping:      u0:k10000:r10000
+
+The same translation algorithm works with the third example.
+
+1. Map the caller's userspace ids into kernel ids in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, u1000) = k11000
+
+2. Translate the caller's kernel id into a kernel id in the filesystem's
+   idmapping::
+
+    mapped_fsuid(k11000):
+       /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the mount's idmapping. */
+       from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u1000
+
+       /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the filesystem's idmapping. */
+       make_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, u1000) = k1000
+
+2. Verify that the caller's kernel ids can be mapped to userspace ids in the
+   filesystem's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, k21000) = u1000
+
+So the ownership that lands on disk will be ``u1000``.
+
+Example 4 reconsidered
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ file id:              u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k10000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k0:r4294967295
+ mount idmapping:      u0:k10000:r10000
+
+In order to report ownership to userspace the kernel now does three steps using
+the translation algorithm we introduced earlier:
+
+1. Map the userspace id on disk down into a kernel id in the filesystem's
+   idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, u1000) = k1000
+
+2. Translate the kernel id into a kernel id in the mount's idmapping::
+
+    i_uid_into_mnt(k1000):
+      /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the filesystem's idmapping. */
+      from_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, k1000) = u1000
+
+      /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the mounts's idmapping. */
+      make_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, u1000) = k11000
+
+3. Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u1000
+
+Earlier, the caller's kernel id couldn't be crossmapped in the filesystems's
+idmapping. With the idmapped mount in place it now can be crossmapped into the
+filesystem's idmapping via the mount's idmapping. The file will now be created
+with ``u1000`` according to the mount's idmapping.
+
+Example 5 reconsidered
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ file id:              u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k10000:r10000
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k20000:r10000
+ mount idmapping:      u0:k10000:r10000
+
+Again, in order to report ownership to userspace the kernel now does three
+steps using the translation algorithm we introduced earlier:
+
+1. Map the userspace id on disk down into a kernel id in the filesystem's
+   idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, u1000) = k21000
+
+2. Translate the kernel id into a kernel id in the mount's idmapping::
+
+    i_uid_into_mnt(k21000):
+      /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the filesystem's idmapping. */
+      from_kuid(u0:k20000:r10000, k21000) = u1000
+
+      /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the mounts's idmapping. */
+      make_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, u1000) = k11000
+
+3. Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k10000:r10000, k11000) = u1000
+
+Earlier, the file's kernel id couldn't be crossmapped in the filesystems's
+idmapping. With the idmapped mount in place it now can be crossmapped into the
+filesystem's idmapping via the mount's idmapping. The file is now owned by
+``u1000`` according to the mount's idmapping.
+
+Changing ownership on a home directory
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+We've seen above how idmapped mounts can be used to translate between
+idmappings when either the caller, the filesystem or both uses a non-initial
+idmapping. A wide range of usecases exist when the caller is using
+a non-initial idmapping. This mostly happens in the context of containerized
+workloads. The consequence is as we have seen that for both, filesystem's
+mounted with the initial idmapping and filesystems mounted with non-initial
+idmappings, access to the filesystem isn't working because the kernel ids can't
+be crossmapped between the caller's and the filesystem's idmapping.
+
+As we've seen above idmapped mounts provide a solution to this by remapping the
+caller's or filesystem's idmapping according to the mount's idmapping.
+
+Aside from containerized workloads, idmapped mounts have the advantage that
+they also work when both the caller and the filesystem use the initial
+idmapping which means users on the host can change the ownership of directories
+and files on a per-mount basis.
+
+Consider our previous example where a user has their home directory on portable
+storage. At home they have id ``u1000`` and all files in their home directory
+are owned by ``u1000`` whereas at uni or work they have login id ``u1125``.
+
+Taking their home directory with them becomes problematic. They can't easily
+access their files, they might not be able to write to disk without applying
+lax permissions or ACLs and even if they can, they will end up with an annoying
+mix of files and directories owned by ``u1000`` and ``u1125``.
+
+Idmapped mounts allow to solve this problem. A user can create an idmapped
+mount for their home directory on their work computer or their computer at home
+depending on what ownership they would prefer to end up on the portable storage
+itself.
+
+Let's assume they want all files on disk to belong to ``u1000``. When the user
+plugs in their portable storage at their work station they can setup a job that
+creates an idmapped mount with the minimal idmapping ``u1000:k1125:r1``. So now
+when they create a file the kernel performs the following steps we already know
+from above:::
+
+ caller id:            u1125
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k0:r4294967295
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k0:r4294967295
+ mount idmapping:      u1000:k1125:r1
+
+1. Map the caller's userspace ids into kernel ids in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, u1125) = k1125
+
+2. Translate the caller's kernel id into a kernel id in the filesystem's
+   idmapping::
+
+    mapped_fsuid(k1125):
+      /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the mount's idmapping. */
+      from_kuid(u1000:k1125:r1, k1125) = u1000
+
+      /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the filesystem's idmapping. */
+      make_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, u1000) = k1000
+
+2. Verify that the caller's kernel ids can be mapped to userspace ids in the
+   filesystem's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, k1000) = u1000
+
+So ultimately the file will be created with ``u1000`` on disk.
+
+Now let's briefly look at what ownership the caller with id ``u1125`` will see
+on their work computer:
+
+::
+
+ file id:              u1000
+ caller idmapping:     u0:k0:r4294967295
+ filesystem idmapping: u0:k0:r4294967295
+ mount idmapping:      u1000:k1125:r1
+
+1. Map the userspace id on disk down into a kernel id in the filesystem's
+   idmapping::
+
+    make_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, u1000) = k1000
+
+2. Translate the kernel id into a kernel id in the mount's idmapping::
+
+    i_uid_into_mnt(k1000):
+      /* Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the filesystem's idmapping. */
+      from_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, k1000) = u1000
+
+      /* Map the userspace id down into a kernel id in the mounts's idmapping. */
+      make_kuid(u1000:k1125:r1, u1000) = k1125
+
+3. Map the kernel id up into a userspace id in the caller's idmapping::
+
+    from_kuid(u0:k0:r4294967295, k1125) = u1125
+
+So ultimately the caller will be reported that the file belongs to ``u1125``
+which is the caller's userspace id on their workstation in our example.
+
+The raw userspace id that is put on disk is ``u1000`` so when the user takes
+their home directory back to their home computer where they are assigned
+``u1000`` using the initial idmapping and mount the filesystem with the initial
+idmapping they will see all those files owned by ``u1000``.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bee63d42e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+.. _filesystems_index:
+
+===============================
+Filesystems in the Linux kernel
+===============================
+
+This under-development manual will, some glorious day, provide
+comprehensive information on how the Linux virtual filesystem (VFS) layer
+works, along with the filesystems that sit below it.  For now, what we have
+can be found below.
+
+Core VFS documentation
+======================
+
+See these manuals for documentation about the VFS layer itself and how its
+algorithms work.
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   vfs
+   path-lookup
+   api-summary
+   splice
+   locking
+   directory-locking
+   devpts
+   dnotify
+   fiemap
+   files
+   locks
+   mount_api
+   quota
+   seq_file
+   sharedsubtree
+   idmappings
+
+   automount-support
+
+   caching/index
+
+   porting
+
+Filesystem support layers
+=========================
+
+Documentation for the support code within the filesystem layer for use in
+filesystem implementations.
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   journalling
+   fscrypt
+   fsverity
+   netfs_library
+
+Filesystems
+===========
+
+Documentation for filesystem implementations.
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 2
+
+   9p
+   adfs
+   affs
+   afs
+   autofs
+   autofs-mount-control
+   befs
+   bfs
+   btrfs
+   cifs/index
+   ceph
+   coda
+   configfs
+   cramfs
+   dax
+   debugfs
+   dlmfs
+   ecryptfs
+   efivarfs
+   erofs
+   ext2
+   ext3
+   ext4/index
+   f2fs
+   gfs2
+   gfs2-uevents
+   gfs2-glocks
+   hfs
+   hfsplus
+   hpfs
+   fuse
+   fuse-io
+   inotify
+   isofs
+   nilfs2
+   nfs/index
+   ntfs
+   ntfs3
+   ocfs2
+   ocfs2-online-filecheck
+   omfs
+   orangefs
+   overlayfs
+   proc
+   qnx6
+   ramfs-rootfs-initramfs
+   relay
+   romfs
+   spufs/index
+   squashfs
+   sysfs
+   sysv-fs
+   tmpfs
+   ubifs
+   ubifs-authentication
+   udf
+   virtiofs
+   vfat
+   xfs-delayed-logging-design
+   xfs-self-describing-metadata
+   zonefs
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/inotify.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/inotify.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7f7ef8af0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/inotify.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============================================================
+Inotify - A Powerful yet Simple File Change Notification System
+===============================================================
+
+
+
+Document started 15 Mar 2005 by Robert Love <rml@novell.com>
+
+Document updated 4 Jan 2015 by Zhang Zhen <zhenzhang.zhang@huawei.com>
+
+	- Deleted obsoleted interface, just refer to manpages for user interface.
+
+(i) Rationale
+
+Q:
+   What is the design decision behind not tying the watch to the open fd of
+   the watched object?
+
+A:
+   Watches are associated with an open inotify device, not an open file.
+   This solves the primary problem with dnotify: keeping the file open pins
+   the file and thus, worse, pins the mount.  Dnotify is therefore infeasible
+   for use on a desktop system with removable media as the media cannot be
+   unmounted.  Watching a file should not require that it be open.
+
+Q:
+   What is the design decision behind using an-fd-per-instance as opposed to
+   an fd-per-watch?
+
+A:
+   An fd-per-watch quickly consumes more file descriptors than are allowed,
+   more fd's than are feasible to manage, and more fd's than are optimally
+   select()-able.  Yes, root can bump the per-process fd limit and yes, users
+   can use epoll, but requiring both is a silly and extraneous requirement.
+   A watch consumes less memory than an open file, separating the number
+   spaces is thus sensible.  The current design is what user-space developers
+   want: Users initialize inotify, once, and add n watches, requiring but one
+   fd and no twiddling with fd limits.  Initializing an inotify instance two
+   thousand times is silly.  If we can implement user-space's preferences
+   cleanly--and we can, the idr layer makes stuff like this trivial--then we
+   should.
+
+   There are other good arguments.  With a single fd, there is a single
+   item to block on, which is mapped to a single queue of events.  The single
+   fd returns all watch events and also any potential out-of-band data.  If
+   every fd was a separate watch,
+
+   - There would be no way to get event ordering.  Events on file foo and
+     file bar would pop poll() on both fd's, but there would be no way to tell
+     which happened first.  A single queue trivially gives you ordering.  Such
+     ordering is crucial to existing applications such as Beagle.  Imagine
+     "mv a b ; mv b a" events without ordering.
+
+   - We'd have to maintain n fd's and n internal queues with state,
+     versus just one.  It is a lot messier in the kernel.  A single, linear
+     queue is the data structure that makes sense.
+
+   - User-space developers prefer the current API.  The Beagle guys, for
+     example, love it.  Trust me, I asked.  It is not a surprise: Who'd want
+     to manage and block on 1000 fd's via select?
+
+   - No way to get out of band data.
+
+   - 1024 is still too low.  ;-)
+
+   When you talk about designing a file change notification system that
+   scales to 1000s of directories, juggling 1000s of fd's just does not seem
+   the right interface.  It is too heavy.
+
+   Additionally, it _is_ possible to  more than one instance  and
+   juggle more than one queue and thus more than one associated fd.  There
+   need not be a one-fd-per-process mapping; it is one-fd-per-queue and a
+   process can easily want more than one queue.
+
+Q:
+   Why the system call approach?
+
+A:
+   The poor user-space interface is the second biggest problem with dnotify.
+   Signals are a terrible, terrible interface for file notification.  Or for
+   anything, for that matter.  The ideal solution, from all perspectives, is a
+   file descriptor-based one that allows basic file I/O and poll/select.
+   Obtaining the fd and managing the watches could have been done either via a
+   device file or a family of new system calls.  We decided to implement a
+   family of system calls because that is the preferred approach for new kernel
+   interfaces.  The only real difference was whether we wanted to use open(2)
+   and ioctl(2) or a couple of new system calls.  System calls beat ioctls.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/isofs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/isofs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..08fd46909
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/isofs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==================
+ISO9660 Filesystem
+==================
+
+Mount options that are the same as for msdos and vfat partitions.
+
+  =========	========================================================
+  gid=nnn	All files in the partition will be in group nnn.
+  uid=nnn	All files in the partition will be owned by user id nnn.
+  umask=nnn	The permission mask (see umask(1)) for the partition.
+  =========	========================================================
+
+Mount options that are the same as vfat partitions. These are only useful
+when using discs encoded using Microsoft's Joliet extensions.
+
+ ==============	=============================================================
+ iocharset=name Character set to use for converting from Unicode to
+		ASCII.  Joliet filenames are stored in Unicode format, but
+		Unix for the most part doesn't know how to deal with Unicode.
+		There is also an option of doing UTF-8 translations with the
+		utf8 option.
+  utf8          Encode Unicode names in UTF-8 format. Default is no.
+ ==============	=============================================================
+
+Mount options unique to the isofs filesystem.
+
+ ================= ============================================================
+  block=512        Set the block size for the disk to 512 bytes
+  block=1024       Set the block size for the disk to 1024 bytes
+  block=2048       Set the block size for the disk to 2048 bytes
+  check=relaxed    Matches filenames with different cases
+  check=strict     Matches only filenames with the exact same case
+  cruft            Try to handle badly formatted CDs.
+  map=off          Do not map non-Rock Ridge filenames to lower case
+  map=normal       Map non-Rock Ridge filenames to lower case
+  map=acorn        As map=normal but also apply Acorn extensions if present
+  mode=xxx         Sets the permissions on files to xxx unless Rock Ridge
+		   extensions set the permissions otherwise
+  dmode=xxx        Sets the permissions on directories to xxx unless Rock Ridge
+		   extensions set the permissions otherwise
+  overriderockperm Set permissions on files and directories according to
+		   'mode' and 'dmode' even though Rock Ridge extensions are
+		   present.
+  nojoliet         Ignore Joliet extensions if they are present.
+  norock           Ignore Rock Ridge extensions if they are present.
+  hide		   Completely strip hidden files from the file system.
+  showassoc	   Show files marked with the 'associated' bit
+  unhide	   Deprecated; showing hidden files is now default;
+		   If given, it is a synonym for 'showassoc' which will
+		   recreate previous unhide behavior
+  session=x        Select number of session on multisession CD
+  sbsector=xxx     Session begins from sector xxx
+ ================= ============================================================
+
+Recommended documents about ISO 9660 standard are located at:
+
+- http://www.y-adagio.com/
+- ftp://ftp.ecma.ch/ecma-st/Ecma-119.pdf
+
+Quoting from the PDF "This 2nd Edition of Standard ECMA-119 is technically
+identical with ISO 9660.", so it is a valid and gratis substitute of the
+official ISO specification.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/journalling.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/journalling.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e18f90ffc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/journalling.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+The Linux Journalling API
+=========================
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+Details
+~~~~~~~
+
+The journalling layer is easy to use. You need to first of all create a
+journal_t data structure. There are two calls to do this dependent on
+how you decide to allocate the physical media on which the journal
+resides. The jbd2_journal_init_inode() call is for journals stored in
+filesystem inodes, or the jbd2_journal_init_dev() call can be used
+for journal stored on a raw device (in a continuous range of blocks). A
+journal_t is a typedef for a struct pointer, so when you are finally
+finished make sure you call jbd2_journal_destroy() on it to free up
+any used kernel memory.
+
+Once you have got your journal_t object you need to 'mount' or load the
+journal file. The journalling layer expects the space for the journal
+was already allocated and initialized properly by the userspace tools.
+When loading the journal you must call jbd2_journal_load() to process
+journal contents. If the client file system detects the journal contents
+does not need to be processed (or even need not have valid contents), it
+may call jbd2_journal_wipe() to clear the journal contents before
+calling jbd2_journal_load().
+
+Note that jbd2_journal_wipe(..,0) calls
+jbd2_journal_skip_recovery() for you if it detects any outstanding
+transactions in the journal and similarly jbd2_journal_load() will
+call jbd2_journal_recover() if necessary. I would advise reading
+ext4_load_journal() in fs/ext4/super.c for examples on this stage.
+
+Now you can go ahead and start modifying the underlying filesystem.
+Almost.
+
+You still need to actually journal your filesystem changes, this is done
+by wrapping them into transactions. Additionally you also need to wrap
+the modification of each of the buffers with calls to the journal layer,
+so it knows what the modifications you are actually making are. To do
+this use jbd2_journal_start() which returns a transaction handle.
+
+jbd2_journal_start() and its counterpart jbd2_journal_stop(),
+which indicates the end of a transaction are nestable calls, so you can
+reenter a transaction if necessary, but remember you must call
+jbd2_journal_stop() the same number of times as
+jbd2_journal_start() before the transaction is completed (or more
+accurately leaves the update phase). Ext4/VFS makes use of this feature to
+simplify handling of inode dirtying, quota support, etc.
+
+Inside each transaction you need to wrap the modifications to the
+individual buffers (blocks). Before you start to modify a buffer you
+need to call jbd2_journal_get_create_access() /
+jbd2_journal_get_write_access() /
+jbd2_journal_get_undo_access() as appropriate, this allows the
+journalling layer to copy the unmodified
+data if it needs to. After all the buffer may be part of a previously
+uncommitted transaction. At this point you are at last ready to modify a
+buffer, and once you are have done so you need to call
+jbd2_journal_dirty_metadata(). Or if you've asked for access to a
+buffer you now know is now longer required to be pushed back on the
+device you can call jbd2_journal_forget() in much the same way as you
+might have used bforget() in the past.
+
+A jbd2_journal_flush() may be called at any time to commit and
+checkpoint all your transactions.
+
+Then at umount time , in your put_super() you can then call
+jbd2_journal_destroy() to clean up your in-core journal object.
+
+Unfortunately there a couple of ways the journal layer can cause a
+deadlock. The first thing to note is that each task can only have a
+single outstanding transaction at any one time, remember nothing commits
+until the outermost jbd2_journal_stop(). This means you must complete
+the transaction at the end of each file/inode/address etc. operation you
+perform, so that the journalling system isn't re-entered on another
+journal. Since transactions can't be nested/batched across differing
+journals, and another filesystem other than yours (say ext4) may be
+modified in a later syscall.
+
+The second case to bear in mind is that jbd2_journal_start() can block
+if there isn't enough space in the journal for your transaction (based
+on the passed nblocks param) - when it blocks it merely(!) needs to wait
+for transactions to complete and be committed from other tasks, so
+essentially we are waiting for jbd2_journal_stop(). So to avoid
+deadlocks you must treat jbd2_journal_start() /
+jbd2_journal_stop() as if they were semaphores and include them in
+your semaphore ordering rules to prevent
+deadlocks. Note that jbd2_journal_extend() has similar blocking
+behaviour to jbd2_journal_start() so you can deadlock here just as
+easily as on jbd2_journal_start().
+
+Try to reserve the right number of blocks the first time. ;-). This will
+be the maximum number of blocks you are going to touch in this
+transaction. I advise having a look at at least ext4_jbd.h to see the
+basis on which ext4 uses to make these decisions.
+
+Another wriggle to watch out for is your on-disk block allocation
+strategy. Why? Because, if you do a delete, you need to ensure you
+haven't reused any of the freed blocks until the transaction freeing
+these blocks commits. If you reused these blocks and crash happens,
+there is no way to restore the contents of the reallocated blocks at the
+end of the last fully committed transaction. One simple way of doing
+this is to mark blocks as free in internal in-memory block allocation
+structures only after the transaction freeing them commits. Ext4 uses
+journal commit callback for this purpose.
+
+With journal commit callbacks you can ask the journalling layer to call
+a callback function when the transaction is finally committed to disk,
+so that you can do some of your own management. You ask the journalling
+layer for calling the callback by simply setting
+``journal->j_commit_callback`` function pointer and that function is
+called after each transaction commit. You can also use
+``transaction->t_private_list`` for attaching entries to a transaction
+that need processing when the transaction commits.
+
+JBD2 also provides a way to block all transaction updates via
+jbd2_journal_lock_updates() /
+jbd2_journal_unlock_updates(). Ext4 uses this when it wants a
+window with a clean and stable fs for a moment. E.g.
+
+::
+
+
+        jbd2_journal_lock_updates() //stop new stuff happening..
+        jbd2_journal_flush()        // checkpoint everything.
+        ..do stuff on stable fs
+        jbd2_journal_unlock_updates() // carry on with filesystem use.
+
+The opportunities for abuse and DOS attacks with this should be obvious,
+if you allow unprivileged userspace to trigger codepaths containing
+these calls.
+
+Fast commits
+~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+JBD2 to also allows you to perform file-system specific delta commits known as
+fast commits. In order to use fast commits, you will need to set following
+callbacks that perform correspodning work:
+
+`journal->j_fc_cleanup_cb`: Cleanup function called after every full commit and
+fast commit.
+
+`journal->j_fc_replay_cb`: Replay function called for replay of fast commit
+blocks.
+
+File system is free to perform fast commits as and when it wants as long as it
+gets permission from JBD2 to do so by calling the function
+:c:func:`jbd2_fc_begin_commit()`. Once a fast commit is done, the client
+file  system should tell JBD2 about it by calling
+:c:func:`jbd2_fc_end_commit()`. If file system wants JBD2 to perform a full
+commit immediately after stopping the fast commit it can do so by calling
+:c:func:`jbd2_fc_end_commit_fallback()`. This is useful if fast commit operation
+fails for some reason and the only way to guarantee consistency is for JBD2 to
+perform the full traditional commit.
+
+JBD2 helper functions to manage fast commit buffers. File system can use
+:c:func:`jbd2_fc_get_buf()` and :c:func:`jbd2_fc_wait_bufs()` to allocate
+and wait on IO completion of fast commit buffers.
+
+Currently, only Ext4 implements fast commits. For details of its implementation
+of fast commits, please refer to the top level comments in
+fs/ext4/fast_commit.c.
+
+Summary
+~~~~~~~
+
+Using the journal is a matter of wrapping the different context changes,
+being each mount, each modification (transaction) and each changed
+buffer to tell the journalling layer about them.
+
+Data Types
+----------
+
+The journalling layer uses typedefs to 'hide' the concrete definitions
+of the structures used. As a client of the JBD2 layer you can just rely
+on the using the pointer as a magic cookie of some sort. Obviously the
+hiding is not enforced as this is 'C'.
+
+Structures
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/jbd2.h
+   :internal:
+
+Functions
+---------
+
+The functions here are split into two groups those that affect a journal
+as a whole, and those which are used to manage transactions
+
+Journal Level
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/journal.c
+   :export:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/recovery.c
+   :internal:
+
+Transasction Level
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/jbd2/transaction.c
+
+See also
+--------
+
+`Journaling the Linux ext2fs Filesystem, LinuxExpo 98, Stephen
+Tweedie <http://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/sct/ext3/journal-design.ps.gz>`__
+
+`Ext3 Journalling FileSystem, OLS 2000, Dr. Stephen
+Tweedie <http://olstrans.sourceforge.net/release/OLS2000-ext3/OLS2000-ext3.html>`__
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/locking.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/locking.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..555215c41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/locking.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,697 @@
+=======
+Locking
+=======
+
+The text below describes the locking rules for VFS-related methods.
+It is (believed to be) up-to-date. *Please*, if you change anything in
+prototypes or locking protocols - update this file. And update the relevant
+instances in the tree, don't leave that to maintainers of filesystems/devices/
+etc. At the very least, put the list of dubious cases in the end of this file.
+Don't turn it into log - maintainers of out-of-the-tree code are supposed to
+be able to use diff(1).
+
+Thing currently missing here: socket operations. Alexey?
+
+dentry_operations
+=================
+
+prototypes::
+
+	int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+	int (*d_weak_revalidate)(struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+	int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, struct qstr *);
+	int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *,
+			unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *);
+	int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *);
+	int (*d_init)(struct dentry *);
+	void (*d_release)(struct dentry *);
+	void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *);
+	char *(*d_dname)((struct dentry *dentry, char *buffer, int buflen);
+	struct vfsmount *(*d_automount)(struct path *path);
+	int (*d_manage)(const struct path *, bool);
+	struct dentry *(*d_real)(struct dentry *, const struct inode *);
+
+locking rules:
+
+================== ===========	========	==============	========
+ops		   rename_lock	->d_lock	may block	rcu-walk
+================== ===========	========	==============	========
+d_revalidate:	   no		no		yes (ref-walk)	maybe
+d_weak_revalidate: no		no		yes	 	no
+d_hash		   no		no		no		maybe
+d_compare:	   yes		no		no		maybe
+d_delete:	   no		yes		no		no
+d_init:		   no		no		yes		no
+d_release:	   no		no		yes		no
+d_prune:           no		yes		no		no
+d_iput:		   no		no		yes		no
+d_dname:	   no		no		no		no
+d_automount:	   no		no		yes		no
+d_manage:	   no		no		yes (ref-walk)	maybe
+d_real		   no		no		yes 		no
+================== ===========	========	==============	========
+
+inode_operations
+================
+
+prototypes::
+
+	int (*create) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,umode_t, bool);
+	struct dentry * (*lookup) (struct inode *,struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+	int (*link) (struct dentry *,struct inode *,struct dentry *);
+	int (*unlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *);
+	int (*symlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,const char *);
+	int (*mkdir) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,umode_t);
+	int (*rmdir) (struct inode *,struct dentry *);
+	int (*mknod) (struct inode *,struct dentry *,umode_t,dev_t);
+	int (*rename) (struct inode *, struct dentry *,
+			struct inode *, struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+	int (*readlink) (struct dentry *, char __user *,int);
+	const char *(*get_link) (struct dentry *, struct inode *, struct delayed_call *);
+	void (*truncate) (struct inode *);
+	int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int);
+	struct posix_acl * (*get_acl)(struct inode *, int, bool);
+	int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *);
+	int (*getattr) (const struct path *, struct kstat *, u32, unsigned int);
+	ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t);
+	int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start, u64 len);
+	void (*update_time)(struct inode *, struct timespec *, int);
+	int (*atomic_open)(struct inode *, struct dentry *,
+				struct file *, unsigned open_flag,
+				umode_t create_mode);
+	int (*tmpfile) (struct user_namespace *, struct inode *,
+			struct file *, umode_t);
+	int (*fileattr_set)(struct user_namespace *mnt_userns,
+			    struct dentry *dentry, struct fileattr *fa);
+	int (*fileattr_get)(struct dentry *dentry, struct fileattr *fa);
+
+locking rules:
+	all may block
+
+=============	=============================================
+ops		i_rwsem(inode)
+=============	=============================================
+lookup:		shared
+create:		exclusive
+link:		exclusive (both)
+mknod:		exclusive
+symlink:	exclusive
+mkdir:		exclusive
+unlink:		exclusive (both)
+rmdir:		exclusive (both)(see below)
+rename:		exclusive (both parents, some children)	(see below)
+readlink:	no
+get_link:	no
+setattr:	exclusive
+permission:	no (may not block if called in rcu-walk mode)
+get_acl:	no
+getattr:	no
+listxattr:	no
+fiemap:		no
+update_time:	no
+atomic_open:	shared (exclusive if O_CREAT is set in open flags)
+tmpfile:	no
+fileattr_get:	no or exclusive
+fileattr_set:	exclusive
+=============	=============================================
+
+
+	Additionally, ->rmdir(), ->unlink() and ->rename() have ->i_rwsem
+	exclusive on victim.
+	cross-directory ->rename() has (per-superblock) ->s_vfs_rename_sem.
+	->unlink() and ->rename() have ->i_rwsem exclusive on all non-directories
+	involved.
+	->rename() has ->i_rwsem exclusive on any subdirectory that changes parent.
+
+See Documentation/filesystems/directory-locking.rst for more detailed discussion
+of the locking scheme for directory operations.
+
+xattr_handler operations
+========================
+
+prototypes::
+
+	bool (*list)(struct dentry *dentry);
+	int (*get)(const struct xattr_handler *handler, struct dentry *dentry,
+		   struct inode *inode, const char *name, void *buffer,
+		   size_t size);
+	int (*set)(const struct xattr_handler *handler,
+                   struct user_namespace *mnt_userns,
+                   struct dentry *dentry, struct inode *inode, const char *name,
+                   const void *buffer, size_t size, int flags);
+
+locking rules:
+	all may block
+
+=====		==============
+ops		i_rwsem(inode)
+=====		==============
+list:		no
+get:		no
+set:		exclusive
+=====		==============
+
+super_operations
+================
+
+prototypes::
+
+	struct inode *(*alloc_inode)(struct super_block *sb);
+	void (*free_inode)(struct inode *);
+	void (*destroy_inode)(struct inode *);
+	void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *, int flags);
+	int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, struct writeback_control *wbc);
+	int (*drop_inode) (struct inode *);
+	void (*evict_inode) (struct inode *);
+	void (*put_super) (struct super_block *);
+	int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
+	int (*freeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
+	int (*unfreeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
+	int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
+	int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
+	void (*umount_begin) (struct super_block *);
+	int (*show_options)(struct seq_file *, struct dentry *);
+	ssize_t (*quota_read)(struct super_block *, int, char *, size_t, loff_t);
+	ssize_t (*quota_write)(struct super_block *, int, const char *, size_t, loff_t);
+
+locking rules:
+	All may block [not true, see below]
+
+======================	============	========================
+ops			s_umount	note
+======================	============	========================
+alloc_inode:
+free_inode:				called from RCU callback
+destroy_inode:
+dirty_inode:
+write_inode:
+drop_inode:				!!!inode->i_lock!!!
+evict_inode:
+put_super:		write
+sync_fs:		read
+freeze_fs:		write
+unfreeze_fs:		write
+statfs:			maybe(read)	(see below)
+remount_fs:		write
+umount_begin:		no
+show_options:		no		(namespace_sem)
+quota_read:		no		(see below)
+quota_write:		no		(see below)
+======================	============	========================
+
+->statfs() has s_umount (shared) when called by ustat(2) (native or
+compat), but that's an accident of bad API; s_umount is used to pin
+the superblock down when we only have dev_t given us by userland to
+identify the superblock.  Everything else (statfs(), fstatfs(), etc.)
+doesn't hold it when calling ->statfs() - superblock is pinned down
+by resolving the pathname passed to syscall.
+
+->quota_read() and ->quota_write() functions are both guaranteed to
+be the only ones operating on the quota file by the quota code (via
+dqio_sem) (unless an admin really wants to screw up something and
+writes to quota files with quotas on). For other details about locking
+see also dquot_operations section.
+
+file_system_type
+================
+
+prototypes::
+
+	struct dentry *(*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int,
+		       const char *, void *);
+	void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
+
+locking rules:
+
+=======		=========
+ops		may block
+=======		=========
+mount		yes
+kill_sb		yes
+=======		=========
+
+->mount() returns ERR_PTR or the root dentry; its superblock should be locked
+on return.
+
+->kill_sb() takes a write-locked superblock, does all shutdown work on it,
+unlocks and drops the reference.
+
+address_space_operations
+========================
+prototypes::
+
+	int (*writepage)(struct page *page, struct writeback_control *wbc);
+	int (*read_folio)(struct file *, struct folio *);
+	int (*writepages)(struct address_space *, struct writeback_control *);
+	bool (*dirty_folio)(struct address_space *, struct folio *folio);
+	void (*readahead)(struct readahead_control *);
+	int (*write_begin)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping,
+				loff_t pos, unsigned len,
+				struct page **pagep, void **fsdata);
+	int (*write_end)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping,
+				loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned copied,
+				struct page *page, void *fsdata);
+	sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t);
+	void (*invalidate_folio) (struct folio *, size_t start, size_t len);
+	bool (*release_folio)(struct folio *, gfp_t);
+	void (*free_folio)(struct folio *);
+	int (*direct_IO)(struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *iter);
+	int (*migrate_folio)(struct address_space *, struct folio *dst,
+			struct folio *src, enum migrate_mode);
+	int (*launder_folio)(struct folio *);
+	bool (*is_partially_uptodate)(struct folio *, size_t from, size_t count);
+	int (*error_remove_page)(struct address_space *, struct page *);
+	int (*swap_activate)(struct swap_info_struct *sis, struct file *f, sector_t *span)
+	int (*swap_deactivate)(struct file *);
+	int (*swap_rw)(struct kiocb *iocb, struct iov_iter *iter);
+
+locking rules:
+	All except dirty_folio and free_folio may block
+
+======================	======================== =========	===============
+ops			folio locked		 i_rwsem	invalidate_lock
+======================	======================== =========	===============
+writepage:		yes, unlocks (see below)
+read_folio:		yes, unlocks				shared
+writepages:
+dirty_folio:		maybe
+readahead:		yes, unlocks				shared
+write_begin:		locks the page		 exclusive
+write_end:		yes, unlocks		 exclusive
+bmap:
+invalidate_folio:	yes					exclusive
+release_folio:		yes
+free_folio:		yes
+direct_IO:
+migrate_folio:		yes (both)
+launder_folio:		yes
+is_partially_uptodate:	yes
+error_remove_page:	yes
+swap_activate:		no
+swap_deactivate:	no
+swap_rw:		yes, unlocks
+======================	======================== =========	===============
+
+->write_begin(), ->write_end() and ->read_folio() may be called from
+the request handler (/dev/loop).
+
+->read_folio() unlocks the folio, either synchronously or via I/O
+completion.
+
+->readahead() unlocks the folios that I/O is attempted on like ->read_folio().
+
+->writepage() is used for two purposes: for "memory cleansing" and for
+"sync".  These are quite different operations and the behaviour may differ
+depending upon the mode.
+
+If writepage is called for sync (wbc->sync_mode != WBC_SYNC_NONE) then
+it *must* start I/O against the page, even if that would involve
+blocking on in-progress I/O.
+
+If writepage is called for memory cleansing (sync_mode ==
+WBC_SYNC_NONE) then its role is to get as much writeout underway as
+possible.  So writepage should try to avoid blocking against
+currently-in-progress I/O.
+
+If the filesystem is not called for "sync" and it determines that it
+would need to block against in-progress I/O to be able to start new I/O
+against the page the filesystem should redirty the page with
+redirty_page_for_writepage(), then unlock the page and return zero.
+This may also be done to avoid internal deadlocks, but rarely.
+
+If the filesystem is called for sync then it must wait on any
+in-progress I/O and then start new I/O.
+
+The filesystem should unlock the page synchronously, before returning to the
+caller, unless ->writepage() returns special WRITEPAGE_ACTIVATE
+value. WRITEPAGE_ACTIVATE means that page cannot really be written out
+currently, and VM should stop calling ->writepage() on this page for some
+time. VM does this by moving page to the head of the active list, hence the
+name.
+
+Unless the filesystem is going to redirty_page_for_writepage(), unlock the page
+and return zero, writepage *must* run set_page_writeback() against the page,
+followed by unlocking it.  Once set_page_writeback() has been run against the
+page, write I/O can be submitted and the write I/O completion handler must run
+end_page_writeback() once the I/O is complete.  If no I/O is submitted, the
+filesystem must run end_page_writeback() against the page before returning from
+writepage.
+
+That is: after 2.5.12, pages which are under writeout are *not* locked.  Note,
+if the filesystem needs the page to be locked during writeout, that is ok, too,
+the page is allowed to be unlocked at any point in time between the calls to
+set_page_writeback() and end_page_writeback().
+
+Note, failure to run either redirty_page_for_writepage() or the combination of
+set_page_writeback()/end_page_writeback() on a page submitted to writepage
+will leave the page itself marked clean but it will be tagged as dirty in the
+radix tree.  This incoherency can lead to all sorts of hard-to-debug problems
+in the filesystem like having dirty inodes at umount and losing written data.
+
+->writepages() is used for periodic writeback and for syscall-initiated
+sync operations.  The address_space should start I/O against at least
+``*nr_to_write`` pages.  ``*nr_to_write`` must be decremented for each page
+which is written.  The address_space implementation may write more (or less)
+pages than ``*nr_to_write`` asks for, but it should try to be reasonably close.
+If nr_to_write is NULL, all dirty pages must be written.
+
+writepages should _only_ write pages which are present on
+mapping->io_pages.
+
+->dirty_folio() is called from various places in the kernel when
+the target folio is marked as needing writeback.  The folio cannot be
+truncated because either the caller holds the folio lock, or the caller
+has found the folio while holding the page table lock which will block
+truncation.
+
+->bmap() is currently used by legacy ioctl() (FIBMAP) provided by some
+filesystems and by the swapper. The latter will eventually go away.  Please,
+keep it that way and don't breed new callers.
+
+->invalidate_folio() is called when the filesystem must attempt to drop
+some or all of the buffers from the page when it is being truncated. It
+returns zero on success.  The filesystem must exclusively acquire
+invalidate_lock before invalidating page cache in truncate / hole punch
+path (and thus calling into ->invalidate_folio) to block races between page
+cache invalidation and page cache filling functions (fault, read, ...).
+
+->release_folio() is called when the kernel is about to try to drop the
+buffers from the folio in preparation for freeing it.  It returns false to
+indicate that the buffers are (or may be) freeable.  If ->release_folio is
+NULL, the kernel assumes that the fs has no private interest in the buffers.
+
+->free_folio() is called when the kernel has dropped the folio
+from the page cache.
+
+->launder_folio() may be called prior to releasing a folio if
+it is still found to be dirty. It returns zero if the folio was successfully
+cleaned, or an error value if not. Note that in order to prevent the folio
+getting mapped back in and redirtied, it needs to be kept locked
+across the entire operation.
+
+->swap_activate() will be called to prepare the given file for swap.  It
+should perform any validation and preparation necessary to ensure that
+writes can be performed with minimal memory allocation.  It should call
+add_swap_extent(), or the helper iomap_swapfile_activate(), and return
+the number of extents added.  If IO should be submitted through
+->swap_rw(), it should set SWP_FS_OPS, otherwise IO will be submitted
+directly to the block device ``sis->bdev``.
+
+->swap_deactivate() will be called in the sys_swapoff()
+path after ->swap_activate() returned success.
+
+->swap_rw will be called for swap IO if SWP_FS_OPS was set by ->swap_activate().
+
+file_lock_operations
+====================
+
+prototypes::
+
+	void (*fl_copy_lock)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *);
+	void (*fl_release_private)(struct file_lock *);
+
+
+locking rules:
+
+===================	=============	=========
+ops			inode->i_lock	may block
+===================	=============	=========
+fl_copy_lock:		yes		no
+fl_release_private:	maybe		maybe[1]_
+===================	=============	=========
+
+.. [1]:
+   ->fl_release_private for flock or POSIX locks is currently allowed
+   to block. Leases however can still be freed while the i_lock is held and
+   so fl_release_private called on a lease should not block.
+
+lock_manager_operations
+=======================
+
+prototypes::
+
+	void (*lm_notify)(struct file_lock *);  /* unblock callback */
+	int (*lm_grant)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *, int);
+	void (*lm_break)(struct file_lock *); /* break_lease callback */
+	int (*lm_change)(struct file_lock **, int);
+	bool (*lm_breaker_owns_lease)(struct file_lock *);
+        bool (*lm_lock_expirable)(struct file_lock *);
+        void (*lm_expire_lock)(void);
+
+locking rules:
+
+======================	=============	=================	=========
+ops			   flc_lock  	blocked_lock_lock	may block
+======================	=============	=================	=========
+lm_notify:		no      	yes			no
+lm_grant:		no		no			no
+lm_break:		yes		no			no
+lm_change		yes		no			no
+lm_breaker_owns_lease:	yes     	no			no
+lm_lock_expirable	yes		no			no
+lm_expire_lock		no		no			yes
+======================	=============	=================	=========
+
+buffer_head
+===========
+
+prototypes::
+
+	void (*b_end_io)(struct buffer_head *bh, int uptodate);
+
+locking rules:
+
+called from interrupts. In other words, extreme care is needed here.
+bh is locked, but that's all warranties we have here. Currently only RAID1,
+highmem, fs/buffer.c, and fs/ntfs/aops.c are providing these. Block devices
+call this method upon the IO completion.
+
+block_device_operations
+=======================
+prototypes::
+
+	int (*open) (struct block_device *, fmode_t);
+	int (*release) (struct gendisk *, fmode_t);
+	int (*ioctl) (struct block_device *, fmode_t, unsigned, unsigned long);
+	int (*compat_ioctl) (struct block_device *, fmode_t, unsigned, unsigned long);
+	int (*direct_access) (struct block_device *, sector_t, void **,
+				unsigned long *);
+	void (*unlock_native_capacity) (struct gendisk *);
+	int (*getgeo)(struct block_device *, struct hd_geometry *);
+	void (*swap_slot_free_notify) (struct block_device *, unsigned long);
+
+locking rules:
+
+======================= ===================
+ops			open_mutex
+======================= ===================
+open:			yes
+release:		yes
+ioctl:			no
+compat_ioctl:		no
+direct_access:		no
+unlock_native_capacity:	no
+getgeo:			no
+swap_slot_free_notify:	no	(see below)
+======================= ===================
+
+swap_slot_free_notify is called with swap_lock and sometimes the page lock
+held.
+
+
+file_operations
+===============
+
+prototypes::
+
+	loff_t (*llseek) (struct file *, loff_t, int);
+	ssize_t (*read) (struct file *, char __user *, size_t, loff_t *);
+	ssize_t (*write) (struct file *, const char __user *, size_t, loff_t *);
+	ssize_t (*read_iter) (struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *);
+	ssize_t (*write_iter) (struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *);
+	int (*iopoll) (struct kiocb *kiocb, bool spin);
+	int (*iterate) (struct file *, struct dir_context *);
+	int (*iterate_shared) (struct file *, struct dir_context *);
+	__poll_t (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *);
+	long (*unlocked_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
+	long (*compat_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
+	int (*mmap) (struct file *, struct vm_area_struct *);
+	int (*open) (struct inode *, struct file *);
+	int (*flush) (struct file *);
+	int (*release) (struct inode *, struct file *);
+	int (*fsync) (struct file *, loff_t start, loff_t end, int datasync);
+	int (*fasync) (int, struct file *, int);
+	int (*lock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *);
+	ssize_t (*sendpage) (struct file *, struct page *, int, size_t,
+			loff_t *, int);
+	unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long,
+			unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long);
+	int (*check_flags)(int);
+	int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *);
+	ssize_t (*splice_write)(struct pipe_inode_info *, struct file *, loff_t *,
+			size_t, unsigned int);
+	ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, loff_t *, struct pipe_inode_info *,
+			size_t, unsigned int);
+	int (*setlease)(struct file *, long, struct file_lock **, void **);
+	long (*fallocate)(struct file *, int, loff_t, loff_t);
+	void (*show_fdinfo)(struct seq_file *m, struct file *f);
+	unsigned (*mmap_capabilities)(struct file *);
+	ssize_t (*copy_file_range)(struct file *, loff_t, struct file *,
+			loff_t, size_t, unsigned int);
+	loff_t (*remap_file_range)(struct file *file_in, loff_t pos_in,
+			struct file *file_out, loff_t pos_out,
+			loff_t len, unsigned int remap_flags);
+	int (*fadvise)(struct file *, loff_t, loff_t, int);
+
+locking rules:
+	All may block.
+
+->llseek() locking has moved from llseek to the individual llseek
+implementations.  If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you
+need to acquire and release the appropriate locks in your ->llseek().
+For many filesystems, it is probably safe to acquire the inode
+mutex or just to use i_size_read() instead.
+Note: this does not protect the file->f_pos against concurrent modifications
+since this is something the userspace has to take care about.
+
+->iterate() is called with i_rwsem exclusive.
+
+->iterate_shared() is called with i_rwsem at least shared.
+
+->fasync() is responsible for maintaining the FASYNC bit in filp->f_flags.
+Most instances call fasync_helper(), which does that maintenance, so it's
+not normally something one needs to worry about.  Return values > 0 will be
+mapped to zero in the VFS layer.
+
+->readdir() and ->ioctl() on directories must be changed. Ideally we would
+move ->readdir() to inode_operations and use a separate method for directory
+->ioctl() or kill the latter completely. One of the problems is that for
+anything that resembles union-mount we won't have a struct file for all
+components. And there are other reasons why the current interface is a mess...
+
+->read on directories probably must go away - we should just enforce -EISDIR
+in sys_read() and friends.
+
+->setlease operations should call generic_setlease() before or after setting
+the lease within the individual filesystem to record the result of the
+operation
+
+->fallocate implementation must be really careful to maintain page cache
+consistency when punching holes or performing other operations that invalidate
+page cache contents. Usually the filesystem needs to call
+truncate_inode_pages_range() to invalidate relevant range of the page cache.
+However the filesystem usually also needs to update its internal (and on disk)
+view of file offset -> disk block mapping. Until this update is finished, the
+filesystem needs to block page faults and reads from reloading now-stale page
+cache contents from the disk. Since VFS acquires mapping->invalidate_lock in
+shared mode when loading pages from disk (filemap_fault(), filemap_read(),
+readahead paths), the fallocate implementation must take the invalidate_lock to
+prevent reloading.
+
+->copy_file_range and ->remap_file_range implementations need to serialize
+against modifications of file data while the operation is running. For
+blocking changes through write(2) and similar operations inode->i_rwsem can be
+used. To block changes to file contents via a memory mapping during the
+operation, the filesystem must take mapping->invalidate_lock to coordinate
+with ->page_mkwrite.
+
+dquot_operations
+================
+
+prototypes::
+
+	int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *);
+	int (*acquire_dquot) (struct dquot *);
+	int (*release_dquot) (struct dquot *);
+	int (*mark_dirty) (struct dquot *);
+	int (*write_info) (struct super_block *, int);
+
+These operations are intended to be more or less wrapping functions that ensure
+a proper locking wrt the filesystem and call the generic quota operations.
+
+What filesystem should expect from the generic quota functions:
+
+==============	============	=========================
+ops		FS recursion	Held locks when called
+==============	============	=========================
+write_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
+acquire_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
+release_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
+mark_dirty:	no		-
+write_info:	yes		dqonoff_sem
+==============	============	=========================
+
+FS recursion means calling ->quota_read() and ->quota_write() from superblock
+operations.
+
+More details about quota locking can be found in fs/dquot.c.
+
+vm_operations_struct
+====================
+
+prototypes::
+
+	void (*open)(struct vm_area_struct*);
+	void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct*);
+	vm_fault_t (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct*, struct vm_fault *);
+	vm_fault_t (*page_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct vm_fault *);
+	vm_fault_t (*pfn_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct vm_fault *);
+	int (*access)(struct vm_area_struct *, unsigned long, void*, int, int);
+
+locking rules:
+
+=============	=========	===========================
+ops		mmap_lock	PageLocked(page)
+=============	=========	===========================
+open:		yes
+close:		yes
+fault:		yes		can return with page locked
+map_pages:	yes
+page_mkwrite:	yes		can return with page locked
+pfn_mkwrite:	yes
+access:		yes
+=============	=========	===========================
+
+->fault() is called when a previously not present pte is about to be faulted
+in. The filesystem must find and return the page associated with the passed in
+"pgoff" in the vm_fault structure. If it is possible that the page may be
+truncated and/or invalidated, then the filesystem must lock invalidate_lock,
+then ensure the page is not already truncated (invalidate_lock will block
+subsequent truncate), and then return with VM_FAULT_LOCKED, and the page
+locked. The VM will unlock the page.
+
+->map_pages() is called when VM asks to map easy accessible pages.
+Filesystem should find and map pages associated with offsets from "start_pgoff"
+till "end_pgoff". ->map_pages() is called with page table locked and must
+not block.  If it's not possible to reach a page without blocking,
+filesystem should skip it. Filesystem should use do_set_pte() to setup
+page table entry. Pointer to entry associated with the page is passed in
+"pte" field in vm_fault structure. Pointers to entries for other offsets
+should be calculated relative to "pte".
+
+->page_mkwrite() is called when a previously read-only pte is about to become
+writeable. The filesystem again must ensure that there are no
+truncate/invalidate races or races with operations such as ->remap_file_range
+or ->copy_file_range, and then return with the page locked. Usually
+mapping->invalidate_lock is suitable for proper serialization. If the page has
+been truncated, the filesystem should not look up a new page like the ->fault()
+handler, but simply return with VM_FAULT_NOPAGE, which will cause the VM to
+retry the fault.
+
+->pfn_mkwrite() is the same as page_mkwrite but when the pte is
+VM_PFNMAP or VM_MIXEDMAP with a page-less entry. Expected return is
+VM_FAULT_NOPAGE. Or one of the VM_FAULT_ERROR types. The default behavior
+after this call is to make the pte read-write, unless pfn_mkwrite returns
+an error.
+
+->access() is called when get_user_pages() fails in
+access_process_vm(), typically used to debug a process through
+/proc/pid/mem or ptrace.  This function is needed only for
+VM_IO | VM_PFNMAP VMAs.
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+			Dubious stuff
+
+(if you break something or notice that it is broken and do not fix it yourself
+- at least put it here)
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/locks.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/locks.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..26429317d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/locks.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==========================
+File Locking Release Notes
+==========================
+
+		Andy Walker <andy@lysaker.kvaerner.no>
+
+			    12 May 1997
+
+
+1. What's New?
+==============
+
+1.1 Broken Flock Emulation
+--------------------------
+
+The old flock(2) emulation in the kernel was swapped for proper BSD
+compatible flock(2) support in the 1.3.x series of kernels. With the
+release of the 2.1.x kernel series, support for the old emulation has
+been totally removed, so that we don't need to carry this baggage
+forever.
+
+This should not cause problems for anybody, since everybody using a
+2.1.x kernel should have updated their C library to a suitable version
+anyway (see the file "Documentation/process/changes.rst".)
+
+1.2 Allow Mixed Locks Again
+---------------------------
+
+1.2.1 Typical Problems - Sendmail
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+Because sendmail was unable to use the old flock() emulation, many sendmail
+installations use fcntl() instead of flock(). This is true of Slackware 3.0
+for example. This gave rise to some other subtle problems if sendmail was
+configured to rebuild the alias file. Sendmail tried to lock the aliases.dir
+file with fcntl() at the same time as the GDBM routines tried to lock this
+file with flock(). With pre 1.3.96 kernels this could result in deadlocks that,
+over time, or under a very heavy mail load, would eventually cause the kernel
+to lock solid with deadlocked processes.
+
+
+1.2.2 The Solution
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+The solution I have chosen, after much experimentation and discussion,
+is to make flock() and fcntl() locks oblivious to each other. Both can
+exists, and neither will have any effect on the other.
+
+I wanted the two lock styles to be cooperative, but there were so many
+race and deadlock conditions that the current solution was the only
+practical one. It puts us in the same position as, for example, SunOS
+4.1.x and several other commercial Unices. The only OS's that support
+cooperative flock()/fcntl() are those that emulate flock() using
+fcntl(), with all the problems that implies.
+
+
+1.3 Mandatory Locking As A Mount Option
+---------------------------------------
+
+Mandatory locking was prior to this release a general configuration option
+that was valid for all mounted filesystems.  This had a number of inherent
+dangers, not the least of which was the ability to freeze an NFS server by
+asking it to read a file for which a mandatory lock existed.
+
+Such option was dropped in Kernel v5.14.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/mount_api.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/mount_api.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1d16787a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/mount_api.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,825 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+====================
+Filesystem Mount API
+====================
+
+.. CONTENTS
+
+ (1) Overview.
+
+ (2) The filesystem context.
+
+ (3) The filesystem context operations.
+
+ (4) Filesystem context security.
+
+ (5) VFS filesystem context API.
+
+ (6) Superblock creation helpers.
+
+ (7) Parameter description.
+
+ (8) Parameter helper functions.
+
+
+Overview
+========
+
+The creation of new mounts is now to be done in a multistep process:
+
+ (1) Create a filesystem context.
+
+ (2) Parse the parameters and attach them to the context.  Parameters are
+     expected to be passed individually from userspace, though legacy binary
+     parameters can also be handled.
+
+ (3) Validate and pre-process the context.
+
+ (4) Get or create a superblock and mountable root.
+
+ (5) Perform the mount.
+
+ (6) Return an error message attached to the context.
+
+ (7) Destroy the context.
+
+To support this, the file_system_type struct gains two new fields::
+
+	int (*init_fs_context)(struct fs_context *fc);
+	const struct fs_parameter_description *parameters;
+
+The first is invoked to set up the filesystem-specific parts of a filesystem
+context, including the additional space, and the second points to the
+parameter description for validation at registration time and querying by a
+future system call.
+
+Note that security initialisation is done *after* the filesystem is called so
+that the namespaces may be adjusted first.
+
+
+The Filesystem context
+======================
+
+The creation and reconfiguration of a superblock is governed by a filesystem
+context.  This is represented by the fs_context structure::
+
+	struct fs_context {
+		const struct fs_context_operations *ops;
+		struct file_system_type *fs_type;
+		void			*fs_private;
+		struct dentry		*root;
+		struct user_namespace	*user_ns;
+		struct net		*net_ns;
+		const struct cred	*cred;
+		char			*source;
+		char			*subtype;
+		void			*security;
+		void			*s_fs_info;
+		unsigned int		sb_flags;
+		unsigned int		sb_flags_mask;
+		unsigned int		s_iflags;
+		unsigned int		lsm_flags;
+		enum fs_context_purpose	purpose:8;
+		...
+	};
+
+The fs_context fields are as follows:
+
+   * ::
+
+       const struct fs_context_operations *ops
+
+     These are operations that can be done on a filesystem context (see
+     below).  This must be set by the ->init_fs_context() file_system_type
+     operation.
+
+   * ::
+
+       struct file_system_type *fs_type
+
+     A pointer to the file_system_type of the filesystem that is being
+     constructed or reconfigured.  This retains a reference on the type owner.
+
+   * ::
+
+       void *fs_private
+
+     A pointer to the file system's private data.  This is where the filesystem
+     will need to store any options it parses.
+
+   * ::
+
+       struct dentry *root
+
+     A pointer to the root of the mountable tree (and indirectly, the
+     superblock thereof).  This is filled in by the ->get_tree() op.  If this
+     is set, an active reference on root->d_sb must also be held.
+
+   * ::
+
+       struct user_namespace *user_ns
+       struct net *net_ns
+
+     There are a subset of the namespaces in use by the invoking process.  They
+     retain references on each namespace.  The subscribed namespaces may be
+     replaced by the filesystem to reflect other sources, such as the parent
+     mount superblock on an automount.
+
+   * ::
+
+       const struct cred *cred
+
+     The mounter's credentials.  This retains a reference on the credentials.
+
+   * ::
+
+       char *source
+
+     This specifies the source.  It may be a block device (e.g. /dev/sda1) or
+     something more exotic, such as the "host:/path" that NFS desires.
+
+   * ::
+
+       char *subtype
+
+     This is a string to be added to the type displayed in /proc/mounts to
+     qualify it (used by FUSE).  This is available for the filesystem to set if
+     desired.
+
+   * ::
+
+       void *security
+
+     A place for the LSMs to hang their security data for the superblock.  The
+     relevant security operations are described below.
+
+   * ::
+
+       void *s_fs_info
+
+     The proposed s_fs_info for a new superblock, set in the superblock by
+     sget_fc().  This can be used to distinguish superblocks.
+
+   * ::
+
+       unsigned int sb_flags
+       unsigned int sb_flags_mask
+
+     Which bits SB_* flags are to be set/cleared in super_block::s_flags.
+
+   * ::
+
+       unsigned int s_iflags
+
+     These will be bitwise-OR'd with s->s_iflags when a superblock is created.
+
+   * ::
+
+       enum fs_context_purpose
+
+     This indicates the purpose for which the context is intended.  The
+     available values are:
+
+	==========================	======================================
+	FS_CONTEXT_FOR_MOUNT,		New superblock for explicit mount
+	FS_CONTEXT_FOR_SUBMOUNT		New automatic submount of extant mount
+	FS_CONTEXT_FOR_RECONFIGURE	Change an existing mount
+	==========================	======================================
+
+The mount context is created by calling vfs_new_fs_context() or
+vfs_dup_fs_context() and is destroyed with put_fs_context().  Note that the
+structure is not refcounted.
+
+VFS, security and filesystem mount options are set individually with
+vfs_parse_mount_option().  Options provided by the old mount(2) system call as
+a page of data can be parsed with generic_parse_monolithic().
+
+When mounting, the filesystem is allowed to take data from any of the pointers
+and attach it to the superblock (or whatever), provided it clears the pointer
+in the mount context.
+
+The filesystem is also allowed to allocate resources and pin them with the
+mount context.  For instance, NFS might pin the appropriate protocol version
+module.
+
+
+The Filesystem Context Operations
+=================================
+
+The filesystem context points to a table of operations::
+
+	struct fs_context_operations {
+		void (*free)(struct fs_context *fc);
+		int (*dup)(struct fs_context *fc, struct fs_context *src_fc);
+		int (*parse_param)(struct fs_context *fc,
+				   struct fs_parameter *param);
+		int (*parse_monolithic)(struct fs_context *fc, void *data);
+		int (*get_tree)(struct fs_context *fc);
+		int (*reconfigure)(struct fs_context *fc);
+	};
+
+These operations are invoked by the various stages of the mount procedure to
+manage the filesystem context.  They are as follows:
+
+   * ::
+
+	void (*free)(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to clean up the filesystem-specific part of the filesystem context
+     when the context is destroyed.  It should be aware that parts of the
+     context may have been removed and NULL'd out by ->get_tree().
+
+   * ::
+
+	int (*dup)(struct fs_context *fc, struct fs_context *src_fc);
+
+     Called when a filesystem context has been duplicated to duplicate the
+     filesystem-private data.  An error may be returned to indicate failure to
+     do this.
+
+     .. Warning::
+
+         Note that even if this fails, put_fs_context() will be called
+	 immediately thereafter, so ->dup() *must* make the
+	 filesystem-private data safe for ->free().
+
+   * ::
+
+	int (*parse_param)(struct fs_context *fc,
+			   struct fs_parameter *param);
+
+     Called when a parameter is being added to the filesystem context.  param
+     points to the key name and maybe a value object.  VFS-specific options
+     will have been weeded out and fc->sb_flags updated in the context.
+     Security options will also have been weeded out and fc->security updated.
+
+     The parameter can be parsed with fs_parse() and fs_lookup_param().  Note
+     that the source(s) are presented as parameters named "source".
+
+     If successful, 0 should be returned or a negative error code otherwise.
+
+   * ::
+
+	int (*parse_monolithic)(struct fs_context *fc, void *data);
+
+     Called when the mount(2) system call is invoked to pass the entire data
+     page in one go.  If this is expected to be just a list of "key[=val]"
+     items separated by commas, then this may be set to NULL.
+
+     The return value is as for ->parse_param().
+
+     If the filesystem (e.g. NFS) needs to examine the data first and then
+     finds it's the standard key-val list then it may pass it off to
+     generic_parse_monolithic().
+
+   * ::
+
+	int (*get_tree)(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to get or create the mountable root and superblock, using the
+     information stored in the filesystem context (reconfiguration goes via a
+     different vector).  It may detach any resources it desires from the
+     filesystem context and transfer them to the superblock it creates.
+
+     On success it should set fc->root to the mountable root and return 0.  In
+     the case of an error, it should return a negative error code.
+
+     The phase on a userspace-driven context will be set to only allow this to
+     be called once on any particular context.
+
+   * ::
+
+	int (*reconfigure)(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to effect reconfiguration of a superblock using information stored
+     in the filesystem context.  It may detach any resources it desires from
+     the filesystem context and transfer them to the superblock.  The
+     superblock can be found from fc->root->d_sb.
+
+     On success it should return 0.  In the case of an error, it should return
+     a negative error code.
+
+     .. Note:: reconfigure is intended as a replacement for remount_fs.
+
+
+Filesystem context Security
+===========================
+
+The filesystem context contains a security pointer that the LSMs can use for
+building up a security context for the superblock to be mounted.  There are a
+number of operations used by the new mount code for this purpose:
+
+   * ::
+
+	int security_fs_context_alloc(struct fs_context *fc,
+				      struct dentry *reference);
+
+     Called to initialise fc->security (which is preset to NULL) and allocate
+     any resources needed.  It should return 0 on success or a negative error
+     code on failure.
+
+     reference will be non-NULL if the context is being created for superblock
+     reconfiguration (FS_CONTEXT_FOR_RECONFIGURE) in which case it indicates
+     the root dentry of the superblock to be reconfigured.  It will also be
+     non-NULL in the case of a submount (FS_CONTEXT_FOR_SUBMOUNT) in which case
+     it indicates the automount point.
+
+   * ::
+
+	int security_fs_context_dup(struct fs_context *fc,
+				    struct fs_context *src_fc);
+
+     Called to initialise fc->security (which is preset to NULL) and allocate
+     any resources needed.  The original filesystem context is pointed to by
+     src_fc and may be used for reference.  It should return 0 on success or a
+     negative error code on failure.
+
+   * ::
+
+	void security_fs_context_free(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to clean up anything attached to fc->security.  Note that the
+     contents may have been transferred to a superblock and the pointer cleared
+     during get_tree.
+
+   * ::
+
+	int security_fs_context_parse_param(struct fs_context *fc,
+					    struct fs_parameter *param);
+
+     Called for each mount parameter, including the source.  The arguments are
+     as for the ->parse_param() method.  It should return 0 to indicate that
+     the parameter should be passed on to the filesystem, 1 to indicate that
+     the parameter should be discarded or an error to indicate that the
+     parameter should be rejected.
+
+     The value pointed to by param may be modified (if a string) or stolen
+     (provided the value pointer is NULL'd out).  If it is stolen, 1 must be
+     returned to prevent it being passed to the filesystem.
+
+   * ::
+
+	int security_fs_context_validate(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called after all the options have been parsed to validate the collection
+     as a whole and to do any necessary allocation so that
+     security_sb_get_tree() and security_sb_reconfigure() are less likely to
+     fail.  It should return 0 or a negative error code.
+
+     In the case of reconfiguration, the target superblock will be accessible
+     via fc->root.
+
+   * ::
+
+	int security_sb_get_tree(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called during the mount procedure to verify that the specified superblock
+     is allowed to be mounted and to transfer the security data there.  It
+     should return 0 or a negative error code.
+
+   * ::
+
+	void security_sb_reconfigure(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Called to apply any reconfiguration to an LSM's context.  It must not
+     fail.  Error checking and resource allocation must be done in advance by
+     the parameter parsing and validation hooks.
+
+   * ::
+
+	int security_sb_mountpoint(struct fs_context *fc,
+			           struct path *mountpoint,
+				   unsigned int mnt_flags);
+
+     Called during the mount procedure to verify that the root dentry attached
+     to the context is permitted to be attached to the specified mountpoint.
+     It should return 0 on success or a negative error code on failure.
+
+
+VFS Filesystem context API
+==========================
+
+There are four operations for creating a filesystem context and one for
+destroying a context:
+
+   * ::
+
+       struct fs_context *fs_context_for_mount(struct file_system_type *fs_type,
+					       unsigned int sb_flags);
+
+     Allocate a filesystem context for the purpose of setting up a new mount,
+     whether that be with a new superblock or sharing an existing one.  This
+     sets the superblock flags, initialises the security and calls
+     fs_type->init_fs_context() to initialise the filesystem private data.
+
+     fs_type specifies the filesystem type that will manage the context and
+     sb_flags presets the superblock flags stored therein.
+
+   * ::
+
+       struct fs_context *fs_context_for_reconfigure(
+		struct dentry *dentry,
+		unsigned int sb_flags,
+		unsigned int sb_flags_mask);
+
+     Allocate a filesystem context for the purpose of reconfiguring an
+     existing superblock.  dentry provides a reference to the superblock to be
+     configured.  sb_flags and sb_flags_mask indicate which superblock flags
+     need changing and to what.
+
+   * ::
+
+       struct fs_context *fs_context_for_submount(
+		struct file_system_type *fs_type,
+		struct dentry *reference);
+
+     Allocate a filesystem context for the purpose of creating a new mount for
+     an automount point or other derived superblock.  fs_type specifies the
+     filesystem type that will manage the context and the reference dentry
+     supplies the parameters.  Namespaces are propagated from the reference
+     dentry's superblock also.
+
+     Note that it's not a requirement that the reference dentry be of the same
+     filesystem type as fs_type.
+
+   * ::
+
+        struct fs_context *vfs_dup_fs_context(struct fs_context *src_fc);
+
+     Duplicate a filesystem context, copying any options noted and duplicating
+     or additionally referencing any resources held therein.  This is available
+     for use where a filesystem has to get a mount within a mount, such as NFS4
+     does by internally mounting the root of the target server and then doing a
+     private pathwalk to the target directory.
+
+     The purpose in the new context is inherited from the old one.
+
+   * ::
+
+       void put_fs_context(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Destroy a filesystem context, releasing any resources it holds.  This
+     calls the ->free() operation.  This is intended to be called by anyone who
+     created a filesystem context.
+
+     .. Warning::
+
+        filesystem contexts are not refcounted, so this causes unconditional
+	destruction.
+
+In all the above operations, apart from the put op, the return is a mount
+context pointer or a negative error code.
+
+For the remaining operations, if an error occurs, a negative error code will be
+returned.
+
+   * ::
+
+        int vfs_parse_fs_param(struct fs_context *fc,
+			       struct fs_parameter *param);
+
+     Supply a single mount parameter to the filesystem context.  This includes
+     the specification of the source/device which is specified as the "source"
+     parameter (which may be specified multiple times if the filesystem
+     supports that).
+
+     param specifies the parameter key name and the value.  The parameter is
+     first checked to see if it corresponds to a standard mount flag (in which
+     case it is used to set an SB_xxx flag and consumed) or a security option
+     (in which case the LSM consumes it) before it is passed on to the
+     filesystem.
+
+     The parameter value is typed and can be one of:
+
+	====================		=============================
+	fs_value_is_flag		Parameter not given a value
+	fs_value_is_string		Value is a string
+	fs_value_is_blob		Value is a binary blob
+	fs_value_is_filename		Value is a filename* + dirfd
+	fs_value_is_file		Value is an open file (file*)
+	====================		=============================
+
+     If there is a value, that value is stored in a union in the struct in one
+     of param->{string,blob,name,file}.  Note that the function may steal and
+     clear the pointer, but then becomes responsible for disposing of the
+     object.
+
+   * ::
+
+       int vfs_parse_fs_string(struct fs_context *fc, const char *key,
+			       const char *value, size_t v_size);
+
+     A wrapper around vfs_parse_fs_param() that copies the value string it is
+     passed.
+
+   * ::
+
+       int generic_parse_monolithic(struct fs_context *fc, void *data);
+
+     Parse a sys_mount() data page, assuming the form to be a text list
+     consisting of key[=val] options separated by commas.  Each item in the
+     list is passed to vfs_mount_option().  This is the default when the
+     ->parse_monolithic() method is NULL.
+
+   * ::
+
+       int vfs_get_tree(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Get or create the mountable root and superblock, using the parameters in
+     the filesystem context to select/configure the superblock.  This invokes
+     the ->get_tree() method.
+
+   * ::
+
+       struct vfsmount *vfs_create_mount(struct fs_context *fc);
+
+     Create a mount given the parameters in the specified filesystem context.
+     Note that this does not attach the mount to anything.
+
+
+Superblock Creation Helpers
+===========================
+
+A number of VFS helpers are available for use by filesystems for the creation
+or looking up of superblocks.
+
+   * ::
+
+       struct super_block *
+       sget_fc(struct fs_context *fc,
+	       int (*test)(struct super_block *sb, struct fs_context *fc),
+	       int (*set)(struct super_block *sb, struct fs_context *fc));
+
+     This is the core routine.  If test is non-NULL, it searches for an
+     existing superblock matching the criteria held in the fs_context, using
+     the test function to match them.  If no match is found, a new superblock
+     is created and the set function is called to set it up.
+
+     Prior to the set function being called, fc->s_fs_info will be transferred
+     to sb->s_fs_info - and fc->s_fs_info will be cleared if set returns
+     success (ie. 0).
+
+The following helpers all wrap sget_fc():
+
+   * ::
+
+       int vfs_get_super(struct fs_context *fc,
+		         enum vfs_get_super_keying keying,
+		         int (*fill_super)(struct super_block *sb,
+					   struct fs_context *fc))
+
+     This creates/looks up a deviceless superblock.  The keying indicates how
+     many superblocks of this type may exist and in what manner they may be
+     shared:
+
+	(1) vfs_get_single_super
+
+	    Only one such superblock may exist in the system.  Any further
+	    attempt to get a new superblock gets this one (and any parameter
+	    differences are ignored).
+
+	(2) vfs_get_keyed_super
+
+	    Multiple superblocks of this type may exist and they're keyed on
+	    their s_fs_info pointer (for example this may refer to a
+	    namespace).
+
+	(3) vfs_get_independent_super
+
+	    Multiple independent superblocks of this type may exist.  This
+	    function never matches an existing one and always creates a new
+	    one.
+
+
+Parameter Description
+=====================
+
+Parameters are described using structures defined in linux/fs_parser.h.
+There's a core description struct that links everything together::
+
+	struct fs_parameter_description {
+		const struct fs_parameter_spec *specs;
+		const struct fs_parameter_enum *enums;
+	};
+
+For example::
+
+	enum {
+		Opt_autocell,
+		Opt_bar,
+		Opt_dyn,
+		Opt_foo,
+		Opt_source,
+	};
+
+	static const struct fs_parameter_description afs_fs_parameters = {
+		.specs		= afs_param_specs,
+		.enums		= afs_param_enums,
+	};
+
+The members are as follows:
+
+ (1) ::
+
+       const struct fs_parameter_specification *specs;
+
+     Table of parameter specifications, terminated with a null entry, where the
+     entries are of type::
+
+	struct fs_parameter_spec {
+		const char		*name;
+		u8			opt;
+		enum fs_parameter_type	type:8;
+		unsigned short		flags;
+	};
+
+     The 'name' field is a string to match exactly to the parameter key (no
+     wildcards, patterns and no case-independence) and 'opt' is the value that
+     will be returned by the fs_parser() function in the case of a successful
+     match.
+
+     The 'type' field indicates the desired value type and must be one of:
+
+	=======================	=======================	=====================
+	TYPE NAME		EXPECTED VALUE		RESULT IN
+	=======================	=======================	=====================
+	fs_param_is_flag	No value		n/a
+	fs_param_is_bool	Boolean value		result->boolean
+	fs_param_is_u32		32-bit unsigned int	result->uint_32
+	fs_param_is_u32_octal	32-bit octal int	result->uint_32
+	fs_param_is_u32_hex	32-bit hex int		result->uint_32
+	fs_param_is_s32		32-bit signed int	result->int_32
+	fs_param_is_u64		64-bit unsigned int	result->uint_64
+	fs_param_is_enum	Enum value name 	result->uint_32
+	fs_param_is_string	Arbitrary string	param->string
+	fs_param_is_blob	Binary blob		param->blob
+	fs_param_is_blockdev	Blockdev path		* Needs lookup
+	fs_param_is_path	Path			* Needs lookup
+	fs_param_is_fd		File descriptor		result->int_32
+	=======================	=======================	=====================
+
+     Note that if the value is of fs_param_is_bool type, fs_parse() will try
+     to match any string value against "0", "1", "no", "yes", "false", "true".
+
+     Each parameter can also be qualified with 'flags':
+
+	=======================	================================================
+	fs_param_v_optional	The value is optional
+	fs_param_neg_with_no	result->negated set if key is prefixed with "no"
+	fs_param_neg_with_empty	result->negated set if value is ""
+	fs_param_deprecated	The parameter is deprecated.
+	=======================	================================================
+
+     These are wrapped with a number of convenience wrappers:
+
+	=======================	===============================================
+	MACRO			SPECIFIES
+	=======================	===============================================
+	fsparam_flag()		fs_param_is_flag
+	fsparam_flag_no()	fs_param_is_flag, fs_param_neg_with_no
+	fsparam_bool()		fs_param_is_bool
+	fsparam_u32()		fs_param_is_u32
+	fsparam_u32oct()	fs_param_is_u32_octal
+	fsparam_u32hex()	fs_param_is_u32_hex
+	fsparam_s32()		fs_param_is_s32
+	fsparam_u64()		fs_param_is_u64
+	fsparam_enum()		fs_param_is_enum
+	fsparam_string()	fs_param_is_string
+	fsparam_blob()		fs_param_is_blob
+	fsparam_bdev()		fs_param_is_blockdev
+	fsparam_path()		fs_param_is_path
+	fsparam_fd()		fs_param_is_fd
+	=======================	===============================================
+
+     all of which take two arguments, name string and option number - for
+     example::
+
+	static const struct fs_parameter_spec afs_param_specs[] = {
+		fsparam_flag	("autocell",	Opt_autocell),
+		fsparam_flag	("dyn",		Opt_dyn),
+		fsparam_string	("source",	Opt_source),
+		fsparam_flag_no	("foo",		Opt_foo),
+		{}
+	};
+
+     An addition macro, __fsparam() is provided that takes an additional pair
+     of arguments to specify the type and the flags for anything that doesn't
+     match one of the above macros.
+
+ (2) ::
+
+       const struct fs_parameter_enum *enums;
+
+     Table of enum value names to integer mappings, terminated with a null
+     entry.  This is of type::
+
+	struct fs_parameter_enum {
+		u8		opt;
+		char		name[14];
+		u8		value;
+	};
+
+     Where the array is an unsorted list of { parameter ID, name }-keyed
+     elements that indicate the value to map to, e.g.::
+
+	static const struct fs_parameter_enum afs_param_enums[] = {
+		{ Opt_bar,   "x",      1},
+		{ Opt_bar,   "y",      23},
+		{ Opt_bar,   "z",      42},
+	};
+
+     If a parameter of type fs_param_is_enum is encountered, fs_parse() will
+     try to look the value up in the enum table and the result will be stored
+     in the parse result.
+
+The parser should be pointed to by the parser pointer in the file_system_type
+struct as this will provide validation on registration (if
+CONFIG_VALIDATE_FS_PARSER=y) and will allow the description to be queried from
+userspace using the fsinfo() syscall.
+
+
+Parameter Helper Functions
+==========================
+
+A number of helper functions are provided to help a filesystem or an LSM
+process the parameters it is given.
+
+   * ::
+
+       int lookup_constant(const struct constant_table tbl[],
+			   const char *name, int not_found);
+
+     Look up a constant by name in a table of name -> integer mappings.  The
+     table is an array of elements of the following type::
+
+	struct constant_table {
+		const char	*name;
+		int		value;
+	};
+
+     If a match is found, the corresponding value is returned.  If a match
+     isn't found, the not_found value is returned instead.
+
+   * ::
+
+       bool validate_constant_table(const struct constant_table *tbl,
+				    size_t tbl_size,
+				    int low, int high, int special);
+
+     Validate a constant table.  Checks that all the elements are appropriately
+     ordered, that there are no duplicates and that the values are between low
+     and high inclusive, though provision is made for one allowable special
+     value outside of that range.  If no special value is required, special
+     should just be set to lie inside the low-to-high range.
+
+     If all is good, true is returned.  If the table is invalid, errors are
+     logged to the kernel log buffer and false is returned.
+
+   * ::
+
+       bool fs_validate_description(const struct fs_parameter_description *desc);
+
+     This performs some validation checks on a parameter description.  It
+     returns true if the description is good and false if it is not.  It will
+     log errors to the kernel log buffer if validation fails.
+
+   * ::
+
+        int fs_parse(struct fs_context *fc,
+		     const struct fs_parameter_description *desc,
+		     struct fs_parameter *param,
+		     struct fs_parse_result *result);
+
+     This is the main interpreter of parameters.  It uses the parameter
+     description to look up a parameter by key name and to convert that to an
+     option number (which it returns).
+
+     If successful, and if the parameter type indicates the result is a
+     boolean, integer or enum type, the value is converted by this function and
+     the result stored in result->{boolean,int_32,uint_32,uint_64}.
+
+     If a match isn't initially made, the key is prefixed with "no" and no
+     value is present then an attempt will be made to look up the key with the
+     prefix removed.  If this matches a parameter for which the type has flag
+     fs_param_neg_with_no set, then a match will be made and result->negated
+     will be set to true.
+
+     If the parameter isn't matched, -ENOPARAM will be returned; if the
+     parameter is matched, but the value is erroneous, -EINVAL will be
+     returned; otherwise the parameter's option number will be returned.
+
+   * ::
+
+       int fs_lookup_param(struct fs_context *fc,
+			   struct fs_parameter *value,
+			   bool want_bdev,
+			   unsigned int flags,
+			   struct path *_path);
+
+     This takes a parameter that carries a string or filename type and attempts
+     to do a path lookup on it.  If the parameter expects a blockdev, a check
+     is made that the inode actually represents one.
+
+     Returns 0 if successful and ``*_path`` will be set; returns a negative
+     error code if not.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/netfs_library.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/netfs_library.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..73a417614
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/netfs_library.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,610 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=================================
+Network Filesystem Helper Library
+=================================
+
+.. Contents:
+
+ - Overview.
+ - Per-inode context.
+   - Inode context helper functions.
+ - Buffered read helpers.
+   - Read helper functions.
+   - Read helper structures.
+   - Read helper operations.
+   - Read helper procedure.
+   - Read helper cache API.
+
+
+Overview
+========
+
+The network filesystem helper library is a set of functions designed to aid a
+network filesystem in implementing VM/VFS operations.  For the moment, that
+just includes turning various VM buffered read operations into requests to read
+from the server.  The helper library, however, can also interpose other
+services, such as local caching or local data encryption.
+
+Note that the library module doesn't link against local caching directly, so
+access must be provided by the netfs.
+
+
+Per-Inode Context
+=================
+
+The network filesystem helper library needs a place to store a bit of state for
+its use on each netfs inode it is helping to manage.  To this end, a context
+structure is defined::
+
+	struct netfs_inode {
+		struct inode inode;
+		const struct netfs_request_ops *ops;
+		struct fscache_cookie *cache;
+	};
+
+A network filesystem that wants to use netfs lib must place one of these in its
+inode wrapper struct instead of the VFS ``struct inode``.  This can be done in
+a way similar to the following::
+
+	struct my_inode {
+		struct netfs_inode netfs; /* Netfslib context and vfs inode */
+		...
+	};
+
+This allows netfslib to find its state by using ``container_of()`` from the
+inode pointer, thereby allowing the netfslib helper functions to be pointed to
+directly by the VFS/VM operation tables.
+
+The structure contains the following fields:
+
+ * ``inode``
+
+   The VFS inode structure.
+
+ * ``ops``
+
+   The set of operations provided by the network filesystem to netfslib.
+
+ * ``cache``
+
+   Local caching cookie, or NULL if no caching is enabled.  This field does not
+   exist if fscache is disabled.
+
+
+Inode Context Helper Functions
+------------------------------
+
+To help deal with the per-inode context, a number helper functions are
+provided.  Firstly, a function to perform basic initialisation on a context and
+set the operations table pointer::
+
+	void netfs_inode_init(struct netfs_inode *ctx,
+			      const struct netfs_request_ops *ops);
+
+then a function to cast from the VFS inode structure to the netfs context::
+
+	struct netfs_inode *netfs_node(struct inode *inode);
+
+and finally, a function to get the cache cookie pointer from the context
+attached to an inode (or NULL if fscache is disabled)::
+
+	struct fscache_cookie *netfs_i_cookie(struct netfs_inode *ctx);
+
+
+Buffered Read Helpers
+=====================
+
+The library provides a set of read helpers that handle the ->read_folio(),
+->readahead() and much of the ->write_begin() VM operations and translate them
+into a common call framework.
+
+The following services are provided:
+
+ * Handle folios that span multiple pages.
+
+ * Insulate the netfs from VM interface changes.
+
+ * Allow the netfs to arbitrarily split reads up into pieces, even ones that
+   don't match folio sizes or folio alignments and that may cross folios.
+
+ * Allow the netfs to expand a readahead request in both directions to meet its
+   needs.
+
+ * Allow the netfs to partially fulfil a read, which will then be resubmitted.
+
+ * Handle local caching, allowing cached data and server-read data to be
+   interleaved for a single request.
+
+ * Handle clearing of bufferage that aren't on the server.
+
+ * Handle retrying of reads that failed, switching reads from the cache to the
+   server as necessary.
+
+ * In the future, this is a place that other services can be performed, such as
+   local encryption of data to be stored remotely or in the cache.
+
+From the network filesystem, the helpers require a table of operations.  This
+includes a mandatory method to issue a read operation along with a number of
+optional methods.
+
+
+Read Helper Functions
+---------------------
+
+Three read helpers are provided::
+
+	void netfs_readahead(struct readahead_control *ractl);
+	int netfs_read_folio(struct file *file,
+			     struct folio *folio);
+	int netfs_write_begin(struct netfs_inode *ctx,
+			      struct file *file,
+			      struct address_space *mapping,
+			      loff_t pos,
+			      unsigned int len,
+			      struct folio **_folio,
+			      void **_fsdata);
+
+Each corresponds to a VM address space operation.  These operations use the
+state in the per-inode context.
+
+For ->readahead() and ->read_folio(), the network filesystem just point directly
+at the corresponding read helper; whereas for ->write_begin(), it may be a
+little more complicated as the network filesystem might want to flush
+conflicting writes or track dirty data and needs to put the acquired folio if
+an error occurs after calling the helper.
+
+The helpers manage the read request, calling back into the network filesystem
+through the suppplied table of operations.  Waits will be performed as
+necessary before returning for helpers that are meant to be synchronous.
+
+If an error occurs, the ->free_request() will be called to clean up the
+netfs_io_request struct allocated.  If some parts of the request are in
+progress when an error occurs, the request will get partially completed if
+sufficient data is read.
+
+Additionally, there is::
+
+  * void netfs_subreq_terminated(struct netfs_io_subrequest *subreq,
+				 ssize_t transferred_or_error,
+				 bool was_async);
+
+which should be called to complete a read subrequest.  This is given the number
+of bytes transferred or a negative error code, plus a flag indicating whether
+the operation was asynchronous (ie. whether the follow-on processing can be
+done in the current context, given this may involve sleeping).
+
+
+Read Helper Structures
+----------------------
+
+The read helpers make use of a couple of structures to maintain the state of
+the read.  The first is a structure that manages a read request as a whole::
+
+	struct netfs_io_request {
+		struct inode		*inode;
+		struct address_space	*mapping;
+		struct netfs_cache_resources cache_resources;
+		void			*netfs_priv;
+		loff_t			start;
+		size_t			len;
+		loff_t			i_size;
+		const struct netfs_request_ops *netfs_ops;
+		unsigned int		debug_id;
+		...
+	};
+
+The above fields are the ones the netfs can use.  They are:
+
+ * ``inode``
+ * ``mapping``
+
+   The inode and the address space of the file being read from.  The mapping
+   may or may not point to inode->i_data.
+
+ * ``cache_resources``
+
+   Resources for the local cache to use, if present.
+
+ * ``netfs_priv``
+
+   The network filesystem's private data.  The value for this can be passed in
+   to the helper functions or set during the request.
+
+ * ``start``
+ * ``len``
+
+   The file position of the start of the read request and the length.  These
+   may be altered by the ->expand_readahead() op.
+
+ * ``i_size``
+
+   The size of the file at the start of the request.
+
+ * ``netfs_ops``
+
+   A pointer to the operation table.  The value for this is passed into the
+   helper functions.
+
+ * ``debug_id``
+
+   A number allocated to this operation that can be displayed in trace lines
+   for reference.
+
+
+The second structure is used to manage individual slices of the overall read
+request::
+
+	struct netfs_io_subrequest {
+		struct netfs_io_request *rreq;
+		loff_t			start;
+		size_t			len;
+		size_t			transferred;
+		unsigned long		flags;
+		unsigned short		debug_index;
+		...
+	};
+
+Each subrequest is expected to access a single source, though the helpers will
+handle falling back from one source type to another.  The members are:
+
+ * ``rreq``
+
+   A pointer to the read request.
+
+ * ``start``
+ * ``len``
+
+   The file position of the start of this slice of the read request and the
+   length.
+
+ * ``transferred``
+
+   The amount of data transferred so far of the length of this slice.  The
+   network filesystem or cache should start the operation this far into the
+   slice.  If a short read occurs, the helpers will call again, having updated
+   this to reflect the amount read so far.
+
+ * ``flags``
+
+   Flags pertaining to the read.  There are two of interest to the filesystem
+   or cache:
+
+   * ``NETFS_SREQ_CLEAR_TAIL``
+
+     This can be set to indicate that the remainder of the slice, from
+     transferred to len, should be cleared.
+
+   * ``NETFS_SREQ_SEEK_DATA_READ``
+
+     This is a hint to the cache that it might want to try skipping ahead to
+     the next data (ie. using SEEK_DATA).
+
+ * ``debug_index``
+
+   A number allocated to this slice that can be displayed in trace lines for
+   reference.
+
+
+Read Helper Operations
+----------------------
+
+The network filesystem must provide the read helpers with a table of operations
+through which it can issue requests and negotiate::
+
+	struct netfs_request_ops {
+		void (*init_request)(struct netfs_io_request *rreq, struct file *file);
+		void (*free_request)(struct netfs_io_request *rreq);
+		int (*begin_cache_operation)(struct netfs_io_request *rreq);
+		void (*expand_readahead)(struct netfs_io_request *rreq);
+		bool (*clamp_length)(struct netfs_io_subrequest *subreq);
+		void (*issue_read)(struct netfs_io_subrequest *subreq);
+		bool (*is_still_valid)(struct netfs_io_request *rreq);
+		int (*check_write_begin)(struct file *file, loff_t pos, unsigned len,
+					 struct folio **foliop, void **_fsdata);
+		void (*done)(struct netfs_io_request *rreq);
+	};
+
+The operations are as follows:
+
+ * ``init_request()``
+
+   [Optional] This is called to initialise the request structure.  It is given
+   the file for reference.
+
+ * ``free_request()``
+
+   [Optional] This is called as the request is being deallocated so that the
+   filesystem can clean up any state it has attached there.
+
+ * ``begin_cache_operation()``
+
+   [Optional] This is called to ask the network filesystem to call into the
+   cache (if present) to initialise the caching state for this read.  The netfs
+   library module cannot access the cache directly, so the cache should call
+   something like fscache_begin_read_operation() to do this.
+
+   The cache gets to store its state in ->cache_resources and must set a table
+   of operations of its own there (though of a different type).
+
+   This should return 0 on success and an error code otherwise.  If an error is
+   reported, the operation may proceed anyway, just without local caching (only
+   out of memory and interruption errors cause failure here).
+
+ * ``expand_readahead()``
+
+   [Optional] This is called to allow the filesystem to expand the size of a
+   readahead read request.  The filesystem gets to expand the request in both
+   directions, though it's not permitted to reduce it as the numbers may
+   represent an allocation already made.  If local caching is enabled, it gets
+   to expand the request first.
+
+   Expansion is communicated by changing ->start and ->len in the request
+   structure.  Note that if any change is made, ->len must be increased by at
+   least as much as ->start is reduced.
+
+ * ``clamp_length()``
+
+   [Optional] This is called to allow the filesystem to reduce the size of a
+   subrequest.  The filesystem can use this, for example, to chop up a request
+   that has to be split across multiple servers or to put multiple reads in
+   flight.
+
+   This should return 0 on success and an error code on error.
+
+ * ``issue_read()``
+
+   [Required] The helpers use this to dispatch a subrequest to the server for
+   reading.  In the subrequest, ->start, ->len and ->transferred indicate what
+   data should be read from the server.
+
+   There is no return value; the netfs_subreq_terminated() function should be
+   called to indicate whether or not the operation succeeded and how much data
+   it transferred.  The filesystem also should not deal with setting folios
+   uptodate, unlocking them or dropping their refs - the helpers need to deal
+   with this as they have to coordinate with copying to the local cache.
+
+   Note that the helpers have the folios locked, but not pinned.  It is
+   possible to use the ITER_XARRAY iov iterator to refer to the range of the
+   inode that is being operated upon without the need to allocate large bvec
+   tables.
+
+ * ``is_still_valid()``
+
+   [Optional] This is called to find out if the data just read from the local
+   cache is still valid.  It should return true if it is still valid and false
+   if not.  If it's not still valid, it will be reread from the server.
+
+ * ``check_write_begin()``
+
+   [Optional] This is called from the netfs_write_begin() helper once it has
+   allocated/grabbed the folio to be modified to allow the filesystem to flush
+   conflicting state before allowing it to be modified.
+
+   It may unlock and discard the folio it was given and set the caller's folio
+   pointer to NULL.  It should return 0 if everything is now fine (``*foliop``
+   left set) or the op should be retried (``*foliop`` cleared) and any other
+   error code to abort the operation.
+
+ * ``done``
+
+   [Optional] This is called after the folios in the request have all been
+   unlocked (and marked uptodate if applicable).
+
+
+
+Read Helper Procedure
+---------------------
+
+The read helpers work by the following general procedure:
+
+ * Set up the request.
+
+ * For readahead, allow the local cache and then the network filesystem to
+   propose expansions to the read request.  This is then proposed to the VM.
+   If the VM cannot fully perform the expansion, a partially expanded read will
+   be performed, though this may not get written to the cache in its entirety.
+
+ * Loop around slicing chunks off of the request to form subrequests:
+
+   * If a local cache is present, it gets to do the slicing, otherwise the
+     helpers just try to generate maximal slices.
+
+   * The network filesystem gets to clamp the size of each slice if it is to be
+     the source.  This allows rsize and chunking to be implemented.
+
+   * The helpers issue a read from the cache or a read from the server or just
+     clears the slice as appropriate.
+
+   * The next slice begins at the end of the last one.
+
+   * As slices finish being read, they terminate.
+
+ * When all the subrequests have terminated, the subrequests are assessed and
+   any that are short or have failed are reissued:
+
+   * Failed cache requests are issued against the server instead.
+
+   * Failed server requests just fail.
+
+   * Short reads against either source will be reissued against that source
+     provided they have transferred some more data:
+
+     * The cache may need to skip holes that it can't do DIO from.
+
+     * If NETFS_SREQ_CLEAR_TAIL was set, a short read will be cleared to the
+       end of the slice instead of reissuing.
+
+ * Once the data is read, the folios that have been fully read/cleared:
+
+   * Will be marked uptodate.
+
+   * If a cache is present, will be marked with PG_fscache.
+
+   * Unlocked
+
+ * Any folios that need writing to the cache will then have DIO writes issued.
+
+ * Synchronous operations will wait for reading to be complete.
+
+ * Writes to the cache will proceed asynchronously and the folios will have the
+   PG_fscache mark removed when that completes.
+
+ * The request structures will be cleaned up when everything has completed.
+
+
+Read Helper Cache API
+---------------------
+
+When implementing a local cache to be used by the read helpers, two things are
+required: some way for the network filesystem to initialise the caching for a
+read request and a table of operations for the helpers to call.
+
+The network filesystem's ->begin_cache_operation() method is called to set up a
+cache and this must call into the cache to do the work.  If using fscache, for
+example, the cache would call::
+
+	int fscache_begin_read_operation(struct netfs_io_request *rreq,
+					 struct fscache_cookie *cookie);
+
+passing in the request pointer and the cookie corresponding to the file.
+
+The netfs_io_request object contains a place for the cache to hang its
+state::
+
+	struct netfs_cache_resources {
+		const struct netfs_cache_ops	*ops;
+		void				*cache_priv;
+		void				*cache_priv2;
+	};
+
+This contains an operations table pointer and two private pointers.  The
+operation table looks like the following::
+
+	struct netfs_cache_ops {
+		void (*end_operation)(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres);
+
+		void (*expand_readahead)(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+					 loff_t *_start, size_t *_len, loff_t i_size);
+
+		enum netfs_io_source (*prepare_read)(struct netfs_io_subrequest *subreq,
+						       loff_t i_size);
+
+		int (*read)(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+			    loff_t start_pos,
+			    struct iov_iter *iter,
+			    bool seek_data,
+			    netfs_io_terminated_t term_func,
+			    void *term_func_priv);
+
+		int (*prepare_write)(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+				     loff_t *_start, size_t *_len, loff_t i_size,
+				     bool no_space_allocated_yet);
+
+		int (*write)(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+			     loff_t start_pos,
+			     struct iov_iter *iter,
+			     netfs_io_terminated_t term_func,
+			     void *term_func_priv);
+
+		int (*query_occupancy)(struct netfs_cache_resources *cres,
+				       loff_t start, size_t len, size_t granularity,
+				       loff_t *_data_start, size_t *_data_len);
+	};
+
+With a termination handler function pointer::
+
+	typedef void (*netfs_io_terminated_t)(void *priv,
+					      ssize_t transferred_or_error,
+					      bool was_async);
+
+The methods defined in the table are:
+
+ * ``end_operation()``
+
+   [Required] Called to clean up the resources at the end of the read request.
+
+ * ``expand_readahead()``
+
+   [Optional] Called at the beginning of a netfs_readahead() operation to allow
+   the cache to expand a request in either direction.  This allows the cache to
+   size the request appropriately for the cache granularity.
+
+   The function is passed poiners to the start and length in its parameters,
+   plus the size of the file for reference, and adjusts the start and length
+   appropriately.  It should return one of:
+
+   * ``NETFS_FILL_WITH_ZEROES``
+   * ``NETFS_DOWNLOAD_FROM_SERVER``
+   * ``NETFS_READ_FROM_CACHE``
+   * ``NETFS_INVALID_READ``
+
+   to indicate whether the slice should just be cleared or whether it should be
+   downloaded from the server or read from the cache - or whether slicing
+   should be given up at the current point.
+
+ * ``prepare_read()``
+
+   [Required] Called to configure the next slice of a request.  ->start and
+   ->len in the subrequest indicate where and how big the next slice can be;
+   the cache gets to reduce the length to match its granularity requirements.
+
+ * ``read()``
+
+   [Required] Called to read from the cache.  The start file offset is given
+   along with an iterator to read to, which gives the length also.  It can be
+   given a hint requesting that it seek forward from that start position for
+   data.
+
+   Also provided is a pointer to a termination handler function and private
+   data to pass to that function.  The termination function should be called
+   with the number of bytes transferred or an error code, plus a flag
+   indicating whether the termination is definitely happening in the caller's
+   context.
+
+ * ``prepare_write()``
+
+   [Required] Called to prepare a write to the cache to take place.  This
+   involves checking to see whether the cache has sufficient space to honour
+   the write.  ``*_start`` and ``*_len`` indicate the region to be written; the
+   region can be shrunk or it can be expanded to a page boundary either way as
+   necessary to align for direct I/O.  i_size holds the size of the object and
+   is provided for reference.  no_space_allocated_yet is set to true if the
+   caller is certain that no data has been written to that region - for example
+   if it tried to do a read from there already.
+
+ * ``write()``
+
+   [Required] Called to write to the cache.  The start file offset is given
+   along with an iterator to write from, which gives the length also.
+
+   Also provided is a pointer to a termination handler function and private
+   data to pass to that function.  The termination function should be called
+   with the number of bytes transferred or an error code, plus a flag
+   indicating whether the termination is definitely happening in the caller's
+   context.
+
+ * ``query_occupancy()``
+
+   [Required] Called to find out where the next piece of data is within a
+   particular region of the cache.  The start and length of the region to be
+   queried are passed in, along with the granularity to which the answer needs
+   to be aligned.  The function passes back the start and length of the data,
+   if any, available within that region.  Note that there may be a hole at the
+   front.
+
+   It returns 0 if some data was found, -ENODATA if there was no usable data
+   within the region or -ENOBUFS if there is no caching on this file.
+
+Note that these methods are passed a pointer to the cache resource structure,
+not the read request structure as they could be used in other situations where
+there isn't a read request structure as well, such as writing dirty data to the
+cache.
+
+
+API Function Reference
+======================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/netfs.h
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/netfs/buffered_read.c
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/netfs/io.c
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/client-identifier.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/client-identifier.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5147e1581
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/client-identifier.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======================
+NFSv4 client identifier
+=======================
+
+This document explains how the NFSv4 protocol identifies client
+instances in order to maintain file open and lock state during
+system restarts. A special identifier and principal are maintained
+on each client. These can be set by administrators, scripts
+provided by site administrators, or tools provided by Linux
+distributors.
+
+There are risks if a client's NFSv4 identifier and its principal
+are not chosen carefully.
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+The NFSv4 protocol uses "lease-based file locking". Leases help
+NFSv4 servers provide file lock guarantees and manage their
+resources.
+
+Simply put, an NFSv4 server creates a lease for each NFSv4 client.
+The server collects each client's file open and lock state under
+the lease for that client.
+
+The client is responsible for periodically renewing its leases.
+While a lease remains valid, the server holding that lease
+guarantees the file locks the client has created remain in place.
+
+If a client stops renewing its lease (for example, if it crashes),
+the NFSv4 protocol allows the server to remove the client's open
+and lock state after a certain period of time. When a client
+restarts, it indicates to servers that open and lock state
+associated with its previous leases is no longer valid and can be
+destroyed immediately.
+
+In addition, each NFSv4 server manages a persistent list of client
+leases. When the server restarts and clients attempt to recover
+their state, the server uses this list to distinguish amongst
+clients that held state before the server restarted and clients
+sending fresh OPEN and LOCK requests. This enables file locks to
+persist safely across server restarts.
+
+NFSv4 client identifiers
+------------------------
+
+Each NFSv4 client presents an identifier to NFSv4 servers so that
+they can associate the client with its lease. Each client's
+identifier consists of two elements:
+
+  - co_ownerid: An arbitrary but fixed string.
+
+  - boot verifier: A 64-bit incarnation verifier that enables a
+    server to distinguish successive boot epochs of the same client.
+
+The NFSv4.0 specification refers to these two items as an
+"nfs_client_id4". The NFSv4.1 specification refers to these two
+items as a "client_owner4".
+
+NFSv4 servers tie this identifier to the principal and security
+flavor that the client used when presenting it. Servers use this
+principal to authorize subsequent lease modification operations
+sent by the client. Effectively this principal is a third element of
+the identifier.
+
+As part of the identity presented to servers, a good
+"co_ownerid" string has several important properties:
+
+  - The "co_ownerid" string identifies the client during reboot
+    recovery, therefore the string is persistent across client
+    reboots.
+  - The "co_ownerid" string helps servers distinguish the client
+    from others, therefore the string is globally unique. Note
+    that there is no central authority that assigns "co_ownerid"
+    strings.
+  - Because it often appears on the network in the clear, the
+    "co_ownerid" string does not reveal private information about
+    the client itself.
+  - The content of the "co_ownerid" string is set and unchanging
+    before the client attempts NFSv4 mounts after a restart.
+  - The NFSv4 protocol places a 1024-byte limit on the size of the
+    "co_ownerid" string.
+
+Protecting NFSv4 lease state
+----------------------------
+
+NFSv4 servers utilize the "client_owner4" as described above to
+assign a unique lease to each client. Under this scheme, there are
+circumstances where clients can interfere with each other. This is
+referred to as "lease stealing".
+
+If distinct clients present the same "co_ownerid" string and use
+the same principal (for example, AUTH_SYS and UID 0), a server is
+unable to tell that the clients are not the same. Each distinct
+client presents a different boot verifier, so it appears to the
+server as if there is one client that is rebooting frequently.
+Neither client can maintain open or lock state in this scenario.
+
+If distinct clients present the same "co_ownerid" string and use
+distinct principals, the server is likely to allow the first client
+to operate normally but reject subsequent clients with the same
+"co_ownerid" string.
+
+If a client's "co_ownerid" string or principal are not stable,
+state recovery after a server or client reboot is not guaranteed.
+If a client unexpectedly restarts but presents a different
+"co_ownerid" string or principal to the server, the server orphans
+the client's previous open and lock state. This blocks access to
+locked files until the server removes the orphaned state.
+
+If the server restarts and a client presents a changed "co_ownerid"
+string or principal to the server, the server will not allow the
+client to reclaim its open and lock state, and may give those locks
+to other clients in the meantime. This is referred to as "lock
+stealing".
+
+Lease stealing and lock stealing increase the potential for denial
+of service and in rare cases even data corruption.
+
+Selecting an appropriate client identifier
+------------------------------------------
+
+By default, the Linux NFSv4 client implementation constructs its
+"co_ownerid" string starting with the words "Linux NFS" followed by
+the client's UTS node name (the same node name, incidentally, that
+is used as the "machine name" in an AUTH_SYS credential). In small
+deployments, this construction is usually adequate. Often, however,
+the node name by itself is not adequately unique, and can change
+unexpectedly. Problematic situations include:
+
+  - NFS-root (diskless) clients, where the local DCHP server (or
+    equivalent) does not provide a unique host name.
+
+  - "Containers" within a single Linux host.  If each container has
+    a separate network namespace, but does not use the UTS namespace
+    to provide a unique host name, then there can be multiple NFS
+    client instances with the same host name.
+
+  - Clients across multiple administrative domains that access a
+    common NFS server. If hostnames are not assigned centrally
+    then uniqueness cannot be guaranteed unless a domain name is
+    included in the hostname.
+
+Linux provides two mechanisms to add uniqueness to its "co_ownerid"
+string:
+
+    nfs.nfs4_unique_id
+      This module parameter can set an arbitrary uniquifier string
+      via the kernel command line, or when the "nfs" module is
+      loaded.
+
+    /sys/fs/nfs/client/net/identifier
+      This virtual file, available since Linux 5.3, is local to the
+      network namespace in which it is accessed and so can provide
+      distinction between network namespaces (containers) when the
+      hostname remains uniform.
+
+Note that this file is empty on name-space creation. If the
+container system has access to some sort of per-container identity
+then that uniquifier can be used. For example, a uniquifier might
+be formed at boot using the container's internal identifier:
+
+    sha256sum /etc/machine-id | awk '{print $1}' \\
+        > /sys/fs/nfs/client/net/identifier
+
+Security considerations
+-----------------------
+
+The use of cryptographic security for lease management operations
+is strongly encouraged.
+
+If NFS with Kerberos is not configured, a Linux NFSv4 client uses
+AUTH_SYS and UID 0 as the principal part of its client identity.
+This configuration is not only insecure, it increases the risk of
+lease and lock stealing. However, it might be the only choice for
+client configurations that have no local persistent storage.
+"co_ownerid" string uniqueness and persistence is critical in this
+case.
+
+When a Kerberos keytab is present on a Linux NFS client, the client
+attempts to use one of the principals in that keytab when
+identifying itself to servers. The "sec=" mount option does not
+control this behavior. Alternately, a single-user client with a
+Kerberos principal can use that principal in place of the client's
+host principal.
+
+Using Kerberos for this purpose enables the client and server to
+use the same lease for operations covered by all "sec=" settings.
+Additionally, the Linux NFS client uses the RPCSEC_GSS security
+flavor with Kerberos and the integrity QOS to prevent in-transit
+modification of lease modification requests.
+
+Additional notes
+----------------
+The Linux NFSv4 client establishes a single lease on each NFSv4
+server it accesses. NFSv4 mounts from a Linux NFSv4 client of a
+particular server then share that lease.
+
+Once a client establishes open and lock state, the NFSv4 protocol
+enables lease state to transition to other servers, following data
+that has been migrated. This hides data migration completely from
+running applications. The Linux NFSv4 client facilitates state
+migration by presenting the same "client_owner4" to all servers it
+encounters.
+
+========
+See Also
+========
+
+  - nfs(5)
+  - kerberos(7)
+  - RFC 7530 for the NFSv4.0 specification
+  - RFC 8881 for the NFSv4.1 specification.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/exporting.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/exporting.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0e98edd35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/exporting.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+:orphan:
+
+Making Filesystems Exportable
+=============================
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+All filesystem operations require a dentry (or two) as a starting
+point.  Local applications have a reference-counted hold on suitable
+dentries via open file descriptors or cwd/root.  However remote
+applications that access a filesystem via a remote filesystem protocol
+such as NFS may not be able to hold such a reference, and so need a
+different way to refer to a particular dentry.  As the alternative
+form of reference needs to be stable across renames, truncates, and
+server-reboot (among other things, though these tend to be the most
+problematic), there is no simple answer like 'filename'.
+
+The mechanism discussed here allows each filesystem implementation to
+specify how to generate an opaque (outside of the filesystem) byte
+string for any dentry, and how to find an appropriate dentry for any
+given opaque byte string.
+This byte string will be called a "filehandle fragment" as it
+corresponds to part of an NFS filehandle.
+
+A filesystem which supports the mapping between filehandle fragments
+and dentries will be termed "exportable".
+
+
+
+Dcache Issues
+-------------
+
+The dcache normally contains a proper prefix of any given filesystem
+tree.  This means that if any filesystem object is in the dcache, then
+all of the ancestors of that filesystem object are also in the dcache.
+As normal access is by filename this prefix is created naturally and
+maintained easily (by each object maintaining a reference count on
+its parent).
+
+However when objects are included into the dcache by interpreting a
+filehandle fragment, there is no automatic creation of a path prefix
+for the object.  This leads to two related but distinct features of
+the dcache that are not needed for normal filesystem access.
+
+1. The dcache must sometimes contain objects that are not part of the
+   proper prefix. i.e that are not connected to the root.
+2. The dcache must be prepared for a newly found (via ->lookup) directory
+   to already have a (non-connected) dentry, and must be able to move
+   that dentry into place (based on the parent and name in the
+   ->lookup).   This is particularly needed for directories as
+   it is a dcache invariant that directories only have one dentry.
+
+To implement these features, the dcache has:
+
+a. A dentry flag DCACHE_DISCONNECTED which is set on
+   any dentry that might not be part of the proper prefix.
+   This is set when anonymous dentries are created, and cleared when a
+   dentry is noticed to be a child of a dentry which is in the proper
+   prefix.  If the refcount on a dentry with this flag set
+   becomes zero, the dentry is immediately discarded, rather than being
+   kept in the dcache.  If a dentry that is not already in the dcache
+   is repeatedly accessed by filehandle (as NFSD might do), an new dentry
+   will be a allocated for each access, and discarded at the end of
+   the access.
+
+   Note that such a dentry can acquire children, name, ancestors, etc.
+   without losing DCACHE_DISCONNECTED - that flag is only cleared when
+   subtree is successfully reconnected to root.  Until then dentries
+   in such subtree are retained only as long as there are references;
+   refcount reaching zero means immediate eviction, same as for unhashed
+   dentries.  That guarantees that we won't need to hunt them down upon
+   umount.
+
+b. A primitive for creation of secondary roots - d_obtain_root(inode).
+   Those do _not_ bear DCACHE_DISCONNECTED.  They are placed on the
+   per-superblock list (->s_roots), so they can be located at umount
+   time for eviction purposes.
+
+c. Helper routines to allocate anonymous dentries, and to help attach
+   loose directory dentries at lookup time. They are:
+
+    d_obtain_alias(inode) will return a dentry for the given inode.
+      If the inode already has a dentry, one of those is returned.
+
+      If it doesn't, a new anonymous (IS_ROOT and
+      DCACHE_DISCONNECTED) dentry is allocated and attached.
+
+      In the case of a directory, care is taken that only one dentry
+      can ever be attached.
+
+    d_splice_alias(inode, dentry) will introduce a new dentry into the tree;
+      either the passed-in dentry or a preexisting alias for the given inode
+      (such as an anonymous one created by d_obtain_alias), if appropriate.
+      It returns NULL when the passed-in dentry is used, following the calling
+      convention of ->lookup.
+
+Filesystem Issues
+-----------------
+
+For a filesystem to be exportable it must:
+
+   1. provide the filehandle fragment routines described below.
+   2. make sure that d_splice_alias is used rather than d_add
+      when ->lookup finds an inode for a given parent and name.
+
+      If inode is NULL, d_splice_alias(inode, dentry) is equivalent to::
+
+		d_add(dentry, inode), NULL
+
+      Similarly, d_splice_alias(ERR_PTR(err), dentry) = ERR_PTR(err)
+
+      Typically the ->lookup routine will simply end with a::
+
+		return d_splice_alias(inode, dentry);
+	}
+
+
+
+A file system implementation declares that instances of the filesystem
+are exportable by setting the s_export_op field in the struct
+super_block.  This field must point to a "struct export_operations"
+struct which has the following members:
+
+ encode_fh  (optional)
+    Takes a dentry and creates a filehandle fragment which can later be used
+    to find or create a dentry for the same object.  The default
+    implementation creates a filehandle fragment that encodes a 32bit inode
+    and generation number for the inode encoded, and if necessary the
+    same information for the parent.
+
+  fh_to_dentry (mandatory)
+    Given a filehandle fragment, this should find the implied object and
+    create a dentry for it (possibly with d_obtain_alias).
+
+  fh_to_parent (optional but strongly recommended)
+    Given a filehandle fragment, this should find the parent of the
+    implied object and create a dentry for it (possibly with
+    d_obtain_alias).  May fail if the filehandle fragment is too small.
+
+  get_parent (optional but strongly recommended)
+    When given a dentry for a directory, this should return  a dentry for
+    the parent.  Quite possibly the parent dentry will have been allocated
+    by d_alloc_anon.  The default get_parent function just returns an error
+    so any filehandle lookup that requires finding a parent will fail.
+    ->lookup("..") is *not* used as a default as it can leave ".." entries
+    in the dcache which are too messy to work with.
+
+  get_name (optional)
+    When given a parent dentry and a child dentry, this should find a name
+    in the directory identified by the parent dentry, which leads to the
+    object identified by the child dentry.  If no get_name function is
+    supplied, a default implementation is provided which uses vfs_readdir
+    to find potential names, and matches inode numbers to find the correct
+    match.
+
+  flags
+    Some filesystems may need to be handled differently than others. The
+    export_operations struct also includes a flags field that allows the
+    filesystem to communicate such information to nfsd. See the Export
+    Operations Flags section below for more explanation.
+
+A filehandle fragment consists of an array of 1 or more 4byte words,
+together with a one byte "type".
+The decode_fh routine should not depend on the stated size that is
+passed to it.  This size may be larger than the original filehandle
+generated by encode_fh, in which case it will have been padded with
+nuls.  Rather, the encode_fh routine should choose a "type" which
+indicates the decode_fh how much of the filehandle is valid, and how
+it should be interpreted.
+
+Export Operations Flags
+-----------------------
+In addition to the operation vector pointers, struct export_operations also
+contains a "flags" field that allows the filesystem to communicate to nfsd
+that it may want to do things differently when dealing with it. The
+following flags are defined:
+
+  EXPORT_OP_NOWCC - disable NFSv3 WCC attributes on this filesystem
+    RFC 1813 recommends that servers always send weak cache consistency
+    (WCC) data to the client after each operation. The server should
+    atomically collect attributes about the inode, do an operation on it,
+    and then collect the attributes afterward. This allows the client to
+    skip issuing GETATTRs in some situations but means that the server
+    is calling vfs_getattr for almost all RPCs. On some filesystems
+    (particularly those that are clustered or networked) this is expensive
+    and atomicity is difficult to guarantee. This flag indicates to nfsd
+    that it should skip providing WCC attributes to the client in NFSv3
+    replies when doing operations on this filesystem. Consider enabling
+    this on filesystems that have an expensive ->getattr inode operation,
+    or when atomicity between pre and post operation attribute collection
+    is impossible to guarantee.
+
+  EXPORT_OP_NOSUBTREECHK - disallow subtree checking on this fs
+    Many NFS operations deal with filehandles, which the server must then
+    vet to ensure that they live inside of an exported tree. When the
+    export consists of an entire filesystem, this is trivial. nfsd can just
+    ensure that the filehandle live on the filesystem. When only part of a
+    filesystem is exported however, then nfsd must walk the ancestors of the
+    inode to ensure that it's within an exported subtree. This is an
+    expensive operation and not all filesystems can support it properly.
+    This flag exempts the filesystem from subtree checking and causes
+    exportfs to get back an error if it tries to enable subtree checking
+    on it.
+
+  EXPORT_OP_CLOSE_BEFORE_UNLINK - always close cached files before unlinking
+    On some exportable filesystems (such as NFS) unlinking a file that
+    is still open can cause a fair bit of extra work. For instance,
+    the NFS client will do a "sillyrename" to ensure that the file
+    sticks around while it's still open. When reexporting, that open
+    file is held by nfsd so we usually end up doing a sillyrename, and
+    then immediately deleting the sillyrenamed file just afterward when
+    the link count actually goes to zero. Sometimes this delete can race
+    with other operations (for instance an rmdir of the parent directory).
+    This flag causes nfsd to close any open files for this inode _before_
+    calling into the vfs to do an unlink or a rename that would replace
+    an existing file.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8536134f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+===============================
+NFS
+===============================
+
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   client-identifier
+   exporting
+   pnfs
+   rpc-cache
+   rpc-server-gss
+   nfs41-server
+   knfsd-stats
+   reexport
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/knfsd-stats.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/knfsd-stats.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..80bcf1355
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/knfsd-stats.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+============================
+Kernel NFS Server Statistics
+============================
+
+:Authors: Greg Banks <gnb@sgi.com> - 26 Mar 2009
+
+This document describes the format and semantics of the statistics
+which the kernel NFS server makes available to userspace.  These
+statistics are available in several text form pseudo files, each of
+which is described separately below.
+
+In most cases you don't need to know these formats, as the nfsstat(8)
+program from the nfs-utils distribution provides a helpful command-line
+interface for extracting and printing them.
+
+All the files described here are formatted as a sequence of text lines,
+separated by newline '\n' characters.  Lines beginning with a hash
+'#' character are comments intended for humans and should be ignored
+by parsing routines.  All other lines contain a sequence of fields
+separated by whitespace.
+
+/proc/fs/nfsd/pool_stats
+========================
+
+This file is available in kernels from 2.6.30 onwards, if the
+/proc/fs/nfsd filesystem is mounted (it almost always should be).
+
+The first line is a comment which describes the fields present in
+all the other lines.  The other lines present the following data as
+a sequence of unsigned decimal numeric fields.  One line is shown
+for each NFS thread pool.
+
+All counters are 64 bits wide and wrap naturally.  There is no way
+to zero these counters, instead applications should do their own
+rate conversion.
+
+pool
+	The id number of the NFS thread pool to which this line applies.
+	This number does not change.
+
+	Thread pool ids are a contiguous set of small integers starting
+	at zero.  The maximum value depends on the thread pool mode, but
+	currently cannot be larger than the number of CPUs in the system.
+	Note that in the default case there will be a single thread pool
+	which contains all the nfsd threads and all the CPUs in the system,
+	and thus this file will have a single line with a pool id of "0".
+
+packets-arrived
+	Counts how many NFS packets have arrived.  More precisely, this
+	is the number of times that the network stack has notified the
+	sunrpc server layer that new data may be available on a transport
+	(e.g. an NFS or UDP socket or an NFS/RDMA endpoint).
+
+	Depending on the NFS workload patterns and various network stack
+	effects (such as Large Receive Offload) which can combine packets
+	on the wire, this may be either more or less than the number
+	of NFS calls received (which statistic is available elsewhere).
+	However this is a more accurate and less workload-dependent measure
+	of how much CPU load is being placed on the sunrpc server layer
+	due to NFS network traffic.
+
+sockets-enqueued
+	Counts how many times an NFS transport is enqueued to wait for
+	an nfsd thread to service it, i.e. no nfsd thread was considered
+	available.
+
+	The circumstance this statistic tracks indicates that there was NFS
+	network-facing work to be done but it couldn't be done immediately,
+	thus introducing a small delay in servicing NFS calls.  The ideal
+	rate of change for this counter is zero; significantly non-zero
+	values may indicate a performance limitation.
+
+	This can happen because there are too few nfsd threads in the thread
+	pool for the NFS workload (the workload is thread-limited), in which
+	case configuring more nfsd threads will probably improve the
+	performance of the NFS workload.
+
+threads-woken
+	Counts how many times an idle nfsd thread is woken to try to
+	receive some data from an NFS transport.
+
+	This statistic tracks the circumstance where incoming
+	network-facing NFS work is being handled quickly, which is a good
+	thing.  The ideal rate of change for this counter will be close
+	to but less than the rate of change of the packets-arrived counter.
+
+threads-timedout
+	Counts how many times an nfsd thread triggered an idle timeout,
+	i.e. was not woken to handle any incoming network packets for
+	some time.
+
+	This statistic counts a circumstance where there are more nfsd
+	threads configured than can be used by the NFS workload.  This is
+	a clue that the number of nfsd threads can be reduced without
+	affecting performance.  Unfortunately, it's only a clue and not
+	a strong indication, for a couple of reasons:
+
+	 - Currently the rate at which the counter is incremented is quite
+	   slow; the idle timeout is 60 minutes.  Unless the NFS workload
+	   remains constant for hours at a time, this counter is unlikely
+	   to be providing information that is still useful.
+
+	 - It is usually a wise policy to provide some slack,
+	   i.e. configure a few more nfsds than are currently needed,
+	   to allow for future spikes in load.
+
+
+Note that incoming packets on NFS transports will be dealt with in
+one of three ways.  An nfsd thread can be woken (threads-woken counts
+this case), or the transport can be enqueued for later attention
+(sockets-enqueued counts this case), or the packet can be temporarily
+deferred because the transport is currently being used by an nfsd
+thread.  This last case is not very interesting and is not explicitly
+counted, but can be inferred from the other counters thus::
+
+	packets-deferred = packets-arrived - ( sockets-enqueued + threads-woken )
+
+
+More
+====
+
+Descriptions of the other statistics file should go here.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..16b5f02f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+=============================
+NFSv4.1 Server Implementation
+=============================
+
+Server support for minorversion 1 can be controlled using the
+/proc/fs/nfsd/versions control file.  The string output returned
+by reading this file will contain either "+4.1" or "-4.1"
+correspondingly.
+
+Currently, server support for minorversion 1 is enabled by default.
+It can be disabled at run time by writing the string "-4.1" to
+the /proc/fs/nfsd/versions control file.  Note that to write this
+control file, the nfsd service must be taken down.  You can use rpc.nfsd
+for this; see rpc.nfsd(8).
+
+(Warning: older servers will interpret "+4.1" and "-4.1" as "+4" and
+"-4", respectively.  Therefore, code meant to work on both new and old
+kernels must turn 4.1 on or off *before* turning support for version 4
+on or off; rpc.nfsd does this correctly.)
+
+The NFSv4 minorversion 1 (NFSv4.1) implementation in nfsd is based
+on RFC 5661.
+
+From the many new features in NFSv4.1 the current implementation
+focuses on the mandatory-to-implement NFSv4.1 Sessions, providing
+"exactly once" semantics and better control and throttling of the
+resources allocated for each client.
+
+The table below, taken from the NFSv4.1 document, lists
+the operations that are mandatory to implement (REQ), optional
+(OPT), and NFSv4.0 operations that are required not to implement (MNI)
+in minor version 1.  The first column indicates the operations that
+are not supported yet by the linux server implementation.
+
+The OPTIONAL features identified and their abbreviations are as follows:
+
+- **pNFS**	Parallel NFS
+- **FDELG**	File Delegations
+- **DDELG**	Directory Delegations
+
+The following abbreviations indicate the linux server implementation status.
+
+- **I**	Implemented NFSv4.1 operations.
+- **NS**	Not Supported.
+- **NS\***	Unimplemented optional feature.
+
+Operations
+==========
+
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| Implementation status | Operation            | REQ,REC, OPT or NMI | Feature (REQ, REC or OPT) | Definition     |
++=======================+======================+=====================+===========================+================+
+|                       | ACCESS               | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.1   |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | BACKCHANNEL_CTL      | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.33  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.34  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | CLOSE                | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.2   |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | COMMIT               | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.3   |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | CREATE               | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.4   |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | CREATE_SESSION       | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.36  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| NS*                   | DELEGPURGE           | OPT                 | FDELG (REQ)               | Section 18.5   |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | DELEGRETURN          | OPT                 | FDELG,                    | Section 18.6   |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       |                      |                     | DDELG, pNFS               |                |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       |                      |                     | (REQ)                     |                |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | DESTROY_CLIENTID     | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.50  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | DESTROY_SESSION      | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.37  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | EXCHANGE_ID          | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.35  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | FREE_STATEID         | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.38  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | GETATTR              | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.7   |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | GETDEVICEINFO        | OPT                 | pNFS (REQ)                | Section 18.40  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| NS*                   | GETDEVICELIST        | OPT                 | pNFS (OPT)                | Section 18.41  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | GETFH                | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.8   |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| NS*                   | GET_DIR_DELEGATION   | OPT                 | DDELG (REQ)               | Section 18.39  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | LAYOUTCOMMIT         | OPT                 | pNFS (REQ)                | Section 18.42  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | LAYOUTGET            | OPT                 | pNFS (REQ)                | Section 18.43  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | LAYOUTRETURN         | OPT                 | pNFS (REQ)                | Section 18.44  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | LINK                 | OPT                 |                           | Section 18.9   |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | LOCK                 | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.10  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | LOCKT                | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.11  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | LOCKU                | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.12  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | LOOKUP               | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.13  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | LOOKUPP              | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.14  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | NVERIFY              | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.15  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | OPEN                 | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.16  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| NS*                   | OPENATTR             | OPT                 |                           | Section 18.17  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | OPEN_CONFIRM         | MNI                 |                           | N/A            |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | OPEN_DOWNGRADE       | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.18  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | PUTFH                | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.19  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | PUTPUBFH             | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.20  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | PUTROOTFH            | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.21  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | READ                 | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.22  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | READDIR              | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.23  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | READLINK             | OPT                 |                           | Section 18.24  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | RECLAIM_COMPLETE     | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.51  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | RELEASE_LOCKOWNER    | MNI                 |                           | N/A            |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | REMOVE               | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.25  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | RENAME               | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.26  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | RENEW                | MNI                 |                           | N/A            |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | RESTOREFH            | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.27  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | SAVEFH               | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.28  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | SECINFO              | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.29  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | SECINFO_NO_NAME      | REC                 | pNFS files                | Section 18.45, |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       |                      |                     | layout (REQ)              | Section 13.12  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | SEQUENCE             | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.46  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | SETATTR              | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.30  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | SETCLIENTID          | MNI                 |                           | N/A            |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM  | MNI                 |                           | N/A            |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| NS                    | SET_SSV              | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.47  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| I                     | TEST_STATEID         | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.48  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | VERIFY               | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.31  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+| NS*                   | WANT_DELEGATION      | OPT                 | FDELG (OPT)               | Section 18.49  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+|                       | WRITE                | REQ                 |                           | Section 18.32  |
++-----------------------+----------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+----------------+
+
+
+Callback Operations
+===================
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| Implementation status | Operation               | REQ,REC, OPT or NMI | Feature (REQ, REC or OPT) | Definition    |
++=======================+=========================+=====================+===========================+===============+
+|                       | CB_GETATTR              | OPT                 | FDELG (REQ)               | Section 20.1  |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| I                     | CB_LAYOUTRECALL         | OPT                 | pNFS (REQ)                | Section 20.3  |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| NS*                   | CB_NOTIFY               | OPT                 | DDELG (REQ)               | Section 20.4  |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| NS*                   | CB_NOTIFY_DEVICEID      | OPT                 | pNFS (OPT)                | Section 20.12 |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| NS*                   | CB_NOTIFY_LOCK          | OPT                 |                           | Section 20.11 |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| NS*                   | CB_PUSH_DELEG           | OPT                 | FDELG (OPT)               | Section 20.5  |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       | CB_RECALL               | OPT                 | FDELG,                    | Section 20.2  |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       |                         |                     | DDELG, pNFS               |               |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       |                         |                     | (REQ)                     |               |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| NS*                   | CB_RECALL_ANY           | OPT                 | FDELG,                    | Section 20.6  |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       |                         |                     | DDELG, pNFS               |               |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       |                         |                     | (REQ)                     |               |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| NS                    | CB_RECALL_SLOT          | REQ                 |                           | Section 20.8  |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| NS*                   | CB_RECALLABLE_OBJ_AVAIL | OPT                 | DDELG, pNFS               | Section 20.7  |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       |                         |                     | (REQ)                     |               |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| I                     | CB_SEQUENCE             | OPT                 | FDELG,                    | Section 20.9  |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       |                         |                     | DDELG, pNFS               |               |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       |                         |                     | (REQ)                     |               |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+| NS*                   | CB_WANTS_CANCELLED      | OPT                 | FDELG,                    | Section 20.10 |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       |                         |                     | DDELG, pNFS               |               |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+|                       |                         |                     | (REQ)                     |               |
++-----------------------+-------------------------+---------------------+---------------------------+---------------+
+
+
+Implementation notes:
+=====================
+
+SSV:
+  The spec claims this is mandatory, but we don't actually know of any
+  implementations, so we're ignoring it for now.  The server returns
+  NFS4ERR_ENCR_ALG_UNSUPP on EXCHANGE_ID, which should be future-proof.
+
+GSS on the backchannel:
+  Again, theoretically required but not widely implemented (in
+  particular, the current Linux client doesn't request it).  We return
+  NFS4ERR_ENCR_ALG_UNSUPP on CREATE_SESSION.
+
+DELEGPURGE:
+  mandatory only for servers that support CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV and/or
+  CLAIM_DELEG_PREV_FH (which allows clients to keep delegations that
+  persist across client reboots).  Thus we need not implement this for
+  now.
+
+EXCHANGE_ID:
+  implementation ids are ignored
+
+CREATE_SESSION:
+  backchannel attributes are ignored
+
+SEQUENCE:
+  no support for dynamic slot table renegotiation (optional)
+
+Nonstandard compound limitations:
+  No support for a sessions fore channel RPC compound that requires both a
+  ca_maxrequestsize request and a ca_maxresponsesize reply, so we may
+  fail to live up to the promise we made in CREATE_SESSION fore channel
+  negotiation.
+
+See also http://wiki.linux-nfs.org/wiki/index.php/Server_4.0_and_4.1_issues.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7c470ecdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+==========================
+Reference counting in pnfs
+==========================
+
+The are several inter-related caches.  We have layouts which can
+reference multiple devices, each of which can reference multiple data servers.
+Each data server can be referenced by multiple devices.  Each device
+can be referenced by multiple layouts. To keep all of this straight,
+we need to reference count.
+
+
+struct pnfs_layout_hdr
+======================
+
+The on-the-wire command LAYOUTGET corresponds to struct
+pnfs_layout_segment, usually referred to by the variable name lseg.
+Each nfs_inode may hold a pointer to a cache of these layout
+segments in nfsi->layout, of type struct pnfs_layout_hdr.
+
+We reference the header for the inode pointing to it, across each
+outstanding RPC call that references it (LAYOUTGET, LAYOUTRETURN,
+LAYOUTCOMMIT), and for each lseg held within.
+
+Each header is also (when non-empty) put on a list associated with
+struct nfs_client (cl_layouts).  Being put on this list does not bump
+the reference count, as the layout is kept around by the lseg that
+keeps it in the list.
+
+deviceid_cache
+==============
+
+lsegs reference device ids, which are resolved per nfs_client and
+layout driver type.  The device ids are held in a RCU cache (struct
+nfs4_deviceid_cache).  The cache itself is referenced across each
+mount.  The entries (struct nfs4_deviceid) themselves are held across
+the lifetime of each lseg referencing them.
+
+RCU is used because the deviceid is basically a write once, read many
+data structure.  The hlist size of 32 buckets needs better
+justification, but seems reasonable given that we can have multiple
+deviceid's per filesystem, and multiple filesystems per nfs_client.
+
+The hash code is copied from the nfsd code base.  A discussion of
+hashing and variations of this algorithm can be found `here.
+<http://groups.google.com/group/comp.lang.c/browse_thread/thread/9522965e2b8d3809>`_
+
+data server cache
+=================
+
+file driver devices refer to data servers, which are kept in a module
+level cache.  Its reference is held over the lifetime of the deviceid
+pointing to it.
+
+lseg
+====
+
+lseg maintains an extra reference corresponding to the NFS_LSEG_VALID
+bit which holds it in the pnfs_layout_hdr's list.  When the final lseg
+is removed from the pnfs_layout_hdr's list, the NFS_LAYOUT_DESTROYED
+bit is set, preventing any new lsegs from being added.
+
+layout drivers
+==============
+
+PNFS utilizes what is called layout drivers. The STD defines 4 basic
+layout types: "files", "objects", "blocks", and "flexfiles". For each
+of these types there is a layout-driver with a common function-vectors
+table which are called by the nfs-client pnfs-core to implement the
+different layout types.
+
+Files-layout-driver code is in: fs/nfs/filelayout/.. directory
+Blocks-layout-driver code is in: fs/nfs/blocklayout/.. directory
+Flexfiles-layout-driver code is in: fs/nfs/flexfilelayout/.. directory
+
+blocks-layout setup
+===================
+
+TODO: Document the setup needs of the blocks layout driver
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/reexport.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/reexport.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ff9ae4a46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/reexport.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+Reexporting NFS filesystems
+===========================
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+It is possible to reexport an NFS filesystem over NFS.  However, this
+feature comes with a number of limitations.  Before trying it, we
+recommend some careful research to determine whether it will work for
+your purposes.
+
+A discussion of current known limitations follows.
+
+"fsid=" required, crossmnt broken
+---------------------------------
+
+We require the "fsid=" export option on any reexport of an NFS
+filesystem.  You can use "uuidgen -r" to generate a unique argument.
+
+The "crossmnt" export does not propagate "fsid=", so it will not allow
+traversing into further nfs filesystems; if you wish to export nfs
+filesystems mounted under the exported filesystem, you'll need to export
+them explicitly, assigning each its own unique "fsid= option.
+
+Reboot recovery
+---------------
+
+The NFS protocol's normal reboot recovery mechanisms don't work for the
+case when the reexport server reboots.  Clients will lose any locks
+they held before the reboot, and further IO will result in errors.
+Closing and reopening files should clear the errors.
+
+Filehandle limits
+-----------------
+
+If the original server uses an X byte filehandle for a given object, the
+reexport server's filehandle for the reexported object will be X+22
+bytes, rounded up to the nearest multiple of four bytes.
+
+The result must fit into the RFC-mandated filehandle size limits:
+
++-------+-----------+
+| NFSv2 |  32 bytes |
++-------+-----------+
+| NFSv3 |  64 bytes |
++-------+-----------+
+| NFSv4 | 128 bytes |
++-------+-----------+
+
+So, for example, you will only be able to reexport a filesystem over
+NFSv2 if the original server gives you filehandles that fit in 10
+bytes--which is unlikely.
+
+In general there's no way to know the maximum filehandle size given out
+by an NFS server without asking the server vendor.
+
+But the following table gives a few examples.  The first column is the
+typical length of the filehandle from a Linux server exporting the given
+filesystem, the second is the length after that nfs export is reexported
+by another Linux host:
+
++--------+-------------------+----------------+
+|        | filehandle length | after reexport |
++========+===================+================+
+| ext4:  | 28 bytes          | 52 bytes       |
++--------+-------------------+----------------+
+| xfs:   | 32 bytes          | 56 bytes       |
++--------+-------------------+----------------+
+| btrfs: | 40 bytes          | 64 bytes       |
++--------+-------------------+----------------+
+
+All will therefore fit in an NFSv3 or NFSv4 filehandle after reexport,
+but none are reexportable over NFSv2.
+
+Linux server filehandles are a bit more complicated than this, though;
+for example:
+
+        - The (non-default) "subtreecheck" export option generally
+          requires another 4 to 8 bytes in the filehandle.
+        - If you export a subdirectory of a filesystem (instead of
+          exporting the filesystem root), that also usually adds 4 to 8
+          bytes.
+        - If you export over NFSv2, knfsd usually uses a shorter
+          filesystem identifier that saves 8 bytes.
+        - The root directory of an export uses a filehandle that is
+          shorter.
+
+As you can see, the 128-byte NFSv4 filehandle is large enough that
+you're unlikely to have trouble using NFSv4 to reexport any filesystem
+exported from a Linux server.  In general, if the original server is
+something that also supports NFSv3, you're *probably* OK.  Re-exporting
+over NFSv3 may be dicier, and reexporting over NFSv2 will probably
+never work.
+
+For more details of Linux filehandle structure, the best reference is
+the source code and comments; see in particular:
+
+        - include/linux/exportfs.h:enum fid_type
+        - include/uapi/linux/nfsd/nfsfh.h:struct nfs_fhbase_new
+        - fs/nfsd/nfsfh.c:set_version_and_fsid_type
+        - fs/nfs/export.c:nfs_encode_fh
+
+Open DENY bits ignored
+----------------------
+
+NFS since NFSv4 supports ALLOW and DENY bits taken from Windows, which
+allow you, for example, to open a file in a mode which forbids other
+read opens or write opens. The Linux client doesn't use them, and the
+server's support has always been incomplete: they are enforced only
+against other NFS users, not against processes accessing the exported
+filesystem locally. A reexport server will also not pass them along to
+the original server, so they will not be enforced between clients of
+different reexport servers.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-cache.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-cache.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bb164eea9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-cache.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+=========
+RPC Cache
+=========
+
+This document gives a brief introduction to the caching
+mechanisms in the sunrpc layer that is used, in particular,
+for NFS authentication.
+
+Caches
+======
+
+The caching replaces the old exports table and allows for
+a wide variety of values to be caches.
+
+There are a number of caches that are similar in structure though
+quite possibly very different in content and use.  There is a corpus
+of common code for managing these caches.
+
+Examples of caches that are likely to be needed are:
+
+  - mapping from IP address to client name
+  - mapping from client name and filesystem to export options
+  - mapping from UID to list of GIDs, to work around NFS's limitation
+    of 16 gids.
+  - mappings between local UID/GID and remote UID/GID for sites that
+    do not have uniform uid assignment
+  - mapping from network identify to public key for crypto authentication.
+
+The common code handles such things as:
+
+   - general cache lookup with correct locking
+   - supporting 'NEGATIVE' as well as positive entries
+   - allowing an EXPIRED time on cache items, and removing
+     items after they expire, and are no longer in-use.
+   - making requests to user-space to fill in cache entries
+   - allowing user-space to directly set entries in the cache
+   - delaying RPC requests that depend on as-yet incomplete
+     cache entries, and replaying those requests when the cache entry
+     is complete.
+   - clean out old entries as they expire.
+
+Creating a Cache
+----------------
+
+-  A cache needs a datum to store.  This is in the form of a
+   structure definition that must contain a struct cache_head
+   as an element, usually the first.
+   It will also contain a key and some content.
+   Each cache element is reference counted and contains
+   expiry and update times for use in cache management.
+-  A cache needs a "cache_detail" structure that
+   describes the cache.  This stores the hash table, some
+   parameters for cache management, and some operations detailing how
+   to work with particular cache items.
+
+   The operations are:
+
+    struct cache_head \*alloc(void)
+      This simply allocates appropriate memory and returns
+      a pointer to the cache_detail embedded within the
+      structure
+
+    void cache_put(struct kref \*)
+      This is called when the last reference to an item is
+      dropped.  The pointer passed is to the 'ref' field
+      in the cache_head.  cache_put should release any
+      references create by 'cache_init' and, if CACHE_VALID
+      is set, any references created by cache_update.
+      It should then release the memory allocated by
+      'alloc'.
+
+    int match(struct cache_head \*orig, struct cache_head \*new)
+      test if the keys in the two structures match.  Return
+      1 if they do, 0 if they don't.
+
+    void init(struct cache_head \*orig, struct cache_head \*new)
+      Set the 'key' fields in 'new' from 'orig'.  This may
+      include taking references to shared objects.
+
+    void update(struct cache_head \*orig, struct cache_head \*new)
+      Set the 'content' fileds in 'new' from 'orig'.
+
+    int cache_show(struct seq_file \*m, struct cache_detail \*cd, struct cache_head \*h)
+      Optional.  Used to provide a /proc file that lists the
+      contents of a cache.  This should show one item,
+      usually on just one line.
+
+    int cache_request(struct cache_detail \*cd, struct cache_head \*h, char \*\*bpp, int \*blen)
+      Format a request to be send to user-space for an item
+      to be instantiated.  \*bpp is a buffer of size \*blen.
+      bpp should be moved forward over the encoded message,
+      and  \*blen should be reduced to show how much free
+      space remains.  Return 0 on success or <0 if not
+      enough room or other problem.
+
+    int cache_parse(struct cache_detail \*cd, char \*buf, int len)
+      A message from user space has arrived to fill out a
+      cache entry.  It is in 'buf' of length 'len'.
+      cache_parse should parse this, find the item in the
+      cache with sunrpc_cache_lookup_rcu, and update the item
+      with sunrpc_cache_update.
+
+
+-  A cache needs to be registered using cache_register().  This
+   includes it on a list of caches that will be regularly
+   cleaned to discard old data.
+
+Using a cache
+-------------
+
+To find a value in a cache, call sunrpc_cache_lookup_rcu passing a pointer
+to the cache_head in a sample item with the 'key' fields filled in.
+This will be passed to ->match to identify the target entry.  If no
+entry is found, a new entry will be create, added to the cache, and
+marked as not containing valid data.
+
+The item returned is typically passed to cache_check which will check
+if the data is valid, and may initiate an up-call to get fresh data.
+cache_check will return -ENOENT in the entry is negative or if an up
+call is needed but not possible, -EAGAIN if an upcall is pending,
+or 0 if the data is valid;
+
+cache_check can be passed a "struct cache_req\*".  This structure is
+typically embedded in the actual request and can be used to create a
+deferred copy of the request (struct cache_deferred_req).  This is
+done when the found cache item is not uptodate, but the is reason to
+believe that userspace might provide information soon.  When the cache
+item does become valid, the deferred copy of the request will be
+revisited (->revisit).  It is expected that this method will
+reschedule the request for processing.
+
+The value returned by sunrpc_cache_lookup_rcu can also be passed to
+sunrpc_cache_update to set the content for the item.  A second item is
+passed which should hold the content.  If the item found by _lookup
+has valid data, then it is discarded and a new item is created.  This
+saves any user of an item from worrying about content changing while
+it is being inspected.  If the item found by _lookup does not contain
+valid data, then the content is copied across and CACHE_VALID is set.
+
+Populating a cache
+------------------
+
+Each cache has a name, and when the cache is registered, a directory
+with that name is created in /proc/net/rpc
+
+This directory contains a file called 'channel' which is a channel
+for communicating between kernel and user for populating the cache.
+This directory may later contain other files of interacting
+with the cache.
+
+The 'channel' works a bit like a datagram socket. Each 'write' is
+passed as a whole to the cache for parsing and interpretation.
+Each cache can treat the write requests differently, but it is
+expected that a message written will contain:
+
+  - a key
+  - an expiry time
+  - a content.
+
+with the intention that an item in the cache with the give key
+should be create or updated to have the given content, and the
+expiry time should be set on that item.
+
+Reading from a channel is a bit more interesting.  When a cache
+lookup fails, or when it succeeds but finds an entry that may soon
+expire, a request is lodged for that cache item to be updated by
+user-space.  These requests appear in the channel file.
+
+Successive reads will return successive requests.
+If there are no more requests to return, read will return EOF, but a
+select or poll for read will block waiting for another request to be
+added.
+
+Thus a user-space helper is likely to::
+
+  open the channel.
+    select for readable
+    read a request
+    write a response
+  loop.
+
+If it dies and needs to be restarted, any requests that have not been
+answered will still appear in the file and will be read by the new
+instance of the helper.
+
+Each cache should define a "cache_parse" method which takes a message
+written from user-space and processes it.  It should return an error
+(which propagates back to the write syscall) or 0.
+
+Each cache should also define a "cache_request" method which
+takes a cache item and encodes a request into the buffer
+provided.
+
+.. note::
+  If a cache has no active readers on the channel, and has had not
+  active readers for more than 60 seconds, further requests will not be
+  added to the channel but instead all lookups that do not find a valid
+  entry will fail.  This is partly for backward compatibility: The
+  previous nfs exports table was deemed to be authoritative and a
+  failed lookup meant a definite 'no'.
+
+request/response format
+-----------------------
+
+While each cache is free to use its own format for requests
+and responses over channel, the following is recommended as
+appropriate and support routines are available to help:
+Each request or response record should be printable ASCII
+with precisely one newline character which should be at the end.
+Fields within the record should be separated by spaces, normally one.
+If spaces, newlines, or nul characters are needed in a field they
+much be quoted.  two mechanisms are available:
+
+-  If a field begins '\x' then it must contain an even number of
+   hex digits, and pairs of these digits provide the bytes in the
+   field.
+-  otherwise a \ in the field must be followed by 3 octal digits
+   which give the code for a byte.  Other characters are treated
+   as them selves.  At the very least, space, newline, nul, and
+   '\' must be quoted in this way.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-server-gss.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-server-gss.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ccaea9e7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-server-gss.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+=========================================
+rpcsec_gss support for kernel RPC servers
+=========================================
+
+This document gives references to the standards and protocols used to
+implement RPCGSS authentication in kernel RPC servers such as the NFS
+server and the NFS client's NFSv4.0 callback server.  (But note that
+NFSv4.1 and higher don't require the client to act as a server for the
+purposes of authentication.)
+
+RPCGSS is specified in a few IETF documents:
+
+ - RFC2203 v1: https://tools.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2203.txt
+ - RFC5403 v2: https://tools.ietf.org/rfc/rfc5403.txt
+
+There is a third version that we don't currently implement:
+
+ - RFC7861 v3: https://tools.ietf.org/rfc/rfc7861.txt
+
+Background
+==========
+
+The RPCGSS Authentication method describes a way to perform GSSAPI
+Authentication for NFS.  Although GSSAPI is itself completely mechanism
+agnostic, in many cases only the KRB5 mechanism is supported by NFS
+implementations.
+
+The Linux kernel, at the moment, supports only the KRB5 mechanism, and
+depends on GSSAPI extensions that are KRB5 specific.
+
+GSSAPI is a complex library, and implementing it completely in kernel is
+unwarranted. However GSSAPI operations are fundementally separable in 2
+parts:
+
+- initial context establishment
+- integrity/privacy protection (signing and encrypting of individual
+  packets)
+
+The former is more complex and policy-independent, but less
+performance-sensitive.  The latter is simpler and needs to be very fast.
+
+Therefore, we perform per-packet integrity and privacy protection in the
+kernel, but leave the initial context establishment to userspace.  We
+need upcalls to request userspace to perform context establishment.
+
+NFS Server Legacy Upcall Mechanism
+==================================
+
+The classic upcall mechanism uses a custom text based upcall mechanism
+to talk to a custom daemon called rpc.svcgssd that is provide by the
+nfs-utils package.
+
+This upcall mechanism has 2 limitations:
+
+A) It can handle tokens that are no bigger than 2KiB
+
+In some Kerberos deployment GSSAPI tokens can be quite big, up and
+beyond 64KiB in size due to various authorization extensions attacked to
+the Kerberos tickets, that needs to be sent through the GSS layer in
+order to perform context establishment.
+
+B) It does not properly handle creds where the user is member of more
+than a few thousand groups (the current hard limit in the kernel is 65K
+groups) due to limitation on the size of the buffer that can be send
+back to the kernel (4KiB).
+
+NFS Server New RPC Upcall Mechanism
+===================================
+
+The newer upcall mechanism uses RPC over a unix socket to a daemon
+called gss-proxy, implemented by a userspace program called Gssproxy.
+
+The gss_proxy RPC protocol is currently documented `here
+<https://fedorahosted.org/gss-proxy/wiki/ProtocolDocumentation>`_.
+
+This upcall mechanism uses the kernel rpc client and connects to the gssproxy
+userspace program over a regular unix socket. The gssproxy protocol does not
+suffer from the size limitations of the legacy protocol.
+
+Negotiating Upcall Mechanisms
+=============================
+
+To provide backward compatibility, the kernel defaults to using the
+legacy mechanism.  To switch to the new mechanism, gss-proxy must bind
+to /var/run/gssproxy.sock and then write "1" to
+/proc/net/rpc/use-gss-proxy.  If gss-proxy dies, it must repeat both
+steps.
+
+Once the upcall mechanism is chosen, it cannot be changed.  To prevent
+locking into the legacy mechanisms, the above steps must be performed
+before starting nfsd.  Whoever starts nfsd can guarantee this by reading
+from /proc/net/rpc/use-gss-proxy and checking that it contains a
+"1"--the read will block until gss-proxy has done its write to the file.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6c49f04e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======
+NILFS2
+======
+
+NILFS2 is a log-structured file system (LFS) supporting continuous
+snapshotting.  In addition to versioning capability of the entire file
+system, users can even restore files mistakenly overwritten or
+destroyed just a few seconds ago.  Since NILFS2 can keep consistency
+like conventional LFS, it achieves quick recovery after system
+crashes.
+
+NILFS2 creates a number of checkpoints every few seconds or per
+synchronous write basis (unless there is no change).  Users can select
+significant versions among continuously created checkpoints, and can
+change them into snapshots which will be preserved until they are
+changed back to checkpoints.
+
+There is no limit on the number of snapshots until the volume gets
+full.  Each snapshot is mountable as a read-only file system
+concurrently with its writable mount, and this feature is convenient
+for online backup.
+
+The userland tools are included in nilfs-utils package, which is
+available from the following download page.  At least "mkfs.nilfs2",
+"mount.nilfs2", "umount.nilfs2", and "nilfs_cleanerd" (so called
+cleaner or garbage collector) are required.  Details on the tools are
+described in the man pages included in the package.
+
+:Project web page:    https://nilfs.sourceforge.io/
+:Download page:       https://nilfs.sourceforge.io/en/download.html
+:List info:           http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#linux-nilfs
+
+Caveats
+=======
+
+Features which NILFS2 does not support yet:
+
+	- atime
+	- extended attributes
+	- POSIX ACLs
+	- quotas
+	- fsck
+	- defragmentation
+
+Mount options
+=============
+
+NILFS2 supports the following mount options:
+(*) == default
+
+======================= =======================================================
+barrier(*)		This enables/disables the use of write barriers.  This
+nobarrier		requires an IO stack which can support barriers, and
+			if nilfs gets an error on a barrier write, it will
+			disable again with a warning.
+errors=continue		Keep going on a filesystem error.
+errors=remount-ro(*)	Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
+errors=panic		Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
+cp=n			Specify the checkpoint-number of the snapshot to be
+			mounted.  Checkpoints and snapshots are listed by lscp
+			user command.  Only the checkpoints marked as snapshot
+			are mountable with this option.  Snapshot is read-only,
+			so a read-only mount option must be specified together.
+order=relaxed(*)	Apply relaxed order semantics that allows modified data
+			blocks to be written to disk without making a
+			checkpoint if no metadata update is going.  This mode
+			is equivalent to the ordered data mode of the ext3
+			filesystem except for the updates on data blocks still
+			conserve atomicity.  This will improve synchronous
+			write performance for overwriting.
+order=strict		Apply strict in-order semantics that preserves sequence
+			of all file operations including overwriting of data
+			blocks.  That means, it is guaranteed that no
+			overtaking of events occurs in the recovered file
+			system after a crash.
+norecovery		Disable recovery of the filesystem on mount.
+			This disables every write access on the device for
+			read-only mounts or snapshots.  This option will fail
+			for r/w mounts on an unclean volume.
+discard			This enables/disables the use of discard/TRIM commands.
+nodiscard(*)		The discard/TRIM commands are sent to the underlying
+			block device when blocks are freed.  This is useful
+			for SSD devices and sparse/thinly-provisioned LUNs.
+======================= =======================================================
+
+Ioctls
+======
+
+There is some NILFS2 specific functionality which can be accessed by applications
+through the system call interfaces. The list of all NILFS2 specific ioctls are
+shown in the table below.
+
+Table of NILFS2 specific ioctls:
+
+ ============================== ===============================================
+ Ioctl			        Description
+ ============================== ===============================================
+ NILFS_IOCTL_CHANGE_CPMODE      Change mode of given checkpoint between
+			        checkpoint and snapshot state. This ioctl is
+			        used in chcp and mkcp utilities.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_DELETE_CHECKPOINT  Remove checkpoint from NILFS2 file system.
+			        This ioctl is used in rmcp utility.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_GET_CPINFO         Return info about requested checkpoints. This
+			        ioctl is used in lscp utility and by
+			        nilfs_cleanerd daemon.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_GET_CPSTAT         Return checkpoints statistics. This ioctl is
+			        used by lscp, rmcp utilities and by
+			        nilfs_cleanerd daemon.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_GET_SUINFO         Return segment usage info about requested
+			        segments. This ioctl is used in lssu,
+			        nilfs_resize utilities and by nilfs_cleanerd
+			        daemon.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_SET_SUINFO         Modify segment usage info of requested
+				segments. This ioctl is used by
+				nilfs_cleanerd daemon to skip unnecessary
+				cleaning operation of segments and reduce
+				performance penalty or wear of flash device
+				due to redundant move of in-use blocks.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_GET_SUSTAT         Return segment usage statistics. This ioctl
+			        is used in lssu, nilfs_resize utilities and
+			        by nilfs_cleanerd daemon.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_GET_VINFO          Return information on virtual block addresses.
+			        This ioctl is used by nilfs_cleanerd daemon.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_GET_BDESCS         Return information about descriptors of disk
+			        block numbers. This ioctl is used by
+			        nilfs_cleanerd daemon.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_CLEAN_SEGMENTS     Do garbage collection operation in the
+			        environment of requested parameters from
+			        userspace. This ioctl is used by
+			        nilfs_cleanerd daemon.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_SYNC               Make a checkpoint. This ioctl is used in
+			        mkcp utility.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_RESIZE             Resize NILFS2 volume. This ioctl is used
+			        by nilfs_resize utility.
+
+ NILFS_IOCTL_SET_ALLOC_RANGE    Define lower limit of segments in bytes and
+			        upper limit of segments in bytes. This ioctl
+			        is used by nilfs_resize utility.
+ ============================== ===============================================
+
+NILFS2 usage
+============
+
+To use nilfs2 as a local file system, simply::
+
+ # mkfs -t nilfs2 /dev/block_device
+ # mount -t nilfs2 /dev/block_device /dir
+
+This will also invoke the cleaner through the mount helper program
+(mount.nilfs2).
+
+Checkpoints and snapshots are managed by the following commands.
+Their manpages are included in the nilfs-utils package above.
+
+  ====     ===========================================================
+  lscp     list checkpoints or snapshots.
+  mkcp     make a checkpoint or a snapshot.
+  chcp     change an existing checkpoint to a snapshot or vice versa.
+  rmcp     invalidate specified checkpoint(s).
+  ====     ===========================================================
+
+To mount a snapshot::
+
+ # mount -t nilfs2 -r -o cp=<cno> /dev/block_device /snap_dir
+
+where <cno> is the checkpoint number of the snapshot.
+
+To unmount the NILFS2 mount point or snapshot, simply::
+
+ # umount /dir
+
+Then, the cleaner daemon is automatically shut down by the umount
+helper program (umount.nilfs2).
+
+Disk format
+===========
+
+A nilfs2 volume is equally divided into a number of segments except
+for the super block (SB) and segment #0.  A segment is the container
+of logs.  Each log is composed of summary information blocks, payload
+blocks, and an optional super root block (SR)::
+
+   ______________________________________________________
+  | |SB| | Segment | Segment | Segment | ... | Segment | |
+  |_|__|_|____0____|____1____|____2____|_____|____N____|_|
+  0 +1K +4K       +8M       +16M      +24M  +(8MB x N)
+       .             .            (Typical offsets for 4KB-block)
+    .                  .
+  .______________________.
+  | log | log |... | log |
+  |__1__|__2__|____|__m__|
+        .       .
+      .               .
+    .                       .
+  .______________________________.
+  | Summary | Payload blocks  |SR|
+  |_blocks__|_________________|__|
+
+The payload blocks are organized per file, and each file consists of
+data blocks and B-tree node blocks::
+
+    |<---       File-A        --->|<---       File-B        --->|
+   _______________________________________________________________
+    | Data blocks | B-tree blocks | Data blocks | B-tree blocks | ...
+   _|_____________|_______________|_____________|_______________|_
+
+
+Since only the modified blocks are written in the log, it may have
+files without data blocks or B-tree node blocks.
+
+The organization of the blocks is recorded in the summary information
+blocks, which contains a header structure (nilfs_segment_summary), per
+file structures (nilfs_finfo), and per block structures (nilfs_binfo)::
+
+  _________________________________________________________________________
+ | Summary | finfo | binfo | ... | binfo | finfo | binfo | ... | binfo |...
+ |_blocks__|___A___|_(A,1)_|_____|(A,Na)_|___B___|_(B,1)_|_____|(B,Nb)_|___
+
+
+The logs include regular files, directory files, symbolic link files
+and several meta data files.  The mata data files are the files used
+to maintain file system meta data.  The current version of NILFS2 uses
+the following meta data files::
+
+ 1) Inode file (ifile)             -- Stores on-disk inodes
+ 2) Checkpoint file (cpfile)       -- Stores checkpoints
+ 3) Segment usage file (sufile)    -- Stores allocation state of segments
+ 4) Data address translation file  -- Maps virtual block numbers to usual
+    (DAT)                             block numbers.  This file serves to
+                                      make on-disk blocks relocatable.
+
+The following figure shows a typical organization of the logs::
+
+  _________________________________________________________________________
+ | Summary | regular file | file  | ... | ifile | cpfile | sufile | DAT |SR|
+ |_blocks__|_or_directory_|_______|_____|_______|________|________|_____|__|
+
+
+To stride over segment boundaries, this sequence of files may be split
+into multiple logs.  The sequence of logs that should be treated as
+logically one log, is delimited with flags marked in the segment
+summary.  The recovery code of nilfs2 looks this boundary information
+to ensure atomicity of updates.
+
+The super root block is inserted for every checkpoints.  It includes
+three special inodes, inodes for the DAT, cpfile, and sufile.  Inodes
+of regular files, directories, symlinks and other special files, are
+included in the ifile.  The inode of ifile itself is included in the
+corresponding checkpoint entry in the cpfile.  Thus, the hierarchy
+among NILFS2 files can be depicted as follows::
+
+  Super block (SB)
+       |
+       v
+  Super root block (the latest cno=xx)
+       |-- DAT
+       |-- sufile
+       `-- cpfile
+              |-- ifile (cno=c1)
+              |-- ifile (cno=c2) ---- file (ino=i1)
+              :        :          |-- file (ino=i2)
+              `-- ifile (cno=xx)  |-- file (ino=i3)
+                                  :        :
+                                  `-- file (ino=yy)
+                                    ( regular file, directory, or symlink )
+
+For detail on the format of each file, please see nilfs2_ondisk.h
+located at include/uapi/linux directory.
+
+There are no patents or other intellectual property that we protect
+with regard to the design of NILFS2.  It is allowed to replicate the
+design in hopes that other operating systems could share (mount, read,
+write, etc.) data stored in this format.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5bb093a26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,466 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================================
+The Linux NTFS filesystem driver
+================================
+
+
+.. Table of contents
+
+   - Overview
+   - Web site
+   - Features
+   - Supported mount options
+   - Known bugs and (mis-)features
+   - Using NTFS volume and stripe sets
+     - The Device-Mapper driver
+     - The Software RAID / MD driver
+     - Limitations when using the MD driver
+
+
+Overview
+========
+
+Linux-NTFS comes with a number of user-space programs known as ntfsprogs.
+These include mkntfs, a full-featured ntfs filesystem format utility,
+ntfsundelete used for recovering files that were unintentionally deleted
+from an NTFS volume and ntfsresize which is used to resize an NTFS partition.
+See the web site for more information.
+
+To mount an NTFS 1.2/3.x (Windows NT4/2000/XP/2003) volume, use the file
+system type 'ntfs'.  The driver currently supports read-only mode (with no
+fault-tolerance, encryption or journalling) and very limited, but safe, write
+support.
+
+For fault tolerance and raid support (i.e. volume and stripe sets), you can
+use the kernel's Software RAID / MD driver.  See section "Using Software RAID
+with NTFS" for details.
+
+
+Web site
+========
+
+There is plenty of additional information on the linux-ntfs web site
+at http://www.linux-ntfs.org/
+
+The web site has a lot of additional information, such as a comprehensive
+FAQ, documentation on the NTFS on-disk format, information on the Linux-NTFS
+userspace utilities, etc.
+
+
+Features
+========
+
+- This is a complete rewrite of the NTFS driver that used to be in the 2.4 and
+  earlier kernels.  This new driver implements NTFS read support and is
+  functionally equivalent to the old ntfs driver and it also implements limited
+  write support.  The biggest limitation at present is that files/directories
+  cannot be created or deleted.  See below for the list of write features that
+  are so far supported.  Another limitation is that writing to compressed files
+  is not implemented at all.  Also, neither read nor write access to encrypted
+  files is so far implemented.
+- The new driver has full support for sparse files on NTFS 3.x volumes which
+  the old driver isn't happy with.
+- The new driver supports execution of binaries due to mmap() now being
+  supported.
+- The new driver supports loopback mounting of files on NTFS which is used by
+  some Linux distributions to enable the user to run Linux from an NTFS
+  partition by creating a large file while in Windows and then loopback
+  mounting the file while in Linux and creating a Linux filesystem on it that
+  is used to install Linux on it.
+- A comparison of the two drivers using::
+
+	time find . -type f -exec md5sum "{}" \;
+
+  run three times in sequence with each driver (after a reboot) on a 1.4GiB
+  NTFS partition, showed the new driver to be 20% faster in total time elapsed
+  (from 9:43 minutes on average down to 7:53).  The time spent in user space
+  was unchanged but the time spent in the kernel was decreased by a factor of
+  2.5 (from 85 CPU seconds down to 33).
+- The driver does not support short file names in general.  For backwards
+  compatibility, we implement access to files using their short file names if
+  they exist.  The driver will not create short file names however, and a
+  rename will discard any existing short file name.
+- The new driver supports exporting of mounted NTFS volumes via NFS.
+- The new driver supports async io (aio).
+- The new driver supports fsync(2), fdatasync(2), and msync(2).
+- The new driver supports readv(2) and writev(2).
+- The new driver supports access time updates (including mtime and ctime).
+- The new driver supports truncate(2) and open(2) with O_TRUNC.  But at present
+  only very limited support for highly fragmented files, i.e. ones which have
+  their data attribute split across multiple extents, is included.  Another
+  limitation is that at present truncate(2) will never create sparse files,
+  since to mark a file sparse we need to modify the directory entry for the
+  file and we do not implement directory modifications yet.
+- The new driver supports write(2) which can both overwrite existing data and
+  extend the file size so that you can write beyond the existing data.  Also,
+  writing into sparse regions is supported and the holes are filled in with
+  clusters.  But at present only limited support for highly fragmented files,
+  i.e. ones which have their data attribute split across multiple extents, is
+  included.  Another limitation is that write(2) will never create sparse
+  files, since to mark a file sparse we need to modify the directory entry for
+  the file and we do not implement directory modifications yet.
+
+Supported mount options
+=======================
+
+In addition to the generic mount options described by the manual page for the
+mount command (man 8 mount, also see man 5 fstab), the NTFS driver supports the
+following mount options:
+
+======================= =======================================================
+iocharset=name		Deprecated option.  Still supported but please use
+			nls=name in the future.  See description for nls=name.
+
+nls=name		Character set to use when returning file names.
+			Unlike VFAT, NTFS suppresses names that contain
+			unconvertible characters.  Note that most character
+			sets contain insufficient characters to represent all
+			possible Unicode characters that can exist on NTFS.
+			To be sure you are not missing any files, you are
+			advised to use nls=utf8 which is capable of
+			representing all Unicode characters.
+
+utf8=<bool>		Option no longer supported.  Currently mapped to
+			nls=utf8 but please use nls=utf8 in the future and
+			make sure utf8 is compiled either as module or into
+			the kernel.  See description for nls=name.
+
+uid=
+gid=
+umask=			Provide default owner, group, and access mode mask.
+			These options work as documented in mount(8).  By
+			default, the files/directories are owned by root and
+			he/she has read and write permissions, as well as
+			browse permission for directories.  No one else has any
+			access permissions.  I.e. the mode on all files is by
+			default rw------- and for directories rwx------, a
+			consequence of the default fmask=0177 and dmask=0077.
+			Using a umask of zero will grant all permissions to
+			everyone, i.e. all files and directories will have mode
+			rwxrwxrwx.
+
+fmask=
+dmask=			Instead of specifying umask which applies both to
+			files and directories, fmask applies only to files and
+			dmask only to directories.
+
+sloppy=<BOOL>		If sloppy is specified, ignore unknown mount options.
+			Otherwise the default behaviour is to abort mount if
+			any unknown options are found.
+
+show_sys_files=<BOOL>	If show_sys_files is specified, show the system files
+			in directory listings.  Otherwise the default behaviour
+			is to hide the system files.
+			Note that even when show_sys_files is specified, "$MFT"
+			will not be visible due to bugs/mis-features in glibc.
+			Further, note that irrespective of show_sys_files, all
+			files are accessible by name, i.e. you can always do
+			"ls -l \$UpCase" for example to specifically show the
+			system file containing the Unicode upcase table.
+
+case_sensitive=<BOOL>	If case_sensitive is specified, treat all file names as
+			case sensitive and create file names in the POSIX
+			namespace.  Otherwise the default behaviour is to treat
+			file names as case insensitive and to create file names
+			in the WIN32/LONG name space.  Note, the Linux NTFS
+			driver will never create short file names and will
+			remove them on rename/delete of the corresponding long
+			file name.
+			Note that files remain accessible via their short file
+			name, if it exists.  If case_sensitive, you will need
+			to provide the correct case of the short file name.
+
+disable_sparse=<BOOL>	If disable_sparse is specified, creation of sparse
+			regions, i.e. holes, inside files is disabled for the
+			volume (for the duration of this mount only).  By
+			default, creation of sparse regions is enabled, which
+			is consistent with the behaviour of traditional Unix
+			filesystems.
+
+errors=opt		What to do when critical filesystem errors are found.
+			Following values can be used for "opt":
+
+			  ========  =========================================
+			  continue  DEFAULT, try to clean-up as much as
+				    possible, e.g. marking a corrupt inode as
+				    bad so it is no longer accessed, and then
+				    continue.
+			  recover   At present only supported is recovery of
+				    the boot sector from the backup copy.
+				    If read-only mount, the recovery is done
+				    in memory only and not written to disk.
+			  ========  =========================================
+
+			Note that the options are additive, i.e. specifying::
+
+			   errors=continue,errors=recover
+
+			means the driver will attempt to recover and if that
+			fails it will clean-up as much as possible and
+			continue.
+
+mft_zone_multiplier=	Set the MFT zone multiplier for the volume (this
+			setting is not persistent across mounts and can be
+			changed from mount to mount but cannot be changed on
+			remount).  Values of 1 to 4 are allowed, 1 being the
+			default.  The MFT zone multiplier determines how much
+			space is reserved for the MFT on the volume.  If all
+			other space is used up, then the MFT zone will be
+			shrunk dynamically, so this has no impact on the
+			amount of free space.  However, it can have an impact
+			on performance by affecting fragmentation of the MFT.
+			In general use the default.  If you have a lot of small
+			files then use a higher value.  The values have the
+			following meaning:
+
+			      =====	    =================================
+			      Value	     MFT zone size (% of volume size)
+			      =====	    =================================
+				1		12.5%
+				2		25%
+				3		37.5%
+				4		50%
+			      =====	    =================================
+
+			Note this option is irrelevant for read-only mounts.
+======================= =======================================================
+
+
+Known bugs and (mis-)features
+=============================
+
+- The link count on each directory inode entry is set to 1, due to Linux not
+  supporting directory hard links.  This may well confuse some user space
+  applications, since the directory names will have the same inode numbers.
+  This also speeds up ntfs_read_inode() immensely.  And we haven't found any
+  problems with this approach so far.  If you find a problem with this, please
+  let us know.
+
+
+Please send bug reports/comments/feedback/abuse to the Linux-NTFS development
+list at sourceforge: linux-ntfs-dev@lists.sourceforge.net
+
+
+Using NTFS volume and stripe sets
+=================================
+
+For support of volume and stripe sets, you can either use the kernel's
+Device-Mapper driver or the kernel's Software RAID / MD driver.  The former is
+the recommended one to use for linear raid.  But the latter is required for
+raid level 5.  For striping and mirroring, either driver should work fine.
+
+
+The Device-Mapper driver
+------------------------
+
+You will need to create a table of the components of the volume/stripe set and
+how they fit together and load this into the kernel using the dmsetup utility
+(see man 8 dmsetup).
+
+Linear volume sets, i.e. linear raid, has been tested and works fine.  Even
+though untested, there is no reason why stripe sets, i.e. raid level 0, and
+mirrors, i.e. raid level 1 should not work, too.  Stripes with parity, i.e.
+raid level 5, unfortunately cannot work yet because the current version of the
+Device-Mapper driver does not support raid level 5.  You may be able to use the
+Software RAID / MD driver for raid level 5, see the next section for details.
+
+To create the table describing your volume you will need to know each of its
+components and their sizes in sectors, i.e. multiples of 512-byte blocks.
+
+For NT4 fault tolerant volumes you can obtain the sizes using fdisk.  So for
+example if one of your partitions is /dev/hda2 you would do::
+
+    $ fdisk -ul /dev/hda
+
+    Disk /dev/hda: 81.9 GB, 81964302336 bytes
+    255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 9964 cylinders, total 160086528 sectors
+    Units = sectors of 1 * 512 = 512 bytes
+
+	Device Boot      Start         End      Blocks   Id  System
+	/dev/hda1   *          63     4209029     2104483+  83  Linux
+	/dev/hda2         4209030    37768814    16779892+  86  NTFS
+	/dev/hda3        37768815    46170809     4200997+  83  Linux
+
+And you would know that /dev/hda2 has a size of 37768814 - 4209030 + 1 =
+33559785 sectors.
+
+For Win2k and later dynamic disks, you can for example use the ldminfo utility
+which is part of the Linux LDM tools (the latest version at the time of
+writing is linux-ldm-0.0.8.tar.bz2).  You can download it from:
+
+	http://www.linux-ntfs.org/
+
+Simply extract the downloaded archive (tar xvjf linux-ldm-0.0.8.tar.bz2), go
+into it (cd linux-ldm-0.0.8) and change to the test directory (cd test).  You
+will find the precompiled (i386) ldminfo utility there.  NOTE: You will not be
+able to compile this yourself easily so use the binary version!
+
+Then you would use ldminfo in dump mode to obtain the necessary information::
+
+    $ ./ldminfo --dump /dev/hda
+
+This would dump the LDM database found on /dev/hda which describes all of your
+dynamic disks and all the volumes on them.  At the bottom you will see the
+VOLUME DEFINITIONS section which is all you really need.  You may need to look
+further above to determine which of the disks in the volume definitions is
+which device in Linux.  Hint: Run ldminfo on each of your dynamic disks and
+look at the Disk Id close to the top of the output for each (the PRIVATE HEADER
+section).  You can then find these Disk Ids in the VBLK DATABASE section in the
+<Disk> components where you will get the LDM Name for the disk that is found in
+the VOLUME DEFINITIONS section.
+
+Note you will also need to enable the LDM driver in the Linux kernel.  If your
+distribution did not enable it, you will need to recompile the kernel with it
+enabled.  This will create the LDM partitions on each device at boot time.  You
+would then use those devices (for /dev/hda they would be /dev/hda1, 2, 3, etc)
+in the Device-Mapper table.
+
+You can also bypass using the LDM driver by using the main device (e.g.
+/dev/hda) and then using the offsets of the LDM partitions into this device as
+the "Start sector of device" when creating the table.  Once again ldminfo would
+give you the correct information to do this.
+
+Assuming you know all your devices and their sizes things are easy.
+
+For a linear raid the table would look like this (note all values are in
+512-byte sectors)::
+
+    # Offset into	Size of this	Raid type	Device		Start sector
+    # volume	device						of device
+    0		1028161		linear		/dev/hda1	0
+    1028161		3903762		linear		/dev/hdb2	0
+    4931923		2103211		linear		/dev/hdc1	0
+
+For a striped volume, i.e. raid level 0, you will need to know the chunk size
+you used when creating the volume.  Windows uses 64kiB as the default, so it
+will probably be this unless you changes the defaults when creating the array.
+
+For a raid level 0 the table would look like this (note all values are in
+512-byte sectors)::
+
+    # Offset   Size	    Raid     Number   Chunk  1st        Start	2nd	  Start
+    # into     of the   type     of	      size   Device	in	Device	  in
+    # volume   volume	     stripes			device		  device
+    0	   2056320  striped  2	      128    /dev/hda1	0	/dev/hdb1 0
+
+If there are more than two devices, just add each of them to the end of the
+line.
+
+Finally, for a mirrored volume, i.e. raid level 1, the table would look like
+this (note all values are in 512-byte sectors)::
+
+    # Ofs Size   Raid   Log  Number Region Should Number Source  Start Target Start
+    # in  of the type   type of log size   sync?  of     Device  in    Device in
+    # vol volume		 params		     mirrors	     Device	  Device
+    0    2056320 mirror core 2	16     nosync 2	   /dev/hda1 0   /dev/hdb1 0
+
+If you are mirroring to multiple devices you can specify further targets at the
+end of the line.
+
+Note the "Should sync?" parameter "nosync" means that the two mirrors are
+already in sync which will be the case on a clean shutdown of Windows.  If the
+mirrors are not clean, you can specify the "sync" option instead of "nosync"
+and the Device-Mapper driver will then copy the entirety of the "Source Device"
+to the "Target Device" or if you specified multiple target devices to all of
+them.
+
+Once you have your table, save it in a file somewhere (e.g. /etc/ntfsvolume1),
+and hand it over to dmsetup to work with, like so::
+
+    $ dmsetup create myvolume1 /etc/ntfsvolume1
+
+You can obviously replace "myvolume1" with whatever name you like.
+
+If it all worked, you will now have the device /dev/device-mapper/myvolume1
+which you can then just use as an argument to the mount command as usual to
+mount the ntfs volume.  For example::
+
+    $ mount -t ntfs -o ro /dev/device-mapper/myvolume1 /mnt/myvol1
+
+(You need to create the directory /mnt/myvol1 first and of course you can use
+anything you like instead of /mnt/myvol1 as long as it is an existing
+directory.)
+
+It is advisable to do the mount read-only to see if the volume has been setup
+correctly to avoid the possibility of causing damage to the data on the ntfs
+volume.
+
+
+The Software RAID / MD driver
+-----------------------------
+
+An alternative to using the Device-Mapper driver is to use the kernel's
+Software RAID / MD driver.  For which you need to set up your /etc/raidtab
+appropriately (see man 5 raidtab).
+
+Linear volume sets, i.e. linear raid, as well as stripe sets, i.e. raid level
+0, have been tested and work fine (though see section "Limitations when using
+the MD driver with NTFS volumes" especially if you want to use linear raid).
+Even though untested, there is no reason why mirrors, i.e. raid level 1, and
+stripes with parity, i.e. raid level 5, should not work, too.
+
+You have to use the "persistent-superblock 0" option for each raid-disk in the
+NTFS volume/stripe you are configuring in /etc/raidtab as the persistent
+superblock used by the MD driver would damage the NTFS volume.
+
+Windows by default uses a stripe chunk size of 64k, so you probably want the
+"chunk-size 64k" option for each raid-disk, too.
+
+For example, if you have a stripe set consisting of two partitions /dev/hda5
+and /dev/hdb1 your /etc/raidtab would look like this::
+
+    raiddev /dev/md0
+	    raid-level	0
+	    nr-raid-disks	2
+	    nr-spare-disks	0
+	    persistent-superblock	0
+	    chunk-size	64k
+	    device		/dev/hda5
+	    raid-disk	0
+	    device		/dev/hdb1
+	    raid-disk	1
+
+For linear raid, just change the raid-level above to "raid-level linear", for
+mirrors, change it to "raid-level 1", and for stripe sets with parity, change
+it to "raid-level 5".
+
+Note for stripe sets with parity you will also need to tell the MD driver
+which parity algorithm to use by specifying the option "parity-algorithm
+which", where you need to replace "which" with the name of the algorithm to
+use (see man 5 raidtab for available algorithms) and you will have to try the
+different available algorithms until you find one that works.  Make sure you
+are working read-only when playing with this as you may damage your data
+otherwise.  If you find which algorithm works please let us know (email the
+linux-ntfs developers list linux-ntfs-dev@lists.sourceforge.net or drop in on
+IRC in channel #ntfs on the irc.freenode.net network) so we can update this
+documentation.
+
+Once the raidtab is setup, run for example raid0run -a to start all devices or
+raid0run /dev/md0 to start a particular md device, in this case /dev/md0.
+
+Then just use the mount command as usual to mount the ntfs volume using for
+example::
+
+    mount -t ntfs -o ro /dev/md0 /mnt/myntfsvolume
+
+It is advisable to do the mount read-only to see if the md volume has been
+setup correctly to avoid the possibility of causing damage to the data on the
+ntfs volume.
+
+
+Limitations when using the Software RAID / MD driver
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+Using the md driver will not work properly if any of your NTFS partitions have
+an odd number of sectors.  This is especially important for linear raid as all
+data after the first partition with an odd number of sectors will be offset by
+one or more sectors so if you mount such a partition with write support you
+will cause massive damage to the data on the volume which will only become
+apparent when you try to use the volume again under Windows.
+
+So when using linear raid, make sure that all your partitions have an even
+number of sectors BEFORE attempting to use it.  You have been warned!
+
+Even better is to simply use the Device-Mapper for linear raid and then you do
+not have this problem with odd numbers of sectors.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs3.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs3.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d67ccd22c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs3.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====
+NTFS3
+=====
+
+Summary and Features
+====================
+
+NTFS3 is fully functional NTFS Read-Write driver. The driver works with NTFS
+versions up to 3.1. File system type to use on mount is *ntfs3*.
+
+- This driver implements NTFS read/write support for normal, sparse and
+  compressed files.
+- Supports native journal replaying.
+- Supports NFS export of mounted NTFS volumes.
+- Supports extended attributes. Predefined extended attributes:
+
+	- *system.ntfs_security* gets/sets security
+
+		Descriptor: SECURITY_DESCRIPTOR_RELATIVE
+
+	- *system.ntfs_attrib* gets/sets ntfs file/dir attributes.
+
+	  Note: Applied to empty files, this allows to switch type between
+	  sparse(0x200), compressed(0x800) and normal.
+
+Mount Options
+=============
+
+The list below describes mount options supported by NTFS3 driver in addition to
+generic ones. You can use every mount option with **no** option. If it is in
+this table marked with no it means default is without **no**.
+
+.. flat-table::
+   :widths: 1 5
+   :fill-cells:
+
+   * - iocharset=name
+     - This option informs the driver how to interpret path strings and
+       translate them to Unicode and back. If this option is not set, the
+       default codepage will be used (CONFIG_NLS_DEFAULT).
+
+       Example: iocharset=utf8
+
+   * - uid=
+     - :rspan:`1`
+   * - gid=
+
+   * - umask=
+     - Controls the default permissions for files/directories created after
+       the NTFS volume is mounted.
+
+   * - dmask=
+     - :rspan:`1` Instead of specifying umask which applies both to files and
+       directories, fmask applies only to files and dmask only to directories.
+   * - fmask=
+
+   * - noacsrules
+     - "No access rules" mount option sets access rights for files/folders to
+       777 and owner/group to root. This mount option absorbs all other
+       permissions.
+
+       - Permissions change for files/folders will be reported as successful,
+	 but they will remain 777.
+
+       - Owner/group change will be reported as successful, butthey will stay
+	 as root.
+
+   * - nohidden
+     - Files with the Windows-specific HIDDEN (FILE_ATTRIBUTE_HIDDEN) attribute
+       will not be shown under Linux.
+
+   * - sys_immutable
+     - Files with the Windows-specific SYSTEM (FILE_ATTRIBUTE_SYSTEM) attribute
+       will be marked as system immutable files.
+
+   * - discard
+     - Enable support of the TRIM command for improved performance on delete
+       operations, which is recommended for use with the solid-state drives
+       (SSD).
+
+   * - force
+     - Forces the driver to mount partitions even if volume is marked dirty.
+       Not recommended for use.
+
+   * - sparse
+     - Create new files as sparse.
+
+   * - showmeta
+     - Use this parameter to show all meta-files (System Files) on a mounted
+       NTFS partition. By default, all meta-files are hidden.
+
+   * - prealloc
+     - Preallocate space for files excessively when file size is increasing on
+       writes. Decreases fragmentation in case of parallel write operations to
+       different files.
+
+   * - acl
+     - Support POSIX ACLs (Access Control Lists). Effective if supported by
+       Kernel. Not to be confused with NTFS ACLs. The option specified as acl
+       enables support for POSIX ACLs.
+
+Todo list
+=========
+- Full journaling support over JBD. Currently journal replaying is supported
+  which is not necessarily as effectice as JBD would be.
+
+References
+==========
+- Commercial version of the NTFS driver for Linux.
+	https://www.paragon-software.com/home/ntfs-linux-professional/
+
+- Direct e-mail address for feedback and requests on the NTFS3 implementation.
+	almaz.alexandrovich@paragon-software.com
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2-online-filecheck.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2-online-filecheck.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2257bb53e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2-online-filecheck.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================================
+OCFS2 file system - online file check
+=====================================
+
+This document will describe OCFS2 online file check feature.
+
+Introduction
+============
+OCFS2 is often used in high-availability systems. However, OCFS2 usually
+converts the filesystem to read-only when encounters an error. This may not be
+necessary, since turning the filesystem read-only would affect other running
+processes as well, decreasing availability.
+Then, a mount option (errors=continue) is introduced, which would return the
+-EIO errno to the calling process and terminate further processing so that the
+filesystem is not corrupted further. The filesystem is not converted to
+read-only, and the problematic file's inode number is reported in the kernel
+log. The user can try to check/fix this file via online filecheck feature.
+
+Scope
+=====
+This effort is to check/fix small issues which may hinder day-to-day operations
+of a cluster filesystem by turning the filesystem read-only. The scope of
+checking/fixing is at the file level, initially for regular files and eventually
+to all files (including system files) of the filesystem.
+
+In case of directory to file links is incorrect, the directory inode is
+reported as erroneous.
+
+This feature is not suited for extravagant checks which involve dependency of
+other components of the filesystem, such as but not limited to, checking if the
+bits for file blocks in the allocation has been set. In case of such an error,
+the offline fsck should/would be recommended.
+
+Finally, such an operation/feature should not be automated lest the filesystem
+may end up with more damage than before the repair attempt. So, this has to
+be performed using user interaction and consent.
+
+User interface
+==============
+When there are errors in the OCFS2 filesystem, they are usually accompanied
+by the inode number which caused the error. This inode number would be the
+input to check/fix the file.
+
+There is a sysfs directory for each OCFS2 file system mounting::
+
+  /sys/fs/ocfs2/<devname>/filecheck
+
+Here, <devname> indicates the name of OCFS2 volume device which has been already
+mounted. The file above would accept inode numbers. This could be used to
+communicate with kernel space, tell which file(inode number) will be checked or
+fixed. Currently, three operations are supported, which includes checking
+inode, fixing inode and setting the size of result record history.
+
+1. If you want to know what error exactly happened to <inode> before fixing, do::
+
+    # echo "<inode>" > /sys/fs/ocfs2/<devname>/filecheck/check
+    # cat /sys/fs/ocfs2/<devname>/filecheck/check
+
+The output is like this::
+
+    INO		DONE	ERROR
+    39502		1	GENERATION
+
+    <INO> lists the inode numbers.
+    <DONE> indicates whether the operation has been finished.
+    <ERROR> says what kind of errors was found. For the detailed error numbers,
+    please refer to the file linux/fs/ocfs2/filecheck.h.
+
+2. If you determine to fix this inode, do::
+
+    # echo "<inode>" > /sys/fs/ocfs2/<devname>/filecheck/fix
+    # cat /sys/fs/ocfs2/<devname>/filecheck/fix
+
+The output is like this:::
+
+    INO		DONE	ERROR
+    39502		1	SUCCESS
+
+This time, the <ERROR> column indicates whether this fix is successful or not.
+
+3. The record cache is used to store the history of check/fix results. It's
+default size is 10, and can be adjust between the range of 10 ~ 100. You can
+adjust the size like this::
+
+  # echo "<size>" > /sys/fs/ocfs2/<devname>/filecheck/set
+
+Fixing stuff
+============
+On receiving the inode, the filesystem would read the inode and the
+file metadata. In case of errors, the filesystem would fix the errors
+and report the problems it fixed in the kernel log. As a precautionary measure,
+the inode must first be checked for errors before performing a final fix.
+
+The inode and the result history will be maintained temporarily in a
+small linked list buffer which would contain the last (N) inodes
+fixed/checked, the detailed errors which were fixed/checked are printed in the
+kernel log.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..42ca9a3d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================
+OCFS2 filesystem
+================
+
+OCFS2 is a general purpose extent based shared disk cluster file
+system with many similarities to ext3. It supports 64 bit inode
+numbers, and has automatically extending metadata groups which may
+also make it attractive for non-clustered use.
+
+You'll want to install the ocfs2-tools package in order to at least
+get "mount.ocfs2" and "ocfs2_hb_ctl".
+
+Project web page:    http://ocfs2.wiki.kernel.org
+Tools git tree:      https://github.com/markfasheh/ocfs2-tools
+OCFS2 mailing lists: https://oss.oracle.com/projects/ocfs2/mailman/
+
+All code copyright 2005 Oracle except when otherwise noted.
+
+Credits
+=======
+
+Lots of code taken from ext3 and other projects.
+
+Authors in alphabetical order:
+
+- Joel Becker   <joel.becker@oracle.com>
+- Zach Brown    <zach.brown@oracle.com>
+- Mark Fasheh   <mfasheh@suse.com>
+- Kurt Hackel   <kurt.hackel@oracle.com>
+- Tao Ma        <tao.ma@oracle.com>
+- Sunil Mushran <sunil.mushran@oracle.com>
+- Manish Singh  <manish.singh@oracle.com>
+- Tiger Yang    <tiger.yang@oracle.com>
+
+Caveats
+=======
+Features which OCFS2 does not support yet:
+
+	- Directory change notification (F_NOTIFY)
+	- Distributed Caching (F_SETLEASE/F_GETLEASE/break_lease)
+
+Mount options
+=============
+
+OCFS2 supports the following mount options:
+
+(*) == default
+
+======================= ========================================================
+barrier=1		This enables/disables barriers. barrier=0 disables it,
+			barrier=1 enables it.
+errors=remount-ro(*)	Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
+errors=panic		Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
+intr		(*)	Allow signals to interrupt cluster operations.
+nointr			Do not allow signals to interrupt cluster
+			operations.
+noatime			Do not update access time.
+relatime(*)		Update atime if the previous atime is older than
+			mtime or ctime
+strictatime		Always update atime, but the minimum update interval
+			is specified by atime_quantum.
+atime_quantum=60(*)	OCFS2 will not update atime unless this number
+			of seconds has passed since the last update.
+			Set to zero to always update atime. This option need
+			work with strictatime.
+data=ordered	(*)	All data are forced directly out to the main file
+			system prior to its metadata being committed to the
+			journal.
+data=writeback		Data ordering is not preserved, data may be written
+			into the main file system after its metadata has been
+			committed to the journal.
+preferred_slot=0(*)	During mount, try to use this filesystem slot first. If
+			it is in use by another node, the first empty one found
+			will be chosen. Invalid values will be ignored.
+commit=nrsec	(*)	Ocfs2 can be told to sync all its data and metadata
+			every 'nrsec' seconds. The default value is 5 seconds.
+			This means that if you lose your power, you will lose
+			as much as the latest 5 seconds of work (your
+			filesystem will not be damaged though, thanks to the
+			journaling).  This default value (or any low value)
+			will hurt performance, but it's good for data-safety.
+			Setting it to 0 will have the same effect as leaving
+			it at the default (5 seconds).
+			Setting it to very large values will improve
+			performance.
+localalloc=8(*)		Allows custom localalloc size in MB. If the value is too
+			large, the fs will silently revert it to the default.
+localflocks		This disables cluster aware flock.
+inode64			Indicates that Ocfs2 is allowed to create inodes at
+			any location in the filesystem, including those which
+			will result in inode numbers occupying more than 32
+			bits of significance.
+user_xattr	(*)	Enables Extended User Attributes.
+nouser_xattr		Disables Extended User Attributes.
+acl			Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
+noacl		(*)	Disables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
+resv_level=2	(*)	Set how aggressive allocation reservations will be.
+			Valid values are between 0 (reservations off) to 8
+			(maximum space for reservations).
+dir_resv_level=	(*)	By default, directory reservations will scale with file
+			reservations - users should rarely need to change this
+			value. If allocation reservations are turned off, this
+			option will have no effect.
+coherency=full  (*)	Disallow concurrent O_DIRECT writes, cluster inode
+			lock will be taken to force other nodes drop cache,
+			therefore full cluster coherency is guaranteed even
+			for O_DIRECT writes.
+coherency=buffered	Allow concurrent O_DIRECT writes without EX lock among
+			nodes, which gains high performance at risk of getting
+			stale data on other nodes.
+journal_async_commit	Commit block can be written to disk without waiting
+			for descriptor blocks. If enabled older kernels cannot
+			mount the device. This will enable 'journal_checksum'
+			internally.
+======================= ========================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a104c25b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================================
+Optimized MPEG Filesystem (OMFS)
+================================
+
+Overview
+========
+
+OMFS is a filesystem created by SonicBlue for use in the ReplayTV DVR
+and Rio Karma MP3 player.  The filesystem is extent-based, utilizing
+block sizes from 2k to 8k, with hash-based directories.  This
+filesystem driver may be used to read and write disks from these
+devices.
+
+Note, it is not recommended that this FS be used in place of a general
+filesystem for your own streaming media device.  Native Linux filesystems
+will likely perform better.
+
+More information is available at:
+
+    http://linux-karma.sf.net/
+
+Various utilities, including mkomfs and omfsck, are included with
+omfsprogs, available at:
+
+    https://bobcopeland.com/karma/
+
+Instructions are included in its README.
+
+Options
+=======
+
+OMFS supports the following mount-time options:
+
+    ============   ========================================
+    uid=n          make all files owned by specified user
+    gid=n          make all files owned by specified group
+    umask=xxx      set permission umask to xxx
+    fmask=xxx      set umask to xxx for files
+    dmask=xxx      set umask to xxx for directories
+    ============   ========================================
+
+Disk format
+===========
+
+OMFS discriminates between "sysblocks" and normal data blocks.  The sysblock
+group consists of super block information, file metadata, directory structures,
+and extents.  Each sysblock has a header containing CRCs of the entire
+sysblock, and may be mirrored in successive blocks on the disk.  A sysblock may
+have a smaller size than a data block, but since they are both addressed by the
+same 64-bit block number, any remaining space in the smaller sysblock is
+unused.
+
+Sysblock header information::
+
+    struct omfs_header {
+	    __be64 h_self;                  /* FS block where this is located */
+	    __be32 h_body_size;             /* size of useful data after header */
+	    __be16 h_crc;                   /* crc-ccitt of body_size bytes */
+	    char h_fill1[2];
+	    u8 h_version;                   /* version, always 1 */
+	    char h_type;                    /* OMFS_INODE_X */
+	    u8 h_magic;                     /* OMFS_IMAGIC */
+	    u8 h_check_xor;                 /* XOR of header bytes before this */
+	    __be32 h_fill2;
+    };
+
+Files and directories are both represented by omfs_inode::
+
+    struct omfs_inode {
+	    struct omfs_header i_head;      /* header */
+	    __be64 i_parent;                /* parent containing this inode */
+	    __be64 i_sibling;               /* next inode in hash bucket */
+	    __be64 i_ctime;                 /* ctime, in milliseconds */
+	    char i_fill1[35];
+	    char i_type;                    /* OMFS_[DIR,FILE] */
+	    __be32 i_fill2;
+	    char i_fill3[64];
+	    char i_name[OMFS_NAMELEN];      /* filename */
+	    __be64 i_size;                  /* size of file, in bytes */
+    };
+
+Directories in OMFS are implemented as a large hash table.  Filenames are
+hashed then prepended into the bucket list beginning at OMFS_DIR_START.
+Lookup requires hashing the filename, then seeking across i_sibling pointers
+until a match is found on i_name.  Empty buckets are represented by block
+pointers with all-1s (~0).
+
+A file is an omfs_inode structure followed by an extent table beginning at
+OMFS_EXTENT_START::
+
+    struct omfs_extent_entry {
+	    __be64 e_cluster;               /* start location of a set of blocks */
+	    __be64 e_blocks;                /* number of blocks after e_cluster */
+    };
+
+    struct omfs_extent {
+	    __be64 e_next;                  /* next extent table location */
+	    __be32 e_extent_count;          /* total # extents in this table */
+	    __be32 e_fill;
+	    struct omfs_extent_entry e_entry;       /* start of extent entries */
+    };
+
+Each extent holds the block offset followed by number of blocks allocated to
+the extent.  The final extent in each table is a terminator with e_cluster
+being ~0 and e_blocks being ones'-complement of the total number of blocks
+in the table.
+
+If this table overflows, a continuation inode is written and pointed to by
+e_next.  These have a header but lack the rest of the inode structure.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/orangefs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/orangefs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..463e37694
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/orangefs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,556 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+========
+ORANGEFS
+========
+
+OrangeFS is an LGPL userspace scale-out parallel storage system. It is ideal
+for large storage problems faced by HPC, BigData, Streaming Video,
+Genomics, Bioinformatics.
+
+Orangefs, originally called PVFS, was first developed in 1993 by
+Walt Ligon and Eric Blumer as a parallel file system for Parallel
+Virtual Machine (PVM) as part of a NASA grant to study the I/O patterns
+of parallel programs.
+
+Orangefs features include:
+
+  * Distributes file data among multiple file servers
+  * Supports simultaneous access by multiple clients
+  * Stores file data and metadata on servers using local file system
+    and access methods
+  * Userspace implementation is easy to install and maintain
+  * Direct MPI support
+  * Stateless
+
+
+Mailing List Archives
+=====================
+
+http://lists.orangefs.org/pipermail/devel_lists.orangefs.org/
+
+
+Mailing List Submissions
+========================
+
+devel@lists.orangefs.org
+
+
+Documentation
+=============
+
+http://www.orangefs.org/documentation/
+
+Running ORANGEFS On a Single Server
+===================================
+
+OrangeFS is usually run in large installations with multiple servers and
+clients, but a complete filesystem can be run on a single machine for
+development and testing.
+
+On Fedora, install orangefs and orangefs-server::
+
+    dnf -y install orangefs orangefs-server
+
+There is an example server configuration file in
+/etc/orangefs/orangefs.conf.  Change localhost to your hostname if
+necessary.
+
+To generate a filesystem to run xfstests against, see below.
+
+There is an example client configuration file in /etc/pvfs2tab.  It is a
+single line.  Uncomment it and change the hostname if necessary.  This
+controls clients which use libpvfs2.  This does not control the
+pvfs2-client-core.
+
+Create the filesystem::
+
+    pvfs2-server -f /etc/orangefs/orangefs.conf
+
+Start the server::
+
+    systemctl start orangefs-server
+
+Test the server::
+
+    pvfs2-ping -m /pvfsmnt
+
+Start the client.  The module must be compiled in or loaded before this
+point::
+
+    systemctl start orangefs-client
+
+Mount the filesystem::
+
+    mount -t pvfs2 tcp://localhost:3334/orangefs /pvfsmnt
+
+Userspace Filesystem Source
+===========================
+
+http://www.orangefs.org/download
+
+Orangefs versions prior to 2.9.3 would not be compatible with the
+upstream version of the kernel client.
+
+
+Building ORANGEFS on a Single Server
+====================================
+
+Where OrangeFS cannot be installed from distribution packages, it may be
+built from source.
+
+You can omit --prefix if you don't care that things are sprinkled around
+in /usr/local.  As of version 2.9.6, OrangeFS uses Berkeley DB by
+default, we will probably be changing the default to LMDB soon.
+
+::
+
+    ./configure --prefix=/opt/ofs --with-db-backend=lmdb --disable-usrint
+
+    make
+
+    make install
+
+Create an orangefs config file by running pvfs2-genconfig and
+specifying a target config file. Pvfs2-genconfig will prompt you
+through. Generally it works fine to take the defaults, but you
+should use your server's hostname, rather than "localhost" when
+it comes to that question::
+
+    /opt/ofs/bin/pvfs2-genconfig /etc/pvfs2.conf
+
+Create an /etc/pvfs2tab file (localhost is fine)::
+
+    echo tcp://localhost:3334/orangefs /pvfsmnt pvfs2 defaults,noauto 0 0 > \
+	/etc/pvfs2tab
+
+Create the mount point you specified in the tab file if needed::
+
+    mkdir /pvfsmnt
+
+Bootstrap the server::
+
+    /opt/ofs/sbin/pvfs2-server -f /etc/pvfs2.conf
+
+Start the server::
+
+    /opt/ofs/sbin/pvfs2-server /etc/pvfs2.conf
+
+Now the server should be running. Pvfs2-ls is a simple
+test to verify that the server is running::
+
+    /opt/ofs/bin/pvfs2-ls /pvfsmnt
+
+If stuff seems to be working, load the kernel module and
+turn on the client core::
+
+    /opt/ofs/sbin/pvfs2-client -p /opt/ofs/sbin/pvfs2-client-core
+
+Mount your filesystem::
+
+    mount -t pvfs2 tcp://`hostname`:3334/orangefs /pvfsmnt
+
+
+Running xfstests
+================
+
+It is useful to use a scratch filesystem with xfstests.  This can be
+done with only one server.
+
+Make a second copy of the FileSystem section in the server configuration
+file, which is /etc/orangefs/orangefs.conf.  Change the Name to scratch.
+Change the ID to something other than the ID of the first FileSystem
+section (2 is usually a good choice).
+
+Then there are two FileSystem sections: orangefs and scratch.
+
+This change should be made before creating the filesystem.
+
+::
+
+    pvfs2-server -f /etc/orangefs/orangefs.conf
+
+To run xfstests, create /etc/xfsqa.config::
+
+    TEST_DIR=/orangefs
+    TEST_DEV=tcp://localhost:3334/orangefs
+    SCRATCH_MNT=/scratch
+    SCRATCH_DEV=tcp://localhost:3334/scratch
+
+Then xfstests can be run::
+
+    ./check -pvfs2
+
+
+Options
+=======
+
+The following mount options are accepted:
+
+  acl
+    Allow the use of Access Control Lists on files and directories.
+
+  intr
+    Some operations between the kernel client and the user space
+    filesystem can be interruptible, such as changes in debug levels
+    and the setting of tunable parameters.
+
+  local_lock
+    Enable posix locking from the perspective of "this" kernel. The
+    default file_operations lock action is to return ENOSYS. Posix
+    locking kicks in if the filesystem is mounted with -o local_lock.
+    Distributed locking is being worked on for the future.
+
+
+Debugging
+=========
+
+If you want the debug (GOSSIP) statements in a particular
+source file (inode.c for example) go to syslog::
+
+  echo inode > /sys/kernel/debug/orangefs/kernel-debug
+
+No debugging (the default)::
+
+  echo none > /sys/kernel/debug/orangefs/kernel-debug
+
+Debugging from several source files::
+
+  echo inode,dir > /sys/kernel/debug/orangefs/kernel-debug
+
+All debugging::
+
+  echo all > /sys/kernel/debug/orangefs/kernel-debug
+
+Get a list of all debugging keywords::
+
+  cat /sys/kernel/debug/orangefs/debug-help
+
+
+Protocol between Kernel Module and Userspace
+============================================
+
+Orangefs is a user space filesystem and an associated kernel module.
+We'll just refer to the user space part of Orangefs as "userspace"
+from here on out. Orangefs descends from PVFS, and userspace code
+still uses PVFS for function and variable names. Userspace typedefs
+many of the important structures. Function and variable names in
+the kernel module have been transitioned to "orangefs", and The Linux
+Coding Style avoids typedefs, so kernel module structures that
+correspond to userspace structures are not typedefed.
+
+The kernel module implements a pseudo device that userspace
+can read from and write to. Userspace can also manipulate the
+kernel module through the pseudo device with ioctl.
+
+The Bufmap
+----------
+
+At startup userspace allocates two page-size-aligned (posix_memalign)
+mlocked memory buffers, one is used for IO and one is used for readdir
+operations. The IO buffer is 41943040 bytes and the readdir buffer is
+4194304 bytes. Each buffer contains logical chunks, or partitions, and
+a pointer to each buffer is added to its own PVFS_dev_map_desc structure
+which also describes its total size, as well as the size and number of
+the partitions.
+
+A pointer to the IO buffer's PVFS_dev_map_desc structure is sent to a
+mapping routine in the kernel module with an ioctl. The structure is
+copied from user space to kernel space with copy_from_user and is used
+to initialize the kernel module's "bufmap" (struct orangefs_bufmap), which
+then contains:
+
+  * refcnt
+    - a reference counter
+  * desc_size - PVFS2_BUFMAP_DEFAULT_DESC_SIZE (4194304) - the IO buffer's
+    partition size, which represents the filesystem's block size and
+    is used for s_blocksize in super blocks.
+  * desc_count - PVFS2_BUFMAP_DEFAULT_DESC_COUNT (10) - the number of
+    partitions in the IO buffer.
+  * desc_shift - log2(desc_size), used for s_blocksize_bits in super blocks.
+  * total_size - the total size of the IO buffer.
+  * page_count - the number of 4096 byte pages in the IO buffer.
+  * page_array - a pointer to ``page_count * (sizeof(struct page*))`` bytes
+    of kcalloced memory. This memory is used as an array of pointers
+    to each of the pages in the IO buffer through a call to get_user_pages.
+  * desc_array - a pointer to ``desc_count * (sizeof(struct orangefs_bufmap_desc))``
+    bytes of kcalloced memory. This memory is further intialized:
+
+      user_desc is the kernel's copy of the IO buffer's ORANGEFS_dev_map_desc
+      structure. user_desc->ptr points to the IO buffer.
+
+      ::
+
+	pages_per_desc = bufmap->desc_size / PAGE_SIZE
+	offset = 0
+
+        bufmap->desc_array[0].page_array = &bufmap->page_array[offset]
+        bufmap->desc_array[0].array_count = pages_per_desc = 1024
+        bufmap->desc_array[0].uaddr = (user_desc->ptr) + (0 * 1024 * 4096)
+        offset += 1024
+                           .
+                           .
+                           .
+        bufmap->desc_array[9].page_array = &bufmap->page_array[offset]
+        bufmap->desc_array[9].array_count = pages_per_desc = 1024
+        bufmap->desc_array[9].uaddr = (user_desc->ptr) +
+                                               (9 * 1024 * 4096)
+        offset += 1024
+
+  * buffer_index_array - a desc_count sized array of ints, used to
+    indicate which of the IO buffer's partitions are available to use.
+  * buffer_index_lock - a spinlock to protect buffer_index_array during update.
+  * readdir_index_array - a five (ORANGEFS_READDIR_DEFAULT_DESC_COUNT) element
+    int array used to indicate which of the readdir buffer's partitions are
+    available to use.
+  * readdir_index_lock - a spinlock to protect readdir_index_array during
+    update.
+
+Operations
+----------
+
+The kernel module builds an "op" (struct orangefs_kernel_op_s) when it
+needs to communicate with userspace. Part of the op contains the "upcall"
+which expresses the request to userspace. Part of the op eventually
+contains the "downcall" which expresses the results of the request.
+
+The slab allocator is used to keep a cache of op structures handy.
+
+At init time the kernel module defines and initializes a request list
+and an in_progress hash table to keep track of all the ops that are
+in flight at any given time.
+
+Ops are stateful:
+
+ * unknown
+	    - op was just initialized
+ * waiting
+	    - op is on request_list (upward bound)
+ * inprogr
+	    - op is in progress (waiting for downcall)
+ * serviced
+	    - op has matching downcall; ok
+ * purged
+	    - op has to start a timer since client-core
+              exited uncleanly before servicing op
+ * given up
+	    - submitter has given up waiting for it
+
+When some arbitrary userspace program needs to perform a
+filesystem operation on Orangefs (readdir, I/O, create, whatever)
+an op structure is initialized and tagged with a distinguishing ID
+number. The upcall part of the op is filled out, and the op is
+passed to the "service_operation" function.
+
+Service_operation changes the op's state to "waiting", puts
+it on the request list, and signals the Orangefs file_operations.poll
+function through a wait queue. Userspace is polling the pseudo-device
+and thus becomes aware of the upcall request that needs to be read.
+
+When the Orangefs file_operations.read function is triggered, the
+request list is searched for an op that seems ready-to-process.
+The op is removed from the request list. The tag from the op and
+the filled-out upcall struct are copy_to_user'ed back to userspace.
+
+If any of these (and some additional protocol) copy_to_users fail,
+the op's state is set to "waiting" and the op is added back to
+the request list. Otherwise, the op's state is changed to "in progress",
+and the op is hashed on its tag and put onto the end of a list in the
+in_progress hash table at the index the tag hashed to.
+
+When userspace has assembled the response to the upcall, it
+writes the response, which includes the distinguishing tag, back to
+the pseudo device in a series of io_vecs. This triggers the Orangefs
+file_operations.write_iter function to find the op with the associated
+tag and remove it from the in_progress hash table. As long as the op's
+state is not "canceled" or "given up", its state is set to "serviced".
+The file_operations.write_iter function returns to the waiting vfs,
+and back to service_operation through wait_for_matching_downcall.
+
+Service operation returns to its caller with the op's downcall
+part (the response to the upcall) filled out.
+
+The "client-core" is the bridge between the kernel module and
+userspace. The client-core is a daemon. The client-core has an
+associated watchdog daemon. If the client-core is ever signaled
+to die, the watchdog daemon restarts the client-core. Even though
+the client-core is restarted "right away", there is a period of
+time during such an event that the client-core is dead. A dead client-core
+can't be triggered by the Orangefs file_operations.poll function.
+Ops that pass through service_operation during a "dead spell" can timeout
+on the wait queue and one attempt is made to recycle them. Obviously,
+if the client-core stays dead too long, the arbitrary userspace processes
+trying to use Orangefs will be negatively affected. Waiting ops
+that can't be serviced will be removed from the request list and
+have their states set to "given up". In-progress ops that can't
+be serviced will be removed from the in_progress hash table and
+have their states set to "given up".
+
+Readdir and I/O ops are atypical with respect to their payloads.
+
+  - readdir ops use the smaller of the two pre-allocated pre-partitioned
+    memory buffers. The readdir buffer is only available to userspace.
+    The kernel module obtains an index to a free partition before launching
+    a readdir op. Userspace deposits the results into the indexed partition
+    and then writes them to back to the pvfs device.
+
+  - io (read and write) ops use the larger of the two pre-allocated
+    pre-partitioned memory buffers. The IO buffer is accessible from
+    both userspace and the kernel module. The kernel module obtains an
+    index to a free partition before launching an io op. The kernel module
+    deposits write data into the indexed partition, to be consumed
+    directly by userspace. Userspace deposits the results of read
+    requests into the indexed partition, to be consumed directly
+    by the kernel module.
+
+Responses to kernel requests are all packaged in pvfs2_downcall_t
+structs. Besides a few other members, pvfs2_downcall_t contains a
+union of structs, each of which is associated with a particular
+response type.
+
+The several members outside of the union are:
+
+ ``int32_t type``
+    - type of operation.
+ ``int32_t status``
+    - return code for the operation.
+ ``int64_t trailer_size``
+    - 0 unless readdir operation.
+ ``char *trailer_buf``
+    - initialized to NULL, used during readdir operations.
+
+The appropriate member inside the union is filled out for any
+particular response.
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_FILE_IO
+    fill a pvfs2_io_response_t
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_LOOKUP
+    fill a PVFS_object_kref
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_CREATE
+    fill a PVFS_object_kref
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_SYMLINK
+    fill a PVFS_object_kref
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_GETATTR
+    fill in a PVFS_sys_attr_s (tons of stuff the kernel doesn't need)
+    fill in a string with the link target when the object is a symlink.
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_MKDIR
+    fill a PVFS_object_kref
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_STATFS
+    fill a pvfs2_statfs_response_t with useless info <g>. It is hard for
+    us to know, in a timely fashion, these statistics about our
+    distributed network filesystem.
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_FS_MOUNT
+    fill a pvfs2_fs_mount_response_t which is just like a PVFS_object_kref
+    except its members are in a different order and "__pad1" is replaced
+    with "id".
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_GETXATTR
+    fill a pvfs2_getxattr_response_t
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_LISTXATTR
+    fill a pvfs2_listxattr_response_t
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_PARAM
+    fill a pvfs2_param_response_t
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_PERF_COUNT
+    fill a pvfs2_perf_count_response_t
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_FSKEY
+    file a pvfs2_fs_key_response_t
+
+  PVFS2_VFS_OP_READDIR
+    jamb everything needed to represent a pvfs2_readdir_response_t into
+    the readdir buffer descriptor specified in the upcall.
+
+Userspace uses writev() on /dev/pvfs2-req to pass responses to the requests
+made by the kernel side.
+
+A buffer_list containing:
+
+  - a pointer to the prepared response to the request from the
+    kernel (struct pvfs2_downcall_t).
+  - and also, in the case of a readdir request, a pointer to a
+    buffer containing descriptors for the objects in the target
+    directory.
+
+... is sent to the function (PINT_dev_write_list) which performs
+the writev.
+
+PINT_dev_write_list has a local iovec array: struct iovec io_array[10];
+
+The first four elements of io_array are initialized like this for all
+responses::
+
+  io_array[0].iov_base = address of local variable "proto_ver" (int32_t)
+  io_array[0].iov_len = sizeof(int32_t)
+
+  io_array[1].iov_base = address of global variable "pdev_magic" (int32_t)
+  io_array[1].iov_len = sizeof(int32_t)
+
+  io_array[2].iov_base = address of parameter "tag" (PVFS_id_gen_t)
+  io_array[2].iov_len = sizeof(int64_t)
+
+  io_array[3].iov_base = address of out_downcall member (pvfs2_downcall_t)
+                         of global variable vfs_request (vfs_request_t)
+  io_array[3].iov_len = sizeof(pvfs2_downcall_t)
+
+Readdir responses initialize the fifth element io_array like this::
+
+  io_array[4].iov_base = contents of member trailer_buf (char *)
+                         from out_downcall member of global variable
+                         vfs_request
+  io_array[4].iov_len = contents of member trailer_size (PVFS_size)
+                        from out_downcall member of global variable
+                        vfs_request
+
+Orangefs exploits the dcache in order to avoid sending redundant
+requests to userspace. We keep object inode attributes up-to-date with
+orangefs_inode_getattr. Orangefs_inode_getattr uses two arguments to
+help it decide whether or not to update an inode: "new" and "bypass".
+Orangefs keeps private data in an object's inode that includes a short
+timeout value, getattr_time, which allows any iteration of
+orangefs_inode_getattr to know how long it has been since the inode was
+updated. When the object is not new (new == 0) and the bypass flag is not
+set (bypass == 0) orangefs_inode_getattr returns without updating the inode
+if getattr_time has not timed out. Getattr_time is updated each time the
+inode is updated.
+
+Creation of a new object (file, dir, sym-link) includes the evaluation of
+its pathname, resulting in a negative directory entry for the object.
+A new inode is allocated and associated with the dentry, turning it from
+a negative dentry into a "productive full member of society". Orangefs
+obtains the new inode from Linux with new_inode() and associates
+the inode with the dentry by sending the pair back to Linux with
+d_instantiate().
+
+The evaluation of a pathname for an object resolves to its corresponding
+dentry. If there is no corresponding dentry, one is created for it in
+the dcache. Whenever a dentry is modified or verified Orangefs stores a
+short timeout value in the dentry's d_time, and the dentry will be trusted
+for that amount of time. Orangefs is a network filesystem, and objects
+can potentially change out-of-band with any particular Orangefs kernel module
+instance, so trusting a dentry is risky. The alternative to trusting
+dentries is to always obtain the needed information from userspace - at
+least a trip to the client-core, maybe to the servers. Obtaining information
+from a dentry is cheap, obtaining it from userspace is relatively expensive,
+hence the motivation to use the dentry when possible.
+
+The timeout values d_time and getattr_time are jiffy based, and the
+code is designed to avoid the jiffy-wrap problem::
+
+    "In general, if the clock may have wrapped around more than once, there
+    is no way to tell how much time has elapsed. However, if the times t1
+    and t2 are known to be fairly close, we can reliably compute the
+    difference in a way that takes into account the possibility that the
+    clock may have wrapped between times."
+
+from course notes by instructor Andy Wang
+
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4c76fda07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,626 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+Written by: Neil Brown
+Please see MAINTAINERS file for where to send questions.
+
+Overlay Filesystem
+==================
+
+This document describes a prototype for a new approach to providing
+overlay-filesystem functionality in Linux (sometimes referred to as
+union-filesystems).  An overlay-filesystem tries to present a
+filesystem which is the result over overlaying one filesystem on top
+of the other.
+
+
+Overlay objects
+---------------
+
+The overlay filesystem approach is 'hybrid', because the objects that
+appear in the filesystem do not always appear to belong to that filesystem.
+In many cases, an object accessed in the union will be indistinguishable
+from accessing the corresponding object from the original filesystem.
+This is most obvious from the 'st_dev' field returned by stat(2).
+
+While directories will report an st_dev from the overlay-filesystem,
+non-directory objects may report an st_dev from the lower filesystem or
+upper filesystem that is providing the object.  Similarly st_ino will
+only be unique when combined with st_dev, and both of these can change
+over the lifetime of a non-directory object.  Many applications and
+tools ignore these values and will not be affected.
+
+In the special case of all overlay layers on the same underlying
+filesystem, all objects will report an st_dev from the overlay
+filesystem and st_ino from the underlying filesystem.  This will
+make the overlay mount more compliant with filesystem scanners and
+overlay objects will be distinguishable from the corresponding
+objects in the original filesystem.
+
+On 64bit systems, even if all overlay layers are not on the same
+underlying filesystem, the same compliant behavior could be achieved
+with the "xino" feature.  The "xino" feature composes a unique object
+identifier from the real object st_ino and an underlying fsid index.
+The "xino" feature uses the high inode number bits for fsid, because the
+underlying filesystems rarely use the high inode number bits.  In case
+the underlying inode number does overflow into the high xino bits, overlay
+filesystem will fall back to the non xino behavior for that inode.
+
+The "xino" feature can be enabled with the "-o xino=on" overlay mount option.
+If all underlying filesystems support NFS file handles, the value of st_ino
+for overlay filesystem objects is not only unique, but also persistent over
+the lifetime of the filesystem.  The "-o xino=auto" overlay mount option
+enables the "xino" feature only if the persistent st_ino requirement is met.
+
+The following table summarizes what can be expected in different overlay
+configurations.
+
+Inode properties
+````````````````
+
++--------------+------------+------------+-----------------+----------------+
+|Configuration | Persistent | Uniform    | st_ino == d_ino | d_ino == i_ino |
+|              | st_ino     | st_dev     |                 | [*]            |
++==============+=====+======+=====+======+========+========+========+=======+
+|              | dir | !dir | dir | !dir |  dir   +  !dir  |  dir   | !dir  |
++--------------+-----+------+-----+------+--------+--------+--------+-------+
+| All layers   |  Y  |  Y   |  Y  |  Y   |  Y     |   Y    |  Y     |  Y    |
+| on same fs   |     |      |     |      |        |        |        |       |
++--------------+-----+------+-----+------+--------+--------+--------+-------+
+| Layers not   |  N  |  N   |  Y  |  N   |  N     |   Y    |  N     |  Y    |
+| on same fs,  |     |      |     |      |        |        |        |       |
+| xino=off     |     |      |     |      |        |        |        |       |
++--------------+-----+------+-----+------+--------+--------+--------+-------+
+| xino=on/auto |  Y  |  Y   |  Y  |  Y   |  Y     |   Y    |  Y     |  Y    |
++--------------+-----+------+-----+------+--------+--------+--------+-------+
+| xino=on/auto,|  N  |  N   |  Y  |  N   |  N     |   Y    |  N     |  Y    |
+| ino overflow |     |      |     |      |        |        |        |       |
++--------------+-----+------+-----+------+--------+--------+--------+-------+
+
+[*] nfsd v3 readdirplus verifies d_ino == i_ino. i_ino is exposed via several
+/proc files, such as /proc/locks and /proc/self/fdinfo/<fd> of an inotify
+file descriptor.
+
+Upper and Lower
+---------------
+
+An overlay filesystem combines two filesystems - an 'upper' filesystem
+and a 'lower' filesystem.  When a name exists in both filesystems, the
+object in the 'upper' filesystem is visible while the object in the
+'lower' filesystem is either hidden or, in the case of directories,
+merged with the 'upper' object.
+
+It would be more correct to refer to an upper and lower 'directory
+tree' rather than 'filesystem' as it is quite possible for both
+directory trees to be in the same filesystem and there is no
+requirement that the root of a filesystem be given for either upper or
+lower.
+
+A wide range of filesystems supported by Linux can be the lower filesystem,
+but not all filesystems that are mountable by Linux have the features
+needed for OverlayFS to work.  The lower filesystem does not need to be
+writable.  The lower filesystem can even be another overlayfs.  The upper
+filesystem will normally be writable and if it is it must support the
+creation of trusted.* and/or user.* extended attributes, and must provide
+valid d_type in readdir responses, so NFS is not suitable.
+
+A read-only overlay of two read-only filesystems may use any
+filesystem type.
+
+Directories
+-----------
+
+Overlaying mainly involves directories.  If a given name appears in both
+upper and lower filesystems and refers to a non-directory in either,
+then the lower object is hidden - the name refers only to the upper
+object.
+
+Where both upper and lower objects are directories, a merged directory
+is formed.
+
+At mount time, the two directories given as mount options "lowerdir" and
+"upperdir" are combined into a merged directory:
+
+  mount -t overlay overlay -olowerdir=/lower,upperdir=/upper,\
+  workdir=/work /merged
+
+The "workdir" needs to be an empty directory on the same filesystem
+as upperdir.
+
+Then whenever a lookup is requested in such a merged directory, the
+lookup is performed in each actual directory and the combined result
+is cached in the dentry belonging to the overlay filesystem.  If both
+actual lookups find directories, both are stored and a merged
+directory is created, otherwise only one is stored: the upper if it
+exists, else the lower.
+
+Only the lists of names from directories are merged.  Other content
+such as metadata and extended attributes are reported for the upper
+directory only.  These attributes of the lower directory are hidden.
+
+whiteouts and opaque directories
+--------------------------------
+
+In order to support rm and rmdir without changing the lower
+filesystem, an overlay filesystem needs to record in the upper filesystem
+that files have been removed.  This is done using whiteouts and opaque
+directories (non-directories are always opaque).
+
+A whiteout is created as a character device with 0/0 device number.
+When a whiteout is found in the upper level of a merged directory, any
+matching name in the lower level is ignored, and the whiteout itself
+is also hidden.
+
+A directory is made opaque by setting the xattr "trusted.overlay.opaque"
+to "y".  Where the upper filesystem contains an opaque directory, any
+directory in the lower filesystem with the same name is ignored.
+
+readdir
+-------
+
+When a 'readdir' request is made on a merged directory, the upper and
+lower directories are each read and the name lists merged in the
+obvious way (upper is read first, then lower - entries that already
+exist are not re-added).  This merged name list is cached in the
+'struct file' and so remains as long as the file is kept open.  If the
+directory is opened and read by two processes at the same time, they
+will each have separate caches.  A seekdir to the start of the
+directory (offset 0) followed by a readdir will cause the cache to be
+discarded and rebuilt.
+
+This means that changes to the merged directory do not appear while a
+directory is being read.  This is unlikely to be noticed by many
+programs.
+
+seek offsets are assigned sequentially when the directories are read.
+Thus if
+
+  - read part of a directory
+  - remember an offset, and close the directory
+  - re-open the directory some time later
+  - seek to the remembered offset
+
+there may be little correlation between the old and new locations in
+the list of filenames, particularly if anything has changed in the
+directory.
+
+Readdir on directories that are not merged is simply handled by the
+underlying directory (upper or lower).
+
+renaming directories
+--------------------
+
+When renaming a directory that is on the lower layer or merged (i.e. the
+directory was not created on the upper layer to start with) overlayfs can
+handle it in two different ways:
+
+1. return EXDEV error: this error is returned by rename(2) when trying to
+   move a file or directory across filesystem boundaries.  Hence
+   applications are usually prepared to hande this error (mv(1) for example
+   recursively copies the directory tree).  This is the default behavior.
+
+2. If the "redirect_dir" feature is enabled, then the directory will be
+   copied up (but not the contents).  Then the "trusted.overlay.redirect"
+   extended attribute is set to the path of the original location from the
+   root of the overlay.  Finally the directory is moved to the new
+   location.
+
+There are several ways to tune the "redirect_dir" feature.
+
+Kernel config options:
+
+- OVERLAY_FS_REDIRECT_DIR:
+    If this is enabled, then redirect_dir is turned on by  default.
+- OVERLAY_FS_REDIRECT_ALWAYS_FOLLOW:
+    If this is enabled, then redirects are always followed by default. Enabling
+    this results in a less secure configuration.  Enable this option only when
+    worried about backward compatibility with kernels that have the redirect_dir
+    feature and follow redirects even if turned off.
+
+Module options (can also be changed through /sys/module/overlay/parameters/):
+
+- "redirect_dir=BOOL":
+    See OVERLAY_FS_REDIRECT_DIR kernel config option above.
+- "redirect_always_follow=BOOL":
+    See OVERLAY_FS_REDIRECT_ALWAYS_FOLLOW kernel config option above.
+- "redirect_max=NUM":
+    The maximum number of bytes in an absolute redirect (default is 256).
+
+Mount options:
+
+- "redirect_dir=on":
+    Redirects are enabled.
+- "redirect_dir=follow":
+    Redirects are not created, but followed.
+- "redirect_dir=off":
+    Redirects are not created and only followed if "redirect_always_follow"
+    feature is enabled in the kernel/module config.
+- "redirect_dir=nofollow":
+    Redirects are not created and not followed (equivalent to "redirect_dir=off"
+    if "redirect_always_follow" feature is not enabled).
+
+When the NFS export feature is enabled, every copied up directory is
+indexed by the file handle of the lower inode and a file handle of the
+upper directory is stored in a "trusted.overlay.upper" extended attribute
+on the index entry.  On lookup of a merged directory, if the upper
+directory does not match the file handle stores in the index, that is an
+indication that multiple upper directories may be redirected to the same
+lower directory.  In that case, lookup returns an error and warns about
+a possible inconsistency.
+
+Because lower layer redirects cannot be verified with the index, enabling
+NFS export support on an overlay filesystem with no upper layer requires
+turning off redirect follow (e.g. "redirect_dir=nofollow").
+
+
+Non-directories
+---------------
+
+Objects that are not directories (files, symlinks, device-special
+files etc.) are presented either from the upper or lower filesystem as
+appropriate.  When a file in the lower filesystem is accessed in a way
+the requires write-access, such as opening for write access, changing
+some metadata etc., the file is first copied from the lower filesystem
+to the upper filesystem (copy_up).  Note that creating a hard-link
+also requires copy_up, though of course creation of a symlink does
+not.
+
+The copy_up may turn out to be unnecessary, for example if the file is
+opened for read-write but the data is not modified.
+
+The copy_up process first makes sure that the containing directory
+exists in the upper filesystem - creating it and any parents as
+necessary.  It then creates the object with the same metadata (owner,
+mode, mtime, symlink-target etc.) and then if the object is a file, the
+data is copied from the lower to the upper filesystem.  Finally any
+extended attributes are copied up.
+
+Once the copy_up is complete, the overlay filesystem simply
+provides direct access to the newly created file in the upper
+filesystem - future operations on the file are barely noticed by the
+overlay filesystem (though an operation on the name of the file such as
+rename or unlink will of course be noticed and handled).
+
+
+Permission model
+----------------
+
+Permission checking in the overlay filesystem follows these principles:
+
+ 1) permission check SHOULD return the same result before and after copy up
+
+ 2) task creating the overlay mount MUST NOT gain additional privileges
+
+ 3) non-mounting task MAY gain additional privileges through the overlay,
+ compared to direct access on underlying lower or upper filesystems
+
+This is achieved by performing two permission checks on each access
+
+ a) check if current task is allowed access based on local DAC (owner,
+    group, mode and posix acl), as well as MAC checks
+
+ b) check if mounting task would be allowed real operation on lower or
+    upper layer based on underlying filesystem permissions, again including
+    MAC checks
+
+Check (a) ensures consistency (1) since owner, group, mode and posix acls
+are copied up.  On the other hand it can result in server enforced
+permissions (used by NFS, for example) being ignored (3).
+
+Check (b) ensures that no task gains permissions to underlying layers that
+the mounting task does not have (2).  This also means that it is possible
+to create setups where the consistency rule (1) does not hold; normally,
+however, the mounting task will have sufficient privileges to perform all
+operations.
+
+Another way to demonstrate this model is drawing parallels between
+
+  mount -t overlay overlay -olowerdir=/lower,upperdir=/upper,... /merged
+
+and
+
+  cp -a /lower /upper
+  mount --bind /upper /merged
+
+The resulting access permissions should be the same.  The difference is in
+the time of copy (on-demand vs. up-front).
+
+
+Multiple lower layers
+---------------------
+
+Multiple lower layers can now be given using the colon (":") as a
+separator character between the directory names.  For example:
+
+  mount -t overlay overlay -olowerdir=/lower1:/lower2:/lower3 /merged
+
+As the example shows, "upperdir=" and "workdir=" may be omitted.  In
+that case the overlay will be read-only.
+
+The specified lower directories will be stacked beginning from the
+rightmost one and going left.  In the above example lower1 will be the
+top, lower2 the middle and lower3 the bottom layer.
+
+
+Metadata only copy up
+---------------------
+
+When metadata only copy up feature is enabled, overlayfs will only copy
+up metadata (as opposed to whole file), when a metadata specific operation
+like chown/chmod is performed. Full file will be copied up later when
+file is opened for WRITE operation.
+
+In other words, this is delayed data copy up operation and data is copied
+up when there is a need to actually modify data.
+
+There are multiple ways to enable/disable this feature. A config option
+CONFIG_OVERLAY_FS_METACOPY can be set/unset to enable/disable this feature
+by default. Or one can enable/disable it at module load time with module
+parameter metacopy=on/off. Lastly, there is also a per mount option
+metacopy=on/off to enable/disable this feature per mount.
+
+Do not use metacopy=on with untrusted upper/lower directories. Otherwise
+it is possible that an attacker can create a handcrafted file with
+appropriate REDIRECT and METACOPY xattrs, and gain access to file on lower
+pointed by REDIRECT. This should not be possible on local system as setting
+"trusted." xattrs will require CAP_SYS_ADMIN. But it should be possible
+for untrusted layers like from a pen drive.
+
+Note: redirect_dir={off|nofollow|follow[*]} and nfs_export=on mount options
+conflict with metacopy=on, and will result in an error.
+
+[*] redirect_dir=follow only conflicts with metacopy=on if upperdir=... is
+given.
+
+Sharing and copying layers
+--------------------------
+
+Lower layers may be shared among several overlay mounts and that is indeed
+a very common practice.  An overlay mount may use the same lower layer
+path as another overlay mount and it may use a lower layer path that is
+beneath or above the path of another overlay lower layer path.
+
+Using an upper layer path and/or a workdir path that are already used by
+another overlay mount is not allowed and may fail with EBUSY.  Using
+partially overlapping paths is not allowed and may fail with EBUSY.
+If files are accessed from two overlayfs mounts which share or overlap the
+upper layer and/or workdir path the behavior of the overlay is undefined,
+though it will not result in a crash or deadlock.
+
+Mounting an overlay using an upper layer path, where the upper layer path
+was previously used by another mounted overlay in combination with a
+different lower layer path, is allowed, unless the "inodes index" feature
+or "metadata only copy up" feature is enabled.
+
+With the "inodes index" feature, on the first time mount, an NFS file
+handle of the lower layer root directory, along with the UUID of the lower
+filesystem, are encoded and stored in the "trusted.overlay.origin" extended
+attribute on the upper layer root directory.  On subsequent mount attempts,
+the lower root directory file handle and lower filesystem UUID are compared
+to the stored origin in upper root directory.  On failure to verify the
+lower root origin, mount will fail with ESTALE.  An overlayfs mount with
+"inodes index" enabled will fail with EOPNOTSUPP if the lower filesystem
+does not support NFS export, lower filesystem does not have a valid UUID or
+if the upper filesystem does not support extended attributes.
+
+For "metadata only copy up" feature there is no verification mechanism at
+mount time. So if same upper is mounted with different set of lower, mount
+probably will succeed but expect the unexpected later on. So don't do it.
+
+It is quite a common practice to copy overlay layers to a different
+directory tree on the same or different underlying filesystem, and even
+to a different machine.  With the "inodes index" feature, trying to mount
+the copied layers will fail the verification of the lower root file handle.
+
+
+Non-standard behavior
+---------------------
+
+Current version of overlayfs can act as a mostly POSIX compliant
+filesystem.
+
+This is the list of cases that overlayfs doesn't currently handle:
+
+a) POSIX mandates updating st_atime for reads.  This is currently not
+done in the case when the file resides on a lower layer.
+
+b) If a file residing on a lower layer is opened for read-only and then
+memory mapped with MAP_SHARED, then subsequent changes to the file are not
+reflected in the memory mapping.
+
+c) If a file residing on a lower layer is being executed, then opening that
+file for write or truncating the file will not be denied with ETXTBSY.
+
+The following options allow overlayfs to act more like a standards
+compliant filesystem:
+
+1) "redirect_dir"
+
+Enabled with the mount option or module option: "redirect_dir=on" or with
+the kernel config option CONFIG_OVERLAY_FS_REDIRECT_DIR=y.
+
+If this feature is disabled, then rename(2) on a lower or merged directory
+will fail with EXDEV ("Invalid cross-device link").
+
+2) "inode index"
+
+Enabled with the mount option or module option "index=on" or with the
+kernel config option CONFIG_OVERLAY_FS_INDEX=y.
+
+If this feature is disabled and a file with multiple hard links is copied
+up, then this will "break" the link.  Changes will not be propagated to
+other names referring to the same inode.
+
+3) "xino"
+
+Enabled with the mount option "xino=auto" or "xino=on", with the module
+option "xino_auto=on" or with the kernel config option
+CONFIG_OVERLAY_FS_XINO_AUTO=y.  Also implicitly enabled by using the same
+underlying filesystem for all layers making up the overlay.
+
+If this feature is disabled or the underlying filesystem doesn't have
+enough free bits in the inode number, then overlayfs will not be able to
+guarantee that the values of st_ino and st_dev returned by stat(2) and the
+value of d_ino returned by readdir(3) will act like on a normal filesystem.
+E.g. the value of st_dev may be different for two objects in the same
+overlay filesystem and the value of st_ino for filesystem objects may not be
+persistent and could change even while the overlay filesystem is mounted, as
+summarized in the `Inode properties`_ table above.
+
+
+Changes to underlying filesystems
+---------------------------------
+
+Changes to the underlying filesystems while part of a mounted overlay
+filesystem are not allowed.  If the underlying filesystem is changed,
+the behavior of the overlay is undefined, though it will not result in
+a crash or deadlock.
+
+Offline changes, when the overlay is not mounted, are allowed to the
+upper tree.  Offline changes to the lower tree are only allowed if the
+"metadata only copy up", "inode index", "xino" and "redirect_dir" features
+have not been used.  If the lower tree is modified and any of these
+features has been used, the behavior of the overlay is undefined,
+though it will not result in a crash or deadlock.
+
+When the overlay NFS export feature is enabled, overlay filesystems
+behavior on offline changes of the underlying lower layer is different
+than the behavior when NFS export is disabled.
+
+On every copy_up, an NFS file handle of the lower inode, along with the
+UUID of the lower filesystem, are encoded and stored in an extended
+attribute "trusted.overlay.origin" on the upper inode.
+
+When the NFS export feature is enabled, a lookup of a merged directory,
+that found a lower directory at the lookup path or at the path pointed
+to by the "trusted.overlay.redirect" extended attribute, will verify
+that the found lower directory file handle and lower filesystem UUID
+match the origin file handle that was stored at copy_up time.  If a
+found lower directory does not match the stored origin, that directory
+will not be merged with the upper directory.
+
+
+
+NFS export
+----------
+
+When the underlying filesystems supports NFS export and the "nfs_export"
+feature is enabled, an overlay filesystem may be exported to NFS.
+
+With the "nfs_export" feature, on copy_up of any lower object, an index
+entry is created under the index directory.  The index entry name is the
+hexadecimal representation of the copy up origin file handle.  For a
+non-directory object, the index entry is a hard link to the upper inode.
+For a directory object, the index entry has an extended attribute
+"trusted.overlay.upper" with an encoded file handle of the upper
+directory inode.
+
+When encoding a file handle from an overlay filesystem object, the
+following rules apply:
+
+1. For a non-upper object, encode a lower file handle from lower inode
+2. For an indexed object, encode a lower file handle from copy_up origin
+3. For a pure-upper object and for an existing non-indexed upper object,
+   encode an upper file handle from upper inode
+
+The encoded overlay file handle includes:
+ - Header including path type information (e.g. lower/upper)
+ - UUID of the underlying filesystem
+ - Underlying filesystem encoding of underlying inode
+
+This encoding format is identical to the encoding format file handles that
+are stored in extended attribute "trusted.overlay.origin".
+
+When decoding an overlay file handle, the following steps are followed:
+
+1. Find underlying layer by UUID and path type information.
+2. Decode the underlying filesystem file handle to underlying dentry.
+3. For a lower file handle, lookup the handle in index directory by name.
+4. If a whiteout is found in index, return ESTALE. This represents an
+   overlay object that was deleted after its file handle was encoded.
+5. For a non-directory, instantiate a disconnected overlay dentry from the
+   decoded underlying dentry, the path type and index inode, if found.
+6. For a directory, use the connected underlying decoded dentry, path type
+   and index, to lookup a connected overlay dentry.
+
+Decoding a non-directory file handle may return a disconnected dentry.
+copy_up of that disconnected dentry will create an upper index entry with
+no upper alias.
+
+When overlay filesystem has multiple lower layers, a middle layer
+directory may have a "redirect" to lower directory.  Because middle layer
+"redirects" are not indexed, a lower file handle that was encoded from the
+"redirect" origin directory, cannot be used to find the middle or upper
+layer directory.  Similarly, a lower file handle that was encoded from a
+descendant of the "redirect" origin directory, cannot be used to
+reconstruct a connected overlay path.  To mitigate the cases of
+directories that cannot be decoded from a lower file handle, these
+directories are copied up on encode and encoded as an upper file handle.
+On an overlay filesystem with no upper layer this mitigation cannot be
+used NFS export in this setup requires turning off redirect follow (e.g.
+"redirect_dir=nofollow").
+
+The overlay filesystem does not support non-directory connectable file
+handles, so exporting with the 'subtree_check' exportfs configuration will
+cause failures to lookup files over NFS.
+
+When the NFS export feature is enabled, all directory index entries are
+verified on mount time to check that upper file handles are not stale.
+This verification may cause significant overhead in some cases.
+
+Note: the mount options index=off,nfs_export=on are conflicting for a
+read-write mount and will result in an error.
+
+Note: the mount option uuid=off can be used to replace UUID of the underlying
+filesystem in file handles with null, and effectively disable UUID checks. This
+can be useful in case the underlying disk is copied and the UUID of this copy
+is changed. This is only applicable if all lower/upper/work directories are on
+the same filesystem, otherwise it will fallback to normal behaviour.
+
+Volatile mount
+--------------
+
+This is enabled with the "volatile" mount option.  Volatile mounts are not
+guaranteed to survive a crash.  It is strongly recommended that volatile
+mounts are only used if data written to the overlay can be recreated
+without significant effort.
+
+The advantage of mounting with the "volatile" option is that all forms of
+sync calls to the upper filesystem are omitted.
+
+In order to avoid a giving a false sense of safety, the syncfs (and fsync)
+semantics of volatile mounts are slightly different than that of the rest of
+VFS.  If any writeback error occurs on the upperdir's filesystem after a
+volatile mount takes place, all sync functions will return an error.  Once this
+condition is reached, the filesystem will not recover, and every subsequent sync
+call will return an error, even if the upperdir has not experience a new error
+since the last sync call.
+
+When overlay is mounted with "volatile" option, the directory
+"$workdir/work/incompat/volatile" is created.  During next mount, overlay
+checks for this directory and refuses to mount if present. This is a strong
+indicator that user should throw away upper and work directories and create
+fresh one. In very limited cases where the user knows that the system has
+not crashed and contents of upperdir are intact, The "volatile" directory
+can be removed.
+
+
+User xattr
+----------
+
+The "-o userxattr" mount option forces overlayfs to use the
+"user.overlay." xattr namespace instead of "trusted.overlay.".  This is
+useful for unprivileged mounting of overlayfs.
+
+
+Testsuite
+---------
+
+There's a testsuite originally developed by David Howells and currently
+maintained by Amir Goldstein at:
+
+  https://github.com/amir73il/unionmount-testsuite.git
+
+Run as root:
+
+  # cd unionmount-testsuite
+  # ./run --ov --verify
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2b2df6aa5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,1390 @@
+===============
+Pathname lookup
+===============
+
+This write-up is based on three articles published at lwn.net:
+
+- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649115/> Pathname lookup in Linux
+- <https://lwn.net/Articles/649729/> RCU-walk: faster pathname lookup in Linux
+- <https://lwn.net/Articles/650786/> A walk among the symlinks
+
+Written by Neil Brown with help from Al Viro and Jon Corbet.
+It has subsequently been updated to reflect changes in the kernel
+including:
+
+- per-directory parallel name lookup.
+- ``openat2()`` resolution restriction flags.
+
+Introduction to pathname lookup
+===============================
+
+The most obvious aspect of pathname lookup, which very little
+exploration is needed to discover, is that it is complex.  There are
+many rules, special cases, and implementation alternatives that all
+combine to confuse the unwary reader.  Computer science has long been
+acquainted with such complexity and has tools to help manage it.  One
+tool that we will make extensive use of is "divide and conquer".  For
+the early parts of the analysis we will divide off symlinks - leaving
+them until the final part.  Well before we get to symlinks we have
+another major division based on the VFS's approach to locking which
+will allow us to review "REF-walk" and "RCU-walk" separately.  But we
+are getting ahead of ourselves.  There are some important low level
+distinctions we need to clarify first.
+
+There are two sorts of ...
+--------------------------
+
+.. _openat: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/openat.2.html
+
+Pathnames (sometimes "file names"), used to identify objects in the
+filesystem, will be familiar to most readers.  They contain two sorts
+of elements: "slashes" that are sequences of one or more "``/``"
+characters, and "components" that are sequences of one or more
+non-"``/``" characters.  These form two kinds of paths.  Those that
+start with slashes are "absolute" and start from the filesystem root.
+The others are "relative" and start from the current directory, or
+from some other location specified by a file descriptor given to
+"``*at()``" system calls such as `openat() <openat_>`_.
+
+.. _execveat: http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/execveat.2.html
+
+It is tempting to describe the second kind as starting with a
+component, but that isn't always accurate: a pathname can lack both
+slashes and components, it can be empty, in other words.  This is
+generally forbidden in POSIX, but some of those "``*at()``" system calls
+in Linux permit it when the ``AT_EMPTY_PATH`` flag is given.  For
+example, if you have an open file descriptor on an executable file you
+can execute it by calling `execveat() <execveat_>`_ passing
+the file descriptor, an empty path, and the ``AT_EMPTY_PATH`` flag.
+
+These paths can be divided into two sections: the final component and
+everything else.  The "everything else" is the easy bit.  In all cases
+it must identify a directory that already exists, otherwise an error
+such as ``ENOENT`` or ``ENOTDIR`` will be reported.
+
+The final component is not so simple.  Not only do different system
+calls interpret it quite differently (e.g. some create it, some do
+not), but it might not even exist: neither the empty pathname nor the
+pathname that is just slashes have a final component.  If it does
+exist, it could be "``.``" or "``..``" which are handled quite differently
+from other components.
+
+.. _POSIX: https://pubs.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/9699919799/basedefs/V1_chap04.html#tag_04_12
+
+If a pathname ends with a slash, such as "``/tmp/foo/``" it might be
+tempting to consider that to have an empty final component.  In many
+ways that would lead to correct results, but not always.  In
+particular, ``mkdir()`` and ``rmdir()`` each create or remove a directory named
+by the final component, and they are required to work with pathnames
+ending in "``/``".  According to POSIX_:
+
+  A pathname that contains at least one non-<slash> character and
+  that ends with one or more trailing <slash> characters shall not
+  be resolved successfully unless the last pathname component before
+  the trailing <slash> characters names an existing directory or a
+  directory entry that is to be created for a directory immediately
+  after the pathname is resolved.
+
+The Linux pathname walking code (mostly in ``fs/namei.c``) deals with
+all of these issues: breaking the path into components, handling the
+"everything else" quite separately from the final component, and
+checking that the trailing slash is not used where it isn't
+permitted.  It also addresses the important issue of concurrent
+access.
+
+While one process is looking up a pathname, another might be making
+changes that affect that lookup.  One fairly extreme case is that if
+"a/b" were renamed to "a/c/b" while another process were looking up
+"a/b/..", that process might successfully resolve on "a/c".
+Most races are much more subtle, and a big part of the task of
+pathname lookup is to prevent them from having damaging effects.  Many
+of the possible races are seen most clearly in the context of the
+"dcache" and an understanding of that is central to understanding
+pathname lookup.
+
+More than just a cache
+----------------------
+
+The "dcache" caches information about names in each filesystem to
+make them quickly available for lookup.  Each entry (known as a
+"dentry") contains three significant fields: a component name, a
+pointer to a parent dentry, and a pointer to the "inode" which
+contains further information about the object in that parent with
+the given name.  The inode pointer can be ``NULL`` indicating that the
+name doesn't exist in the parent.  While there can be linkage in the
+dentry of a directory to the dentries of the children, that linkage is
+not used for pathname lookup, and so will not be considered here.
+
+The dcache has a number of uses apart from accelerating lookup.  One
+that will be particularly relevant is that it is closely integrated
+with the mount table that records which filesystem is mounted where.
+What the mount table actually stores is which dentry is mounted on top
+of which other dentry.
+
+When considering the dcache, we have another of our "two types"
+distinctions: there are two types of filesystems.
+
+Some filesystems ensure that the information in the dcache is always
+completely accurate (though not necessarily complete).  This can allow
+the VFS to determine if a particular file does or doesn't exist
+without checking with the filesystem, and means that the VFS can
+protect the filesystem against certain races and other problems.
+These are typically "local" filesystems such as ext3, XFS, and Btrfs.
+
+Other filesystems don't provide that guarantee because they cannot.
+These are typically filesystems that are shared across a network,
+whether remote filesystems like NFS and 9P, or cluster filesystems
+like ocfs2 or cephfs.  These filesystems allow the VFS to revalidate
+cached information, and must provide their own protection against
+awkward races.  The VFS can detect these filesystems by the
+``DCACHE_OP_REVALIDATE`` flag being set in the dentry.
+
+REF-walk: simple concurrency management with refcounts and spinlocks
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+With all of those divisions carefully classified, we can now start
+looking at the actual process of walking along a path.  In particular
+we will start with the handling of the "everything else" part of a
+pathname, and focus on the "REF-walk" approach to concurrency
+management.  This code is found in the ``link_path_walk()`` function, if
+you ignore all the places that only run when "``LOOKUP_RCU``"
+(indicating the use of RCU-walk) is set.
+
+.. _Meet the Lockers: https://lwn.net/Articles/453685/
+
+REF-walk is fairly heavy-handed with locks and reference counts.  Not
+as heavy-handed as in the old "big kernel lock" days, but certainly not
+afraid of taking a lock when one is needed.  It uses a variety of
+different concurrency controls.  A background understanding of the
+various primitives is assumed, or can be gleaned from elsewhere such
+as in `Meet the Lockers`_.
+
+The locking mechanisms used by REF-walk include:
+
+dentry->d_lockref
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This uses the lockref primitive to provide both a spinlock and a
+reference count.  The special-sauce of this primitive is that the
+conceptual sequence "lock; inc_ref; unlock;" can often be performed
+with a single atomic memory operation.
+
+Holding a reference on a dentry ensures that the dentry won't suddenly
+be freed and used for something else, so the values in various fields
+will behave as expected.  It also protects the ``->d_inode`` reference
+to the inode to some extent.
+
+The association between a dentry and its inode is fairly permanent.
+For example, when a file is renamed, the dentry and inode move
+together to the new location.  When a file is created the dentry will
+initially be negative (i.e. ``d_inode`` is ``NULL``), and will be assigned
+to the new inode as part of the act of creation.
+
+When a file is deleted, this can be reflected in the cache either by
+setting ``d_inode`` to ``NULL``, or by removing it from the hash table
+(described shortly) used to look up the name in the parent directory.
+If the dentry is still in use the second option is used as it is
+perfectly legal to keep using an open file after it has been deleted
+and having the dentry around helps.  If the dentry is not otherwise in
+use (i.e. if the refcount in ``d_lockref`` is one), only then will
+``d_inode`` be set to ``NULL``.  Doing it this way is more efficient for a
+very common case.
+
+So as long as a counted reference is held to a dentry, a non-``NULL`` ``->d_inode``
+value will never be changed.
+
+dentry->d_lock
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``d_lock`` is a synonym for the spinlock that is part of ``d_lockref`` above.
+For our purposes, holding this lock protects against the dentry being
+renamed or unlinked.  In particular, its parent (``d_parent``), and its
+name (``d_name``) cannot be changed, and it cannot be removed from the
+dentry hash table.
+
+When looking for a name in a directory, REF-walk takes ``d_lock`` on
+each candidate dentry that it finds in the hash table and then checks
+that the parent and name are correct.  So it doesn't lock the parent
+while searching in the cache; it only locks children.
+
+When looking for the parent for a given name (to handle "``..``"),
+REF-walk can take ``d_lock`` to get a stable reference to ``d_parent``,
+but it first tries a more lightweight approach.  As seen in
+``dget_parent()``, if a reference can be claimed on the parent, and if
+subsequently ``d_parent`` can be seen to have not changed, then there is
+no need to actually take the lock on the child.
+
+rename_lock
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Looking up a given name in a given directory involves computing a hash
+from the two values (the name and the dentry of the directory),
+accessing that slot in a hash table, and searching the linked list
+that is found there.
+
+When a dentry is renamed, the name and the parent dentry can both
+change so the hash will almost certainly change too.  This would move the
+dentry to a different chain in the hash table.  If a filename search
+happened to be looking at a dentry that was moved in this way,
+it might end up continuing the search down the wrong chain,
+and so miss out on part of the correct chain.
+
+The name-lookup process (``d_lookup()``) does *not* try to prevent this
+from happening, but only to detect when it happens.
+``rename_lock`` is a seqlock that is updated whenever any dentry is
+renamed.  If ``d_lookup`` finds that a rename happened while it
+unsuccessfully scanned a chain in the hash table, it simply tries
+again.
+
+``rename_lock`` is also used to detect and defend against potential attacks
+against ``LOOKUP_BENEATH`` and ``LOOKUP_IN_ROOT`` when resolving ".." (where
+the parent directory is moved outside the root, bypassing the ``path_equal()``
+check). If ``rename_lock`` is updated during the lookup and the path encounters
+a "..", a potential attack occurred and ``handle_dots()`` will bail out with
+``-EAGAIN``.
+
+inode->i_rwsem
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``i_rwsem`` is a read/write semaphore that serializes all changes to a particular
+directory.  This ensures that, for example, an ``unlink()`` and a ``rename()``
+cannot both happen at the same time.  It also keeps the directory
+stable while the filesystem is asked to look up a name that is not
+currently in the dcache or, optionally, when the list of entries in a
+directory is being retrieved with ``readdir()``.
+
+This has a complementary role to that of ``d_lock``: ``i_rwsem`` on a
+directory protects all of the names in that directory, while ``d_lock``
+on a name protects just one name in a directory.  Most changes to the
+dcache hold ``i_rwsem`` on the relevant directory inode and briefly take
+``d_lock`` on one or more the dentries while the change happens.  One
+exception is when idle dentries are removed from the dcache due to
+memory pressure.  This uses ``d_lock``, but ``i_rwsem`` plays no role.
+
+The semaphore affects pathname lookup in two distinct ways.  Firstly it
+prevents changes during lookup of a name in a directory.  ``walk_component()`` uses
+``lookup_fast()`` first which, in turn, checks to see if the name is in the cache,
+using only ``d_lock`` locking.  If the name isn't found, then ``walk_component()``
+falls back to ``lookup_slow()`` which takes a shared lock on ``i_rwsem``, checks again that
+the name isn't in the cache, and then calls in to the filesystem to get a
+definitive answer.  A new dentry will be added to the cache regardless of
+the result.
+
+Secondly, when pathname lookup reaches the final component, it will
+sometimes need to take an exclusive lock on ``i_rwsem`` before performing the last lookup so
+that the required exclusion can be achieved.  How path lookup chooses
+to take, or not take, ``i_rwsem`` is one of the
+issues addressed in a subsequent section.
+
+If two threads attempt to look up the same name at the same time - a
+name that is not yet in the dcache - the shared lock on ``i_rwsem`` will
+not prevent them both adding new dentries with the same name.  As this
+would result in confusion an extra level of interlocking is used,
+based around a secondary hash table (``in_lookup_hashtable``) and a
+per-dentry flag bit (``DCACHE_PAR_LOOKUP``).
+
+To add a new dentry to the cache while only holding a shared lock on
+``i_rwsem``, a thread must call ``d_alloc_parallel()``.  This allocates a
+dentry, stores the required name and parent in it, checks if there
+is already a matching dentry in the primary or secondary hash
+tables, and if not, stores the newly allocated dentry in the secondary
+hash table, with ``DCACHE_PAR_LOOKUP`` set.
+
+If a matching dentry was found in the primary hash table then that is
+returned and the caller can know that it lost a race with some other
+thread adding the entry.  If no matching dentry is found in either
+cache, the newly allocated dentry is returned and the caller can
+detect this from the presence of ``DCACHE_PAR_LOOKUP``.  In this case it
+knows that it has won any race and now is responsible for asking the
+filesystem to perform the lookup and find the matching inode.  When
+the lookup is complete, it must call ``d_lookup_done()`` which clears
+the flag and does some other house keeping, including removing the
+dentry from the secondary hash table - it will normally have been
+added to the primary hash table already.  Note that a ``struct
+waitqueue_head`` is passed to ``d_alloc_parallel()``, and
+``d_lookup_done()`` must be called while this ``waitqueue_head`` is still
+in scope.
+
+If a matching dentry is found in the secondary hash table,
+``d_alloc_parallel()`` has a little more work to do. It first waits for
+``DCACHE_PAR_LOOKUP`` to be cleared, using a wait_queue that was passed
+to the instance of ``d_alloc_parallel()`` that won the race and that
+will be woken by the call to ``d_lookup_done()``.  It then checks to see
+if the dentry has now been added to the primary hash table.  If it
+has, the dentry is returned and the caller just sees that it lost any
+race.  If it hasn't been added to the primary hash table, the most
+likely explanation is that some other dentry was added instead using
+``d_splice_alias()``.  In any case, ``d_alloc_parallel()`` repeats all the
+look ups from the start and will normally return something from the
+primary hash table.
+
+mnt->mnt_count
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``mnt_count`` is a per-CPU reference counter on "``mount``" structures.
+Per-CPU here means that incrementing the count is cheap as it only
+uses CPU-local memory, but checking if the count is zero is expensive as
+it needs to check with every CPU.  Taking a ``mnt_count`` reference
+prevents the mount structure from disappearing as the result of regular
+unmount operations, but does not prevent a "lazy" unmount.  So holding
+``mnt_count`` doesn't ensure that the mount remains in the namespace and,
+in particular, doesn't stabilize the link to the mounted-on dentry.  It
+does, however, ensure that the ``mount`` data structure remains coherent,
+and it provides a reference to the root dentry of the mounted
+filesystem.  So a reference through ``->mnt_count`` provides a stable
+reference to the mounted dentry, but not the mounted-on dentry.
+
+mount_lock
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+``mount_lock`` is a global seqlock, a bit like ``rename_lock``.  It can be used to
+check if any change has been made to any mount points.
+
+While walking down the tree (away from the root) this lock is used when
+crossing a mount point to check that the crossing was safe.  That is,
+the value in the seqlock is read, then the code finds the mount that
+is mounted on the current directory, if there is one, and increments
+the ``mnt_count``.  Finally the value in ``mount_lock`` is checked against
+the old value.  If there is no change, then the crossing was safe.  If there
+was a change, the ``mnt_count`` is decremented and the whole process is
+retried.
+
+When walking up the tree (towards the root) by following a ".." link,
+a little more care is needed.  In this case the seqlock (which
+contains both a counter and a spinlock) is fully locked to prevent
+any changes to any mount points while stepping up.  This locking is
+needed to stabilize the link to the mounted-on dentry, which the
+refcount on the mount itself doesn't ensure.
+
+``mount_lock`` is also used to detect and defend against potential attacks
+against ``LOOKUP_BENEATH`` and ``LOOKUP_IN_ROOT`` when resolving ".." (where
+the parent directory is moved outside the root, bypassing the ``path_equal()``
+check). If ``mount_lock`` is updated during the lookup and the path encounters
+a "..", a potential attack occurred and ``handle_dots()`` will bail out with
+``-EAGAIN``.
+
+RCU
+~~~
+
+Finally the global (but extremely lightweight) RCU read lock is held
+from time to time to ensure certain data structures don't get freed
+unexpectedly.
+
+In particular it is held while scanning chains in the dcache hash
+table, and the mount point hash table.
+
+Bringing it together with ``struct nameidata``
+----------------------------------------------
+
+.. _First edition Unix: https://minnie.tuhs.org/cgi-bin/utree.pl?file=V1/u2.s
+
+Throughout the process of walking a path, the current status is stored
+in a ``struct nameidata``, "namei" being the traditional name - dating
+all the way back to `First Edition Unix`_ - of the function that
+converts a "name" to an "inode".  ``struct nameidata`` contains (among
+other fields):
+
+``struct path path``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A ``path`` contains a ``struct vfsmount`` (which is
+embedded in a ``struct mount``) and a ``struct dentry``.  Together these
+record the current status of the walk.  They start out referring to the
+starting point (the current working directory, the root directory, or some other
+directory identified by a file descriptor), and are updated on each
+step.  A reference through ``d_lockref`` and ``mnt_count`` is always
+held.
+
+``struct qstr last``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This is a string together with a length (i.e. *not* ``nul`` terminated)
+that is the "next" component in the pathname.
+
+``int last_type``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This is one of ``LAST_NORM``, ``LAST_ROOT``, ``LAST_DOT`` or ``LAST_DOTDOT``.
+The ``last`` field is only valid if the type is ``LAST_NORM``.
+
+``struct path root``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This is used to hold a reference to the effective root of the
+filesystem.  Often that reference won't be needed, so this field is
+only assigned the first time it is used, or when a non-standard root
+is requested.  Keeping a reference in the ``nameidata`` ensures that
+only one root is in effect for the entire path walk, even if it races
+with a ``chroot()`` system call.
+
+It should be noted that in the case of ``LOOKUP_IN_ROOT`` or
+``LOOKUP_BENEATH``, the effective root becomes the directory file descriptor
+passed to ``openat2()`` (which exposes these ``LOOKUP_`` flags).
+
+The root is needed when either of two conditions holds: (1) either the
+pathname or a symbolic link starts with a "'/'", or (2) a "``..``"
+component is being handled, since "``..``" from the root must always stay
+at the root.  The value used is usually the current root directory of
+the calling process.  An alternate root can be provided as when
+``sysctl()`` calls ``file_open_root()``, and when NFSv4 or Btrfs call
+``mount_subtree()``.  In each case a pathname is being looked up in a very
+specific part of the filesystem, and the lookup must not be allowed to
+escape that subtree.  It works a bit like a local ``chroot()``.
+
+Ignoring the handling of symbolic links, we can now describe the
+"``link_path_walk()``" function, which handles the lookup of everything
+except the final component as:
+
+   Given a path (``name``) and a nameidata structure (``nd``), check that the
+   current directory has execute permission and then advance ``name``
+   over one component while updating ``last_type`` and ``last``.  If that
+   was the final component, then return, otherwise call
+   ``walk_component()`` and repeat from the top.
+
+``walk_component()`` is even easier.  If the component is ``LAST_DOTS``,
+it calls ``handle_dots()`` which does the necessary locking as already
+described.  If it finds a ``LAST_NORM`` component it first calls
+"``lookup_fast()``" which only looks in the dcache, but will ask the
+filesystem to revalidate the result if it is that sort of filesystem.
+If that doesn't get a good result, it calls "``lookup_slow()``" which
+takes ``i_rwsem``, rechecks the cache, and then asks the filesystem
+to find a definitive answer.
+
+As the last step of walk_component(), step_into() will be called either
+directly from walk_component() or from handle_dots().  It calls
+handle_mounts(), to check and handle mount points, in which a new
+``struct path`` is created containing a counted reference to the new dentry and
+a reference to the new ``vfsmount`` which is only counted if it is
+different from the previous ``vfsmount``. Then if there is
+a symbolic link, step_into() calls pick_link() to deal with it,
+otherwise it installs the new ``struct path`` in the ``struct nameidata``, and
+drops the unneeded references.
+
+This "hand-over-hand" sequencing of getting a reference to the new
+dentry before dropping the reference to the previous dentry may
+seem obvious, but is worth pointing out so that we will recognize its
+analogue in the "RCU-walk" version.
+
+Handling the final component
+----------------------------
+
+``link_path_walk()`` only walks as far as setting ``nd->last`` and
+``nd->last_type`` to refer to the final component of the path.  It does
+not call ``walk_component()`` that last time.  Handling that final
+component remains for the caller to sort out. Those callers are
+path_lookupat(), path_parentat() and
+path_openat() each of which handles the differing requirements of
+different system calls.
+
+``path_parentat()`` is clearly the simplest - it just wraps a little bit
+of housekeeping around ``link_path_walk()`` and returns the parent
+directory and final component to the caller.  The caller will be either
+aiming to create a name (via ``filename_create()``) or remove or rename
+a name (in which case ``user_path_parent()`` is used).  They will use
+``i_rwsem`` to exclude other changes while they validate and then
+perform their operation.
+
+``path_lookupat()`` is nearly as simple - it is used when an existing
+object is wanted such as by ``stat()`` or ``chmod()``.  It essentially just
+calls ``walk_component()`` on the final component through a call to
+``lookup_last()``.  ``path_lookupat()`` returns just the final dentry.
+It is worth noting that when flag ``LOOKUP_MOUNTPOINT`` is set,
+path_lookupat() will unset LOOKUP_JUMPED in nameidata so that in the
+subsequent path traversal d_weak_revalidate() won't be called.
+This is important when unmounting a filesystem that is inaccessible, such as
+one provided by a dead NFS server.
+
+Finally ``path_openat()`` is used for the ``open()`` system call; it
+contains, in support functions starting with "open_last_lookups()", all the
+complexity needed to handle the different subtleties of O_CREAT (with
+or without O_EXCL), final "``/``" characters, and trailing symbolic
+links.  We will revisit this in the final part of this series, which
+focuses on those symbolic links.  "open_last_lookups()" will sometimes, but
+not always, take ``i_rwsem``, depending on what it finds.
+
+Each of these, or the functions which call them, need to be alert to
+the possibility that the final component is not ``LAST_NORM``.  If the
+goal of the lookup is to create something, then any value for
+``last_type`` other than ``LAST_NORM`` will result in an error.  For
+example if ``path_parentat()`` reports ``LAST_DOTDOT``, then the caller
+won't try to create that name.  They also check for trailing slashes
+by testing ``last.name[last.len]``.  If there is any character beyond
+the final component, it must be a trailing slash.
+
+Revalidation and automounts
+---------------------------
+
+Apart from symbolic links, there are only two parts of the "REF-walk"
+process not yet covered.  One is the handling of stale cache entries
+and the other is automounts.
+
+On filesystems that require it, the lookup routines will call the
+``->d_revalidate()`` dentry method to ensure that the cached information
+is current.  This will often confirm validity or update a few details
+from a server.  In some cases it may find that there has been change
+further up the path and that something that was thought to be valid
+previously isn't really.  When this happens the lookup of the whole
+path is aborted and retried with the "``LOOKUP_REVAL``" flag set.  This
+forces revalidation to be more thorough.  We will see more details of
+this retry process in the next article.
+
+Automount points are locations in the filesystem where an attempt to
+lookup a name can trigger changes to how that lookup should be
+handled, in particular by mounting a filesystem there.  These are
+covered in greater detail in autofs.txt in the Linux documentation
+tree, but a few notes specifically related to path lookup are in order
+here.
+
+The Linux VFS has a concept of "managed" dentries.  There are three
+potentially interesting things about these dentries corresponding
+to three different flags that might be set in ``dentry->d_flags``:
+
+``DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+If this flag has been set, then the filesystem has requested that the
+``d_manage()`` dentry operation be called before handling any possible
+mount point.  This can perform two particular services:
+
+It can block to avoid races.  If an automount point is being
+unmounted, the ``d_manage()`` function will usually wait for that
+process to complete before letting the new lookup proceed and possibly
+trigger a new automount.
+
+It can selectively allow only some processes to transit through a
+mount point.  When a server process is managing automounts, it may
+need to access a directory without triggering normal automount
+processing.  That server process can identify itself to the ``autofs``
+filesystem, which will then give it a special pass through
+``d_manage()`` by returning ``-EISDIR``.
+
+``DCACHE_MOUNTED``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+This flag is set on every dentry that is mounted on.  As Linux
+supports multiple filesystem namespaces, it is possible that the
+dentry may not be mounted on in *this* namespace, just in some
+other.  So this flag is seen as a hint, not a promise.
+
+If this flag is set, and ``d_manage()`` didn't return ``-EISDIR``,
+``lookup_mnt()`` is called to examine the mount hash table (honoring the
+``mount_lock`` described earlier) and possibly return a new ``vfsmount``
+and a new ``dentry`` (both with counted references).
+
+``DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+If ``d_manage()`` allowed us to get this far, and ``lookup_mnt()`` didn't
+find a mount point, then this flag causes the ``d_automount()`` dentry
+operation to be called.
+
+The ``d_automount()`` operation can be arbitrarily complex and may
+communicate with server processes etc. but it should ultimately either
+report that there was an error, that there was nothing to mount, or
+should provide an updated ``struct path`` with new ``dentry`` and ``vfsmount``.
+
+In the latter case, ``finish_automount()`` will be called to safely
+install the new mount point into the mount table.
+
+There is no new locking of import here and it is important that no
+locks (only counted references) are held over this processing due to
+the very real possibility of extended delays.
+This will become more important next time when we examine RCU-walk
+which is particularly sensitive to delays.
+
+RCU-walk - faster pathname lookup in Linux
+==========================================
+
+RCU-walk is another algorithm for performing pathname lookup in Linux.
+It is in many ways similar to REF-walk and the two share quite a bit
+of code.  The significant difference in RCU-walk is how it allows for
+the possibility of concurrent access.
+
+We noted that REF-walk is complex because there are numerous details
+and special cases.  RCU-walk reduces this complexity by simply
+refusing to handle a number of cases -- it instead falls back to
+REF-walk.  The difficulty with RCU-walk comes from a different
+direction: unfamiliarity.  The locking rules when depending on RCU are
+quite different from traditional locking, so we will spend a little extra
+time when we come to those.
+
+Clear demarcation of roles
+--------------------------
+
+The easiest way to manage concurrency is to forcibly stop any other
+thread from changing the data structures that a given thread is
+looking at.  In cases where no other thread would even think of
+changing the data and lots of different threads want to read at the
+same time, this can be very costly.  Even when using locks that permit
+multiple concurrent readers, the simple act of updating the count of
+the number of current readers can impose an unwanted cost.  So the
+goal when reading a shared data structure that no other process is
+changing is to avoid writing anything to memory at all.  Take no
+locks, increment no counts, leave no footprints.
+
+The REF-walk mechanism already described certainly doesn't follow this
+principle, but then it is really designed to work when there may well
+be other threads modifying the data.  RCU-walk, in contrast, is
+designed for the common situation where there are lots of frequent
+readers and only occasional writers.  This may not be common in all
+parts of the filesystem tree, but in many parts it will be.  For the
+other parts it is important that RCU-walk can quickly fall back to
+using REF-walk.
+
+Pathname lookup always starts in RCU-walk mode but only remains there
+as long as what it is looking for is in the cache and is stable.  It
+dances lightly down the cached filesystem image, leaving no footprints
+and carefully watching where it is, to be sure it doesn't trip.  If it
+notices that something has changed or is changing, or if something
+isn't in the cache, then it tries to stop gracefully and switch to
+REF-walk.
+
+This stopping requires getting a counted reference on the current
+``vfsmount`` and ``dentry``, and ensuring that these are still valid -
+that a path walk with REF-walk would have found the same entries.
+This is an invariant that RCU-walk must guarantee.  It can only make
+decisions, such as selecting the next step, that are decisions which
+REF-walk could also have made if it were walking down the tree at the
+same time.  If the graceful stop succeeds, the rest of the path is
+processed with the reliable, if slightly sluggish, REF-walk.  If
+RCU-walk finds it cannot stop gracefully, it simply gives up and
+restarts from the top with REF-walk.
+
+This pattern of "try RCU-walk, if that fails try REF-walk" can be
+clearly seen in functions like filename_lookup(),
+filename_parentat(),
+do_filp_open(), and do_file_open_root().  These four
+correspond roughly to the three ``path_*()`` functions we met earlier,
+each of which calls ``link_path_walk()``.  The ``path_*()`` functions are
+called using different mode flags until a mode is found which works.
+They are first called with ``LOOKUP_RCU`` set to request "RCU-walk".  If
+that fails with the error ``ECHILD`` they are called again with no
+special flag to request "REF-walk".  If either of those report the
+error ``ESTALE`` a final attempt is made with ``LOOKUP_REVAL`` set (and no
+``LOOKUP_RCU``) to ensure that entries found in the cache are forcibly
+revalidated - normally entries are only revalidated if the filesystem
+determines that they are too old to trust.
+
+The ``LOOKUP_RCU`` attempt may drop that flag internally and switch to
+REF-walk, but will never then try to switch back to RCU-walk.  Places
+that trip up RCU-walk are much more likely to be near the leaves and
+so it is very unlikely that there will be much, if any, benefit from
+switching back.
+
+RCU and seqlocks: fast and light
+--------------------------------
+
+RCU is, unsurprisingly, critical to RCU-walk mode.  The
+``rcu_read_lock()`` is held for the entire time that RCU-walk is walking
+down a path.  The particular guarantee it provides is that the key
+data structures - dentries, inodes, super_blocks, and mounts - will
+not be freed while the lock is held.  They might be unlinked or
+invalidated in one way or another, but the memory will not be
+repurposed so values in various fields will still be meaningful.  This
+is the only guarantee that RCU provides; everything else is done using
+seqlocks.
+
+As we saw above, REF-walk holds a counted reference to the current
+dentry and the current vfsmount, and does not release those references
+before taking references to the "next" dentry or vfsmount.  It also
+sometimes takes the ``d_lock`` spinlock.  These references and locks are
+taken to prevent certain changes from happening.  RCU-walk must not
+take those references or locks and so cannot prevent such changes.
+Instead, it checks to see if a change has been made, and aborts or
+retries if it has.
+
+To preserve the invariant mentioned above (that RCU-walk may only make
+decisions that REF-walk could have made), it must make the checks at
+or near the same places that REF-walk holds the references.  So, when
+REF-walk increments a reference count or takes a spinlock, RCU-walk
+samples the status of a seqlock using ``read_seqcount_begin()`` or a
+similar function.  When REF-walk decrements the count or drops the
+lock, RCU-walk checks if the sampled status is still valid using
+``read_seqcount_retry()`` or similar.
+
+However, there is a little bit more to seqlocks than that.  If
+RCU-walk accesses two different fields in a seqlock-protected
+structure, or accesses the same field twice, there is no a priori
+guarantee of any consistency between those accesses.  When consistency
+is needed - which it usually is - RCU-walk must take a copy and then
+use ``read_seqcount_retry()`` to validate that copy.
+
+``read_seqcount_retry()`` not only checks the sequence number, but also
+imposes a memory barrier so that no memory-read instruction from
+*before* the call can be delayed until *after* the call, either by the
+CPU or by the compiler.  A simple example of this can be seen in
+``slow_dentry_cmp()`` which, for filesystems which do not use simple
+byte-wise name equality, calls into the filesystem to compare a name
+against a dentry.  The length and name pointer are copied into local
+variables, then ``read_seqcount_retry()`` is called to confirm the two
+are consistent, and only then is ``->d_compare()`` called.  When
+standard filename comparison is used, ``dentry_cmp()`` is called
+instead.  Notably it does *not* use ``read_seqcount_retry()``, but
+instead has a large comment explaining why the consistency guarantee
+isn't necessary.  A subsequent ``read_seqcount_retry()`` will be
+sufficient to catch any problem that could occur at this point.
+
+With that little refresher on seqlocks out of the way we can look at
+the bigger picture of how RCU-walk uses seqlocks.
+
+``mount_lock`` and ``nd->m_seq``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+We already met the ``mount_lock`` seqlock when REF-walk used it to
+ensure that crossing a mount point is performed safely.  RCU-walk uses
+it for that too, but for quite a bit more.
+
+Instead of taking a counted reference to each ``vfsmount`` as it
+descends the tree, RCU-walk samples the state of ``mount_lock`` at the
+start of the walk and stores this initial sequence number in the
+``struct nameidata`` in the ``m_seq`` field.  This one lock and one
+sequence number are used to validate all accesses to all ``vfsmounts``,
+and all mount point crossings.  As changes to the mount table are
+relatively rare, it is reasonable to fall back on REF-walk any time
+that any "mount" or "unmount" happens.
+
+``m_seq`` is checked (using ``read_seqretry()``) at the end of an RCU-walk
+sequence, whether switching to REF-walk for the rest of the path or
+when the end of the path is reached.  It is also checked when stepping
+down over a mount point (in ``__follow_mount_rcu()``) or up (in
+``follow_dotdot_rcu()``).  If it is ever found to have changed, the
+whole RCU-walk sequence is aborted and the path is processed again by
+REF-walk.
+
+If RCU-walk finds that ``mount_lock`` hasn't changed then it can be sure
+that, had REF-walk taken counted references on each vfsmount, the
+results would have been the same.  This ensures the invariant holds,
+at least for vfsmount structures.
+
+``dentry->d_seq`` and ``nd->seq``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+In place of taking a count or lock on ``d_reflock``, RCU-walk samples
+the per-dentry ``d_seq`` seqlock, and stores the sequence number in the
+``seq`` field of the nameidata structure, so ``nd->seq`` should always be
+the current sequence number of ``nd->dentry``.  This number needs to be
+revalidated after copying, and before using, the name, parent, or
+inode of the dentry.
+
+The handling of the name we have already looked at, and the parent is
+only accessed in ``follow_dotdot_rcu()`` which fairly trivially follows
+the required pattern, though it does so for three different cases.
+
+When not at a mount point, ``d_parent`` is followed and its ``d_seq`` is
+collected.  When we are at a mount point, we instead follow the
+``mnt->mnt_mountpoint`` link to get a new dentry and collect its
+``d_seq``.  Then, after finally finding a ``d_parent`` to follow, we must
+check if we have landed on a mount point and, if so, must find that
+mount point and follow the ``mnt->mnt_root`` link.  This would imply a
+somewhat unusual, but certainly possible, circumstance where the
+starting point of the path lookup was in part of the filesystem that
+was mounted on, and so not visible from the root.
+
+The inode pointer, stored in ``->d_inode``, is a little more
+interesting.  The inode will always need to be accessed at least
+twice, once to determine if it is NULL and once to verify access
+permissions.  Symlink handling requires a validated inode pointer too.
+Rather than revalidating on each access, a copy is made on the first
+access and it is stored in the ``inode`` field of ``nameidata`` from where
+it can be safely accessed without further validation.
+
+``lookup_fast()`` is the only lookup routine that is used in RCU-mode,
+``lookup_slow()`` being too slow and requiring locks.  It is in
+``lookup_fast()`` that we find the important "hand over hand" tracking
+of the current dentry.
+
+The current ``dentry`` and current ``seq`` number are passed to
+``__d_lookup_rcu()`` which, on success, returns a new ``dentry`` and a
+new ``seq`` number.  ``lookup_fast()`` then copies the inode pointer and
+revalidates the new ``seq`` number.  It then validates the old ``dentry``
+with the old ``seq`` number one last time and only then continues.  This
+process of getting the ``seq`` number of the new dentry and then
+checking the ``seq`` number of the old exactly mirrors the process of
+getting a counted reference to the new dentry before dropping that for
+the old dentry which we saw in REF-walk.
+
+No ``inode->i_rwsem`` or even ``rename_lock``
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A semaphore is a fairly heavyweight lock that can only be taken when it is
+permissible to sleep.  As ``rcu_read_lock()`` forbids sleeping,
+``inode->i_rwsem`` plays no role in RCU-walk.  If some other thread does
+take ``i_rwsem`` and modifies the directory in a way that RCU-walk needs
+to notice, the result will be either that RCU-walk fails to find the
+dentry that it is looking for, or it will find a dentry which
+``read_seqretry()`` won't validate.  In either case it will drop down to
+REF-walk mode which can take whatever locks are needed.
+
+Though ``rename_lock`` could be used by RCU-walk as it doesn't require
+any sleeping, RCU-walk doesn't bother.  REF-walk uses ``rename_lock`` to
+protect against the possibility of hash chains in the dcache changing
+while they are being searched.  This can result in failing to find
+something that actually is there.  When RCU-walk fails to find
+something in the dentry cache, whether it is really there or not, it
+already drops down to REF-walk and tries again with appropriate
+locking.  This neatly handles all cases, so adding extra checks on
+rename_lock would bring no significant value.
+
+``unlazy walk()`` and ``complete_walk()``
+-----------------------------------------
+
+That "dropping down to REF-walk" typically involves a call to
+``unlazy_walk()``, so named because "RCU-walk" is also sometimes
+referred to as "lazy walk".  ``unlazy_walk()`` is called when
+following the path down to the current vfsmount/dentry pair seems to
+have proceeded successfully, but the next step is problematic.  This
+can happen if the next name cannot be found in the dcache, if
+permission checking or name revalidation couldn't be achieved while
+the ``rcu_read_lock()`` is held (which forbids sleeping), if an
+automount point is found, or in a couple of cases involving symlinks.
+It is also called from ``complete_walk()`` when the lookup has reached
+the final component, or the very end of the path, depending on which
+particular flavor of lookup is used.
+
+Other reasons for dropping out of RCU-walk that do not trigger a call
+to ``unlazy_walk()`` are when some inconsistency is found that cannot be
+handled immediately, such as ``mount_lock`` or one of the ``d_seq``
+seqlocks reporting a change.  In these cases the relevant function
+will return ``-ECHILD`` which will percolate up until it triggers a new
+attempt from the top using REF-walk.
+
+For those cases where ``unlazy_walk()`` is an option, it essentially
+takes a reference on each of the pointers that it holds (vfsmount,
+dentry, and possibly some symbolic links) and then verifies that the
+relevant seqlocks have not been changed.  If there have been changes,
+it, too, aborts with ``-ECHILD``, otherwise the transition to REF-walk
+has been a success and the lookup process continues.
+
+Taking a reference on those pointers is not quite as simple as just
+incrementing a counter.  That works to take a second reference if you
+already have one (often indirectly through another object), but it
+isn't sufficient if you don't actually have a counted reference at
+all.  For ``dentry->d_lockref``, it is safe to increment the reference
+counter to get a reference unless it has been explicitly marked as
+"dead" which involves setting the counter to ``-128``.
+``lockref_get_not_dead()`` achieves this.
+
+For ``mnt->mnt_count`` it is safe to take a reference as long as
+``mount_lock`` is then used to validate the reference.  If that
+validation fails, it may *not* be safe to just drop that reference in
+the standard way of calling ``mnt_put()`` - an unmount may have
+progressed too far.  So the code in ``legitimize_mnt()``, when it
+finds that the reference it got might not be safe, checks the
+``MNT_SYNC_UMOUNT`` flag to determine if a simple ``mnt_put()`` is
+correct, or if it should just decrement the count and pretend none of
+this ever happened.
+
+Taking care in filesystems
+--------------------------
+
+RCU-walk depends almost entirely on cached information and often will
+not call into the filesystem at all.  However there are two places,
+besides the already-mentioned component-name comparison, where the
+file system might be included in RCU-walk, and it must know to be
+careful.
+
+If the filesystem has non-standard permission-checking requirements -
+such as a networked filesystem which may need to check with the server
+- the ``i_op->permission`` interface might be called during RCU-walk.
+In this case an extra "``MAY_NOT_BLOCK``" flag is passed so that it
+knows not to sleep, but to return ``-ECHILD`` if it cannot complete
+promptly.  ``i_op->permission`` is given the inode pointer, not the
+dentry, so it doesn't need to worry about further consistency checks.
+However if it accesses any other filesystem data structures, it must
+ensure they are safe to be accessed with only the ``rcu_read_lock()``
+held.  This typically means they must be freed using ``kfree_rcu()`` or
+similar.
+
+.. _READ_ONCE: https://lwn.net/Articles/624126/
+
+If the filesystem may need to revalidate dcache entries, then
+``d_op->d_revalidate`` may be called in RCU-walk too.  This interface
+*is* passed the dentry but does not have access to the ``inode`` or the
+``seq`` number from the ``nameidata``, so it needs to be extra careful
+when accessing fields in the dentry.  This "extra care" typically
+involves using  `READ_ONCE() <READ_ONCE_>`_ to access fields, and verifying the
+result is not NULL before using it.  This pattern can be seen in
+``nfs_lookup_revalidate()``.
+
+A pair of patterns
+------------------
+
+In various places in the details of REF-walk and RCU-walk, and also in
+the big picture, there are a couple of related patterns that are worth
+being aware of.
+
+The first is "try quickly and check, if that fails try slowly".  We
+can see that in the high-level approach of first trying RCU-walk and
+then trying REF-walk, and in places where ``unlazy_walk()`` is used to
+switch to REF-walk for the rest of the path.  We also saw it earlier
+in ``dget_parent()`` when following a "``..``" link.  It tries a quick way
+to get a reference, then falls back to taking locks if needed.
+
+The second pattern is "try quickly and check, if that fails try
+again - repeatedly".  This is seen with the use of ``rename_lock`` and
+``mount_lock`` in REF-walk.  RCU-walk doesn't make use of this pattern -
+if anything goes wrong it is much safer to just abort and try a more
+sedate approach.
+
+The emphasis here is "try quickly and check".  It should probably be
+"try quickly *and carefully*, then check".  The fact that checking is
+needed is a reminder that the system is dynamic and only a limited
+number of things are safe at all.  The most likely cause of errors in
+this whole process is assuming something is safe when in reality it
+isn't.  Careful consideration of what exactly guarantees the safety of
+each access is sometimes necessary.
+
+A walk among the symlinks
+=========================
+
+There are several basic issues that we will examine to understand the
+handling of symbolic links:  the symlink stack, together with cache
+lifetimes, will help us understand the overall recursive handling of
+symlinks and lead to the special care needed for the final component.
+Then a consideration of access-time updates and summary of the various
+flags controlling lookup will finish the story.
+
+The symlink stack
+-----------------
+
+There are only two sorts of filesystem objects that can usefully
+appear in a path prior to the final component: directories and symlinks.
+Handling directories is quite straightforward: the new directory
+simply becomes the starting point at which to interpret the next
+component on the path.  Handling symbolic links requires a bit more
+work.
+
+Conceptually, symbolic links could be handled by editing the path.  If
+a component name refers to a symbolic link, then that component is
+replaced by the body of the link and, if that body starts with a '/',
+then all preceding parts of the path are discarded.  This is what the
+"``readlink -f``" command does, though it also edits out "``.``" and
+"``..``" components.
+
+Directly editing the path string is not really necessary when looking
+up a path, and discarding early components is pointless as they aren't
+looked at anyway.  Keeping track of all remaining components is
+important, but they can of course be kept separately; there is no need
+to concatenate them.  As one symlink may easily refer to another,
+which in turn can refer to a third, we may need to keep the remaining
+components of several paths, each to be processed when the preceding
+ones are completed.  These path remnants are kept on a stack of
+limited size.
+
+There are two reasons for placing limits on how many symlinks can
+occur in a single path lookup.  The most obvious is to avoid loops.
+If a symlink referred to itself either directly or through
+intermediaries, then following the symlink can never complete
+successfully - the error ``ELOOP`` must be returned.  Loops can be
+detected without imposing limits, but limits are the simplest solution
+and, given the second reason for restriction, quite sufficient.
+
+.. _outlined recently: http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.linux.kernel/1934390/focus=1934550
+
+The second reason was `outlined recently`_ by Linus:
+
+   Because it's a latency and DoS issue too. We need to react well to
+   true loops, but also to "very deep" non-loops. It's not about memory
+   use, it's about users triggering unreasonable CPU resources.
+
+Linux imposes a limit on the length of any pathname: ``PATH_MAX``, which
+is 4096.  There are a number of reasons for this limit; not letting the
+kernel spend too much time on just one path is one of them.  With
+symbolic links you can effectively generate much longer paths so some
+sort of limit is needed for the same reason.  Linux imposes a limit of
+at most 40 (MAXSYMLINKS) symlinks in any one path lookup.  It previously imposed
+a further limit of eight on the maximum depth of recursion, but that was
+raised to 40 when a separate stack was implemented, so there is now
+just the one limit.
+
+The ``nameidata`` structure that we met in an earlier article contains a
+small stack that can be used to store the remaining part of up to two
+symlinks.  In many cases this will be sufficient.  If it isn't, a
+separate stack is allocated with room for 40 symlinks.  Pathname
+lookup will never exceed that stack as, once the 40th symlink is
+detected, an error is returned.
+
+It might seem that the name remnants are all that needs to be stored on
+this stack, but we need a bit more.  To see that, we need to move on to
+cache lifetimes.
+
+Storage and lifetime of cached symlinks
+---------------------------------------
+
+Like other filesystem resources, such as inodes and directory
+entries, symlinks are cached by Linux to avoid repeated costly access
+to external storage.  It is particularly important for RCU-walk to be
+able to find and temporarily hold onto these cached entries, so that
+it doesn't need to drop down into REF-walk.
+
+.. _object-oriented design pattern: https://lwn.net/Articles/446317/
+
+While each filesystem is free to make its own choice, symlinks are
+typically stored in one of two places.  Short symlinks are often
+stored directly in the inode.  When a filesystem allocates a ``struct
+inode`` it typically allocates extra space to store private data (a
+common `object-oriented design pattern`_ in the kernel).  This will
+sometimes include space for a symlink.  The other common location is
+in the page cache, which normally stores the content of files.  The
+pathname in a symlink can be seen as the content of that symlink and
+can easily be stored in the page cache just like file content.
+
+When neither of these is suitable, the next most likely scenario is
+that the filesystem will allocate some temporary memory and copy or
+construct the symlink content into that memory whenever it is needed.
+
+When the symlink is stored in the inode, it has the same lifetime as
+the inode which, itself, is protected by RCU or by a counted reference
+on the dentry.  This means that the mechanisms that pathname lookup
+uses to access the dcache and icache (inode cache) safely are quite
+sufficient for accessing some cached symlinks safely.  In these cases,
+the ``i_link`` pointer in the inode is set to point to wherever the
+symlink is stored and it can be accessed directly whenever needed.
+
+When the symlink is stored in the page cache or elsewhere, the
+situation is not so straightforward.  A reference on a dentry or even
+on an inode does not imply any reference on cached pages of that
+inode, and even an ``rcu_read_lock()`` is not sufficient to ensure that
+a page will not disappear.  So for these symlinks the pathname lookup
+code needs to ask the filesystem to provide a stable reference and,
+significantly, needs to release that reference when it is finished
+with it.
+
+Taking a reference to a cache page is often possible even in RCU-walk
+mode.  It does require making changes to memory, which is best avoided,
+but that isn't necessarily a big cost and it is better than dropping
+out of RCU-walk mode completely.  Even filesystems that allocate
+space to copy the symlink into can use ``GFP_ATOMIC`` to often successfully
+allocate memory without the need to drop out of RCU-walk.  If a
+filesystem cannot successfully get a reference in RCU-walk mode, it
+must return ``-ECHILD`` and ``unlazy_walk()`` will be called to return to
+REF-walk mode in which the filesystem is allowed to sleep.
+
+The place for all this to happen is the ``i_op->get_link()`` inode
+method. This is called both in RCU-walk and REF-walk. In RCU-walk the
+``dentry*`` argument is NULL, ``->get_link()`` can return -ECHILD to drop out of
+RCU-walk.  Much like the ``i_op->permission()`` method we
+looked at previously, ``->get_link()`` would need to be careful that
+all the data structures it references are safe to be accessed while
+holding no counted reference, only the RCU lock. A callback
+``struct delayed_called`` will be passed to ``->get_link()``:
+file systems can set their own put_link function and argument through
+set_delayed_call(). Later on, when VFS wants to put link, it will call
+do_delayed_call() to invoke that callback function with the argument.
+
+In order for the reference to each symlink to be dropped when the walk completes,
+whether in RCU-walk or REF-walk, the symlink stack needs to contain,
+along with the path remnants:
+
+- the ``struct path`` to provide a reference to the previous path
+- the ``const char *`` to provide a reference to the to previous name
+- the ``seq`` to allow the path to be safely switched from RCU-walk to REF-walk
+- the ``struct delayed_call`` for later invocation.
+
+This means that each entry in the symlink stack needs to hold five
+pointers and an integer instead of just one pointer (the path
+remnant).  On a 64-bit system, this is about 40 bytes per entry;
+with 40 entries it adds up to 1600 bytes total, which is less than
+half a page.  So it might seem like a lot, but is by no means
+excessive.
+
+Note that, in a given stack frame, the path remnant (``name``) is not
+part of the symlink that the other fields refer to.  It is the remnant
+to be followed once that symlink has been fully parsed.
+
+Following the symlink
+---------------------
+
+The main loop in ``link_path_walk()`` iterates seamlessly over all
+components in the path and all of the non-final symlinks.  As symlinks
+are processed, the ``name`` pointer is adjusted to point to a new
+symlink, or is restored from the stack, so that much of the loop
+doesn't need to notice.  Getting this ``name`` variable on and off the
+stack is very straightforward; pushing and popping the references is
+a little more complex.
+
+When a symlink is found, walk_component() calls pick_link() via step_into()
+which returns the link from the filesystem.
+Providing that operation is successful, the old path ``name`` is placed on the
+stack, and the new value is used as the ``name`` for a while.  When the end of
+the path is found (i.e. ``*name`` is ``'\0'``) the old ``name`` is restored
+off the stack and path walking continues.
+
+Pushing and popping the reference pointers (inode, cookie, etc.) is more
+complex in part because of the desire to handle tail recursion.  When
+the last component of a symlink itself points to a symlink, we
+want to pop the symlink-just-completed off the stack before pushing
+the symlink-just-found to avoid leaving empty path remnants that would
+just get in the way.
+
+It is most convenient to push the new symlink references onto the
+stack in ``walk_component()`` immediately when the symlink is found;
+``walk_component()`` is also the last piece of code that needs to look at the
+old symlink as it walks that last component.  So it is quite
+convenient for ``walk_component()`` to release the old symlink and pop
+the references just before pushing the reference information for the
+new symlink.  It is guided in this by three flags: ``WALK_NOFOLLOW`` which
+forbids it from following a symlink if it finds one, ``WALK_MORE``
+which indicates that it is yet too early to release the
+current symlink, and ``WALK_TRAILING`` which indicates that it is on the final
+component of the lookup, so we will check userspace flag ``LOOKUP_FOLLOW`` to
+decide whether follow it when it is a symlink and call ``may_follow_link()`` to
+check if we have privilege to follow it.
+
+Symlinks with no final component
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A pair of special-case symlinks deserve a little further explanation.
+Both result in a new ``struct path`` (with mount and dentry) being set
+up in the ``nameidata``, and result in pick_link() returning ``NULL``.
+
+The more obvious case is a symlink to "``/``".  All symlinks starting
+with "``/``" are detected in pick_link() which resets the ``nameidata``
+to point to the effective filesystem root.  If the symlink only
+contains "``/``" then there is nothing more to do, no components at all,
+so ``NULL`` is returned to indicate that the symlink can be released and
+the stack frame discarded.
+
+The other case involves things in ``/proc`` that look like symlinks but
+aren't really (and are therefore commonly referred to as "magic-links")::
+
+     $ ls -l /proc/self/fd/1
+     lrwx------ 1 neilb neilb 64 Jun 13 10:19 /proc/self/fd/1 -> /dev/pts/4
+
+Every open file descriptor in any process is represented in ``/proc`` by
+something that looks like a symlink.  It is really a reference to the
+target file, not just the name of it.  When you ``readlink`` these
+objects you get a name that might refer to the same file - unless it
+has been unlinked or mounted over.  When ``walk_component()`` follows
+one of these, the ``->get_link()`` method in "procfs" doesn't return
+a string name, but instead calls nd_jump_link() which updates the
+``nameidata`` in place to point to that target.  ``->get_link()`` then
+returns ``NULL``.  Again there is no final component and pick_link()
+returns ``NULL``.
+
+Following the symlink in the final component
+--------------------------------------------
+
+All this leads to ``link_path_walk()`` walking down every component, and
+following all symbolic links it finds, until it reaches the final
+component.  This is just returned in the ``last`` field of ``nameidata``.
+For some callers, this is all they need; they want to create that
+``last`` name if it doesn't exist or give an error if it does.  Other
+callers will want to follow a symlink if one is found, and possibly
+apply special handling to the last component of that symlink, rather
+than just the last component of the original file name.  These callers
+potentially need to call ``link_path_walk()`` again and again on
+successive symlinks until one is found that doesn't point to another
+symlink.
+
+This case is handled by relevant callers of link_path_walk(), such as
+path_lookupat(), path_openat() using a loop that calls link_path_walk(),
+and then handles the final component by calling open_last_lookups() or
+lookup_last(). If it is a symlink that needs to be followed,
+open_last_lookups() or lookup_last() will set things up properly and
+return the path so that the loop repeats, calling
+link_path_walk() again.  This could loop as many as 40 times if the last
+component of each symlink is another symlink.
+
+Of the various functions that examine the final component, 
+open_last_lookups() is the most interesting as it works in tandem
+with do_open() for opening a file.  Part of open_last_lookups() runs
+with ``i_rwsem`` held and this part is in a separate function: lookup_open().
+
+Explaining open_last_lookups() and do_open() completely is beyond the scope
+of this article, but a few highlights should help those interested in exploring
+the code.
+
+1. Rather than just finding the target file, do_open() is used after
+   open_last_lookup() to open
+   it.  If the file was found in the dcache, then ``vfs_open()`` is used for
+   this.  If not, then ``lookup_open()`` will either call ``atomic_open()`` (if
+   the filesystem provides it) to combine the final lookup with the open, or
+   will perform the separate ``i_op->lookup()`` and ``i_op->create()`` steps
+   directly.  In the later case the actual "open" of this newly found or
+   created file will be performed by vfs_open(), just as if the name
+   were found in the dcache.
+
+2. vfs_open() can fail with ``-EOPENSTALE`` if the cached information
+   wasn't quite current enough.  If it's in RCU-walk ``-ECHILD`` will be returned
+   otherwise ``-ESTALE`` is returned.  When ``-ESTALE`` is returned, the caller may
+   retry with ``LOOKUP_REVAL`` flag set.
+
+3. An open with O_CREAT **does** follow a symlink in the final component,
+   unlike other creation system calls (like ``mkdir``).  So the sequence::
+
+          ln -s bar /tmp/foo
+          echo hello > /tmp/foo
+
+   will create a file called ``/tmp/bar``.  This is not permitted if
+   ``O_EXCL`` is set but otherwise is handled for an O_CREAT open much
+   like for a non-creating open: lookup_last() or open_last_lookup()
+   returns a non ``NULL`` value, and link_path_walk() gets called and the
+   open process continues on the symlink that was found.
+
+Updating the access time
+------------------------
+
+We previously said of RCU-walk that it would "take no locks, increment
+no counts, leave no footprints."  We have since seen that some
+"footprints" can be needed when handling symlinks as a counted
+reference (or even a memory allocation) may be needed.  But these
+footprints are best kept to a minimum.
+
+One other place where walking down a symlink can involve leaving
+footprints in a way that doesn't affect directories is in updating access times.
+In Unix (and Linux) every filesystem object has a "last accessed
+time", or "``atime``".  Passing through a directory to access a file
+within is not considered to be an access for the purposes of
+``atime``; only listing the contents of a directory can update its ``atime``.
+Symlinks are different it seems.  Both reading a symlink (with ``readlink()``)
+and looking up a symlink on the way to some other destination can
+update the atime on that symlink.
+
+.. _clearest statement: https://pubs.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/9699919799/basedefs/V1_chap04.html#tag_04_08
+
+It is not clear why this is the case; POSIX has little to say on the
+subject.  The `clearest statement`_ is that, if a particular implementation
+updates a timestamp in a place not specified by POSIX, this must be
+documented "except that any changes caused by pathname resolution need
+not be documented".  This seems to imply that POSIX doesn't really
+care about access-time updates during pathname lookup.
+
+.. _Linux 1.3.87: https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/history/history.git/diff/fs/ext2/symlink.c?id=f806c6db77b8eaa6e00dcfb6b567706feae8dbb8
+
+An examination of history shows that prior to `Linux 1.3.87`_, the ext2
+filesystem, at least, didn't update atime when following a link.
+Unfortunately we have no record of why that behavior was changed.
+
+In any case, access time must now be updated and that operation can be
+quite complex.  Trying to stay in RCU-walk while doing it is best
+avoided.  Fortunately it is often permitted to skip the ``atime``
+update.  Because ``atime`` updates cause performance problems in various
+areas, Linux supports the ``relatime`` mount option, which generally
+limits the updates of ``atime`` to once per day on files that aren't
+being changed (and symlinks never change once created).  Even without
+``relatime``, many filesystems record ``atime`` with a one-second
+granularity, so only one update per second is required.
+
+It is easy to test if an ``atime`` update is needed while in RCU-walk
+mode and, if it isn't, the update can be skipped and RCU-walk mode
+continues.  Only when an ``atime`` update is actually required does the
+path walk drop down to REF-walk.  All of this is handled in the
+``get_link()`` function.
+
+A few flags
+-----------
+
+A suitable way to wrap up this tour of pathname walking is to list
+the various flags that can be stored in the ``nameidata`` to guide the
+lookup process.  Many of these are only meaningful on the final
+component, others reflect the current state of the pathname lookup, and some
+apply restrictions to all path components encountered in the path lookup.
+
+And then there is ``LOOKUP_EMPTY``, which doesn't fit conceptually with
+the others.  If this is not set, an empty pathname causes an error
+very early on.  If it is set, empty pathnames are not considered to be
+an error.
+
+Global state flags
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+We have already met two global state flags: ``LOOKUP_RCU`` and
+``LOOKUP_REVAL``.  These select between one of three overall approaches
+to lookup: RCU-walk, REF-walk, and REF-walk with forced revalidation.
+
+``LOOKUP_PARENT`` indicates that the final component hasn't been reached
+yet.  This is primarily used to tell the audit subsystem the full
+context of a particular access being audited.
+
+``ND_ROOT_PRESET`` indicates that the ``root`` field in the ``nameidata`` was
+provided by the caller, so it shouldn't be released when it is no
+longer needed.
+
+``ND_JUMPED`` means that the current dentry was chosen not because
+it had the right name but for some other reason.  This happens when
+following "``..``", following a symlink to ``/``, crossing a mount point
+or accessing a "``/proc/$PID/fd/$FD``" symlink (also known as a "magic
+link"). In this case the filesystem has not been asked to revalidate the
+name (with ``d_revalidate()``).  In such cases the inode may still need
+to be revalidated, so ``d_op->d_weak_revalidate()`` is called if
+``ND_JUMPED`` is set when the look completes - which may be at the
+final component or, when creating, unlinking, or renaming, at the penultimate component.
+
+Resolution-restriction flags
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+In order to allow userspace to protect itself against certain race conditions
+and attack scenarios involving changing path components, a series of flags are
+available which apply restrictions to all path components encountered during
+path lookup. These flags are exposed through ``openat2()``'s ``resolve`` field.
+
+``LOOKUP_NO_SYMLINKS`` blocks all symlink traversals (including magic-links).
+This is distinctly different from ``LOOKUP_FOLLOW``, because the latter only
+relates to restricting the following of trailing symlinks.
+
+``LOOKUP_NO_MAGICLINKS`` blocks all magic-link traversals. Filesystems must
+ensure that they return errors from ``nd_jump_link()``, because that is how
+``LOOKUP_NO_MAGICLINKS`` and other magic-link restrictions are implemented.
+
+``LOOKUP_NO_XDEV`` blocks all ``vfsmount`` traversals (this includes both
+bind-mounts and ordinary mounts). Note that the ``vfsmount`` which contains the
+lookup is determined by the first mountpoint the path lookup reaches --
+absolute paths start with the ``vfsmount`` of ``/``, and relative paths start
+with the ``dfd``'s ``vfsmount``. Magic-links are only permitted if the
+``vfsmount`` of the path is unchanged.
+
+``LOOKUP_BENEATH`` blocks any path components which resolve outside the
+starting point of the resolution. This is done by blocking ``nd_jump_root()``
+as well as blocking ".." if it would jump outside the starting point.
+``rename_lock`` and ``mount_lock`` are used to detect attacks against the
+resolution of "..". Magic-links are also blocked.
+
+``LOOKUP_IN_ROOT`` resolves all path components as though the starting point
+were the filesystem root. ``nd_jump_root()`` brings the resolution back to
+the starting point, and ".." at the starting point will act as a no-op. As with
+``LOOKUP_BENEATH``, ``rename_lock`` and ``mount_lock`` are used to detect
+attacks against ".." resolution. Magic-links are also blocked.
+
+Final-component flags
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Some of these flags are only set when the final component is being
+considered.  Others are only checked for when considering that final
+component.
+
+``LOOKUP_AUTOMOUNT`` ensures that, if the final component is an automount
+point, then the mount is triggered.  Some operations would trigger it
+anyway, but operations like ``stat()`` deliberately don't.  ``statfs()``
+needs to trigger the mount but otherwise behaves a lot like ``stat()``, so
+it sets ``LOOKUP_AUTOMOUNT``, as does "``quotactl()``" and the handling of
+"``mount --bind``".
+
+``LOOKUP_FOLLOW`` has a similar function to ``LOOKUP_AUTOMOUNT`` but for
+symlinks.  Some system calls set or clear it implicitly, while
+others have API flags such as ``AT_SYMLINK_FOLLOW`` and
+``UMOUNT_NOFOLLOW`` to control it.  Its effect is similar to
+``WALK_GET`` that we already met, but it is used in a different way.
+
+``LOOKUP_DIRECTORY`` insists that the final component is a directory.
+Various callers set this and it is also set when the final component
+is found to be followed by a slash.
+
+Finally ``LOOKUP_OPEN``, ``LOOKUP_CREATE``, ``LOOKUP_EXCL``, and
+``LOOKUP_RENAME_TARGET`` are not used directly by the VFS but are made
+available to the filesystem and particularly the ``->d_revalidate()``
+method.  A filesystem can choose not to bother revalidating too hard
+if it knows that it will be asked to open or create the file soon.
+These flags were previously useful for ``->lookup()`` too but with the
+introduction of ``->atomic_open()`` they are less relevant there.
+
+End of the road
+---------------
+
+Despite its complexity, all this pathname lookup code appears to be
+in good shape - various parts are certainly easier to understand now
+than even a couple of releases ago.  But that doesn't mean it is
+"finished".   As already mentioned, RCU-walk currently only follows
+symlinks that are stored in the inode so, while it handles many ext4
+symlinks, it doesn't help with NFS, XFS, or Btrfs.  That support
+is not likely to be long delayed.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1aa7ce099
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,382 @@
+Path walking and name lookup locking
+====================================
+
+Path resolution is the finding a dentry corresponding to a path name string, by
+performing a path walk. Typically, for every open(), stat() etc., the path name
+will be resolved. Paths are resolved by walking the namespace tree, starting
+with the first component of the pathname (eg. root or cwd) with a known dentry,
+then finding the child of that dentry, which is named the next component in the
+path string. Then repeating the lookup from the child dentry and finding its
+child with the next element, and so on.
+
+Since it is a frequent operation for workloads like multiuser environments and
+web servers, it is important to optimize this code.
+
+Path walking synchronisation history:
+Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup (dcache hash lookup) and
+thus in every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, fast-walk
+algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock at the beginning and walking
+as many cached path component dentries as possible. This significantly
+decreases the number of acquisition of dcache_lock. However it also increases
+the lock hold time significantly and affects performance in large SMP machines.
+Since 2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using a new locking model that uses RCU to
+make dcache look-up lock-free.
+
+All the above algorithms required taking a lock and reference count on the
+dentry that was looked up, so that may be used as the basis for walking the
+next path element. This is inefficient and unscalable. It is inefficient
+because of the locks and atomic operations required for every dentry element
+slows things down. It is not scalable because many parallel applications that
+are path-walk intensive tend to do path lookups starting from a common dentry
+(usually, the root "/" or current working directory). So contention on these
+common path elements causes lock and cacheline queueing.
+
+Since 2.6.38, RCU is used to make a significant part of the entire path walk
+(including dcache look-up) completely "store-free" (so, no locks, atomics, or
+even stores into cachelines of common dentries). This is known as "rcu-walk"
+path walking.
+
+Path walking overview
+=====================
+
+A name string specifies a start (root directory, cwd, fd-relative) and a
+sequence of elements (directory entry names), which together refer to a path in
+the namespace. A path is represented as a (dentry, vfsmount) tuple. The name
+elements are sub-strings, separated by '/'.
+
+Name lookups will want to find a particular path that a name string refers to
+(usually the final element, or parent of final element). This is done by taking
+the path given by the name's starting point (which we know in advance -- eg.
+current->fs->cwd or current->fs->root) as the first parent of the lookup. Then
+iteratively for each subsequent name element, look up the child of the current
+parent with the given name and if it is not the desired entry, make it the
+parent for the next lookup.
+
+A parent, of course, must be a directory, and we must have appropriate
+permissions on the parent inode to be able to walk into it.
+
+Turning the child into a parent for the next lookup requires more checks and
+procedures. Symlinks essentially substitute the symlink name for the target
+name in the name string, and require some recursive path walking.  Mount points
+must be followed into (thus changing the vfsmount that subsequent path elements
+refer to), switching from the mount point path to the root of the particular
+mounted vfsmount. These behaviours are variously modified depending on the
+exact path walking flags.
+
+Path walking then must, broadly, do several particular things:
+- find the start point of the walk;
+- perform permissions and validity checks on inodes;
+- perform dcache hash name lookups on (parent, name element) tuples;
+- traverse mount points;
+- traverse symlinks;
+- lookup and create missing parts of the path on demand.
+
+Safe store-free look-up of dcache hash table
+============================================
+
+Dcache name lookup
+------------------
+In order to lookup a dcache (parent, name) tuple, we take a hash on the tuple
+and use that to select a bucket in the dcache-hash table. The list of entries
+in that bucket is then walked, and we do a full comparison of each entry
+against our (parent, name) tuple.
+
+The hash lists are RCU protected, so list walking is not serialised with
+concurrent updates (insertion, deletion from the hash). This is a standard RCU
+list application with the exception of renames, which will be covered below.
+
+Parent and name members of a dentry, as well as its membership in the dcache
+hash, and its inode are protected by the per-dentry d_lock spinlock. A
+reference is taken on the dentry (while the fields are verified under d_lock),
+and this stabilises its d_inode pointer and actual inode. This gives a stable
+point to perform the next step of our path walk against.
+
+These members are also protected by d_seq seqlock, although this offers
+read-only protection and no durability of results, so care must be taken when
+using d_seq for synchronisation (see seqcount based lookups, below).
+
+Renames
+-------
+Back to the rename case. In usual RCU protected lists, the only operations that
+will happen to an object is insertion, and then eventually removal from the
+list. The object will not be reused until an RCU grace period is complete.
+This ensures the RCU list traversal primitives can run over the object without
+problems (see RCU documentation for how this works).
+
+However when a dentry is renamed, its hash value can change, requiring it to be
+moved to a new hash list. Allocating and inserting a new alias would be
+expensive and also problematic for directory dentries. Latency would be far to
+high to wait for a grace period after removing the dentry and before inserting
+it in the new hash bucket. So what is done is to insert the dentry into the
+new list immediately.
+
+However, when the dentry's list pointers are updated to point to objects in the
+new list before waiting for a grace period, this can result in a concurrent RCU
+lookup of the old list veering off into the new (incorrect) list and missing
+the remaining dentries on the list.
+
+There is no fundamental problem with walking down the wrong list, because the
+dentry comparisons will never match. However it is fatal to miss a matching
+dentry. So a seqlock is used to detect when a rename has occurred, and so the
+lookup can be retried.
+
+         1      2      3
+        +---+  +---+  +---+
+hlist-->| N-+->| N-+->| N-+->
+head <--+-P |<-+-P |<-+-P |
+        +---+  +---+  +---+
+
+Rename of dentry 2 may require it deleted from the above list, and inserted
+into a new list. Deleting 2 gives the following list.
+
+         1             3
+        +---+         +---+     (don't worry, the longer pointers do not
+hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+->    impose a measurable performance overhead
+head <--+-P |<--------+-P |      on modern CPUs)
+        +---+         +---+
+          ^      2      ^
+          |    +---+    |
+          |    | N-+----+
+          +----+-P |
+               +---+
+
+This is a standard RCU-list deletion, which leaves the deleted object's
+pointers intact, so a concurrent list walker that is currently looking at
+object 2 will correctly continue to object 3 when it is time to traverse the
+next object.
+
+However, when inserting object 2 onto a new list, we end up with this:
+
+         1             3
+        +---+         +---+
+hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+->
+head <--+-P |<--------+-P |
+        +---+         +---+
+                 2
+               +---+
+               | N-+---->
+          <----+-P |
+               +---+
+
+Because we didn't wait for a grace period, there may be a concurrent lookup
+still at 2. Now when it follows 2's 'next' pointer, it will walk off into
+another list without ever having checked object 3.
+
+A related, but distinctly different, issue is that of rename atomicity versus
+lookup operations. If a file is renamed from 'A' to 'B', a lookup must only
+find either 'A' or 'B'. So if a lookup of 'A' returns NULL, a subsequent lookup
+of 'B' must succeed (note the reverse is not true).
+
+Between deleting the dentry from the old hash list, and inserting it on the new
+hash list, a lookup may find neither 'A' nor 'B' matching the dentry. The same
+rename seqlock is also used to cover this race in much the same way, by
+retrying a negative lookup result if a rename was in progress.
+
+Seqcount based lookups
+----------------------
+In refcount based dcache lookups, d_lock is used to serialise access to
+the dentry, stabilising it while comparing its name and parent and then
+taking a reference count (the reference count then gives a stable place to
+start the next part of the path walk from).
+
+As explained above, we would like to do path walking without taking locks or
+reference counts on intermediate dentries along the path. To do this, a per
+dentry seqlock (d_seq) is used to take a "coherent snapshot" of what the dentry
+looks like (its name, parent, and inode). That snapshot is then used to start
+the next part of the path walk. When loading the coherent snapshot under d_seq,
+care must be taken to load the members up-front, and use those pointers rather
+than reloading from the dentry later on (otherwise we'd have interesting things
+like d_inode going NULL underneath us, if the name was unlinked).
+
+Also important is to avoid performing any destructive operations (pretty much:
+no non-atomic stores to shared data), and to recheck the seqcount when we are
+"done" with the operation. Retry or abort if the seqcount does not match.
+Avoiding destructive or changing operations means we can easily unwind from
+failure.
+
+What this means is that a caller, provided they are holding RCU lock to
+protect the dentry object from disappearing, can perform a seqcount based
+lookup which does not increment the refcount on the dentry or write to
+it in any way. This returned dentry can be used for subsequent operations,
+provided that d_seq is rechecked after that operation is complete.
+
+Inodes are also rcu freed, so the seqcount lookup dentry's inode may also be
+queried for permissions.
+
+With this two parts of the puzzle, we can do path lookups without taking
+locks or refcounts on dentry elements.
+
+RCU-walk path walking design
+============================
+
+Path walking code now has two distinct modes, ref-walk and rcu-walk. ref-walk
+is the traditional[*] way of performing dcache lookups using d_lock to
+serialise concurrent modifications to the dentry and take a reference count on
+it. ref-walk is simple and obvious, and may sleep, take locks, etc while path
+walking is operating on each dentry. rcu-walk uses seqcount based dentry
+lookups, and can perform lookup of intermediate elements without any stores to
+shared data in the dentry or inode. rcu-walk can not be applied to all cases,
+eg. if the filesystem must sleep or perform non trivial operations, rcu-walk
+must be switched to ref-walk mode.
+
+[*] RCU is still used for the dentry hash lookup in ref-walk, but not the full
+    path walk.
+
+Where ref-walk uses a stable, refcounted ``parent'' to walk the remaining
+path string, rcu-walk uses a d_seq protected snapshot. When looking up a
+child of this parent snapshot, we open d_seq critical section on the child
+before closing d_seq critical section on the parent. This gives an interlocking
+ladder of snapshots to walk down.
+
+
+     proc 101
+      /----------------\
+     / comm:    "vi"    \
+    /  fs.root: dentry0  \
+    \  fs.cwd:  dentry2  /
+     \                  /
+      \----------------/
+
+So when vi wants to open("/home/npiggin/test.c", O_RDWR), then it will
+start from current->fs->root, which is a pinned dentry. Alternatively,
+"./test.c" would start from cwd; both names refer to the same path in
+the context of proc101.
+
+     dentry 0
+    +---------------------+   rcu-walk begins here, we note d_seq, check the
+    | name:    "/"        |   inode's permission, and then look up the next
+    | inode:   10         |   path element which is "home"...
+    | children:"home", ...|
+    +---------------------+
+              |
+     dentry 1 V
+    +---------------------+   ... which brings us here. We find dentry1 via
+    | name:    "home"     |   hash lookup, then note d_seq and compare name
+    | inode:   678        |   string and parent pointer. When we have a match,
+    | children:"npiggin"  |   we now recheck the d_seq of dentry0. Then we
+    +---------------------+   check inode and look up the next element.
+              |
+     dentry2  V
+    +---------------------+   Note: if dentry0 is now modified, lookup is
+    | name:    "npiggin"  |   not necessarily invalid, so we need only keep a
+    | inode:   543        |   parent for d_seq verification, and grandparents
+    | children:"a.c", ... |   can be forgotten.
+    +---------------------+
+              |
+     dentry3  V
+    +---------------------+   At this point we have our destination dentry.
+    | name:    "a.c"      |   We now take its d_lock, verify d_seq of this
+    | inode:   14221      |   dentry. If that checks out, we can increment
+    | children:NULL       |   its refcount because we're holding d_lock.
+    +---------------------+
+
+Taking a refcount on a dentry from rcu-walk mode, by taking its d_lock,
+re-checking its d_seq, and then incrementing its refcount is called
+"dropping rcu" or dropping from rcu-walk into ref-walk mode.
+
+It is, in some sense, a bit of a house of cards. If the seqcount check of the
+parent snapshot fails, the house comes down, because we had closed the d_seq
+section on the grandparent, so we have nothing left to stand on. In that case,
+the path walk must be fully restarted (which we do in ref-walk mode, to avoid
+live locks). It is costly to have a full restart, but fortunately they are
+quite rare.
+
+When we reach a point where sleeping is required, or a filesystem callout
+requires ref-walk, then instead of restarting the walk, we attempt to drop rcu
+at the last known good dentry we have. Avoiding a full restart in ref-walk in
+these cases is fundamental for performance and scalability because blocking
+operations such as creates and unlinks are not uncommon.
+
+The detailed design for rcu-walk is like this:
+* LOOKUP_RCU is set in nd->flags, which distinguishes rcu-walk from ref-walk.
+* Take the RCU lock for the entire path walk, starting with the acquiring
+  of the starting path (eg. root/cwd/fd-path). So now dentry refcounts are
+  not required for dentry persistence.
+* synchronize_rcu is called when unregistering a filesystem, so we can
+  access d_ops and i_ops during rcu-walk.
+* Similarly take the vfsmount lock for the entire path walk. So now mnt
+  refcounts are not required for persistence. Also we are free to perform mount
+  lookups, and to assume dentry mount points and mount roots are stable up and
+  down the path.
+* Have a per-dentry seqlock to protect the dentry name, parent, and inode,
+  so we can load this tuple atomically, and also check whether any of its
+  members have changed.
+* Dentry lookups (based on parent, candidate string tuple) recheck the parent
+  sequence after the child is found in case anything changed in the parent
+  during the path walk.
+* inode is also RCU protected so we can load d_inode and use the inode for
+  limited things.
+* i_mode, i_uid, i_gid can be tested for exec permissions during path walk.
+* i_op can be loaded.
+* When the destination dentry is reached, drop rcu there (ie. take d_lock,
+  verify d_seq, increment refcount).
+* If seqlock verification fails anywhere along the path, do a full restart
+  of the path lookup in ref-walk mode. -ECHILD tends to be used (for want of
+  a better errno) to signal an rcu-walk failure.
+
+The cases where rcu-walk cannot continue are:
+* NULL dentry (ie. any uncached path element)
+* Following links
+
+It may be possible eventually to make following links rcu-walk aware.
+
+Uncached path elements will always require dropping to ref-walk mode, at the
+very least because i_mutex needs to be grabbed, and objects allocated.
+
+Final note:
+"store-free" path walking is not strictly store free. We take vfsmount lock
+and refcounts (both of which can be made per-cpu), and we also store to the
+stack (which is essentially CPU-local), and we also have to take locks and
+refcount on final dentry.
+
+The point is that shared data, where practically possible, is not locked
+or stored into. The result is massive improvements in performance and
+scalability of path resolution.
+
+
+Interesting statistics
+======================
+
+The following table gives rcu lookup statistics for a few simple workloads
+(2s12c24t Westmere, debian non-graphical system). Ungraceful are attempts to
+drop rcu that fail due to d_seq failure and requiring the entire path lookup
+again. Other cases are successful rcu-drops that are required before the final
+element, nodentry for missing dentry, revalidate for filesystem revalidate
+routine requiring rcu drop, permission for permission check requiring drop,
+and link for symlink traversal requiring drop.
+
+     rcu-lookups     restart  nodentry          link  revalidate  permission
+bootup     47121           0      4624          1010       10283        7852
+dbench  25386793           0   6778659(26.7%)     55         549        1156
+kbuild   2696672          10     64442(2.3%)  108764(4.0%)     1        1590
+git diff   39605           0        28             2           0         106
+vfstest 24185492        4945    708725(2.9%) 1076136(4.4%)     0        2651
+
+What this shows is that failed rcu-walk lookups, ie. ones that are restarted
+entirely with ref-walk, are quite rare. Even the "vfstest" case which
+specifically has concurrent renames/mkdir/rmdir/ creat/unlink/etc to exercise
+such races is not showing a huge amount of restarts.
+
+Dropping from rcu-walk to ref-walk mean that we have encountered a dentry where
+the reference count needs to be taken for some reason. This is either because
+we have reached the target of the path walk, or because we have encountered a
+condition that can't be resolved in rcu-walk mode.  Ideally, we drop rcu-walk
+only when we have reached the target dentry, so the other statistics show where
+this does not happen.
+
+Note that a graceful drop from rcu-walk mode due to something such as the
+dentry not existing (which can be common) is not necessarily a failure of
+rcu-walk scheme, because some elements of the path may have been walked in
+rcu-walk mode. The further we get from common path elements (such as cwd or
+root), the less contended the dentry is likely to be. The closer we are to
+common path elements, the more likely they will exist in dentry cache.
+
+
+Papers and other documentation on dcache locking
+================================================
+
+1. Scaling dcache with RCU (https://linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=7124).
+
+2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html
+
+3. path-lookup.md in this directory.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/porting.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6aaf340f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,963 @@
+====================
+Changes since 2.5.0:
+====================
+
+---
+
+**recommended**
+
+New helpers: sb_bread(), sb_getblk(), sb_find_get_block(), set_bh(),
+sb_set_blocksize() and sb_min_blocksize().
+
+Use them.
+
+(sb_find_get_block() replaces 2.4's get_hash_table())
+
+---
+
+**recommended**
+
+New methods: ->alloc_inode() and ->destroy_inode().
+
+Remove inode->u.foo_inode_i
+
+Declare::
+
+	struct foo_inode_info {
+		/* fs-private stuff */
+		struct inode vfs_inode;
+	};
+	static inline struct foo_inode_info *FOO_I(struct inode *inode)
+	{
+		return list_entry(inode, struct foo_inode_info, vfs_inode);
+	}
+
+Use FOO_I(inode) instead of &inode->u.foo_inode_i;
+
+Add foo_alloc_inode() and foo_destroy_inode() - the former should allocate
+foo_inode_info and return the address of ->vfs_inode, the latter should free
+FOO_I(inode) (see in-tree filesystems for examples).
+
+Make them ->alloc_inode and ->destroy_inode in your super_operations.
+
+Keep in mind that now you need explicit initialization of private data
+typically between calling iget_locked() and unlocking the inode.
+
+At some point that will become mandatory.
+
+**mandatory**
+
+The foo_inode_info should always be allocated through alloc_inode_sb() rather
+than kmem_cache_alloc() or kmalloc() related to set up the inode reclaim context
+correctly.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+Change of file_system_type method (->read_super to ->get_sb)
+
+->read_super() is no more.  Ditto for DECLARE_FSTYPE and DECLARE_FSTYPE_DEV.
+
+Turn your foo_read_super() into a function that would return 0 in case of
+success and negative number in case of error (-EINVAL unless you have more
+informative error value to report).  Call it foo_fill_super().  Now declare::
+
+  int foo_get_sb(struct file_system_type *fs_type,
+	int flags, const char *dev_name, void *data, struct vfsmount *mnt)
+  {
+	return get_sb_bdev(fs_type, flags, dev_name, data, foo_fill_super,
+			   mnt);
+  }
+
+(or similar with s/bdev/nodev/ or s/bdev/single/, depending on the kind of
+filesystem).
+
+Replace DECLARE_FSTYPE... with explicit initializer and have ->get_sb set as
+foo_get_sb.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+Locking change: ->s_vfs_rename_sem is taken only by cross-directory renames.
+Most likely there is no need to change anything, but if you relied on
+global exclusion between renames for some internal purpose - you need to
+change your internal locking.  Otherwise exclusion warranties remain the
+same (i.e. parents and victim are locked, etc.).
+
+---
+
+**informational**
+
+Now we have the exclusion between ->lookup() and directory removal (by
+->rmdir() and ->rename()).  If you used to need that exclusion and do
+it by internal locking (most of filesystems couldn't care less) - you
+can relax your locking.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->lookup(), ->truncate(), ->create(), ->unlink(), ->mknod(), ->mkdir(),
+->rmdir(), ->link(), ->lseek(), ->symlink(), ->rename()
+and ->readdir() are called without BKL now.  Grab it on entry, drop upon return
+- that will guarantee the same locking you used to have.  If your method or its
+parts do not need BKL - better yet, now you can shift lock_kernel() and
+unlock_kernel() so that they would protect exactly what needs to be
+protected.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+BKL is also moved from around sb operations. BKL should have been shifted into
+individual fs sb_op functions.  If you don't need it, remove it.
+
+---
+
+**informational**
+
+check for ->link() target not being a directory is done by callers.  Feel
+free to drop it...
+
+---
+
+**informational**
+
+->link() callers hold ->i_mutex on the object we are linking to.  Some of your
+problems might be over...
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+new file_system_type method - kill_sb(superblock).  If you are converting
+an existing filesystem, set it according to ->fs_flags::
+
+	FS_REQUIRES_DEV		-	kill_block_super
+	FS_LITTER		-	kill_litter_super
+	neither			-	kill_anon_super
+
+FS_LITTER is gone - just remove it from fs_flags.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+FS_SINGLE is gone (actually, that had happened back when ->get_sb()
+went in - and hadn't been documented ;-/).  Just remove it from fs_flags
+(and see ->get_sb() entry for other actions).
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->setattr() is called without BKL now.  Caller _always_ holds ->i_mutex, so
+watch for ->i_mutex-grabbing code that might be used by your ->setattr().
+Callers of notify_change() need ->i_mutex now.
+
+---
+
+**recommended**
+
+New super_block field ``struct export_operations *s_export_op`` for
+explicit support for exporting, e.g. via NFS.  The structure is fully
+documented at its declaration in include/linux/fs.h, and in
+Documentation/filesystems/nfs/exporting.rst.
+
+Briefly it allows for the definition of decode_fh and encode_fh operations
+to encode and decode filehandles, and allows the filesystem to use
+a standard helper function for decode_fh, and provide file-system specific
+support for this helper, particularly get_parent.
+
+It is planned that this will be required for exporting once the code
+settles down a bit.
+
+**mandatory**
+
+s_export_op is now required for exporting a filesystem.
+isofs, ext2, ext3, resierfs, fat
+can be used as examples of very different filesystems.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+iget4() and the read_inode2 callback have been superseded by iget5_locked()
+which has the following prototype::
+
+    struct inode *iget5_locked(struct super_block *sb, unsigned long ino,
+				int (*test)(struct inode *, void *),
+				int (*set)(struct inode *, void *),
+				void *data);
+
+'test' is an additional function that can be used when the inode
+number is not sufficient to identify the actual file object. 'set'
+should be a non-blocking function that initializes those parts of a
+newly created inode to allow the test function to succeed. 'data' is
+passed as an opaque value to both test and set functions.
+
+When the inode has been created by iget5_locked(), it will be returned with the
+I_NEW flag set and will still be locked.  The filesystem then needs to finalize
+the initialization. Once the inode is initialized it must be unlocked by
+calling unlock_new_inode().
+
+The filesystem is responsible for setting (and possibly testing) i_ino
+when appropriate. There is also a simpler iget_locked function that
+just takes the superblock and inode number as arguments and does the
+test and set for you.
+
+e.g.::
+
+	inode = iget_locked(sb, ino);
+	if (inode->i_state & I_NEW) {
+		err = read_inode_from_disk(inode);
+		if (err < 0) {
+			iget_failed(inode);
+			return err;
+		}
+		unlock_new_inode(inode);
+	}
+
+Note that if the process of setting up a new inode fails, then iget_failed()
+should be called on the inode to render it dead, and an appropriate error
+should be passed back to the caller.
+
+---
+
+**recommended**
+
+->getattr() finally getting used.  See instances in nfs, minix, etc.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->revalidate() is gone.  If your filesystem had it - provide ->getattr()
+and let it call whatever you had as ->revlidate() + (for symlinks that
+had ->revalidate()) add calls in ->follow_link()/->readlink().
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->d_parent changes are not protected by BKL anymore.  Read access is safe
+if at least one of the following is true:
+
+	* filesystem has no cross-directory rename()
+	* we know that parent had been locked (e.g. we are looking at
+	  ->d_parent of ->lookup() argument).
+	* we are called from ->rename().
+	* the child's ->d_lock is held
+
+Audit your code and add locking if needed.  Notice that any place that is
+not protected by the conditions above is risky even in the old tree - you
+had been relying on BKL and that's prone to screwups.  Old tree had quite
+a few holes of that kind - unprotected access to ->d_parent leading to
+anything from oops to silent memory corruption.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+FS_NOMOUNT is gone.  If you use it - just set SB_NOUSER in flags
+(see rootfs for one kind of solution and bdev/socket/pipe for another).
+
+---
+
+**recommended**
+
+Use bdev_read_only(bdev) instead of is_read_only(kdev).  The latter
+is still alive, but only because of the mess in drivers/s390/block/dasd.c.
+As soon as it gets fixed is_read_only() will die.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->permission() is called without BKL now. Grab it on entry, drop upon
+return - that will guarantee the same locking you used to have.  If
+your method or its parts do not need BKL - better yet, now you can
+shift lock_kernel() and unlock_kernel() so that they would protect
+exactly what needs to be protected.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->statfs() is now called without BKL held.  BKL should have been
+shifted into individual fs sb_op functions where it's not clear that
+it's safe to remove it.  If you don't need it, remove it.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+is_read_only() is gone; use bdev_read_only() instead.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+destroy_buffers() is gone; use invalidate_bdev().
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+fsync_dev() is gone; use fsync_bdev().  NOTE: lvm breakage is
+deliberate; as soon as struct block_device * is propagated in a reasonable
+way by that code fixing will become trivial; until then nothing can be
+done.
+
+**mandatory**
+
+block truncatation on error exit from ->write_begin, and ->direct_IO
+moved from generic methods (block_write_begin, cont_write_begin,
+nobh_write_begin, blockdev_direct_IO*) to callers.  Take a look at
+ext2_write_failed and callers for an example.
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->truncate is gone.  The whole truncate sequence needs to be
+implemented in ->setattr, which is now mandatory for filesystems
+implementing on-disk size changes.  Start with a copy of the old inode_setattr
+and vmtruncate, and the reorder the vmtruncate + foofs_vmtruncate sequence to
+be in order of zeroing blocks using block_truncate_page or similar helpers,
+size update and on finally on-disk truncation which should not fail.
+setattr_prepare (which used to be inode_change_ok) now includes the size checks
+for ATTR_SIZE and must be called in the beginning of ->setattr unconditionally.
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->clear_inode() and ->delete_inode() are gone; ->evict_inode() should
+be used instead.  It gets called whenever the inode is evicted, whether it has
+remaining links or not.  Caller does *not* evict the pagecache or inode-associated
+metadata buffers; the method has to use truncate_inode_pages_final() to get rid
+of those. Caller makes sure async writeback cannot be running for the inode while
+(or after) ->evict_inode() is called.
+
+->drop_inode() returns int now; it's called on final iput() with
+inode->i_lock held and it returns true if filesystems wants the inode to be
+dropped.  As before, generic_drop_inode() is still the default and it's been
+updated appropriately.  generic_delete_inode() is also alive and it consists
+simply of return 1.  Note that all actual eviction work is done by caller after
+->drop_inode() returns.
+
+As before, clear_inode() must be called exactly once on each call of
+->evict_inode() (as it used to be for each call of ->delete_inode()).  Unlike
+before, if you are using inode-associated metadata buffers (i.e.
+mark_buffer_dirty_inode()), it's your responsibility to call
+invalidate_inode_buffers() before clear_inode().
+
+NOTE: checking i_nlink in the beginning of ->write_inode() and bailing out
+if it's zero is not *and* *never* *had* *been* enough.  Final unlink() and iput()
+may happen while the inode is in the middle of ->write_inode(); e.g. if you blindly
+free the on-disk inode, you may end up doing that while ->write_inode() is writing
+to it.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+.d_delete() now only advises the dcache as to whether or not to cache
+unreferenced dentries, and is now only called when the dentry refcount goes to
+0. Even on 0 refcount transition, it must be able to tolerate being called 0,
+1, or more times (eg. constant, idempotent).
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+.d_compare() calling convention and locking rules are significantly
+changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.rst (and
+look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+.d_hash() calling convention and locking rules are significantly
+changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.rst (and
+look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+dcache_lock is gone, replaced by fine grained locks. See fs/dcache.c
+for details of what locks to replace dcache_lock with in order to protect
+particular things. Most of the time, a filesystem only needs ->d_lock, which
+protects *all* the dcache state of a given dentry.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+Filesystems must RCU-free their inodes, if they can have been accessed
+via rcu-walk path walk (basically, if the file can have had a path name in the
+vfs namespace).
+
+Even though i_dentry and i_rcu share storage in a union, we will
+initialize the former in inode_init_always(), so just leave it alone in
+the callback.  It used to be necessary to clean it there, but not anymore
+(starting at 3.2).
+
+---
+
+**recommended**
+
+vfs now tries to do path walking in "rcu-walk mode", which avoids
+atomic operations and scalability hazards on dentries and inodes (see
+Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt). d_hash and d_compare changes
+(above) are examples of the changes required to support this. For more complex
+filesystem callbacks, the vfs drops out of rcu-walk mode before the fs call, so
+no changes are required to the filesystem. However, this is costly and loses
+the benefits of rcu-walk mode. We will begin to add filesystem callbacks that
+are rcu-walk aware, shown below. Filesystems should take advantage of this
+where possible.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+d_revalidate is a callback that is made on every path element (if
+the filesystem provides it), which requires dropping out of rcu-walk mode. This
+may now be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU). -ECHILD should be
+returned if the filesystem cannot handle rcu-walk. See
+Documentation/filesystems/vfs.rst for more details.
+
+permission is an inode permission check that is called on many or all
+directory inodes on the way down a path walk (to check for exec permission). It
+must now be rcu-walk aware (mask & MAY_NOT_BLOCK).  See
+Documentation/filesystems/vfs.rst for more details.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+In ->fallocate() you must check the mode option passed in.  If your
+filesystem does not support hole punching (deallocating space in the middle of a
+file) you must return -EOPNOTSUPP if FALLOC_FL_PUNCH_HOLE is set in mode.
+Currently you can only have FALLOC_FL_PUNCH_HOLE with FALLOC_FL_KEEP_SIZE set,
+so the i_size should not change when hole punching, even when puching the end of
+a file off.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->get_sb() is gone.  Switch to use of ->mount().  Typically it's just
+a matter of switching from calling ``get_sb_``... to ``mount_``... and changing
+the function type.  If you were doing it manually, just switch from setting
+->mnt_root to some pointer to returning that pointer.  On errors return
+ERR_PTR(...).
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->permission() and generic_permission()have lost flags
+argument; instead of passing IPERM_FLAG_RCU we add MAY_NOT_BLOCK into mask.
+
+generic_permission() has also lost the check_acl argument; ACL checking
+has been taken to VFS and filesystems need to provide a non-NULL ->i_op->get_acl
+to read an ACL from disk.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+If you implement your own ->llseek() you must handle SEEK_HOLE and
+SEEK_DATA.  You can hanle this by returning -EINVAL, but it would be nicer to
+support it in some way.  The generic handler assumes that the entire file is
+data and there is a virtual hole at the end of the file.  So if the provided
+offset is less than i_size and SEEK_DATA is specified, return the same offset.
+If the above is true for the offset and you are given SEEK_HOLE, return the end
+of the file.  If the offset is i_size or greater return -ENXIO in either case.
+
+**mandatory**
+
+If you have your own ->fsync() you must make sure to call
+filemap_write_and_wait_range() so that all dirty pages are synced out properly.
+You must also keep in mind that ->fsync() is not called with i_mutex held
+anymore, so if you require i_mutex locking you must make sure to take it and
+release it yourself.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+d_alloc_root() is gone, along with a lot of bugs caused by code
+misusing it.  Replacement: d_make_root(inode).  On success d_make_root(inode)
+allocates and returns a new dentry instantiated with the passed in inode.
+On failure NULL is returned and the passed in inode is dropped so the reference
+to inode is consumed in all cases and failure handling need not do any cleanup
+for the inode.  If d_make_root(inode) is passed a NULL inode it returns NULL
+and also requires no further error handling. Typical usage is::
+
+	inode = foofs_new_inode(....);
+	s->s_root = d_make_root(inode);
+	if (!s->s_root)
+		/* Nothing needed for the inode cleanup */
+		return -ENOMEM;
+	...
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+The witch is dead!  Well, 2/3 of it, anyway.  ->d_revalidate() and
+->lookup() do *not* take struct nameidata anymore; just the flags.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->create() doesn't take ``struct nameidata *``; unlike the previous
+two, it gets "is it an O_EXCL or equivalent?" boolean argument.  Note that
+local filesystems can ignore tha argument - they are guaranteed that the
+object doesn't exist.  It's remote/distributed ones that might care...
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+FS_REVAL_DOT is gone; if you used to have it, add ->d_weak_revalidate()
+in your dentry operations instead.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+vfs_readdir() is gone; switch to iterate_dir() instead
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->readdir() is gone now; switch to ->iterate()
+
+**mandatory**
+
+vfs_follow_link has been removed.  Filesystems must use nd_set_link
+from ->follow_link for normal symlinks, or nd_jump_link for magic
+/proc/<pid> style links.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+iget5_locked()/ilookup5()/ilookup5_nowait() test() callback used to be
+called with both ->i_lock and inode_hash_lock held; the former is *not*
+taken anymore, so verify that your callbacks do not rely on it (none
+of the in-tree instances did).  inode_hash_lock is still held,
+of course, so they are still serialized wrt removal from inode hash,
+as well as wrt set() callback of iget5_locked().
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+d_materialise_unique() is gone; d_splice_alias() does everything you
+need now.  Remember that they have opposite orders of arguments ;-/
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+f_dentry is gone; use f_path.dentry, or, better yet, see if you can avoid
+it entirely.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+never call ->read() and ->write() directly; use __vfs_{read,write} or
+wrappers; instead of checking for ->write or ->read being NULL, look for
+FMODE_CAN_{WRITE,READ} in file->f_mode.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+do _not_ use new_sync_{read,write} for ->read/->write; leave it NULL
+instead.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+	->aio_read/->aio_write are gone.  Use ->read_iter/->write_iter.
+
+---
+
+**recommended**
+
+for embedded ("fast") symlinks just set inode->i_link to wherever the
+symlink body is and use simple_follow_link() as ->follow_link().
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+calling conventions for ->follow_link() have changed.  Instead of returning
+cookie and using nd_set_link() to store the body to traverse, we return
+the body to traverse and store the cookie using explicit void ** argument.
+nameidata isn't passed at all - nd_jump_link() doesn't need it and
+nd_[gs]et_link() is gone.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+calling conventions for ->put_link() have changed.  It gets inode instead of
+dentry,  it does not get nameidata at all and it gets called only when cookie
+is non-NULL.  Note that link body isn't available anymore, so if you need it,
+store it as cookie.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+any symlink that might use page_follow_link_light/page_put_link() must
+have inode_nohighmem(inode) called before anything might start playing with
+its pagecache.  No highmem pages should end up in the pagecache of such
+symlinks.  That includes any preseeding that might be done during symlink
+creation.  page_symlink() will honour the mapping gfp flags, so once
+you've done inode_nohighmem() it's safe to use, but if you allocate and
+insert the page manually, make sure to use the right gfp flags.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->follow_link() is replaced with ->get_link(); same API, except that
+
+	* ->get_link() gets inode as a separate argument
+	* ->get_link() may be called in RCU mode - in that case NULL
+	  dentry is passed
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->get_link() gets struct delayed_call ``*done`` now, and should do
+set_delayed_call() where it used to set ``*cookie``.
+
+->put_link() is gone - just give the destructor to set_delayed_call()
+in ->get_link().
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->getxattr() and xattr_handler.get() get dentry and inode passed separately.
+dentry might be yet to be attached to inode, so do _not_ use its ->d_inode
+in the instances.  Rationale: !@#!@# security_d_instantiate() needs to be
+called before we attach dentry to inode.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+symlinks are no longer the only inodes that do *not* have i_bdev/i_cdev/
+i_pipe/i_link union zeroed out at inode eviction.  As the result, you can't
+assume that non-NULL value in ->i_nlink at ->destroy_inode() implies that
+it's a symlink.  Checking ->i_mode is really needed now.  In-tree we had
+to fix shmem_destroy_callback() that used to take that kind of shortcut;
+watch out, since that shortcut is no longer valid.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->i_mutex is replaced with ->i_rwsem now.  inode_lock() et.al. work as
+they used to - they just take it exclusive.  However, ->lookup() may be
+called with parent locked shared.  Its instances must not
+
+	* use d_instantiate) and d_rehash() separately - use d_add() or
+	  d_splice_alias() instead.
+	* use d_rehash() alone - call d_add(new_dentry, NULL) instead.
+	* in the unlikely case when (read-only) access to filesystem
+	  data structures needs exclusion for some reason, arrange it
+	  yourself.  None of the in-tree filesystems needed that.
+	* rely on ->d_parent and ->d_name not changing after dentry has
+	  been fed to d_add() or d_splice_alias().  Again, none of the
+	  in-tree instances relied upon that.
+
+We are guaranteed that lookups of the same name in the same directory
+will not happen in parallel ("same" in the sense of your ->d_compare()).
+Lookups on different names in the same directory can and do happen in
+parallel now.
+
+---
+
+**recommended**
+
+->iterate_shared() is added; it's a parallel variant of ->iterate().
+Exclusion on struct file level is still provided (as well as that
+between it and lseek on the same struct file), but if your directory
+has been opened several times, you can get these called in parallel.
+Exclusion between that method and all directory-modifying ones is
+still provided, of course.
+
+Often enough ->iterate() can serve as ->iterate_shared() without any
+changes - it is a read-only operation, after all.  If you have any
+per-inode or per-dentry in-core data structures modified by ->iterate(),
+you might need something to serialize the access to them.  If you
+do dcache pre-seeding, you'll need to switch to d_alloc_parallel() for
+that; look for in-tree examples.
+
+Old method is only used if the new one is absent; eventually it will
+be removed.  Switch while you still can; the old one won't stay.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->atomic_open() calls without O_CREAT may happen in parallel.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->setxattr() and xattr_handler.set() get dentry and inode passed separately.
+The xattr_handler.set() gets passed the user namespace of the mount the inode
+is seen from so filesystems can idmap the i_uid and i_gid accordingly.
+dentry might be yet to be attached to inode, so do _not_ use its ->d_inode
+in the instances.  Rationale: !@#!@# security_d_instantiate() needs to be
+called before we attach dentry to inode and !@#!@##!@$!$#!@#$!@$!@$ smack
+->d_instantiate() uses not just ->getxattr() but ->setxattr() as well.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->d_compare() doesn't get parent as a separate argument anymore.  If you
+used it for finding the struct super_block involved, dentry->d_sb will
+work just as well; if it's something more complicated, use dentry->d_parent.
+Just be careful not to assume that fetching it more than once will yield
+the same value - in RCU mode it could change under you.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->rename() has an added flags argument.  Any flags not handled by the
+filesystem should result in EINVAL being returned.
+
+---
+
+
+**recommended**
+
+->readlink is optional for symlinks.  Don't set, unless filesystem needs
+to fake something for readlink(2).
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->getattr() is now passed a struct path rather than a vfsmount and
+dentry separately, and it now has request_mask and query_flags arguments
+to specify the fields and sync type requested by statx.  Filesystems not
+supporting any statx-specific features may ignore the new arguments.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->atomic_open() calling conventions have changed.  Gone is ``int *opened``,
+along with FILE_OPENED/FILE_CREATED.  In place of those we have
+FMODE_OPENED/FMODE_CREATED, set in file->f_mode.  Additionally, return
+value for 'called finish_no_open(), open it yourself' case has become
+0, not 1.  Since finish_no_open() itself is returning 0 now, that part
+does not need any changes in ->atomic_open() instances.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+alloc_file() has become static now; two wrappers are to be used instead.
+alloc_file_pseudo(inode, vfsmount, name, flags, ops) is for the cases
+when dentry needs to be created; that's the majority of old alloc_file()
+users.  Calling conventions: on success a reference to new struct file
+is returned and callers reference to inode is subsumed by that.  On
+failure, ERR_PTR() is returned and no caller's references are affected,
+so the caller needs to drop the inode reference it held.
+alloc_file_clone(file, flags, ops) does not affect any caller's references.
+On success you get a new struct file sharing the mount/dentry with the
+original, on failure - ERR_PTR().
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+->clone_file_range() and ->dedupe_file_range have been replaced with
+->remap_file_range().  See Documentation/filesystems/vfs.rst for more
+information.
+
+---
+
+**recommended**
+
+->lookup() instances doing an equivalent of::
+
+	if (IS_ERR(inode))
+		return ERR_CAST(inode);
+	return d_splice_alias(inode, dentry);
+
+don't need to bother with the check - d_splice_alias() will do the
+right thing when given ERR_PTR(...) as inode.  Moreover, passing NULL
+inode to d_splice_alias() will also do the right thing (equivalent of
+d_add(dentry, NULL); return NULL;), so that kind of special cases
+also doesn't need a separate treatment.
+
+---
+
+**strongly recommended**
+
+take the RCU-delayed parts of ->destroy_inode() into a new method -
+->free_inode().  If ->destroy_inode() becomes empty - all the better,
+just get rid of it.  Synchronous work (e.g. the stuff that can't
+be done from an RCU callback, or any WARN_ON() where we want the
+stack trace) *might* be movable to ->evict_inode(); however,
+that goes only for the things that are not needed to balance something
+done by ->alloc_inode().  IOW, if it's cleaning up the stuff that
+might have accumulated over the life of in-core inode, ->evict_inode()
+might be a fit.
+
+Rules for inode destruction:
+
+	* if ->destroy_inode() is non-NULL, it gets called
+	* if ->free_inode() is non-NULL, it gets scheduled by call_rcu()
+	* combination of NULL ->destroy_inode and NULL ->free_inode is
+	  treated as NULL/free_inode_nonrcu, to preserve the compatibility.
+
+Note that the callback (be it via ->free_inode() or explicit call_rcu()
+in ->destroy_inode()) is *NOT* ordered wrt superblock destruction;
+as the matter of fact, the superblock and all associated structures
+might be already gone.  The filesystem driver is guaranteed to be still
+there, but that's it.  Freeing memory in the callback is fine; doing
+more than that is possible, but requires a lot of care and is best
+avoided.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+DCACHE_RCUACCESS is gone; having an RCU delay on dentry freeing is the
+default.  DCACHE_NORCU opts out, and only d_alloc_pseudo() has any
+business doing so.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+d_alloc_pseudo() is internal-only; uses outside of alloc_file_pseudo() are
+very suspect (and won't work in modules).  Such uses are very likely to
+be misspelled d_alloc_anon().
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+[should've been added in 2016] stale comment in finish_open() nonwithstanding,
+failure exits in ->atomic_open() instances should *NOT* fput() the file,
+no matter what.  Everything is handled by the caller.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+clone_private_mount() returns a longterm mount now, so the proper destructor of
+its result is kern_unmount() or kern_unmount_array().
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+zero-length bvec segments are disallowed, they must be filtered out before
+passed on to an iterator.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+For bvec based itererators bio_iov_iter_get_pages() now doesn't copy bvecs but
+uses the one provided. Anyone issuing kiocb-I/O should ensure that the bvec and
+page references stay until I/O has completed, i.e. until ->ki_complete() has
+been called or returned with non -EIOCBQUEUED code.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+mnt_want_write_file() can now only be paired with mnt_drop_write_file(),
+whereas previously it could be paired with mnt_drop_write() as well.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+iov_iter_copy_from_user_atomic() is gone; use copy_page_from_iter_atomic().
+The difference is copy_page_from_iter_atomic() advances the iterator and
+you don't need iov_iter_advance() after it.  However, if you decide to use
+only a part of obtained data, you should do iov_iter_revert().
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+Calling conventions for file_open_root() changed; now it takes struct path *
+instead of passing mount and dentry separately.  For callers that used to
+pass <mnt, mnt->mnt_root> pair (i.e. the root of given mount), a new helper
+is provided - file_open_root_mnt().  In-tree users adjusted.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+no_llseek is gone; don't set .llseek to that - just leave it NULL instead.
+Checks for "does that file have llseek(2), or should it fail with ESPIPE"
+should be done by looking at FMODE_LSEEK in file->f_mode.
+
+---
+
+*mandatory*
+
+filldir_t (readdir callbacks) calling conventions have changed.  Instead of
+returning 0 or -E... it returns bool now.  false means "no more" (as -E... used
+to) and true - "keep going" (as 0 in old calling conventions).  Rationale:
+callers never looked at specific -E... values anyway.  ->iterate() and
+->iterate_shared() instance require no changes at all, all filldir_t ones in
+the tree converted.
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+Calling conventions for ->tmpfile() have changed.  It now takes a struct
+file pointer instead of struct dentry pointer.  d_tmpfile() is similarly
+changed to simplify callers.  The passed file is in a non-open state and on
+success must be opened before returning (e.g. by calling
+finish_open_simple()).
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+If ->rename() update of .. on cross-directory move needs an exclusion with
+directory modifications, do *not* lock the subdirectory in question in your
+->rename() - it's done by the caller now [that item should've been added in
+28eceeda130f "fs: Lock moved directories"].
+
+---
+
+**mandatory**
+
+On same-directory ->rename() the (tautological) update of .. is not protected
+by any locks; just don't do it if the old parent is the same as the new one.
+We really can't lock two subdirectories in same-directory rename - not without
+deadlocks.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..898c99eae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,2237 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+====================
+The /proc Filesystem
+====================
+
+=====================  =======================================  ================
+/proc/sys              Terrehon Bowden <terrehon@pacbell.net>,  October 7 1999
+                       Bodo Bauer <bb@ricochet.net>
+2.4.x update	       Jorge Nerin <comandante@zaralinux.com>   November 14 2000
+move /proc/sys	       Shen Feng <shen@cn.fujitsu.com>	        April 1 2009
+fixes/update part 1.1  Stefani Seibold <stefani@seibold.net>    June 9 2009
+=====================  =======================================  ================
+
+
+
+.. Table of Contents
+
+  0     Preface
+  0.1	Introduction/Credits
+  0.2	Legal Stuff
+
+  1	Collecting System Information
+  1.1	Process-Specific Subdirectories
+  1.2	Kernel data
+  1.3	IDE devices in /proc/ide
+  1.4	Networking info in /proc/net
+  1.5	SCSI info
+  1.6	Parallel port info in /proc/parport
+  1.7	TTY info in /proc/tty
+  1.8	Miscellaneous kernel statistics in /proc/stat
+  1.9	Ext4 file system parameters
+
+  2	Modifying System Parameters
+
+  3	Per-Process Parameters
+  3.1	/proc/<pid>/oom_adj & /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj - Adjust the oom-killer
+								score
+  3.2	/proc/<pid>/oom_score - Display current oom-killer score
+  3.3	/proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields
+  3.4	/proc/<pid>/coredump_filter - Core dump filtering settings
+  3.5	/proc/<pid>/mountinfo - Information about mounts
+  3.6	/proc/<pid>/comm  & /proc/<pid>/task/<tid>/comm
+  3.7   /proc/<pid>/task/<tid>/children - Information about task children
+  3.8   /proc/<pid>/fdinfo/<fd> - Information about opened file
+  3.9   /proc/<pid>/map_files - Information about memory mapped files
+  3.10  /proc/<pid>/timerslack_ns - Task timerslack value
+  3.11	/proc/<pid>/patch_state - Livepatch patch operation state
+  3.12	/proc/<pid>/arch_status - Task architecture specific information
+
+  4	Configuring procfs
+  4.1	Mount options
+
+  5	Filesystem behavior
+
+Preface
+=======
+
+0.1 Introduction/Credits
+------------------------
+
+This documentation is  part of a soon (or  so we hope) to be  released book on
+the SuSE  Linux distribution. As  there is  no complete documentation  for the
+/proc file system and we've used  many freely available sources to write these
+chapters, it  seems only fair  to give the work  back to the  Linux community.
+This work is  based on the 2.2.*  kernel version and the  upcoming 2.4.*. I'm
+afraid it's still far from complete, but we  hope it will be useful. As far as
+we know, it is the first 'all-in-one' document about the /proc file system. It
+is focused  on the Intel  x86 hardware,  so if you  are looking for  PPC, ARM,
+SPARC, AXP, etc., features, you probably  won't find what you are looking for.
+It also only covers IPv4 networking, not IPv6 nor other protocols - sorry. But
+additions and patches  are welcome and will  be added to this  document if you
+mail them to Bodo.
+
+We'd like  to  thank Alan Cox, Rik van Riel, and Alexey Kuznetsov and a lot of
+other people for help compiling this documentation. We'd also like to extend a
+special thank  you to Andi Kleen for documentation, which we relied on heavily
+to create  this  document,  as well as the additional information he provided.
+Thanks to  everybody  else  who contributed source or docs to the Linux kernel
+and helped create a great piece of software... :)
+
+If you  have  any comments, corrections or additions, please don't hesitate to
+contact Bodo  Bauer  at  bb@ricochet.net.  We'll  be happy to add them to this
+document.
+
+The   latest   version    of   this   document   is    available   online   at
+http://tldp.org/LDP/Linux-Filesystem-Hierarchy/html/proc.html
+
+If  the above  direction does  not works  for you,  you could  try the  kernel
+mailing  list  at  linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org  and/or try  to  reach  me  at
+comandante@zaralinux.com.
+
+0.2 Legal Stuff
+---------------
+
+We don't  guarantee  the  correctness  of this document, and if you come to us
+complaining about  how  you  screwed  up  your  system  because  of  incorrect
+documentation, we won't feel responsible...
+
+Chapter 1: Collecting System Information
+========================================
+
+In This Chapter
+---------------
+* Investigating  the  properties  of  the  pseudo  file  system  /proc and its
+  ability to provide information on the running Linux system
+* Examining /proc's structure
+* Uncovering  various  information  about the kernel and the processes running
+  on the system
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The proc  file  system acts as an interface to internal data structures in the
+kernel. It  can  be  used to obtain information about the system and to change
+certain kernel parameters at runtime (sysctl).
+
+First, we'll  take  a  look  at the read-only parts of /proc. In Chapter 2, we
+show you how you can use /proc/sys to change settings.
+
+1.1 Process-Specific Subdirectories
+-----------------------------------
+
+The directory  /proc  contains  (among other things) one subdirectory for each
+process running on the system, which is named after the process ID (PID).
+
+The link  'self'  points to  the process reading the file system. Each process
+subdirectory has the entries listed in Table 1-1.
+
+Note that an open file descriptor to /proc/<pid> or to any of its
+contained files or subdirectories does not prevent <pid> being reused
+for some other process in the event that <pid> exits. Operations on
+open /proc/<pid> file descriptors corresponding to dead processes
+never act on any new process that the kernel may, through chance, have
+also assigned the process ID <pid>. Instead, operations on these FDs
+usually fail with ESRCH.
+
+.. table:: Table 1-1: Process specific entries in /proc
+
+ =============  ===============================================================
+ File		Content
+ =============  ===============================================================
+ clear_refs	Clears page referenced bits shown in smaps output
+ cmdline	Command line arguments
+ cpu		Current and last cpu in which it was executed	(2.4)(smp)
+ cwd		Link to the current working directory
+ environ	Values of environment variables
+ exe		Link to the executable of this process
+ fd		Directory, which contains all file descriptors
+ maps		Memory maps to executables and library files	(2.4)
+ mem		Memory held by this process
+ root		Link to the root directory of this process
+ stat		Process status
+ statm		Process memory status information
+ status		Process status in human readable form
+ wchan		Present with CONFIG_KALLSYMS=y: it shows the kernel function
+		symbol the task is blocked in - or "0" if not blocked.
+ pagemap	Page table
+ stack		Report full stack trace, enable via CONFIG_STACKTRACE
+ smaps		An extension based on maps, showing the memory consumption of
+		each mapping and flags associated with it
+ smaps_rollup	Accumulated smaps stats for all mappings of the process.  This
+		can be derived from smaps, but is faster and more convenient
+ numa_maps	An extension based on maps, showing the memory locality and
+		binding policy as well as mem usage (in pages) of each mapping.
+ =============  ===============================================================
+
+For example, to get the status information of a process, all you have to do is
+read the file /proc/PID/status::
+
+  >cat /proc/self/status
+  Name:   cat
+  State:  R (running)
+  Tgid:   5452
+  Pid:    5452
+  PPid:   743
+  TracerPid:      0						(2.4)
+  Uid:    501     501     501     501
+  Gid:    100     100     100     100
+  FDSize: 256
+  Groups: 100 14 16
+  VmPeak:     5004 kB
+  VmSize:     5004 kB
+  VmLck:         0 kB
+  VmHWM:       476 kB
+  VmRSS:       476 kB
+  RssAnon:             352 kB
+  RssFile:             120 kB
+  RssShmem:              4 kB
+  VmData:      156 kB
+  VmStk:        88 kB
+  VmExe:        68 kB
+  VmLib:      1412 kB
+  VmPTE:        20 kb
+  VmSwap:        0 kB
+  HugetlbPages:          0 kB
+  CoreDumping:    0
+  THP_enabled:	  1
+  Threads:        1
+  SigQ:   0/28578
+  SigPnd: 0000000000000000
+  ShdPnd: 0000000000000000
+  SigBlk: 0000000000000000
+  SigIgn: 0000000000000000
+  SigCgt: 0000000000000000
+  CapInh: 00000000fffffeff
+  CapPrm: 0000000000000000
+  CapEff: 0000000000000000
+  CapBnd: ffffffffffffffff
+  CapAmb: 0000000000000000
+  NoNewPrivs:     0
+  Seccomp:        0
+  Speculation_Store_Bypass:       thread vulnerable
+  SpeculationIndirectBranch:      conditional enabled
+  voluntary_ctxt_switches:        0
+  nonvoluntary_ctxt_switches:     1
+
+This shows you nearly the same information you would get if you viewed it with
+the ps  command.  In  fact,  ps  uses  the  proc  file  system  to  obtain its
+information.  But you get a more detailed  view of the  process by reading the
+file /proc/PID/status. It fields are described in table 1-2.
+
+The  statm  file  contains  more  detailed  information about the process
+memory usage. Its seven fields are explained in Table 1-3.  The stat file
+contains detailed information about the process itself.  Its fields are
+explained in Table 1-4.
+
+(for SMP CONFIG users)
+
+For making accounting scalable, RSS related information are handled in an
+asynchronous manner and the value may not be very precise. To see a precise
+snapshot of a moment, you can see /proc/<pid>/smaps file and scan page table.
+It's slow but very precise.
+
+.. table:: Table 1-2: Contents of the status files (as of 4.19)
+
+ ==========================  ===================================================
+ Field                       Content
+ ==========================  ===================================================
+ Name                        filename of the executable
+ Umask                       file mode creation mask
+ State                       state (R is running, S is sleeping, D is sleeping
+                             in an uninterruptible wait, Z is zombie,
+			     T is traced or stopped)
+ Tgid                        thread group ID
+ Ngid                        NUMA group ID (0 if none)
+ Pid                         process id
+ PPid                        process id of the parent process
+ TracerPid                   PID of process tracing this process (0 if not)
+ Uid                         Real, effective, saved set, and  file system UIDs
+ Gid                         Real, effective, saved set, and  file system GIDs
+ FDSize                      number of file descriptor slots currently allocated
+ Groups                      supplementary group list
+ NStgid                      descendant namespace thread group ID hierarchy
+ NSpid                       descendant namespace process ID hierarchy
+ NSpgid                      descendant namespace process group ID hierarchy
+ NSsid                       descendant namespace session ID hierarchy
+ VmPeak                      peak virtual memory size
+ VmSize                      total program size
+ VmLck                       locked memory size
+ VmPin                       pinned memory size
+ VmHWM                       peak resident set size ("high water mark")
+ VmRSS                       size of memory portions. It contains the three
+                             following parts
+                             (VmRSS = RssAnon + RssFile + RssShmem)
+ RssAnon                     size of resident anonymous memory
+ RssFile                     size of resident file mappings
+ RssShmem                    size of resident shmem memory (includes SysV shm,
+                             mapping of tmpfs and shared anonymous mappings)
+ VmData                      size of private data segments
+ VmStk                       size of stack segments
+ VmExe                       size of text segment
+ VmLib                       size of shared library code
+ VmPTE                       size of page table entries
+ VmSwap                      amount of swap used by anonymous private data
+                             (shmem swap usage is not included)
+ HugetlbPages                size of hugetlb memory portions
+ CoreDumping                 process's memory is currently being dumped
+                             (killing the process may lead to a corrupted core)
+ THP_enabled		     process is allowed to use THP (returns 0 when
+			     PR_SET_THP_DISABLE is set on the process
+ Threads                     number of threads
+ SigQ                        number of signals queued/max. number for queue
+ SigPnd                      bitmap of pending signals for the thread
+ ShdPnd                      bitmap of shared pending signals for the process
+ SigBlk                      bitmap of blocked signals
+ SigIgn                      bitmap of ignored signals
+ SigCgt                      bitmap of caught signals
+ CapInh                      bitmap of inheritable capabilities
+ CapPrm                      bitmap of permitted capabilities
+ CapEff                      bitmap of effective capabilities
+ CapBnd                      bitmap of capabilities bounding set
+ CapAmb                      bitmap of ambient capabilities
+ NoNewPrivs                  no_new_privs, like prctl(PR_GET_NO_NEW_PRIV, ...)
+ Seccomp                     seccomp mode, like prctl(PR_GET_SECCOMP, ...)
+ Speculation_Store_Bypass    speculative store bypass mitigation status
+ SpeculationIndirectBranch   indirect branch speculation mode
+ Cpus_allowed                mask of CPUs on which this process may run
+ Cpus_allowed_list           Same as previous, but in "list format"
+ Mems_allowed                mask of memory nodes allowed to this process
+ Mems_allowed_list           Same as previous, but in "list format"
+ voluntary_ctxt_switches     number of voluntary context switches
+ nonvoluntary_ctxt_switches  number of non voluntary context switches
+ ==========================  ===================================================
+
+
+.. table:: Table 1-3: Contents of the statm files (as of 2.6.8-rc3)
+
+ ======== ===============================	==============================
+ Field    Content
+ ======== ===============================	==============================
+ size     total program size (pages)		(same as VmSize in status)
+ resident size of memory portions (pages)	(same as VmRSS in status)
+ shared   number of pages that are shared	(i.e. backed by a file, same
+						as RssFile+RssShmem in status)
+ trs      number of pages that are 'code'	(not including libs; broken,
+						includes data segment)
+ lrs      number of pages of library		(always 0 on 2.6)
+ drs      number of pages of data/stack		(including libs; broken,
+						includes library text)
+ dt       number of dirty pages			(always 0 on 2.6)
+ ======== ===============================	==============================
+
+
+.. table:: Table 1-4: Contents of the stat files (as of 2.6.30-rc7)
+
+  ============= ===============================================================
+  Field         Content
+  ============= ===============================================================
+  pid           process id
+  tcomm         filename of the executable
+  state         state (R is running, S is sleeping, D is sleeping in an
+                uninterruptible wait, Z is zombie, T is traced or stopped)
+  ppid          process id of the parent process
+  pgrp          pgrp of the process
+  sid           session id
+  tty_nr        tty the process uses
+  tty_pgrp      pgrp of the tty
+  flags         task flags
+  min_flt       number of minor faults
+  cmin_flt      number of minor faults with child's
+  maj_flt       number of major faults
+  cmaj_flt      number of major faults with child's
+  utime         user mode jiffies
+  stime         kernel mode jiffies
+  cutime        user mode jiffies with child's
+  cstime        kernel mode jiffies with child's
+  priority      priority level
+  nice          nice level
+  num_threads   number of threads
+  it_real_value	(obsolete, always 0)
+  start_time    time the process started after system boot
+  vsize         virtual memory size
+  rss           resident set memory size
+  rsslim        current limit in bytes on the rss
+  start_code    address above which program text can run
+  end_code      address below which program text can run
+  start_stack   address of the start of the main process stack
+  esp           current value of ESP
+  eip           current value of EIP
+  pending       bitmap of pending signals
+  blocked       bitmap of blocked signals
+  sigign        bitmap of ignored signals
+  sigcatch      bitmap of caught signals
+  0		(place holder, used to be the wchan address,
+		use /proc/PID/wchan instead)
+  0             (place holder)
+  0             (place holder)
+  exit_signal   signal to send to parent thread on exit
+  task_cpu      which CPU the task is scheduled on
+  rt_priority   realtime priority
+  policy        scheduling policy (man sched_setscheduler)
+  blkio_ticks   time spent waiting for block IO
+  gtime         guest time of the task in jiffies
+  cgtime        guest time of the task children in jiffies
+  start_data    address above which program data+bss is placed
+  end_data      address below which program data+bss is placed
+  start_brk     address above which program heap can be expanded with brk()
+  arg_start     address above which program command line is placed
+  arg_end       address below which program command line is placed
+  env_start     address above which program environment is placed
+  env_end       address below which program environment is placed
+  exit_code     the thread's exit_code in the form reported by the waitpid
+		system call
+  ============= ===============================================================
+
+The /proc/PID/maps file contains the currently mapped memory regions and
+their access permissions.
+
+The format is::
+
+    address           perms offset  dev   inode      pathname
+
+    08048000-08049000 r-xp 00000000 03:00 8312       /opt/test
+    08049000-0804a000 rw-p 00001000 03:00 8312       /opt/test
+    0804a000-0806b000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0          [heap]
+    a7cb1000-a7cb2000 ---p 00000000 00:00 0
+    a7cb2000-a7eb2000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
+    a7eb2000-a7eb3000 ---p 00000000 00:00 0
+    a7eb3000-a7ed5000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
+    a7ed5000-a8008000 r-xp 00000000 03:00 4222       /lib/libc.so.6
+    a8008000-a800a000 r--p 00133000 03:00 4222       /lib/libc.so.6
+    a800a000-a800b000 rw-p 00135000 03:00 4222       /lib/libc.so.6
+    a800b000-a800e000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
+    a800e000-a8022000 r-xp 00000000 03:00 14462      /lib/libpthread.so.0
+    a8022000-a8023000 r--p 00013000 03:00 14462      /lib/libpthread.so.0
+    a8023000-a8024000 rw-p 00014000 03:00 14462      /lib/libpthread.so.0
+    a8024000-a8027000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
+    a8027000-a8043000 r-xp 00000000 03:00 8317       /lib/ld-linux.so.2
+    a8043000-a8044000 r--p 0001b000 03:00 8317       /lib/ld-linux.so.2
+    a8044000-a8045000 rw-p 0001c000 03:00 8317       /lib/ld-linux.so.2
+    aff35000-aff4a000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0          [stack]
+    ffffe000-fffff000 r-xp 00000000 00:00 0          [vdso]
+
+where "address" is the address space in the process that it occupies, "perms"
+is a set of permissions::
+
+ r = read
+ w = write
+ x = execute
+ s = shared
+ p = private (copy on write)
+
+"offset" is the offset into the mapping, "dev" is the device (major:minor), and
+"inode" is the inode  on that device.  0 indicates that  no inode is associated
+with the memory region, as the case would be with BSS (uninitialized data).
+The "pathname" shows the name associated file for this mapping.  If the mapping
+is not associated with a file:
+
+ =============              ====================================
+ [heap]                     the heap of the program
+ [stack]                    the stack of the main process
+ [vdso]                     the "virtual dynamic shared object",
+                            the kernel system call handler
+ [anon:<name>]              an anonymous mapping that has been
+                            named by userspace
+ =============              ====================================
+
+ or if empty, the mapping is anonymous.
+
+The /proc/PID/smaps is an extension based on maps, showing the memory
+consumption for each of the process's mappings. For each mapping (aka Virtual
+Memory Area, or VMA) there is a series of lines such as the following::
+
+    08048000-080bc000 r-xp 00000000 03:02 13130      /bin/bash
+
+    Size:               1084 kB
+    KernelPageSize:        4 kB
+    MMUPageSize:           4 kB
+    Rss:                 892 kB
+    Pss:                 374 kB
+    Pss_Dirty:             0 kB
+    Shared_Clean:        892 kB
+    Shared_Dirty:          0 kB
+    Private_Clean:         0 kB
+    Private_Dirty:         0 kB
+    Referenced:          892 kB
+    Anonymous:             0 kB
+    LazyFree:              0 kB
+    AnonHugePages:         0 kB
+    ShmemPmdMapped:        0 kB
+    Shared_Hugetlb:        0 kB
+    Private_Hugetlb:       0 kB
+    Swap:                  0 kB
+    SwapPss:               0 kB
+    KernelPageSize:        4 kB
+    MMUPageSize:           4 kB
+    Locked:                0 kB
+    THPeligible:           0
+    VmFlags: rd ex mr mw me dw
+
+The first of these lines shows the same information as is displayed for the
+mapping in /proc/PID/maps.  Following lines show the size of the mapping
+(size); the size of each page allocated when backing a VMA (KernelPageSize),
+which is usually the same as the size in the page table entries; the page size
+used by the MMU when backing a VMA (in most cases, the same as KernelPageSize);
+the amount of the mapping that is currently resident in RAM (RSS); the
+process' proportional share of this mapping (PSS); and the number of clean and
+dirty shared and private pages in the mapping.
+
+The "proportional set size" (PSS) of a process is the count of pages it has
+in memory, where each page is divided by the number of processes sharing it.
+So if a process has 1000 pages all to itself, and 1000 shared with one other
+process, its PSS will be 1500.  "Pss_Dirty" is the portion of PSS which
+consists of dirty pages.  ("Pss_Clean" is not included, but it can be
+calculated by subtracting "Pss_Dirty" from "Pss".)
+
+Note that even a page which is part of a MAP_SHARED mapping, but has only
+a single pte mapped, i.e.  is currently used by only one process, is accounted
+as private and not as shared.
+
+"Referenced" indicates the amount of memory currently marked as referenced or
+accessed.
+
+"Anonymous" shows the amount of memory that does not belong to any file.  Even
+a mapping associated with a file may contain anonymous pages: when MAP_PRIVATE
+and a page is modified, the file page is replaced by a private anonymous copy.
+
+"LazyFree" shows the amount of memory which is marked by madvise(MADV_FREE).
+The memory isn't freed immediately with madvise(). It's freed in memory
+pressure if the memory is clean. Please note that the printed value might
+be lower than the real value due to optimizations used in the current
+implementation. If this is not desirable please file a bug report.
+
+"AnonHugePages" shows the ammount of memory backed by transparent hugepage.
+
+"ShmemPmdMapped" shows the ammount of shared (shmem/tmpfs) memory backed by
+huge pages.
+
+"Shared_Hugetlb" and "Private_Hugetlb" show the ammounts of memory backed by
+hugetlbfs page which is *not* counted in "RSS" or "PSS" field for historical
+reasons. And these are not included in {Shared,Private}_{Clean,Dirty} field.
+
+"Swap" shows how much would-be-anonymous memory is also used, but out on swap.
+
+For shmem mappings, "Swap" includes also the size of the mapped (and not
+replaced by copy-on-write) part of the underlying shmem object out on swap.
+"SwapPss" shows proportional swap share of this mapping. Unlike "Swap", this
+does not take into account swapped out page of underlying shmem objects.
+"Locked" indicates whether the mapping is locked in memory or not.
+
+"THPeligible" indicates whether the mapping is eligible for allocating THP
+pages as well as the THP is PMD mappable or not - 1 if true, 0 otherwise.
+It just shows the current status.
+
+"VmFlags" field deserves a separate description. This member represents the
+kernel flags associated with the particular virtual memory area in two letter
+encoded manner. The codes are the following:
+
+    ==    =======================================
+    rd    readable
+    wr    writeable
+    ex    executable
+    sh    shared
+    mr    may read
+    mw    may write
+    me    may execute
+    ms    may share
+    gd    stack segment growns down
+    pf    pure PFN range
+    dw    disabled write to the mapped file
+    lo    pages are locked in memory
+    io    memory mapped I/O area
+    sr    sequential read advise provided
+    rr    random read advise provided
+    dc    do not copy area on fork
+    de    do not expand area on remapping
+    ac    area is accountable
+    nr    swap space is not reserved for the area
+    ht    area uses huge tlb pages
+    sf    synchronous page fault
+    ar    architecture specific flag
+    wf    wipe on fork
+    dd    do not include area into core dump
+    sd    soft dirty flag
+    mm    mixed map area
+    hg    huge page advise flag
+    nh    no huge page advise flag
+    mg    mergable advise flag
+    bt    arm64 BTI guarded page
+    mt    arm64 MTE allocation tags are enabled
+    um    userfaultfd missing tracking
+    uw    userfaultfd wr-protect tracking
+    ==    =======================================
+
+Note that there is no guarantee that every flag and associated mnemonic will
+be present in all further kernel releases. Things get changed, the flags may
+be vanished or the reverse -- new added. Interpretation of their meaning
+might change in future as well. So each consumer of these flags has to
+follow each specific kernel version for the exact semantic.
+
+This file is only present if the CONFIG_MMU kernel configuration option is
+enabled.
+
+Note: reading /proc/PID/maps or /proc/PID/smaps is inherently racy (consistent
+output can be achieved only in the single read call).
+
+This typically manifests when doing partial reads of these files while the
+memory map is being modified.  Despite the races, we do provide the following
+guarantees:
+
+1) The mapped addresses never go backwards, which implies no two
+   regions will ever overlap.
+2) If there is something at a given vaddr during the entirety of the
+   life of the smaps/maps walk, there will be some output for it.
+
+The /proc/PID/smaps_rollup file includes the same fields as /proc/PID/smaps,
+but their values are the sums of the corresponding values for all mappings of
+the process.  Additionally, it contains these fields:
+
+- Pss_Anon
+- Pss_File
+- Pss_Shmem
+
+They represent the proportional shares of anonymous, file, and shmem pages, as
+described for smaps above.  These fields are omitted in smaps since each
+mapping identifies the type (anon, file, or shmem) of all pages it contains.
+Thus all information in smaps_rollup can be derived from smaps, but at a
+significantly higher cost.
+
+The /proc/PID/clear_refs is used to reset the PG_Referenced and ACCESSED/YOUNG
+bits on both physical and virtual pages associated with a process, and the
+soft-dirty bit on pte (see Documentation/admin-guide/mm/soft-dirty.rst
+for details).
+To clear the bits for all the pages associated with the process::
+
+    > echo 1 > /proc/PID/clear_refs
+
+To clear the bits for the anonymous pages associated with the process::
+
+    > echo 2 > /proc/PID/clear_refs
+
+To clear the bits for the file mapped pages associated with the process::
+
+    > echo 3 > /proc/PID/clear_refs
+
+To clear the soft-dirty bit::
+
+    > echo 4 > /proc/PID/clear_refs
+
+To reset the peak resident set size ("high water mark") to the process's
+current value::
+
+    > echo 5 > /proc/PID/clear_refs
+
+Any other value written to /proc/PID/clear_refs will have no effect.
+
+The /proc/pid/pagemap gives the PFN, which can be used to find the pageflags
+using /proc/kpageflags and number of times a page is mapped using
+/proc/kpagecount. For detailed explanation, see
+Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst.
+
+The /proc/pid/numa_maps is an extension based on maps, showing the memory
+locality and binding policy, as well as the memory usage (in pages) of
+each mapping. The output follows a general format where mapping details get
+summarized separated by blank spaces, one mapping per each file line::
+
+    address   policy    mapping details
+
+    00400000 default file=/usr/local/bin/app mapped=1 active=0 N3=1 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    00600000 default file=/usr/local/bin/app anon=1 dirty=1 N3=1 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    3206000000 default file=/lib64/ld-2.12.so mapped=26 mapmax=6 N0=24 N3=2 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    320621f000 default file=/lib64/ld-2.12.so anon=1 dirty=1 N3=1 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    3206220000 default file=/lib64/ld-2.12.so anon=1 dirty=1 N3=1 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    3206221000 default anon=1 dirty=1 N3=1 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    3206800000 default file=/lib64/libc-2.12.so mapped=59 mapmax=21 active=55 N0=41 N3=18 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    320698b000 default file=/lib64/libc-2.12.so
+    3206b8a000 default file=/lib64/libc-2.12.so anon=2 dirty=2 N3=2 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    3206b8e000 default file=/lib64/libc-2.12.so anon=1 dirty=1 N3=1 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    3206b8f000 default anon=3 dirty=3 active=1 N3=3 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    7f4dc10a2000 default anon=3 dirty=3 N3=3 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    7f4dc10b4000 default anon=2 dirty=2 active=1 N3=2 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    7f4dc1200000 default file=/anon_hugepage\040(deleted) huge anon=1 dirty=1 N3=1 kernelpagesize_kB=2048
+    7fff335f0000 default stack anon=3 dirty=3 N3=3 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+    7fff3369d000 default mapped=1 mapmax=35 active=0 N3=1 kernelpagesize_kB=4
+
+Where:
+
+"address" is the starting address for the mapping;
+
+"policy" reports the NUMA memory policy set for the mapping (see Documentation/admin-guide/mm/numa_memory_policy.rst);
+
+"mapping details" summarizes mapping data such as mapping type, page usage counters,
+node locality page counters (N0 == node0, N1 == node1, ...) and the kernel page
+size, in KB, that is backing the mapping up.
+
+1.2 Kernel data
+---------------
+
+Similar to  the  process entries, the kernel data files give information about
+the running kernel. The files used to obtain this information are contained in
+/proc and  are  listed  in Table 1-5. Not all of these will be present in your
+system. It  depends  on the kernel configuration and the loaded modules, which
+files are there, and which are missing.
+
+.. table:: Table 1-5: Kernel info in /proc
+
+ ============ ===============================================================
+ File         Content
+ ============ ===============================================================
+ apm          Advanced power management info
+ buddyinfo    Kernel memory allocator information (see text)	(2.5)
+ bus          Directory containing bus specific information
+ cmdline      Kernel command line
+ cpuinfo      Info about the CPU
+ devices      Available devices (block and character)
+ dma          Used DMS channels
+ filesystems  Supported filesystems
+ driver       Various drivers grouped here, currently rtc	(2.4)
+ execdomains  Execdomains, related to security			(2.4)
+ fb 	      Frame Buffer devices				(2.4)
+ fs 	      File system parameters, currently nfs/exports	(2.4)
+ ide          Directory containing info about the IDE subsystem
+ interrupts   Interrupt usage
+ iomem 	      Memory map					(2.4)
+ ioports      I/O port usage
+ irq 	      Masks for irq to cpu affinity			(2.4)(smp?)
+ isapnp       ISA PnP (Plug&Play) Info				(2.4)
+ kcore        Kernel core image (can be ELF or A.OUT(deprecated in 2.4))
+ kmsg         Kernel messages
+ ksyms        Kernel symbol table
+ loadavg      Load average of last 1, 5 & 15 minutes;
+                number of processes currently runnable (running or on ready queue);
+                total number of processes in system;
+                last pid created.
+                All fields are separated by one space except "number of
+                processes currently runnable" and "total number of processes
+                in system", which are separated by a slash ('/'). Example:
+                0.61 0.61 0.55 3/828 22084
+ locks        Kernel locks
+ meminfo      Memory info
+ misc         Miscellaneous
+ modules      List of loaded modules
+ mounts       Mounted filesystems
+ net          Networking info (see text)
+ pagetypeinfo Additional page allocator information (see text)  (2.5)
+ partitions   Table of partitions known to the system
+ pci 	      Deprecated info of PCI bus (new way -> /proc/bus/pci/,
+              decoupled by lspci				(2.4)
+ rtc          Real time clock
+ scsi         SCSI info (see text)
+ slabinfo     Slab pool info
+ softirqs     softirq usage
+ stat         Overall statistics
+ swaps        Swap space utilization
+ sys          See chapter 2
+ sysvipc      Info of SysVIPC Resources (msg, sem, shm)		(2.4)
+ tty 	      Info of tty drivers
+ uptime       Wall clock since boot, combined idle time of all cpus
+ version      Kernel version
+ video 	      bttv info of video resources			(2.4)
+ vmallocinfo  Show vmalloced areas
+ ============ ===============================================================
+
+You can,  for  example,  check  which interrupts are currently in use and what
+they are used for by looking in the file /proc/interrupts::
+
+  > cat /proc/interrupts
+             CPU0
+    0:    8728810          XT-PIC  timer
+    1:        895          XT-PIC  keyboard
+    2:          0          XT-PIC  cascade
+    3:     531695          XT-PIC  aha152x
+    4:    2014133          XT-PIC  serial
+    5:      44401          XT-PIC  pcnet_cs
+    8:          2          XT-PIC  rtc
+   11:          8          XT-PIC  i82365
+   12:     182918          XT-PIC  PS/2 Mouse
+   13:          1          XT-PIC  fpu
+   14:    1232265          XT-PIC  ide0
+   15:          7          XT-PIC  ide1
+  NMI:          0
+
+In 2.4.* a couple of lines where added to this file LOC & ERR (this time is the
+output of a SMP machine)::
+
+  > cat /proc/interrupts
+
+             CPU0       CPU1
+    0:    1243498    1214548    IO-APIC-edge  timer
+    1:       8949       8958    IO-APIC-edge  keyboard
+    2:          0          0          XT-PIC  cascade
+    5:      11286      10161    IO-APIC-edge  soundblaster
+    8:          1          0    IO-APIC-edge  rtc
+    9:      27422      27407    IO-APIC-edge  3c503
+   12:     113645     113873    IO-APIC-edge  PS/2 Mouse
+   13:          0          0          XT-PIC  fpu
+   14:      22491      24012    IO-APIC-edge  ide0
+   15:       2183       2415    IO-APIC-edge  ide1
+   17:      30564      30414   IO-APIC-level  eth0
+   18:        177        164   IO-APIC-level  bttv
+  NMI:    2457961    2457959
+  LOC:    2457882    2457881
+  ERR:       2155
+
+NMI is incremented in this case because every timer interrupt generates a NMI
+(Non Maskable Interrupt) which is used by the NMI Watchdog to detect lockups.
+
+LOC is the local interrupt counter of the internal APIC of every CPU.
+
+ERR is incremented in the case of errors in the IO-APIC bus (the bus that
+connects the CPUs in a SMP system. This means that an error has been detected,
+the IO-APIC automatically retry the transmission, so it should not be a big
+problem, but you should read the SMP-FAQ.
+
+In 2.6.2* /proc/interrupts was expanded again.  This time the goal was for
+/proc/interrupts to display every IRQ vector in use by the system, not
+just those considered 'most important'.  The new vectors are:
+
+THR
+  interrupt raised when a machine check threshold counter
+  (typically counting ECC corrected errors of memory or cache) exceeds
+  a configurable threshold.  Only available on some systems.
+
+TRM
+  a thermal event interrupt occurs when a temperature threshold
+  has been exceeded for the CPU.  This interrupt may also be generated
+  when the temperature drops back to normal.
+
+SPU
+  a spurious interrupt is some interrupt that was raised then lowered
+  by some IO device before it could be fully processed by the APIC.  Hence
+  the APIC sees the interrupt but does not know what device it came from.
+  For this case the APIC will generate the interrupt with a IRQ vector
+  of 0xff. This might also be generated by chipset bugs.
+
+RES, CAL, TLB
+  rescheduling, call and TLB flush interrupts are
+  sent from one CPU to another per the needs of the OS.  Typically,
+  their statistics are used by kernel developers and interested users to
+  determine the occurrence of interrupts of the given type.
+
+The above IRQ vectors are displayed only when relevant.  For example,
+the threshold vector does not exist on x86_64 platforms.  Others are
+suppressed when the system is a uniprocessor.  As of this writing, only
+i386 and x86_64 platforms support the new IRQ vector displays.
+
+Of some interest is the introduction of the /proc/irq directory to 2.4.
+It could be used to set IRQ to CPU affinity. This means that you can "hook" an
+IRQ to only one CPU, or to exclude a CPU of handling IRQs. The contents of the
+irq subdir is one subdir for each IRQ, and two files; default_smp_affinity and
+prof_cpu_mask.
+
+For example::
+
+  > ls /proc/irq/
+  0  10  12  14  16  18  2  4  6  8  prof_cpu_mask
+  1  11  13  15  17  19  3  5  7  9  default_smp_affinity
+  > ls /proc/irq/0/
+  smp_affinity
+
+smp_affinity is a bitmask, in which you can specify which CPUs can handle the
+IRQ. You can set it by doing::
+
+  > echo 1 > /proc/irq/10/smp_affinity
+
+This means that only the first CPU will handle the IRQ, but you can also echo
+5 which means that only the first and third CPU can handle the IRQ.
+
+The contents of each smp_affinity file is the same by default::
+
+  > cat /proc/irq/0/smp_affinity
+  ffffffff
+
+There is an alternate interface, smp_affinity_list which allows specifying
+a CPU range instead of a bitmask::
+
+  > cat /proc/irq/0/smp_affinity_list
+  1024-1031
+
+The default_smp_affinity mask applies to all non-active IRQs, which are the
+IRQs which have not yet been allocated/activated, and hence which lack a
+/proc/irq/[0-9]* directory.
+
+The node file on an SMP system shows the node to which the device using the IRQ
+reports itself as being attached. This hardware locality information does not
+include information about any possible driver locality preference.
+
+prof_cpu_mask specifies which CPUs are to be profiled by the system wide
+profiler. Default value is ffffffff (all CPUs if there are only 32 of them).
+
+The way IRQs are routed is handled by the IO-APIC, and it's Round Robin
+between all the CPUs which are allowed to handle it. As usual the kernel has
+more info than you and does a better job than you, so the defaults are the
+best choice for almost everyone.  [Note this applies only to those IO-APIC's
+that support "Round Robin" interrupt distribution.]
+
+There are  three  more  important subdirectories in /proc: net, scsi, and sys.
+The general  rule  is  that  the  contents,  or  even  the  existence of these
+directories, depend  on your kernel configuration. If SCSI is not enabled, the
+directory scsi  may  not  exist. The same is true with the net, which is there
+only when networking support is present in the running kernel.
+
+The slabinfo  file  gives  information  about  memory usage at the slab level.
+Linux uses  slab  pools for memory management above page level in version 2.2.
+Commonly used  objects  have  their  own  slab  pool (such as network buffers,
+directory cache, and so on).
+
+::
+
+    > cat /proc/buddyinfo
+
+    Node 0, zone      DMA      0      4      5      4      4      3 ...
+    Node 0, zone   Normal      1      0      0      1    101      8 ...
+    Node 0, zone  HighMem      2      0      0      1      1      0 ...
+
+External fragmentation is a problem under some workloads, and buddyinfo is a
+useful tool for helping diagnose these problems.  Buddyinfo will give you a
+clue as to how big an area you can safely allocate, or why a previous
+allocation failed.
+
+Each column represents the number of pages of a certain order which are
+available.  In this case, there are 0 chunks of 2^0*PAGE_SIZE available in
+ZONE_DMA, 4 chunks of 2^1*PAGE_SIZE in ZONE_DMA, 101 chunks of 2^4*PAGE_SIZE
+available in ZONE_NORMAL, etc...
+
+More information relevant to external fragmentation can be found in
+pagetypeinfo::
+
+    > cat /proc/pagetypeinfo
+    Page block order: 9
+    Pages per block:  512
+
+    Free pages count per migrate type at order       0      1      2      3      4      5      6      7      8      9     10
+    Node    0, zone      DMA, type    Unmovable      0      0      0      1      1      1      1      1      1      1      0
+    Node    0, zone      DMA, type  Reclaimable      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0
+    Node    0, zone      DMA, type      Movable      1      1      2      1      2      1      1      0      1      0      2
+    Node    0, zone      DMA, type      Reserve      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      1      0
+    Node    0, zone      DMA, type      Isolate      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0
+    Node    0, zone    DMA32, type    Unmovable    103     54     77      1      1      1     11      8      7      1      9
+    Node    0, zone    DMA32, type  Reclaimable      0      0      2      1      0      0      0      0      1      0      0
+    Node    0, zone    DMA32, type      Movable    169    152    113     91     77     54     39     13      6      1    452
+    Node    0, zone    DMA32, type      Reserve      1      2      2      2      2      0      1      1      1      1      0
+    Node    0, zone    DMA32, type      Isolate      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0
+
+    Number of blocks type     Unmovable  Reclaimable      Movable      Reserve      Isolate
+    Node 0, zone      DMA            2            0            5            1            0
+    Node 0, zone    DMA32           41            6          967            2            0
+
+Fragmentation avoidance in the kernel works by grouping pages of different
+migrate types into the same contiguous regions of memory called page blocks.
+A page block is typically the size of the default hugepage size, e.g. 2MB on
+X86-64. By keeping pages grouped based on their ability to move, the kernel
+can reclaim pages within a page block to satisfy a high-order allocation.
+
+The pagetypinfo begins with information on the size of a page block. It
+then gives the same type of information as buddyinfo except broken down
+by migrate-type and finishes with details on how many page blocks of each
+type exist.
+
+If min_free_kbytes has been tuned correctly (recommendations made by hugeadm
+from libhugetlbfs https://github.com/libhugetlbfs/libhugetlbfs/), one can
+make an estimate of the likely number of huge pages that can be allocated
+at a given point in time. All the "Movable" blocks should be allocatable
+unless memory has been mlock()'d. Some of the Reclaimable blocks should
+also be allocatable although a lot of filesystem metadata may have to be
+reclaimed to achieve this.
+
+
+meminfo
+~~~~~~~
+
+Provides information about distribution and utilization of memory.  This
+varies by architecture and compile options.  Some of the counters reported
+here overlap.  The memory reported by the non overlapping counters may not
+add up to the overall memory usage and the difference for some workloads
+can be substantial.  In many cases there are other means to find out
+additional memory using subsystem specific interfaces, for instance
+/proc/net/sockstat for TCP memory allocations.
+
+Example output. You may not have all of these fields.
+
+::
+
+    > cat /proc/meminfo
+
+    MemTotal:       32858820 kB
+    MemFree:        21001236 kB
+    MemAvailable:   27214312 kB
+    Buffers:          581092 kB
+    Cached:          5587612 kB
+    SwapCached:            0 kB
+    Active:          3237152 kB
+    Inactive:        7586256 kB
+    Active(anon):      94064 kB
+    Inactive(anon):  4570616 kB
+    Active(file):    3143088 kB
+    Inactive(file):  3015640 kB
+    Unevictable:           0 kB
+    Mlocked:               0 kB
+    SwapTotal:             0 kB
+    SwapFree:              0 kB
+    Zswap:              1904 kB
+    Zswapped:           7792 kB
+    Dirty:                12 kB
+    Writeback:             0 kB
+    AnonPages:       4654780 kB
+    Mapped:           266244 kB
+    Shmem:              9976 kB
+    KReclaimable:     517708 kB
+    Slab:             660044 kB
+    SReclaimable:     517708 kB
+    SUnreclaim:       142336 kB
+    KernelStack:       11168 kB
+    PageTables:        20540 kB
+    SecPageTables:         0 kB
+    NFS_Unstable:          0 kB
+    Bounce:                0 kB
+    WritebackTmp:          0 kB
+    CommitLimit:    16429408 kB
+    Committed_AS:    7715148 kB
+    VmallocTotal:   34359738367 kB
+    VmallocUsed:       40444 kB
+    VmallocChunk:          0 kB
+    Percpu:            29312 kB
+    HardwareCorrupted:     0 kB
+    AnonHugePages:   4149248 kB
+    ShmemHugePages:        0 kB
+    ShmemPmdMapped:        0 kB
+    FileHugePages:         0 kB
+    FilePmdMapped:         0 kB
+    CmaTotal:              0 kB
+    CmaFree:               0 kB
+    HugePages_Total:       0
+    HugePages_Free:        0
+    HugePages_Rsvd:        0
+    HugePages_Surp:        0
+    Hugepagesize:       2048 kB
+    Hugetlb:               0 kB
+    DirectMap4k:      401152 kB
+    DirectMap2M:    10008576 kB
+    DirectMap1G:    24117248 kB
+
+MemTotal
+              Total usable RAM (i.e. physical RAM minus a few reserved
+              bits and the kernel binary code)
+MemFree
+              Total free RAM. On highmem systems, the sum of LowFree+HighFree
+MemAvailable
+              An estimate of how much memory is available for starting new
+              applications, without swapping. Calculated from MemFree,
+              SReclaimable, the size of the file LRU lists, and the low
+              watermarks in each zone.
+              The estimate takes into account that the system needs some
+              page cache to function well, and that not all reclaimable
+              slab will be reclaimable, due to items being in use. The
+              impact of those factors will vary from system to system.
+Buffers
+              Relatively temporary storage for raw disk blocks
+              shouldn't get tremendously large (20MB or so)
+Cached
+              In-memory cache for files read from the disk (the
+              pagecache) as well as tmpfs & shmem.
+              Doesn't include SwapCached.
+SwapCached
+              Memory that once was swapped out, is swapped back in but
+              still also is in the swapfile (if memory is needed it
+              doesn't need to be swapped out AGAIN because it is already
+              in the swapfile. This saves I/O)
+Active
+              Memory that has been used more recently and usually not
+              reclaimed unless absolutely necessary.
+Inactive
+              Memory which has been less recently used.  It is more
+              eligible to be reclaimed for other purposes
+Unevictable
+              Memory allocated for userspace which cannot be reclaimed, such
+              as mlocked pages, ramfs backing pages, secret memfd pages etc.
+Mlocked
+              Memory locked with mlock().
+HighTotal, HighFree
+              Highmem is all memory above ~860MB of physical memory.
+              Highmem areas are for use by userspace programs, or
+              for the pagecache.  The kernel must use tricks to access
+              this memory, making it slower to access than lowmem.
+LowTotal, LowFree
+              Lowmem is memory which can be used for everything that
+              highmem can be used for, but it is also available for the
+              kernel's use for its own data structures.  Among many
+              other things, it is where everything from the Slab is
+              allocated.  Bad things happen when you're out of lowmem.
+SwapTotal
+              total amount of swap space available
+SwapFree
+              Memory which has been evicted from RAM, and is temporarily
+              on the disk
+Zswap
+              Memory consumed by the zswap backend (compressed size)
+Zswapped
+              Amount of anonymous memory stored in zswap (original size)
+Dirty
+              Memory which is waiting to get written back to the disk
+Writeback
+              Memory which is actively being written back to the disk
+AnonPages
+              Non-file backed pages mapped into userspace page tables
+Mapped
+              files which have been mmaped, such as libraries
+Shmem
+              Total memory used by shared memory (shmem) and tmpfs
+KReclaimable
+              Kernel allocations that the kernel will attempt to reclaim
+              under memory pressure. Includes SReclaimable (below), and other
+              direct allocations with a shrinker.
+Slab
+              in-kernel data structures cache
+SReclaimable
+              Part of Slab, that might be reclaimed, such as caches
+SUnreclaim
+              Part of Slab, that cannot be reclaimed on memory pressure
+KernelStack
+              Memory consumed by the kernel stacks of all tasks
+PageTables
+              Memory consumed by userspace page tables
+SecPageTables
+              Memory consumed by secondary page tables, this currently
+              currently includes KVM mmu allocations on x86 and arm64.
+NFS_Unstable
+              Always zero. Previous counted pages which had been written to
+              the server, but has not been committed to stable storage.
+Bounce
+              Memory used for block device "bounce buffers"
+WritebackTmp
+              Memory used by FUSE for temporary writeback buffers
+CommitLimit
+              Based on the overcommit ratio ('vm.overcommit_ratio'),
+              this is the total amount of  memory currently available to
+              be allocated on the system. This limit is only adhered to
+              if strict overcommit accounting is enabled (mode 2 in
+              'vm.overcommit_memory').
+
+              The CommitLimit is calculated with the following formula::
+
+                CommitLimit = ([total RAM pages] - [total huge TLB pages]) *
+                               overcommit_ratio / 100 + [total swap pages]
+
+              For example, on a system with 1G of physical RAM and 7G
+              of swap with a `vm.overcommit_ratio` of 30 it would
+              yield a CommitLimit of 7.3G.
+
+              For more details, see the memory overcommit documentation
+              in mm/overcommit-accounting.
+Committed_AS
+              The amount of memory presently allocated on the system.
+              The committed memory is a sum of all of the memory which
+              has been allocated by processes, even if it has not been
+              "used" by them as of yet. A process which malloc()'s 1G
+              of memory, but only touches 300M of it will show up as
+              using 1G. This 1G is memory which has been "committed" to
+              by the VM and can be used at any time by the allocating
+              application. With strict overcommit enabled on the system
+              (mode 2 in 'vm.overcommit_memory'), allocations which would
+              exceed the CommitLimit (detailed above) will not be permitted.
+              This is useful if one needs to guarantee that processes will
+              not fail due to lack of memory once that memory has been
+              successfully allocated.
+VmallocTotal
+              total size of vmalloc virtual address space
+VmallocUsed
+              amount of vmalloc area which is used
+VmallocChunk
+              largest contiguous block of vmalloc area which is free
+Percpu
+              Memory allocated to the percpu allocator used to back percpu
+              allocations. This stat excludes the cost of metadata.
+HardwareCorrupted
+              The amount of RAM/memory in KB, the kernel identifies as
+              corrupted.
+AnonHugePages
+              Non-file backed huge pages mapped into userspace page tables
+ShmemHugePages
+              Memory used by shared memory (shmem) and tmpfs allocated
+              with huge pages
+ShmemPmdMapped
+              Shared memory mapped into userspace with huge pages
+FileHugePages
+              Memory used for filesystem data (page cache) allocated
+              with huge pages
+FilePmdMapped
+              Page cache mapped into userspace with huge pages
+CmaTotal
+              Memory reserved for the Contiguous Memory Allocator (CMA)
+CmaFree
+              Free remaining memory in the CMA reserves
+HugePages_Total, HugePages_Free, HugePages_Rsvd, HugePages_Surp, Hugepagesize, Hugetlb
+              See Documentation/admin-guide/mm/hugetlbpage.rst.
+DirectMap4k, DirectMap2M, DirectMap1G
+              Breakdown of page table sizes used in the kernel's
+              identity mapping of RAM
+
+vmallocinfo
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Provides information about vmalloced/vmaped areas. One line per area,
+containing the virtual address range of the area, size in bytes,
+caller information of the creator, and optional information depending
+on the kind of area:
+
+ ==========  ===================================================
+ pages=nr    number of pages
+ phys=addr   if a physical address was specified
+ ioremap     I/O mapping (ioremap() and friends)
+ vmalloc     vmalloc() area
+ vmap        vmap()ed pages
+ user        VM_USERMAP area
+ vpages      buffer for pages pointers was vmalloced (huge area)
+ N<node>=nr  (Only on NUMA kernels)
+             Number of pages allocated on memory node <node>
+ ==========  ===================================================
+
+::
+
+    > cat /proc/vmallocinfo
+    0xffffc20000000000-0xffffc20000201000 2101248 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ...
+    /0x2c0 pages=512 vmalloc N0=128 N1=128 N2=128 N3=128
+    0xffffc20000201000-0xffffc20000302000 1052672 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ...
+    /0x2c0 pages=256 vmalloc N0=64 N1=64 N2=64 N3=64
+    0xffffc20000302000-0xffffc20000304000    8192 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f...
+    phys=7fee8000 ioremap
+    0xffffc20000304000-0xffffc20000307000   12288 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f...
+    phys=7fee7000 ioremap
+    0xffffc2000031d000-0xffffc2000031f000    8192 init_vdso_vars+0x112/0x210
+    0xffffc2000031f000-0xffffc2000032b000   49152 cramfs_uncompress_init+0x2e ...
+    /0x80 pages=11 vmalloc N0=3 N1=3 N2=2 N3=3
+    0xffffc2000033a000-0xffffc2000033d000   12288 sys_swapon+0x640/0xac0      ...
+    pages=2 vmalloc N1=2
+    0xffffc20000347000-0xffffc2000034c000   20480 xt_alloc_table_info+0xfe ...
+    /0x130 [x_tables] pages=4 vmalloc N0=4
+    0xffffffffa0000000-0xffffffffa000f000   61440 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+    pages=14 vmalloc N2=14
+    0xffffffffa000f000-0xffffffffa0014000   20480 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+    pages=4 vmalloc N1=4
+    0xffffffffa0014000-0xffffffffa0017000   12288 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+    pages=2 vmalloc N1=2
+    0xffffffffa0017000-0xffffffffa0022000   45056 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
+    pages=10 vmalloc N0=10
+
+
+softirqs
+~~~~~~~~
+
+Provides counts of softirq handlers serviced since boot time, for each CPU.
+
+::
+
+    > cat /proc/softirqs
+		  CPU0       CPU1       CPU2       CPU3
+	HI:          0          0          0          0
+    TIMER:       27166      27120      27097      27034
+    NET_TX:          0          0          0         17
+    NET_RX:         42          0          0         39
+    BLOCK:           0          0        107       1121
+    TASKLET:         0          0          0        290
+    SCHED:       27035      26983      26971      26746
+    HRTIMER:         0          0          0          0
+	RCU:      1678       1769       2178       2250
+
+1.3 Networking info in /proc/net
+--------------------------------
+
+The subdirectory  /proc/net  follows  the  usual  pattern. Table 1-8 shows the
+additional values  you  get  for  IP  version 6 if you configure the kernel to
+support this. Table 1-9 lists the files and their meaning.
+
+
+.. table:: Table 1-8: IPv6 info in /proc/net
+
+ ========== =====================================================
+ File       Content
+ ========== =====================================================
+ udp6       UDP sockets (IPv6)
+ tcp6       TCP sockets (IPv6)
+ raw6       Raw device statistics (IPv6)
+ igmp6      IP multicast addresses, which this host joined (IPv6)
+ if_inet6   List of IPv6 interface addresses
+ ipv6_route Kernel routing table for IPv6
+ rt6_stats  Global IPv6 routing tables statistics
+ sockstat6  Socket statistics (IPv6)
+ snmp6      Snmp data (IPv6)
+ ========== =====================================================
+
+.. table:: Table 1-9: Network info in /proc/net
+
+ ============= ================================================================
+ File          Content
+ ============= ================================================================
+ arp           Kernel  ARP table
+ dev           network devices with statistics
+ dev_mcast     the Layer2 multicast groups a device is listening too
+               (interface index, label, number of references, number of bound
+               addresses).
+ dev_stat      network device status
+ ip_fwchains   Firewall chain linkage
+ ip_fwnames    Firewall chain names
+ ip_masq       Directory containing the masquerading tables
+ ip_masquerade Major masquerading table
+ netstat       Network statistics
+ raw           raw device statistics
+ route         Kernel routing table
+ rpc           Directory containing rpc info
+ rt_cache      Routing cache
+ snmp          SNMP data
+ sockstat      Socket statistics
+ tcp           TCP  sockets
+ udp           UDP sockets
+ unix          UNIX domain sockets
+ wireless      Wireless interface data (Wavelan etc)
+ igmp          IP multicast addresses, which this host joined
+ psched        Global packet scheduler parameters.
+ netlink       List of PF_NETLINK sockets
+ ip_mr_vifs    List of multicast virtual interfaces
+ ip_mr_cache   List of multicast routing cache
+ ============= ================================================================
+
+You can  use  this  information  to see which network devices are available in
+your system and how much traffic was routed over those devices::
+
+  > cat /proc/net/dev
+  Inter-|Receive                                                   |[...
+   face |bytes    packets errs drop fifo frame compressed multicast|[...
+      lo:  908188   5596     0    0    0     0          0         0 [...
+    ppp0:15475140  20721   410    0    0   410          0         0 [...
+    eth0:  614530   7085     0    0    0     0          0         1 [...
+
+  ...] Transmit
+  ...] bytes    packets errs drop fifo colls carrier compressed
+  ...]  908188     5596    0    0    0     0       0          0
+  ...] 1375103    17405    0    0    0     0       0          0
+  ...] 1703981     5535    0    0    0     3       0          0
+
+In addition, each Channel Bond interface has its own directory.  For
+example, the bond0 device will have a directory called /proc/net/bond0/.
+It will contain information that is specific to that bond, such as the
+current slaves of the bond, the link status of the slaves, and how
+many times the slaves link has failed.
+
+1.4 SCSI info
+-------------
+
+If you  have  a  SCSI  host adapter in your system, you'll find a subdirectory
+named after  the driver for this adapter in /proc/scsi. You'll also see a list
+of all recognized SCSI devices in /proc/scsi::
+
+  >cat /proc/scsi/scsi
+  Attached devices:
+  Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 00 Lun: 00
+    Vendor: IBM      Model: DGHS09U          Rev: 03E0
+    Type:   Direct-Access                    ANSI SCSI revision: 03
+  Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id: 06 Lun: 00
+    Vendor: PIONEER  Model: CD-ROM DR-U06S   Rev: 1.04
+    Type:   CD-ROM                           ANSI SCSI revision: 02
+
+
+The directory  named  after  the driver has one file for each adapter found in
+the system.  These  files  contain information about the controller, including
+the used  IRQ  and  the  IO  address range. The amount of information shown is
+dependent on  the adapter you use. The example shows the output for an Adaptec
+AHA-2940 SCSI adapter::
+
+  > cat /proc/scsi/aic7xxx/0
+
+  Adaptec AIC7xxx driver version: 5.1.19/3.2.4
+  Compile Options:
+    TCQ Enabled By Default : Disabled
+    AIC7XXX_PROC_STATS     : Disabled
+    AIC7XXX_RESET_DELAY    : 5
+  Adapter Configuration:
+             SCSI Adapter: Adaptec AHA-294X Ultra SCSI host adapter
+                             Ultra Wide Controller
+      PCI MMAPed I/O Base: 0xeb001000
+   Adapter SEEPROM Config: SEEPROM found and used.
+        Adaptec SCSI BIOS: Enabled
+                      IRQ: 10
+                     SCBs: Active 0, Max Active 2,
+                           Allocated 15, HW 16, Page 255
+               Interrupts: 160328
+        BIOS Control Word: 0x18b6
+     Adapter Control Word: 0x005b
+     Extended Translation: Enabled
+  Disconnect Enable Flags: 0xffff
+       Ultra Enable Flags: 0x0001
+   Tag Queue Enable Flags: 0x0000
+  Ordered Queue Tag Flags: 0x0000
+  Default Tag Queue Depth: 8
+      Tagged Queue By Device array for aic7xxx host instance 0:
+        {255,255,255,255,255,255,255,255,255,255,255,255,255,255,255,255}
+      Actual queue depth per device for aic7xxx host instance 0:
+        {1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1}
+  Statistics:
+  (scsi0:0:0:0)
+    Device using Wide/Sync transfers at 40.0 MByte/sec, offset 8
+    Transinfo settings: current(12/8/1/0), goal(12/8/1/0), user(12/15/1/0)
+    Total transfers 160151 (74577 reads and 85574 writes)
+  (scsi0:0:6:0)
+    Device using Narrow/Sync transfers at 5.0 MByte/sec, offset 15
+    Transinfo settings: current(50/15/0/0), goal(50/15/0/0), user(50/15/0/0)
+    Total transfers 0 (0 reads and 0 writes)
+
+
+1.5 Parallel port info in /proc/parport
+---------------------------------------
+
+The directory  /proc/parport  contains information about the parallel ports of
+your system.  It  has  one  subdirectory  for  each port, named after the port
+number (0,1,2,...).
+
+These directories contain the four files shown in Table 1-10.
+
+
+.. table:: Table 1-10: Files in /proc/parport
+
+ ========= ====================================================================
+ File      Content
+ ========= ====================================================================
+ autoprobe Any IEEE-1284 device ID information that has been acquired.
+ devices   list of the device drivers using that port. A + will appear by the
+           name of the device currently using the port (it might not appear
+           against any).
+ hardware  Parallel port's base address, IRQ line and DMA channel.
+ irq       IRQ that parport is using for that port. This is in a separate
+           file to allow you to alter it by writing a new value in (IRQ
+           number or none).
+ ========= ====================================================================
+
+1.6 TTY info in /proc/tty
+-------------------------
+
+Information about  the  available  and actually used tty's can be found in the
+directory /proc/tty. You'll find  entries  for drivers and line disciplines in
+this directory, as shown in Table 1-11.
+
+
+.. table:: Table 1-11: Files in /proc/tty
+
+ ============= ==============================================
+ File          Content
+ ============= ==============================================
+ drivers       list of drivers and their usage
+ ldiscs        registered line disciplines
+ driver/serial usage statistic and status of single tty lines
+ ============= ==============================================
+
+To see  which  tty's  are  currently in use, you can simply look into the file
+/proc/tty/drivers::
+
+  > cat /proc/tty/drivers
+  pty_slave            /dev/pts      136   0-255 pty:slave
+  pty_master           /dev/ptm      128   0-255 pty:master
+  pty_slave            /dev/ttyp       3   0-255 pty:slave
+  pty_master           /dev/pty        2   0-255 pty:master
+  serial               /dev/cua        5   64-67 serial:callout
+  serial               /dev/ttyS       4   64-67 serial
+  /dev/tty0            /dev/tty0       4       0 system:vtmaster
+  /dev/ptmx            /dev/ptmx       5       2 system
+  /dev/console         /dev/console    5       1 system:console
+  /dev/tty             /dev/tty        5       0 system:/dev/tty
+  unknown              /dev/tty        4    1-63 console
+
+
+1.7 Miscellaneous kernel statistics in /proc/stat
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+Various pieces   of  information about  kernel activity  are  available in the
+/proc/stat file.  All  of  the numbers reported  in  this file are  aggregates
+since the system first booted.  For a quick look, simply cat the file::
+
+  > cat /proc/stat
+  cpu  2255 34 2290 22625563 6290 127 456 0 0 0
+  cpu0 1132 34 1441 11311718 3675 127 438 0 0 0
+  cpu1 1123 0 849 11313845 2614 0 18 0 0 0
+  intr 114930548 113199788 3 0 5 263 0 4 [... lots more numbers ...]
+  ctxt 1990473
+  btime 1062191376
+  processes 2915
+  procs_running 1
+  procs_blocked 0
+  softirq 183433 0 21755 12 39 1137 231 21459 2263
+
+The very first  "cpu" line aggregates the  numbers in all  of the other "cpuN"
+lines.  These numbers identify the amount of time the CPU has spent performing
+different kinds of work.  Time units are in USER_HZ (typically hundredths of a
+second).  The meanings of the columns are as follows, from left to right:
+
+- user: normal processes executing in user mode
+- nice: niced processes executing in user mode
+- system: processes executing in kernel mode
+- idle: twiddling thumbs
+- iowait: In a word, iowait stands for waiting for I/O to complete. But there
+  are several problems:
+
+  1. CPU will not wait for I/O to complete, iowait is the time that a task is
+     waiting for I/O to complete. When CPU goes into idle state for
+     outstanding task I/O, another task will be scheduled on this CPU.
+  2. In a multi-core CPU, the task waiting for I/O to complete is not running
+     on any CPU, so the iowait of each CPU is difficult to calculate.
+  3. The value of iowait field in /proc/stat will decrease in certain
+     conditions.
+
+  So, the iowait is not reliable by reading from /proc/stat.
+- irq: servicing interrupts
+- softirq: servicing softirqs
+- steal: involuntary wait
+- guest: running a normal guest
+- guest_nice: running a niced guest
+
+The "intr" line gives counts of interrupts  serviced since boot time, for each
+of the  possible system interrupts.   The first  column  is the  total of  all
+interrupts serviced  including  unnumbered  architecture specific  interrupts;
+each  subsequent column is the  total for that particular numbered interrupt.
+Unnumbered interrupts are not shown, only summed into the total.
+
+The "ctxt" line gives the total number of context switches across all CPUs.
+
+The "btime" line gives  the time at which the  system booted, in seconds since
+the Unix epoch.
+
+The "processes" line gives the number  of processes and threads created, which
+includes (but  is not limited  to) those  created by  calls to the  fork() and
+clone() system calls.
+
+The "procs_running" line gives the total number of threads that are
+running or ready to run (i.e., the total number of runnable threads).
+
+The   "procs_blocked" line gives  the  number of  processes currently blocked,
+waiting for I/O to complete.
+
+The "softirq" line gives counts of softirqs serviced since boot time, for each
+of the possible system softirqs. The first column is the total of all
+softirqs serviced; each subsequent column is the total for that particular
+softirq.
+
+
+1.8 Ext4 file system parameters
+-------------------------------
+
+Information about mounted ext4 file systems can be found in
+/proc/fs/ext4.  Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in
+/proc/fs/ext4 based on its device name (i.e., /proc/fs/ext4/hdc or
+/proc/fs/ext4/dm-0).   The files in each per-device directory are shown
+in Table 1-12, below.
+
+.. table:: Table 1-12: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/<devname>
+
+ ==============  ==========================================================
+ File            Content
+ mb_groups       details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
+ ==============  ==========================================================
+
+1.9 /proc/consoles
+-------------------
+Shows registered system console lines.
+
+To see which character device lines are currently used for the system console
+/dev/console, you may simply look into the file /proc/consoles::
+
+  > cat /proc/consoles
+  tty0                 -WU (ECp)       4:7
+  ttyS0                -W- (Ep)        4:64
+
+The columns are:
+
++--------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+| device             | name of the device                                    |
++====================+=======================================================+
+| operations         | * R = can do read operations                          |
+|                    | * W = can do write operations                         |
+|                    | * U = can do unblank                                  |
++--------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+| flags              | * E = it is enabled                                   |
+|                    | * C = it is preferred console                         |
+|                    | * B = it is primary boot console                      |
+|                    | * p = it is used for printk buffer                    |
+|                    | * b = it is not a TTY but a Braille device            |
+|                    | * a = it is safe to use when cpu is offline           |
++--------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+| major:minor        | major and minor number of the device separated by a   |
+|                    | colon                                                 |
++--------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
+
+Summary
+-------
+
+The /proc file system serves information about the running system. It not only
+allows access to process data but also allows you to request the kernel status
+by reading files in the hierarchy.
+
+The directory  structure  of /proc reflects the types of information and makes
+it easy, if not obvious, where to look for specific data.
+
+Chapter 2: Modifying System Parameters
+======================================
+
+In This Chapter
+---------------
+
+* Modifying kernel parameters by writing into files found in /proc/sys
+* Exploring the files which modify certain parameters
+* Review of the /proc/sys file tree
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+A very  interesting part of /proc is the directory /proc/sys. This is not only
+a source  of  information,  it also allows you to change parameters within the
+kernel. Be  very  careful  when attempting this. You can optimize your system,
+but you  can  also  cause  it  to  crash.  Never  alter kernel parameters on a
+production system.  Set  up  a  development machine and test to make sure that
+everything works  the  way  you want it to. You may have no alternative but to
+reboot the machine once an error has been made.
+
+To change  a  value,  simply  echo  the new value into the file.
+You need to be root to do this. You  can  create  your  own  boot script
+to perform this every time your system boots.
+
+The files  in /proc/sys can be used to fine tune and monitor miscellaneous and
+general things  in  the operation of the Linux kernel. Since some of the files
+can inadvertently  disrupt  your  system,  it  is  advisable  to  read  both
+documentation and  source  before actually making adjustments. In any case, be
+very careful  when  writing  to  any  of these files. The entries in /proc may
+change slightly between the 2.1.* and the 2.2 kernel, so if there is any doubt
+review the kernel documentation in the directory /usr/src/linux/Documentation.
+This chapter  is  heavily  based  on the documentation included in the pre 2.2
+kernels, and became part of it in version 2.2.1 of the Linux kernel.
+
+Please see: Documentation/admin-guide/sysctl/ directory for descriptions of these
+entries.
+
+Summary
+-------
+
+Certain aspects  of  kernel  behavior  can be modified at runtime, without the
+need to  recompile  the kernel, or even to reboot the system. The files in the
+/proc/sys tree  can  not only be read, but also modified. You can use the echo
+command to write value into these files, thereby changing the default settings
+of the kernel.
+
+
+Chapter 3: Per-process Parameters
+=================================
+
+3.1 /proc/<pid>/oom_adj & /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj- Adjust the oom-killer score
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+These files can be used to adjust the badness heuristic used to select which
+process gets killed in out of memory (oom) conditions.
+
+The badness heuristic assigns a value to each candidate task ranging from 0
+(never kill) to 1000 (always kill) to determine which process is targeted.  The
+units are roughly a proportion along that range of allowed memory the process
+may allocate from based on an estimation of its current memory and swap use.
+For example, if a task is using all allowed memory, its badness score will be
+1000.  If it is using half of its allowed memory, its score will be 500.
+
+The amount of "allowed" memory depends on the context in which the oom killer
+was called.  If it is due to the memory assigned to the allocating task's cpuset
+being exhausted, the allowed memory represents the set of mems assigned to that
+cpuset.  If it is due to a mempolicy's node(s) being exhausted, the allowed
+memory represents the set of mempolicy nodes.  If it is due to a memory
+limit (or swap limit) being reached, the allowed memory is that configured
+limit.  Finally, if it is due to the entire system being out of memory, the
+allowed memory represents all allocatable resources.
+
+The value of /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj is added to the badness score before it
+is used to determine which task to kill.  Acceptable values range from -1000
+(OOM_SCORE_ADJ_MIN) to +1000 (OOM_SCORE_ADJ_MAX).  This allows userspace to
+polarize the preference for oom killing either by always preferring a certain
+task or completely disabling it.  The lowest possible value, -1000, is
+equivalent to disabling oom killing entirely for that task since it will always
+report a badness score of 0.
+
+Consequently, it is very simple for userspace to define the amount of memory to
+consider for each task.  Setting a /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj value of +500, for
+example, is roughly equivalent to allowing the remainder of tasks sharing the
+same system, cpuset, mempolicy, or memory controller resources to use at least
+50% more memory.  A value of -500, on the other hand, would be roughly
+equivalent to discounting 50% of the task's allowed memory from being considered
+as scoring against the task.
+
+For backwards compatibility with previous kernels, /proc/<pid>/oom_adj may also
+be used to tune the badness score.  Its acceptable values range from -16
+(OOM_ADJUST_MIN) to +15 (OOM_ADJUST_MAX) and a special value of -17
+(OOM_DISABLE) to disable oom killing entirely for that task.  Its value is
+scaled linearly with /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj.
+
+The value of /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj may be reduced no lower than the last
+value set by a CAP_SYS_RESOURCE process. To reduce the value any lower
+requires CAP_SYS_RESOURCE.
+
+
+3.2 /proc/<pid>/oom_score - Display current oom-killer score
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+
+This file can be used to check the current score used by the oom-killer for
+any given <pid>. Use it together with /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj to tune which
+process should be killed in an out-of-memory situation.
+
+Please note that the exported value includes oom_score_adj so it is
+effectively in range [0,2000].
+
+
+3.3  /proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields
+-------------------------------------------------------
+
+This file contains IO statistics for each running process.
+
+Example
+~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+    test:/tmp # dd if=/dev/zero of=/tmp/test.dat &
+    [1] 3828
+
+    test:/tmp # cat /proc/3828/io
+    rchar: 323934931
+    wchar: 323929600
+    syscr: 632687
+    syscw: 632675
+    read_bytes: 0
+    write_bytes: 323932160
+    cancelled_write_bytes: 0
+
+
+Description
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+rchar
+^^^^^
+
+I/O counter: chars read
+The number of bytes which this task has caused to be read from storage. This
+is simply the sum of bytes which this process passed to read() and pread().
+It includes things like tty IO and it is unaffected by whether or not actual
+physical disk IO was required (the read might have been satisfied from
+pagecache).
+
+
+wchar
+^^^^^
+
+I/O counter: chars written
+The number of bytes which this task has caused, or shall cause to be written
+to disk. Similar caveats apply here as with rchar.
+
+
+syscr
+^^^^^
+
+I/O counter: read syscalls
+Attempt to count the number of read I/O operations, i.e. syscalls like read()
+and pread().
+
+
+syscw
+^^^^^
+
+I/O counter: write syscalls
+Attempt to count the number of write I/O operations, i.e. syscalls like
+write() and pwrite().
+
+
+read_bytes
+^^^^^^^^^^
+
+I/O counter: bytes read
+Attempt to count the number of bytes which this process really did cause to
+be fetched from the storage layer. Done at the submit_bio() level, so it is
+accurate for block-backed filesystems. <please add status regarding NFS and
+CIFS at a later time>
+
+
+write_bytes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+I/O counter: bytes written
+Attempt to count the number of bytes which this process caused to be sent to
+the storage layer. This is done at page-dirtying time.
+
+
+cancelled_write_bytes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+The big inaccuracy here is truncate. If a process writes 1MB to a file and
+then deletes the file, it will in fact perform no writeout. But it will have
+been accounted as having caused 1MB of write.
+In other words: The number of bytes which this process caused to not happen,
+by truncating pagecache. A task can cause "negative" IO too. If this task
+truncates some dirty pagecache, some IO which another task has been accounted
+for (in its write_bytes) will not be happening. We _could_ just subtract that
+from the truncating task's write_bytes, but there is information loss in doing
+that.
+
+
+.. Note::
+
+   At its current implementation state, this is a bit racy on 32-bit machines:
+   if process A reads process B's /proc/pid/io while process B is updating one
+   of those 64-bit counters, process A could see an intermediate result.
+
+
+More information about this can be found within the taskstats documentation in
+Documentation/accounting.
+
+3.4 /proc/<pid>/coredump_filter - Core dump filtering settings
+---------------------------------------------------------------
+When a process is dumped, all anonymous memory is written to a core file as
+long as the size of the core file isn't limited. But sometimes we don't want
+to dump some memory segments, for example, huge shared memory or DAX.
+Conversely, sometimes we want to save file-backed memory segments into a core
+file, not only the individual files.
+
+/proc/<pid>/coredump_filter allows you to customize which memory segments
+will be dumped when the <pid> process is dumped. coredump_filter is a bitmask
+of memory types. If a bit of the bitmask is set, memory segments of the
+corresponding memory type are dumped, otherwise they are not dumped.
+
+The following 9 memory types are supported:
+
+  - (bit 0) anonymous private memory
+  - (bit 1) anonymous shared memory
+  - (bit 2) file-backed private memory
+  - (bit 3) file-backed shared memory
+  - (bit 4) ELF header pages in file-backed private memory areas (it is
+    effective only if the bit 2 is cleared)
+  - (bit 5) hugetlb private memory
+  - (bit 6) hugetlb shared memory
+  - (bit 7) DAX private memory
+  - (bit 8) DAX shared memory
+
+  Note that MMIO pages such as frame buffer are never dumped and vDSO pages
+  are always dumped regardless of the bitmask status.
+
+  Note that bits 0-4 don't affect hugetlb or DAX memory. hugetlb memory is
+  only affected by bit 5-6, and DAX is only affected by bits 7-8.
+
+The default value of coredump_filter is 0x33; this means all anonymous memory
+segments, ELF header pages and hugetlb private memory are dumped.
+
+If you don't want to dump all shared memory segments attached to pid 1234,
+write 0x31 to the process's proc file::
+
+  $ echo 0x31 > /proc/1234/coredump_filter
+
+When a new process is created, the process inherits the bitmask status from its
+parent. It is useful to set up coredump_filter before the program runs.
+For example::
+
+  $ echo 0x7 > /proc/self/coredump_filter
+  $ ./some_program
+
+3.5	/proc/<pid>/mountinfo - Information about mounts
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+This file contains lines of the form::
+
+    36 35 98:0 /mnt1 /mnt2 rw,noatime master:1 - ext3 /dev/root rw,errors=continue
+    (1)(2)(3)   (4)   (5)      (6)     (n…m) (m+1)(m+2) (m+3)         (m+4)
+
+    (1)   mount ID:        unique identifier of the mount (may be reused after umount)
+    (2)   parent ID:       ID of parent (or of self for the top of the mount tree)
+    (3)   major:minor:     value of st_dev for files on filesystem
+    (4)   root:            root of the mount within the filesystem
+    (5)   mount point:     mount point relative to the process's root
+    (6)   mount options:   per mount options
+    (n…m) optional fields: zero or more fields of the form "tag[:value]"
+    (m+1) separator:       marks the end of the optional fields
+    (m+2) filesystem type: name of filesystem of the form "type[.subtype]"
+    (m+3) mount source:    filesystem specific information or "none"
+    (m+4) super options:   per super block options
+
+Parsers should ignore all unrecognised optional fields.  Currently the
+possible optional fields are:
+
+================  ==============================================================
+shared:X          mount is shared in peer group X
+master:X          mount is slave to peer group X
+propagate_from:X  mount is slave and receives propagation from peer group X [#]_
+unbindable        mount is unbindable
+================  ==============================================================
+
+.. [#] X is the closest dominant peer group under the process's root.  If
+       X is the immediate master of the mount, or if there's no dominant peer
+       group under the same root, then only the "master:X" field is present
+       and not the "propagate_from:X" field.
+
+For more information on mount propagation see:
+
+  Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.rst
+
+
+3.6	/proc/<pid>/comm  & /proc/<pid>/task/<tid>/comm
+--------------------------------------------------------
+These files provide a method to access a task's comm value. It also allows for
+a task to set its own or one of its thread siblings comm value. The comm value
+is limited in size compared to the cmdline value, so writing anything longer
+then the kernel's TASK_COMM_LEN (currently 16 chars) will result in a truncated
+comm value.
+
+
+3.7	/proc/<pid>/task/<tid>/children - Information about task children
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+This file provides a fast way to retrieve first level children pids
+of a task pointed by <pid>/<tid> pair. The format is a space separated
+stream of pids.
+
+Note the "first level" here -- if a child has its own children they will
+not be listed here; one needs to read /proc/<children-pid>/task/<tid>/children
+to obtain the descendants.
+
+Since this interface is intended to be fast and cheap it doesn't
+guarantee to provide precise results and some children might be
+skipped, especially if they've exited right after we printed their
+pids, so one needs to either stop or freeze processes being inspected
+if precise results are needed.
+
+
+3.8	/proc/<pid>/fdinfo/<fd> - Information about opened file
+---------------------------------------------------------------
+This file provides information associated with an opened file. The regular
+files have at least four fields -- 'pos', 'flags', 'mnt_id' and 'ino'.
+The 'pos' represents the current offset of the opened file in decimal
+form [see lseek(2) for details], 'flags' denotes the octal O_xxx mask the
+file has been created with [see open(2) for details] and 'mnt_id' represents
+mount ID of the file system containing the opened file [see 3.5
+/proc/<pid>/mountinfo for details]. 'ino' represents the inode number of
+the file.
+
+A typical output is::
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	0100002
+	mnt_id:	19
+	ino:	63107
+
+All locks associated with a file descriptor are shown in its fdinfo too::
+
+    lock:       1: FLOCK  ADVISORY  WRITE 359 00:13:11691 0 EOF
+
+The files such as eventfd, fsnotify, signalfd, epoll among the regular pos/flags
+pair provide additional information particular to the objects they represent.
+
+Eventfd files
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	04002
+	mnt_id:	9
+	ino:	63107
+	eventfd-count:	5a
+
+where 'eventfd-count' is hex value of a counter.
+
+Signalfd files
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	04002
+	mnt_id:	9
+	ino:	63107
+	sigmask:	0000000000000200
+
+where 'sigmask' is hex value of the signal mask associated
+with a file.
+
+Epoll files
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	02
+	mnt_id:	9
+	ino:	63107
+	tfd:        5 events:       1d data: ffffffffffffffff pos:0 ino:61af sdev:7
+
+where 'tfd' is a target file descriptor number in decimal form,
+'events' is events mask being watched and the 'data' is data
+associated with a target [see epoll(7) for more details].
+
+The 'pos' is current offset of the target file in decimal form
+[see lseek(2)], 'ino' and 'sdev' are inode and device numbers
+where target file resides, all in hex format.
+
+Fsnotify files
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+For inotify files the format is the following::
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	02000000
+	mnt_id:	9
+	ino:	63107
+	inotify wd:3 ino:9e7e sdev:800013 mask:800afce ignored_mask:0 fhandle-bytes:8 fhandle-type:1 f_handle:7e9e0000640d1b6d
+
+where 'wd' is a watch descriptor in decimal form, i.e. a target file
+descriptor number, 'ino' and 'sdev' are inode and device where the
+target file resides and the 'mask' is the mask of events, all in hex
+form [see inotify(7) for more details].
+
+If the kernel was built with exportfs support, the path to the target
+file is encoded as a file handle.  The file handle is provided by three
+fields 'fhandle-bytes', 'fhandle-type' and 'f_handle', all in hex
+format.
+
+If the kernel is built without exportfs support the file handle won't be
+printed out.
+
+If there is no inotify mark attached yet the 'inotify' line will be omitted.
+
+For fanotify files the format is::
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	02
+	mnt_id:	9
+	ino:	63107
+	fanotify flags:10 event-flags:0
+	fanotify mnt_id:12 mflags:40 mask:38 ignored_mask:40000003
+	fanotify ino:4f969 sdev:800013 mflags:0 mask:3b ignored_mask:40000000 fhandle-bytes:8 fhandle-type:1 f_handle:69f90400c275b5b4
+
+where fanotify 'flags' and 'event-flags' are values used in fanotify_init
+call, 'mnt_id' is the mount point identifier, 'mflags' is the value of
+flags associated with mark which are tracked separately from events
+mask. 'ino' and 'sdev' are target inode and device, 'mask' is the events
+mask and 'ignored_mask' is the mask of events which are to be ignored.
+All are in hex format. Incorporation of 'mflags', 'mask' and 'ignored_mask'
+provide information about flags and mask used in fanotify_mark
+call [see fsnotify manpage for details].
+
+While the first three lines are mandatory and always printed, the rest is
+optional and may be omitted if no marks created yet.
+
+Timerfd files
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	02
+	mnt_id:	9
+	ino:	63107
+	clockid: 0
+	ticks: 0
+	settime flags: 01
+	it_value: (0, 49406829)
+	it_interval: (1, 0)
+
+where 'clockid' is the clock type and 'ticks' is the number of the timer expirations
+that have occurred [see timerfd_create(2) for details]. 'settime flags' are
+flags in octal form been used to setup the timer [see timerfd_settime(2) for
+details]. 'it_value' is remaining time until the timer expiration.
+'it_interval' is the interval for the timer. Note the timer might be set up
+with TIMER_ABSTIME option which will be shown in 'settime flags', but 'it_value'
+still exhibits timer's remaining time.
+
+DMA Buffer files
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+	pos:	0
+	flags:	04002
+	mnt_id:	9
+	ino:	63107
+	size:   32768
+	count:  2
+	exp_name:  system-heap
+
+where 'size' is the size of the DMA buffer in bytes. 'count' is the file count of
+the DMA buffer file. 'exp_name' is the name of the DMA buffer exporter.
+
+3.9	/proc/<pid>/map_files - Information about memory mapped files
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+This directory contains symbolic links which represent memory mapped files
+the process is maintaining.  Example output::
+
+     | lr-------- 1 root root 64 Jan 27 11:24 333c600000-333c620000 -> /usr/lib64/ld-2.18.so
+     | lr-------- 1 root root 64 Jan 27 11:24 333c81f000-333c820000 -> /usr/lib64/ld-2.18.so
+     | lr-------- 1 root root 64 Jan 27 11:24 333c820000-333c821000 -> /usr/lib64/ld-2.18.so
+     | ...
+     | lr-------- 1 root root 64 Jan 27 11:24 35d0421000-35d0422000 -> /usr/lib64/libselinux.so.1
+     | lr-------- 1 root root 64 Jan 27 11:24 400000-41a000 -> /usr/bin/ls
+
+The name of a link represents the virtual memory bounds of a mapping, i.e.
+vm_area_struct::vm_start-vm_area_struct::vm_end.
+
+The main purpose of the map_files is to retrieve a set of memory mapped
+files in a fast way instead of parsing /proc/<pid>/maps or
+/proc/<pid>/smaps, both of which contain many more records.  At the same
+time one can open(2) mappings from the listings of two processes and
+comparing their inode numbers to figure out which anonymous memory areas
+are actually shared.
+
+3.10	/proc/<pid>/timerslack_ns - Task timerslack value
+---------------------------------------------------------
+This file provides the value of the task's timerslack value in nanoseconds.
+This value specifies an amount of time that normal timers may be deferred
+in order to coalesce timers and avoid unnecessary wakeups.
+
+This allows a task's interactivity vs power consumption tradeoff to be
+adjusted.
+
+Writing 0 to the file will set the task's timerslack to the default value.
+
+Valid values are from 0 - ULLONG_MAX
+
+An application setting the value must have PTRACE_MODE_ATTACH_FSCREDS level
+permissions on the task specified to change its timerslack_ns value.
+
+3.11	/proc/<pid>/patch_state - Livepatch patch operation state
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+When CONFIG_LIVEPATCH is enabled, this file displays the value of the
+patch state for the task.
+
+A value of '-1' indicates that no patch is in transition.
+
+A value of '0' indicates that a patch is in transition and the task is
+unpatched.  If the patch is being enabled, then the task hasn't been
+patched yet.  If the patch is being disabled, then the task has already
+been unpatched.
+
+A value of '1' indicates that a patch is in transition and the task is
+patched.  If the patch is being enabled, then the task has already been
+patched.  If the patch is being disabled, then the task hasn't been
+unpatched yet.
+
+3.12 /proc/<pid>/arch_status - task architecture specific status
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
+When CONFIG_PROC_PID_ARCH_STATUS is enabled, this file displays the
+architecture specific status of the task.
+
+Example
+~~~~~~~
+
+::
+
+ $ cat /proc/6753/arch_status
+ AVX512_elapsed_ms:      8
+
+Description
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+x86 specific entries
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+AVX512_elapsed_ms
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+  If AVX512 is supported on the machine, this entry shows the milliseconds
+  elapsed since the last time AVX512 usage was recorded. The recording
+  happens on a best effort basis when a task is scheduled out. This means
+  that the value depends on two factors:
+
+    1) The time which the task spent on the CPU without being scheduled
+       out. With CPU isolation and a single runnable task this can take
+       several seconds.
+
+    2) The time since the task was scheduled out last. Depending on the
+       reason for being scheduled out (time slice exhausted, syscall ...)
+       this can be arbitrary long time.
+
+  As a consequence the value cannot be considered precise and authoritative
+  information. The application which uses this information has to be aware
+  of the overall scenario on the system in order to determine whether a
+  task is a real AVX512 user or not. Precise information can be obtained
+  with performance counters.
+
+  A special value of '-1' indicates that no AVX512 usage was recorded, thus
+  the task is unlikely an AVX512 user, but depends on the workload and the
+  scheduling scenario, it also could be a false negative mentioned above.
+
+Chapter 4: Configuring procfs
+=============================
+
+4.1	Mount options
+---------------------
+
+The following mount options are supported:
+
+	=========	========================================================
+	hidepid=	Set /proc/<pid>/ access mode.
+	gid=		Set the group authorized to learn processes information.
+	subset=		Show only the specified subset of procfs.
+	=========	========================================================
+
+hidepid=off or hidepid=0 means classic mode - everybody may access all
+/proc/<pid>/ directories (default).
+
+hidepid=noaccess or hidepid=1 means users may not access any /proc/<pid>/
+directories but their own.  Sensitive files like cmdline, sched*, status are now
+protected against other users.  This makes it impossible to learn whether any
+user runs specific program (given the program doesn't reveal itself by its
+behaviour).  As an additional bonus, as /proc/<pid>/cmdline is unaccessible for
+other users, poorly written programs passing sensitive information via program
+arguments are now protected against local eavesdroppers.
+
+hidepid=invisible or hidepid=2 means hidepid=1 plus all /proc/<pid>/ will be
+fully invisible to other users.  It doesn't mean that it hides a fact whether a
+process with a specific pid value exists (it can be learned by other means, e.g.
+by "kill -0 $PID"), but it hides process' uid and gid, which may be learned by
+stat()'ing /proc/<pid>/ otherwise.  It greatly complicates an intruder's task of
+gathering information about running processes, whether some daemon runs with
+elevated privileges, whether other user runs some sensitive program, whether
+other users run any program at all, etc.
+
+hidepid=ptraceable or hidepid=4 means that procfs should only contain
+/proc/<pid>/ directories that the caller can ptrace.
+
+gid= defines a group authorized to learn processes information otherwise
+prohibited by hidepid=.  If you use some daemon like identd which needs to learn
+information about processes information, just add identd to this group.
+
+subset=pid hides all top level files and directories in the procfs that
+are not related to tasks.
+
+Chapter 5: Filesystem behavior
+==============================
+
+Originally, before the advent of pid namepsace, procfs was a global file
+system. It means that there was only one procfs instance in the system.
+
+When pid namespace was added, a separate procfs instance was mounted in
+each pid namespace. So, procfs mount options are global among all
+mountpoints within the same namespace::
+
+	# grep ^proc /proc/mounts
+	proc /proc proc rw,relatime,hidepid=2 0 0
+
+	# strace -e mount mount -o hidepid=1 -t proc proc /tmp/proc
+	mount("proc", "/tmp/proc", "proc", 0, "hidepid=1") = 0
+	+++ exited with 0 +++
+
+	# grep ^proc /proc/mounts
+	proc /proc proc rw,relatime,hidepid=2 0 0
+	proc /tmp/proc proc rw,relatime,hidepid=2 0 0
+
+and only after remounting procfs mount options will change at all
+mountpoints::
+
+	# mount -o remount,hidepid=1 -t proc proc /tmp/proc
+
+	# grep ^proc /proc/mounts
+	proc /proc proc rw,relatime,hidepid=1 0 0
+	proc /tmp/proc proc rw,relatime,hidepid=1 0 0
+
+This behavior is different from the behavior of other filesystems.
+
+The new procfs behavior is more like other filesystems. Each procfs mount
+creates a new procfs instance. Mount options affect own procfs instance.
+It means that it became possible to have several procfs instances
+displaying tasks with different filtering options in one pid namespace::
+
+	# mount -o hidepid=invisible -t proc proc /proc
+	# mount -o hidepid=noaccess -t proc proc /tmp/proc
+	# grep ^proc /proc/mounts
+	proc /proc proc rw,relatime,hidepid=invisible 0 0
+	proc /tmp/proc proc rw,relatime,hidepid=noaccess 0 0
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/qnx6.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/qnx6.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..523b798f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/qnx6.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===================
+The QNX6 Filesystem
+===================
+
+The qnx6fs is used by newer QNX operating system versions. (e.g. Neutrino)
+It got introduced in QNX 6.4.0 and is used default since 6.4.1.
+
+Option
+======
+
+mmi_fs		Mount filesystem as used for example by Audi MMI 3G system
+
+Specification
+=============
+
+qnx6fs shares many properties with traditional Unix filesystems. It has the
+concepts of blocks, inodes and directories.
+
+On QNX it is possible to create little endian and big endian qnx6 filesystems.
+This feature makes it possible to create and use a different endianness fs
+for the target (QNX is used on quite a range of embedded systems) platform
+running on a different endianness.
+
+The Linux driver handles endianness transparently. (LE and BE)
+
+Blocks
+------
+
+The space in the device or file is split up into blocks. These are a fixed
+size of 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096, which is decided when the filesystem is
+created.
+
+Blockpointers are 32bit, so the maximum space that can be addressed is
+2^32 * 4096 bytes or 16TB
+
+The superblocks
+---------------
+
+The superblock contains all global information about the filesystem.
+Each qnx6fs got two superblocks, each one having a 64bit serial number.
+That serial number is used to identify the "active" superblock.
+In write mode with reach new snapshot (after each synchronous write), the
+serial of the new master superblock is increased (old superblock serial + 1)
+
+So basically the snapshot functionality is realized by an atomic final
+update of the serial number. Before updating that serial, all modifications
+are done by copying all modified blocks during that specific write request
+(or period) and building up a new (stable) filesystem structure under the
+inactive superblock.
+
+Each superblock holds a set of root inodes for the different filesystem
+parts. (Inode, Bitmap and Longfilenames)
+Each of these root nodes holds information like total size of the stored
+data and the addressing levels in that specific tree.
+If the level value is 0, up to 16 direct blocks can be addressed by each
+node.
+
+Level 1 adds an additional indirect addressing level where each indirect
+addressing block holds up to blocksize / 4 bytes pointers to data blocks.
+Level 2 adds an additional indirect addressing block level (so, already up
+to 16 * 256 * 256 = 1048576 blocks that can be addressed by such a tree).
+
+Unused block pointers are always set to ~0 - regardless of root node,
+indirect addressing blocks or inodes.
+
+Data leaves are always on the lowest level. So no data is stored on upper
+tree levels.
+
+The first Superblock is located at 0x2000. (0x2000 is the bootblock size)
+The Audi MMI 3G first superblock directly starts at byte 0.
+
+Second superblock position can either be calculated from the superblock
+information (total number of filesystem blocks) or by taking the highest
+device address, zeroing the last 3 bytes and then subtracting 0x1000 from
+that address.
+
+0x1000 is the size reserved for each superblock - regardless of the
+blocksize of the filesystem.
+
+Inodes
+------
+
+Each object in the filesystem is represented by an inode. (index node)
+The inode structure contains pointers to the filesystem blocks which contain
+the data held in the object and all of the metadata about an object except
+its longname. (filenames longer than 27 characters)
+The metadata about an object includes the permissions, owner, group, flags,
+size, number of blocks used, access time, change time and modification time.
+
+Object mode field is POSIX format. (which makes things easier)
+
+There are also pointers to the first 16 blocks, if the object data can be
+addressed with 16 direct blocks.
+
+For more than 16 blocks an indirect addressing in form of another tree is
+used. (scheme is the same as the one used for the superblock root nodes)
+
+The filesize is stored 64bit. Inode counting starts with 1. (while long
+filename inodes start with 0)
+
+Directories
+-----------
+
+A directory is a filesystem object and has an inode just like a file.
+It is a specially formatted file containing records which associate each
+name with an inode number.
+
+'.' inode number points to the directory inode
+
+'..' inode number points to the parent directory inode
+
+Eeach filename record additionally got a filename length field.
+
+One special case are long filenames or subdirectory names.
+
+These got set a filename length field of 0xff in the corresponding directory
+record plus the longfile inode number also stored in that record.
+
+With that longfilename inode number, the longfilename tree can be walked
+starting with the superblock longfilename root node pointers.
+
+Special files
+-------------
+
+Symbolic links are also filesystem objects with inodes. They got a specific
+bit in the inode mode field identifying them as symbolic link.
+
+The directory entry file inode pointer points to the target file inode.
+
+Hard links got an inode, a directory entry, but a specific mode bit set,
+no block pointers and the directory file record pointing to the target file
+inode.
+
+Character and block special devices do not exist in QNX as those files
+are handled by the QNX kernel/drivers and created in /dev independent of the
+underlaying filesystem.
+
+Long filenames
+--------------
+
+Long filenames are stored in a separate addressing tree. The staring point
+is the longfilename root node in the active superblock.
+
+Each data block (tree leaves) holds one long filename. That filename is
+limited to 510 bytes. The first two starting bytes are used as length field
+for the actual filename.
+
+If that structure shall fit for all allowed blocksizes, it is clear why there
+is a limit of 510 bytes for the actual filename stored.
+
+Bitmap
+------
+
+The qnx6fs filesystem allocation bitmap is stored in a tree under bitmap
+root node in the superblock and each bit in the bitmap represents one
+filesystem block.
+
+The first block is block 0, which starts 0x1000 after superblock start.
+So for a normal qnx6fs 0x3000 (bootblock + superblock) is the physical
+address at which block 0 is located.
+
+Bits at the end of the last bitmap block are set to 1, if the device is
+smaller than addressing space in the bitmap.
+
+Bitmap system area
+------------------
+
+The bitmap itself is divided into three parts.
+
+First the system area, that is split into two halves.
+
+Then userspace.
+
+The requirement for a static, fixed preallocated system area comes from how
+qnx6fs deals with writes.
+
+Each superblock got its own half of the system area. So superblock #1
+always uses blocks from the lower half while superblock #2 just writes to
+blocks represented by the upper half bitmap system area bits.
+
+Bitmap blocks, Inode blocks and indirect addressing blocks for those two
+tree structures are treated as system blocks.
+
+The rational behind that is that a write request can work on a new snapshot
+(system area of the inactive - resp. lower serial numbered superblock) while
+at the same time there is still a complete stable filesystem structure in the
+other half of the system area.
+
+When finished with writing (a sync write is completed, the maximum sync leap
+time or a filesystem sync is requested), serial of the previously inactive
+superblock atomically is increased and the fs switches over to that - then
+stable declared - superblock.
+
+For all data outside the system area, blocks are just copied while writing.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/quota.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..abd4303c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============
+Quota subsystem
+===============
+
+Quota subsystem allows system administrator to set limits on used space and
+number of used inodes (inode is a filesystem structure which is associated with
+each file or directory) for users and/or groups. For both used space and number
+of used inodes there are actually two limits. The first one is called softlimit
+and the second one hardlimit.  A user can never exceed a hardlimit for any
+resource (unless he has CAP_SYS_RESOURCE capability). User is allowed to exceed
+softlimit but only for limited period of time. This period is called "grace
+period" or "grace time". When grace time is over, user is not able to allocate
+more space/inodes until he frees enough of them to get below softlimit.
+
+Quota limits (and amount of grace time) are set independently for each
+filesystem.
+
+For more details about quota design, see the documentation in quota-tools package
+(https://sourceforge.net/projects/linuxquota).
+
+Quota netlink interface
+=======================
+When user exceeds a softlimit, runs out of grace time or reaches hardlimit,
+quota subsystem traditionally printed a message to the controlling terminal of
+the process which caused the excess. This method has the disadvantage that
+when user is using a graphical desktop he usually cannot see the message.
+Thus quota netlink interface has been designed to pass information about
+the above events to userspace. There they can be captured by an application
+and processed accordingly.
+
+The interface uses generic netlink framework (see
+https://lwn.net/Articles/208755/ and http://www.infradead.org/~tgr/libnl/ for
+more details about this layer). The name of the quota generic netlink interface
+is "VFS_DQUOT". Definitions of constants below are in <linux/quota.h>.  Since
+the quota netlink protocol is not namespace aware, quota netlink messages are
+sent only in initial network namespace.
+
+Currently, the interface supports only one message type QUOTA_NL_C_WARNING.
+This command is used to send a notification about any of the above mentioned
+events. Each message has six attributes. These are (type of the argument is
+in parentheses):
+
+        QUOTA_NL_A_QTYPE (u32)
+	  - type of quota being exceeded (one of USRQUOTA, GRPQUOTA)
+        QUOTA_NL_A_EXCESS_ID (u64)
+	  - UID/GID (depends on quota type) of user / group whose limit
+	    is being exceeded.
+        QUOTA_NL_A_CAUSED_ID (u64)
+	  - UID of a user who caused the event
+        QUOTA_NL_A_WARNING (u32)
+	  - what kind of limit is exceeded:
+
+		QUOTA_NL_IHARDWARN
+		    inode hardlimit
+		QUOTA_NL_ISOFTLONGWARN
+		    inode softlimit is exceeded longer
+		    than given grace period
+		QUOTA_NL_ISOFTWARN
+		    inode softlimit
+		QUOTA_NL_BHARDWARN
+		    space (block) hardlimit
+		QUOTA_NL_BSOFTLONGWARN
+		    space (block) softlimit is exceeded
+		    longer than given grace period.
+		QUOTA_NL_BSOFTWARN
+		    space (block) softlimit
+
+	  - four warnings are also defined for the event when user stops
+	    exceeding some limit:
+
+		QUOTA_NL_IHARDBELOW
+		    inode hardlimit
+		QUOTA_NL_ISOFTBELOW
+		    inode softlimit
+		QUOTA_NL_BHARDBELOW
+		    space (block) hardlimit
+		QUOTA_NL_BSOFTBELOW
+		    space (block) softlimit
+
+        QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MAJOR (u32)
+	  - major number of a device with the affected filesystem
+        QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MINOR (u32)
+	  - minor number of a device with the affected filesystem
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..164960631
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,369 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================
+Ramfs, rootfs and initramfs
+===========================
+
+October 17, 2005
+
+Rob Landley <rob@landley.net>
+=============================
+
+What is ramfs?
+--------------
+
+Ramfs is a very simple filesystem that exports Linux's disk caching
+mechanisms (the page cache and dentry cache) as a dynamically resizable
+RAM-based filesystem.
+
+Normally all files are cached in memory by Linux.  Pages of data read from
+backing store (usually the block device the filesystem is mounted on) are kept
+around in case it's needed again, but marked as clean (freeable) in case the
+Virtual Memory system needs the memory for something else.  Similarly, data
+written to files is marked clean as soon as it has been written to backing
+store, but kept around for caching purposes until the VM reallocates the
+memory.  A similar mechanism (the dentry cache) greatly speeds up access to
+directories.
+
+With ramfs, there is no backing store.  Files written into ramfs allocate
+dentries and page cache as usual, but there's nowhere to write them to.
+This means the pages are never marked clean, so they can't be freed by the
+VM when it's looking to recycle memory.
+
+The amount of code required to implement ramfs is tiny, because all the
+work is done by the existing Linux caching infrastructure.  Basically,
+you're mounting the disk cache as a filesystem.  Because of this, ramfs is not
+an optional component removable via menuconfig, since there would be negligible
+space savings.
+
+ramfs and ramdisk:
+------------------
+
+The older "ram disk" mechanism created a synthetic block device out of
+an area of RAM and used it as backing store for a filesystem.  This block
+device was of fixed size, so the filesystem mounted on it was of fixed
+size.  Using a ram disk also required unnecessarily copying memory from the
+fake block device into the page cache (and copying changes back out), as well
+as creating and destroying dentries.  Plus it needed a filesystem driver
+(such as ext2) to format and interpret this data.
+
+Compared to ramfs, this wastes memory (and memory bus bandwidth), creates
+unnecessary work for the CPU, and pollutes the CPU caches.  (There are tricks
+to avoid this copying by playing with the page tables, but they're unpleasantly
+complicated and turn out to be about as expensive as the copying anyway.)
+More to the point, all the work ramfs is doing has to happen _anyway_,
+since all file access goes through the page and dentry caches.  The RAM
+disk is simply unnecessary; ramfs is internally much simpler.
+
+Another reason ramdisks are semi-obsolete is that the introduction of
+loopback devices offered a more flexible and convenient way to create
+synthetic block devices, now from files instead of from chunks of memory.
+See losetup (8) for details.
+
+ramfs and tmpfs:
+----------------
+
+One downside of ramfs is you can keep writing data into it until you fill
+up all memory, and the VM can't free it because the VM thinks that files
+should get written to backing store (rather than swap space), but ramfs hasn't
+got any backing store.  Because of this, only root (or a trusted user) should
+be allowed write access to a ramfs mount.
+
+A ramfs derivative called tmpfs was created to add size limits, and the ability
+to write the data to swap space.  Normal users can be allowed write access to
+tmpfs mounts.  See Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.rst for more information.
+
+What is rootfs?
+---------------
+
+Rootfs is a special instance of ramfs (or tmpfs, if that's enabled), which is
+always present in 2.6 systems.  You can't unmount rootfs for approximately the
+same reason you can't kill the init process; rather than having special code
+to check for and handle an empty list, it's smaller and simpler for the kernel
+to just make sure certain lists can't become empty.
+
+Most systems just mount another filesystem over rootfs and ignore it.  The
+amount of space an empty instance of ramfs takes up is tiny.
+
+If CONFIG_TMPFS is enabled, rootfs will use tmpfs instead of ramfs by
+default.  To force ramfs, add "rootfstype=ramfs" to the kernel command
+line.
+
+What is initramfs?
+------------------
+
+All 2.6 Linux kernels contain a gzipped "cpio" format archive, which is
+extracted into rootfs when the kernel boots up.  After extracting, the kernel
+checks to see if rootfs contains a file "init", and if so it executes it as PID
+1.  If found, this init process is responsible for bringing the system the
+rest of the way up, including locating and mounting the real root device (if
+any).  If rootfs does not contain an init program after the embedded cpio
+archive is extracted into it, the kernel will fall through to the older code
+to locate and mount a root partition, then exec some variant of /sbin/init
+out of that.
+
+All this differs from the old initrd in several ways:
+
+  - The old initrd was always a separate file, while the initramfs archive is
+    linked into the linux kernel image.  (The directory ``linux-*/usr`` is
+    devoted to generating this archive during the build.)
+
+  - The old initrd file was a gzipped filesystem image (in some file format,
+    such as ext2, that needed a driver built into the kernel), while the new
+    initramfs archive is a gzipped cpio archive (like tar only simpler,
+    see cpio(1) and Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/buffer-format.rst).
+    The kernel's cpio extraction code is not only extremely small, it's also
+    __init text and data that can be discarded during the boot process.
+
+  - The program run by the old initrd (which was called /initrd, not /init) did
+    some setup and then returned to the kernel, while the init program from
+    initramfs is not expected to return to the kernel.  (If /init needs to hand
+    off control it can overmount / with a new root device and exec another init
+    program.  See the switch_root utility, below.)
+
+  - When switching another root device, initrd would pivot_root and then
+    umount the ramdisk.  But initramfs is rootfs: you can neither pivot_root
+    rootfs, nor unmount it.  Instead delete everything out of rootfs to
+    free up the space (find -xdev / -exec rm '{}' ';'), overmount rootfs
+    with the new root (cd /newmount; mount --move . /; chroot .), attach
+    stdin/stdout/stderr to the new /dev/console, and exec the new init.
+
+    Since this is a remarkably persnickety process (and involves deleting
+    commands before you can run them), the klibc package introduced a helper
+    program (utils/run_init.c) to do all this for you.  Most other packages
+    (such as busybox) have named this command "switch_root".
+
+Populating initramfs:
+---------------------
+
+The 2.6 kernel build process always creates a gzipped cpio format initramfs
+archive and links it into the resulting kernel binary.  By default, this
+archive is empty (consuming 134 bytes on x86).
+
+The config option CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE (in General Setup in menuconfig,
+and living in usr/Kconfig) can be used to specify a source for the
+initramfs archive, which will automatically be incorporated into the
+resulting binary.  This option can point to an existing gzipped cpio
+archive, a directory containing files to be archived, or a text file
+specification such as the following example::
+
+  dir /dev 755 0 0
+  nod /dev/console 644 0 0 c 5 1
+  nod /dev/loop0 644 0 0 b 7 0
+  dir /bin 755 1000 1000
+  slink /bin/sh busybox 777 0 0
+  file /bin/busybox initramfs/busybox 755 0 0
+  dir /proc 755 0 0
+  dir /sys 755 0 0
+  dir /mnt 755 0 0
+  file /init initramfs/init.sh 755 0 0
+
+Run "usr/gen_init_cpio" (after the kernel build) to get a usage message
+documenting the above file format.
+
+One advantage of the configuration file is that root access is not required to
+set permissions or create device nodes in the new archive.  (Note that those
+two example "file" entries expect to find files named "init.sh" and "busybox" in
+a directory called "initramfs", under the linux-2.6.* directory.  See
+Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst for more details.)
+
+The kernel does not depend on external cpio tools.  If you specify a
+directory instead of a configuration file, the kernel's build infrastructure
+creates a configuration file from that directory (usr/Makefile calls
+usr/gen_initramfs.sh), and proceeds to package up that directory
+using the config file (by feeding it to usr/gen_init_cpio, which is created
+from usr/gen_init_cpio.c).  The kernel's build-time cpio creation code is
+entirely self-contained, and the kernel's boot-time extractor is also
+(obviously) self-contained.
+
+The one thing you might need external cpio utilities installed for is creating
+or extracting your own preprepared cpio files to feed to the kernel build
+(instead of a config file or directory).
+
+The following command line can extract a cpio image (either by the above script
+or by the kernel build) back into its component files::
+
+  cpio -i -d -H newc -F initramfs_data.cpio --no-absolute-filenames
+
+The following shell script can create a prebuilt cpio archive you can
+use in place of the above config file::
+
+  #!/bin/sh
+
+  # Copyright 2006 Rob Landley <rob@landley.net> and TimeSys Corporation.
+  # Licensed under GPL version 2
+
+  if [ $# -ne 2 ]
+  then
+    echo "usage: mkinitramfs directory imagename.cpio.gz"
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  if [ -d "$1" ]
+  then
+    echo "creating $2 from $1"
+    (cd "$1"; find . | cpio -o -H newc | gzip) > "$2"
+  else
+    echo "First argument must be a directory"
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+.. Note::
+
+   The cpio man page contains some bad advice that will break your initramfs
+   archive if you follow it.  It says "A typical way to generate the list
+   of filenames is with the find command; you should give find the -depth
+   option to minimize problems with permissions on directories that are
+   unwritable or not searchable."  Don't do this when creating
+   initramfs.cpio.gz images, it won't work.  The Linux kernel cpio extractor
+   won't create files in a directory that doesn't exist, so the directory
+   entries must go before the files that go in those directories.
+   The above script gets them in the right order.
+
+External initramfs images:
+--------------------------
+
+If the kernel has initrd support enabled, an external cpio.gz archive can also
+be passed into a 2.6 kernel in place of an initrd.  In this case, the kernel
+will autodetect the type (initramfs, not initrd) and extract the external cpio
+archive into rootfs before trying to run /init.
+
+This has the memory efficiency advantages of initramfs (no ramdisk block
+device) but the separate packaging of initrd (which is nice if you have
+non-GPL code you'd like to run from initramfs, without conflating it with
+the GPL licensed Linux kernel binary).
+
+It can also be used to supplement the kernel's built-in initramfs image.  The
+files in the external archive will overwrite any conflicting files in
+the built-in initramfs archive.  Some distributors also prefer to customize
+a single kernel image with task-specific initramfs images, without recompiling.
+
+Contents of initramfs:
+----------------------
+
+An initramfs archive is a complete self-contained root filesystem for Linux.
+If you don't already understand what shared libraries, devices, and paths
+you need to get a minimal root filesystem up and running, here are some
+references:
+
+- https://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/Bootdisk-HOWTO/
+- https://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/From-PowerUp-To-Bash-Prompt-HOWTO.html
+- http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/lfs/view/stable/
+
+The "klibc" package (https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/klibc) is
+designed to be a tiny C library to statically link early userspace
+code against, along with some related utilities.  It is BSD licensed.
+
+I use uClibc (https://www.uclibc.org) and busybox (https://www.busybox.net)
+myself.  These are LGPL and GPL, respectively.  (A self-contained initramfs
+package is planned for the busybox 1.3 release.)
+
+In theory you could use glibc, but that's not well suited for small embedded
+uses like this.  (A "hello world" program statically linked against glibc is
+over 400k.  With uClibc it's 7k.  Also note that glibc dlopens libnss to do
+name lookups, even when otherwise statically linked.)
+
+A good first step is to get initramfs to run a statically linked "hello world"
+program as init, and test it under an emulator like qemu (www.qemu.org) or
+User Mode Linux, like so::
+
+  cat > hello.c << EOF
+  #include <stdio.h>
+  #include <unistd.h>
+
+  int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+  {
+    printf("Hello world!\n");
+    sleep(999999999);
+  }
+  EOF
+  gcc -static hello.c -o init
+  echo init | cpio -o -H newc | gzip > test.cpio.gz
+  # Testing external initramfs using the initrd loading mechanism.
+  qemu -kernel /boot/vmlinuz -initrd test.cpio.gz /dev/zero
+
+When debugging a normal root filesystem, it's nice to be able to boot with
+"init=/bin/sh".  The initramfs equivalent is "rdinit=/bin/sh", and it's
+just as useful.
+
+Why cpio rather than tar?
+-------------------------
+
+This decision was made back in December, 2001.  The discussion started here:
+
+  http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1538.html
+
+And spawned a second thread (specifically on tar vs cpio), starting here:
+
+  http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1587.html
+
+The quick and dirty summary version (which is no substitute for reading
+the above threads) is:
+
+1) cpio is a standard.  It's decades old (from the AT&T days), and already
+   widely used on Linux (inside RPM, Red Hat's device driver disks).  Here's
+   a Linux Journal article about it from 1996:
+
+      http://www.linuxjournal.com/article/1213
+
+   It's not as popular as tar because the traditional cpio command line tools
+   require _truly_hideous_ command line arguments.  But that says nothing
+   either way about the archive format, and there are alternative tools,
+   such as:
+
+     http://freecode.com/projects/afio
+
+2) The cpio archive format chosen by the kernel is simpler and cleaner (and
+   thus easier to create and parse) than any of the (literally dozens of)
+   various tar archive formats.  The complete initramfs archive format is
+   explained in buffer-format.txt, created in usr/gen_init_cpio.c, and
+   extracted in init/initramfs.c.  All three together come to less than 26k
+   total of human-readable text.
+
+3) The GNU project standardizing on tar is approximately as relevant as
+   Windows standardizing on zip.  Linux is not part of either, and is free
+   to make its own technical decisions.
+
+4) Since this is a kernel internal format, it could easily have been
+   something brand new.  The kernel provides its own tools to create and
+   extract this format anyway.  Using an existing standard was preferable,
+   but not essential.
+
+5) Al Viro made the decision (quote: "tar is ugly as hell and not going to be
+   supported on the kernel side"):
+
+      http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1540.html
+
+   explained his reasoning:
+
+     - http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1550.html
+     - http://www.uwsg.iu.edu/hypermail/linux/kernel/0112.2/1638.html
+
+   and, most importantly, designed and implemented the initramfs code.
+
+Future directions:
+------------------
+
+Today (2.6.16), initramfs is always compiled in, but not always used.  The
+kernel falls back to legacy boot code that is reached only if initramfs does
+not contain an /init program.  The fallback is legacy code, there to ensure a
+smooth transition and allowing early boot functionality to gradually move to
+"early userspace" (I.E. initramfs).
+
+The move to early userspace is necessary because finding and mounting the real
+root device is complex.  Root partitions can span multiple devices (raid or
+separate journal).  They can be out on the network (requiring dhcp, setting a
+specific MAC address, logging into a server, etc).  They can live on removable
+media, with dynamically allocated major/minor numbers and persistent naming
+issues requiring a full udev implementation to sort out.  They can be
+compressed, encrypted, copy-on-write, loopback mounted, strangely partitioned,
+and so on.
+
+This kind of complexity (which inevitably includes policy) is rightly handled
+in userspace.  Both klibc and busybox/uClibc are working on simple initramfs
+packages to drop into a kernel build.
+
+The klibc package has now been accepted into Andrew Morton's 2.6.17-mm tree.
+The kernel's current early boot code (partition detection, etc) will probably
+be migrated into a default initramfs, automatically created and used by the
+kernel build.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..04ad083cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,501 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==================================
+relay interface (formerly relayfs)
+==================================
+
+The relay interface provides a means for kernel applications to
+efficiently log and transfer large quantities of data from the kernel
+to userspace via user-defined 'relay channels'.
+
+A 'relay channel' is a kernel->user data relay mechanism implemented
+as a set of per-cpu kernel buffers ('channel buffers'), each
+represented as a regular file ('relay file') in user space.  Kernel
+clients write into the channel buffers using efficient write
+functions; these automatically log into the current cpu's channel
+buffer.  User space applications mmap() or read() from the relay files
+and retrieve the data as it becomes available.  The relay files
+themselves are files created in a host filesystem, e.g. debugfs, and
+are associated with the channel buffers using the API described below.
+
+The format of the data logged into the channel buffers is completely
+up to the kernel client; the relay interface does however provide
+hooks which allow kernel clients to impose some structure on the
+buffer data.  The relay interface doesn't implement any form of data
+filtering - this also is left to the kernel client.  The purpose is to
+keep things as simple as possible.
+
+This document provides an overview of the relay interface API.  The
+details of the function parameters are documented along with the
+functions in the relay interface code - please see that for details.
+
+Semantics
+=========
+
+Each relay channel has one buffer per CPU, each buffer has one or more
+sub-buffers.  Messages are written to the first sub-buffer until it is
+too full to contain a new message, in which case it is written to
+the next (if available).  Messages are never split across sub-buffers.
+At this point, userspace can be notified so it empties the first
+sub-buffer, while the kernel continues writing to the next.
+
+When notified that a sub-buffer is full, the kernel knows how many
+bytes of it are padding i.e. unused space occurring because a complete
+message couldn't fit into a sub-buffer.  Userspace can use this
+knowledge to copy only valid data.
+
+After copying it, userspace can notify the kernel that a sub-buffer
+has been consumed.
+
+A relay channel can operate in a mode where it will overwrite data not
+yet collected by userspace, and not wait for it to be consumed.
+
+The relay channel itself does not provide for communication of such
+data between userspace and kernel, allowing the kernel side to remain
+simple and not impose a single interface on userspace.  It does
+provide a set of examples and a separate helper though, described
+below.
+
+The read() interface both removes padding and internally consumes the
+read sub-buffers; thus in cases where read(2) is being used to drain
+the channel buffers, special-purpose communication between kernel and
+user isn't necessary for basic operation.
+
+One of the major goals of the relay interface is to provide a low
+overhead mechanism for conveying kernel data to userspace.  While the
+read() interface is easy to use, it's not as efficient as the mmap()
+approach; the example code attempts to make the tradeoff between the
+two approaches as small as possible.
+
+klog and relay-apps example code
+================================
+
+The relay interface itself is ready to use, but to make things easier,
+a couple simple utility functions and a set of examples are provided.
+
+The relay-apps example tarball, available on the relay sourceforge
+site, contains a set of self-contained examples, each consisting of a
+pair of .c files containing boilerplate code for each of the user and
+kernel sides of a relay application.  When combined these two sets of
+boilerplate code provide glue to easily stream data to disk, without
+having to bother with mundane housekeeping chores.
+
+The 'klog debugging functions' patch (klog.patch in the relay-apps
+tarball) provides a couple of high-level logging functions to the
+kernel which allow writing formatted text or raw data to a channel,
+regardless of whether a channel to write into exists or not, or even
+whether the relay interface is compiled into the kernel or not.  These
+functions allow you to put unconditional 'trace' statements anywhere
+in the kernel or kernel modules; only when there is a 'klog handler'
+registered will data actually be logged (see the klog and kleak
+examples for details).
+
+It is of course possible to use the relay interface from scratch,
+i.e. without using any of the relay-apps example code or klog, but
+you'll have to implement communication between userspace and kernel,
+allowing both to convey the state of buffers (full, empty, amount of
+padding).  The read() interface both removes padding and internally
+consumes the read sub-buffers; thus in cases where read(2) is being
+used to drain the channel buffers, special-purpose communication
+between kernel and user isn't necessary for basic operation.  Things
+such as buffer-full conditions would still need to be communicated via
+some channel though.
+
+klog and the relay-apps examples can be found in the relay-apps
+tarball on http://relayfs.sourceforge.net
+
+The relay interface user space API
+==================================
+
+The relay interface implements basic file operations for user space
+access to relay channel buffer data.  Here are the file operations
+that are available and some comments regarding their behavior:
+
+=========== ============================================================
+open()	    enables user to open an _existing_ channel buffer.
+
+mmap()      results in channel buffer being mapped into the caller's
+	    memory space. Note that you can't do a partial mmap - you
+	    must map the entire file, which is NRBUF * SUBBUFSIZE.
+
+read()      read the contents of a channel buffer.  The bytes read are
+	    'consumed' by the reader, i.e. they won't be available
+	    again to subsequent reads.  If the channel is being used
+	    in no-overwrite mode (the default), it can be read at any
+	    time even if there's an active kernel writer.  If the
+	    channel is being used in overwrite mode and there are
+	    active channel writers, results may be unpredictable -
+	    users should make sure that all logging to the channel has
+	    ended before using read() with overwrite mode.  Sub-buffer
+	    padding is automatically removed and will not be seen by
+	    the reader.
+
+sendfile()  transfer data from a channel buffer to an output file
+	    descriptor. Sub-buffer padding is automatically removed
+	    and will not be seen by the reader.
+
+poll()      POLLIN/POLLRDNORM/POLLERR supported.  User applications are
+	    notified when sub-buffer boundaries are crossed.
+
+close()     decrements the channel buffer's refcount.  When the refcount
+	    reaches 0, i.e. when no process or kernel client has the
+	    buffer open, the channel buffer is freed.
+=========== ============================================================
+
+In order for a user application to make use of relay files, the
+host filesystem must be mounted.  For example::
+
+	mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug
+
+.. Note::
+
+	the host filesystem doesn't need to be mounted for kernel
+	clients to create or use channels - it only needs to be
+	mounted when user space applications need access to the buffer
+	data.
+
+
+The relay interface kernel API
+==============================
+
+Here's a summary of the API the relay interface provides to in-kernel clients:
+
+TBD(curr. line MT:/API/)
+  channel management functions::
+
+    relay_open(base_filename, parent, subbuf_size, n_subbufs,
+               callbacks, private_data)
+    relay_close(chan)
+    relay_flush(chan)
+    relay_reset(chan)
+
+  channel management typically called on instigation of userspace::
+
+    relay_subbufs_consumed(chan, cpu, subbufs_consumed)
+
+  write functions::
+
+    relay_write(chan, data, length)
+    __relay_write(chan, data, length)
+    relay_reserve(chan, length)
+
+  callbacks::
+
+    subbuf_start(buf, subbuf, prev_subbuf, prev_padding)
+    buf_mapped(buf, filp)
+    buf_unmapped(buf, filp)
+    create_buf_file(filename, parent, mode, buf, is_global)
+    remove_buf_file(dentry)
+
+  helper functions::
+
+    relay_buf_full(buf)
+    subbuf_start_reserve(buf, length)
+
+
+Creating a channel
+------------------
+
+relay_open() is used to create a channel, along with its per-cpu
+channel buffers.  Each channel buffer will have an associated file
+created for it in the host filesystem, which can be and mmapped or
+read from in user space.  The files are named basename0...basenameN-1
+where N is the number of online cpus, and by default will be created
+in the root of the filesystem (if the parent param is NULL).  If you
+want a directory structure to contain your relay files, you should
+create it using the host filesystem's directory creation function,
+e.g. debugfs_create_dir(), and pass the parent directory to
+relay_open().  Users are responsible for cleaning up any directory
+structure they create, when the channel is closed - again the host
+filesystem's directory removal functions should be used for that,
+e.g. debugfs_remove().
+
+In order for a channel to be created and the host filesystem's files
+associated with its channel buffers, the user must provide definitions
+for two callback functions, create_buf_file() and remove_buf_file().
+create_buf_file() is called once for each per-cpu buffer from
+relay_open() and allows the user to create the file which will be used
+to represent the corresponding channel buffer.  The callback should
+return the dentry of the file created to represent the channel buffer.
+remove_buf_file() must also be defined; it's responsible for deleting
+the file(s) created in create_buf_file() and is called during
+relay_close().
+
+Here are some typical definitions for these callbacks, in this case
+using debugfs::
+
+    /*
+    * create_buf_file() callback.  Creates relay file in debugfs.
+    */
+    static struct dentry *create_buf_file_handler(const char *filename,
+						struct dentry *parent,
+						umode_t mode,
+						struct rchan_buf *buf,
+						int *is_global)
+    {
+	    return debugfs_create_file(filename, mode, parent, buf,
+				    &relay_file_operations);
+    }
+
+    /*
+    * remove_buf_file() callback.  Removes relay file from debugfs.
+    */
+    static int remove_buf_file_handler(struct dentry *dentry)
+    {
+	    debugfs_remove(dentry);
+
+	    return 0;
+    }
+
+    /*
+    * relay interface callbacks
+    */
+    static struct rchan_callbacks relay_callbacks =
+    {
+	    .create_buf_file = create_buf_file_handler,
+	    .remove_buf_file = remove_buf_file_handler,
+    };
+
+And an example relay_open() invocation using them::
+
+  chan = relay_open("cpu", NULL, SUBBUF_SIZE, N_SUBBUFS, &relay_callbacks, NULL);
+
+If the create_buf_file() callback fails, or isn't defined, channel
+creation and thus relay_open() will fail.
+
+The total size of each per-cpu buffer is calculated by multiplying the
+number of sub-buffers by the sub-buffer size passed into relay_open().
+The idea behind sub-buffers is that they're basically an extension of
+double-buffering to N buffers, and they also allow applications to
+easily implement random-access-on-buffer-boundary schemes, which can
+be important for some high-volume applications.  The number and size
+of sub-buffers is completely dependent on the application and even for
+the same application, different conditions will warrant different
+values for these parameters at different times.  Typically, the right
+values to use are best decided after some experimentation; in general,
+though, it's safe to assume that having only 1 sub-buffer is a bad
+idea - you're guaranteed to either overwrite data or lose events
+depending on the channel mode being used.
+
+The create_buf_file() implementation can also be defined in such a way
+as to allow the creation of a single 'global' buffer instead of the
+default per-cpu set.  This can be useful for applications interested
+mainly in seeing the relative ordering of system-wide events without
+the need to bother with saving explicit timestamps for the purpose of
+merging/sorting per-cpu files in a postprocessing step.
+
+To have relay_open() create a global buffer, the create_buf_file()
+implementation should set the value of the is_global outparam to a
+non-zero value in addition to creating the file that will be used to
+represent the single buffer.  In the case of a global buffer,
+create_buf_file() and remove_buf_file() will be called only once.  The
+normal channel-writing functions, e.g. relay_write(), can still be
+used - writes from any cpu will transparently end up in the global
+buffer - but since it is a global buffer, callers should make sure
+they use the proper locking for such a buffer, either by wrapping
+writes in a spinlock, or by copying a write function from relay.h and
+creating a local version that internally does the proper locking.
+
+The private_data passed into relay_open() allows clients to associate
+user-defined data with a channel, and is immediately available
+(including in create_buf_file()) via chan->private_data or
+buf->chan->private_data.
+
+Buffer-only channels
+--------------------
+
+These channels have no files associated and can be created with
+relay_open(NULL, NULL, ...). Such channels are useful in scenarios such
+as when doing early tracing in the kernel, before the VFS is up. In these
+cases, one may open a buffer-only channel and then call
+relay_late_setup_files() when the kernel is ready to handle files,
+to expose the buffered data to the userspace.
+
+Channel 'modes'
+---------------
+
+relay channels can be used in either of two modes - 'overwrite' or
+'no-overwrite'.  The mode is entirely determined by the implementation
+of the subbuf_start() callback, as described below.  The default if no
+subbuf_start() callback is defined is 'no-overwrite' mode.  If the
+default mode suits your needs, and you plan to use the read()
+interface to retrieve channel data, you can ignore the details of this
+section, as it pertains mainly to mmap() implementations.
+
+In 'overwrite' mode, also known as 'flight recorder' mode, writes
+continuously cycle around the buffer and will never fail, but will
+unconditionally overwrite old data regardless of whether it's actually
+been consumed.  In no-overwrite mode, writes will fail, i.e. data will
+be lost, if the number of unconsumed sub-buffers equals the total
+number of sub-buffers in the channel.  It should be clear that if
+there is no consumer or if the consumer can't consume sub-buffers fast
+enough, data will be lost in either case; the only difference is
+whether data is lost from the beginning or the end of a buffer.
+
+As explained above, a relay channel is made of up one or more
+per-cpu channel buffers, each implemented as a circular buffer
+subdivided into one or more sub-buffers.  Messages are written into
+the current sub-buffer of the channel's current per-cpu buffer via the
+write functions described below.  Whenever a message can't fit into
+the current sub-buffer, because there's no room left for it, the
+client is notified via the subbuf_start() callback that a switch to a
+new sub-buffer is about to occur.  The client uses this callback to 1)
+initialize the next sub-buffer if appropriate 2) finalize the previous
+sub-buffer if appropriate and 3) return a boolean value indicating
+whether or not to actually move on to the next sub-buffer.
+
+To implement 'no-overwrite' mode, the userspace client would provide
+an implementation of the subbuf_start() callback something like the
+following::
+
+    static int subbuf_start(struct rchan_buf *buf,
+			    void *subbuf,
+			    void *prev_subbuf,
+			    unsigned int prev_padding)
+    {
+	    if (prev_subbuf)
+		    *((unsigned *)prev_subbuf) = prev_padding;
+
+	    if (relay_buf_full(buf))
+		    return 0;
+
+	    subbuf_start_reserve(buf, sizeof(unsigned int));
+
+	    return 1;
+    }
+
+If the current buffer is full, i.e. all sub-buffers remain unconsumed,
+the callback returns 0 to indicate that the buffer switch should not
+occur yet, i.e. until the consumer has had a chance to read the
+current set of ready sub-buffers.  For the relay_buf_full() function
+to make sense, the consumer is responsible for notifying the relay
+interface when sub-buffers have been consumed via
+relay_subbufs_consumed().  Any subsequent attempts to write into the
+buffer will again invoke the subbuf_start() callback with the same
+parameters; only when the consumer has consumed one or more of the
+ready sub-buffers will relay_buf_full() return 0, in which case the
+buffer switch can continue.
+
+The implementation of the subbuf_start() callback for 'overwrite' mode
+would be very similar::
+
+    static int subbuf_start(struct rchan_buf *buf,
+			    void *subbuf,
+			    void *prev_subbuf,
+			    size_t prev_padding)
+    {
+	    if (prev_subbuf)
+		    *((unsigned *)prev_subbuf) = prev_padding;
+
+	    subbuf_start_reserve(buf, sizeof(unsigned int));
+
+	    return 1;
+    }
+
+In this case, the relay_buf_full() check is meaningless and the
+callback always returns 1, causing the buffer switch to occur
+unconditionally.  It's also meaningless for the client to use the
+relay_subbufs_consumed() function in this mode, as it's never
+consulted.
+
+The default subbuf_start() implementation, used if the client doesn't
+define any callbacks, or doesn't define the subbuf_start() callback,
+implements the simplest possible 'no-overwrite' mode, i.e. it does
+nothing but return 0.
+
+Header information can be reserved at the beginning of each sub-buffer
+by calling the subbuf_start_reserve() helper function from within the
+subbuf_start() callback.  This reserved area can be used to store
+whatever information the client wants.  In the example above, room is
+reserved in each sub-buffer to store the padding count for that
+sub-buffer.  This is filled in for the previous sub-buffer in the
+subbuf_start() implementation; the padding value for the previous
+sub-buffer is passed into the subbuf_start() callback along with a
+pointer to the previous sub-buffer, since the padding value isn't
+known until a sub-buffer is filled.  The subbuf_start() callback is
+also called for the first sub-buffer when the channel is opened, to
+give the client a chance to reserve space in it.  In this case the
+previous sub-buffer pointer passed into the callback will be NULL, so
+the client should check the value of the prev_subbuf pointer before
+writing into the previous sub-buffer.
+
+Writing to a channel
+--------------------
+
+Kernel clients write data into the current cpu's channel buffer using
+relay_write() or __relay_write().  relay_write() is the main logging
+function - it uses local_irqsave() to protect the buffer and should be
+used if you might be logging from interrupt context.  If you know
+you'll never be logging from interrupt context, you can use
+__relay_write(), which only disables preemption.  These functions
+don't return a value, so you can't determine whether or not they
+failed - the assumption is that you wouldn't want to check a return
+value in the fast logging path anyway, and that they'll always succeed
+unless the buffer is full and no-overwrite mode is being used, in
+which case you can detect a failed write in the subbuf_start()
+callback by calling the relay_buf_full() helper function.
+
+relay_reserve() is used to reserve a slot in a channel buffer which
+can be written to later.  This would typically be used in applications
+that need to write directly into a channel buffer without having to
+stage data in a temporary buffer beforehand.  Because the actual write
+may not happen immediately after the slot is reserved, applications
+using relay_reserve() can keep a count of the number of bytes actually
+written, either in space reserved in the sub-buffers themselves or as
+a separate array.  See the 'reserve' example in the relay-apps tarball
+at http://relayfs.sourceforge.net for an example of how this can be
+done.  Because the write is under control of the client and is
+separated from the reserve, relay_reserve() doesn't protect the buffer
+at all - it's up to the client to provide the appropriate
+synchronization when using relay_reserve().
+
+Closing a channel
+-----------------
+
+The client calls relay_close() when it's finished using the channel.
+The channel and its associated buffers are destroyed when there are no
+longer any references to any of the channel buffers.  relay_flush()
+forces a sub-buffer switch on all the channel buffers, and can be used
+to finalize and process the last sub-buffers before the channel is
+closed.
+
+Misc
+----
+
+Some applications may want to keep a channel around and re-use it
+rather than open and close a new channel for each use.  relay_reset()
+can be used for this purpose - it resets a channel to its initial
+state without reallocating channel buffer memory or destroying
+existing mappings.  It should however only be called when it's safe to
+do so, i.e. when the channel isn't currently being written to.
+
+Finally, there are a couple of utility callbacks that can be used for
+different purposes.  buf_mapped() is called whenever a channel buffer
+is mmapped from user space and buf_unmapped() is called when it's
+unmapped.  The client can use this notification to trigger actions
+within the kernel application, such as enabling/disabling logging to
+the channel.
+
+
+Resources
+=========
+
+For news, example code, mailing list, etc. see the relay interface homepage:
+
+    http://relayfs.sourceforge.net
+
+
+Credits
+=======
+
+The ideas and specs for the relay interface came about as a result of
+discussions on tracing involving the following:
+
+Michel Dagenais		<michel.dagenais@polymtl.ca>
+Richard Moore		<richardj_moore@uk.ibm.com>
+Bob Wisniewski		<bob@watson.ibm.com>
+Karim Yaghmour		<karim@opersys.com>
+Tom Zanussi		<zanussi@us.ibm.com>
+
+Also thanks to Hubertus Franke for a lot of useful suggestions and bug
+reports.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..465b11efa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======================
+ROMFS - ROM File System
+=======================
+
+This is a quite dumb, read only filesystem, mainly for initial RAM
+disks of installation disks.  It has grown up by the need of having
+modules linked at boot time.  Using this filesystem, you get a very
+similar feature, and even the possibility of a small kernel, with a
+file system which doesn't take up useful memory from the router
+functions in the basement of your office.
+
+For comparison, both the older minix and xiafs (the latter is now
+defunct) filesystems, compiled as module need more than 20000 bytes,
+while romfs is less than a page, about 4000 bytes (assuming i586
+code).  Under the same conditions, the msdos filesystem would need
+about 30K (and does not support device nodes or symlinks), while the
+nfs module with nfsroot is about 57K.  Furthermore, as a bit unfair
+comparison, an actual rescue disk used up 3202 blocks with ext2, while
+with romfs, it needed 3079 blocks.
+
+To create such a file system, you'll need a user program named
+genromfs. It is available on http://romfs.sourceforge.net/
+
+As the name suggests, romfs could be also used (space-efficiently) on
+various read-only media, like (E)EPROM disks if someone will have the
+motivation.. :)
+
+However, the main purpose of romfs is to have a very small kernel,
+which has only this filesystem linked in, and then can load any module
+later, with the current module utilities.  It can also be used to run
+some program to decide if you need SCSI devices, and even IDE or
+floppy drives can be loaded later if you use the "initrd"--initial
+RAM disk--feature of the kernel.  This would not be really news
+flash, but with romfs, you can even spare off your ext2 or minix or
+maybe even affs filesystem until you really know that you need it.
+
+For example, a distribution boot disk can contain only the cd disk
+drivers (and possibly the SCSI drivers), and the ISO 9660 filesystem
+module.  The kernel can be small enough, since it doesn't have other
+filesystems, like the quite large ext2fs module, which can then be
+loaded off the CD at a later stage of the installation.  Another use
+would be for a recovery disk, when you are reinstalling a workstation
+from the network, and you will have all the tools/modules available
+from a nearby server, so you don't want to carry two disks for this
+purpose, just because it won't fit into ext2.
+
+romfs operates on block devices as you can expect, and the underlying
+structure is very simple.  Every accessible structure begins on 16
+byte boundaries for fast access.  The minimum space a file will take
+is 32 bytes (this is an empty file, with a less than 16 character
+name).  The maximum overhead for any non-empty file is the header, and
+the 16 byte padding for the name and the contents, also 16+14+15 = 45
+bytes.  This is quite rare however, since most file names are longer
+than 3 bytes, and shorter than 15 bytes.
+
+The layout of the filesystem is the following::
+
+ offset	    content
+
+	+---+---+---+---+
+  0	| - | r | o | m |  \
+	+---+---+---+---+	The ASCII representation of those bytes
+  4	| 1 | f | s | - |  /	(i.e. "-rom1fs-")
+	+---+---+---+---+
+  8	|   full size	|	The number of accessible bytes in this fs.
+	+---+---+---+---+
+ 12	|    checksum	|	The checksum of the FIRST 512 BYTES.
+	+---+---+---+---+
+ 16	| volume name	|	The zero terminated name of the volume,
+	:               :	padded to 16 byte boundary.
+	+---+---+---+---+
+ xx	|     file	|
+	:    headers	:
+
+Every multi byte value (32 bit words, I'll use the longwords term from
+now on) must be in big endian order.
+
+The first eight bytes identify the filesystem, even for the casual
+inspector.  After that, in the 3rd longword, it contains the number of
+bytes accessible from the start of this filesystem.  The 4th longword
+is the checksum of the first 512 bytes (or the number of bytes
+accessible, whichever is smaller).  The applied algorithm is the same
+as in the AFFS filesystem, namely a simple sum of the longwords
+(assuming bigendian quantities again).  For details, please consult
+the source.  This algorithm was chosen because although it's not quite
+reliable, it does not require any tables, and it is very simple.
+
+The following bytes are now part of the file system; each file header
+must begin on a 16 byte boundary::
+
+ offset	    content
+
+     	+---+---+---+---+
+  0	| next filehdr|X|	The offset of the next file header
+	+---+---+---+---+	  (zero if no more files)
+  4	|   spec.info	|	Info for directories/hard links/devices
+	+---+---+---+---+
+  8	|     size      |	The size of this file in bytes
+	+---+---+---+---+
+ 12	|   checksum	|	Covering the meta data, including the file
+	+---+---+---+---+	  name, and padding
+ 16	| file name     |	The zero terminated name of the file,
+	:               :	padded to 16 byte boundary
+	+---+---+---+---+
+ xx	| file data	|
+	:		:
+
+Since the file headers begin always at a 16 byte boundary, the lowest
+4 bits would be always zero in the next filehdr pointer.  These four
+bits are used for the mode information.  Bits 0..2 specify the type of
+the file; while bit 4 shows if the file is executable or not.  The
+permissions are assumed to be world readable, if this bit is not set,
+and world executable if it is; except the character and block devices,
+they are never accessible for other than owner.  The owner of every
+file is user and group 0, this should never be a problem for the
+intended use.  The mapping of the 8 possible values to file types is
+the following:
+
+==	=============== ============================================
+	  mapping		spec.info means
+==	=============== ============================================
+ 0	hard link	link destination [file header]
+ 1	directory	first file's header
+ 2	regular file	unused, must be zero [MBZ]
+ 3	symbolic link	unused, MBZ (file data is the link content)
+ 4	block device	16/16 bits major/minor number
+ 5	char device		    - " -
+ 6	socket		unused, MBZ
+ 7	fifo		unused, MBZ
+==	=============== ============================================
+
+Note that hard links are specifically marked in this filesystem, but
+they will behave as you can expect (i.e. share the inode number).
+Note also that it is your responsibility to not create hard link
+loops, and creating all the . and .. links for directories.  This is
+normally done correctly by the genromfs program.  Please refrain from
+using the executable bits for special purposes on the socket and fifo
+special files, they may have other uses in the future.  Additionally,
+please remember that only regular files, and symlinks are supposed to
+have a nonzero size field; they contain the number of bytes available
+directly after the (padded) file name.
+
+Another thing to note is that romfs works on file headers and data
+aligned to 16 byte boundaries, but most hardware devices and the block
+device drivers are unable to cope with smaller than block-sized data.
+To overcome this limitation, the whole size of the file system must be
+padded to an 1024 byte boundary.
+
+If you have any problems or suggestions concerning this file system,
+please contact me.  However, think twice before wanting me to add
+features and code, because the primary and most important advantage of
+this file system is the small code.  On the other hand, don't be
+alarmed, I'm not getting that much romfs related mail.  Now I can
+understand why Avery wrote poems in the ARCnet docs to get some more
+feedback. :)
+
+romfs has also a mailing list, and to date, it hasn't received any
+traffic, so you are welcome to join it to discuss your ideas. :)
+
+It's run by ezmlm, so you can subscribe to it by sending a message
+to romfs-subscribe@shadow.banki.hu, the content is irrelevant.
+
+Pending issues:
+
+- Permissions and owner information are pretty essential features of a
+  Un*x like system, but romfs does not provide the full possibilities.
+  I have never found this limiting, but others might.
+
+- The file system is read only, so it can be very small, but in case
+  one would want to write _anything_ to a file system, he still needs
+  a writable file system, thus negating the size advantages.  Possible
+  solutions: implement write access as a compile-time option, or a new,
+  similarly small writable filesystem for RAM disks.
+
+- Since the files are only required to have alignment on a 16 byte
+  boundary, it is currently possibly suboptimal to read or execute files
+  from the filesystem.  It might be resolved by reordering file data to
+  have most of it (i.e. except the start and the end) laying at "natural"
+  boundaries, thus it would be possible to directly map a big portion of
+  the file contents to the mm subsystem.
+
+- Compression might be an useful feature, but memory is quite a
+  limiting factor in my eyes.
+
+- Where it is used?
+
+- Does it work on other architectures than intel and motorola?
+
+
+Have fun,
+
+Janos Farkas <chexum@shadow.banki.hu>
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a6726082a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,396 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================
+The seq_file Interface
+======================
+
+	Copyright 2003 Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net>
+
+	This file is originally from the LWN.net Driver Porting series at
+	https://lwn.net/Articles/driver-porting/
+
+
+There are numerous ways for a device driver (or other kernel component) to
+provide information to the user or system administrator.  One useful
+technique is the creation of virtual files, in debugfs, /proc or elsewhere.
+Virtual files can provide human-readable output that is easy to get at
+without any special utility programs; they can also make life easier for
+script writers. It is not surprising that the use of virtual files has
+grown over the years.
+
+Creating those files correctly has always been a bit of a challenge,
+however. It is not that hard to make a virtual file which returns a
+string. But life gets trickier if the output is long - anything greater
+than an application is likely to read in a single operation.  Handling
+multiple reads (and seeks) requires careful attention to the reader's
+position within the virtual file - that position is, likely as not, in the
+middle of a line of output. The kernel has traditionally had a number of
+implementations that got this wrong.
+
+The 2.6 kernel contains a set of functions (implemented by Alexander Viro)
+which are designed to make it easy for virtual file creators to get it
+right.
+
+The seq_file interface is available via <linux/seq_file.h>. There are
+three aspects to seq_file:
+
+     * An iterator interface which lets a virtual file implementation
+       step through the objects it is presenting.
+
+     * Some utility functions for formatting objects for output without
+       needing to worry about things like output buffers.
+
+     * A set of canned file_operations which implement most operations on
+       the virtual file.
+
+We'll look at the seq_file interface via an extremely simple example: a
+loadable module which creates a file called /proc/sequence. The file, when
+read, simply produces a set of increasing integer values, one per line. The
+sequence will continue until the user loses patience and finds something
+better to do. The file is seekable, in that one can do something like the
+following::
+
+    dd if=/proc/sequence of=out1 count=1
+    dd if=/proc/sequence skip=1 of=out2 count=1
+
+Then concatenate the output files out1 and out2 and get the right
+result. Yes, it is a thoroughly useless module, but the point is to show
+how the mechanism works without getting lost in other details.  (Those
+wanting to see the full source for this module can find it at
+https://lwn.net/Articles/22359/).
+
+Deprecated create_proc_entry
+============================
+
+Note that the above article uses create_proc_entry which was removed in
+kernel 3.10. Current versions require the following update::
+
+    -	entry = create_proc_entry("sequence", 0, NULL);
+    -	if (entry)
+    -		entry->proc_fops = &ct_file_ops;
+    +	entry = proc_create("sequence", 0, NULL, &ct_file_ops);
+
+The iterator interface
+======================
+
+Modules implementing a virtual file with seq_file must implement an
+iterator object that allows stepping through the data of interest
+during a "session" (roughly one read() system call).  If the iterator
+is able to move to a specific position - like the file they implement,
+though with freedom to map the position number to a sequence location
+in whatever way is convenient - the iterator need only exist
+transiently during a session.  If the iterator cannot easily find a
+numerical position but works well with a first/next interface, the
+iterator can be stored in the private data area and continue from one
+session to the next.
+
+A seq_file implementation that is formatting firewall rules from a
+table, for example, could provide a simple iterator that interprets
+position N as the Nth rule in the chain.  A seq_file implementation
+that presents the content of a, potentially volatile, linked list
+might record a pointer into that list, providing that can be done
+without risk of the current location being removed.
+
+Positioning can thus be done in whatever way makes the most sense for
+the generator of the data, which need not be aware of how a position
+translates to an offset in the virtual file. The one obvious exception
+is that a position of zero should indicate the beginning of the file.
+
+The /proc/sequence iterator just uses the count of the next number it
+will output as its position.
+
+Four functions must be implemented to make the iterator work. The
+first, called start(), starts a session and takes a position as an
+argument, returning an iterator which will start reading at that
+position.  The pos passed to start() will always be either zero, or
+the most recent pos used in the previous session.
+
+For our simple sequence example,
+the start() function looks like::
+
+	static void *ct_seq_start(struct seq_file *s, loff_t *pos)
+	{
+	        loff_t *spos = kmalloc(sizeof(loff_t), GFP_KERNEL);
+	        if (! spos)
+	                return NULL;
+	        *spos = *pos;
+	        return spos;
+	}
+
+The entire data structure for this iterator is a single loff_t value
+holding the current position. There is no upper bound for the sequence
+iterator, but that will not be the case for most other seq_file
+implementations; in most cases the start() function should check for a
+"past end of file" condition and return NULL if need be.
+
+For more complicated applications, the private field of the seq_file
+structure can be used to hold state from session to session.  There is
+also a special value which can be returned by the start() function
+called SEQ_START_TOKEN; it can be used if you wish to instruct your
+show() function (described below) to print a header at the top of the
+output. SEQ_START_TOKEN should only be used if the offset is zero,
+however.  SEQ_START_TOKEN has no special meaning to the core seq_file
+code.  It is provided as a convenience for a start() funciton to
+communicate with the next() and show() functions.
+
+The next function to implement is called, amazingly, next(); its job is to
+move the iterator forward to the next position in the sequence.  The
+example module can simply increment the position by one; more useful
+modules will do what is needed to step through some data structure. The
+next() function returns a new iterator, or NULL if the sequence is
+complete. Here's the example version::
+
+	static void *ct_seq_next(struct seq_file *s, void *v, loff_t *pos)
+	{
+	        loff_t *spos = v;
+	        *pos = ++*spos;
+	        return spos;
+	}
+
+The next() function should set ``*pos`` to a value that start() can use
+to find the new location in the sequence.  When the iterator is being
+stored in the private data area, rather than being reinitialized on each
+start(), it might seem sufficient to simply set ``*pos`` to any non-zero
+value (zero always tells start() to restart the sequence).  This is not
+sufficient due to historical problems.
+
+Historically, many next() functions have *not* updated ``*pos`` at
+end-of-file.  If the value is then used by start() to initialise the
+iterator, this can result in corner cases where the last entry in the
+sequence is reported twice in the file.  In order to discourage this bug
+from being resurrected, the core seq_file code now produces a warning if
+a next() function does not change the value of ``*pos``.  Consequently a
+next() function *must* change the value of ``*pos``, and of course must
+set it to a non-zero value.
+
+The stop() function closes a session; its job, of course, is to clean
+up. If dynamic memory is allocated for the iterator, stop() is the
+place to free it; if a lock was taken by start(), stop() must release
+that lock.  The value that ``*pos`` was set to by the last next() call
+before stop() is remembered, and used for the first start() call of
+the next session unless lseek() has been called on the file; in that
+case next start() will be asked to start at position zero::
+
+	static void ct_seq_stop(struct seq_file *s, void *v)
+	{
+	        kfree(v);
+	}
+
+Finally, the show() function should format the object currently pointed to
+by the iterator for output.  The example module's show() function is::
+
+	static int ct_seq_show(struct seq_file *s, void *v)
+	{
+	        loff_t *spos = v;
+	        seq_printf(s, "%lld\n", (long long)*spos);
+	        return 0;
+	}
+
+If all is well, the show() function should return zero.  A negative error
+code in the usual manner indicates that something went wrong; it will be
+passed back to user space.  This function can also return SEQ_SKIP, which
+causes the current item to be skipped; if the show() function has already
+generated output before returning SEQ_SKIP, that output will be dropped.
+
+We will look at seq_printf() in a moment. But first, the definition of the
+seq_file iterator is finished by creating a seq_operations structure with
+the four functions we have just defined::
+
+	static const struct seq_operations ct_seq_ops = {
+	        .start = ct_seq_start,
+	        .next  = ct_seq_next,
+	        .stop  = ct_seq_stop,
+	        .show  = ct_seq_show
+	};
+
+This structure will be needed to tie our iterator to the /proc file in
+a little bit.
+
+It's worth noting that the iterator value returned by start() and
+manipulated by the other functions is considered to be completely opaque by
+the seq_file code. It can thus be anything that is useful in stepping
+through the data to be output. Counters can be useful, but it could also be
+a direct pointer into an array or linked list. Anything goes, as long as
+the programmer is aware that things can happen between calls to the
+iterator function. However, the seq_file code (by design) will not sleep
+between the calls to start() and stop(), so holding a lock during that time
+is a reasonable thing to do. The seq_file code will also avoid taking any
+other locks while the iterator is active.
+
+The iterater value returned by start() or next() is guaranteed to be
+passed to a subsequent next() or stop() call.  This allows resources
+such as locks that were taken to be reliably released.  There is *no*
+guarantee that the iterator will be passed to show(), though in practice
+it often will be.
+
+
+Formatted output
+================
+
+The seq_file code manages positioning within the output created by the
+iterator and getting it into the user's buffer. But, for that to work, that
+output must be passed to the seq_file code. Some utility functions have
+been defined which make this task easy.
+
+Most code will simply use seq_printf(), which works pretty much like
+printk(), but which requires the seq_file pointer as an argument.
+
+For straight character output, the following functions may be used::
+
+	seq_putc(struct seq_file *m, char c);
+	seq_puts(struct seq_file *m, const char *s);
+	seq_escape(struct seq_file *m, const char *s, const char *esc);
+
+The first two output a single character and a string, just like one would
+expect. seq_escape() is like seq_puts(), except that any character in s
+which is in the string esc will be represented in octal form in the output.
+
+There are also a pair of functions for printing filenames::
+
+	int seq_path(struct seq_file *m, const struct path *path,
+		     const char *esc);
+	int seq_path_root(struct seq_file *m, const struct path *path,
+			  const struct path *root, const char *esc)
+
+Here, path indicates the file of interest, and esc is a set of characters
+which should be escaped in the output.  A call to seq_path() will output
+the path relative to the current process's filesystem root.  If a different
+root is desired, it can be used with seq_path_root().  If it turns out that
+path cannot be reached from root, seq_path_root() returns SEQ_SKIP.
+
+A function producing complicated output may want to check::
+
+	bool seq_has_overflowed(struct seq_file *m);
+
+and avoid further seq_<output> calls if true is returned.
+
+A true return from seq_has_overflowed means that the seq_file buffer will
+be discarded and the seq_show function will attempt to allocate a larger
+buffer and retry printing.
+
+
+Making it all work
+==================
+
+So far, we have a nice set of functions which can produce output within the
+seq_file system, but we have not yet turned them into a file that a user
+can see. Creating a file within the kernel requires, of course, the
+creation of a set of file_operations which implement the operations on that
+file. The seq_file interface provides a set of canned operations which do
+most of the work. The virtual file author still must implement the open()
+method, however, to hook everything up. The open function is often a single
+line, as in the example module::
+
+	static int ct_open(struct inode *inode, struct file *file)
+	{
+		return seq_open(file, &ct_seq_ops);
+	}
+
+Here, the call to seq_open() takes the seq_operations structure we created
+before, and gets set up to iterate through the virtual file.
+
+On a successful open, seq_open() stores the struct seq_file pointer in
+file->private_data. If you have an application where the same iterator can
+be used for more than one file, you can store an arbitrary pointer in the
+private field of the seq_file structure; that value can then be retrieved
+by the iterator functions.
+
+There is also a wrapper function to seq_open() called seq_open_private(). It
+kmallocs a zero filled block of memory and stores a pointer to it in the
+private field of the seq_file structure, returning 0 on success. The
+block size is specified in a third parameter to the function, e.g.::
+
+	static int ct_open(struct inode *inode, struct file *file)
+	{
+		return seq_open_private(file, &ct_seq_ops,
+					sizeof(struct mystruct));
+	}
+
+There is also a variant function, __seq_open_private(), which is functionally
+identical except that, if successful, it returns the pointer to the allocated
+memory block, allowing further initialisation e.g.::
+
+	static int ct_open(struct inode *inode, struct file *file)
+	{
+		struct mystruct *p =
+			__seq_open_private(file, &ct_seq_ops, sizeof(*p));
+
+		if (!p)
+			return -ENOMEM;
+
+		p->foo = bar; /* initialize my stuff */
+			...
+		p->baz = true;
+
+		return 0;
+	}
+
+A corresponding close function, seq_release_private() is available which
+frees the memory allocated in the corresponding open.
+
+The other operations of interest - read(), llseek(), and release() - are
+all implemented by the seq_file code itself. So a virtual file's
+file_operations structure will look like::
+
+	static const struct file_operations ct_file_ops = {
+	        .owner   = THIS_MODULE,
+	        .open    = ct_open,
+	        .read    = seq_read,
+	        .llseek  = seq_lseek,
+	        .release = seq_release
+	};
+
+There is also a seq_release_private() which passes the contents of the
+seq_file private field to kfree() before releasing the structure.
+
+The final step is the creation of the /proc file itself. In the example
+code, that is done in the initialization code in the usual way::
+
+	static int ct_init(void)
+	{
+	        struct proc_dir_entry *entry;
+
+	        proc_create("sequence", 0, NULL, &ct_file_ops);
+	        return 0;
+	}
+
+	module_init(ct_init);
+
+And that is pretty much it.
+
+
+seq_list
+========
+
+If your file will be iterating through a linked list, you may find these
+routines useful::
+
+	struct list_head *seq_list_start(struct list_head *head,
+	       		 		 loff_t pos);
+	struct list_head *seq_list_start_head(struct list_head *head,
+			 		      loff_t pos);
+	struct list_head *seq_list_next(void *v, struct list_head *head,
+					loff_t *ppos);
+
+These helpers will interpret pos as a position within the list and iterate
+accordingly.  Your start() and next() functions need only invoke the
+``seq_list_*`` helpers with a pointer to the appropriate list_head structure.
+
+
+The extra-simple version
+========================
+
+For extremely simple virtual files, there is an even easier interface.  A
+module can define only the show() function, which should create all the
+output that the virtual file will contain. The file's open() method then
+calls::
+
+	int single_open(struct file *file,
+	                int (*show)(struct seq_file *m, void *p),
+	                void *data);
+
+When output time comes, the show() function will be called once. The data
+value given to single_open() can be found in the private field of the
+seq_file structure. When using single_open(), the programmer should use
+single_release() instead of seq_release() in the file_operations structure
+to avoid a memory leak.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d83395354
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,995 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============
+Shared Subtrees
+===============
+
+.. Contents:
+	1) Overview
+	2) Features
+	3) Setting mount states
+	4) Use-case
+	5) Detailed semantics
+	6) Quiz
+	7) FAQ
+	8) Implementation
+
+
+1) Overview
+-----------
+
+Consider the following situation:
+
+A process wants to clone its own namespace, but still wants to access the CD
+that got mounted recently.  Shared subtree semantics provide the necessary
+mechanism to accomplish the above.
+
+It provides the necessary building blocks for features like per-user-namespace
+and versioned filesystem.
+
+2) Features
+-----------
+
+Shared subtree provides four different flavors of mounts; struct vfsmount to be
+precise
+
+	a. shared mount
+	b. slave mount
+	c. private mount
+	d. unbindable mount
+
+
+2a) A shared mount can be replicated to as many mountpoints and all the
+replicas continue to be exactly same.
+
+	Here is an example:
+
+	Let's say /mnt has a mount that is shared::
+
+	    mount --make-shared /mnt
+
+	Note: mount(8) command now supports the --make-shared flag,
+	so the sample 'smount' program is no longer needed and has been
+	removed.
+
+	::
+
+	    # mount --bind /mnt /tmp
+
+	The above command replicates the mount at /mnt to the mountpoint /tmp
+	and the contents of both the mounts remain identical.
+
+	::
+
+	    #ls /mnt
+	    a b c
+
+	    #ls /tmp
+	    a b c
+
+	Now let's say we mount a device at /tmp/a::
+
+	    # mount /dev/sd0  /tmp/a
+
+	    #ls /tmp/a
+	    t1 t2 t3
+
+	    #ls /mnt/a
+	    t1 t2 t3
+
+	Note that the mount has propagated to the mount at /mnt as well.
+
+	And the same is true even when /dev/sd0 is mounted on /mnt/a. The
+	contents will be visible under /tmp/a too.
+
+
+2b) A slave mount is like a shared mount except that mount and umount events
+	only propagate towards it.
+
+	All slave mounts have a master mount which is a shared.
+
+	Here is an example:
+
+	Let's say /mnt has a mount which is shared.
+	# mount --make-shared /mnt
+
+	Let's bind mount /mnt to /tmp
+	# mount --bind /mnt /tmp
+
+	the new mount at /tmp becomes a shared mount and it is a replica of
+	the mount at /mnt.
+
+	Now let's make the mount at /tmp; a slave of /mnt
+	# mount --make-slave /tmp
+
+	let's mount /dev/sd0 on /mnt/a
+	# mount /dev/sd0 /mnt/a
+
+	#ls /mnt/a
+	t1 t2 t3
+
+	#ls /tmp/a
+	t1 t2 t3
+
+	Note the mount event has propagated to the mount at /tmp
+
+	However let's see what happens if we mount something on the mount at /tmp
+
+	# mount /dev/sd1 /tmp/b
+
+	#ls /tmp/b
+	s1 s2 s3
+
+	#ls /mnt/b
+
+	Note how the mount event has not propagated to the mount at
+	/mnt
+
+
+2c) A private mount does not forward or receive propagation.
+
+	This is the mount we are familiar with. Its the default type.
+
+
+2d) A unbindable mount is a unbindable private mount
+
+	let's say we have a mount at /mnt and we make it unbindable::
+
+	    # mount --make-unbindable /mnt
+
+	 Let's try to bind mount this mount somewhere else::
+
+	    # mount --bind /mnt /tmp
+	    mount: wrong fs type, bad option, bad superblock on /mnt,
+		    or too many mounted file systems
+
+	Binding a unbindable mount is a invalid operation.
+
+
+3) Setting mount states
+
+	The mount command (util-linux package) can be used to set mount
+	states::
+
+	    mount --make-shared mountpoint
+	    mount --make-slave mountpoint
+	    mount --make-private mountpoint
+	    mount --make-unbindable mountpoint
+
+
+4) Use cases
+------------
+
+	A) A process wants to clone its own namespace, but still wants to
+	   access the CD that got mounted recently.
+
+	   Solution:
+
+		The system administrator can make the mount at /cdrom shared::
+
+		    mount --bind /cdrom /cdrom
+		    mount --make-shared /cdrom
+
+		Now any process that clones off a new namespace will have a
+		mount at /cdrom which is a replica of the same mount in the
+		parent namespace.
+
+		So when a CD is inserted and mounted at /cdrom that mount gets
+		propagated to the other mount at /cdrom in all the other clone
+		namespaces.
+
+	B) A process wants its mounts invisible to any other process, but
+	still be able to see the other system mounts.
+
+	   Solution:
+
+		To begin with, the administrator can mark the entire mount tree
+		as shareable::
+
+		    mount --make-rshared /
+
+		A new process can clone off a new namespace. And mark some part
+		of its namespace as slave::
+
+		    mount --make-rslave /myprivatetree
+
+		Hence forth any mounts within the /myprivatetree done by the
+		process will not show up in any other namespace. However mounts
+		done in the parent namespace under /myprivatetree still shows
+		up in the process's namespace.
+
+
+	Apart from the above semantics this feature provides the
+	building blocks to solve the following problems:
+
+	C)  Per-user namespace
+
+		The above semantics allows a way to share mounts across
+		namespaces.  But namespaces are associated with processes. If
+		namespaces are made first class objects with user API to
+		associate/disassociate a namespace with userid, then each user
+		could have his/her own namespace and tailor it to his/her
+		requirements. This needs to be supported in PAM.
+
+	D)  Versioned files
+
+		If the entire mount tree is visible at multiple locations, then
+		an underlying versioning file system can return different
+		versions of the file depending on the path used to access that
+		file.
+
+		An example is::
+
+		    mount --make-shared /
+		    mount --rbind / /view/v1
+		    mount --rbind / /view/v2
+		    mount --rbind / /view/v3
+		    mount --rbind / /view/v4
+
+		and if /usr has a versioning filesystem mounted, then that
+		mount appears at /view/v1/usr, /view/v2/usr, /view/v3/usr and
+		/view/v4/usr too
+
+		A user can request v3 version of the file /usr/fs/namespace.c
+		by accessing /view/v3/usr/fs/namespace.c . The underlying
+		versioning filesystem can then decipher that v3 version of the
+		filesystem is being requested and return the corresponding
+		inode.
+
+5) Detailed semantics
+---------------------
+	The section below explains the detailed semantics of
+	bind, rbind, move, mount, umount and clone-namespace operations.
+
+	Note: the word 'vfsmount' and the noun 'mount' have been used
+	to mean the same thing, throughout this document.
+
+5a) Mount states
+
+	A given mount can be in one of the following states
+
+	1) shared
+	2) slave
+	3) shared and slave
+	4) private
+	5) unbindable
+
+	A 'propagation event' is defined as event generated on a vfsmount
+	that leads to mount or unmount actions in other vfsmounts.
+
+	A 'peer group' is defined as a group of vfsmounts that propagate
+	events to each other.
+
+	(1) Shared mounts
+
+		A 'shared mount' is defined as a vfsmount that belongs to a
+		'peer group'.
+
+		For example::
+
+			mount --make-shared /mnt
+			mount --bind /mnt /tmp
+
+		The mount at /mnt and that at /tmp are both shared and belong
+		to the same peer group. Anything mounted or unmounted under
+		/mnt or /tmp reflect in all the other mounts of its peer
+		group.
+
+
+	(2) Slave mounts
+
+		A 'slave mount' is defined as a vfsmount that receives
+		propagation events and does not forward propagation events.
+
+		A slave mount as the name implies has a master mount from which
+		mount/unmount events are received. Events do not propagate from
+		the slave mount to the master.  Only a shared mount can be made
+		a slave by executing the following command::
+
+			mount --make-slave mount
+
+		A shared mount that is made as a slave is no more shared unless
+		modified to become shared.
+
+	(3) Shared and Slave
+
+		A vfsmount can be both shared as well as slave.  This state
+		indicates that the mount is a slave of some vfsmount, and
+		has its own peer group too.  This vfsmount receives propagation
+		events from its master vfsmount, and also forwards propagation
+		events to its 'peer group' and to its slave vfsmounts.
+
+		Strictly speaking, the vfsmount is shared having its own
+		peer group, and this peer-group is a slave of some other
+		peer group.
+
+		Only a slave vfsmount can be made as 'shared and slave' by
+		either executing the following command::
+
+			mount --make-shared mount
+
+		or by moving the slave vfsmount under a shared vfsmount.
+
+	(4) Private mount
+
+		A 'private mount' is defined as vfsmount that does not
+		receive or forward any propagation events.
+
+	(5) Unbindable mount
+
+		A 'unbindable mount' is defined as vfsmount that does not
+		receive or forward any propagation events and cannot
+		be bind mounted.
+
+
+   	State diagram:
+
+   	The state diagram below explains the state transition of a mount,
+	in response to various commands::
+
+	    -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+	    |             |make-shared |  make-slave  | make-private |make-unbindab|
+	    --------------|------------|--------------|--------------|-------------|
+	    |shared	  |shared      |*slave/private|   private    | unbindable  |
+	    |             |            |              |              |             |
+	    |-------------|------------|--------------|--------------|-------------|
+	    |slave	  |shared      | **slave      |    private   | unbindable  |
+	    |             |and slave   |              |              |             |
+	    |-------------|------------|--------------|--------------|-------------|
+	    |shared       |shared      | slave        |    private   | unbindable  |
+	    |and slave    |and slave   |              |              |             |
+	    |-------------|------------|--------------|--------------|-------------|
+	    |private      |shared      |  **private   |    private   | unbindable  |
+	    |-------------|------------|--------------|--------------|-------------|
+	    |unbindable   |shared      |**unbindable  |    private   | unbindable  |
+	    ------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+	    * if the shared mount is the only mount in its peer group, making it
+	    slave, makes it private automatically. Note that there is no master to
+	    which it can be slaved to.
+
+	    ** slaving a non-shared mount has no effect on the mount.
+
+	Apart from the commands listed below, the 'move' operation also changes
+	the state of a mount depending on type of the destination mount. Its
+	explained in section 5d.
+
+5b) Bind semantics
+
+	Consider the following command::
+
+	    mount --bind A/a  B/b
+
+	where 'A' is the source mount, 'a' is the dentry in the mount 'A', 'B'
+	is the destination mount and 'b' is the dentry in the destination mount.
+
+	The outcome depends on the type of mount of 'A' and 'B'. The table
+	below contains quick reference::
+
+	    --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+	    |         BIND MOUNT OPERATION                                           |
+	    |************************************************************************|
+	    |source(A)->| shared      |       private  |       slave    | unbindable |
+	    | dest(B)  |              |                |                |            |
+	    |   |      |              |                |                |            |
+	    |   v      |              |                |                |            |
+	    |************************************************************************|
+	    |  shared  | shared       |     shared     | shared & slave |  invalid   |
+	    |          |              |                |                |            |
+	    |non-shared| shared       |      private   |      slave     |  invalid   |
+	    **************************************************************************
+
+     	Details:
+
+    1. 'A' is a shared mount and 'B' is a shared mount. A new mount 'C'
+	which is clone of 'A', is created. Its root dentry is 'a' . 'C' is
+	mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'. Also new mount 'C1', 'C2', 'C3' ...
+	are created and mounted at the dentry 'b' on all mounts where 'B'
+	propagates to. A new propagation tree containing 'C1',..,'Cn' is
+	created. This propagation tree is identical to the propagation tree of
+	'B'.  And finally the peer-group of 'C' is merged with the peer group
+	of 'A'.
+
+    2. 'A' is a private mount and 'B' is a shared mount. A new mount 'C'
+	which is clone of 'A', is created. Its root dentry is 'a'. 'C' is
+	mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'. Also new mount 'C1', 'C2', 'C3' ...
+	are created and mounted at the dentry 'b' on all mounts where 'B'
+	propagates to. A new propagation tree is set containing all new mounts
+	'C', 'C1', .., 'Cn' with exactly the same configuration as the
+	propagation tree for 'B'.
+
+    3. 'A' is a slave mount of mount 'Z' and 'B' is a shared mount. A new
+	mount 'C' which is clone of 'A', is created. Its root dentry is 'a' .
+	'C' is mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'. Also new mounts 'C1', 'C2',
+	'C3' ... are created and mounted at the dentry 'b' on all mounts where
+	'B' propagates to. A new propagation tree containing the new mounts
+	'C','C1',..  'Cn' is created. This propagation tree is identical to the
+	propagation tree for 'B'. And finally the mount 'C' and its peer group
+	is made the slave of mount 'Z'.  In other words, mount 'C' is in the
+	state 'slave and shared'.
+
+    4. 'A' is a unbindable mount and 'B' is a shared mount. This is a
+	invalid operation.
+
+    5. 'A' is a private mount and 'B' is a non-shared(private or slave or
+	unbindable) mount. A new mount 'C' which is clone of 'A', is created.
+	Its root dentry is 'a'. 'C' is mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'.
+
+    6. 'A' is a shared mount and 'B' is a non-shared mount. A new mount 'C'
+	which is a clone of 'A' is created. Its root dentry is 'a'. 'C' is
+	mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'.  'C' is made a member of the
+	peer-group of 'A'.
+
+    7. 'A' is a slave mount of mount 'Z' and 'B' is a non-shared mount. A
+	new mount 'C' which is a clone of 'A' is created. Its root dentry is
+	'a'.  'C' is mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'. Also 'C' is set as a
+	slave mount of 'Z'. In other words 'A' and 'C' are both slave mounts of
+	'Z'.  All mount/unmount events on 'Z' propagates to 'A' and 'C'. But
+	mount/unmount on 'A' do not propagate anywhere else. Similarly
+	mount/unmount on 'C' do not propagate anywhere else.
+
+    8. 'A' is a unbindable mount and 'B' is a non-shared mount. This is a
+	invalid operation. A unbindable mount cannot be bind mounted.
+
+5c) Rbind semantics
+
+	rbind is same as bind. Bind replicates the specified mount.  Rbind
+	replicates all the mounts in the tree belonging to the specified mount.
+	Rbind mount is bind mount applied to all the mounts in the tree.
+
+	If the source tree that is rbind has some unbindable mounts,
+	then the subtree under the unbindable mount is pruned in the new
+	location.
+
+	eg:
+
+	  let's say we have the following mount tree::
+
+		A
+	      /   \
+	      B   C
+	     / \ / \
+	     D E F G
+
+	  Let's say all the mount except the mount C in the tree are
+	  of a type other than unbindable.
+
+	  If this tree is rbound to say Z
+
+	  We will have the following tree at the new location::
+
+		Z
+		|
+		A'
+	       /
+	      B'		Note how the tree under C is pruned
+	     / \ 		in the new location.
+	    D' E'
+
+
+
+5d) Move semantics
+
+	Consider the following command
+
+	mount --move A  B/b
+
+	where 'A' is the source mount, 'B' is the destination mount and 'b' is
+	the dentry in the destination mount.
+
+	The outcome depends on the type of the mount of 'A' and 'B'. The table
+	below is a quick reference::
+
+	    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+	    |         		MOVE MOUNT OPERATION                                 |
+	    |**************************************************************************
+	    | source(A)->| shared      |       private  |       slave    | unbindable |
+	    | dest(B)  |               |                |                |            |
+	    |   |      |               |                |                |            |
+	    |   v      |               |                |                |            |
+	    |**************************************************************************
+	    |  shared  | shared        |     shared     |shared and slave|  invalid   |
+	    |          |               |                |                |            |
+	    |non-shared| shared        |      private   |    slave       | unbindable |
+	    ***************************************************************************
+
+	.. Note:: moving a mount residing under a shared mount is invalid.
+
+      Details follow:
+
+    1. 'A' is a shared mount and 'B' is a shared mount.  The mount 'A' is
+	mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'.  Also new mounts 'A1', 'A2'...'An'
+	are created and mounted at dentry 'b' on all mounts that receive
+	propagation from mount 'B'. A new propagation tree is created in the
+	exact same configuration as that of 'B'. This new propagation tree
+	contains all the new mounts 'A1', 'A2'...  'An'.  And this new
+	propagation tree is appended to the already existing propagation tree
+	of 'A'.
+
+    2. 'A' is a private mount and 'B' is a shared mount. The mount 'A' is
+	mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'. Also new mount 'A1', 'A2'... 'An'
+	are created and mounted at dentry 'b' on all mounts that receive
+	propagation from mount 'B'. The mount 'A' becomes a shared mount and a
+	propagation tree is created which is identical to that of
+	'B'. This new propagation tree contains all the new mounts 'A1',
+	'A2'...  'An'.
+
+    3. 'A' is a slave mount of mount 'Z' and 'B' is a shared mount.  The
+	mount 'A' is mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'.  Also new mounts 'A1',
+	'A2'... 'An' are created and mounted at dentry 'b' on all mounts that
+	receive propagation from mount 'B'. A new propagation tree is created
+	in the exact same configuration as that of 'B'. This new propagation
+	tree contains all the new mounts 'A1', 'A2'...  'An'.  And this new
+	propagation tree is appended to the already existing propagation tree of
+	'A'.  Mount 'A' continues to be the slave mount of 'Z' but it also
+	becomes 'shared'.
+
+    4. 'A' is a unbindable mount and 'B' is a shared mount. The operation
+	is invalid. Because mounting anything on the shared mount 'B' can
+	create new mounts that get mounted on the mounts that receive
+	propagation from 'B'.  And since the mount 'A' is unbindable, cloning
+	it to mount at other mountpoints is not possible.
+
+    5. 'A' is a private mount and 'B' is a non-shared(private or slave or
+	unbindable) mount. The mount 'A' is mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'.
+
+    6. 'A' is a shared mount and 'B' is a non-shared mount.  The mount 'A'
+	is mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'.  Mount 'A' continues to be a
+	shared mount.
+
+    7. 'A' is a slave mount of mount 'Z' and 'B' is a non-shared mount.
+	The mount 'A' is mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'.  Mount 'A'
+	continues to be a slave mount of mount 'Z'.
+
+    8. 'A' is a unbindable mount and 'B' is a non-shared mount. The mount
+	'A' is mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'. Mount 'A' continues to be a
+	unbindable mount.
+
+5e) Mount semantics
+
+	Consider the following command::
+
+	    mount device  B/b
+
+	'B' is the destination mount and 'b' is the dentry in the destination
+	mount.
+
+	The above operation is the same as bind operation with the exception
+	that the source mount is always a private mount.
+
+
+5f) Unmount semantics
+
+	Consider the following command::
+
+	    umount A
+
+	where 'A' is a mount mounted on mount 'B' at dentry 'b'.
+
+	If mount 'B' is shared, then all most-recently-mounted mounts at dentry
+	'b' on mounts that receive propagation from mount 'B' and does not have
+	sub-mounts within them are unmounted.
+
+	Example: Let's say 'B1', 'B2', 'B3' are shared mounts that propagate to
+	each other.
+
+	let's say 'A1', 'A2', 'A3' are first mounted at dentry 'b' on mount
+	'B1', 'B2' and 'B3' respectively.
+
+	let's say 'C1', 'C2', 'C3' are next mounted at the same dentry 'b' on
+	mount 'B1', 'B2' and 'B3' respectively.
+
+	if 'C1' is unmounted, all the mounts that are most-recently-mounted on
+	'B1' and on the mounts that 'B1' propagates-to are unmounted.
+
+	'B1' propagates to 'B2' and 'B3'. And the most recently mounted mount
+	on 'B2' at dentry 'b' is 'C2', and that of mount 'B3' is 'C3'.
+
+	So all 'C1', 'C2' and 'C3' should be unmounted.
+
+	If any of 'C2' or 'C3' has some child mounts, then that mount is not
+	unmounted, but all other mounts are unmounted. However if 'C1' is told
+	to be unmounted and 'C1' has some sub-mounts, the umount operation is
+	failed entirely.
+
+5g) Clone Namespace
+
+	A cloned namespace contains all the mounts as that of the parent
+	namespace.
+
+	Let's say 'A' and 'B' are the corresponding mounts in the parent and the
+	child namespace.
+
+	If 'A' is shared, then 'B' is also shared and 'A' and 'B' propagate to
+	each other.
+
+	If 'A' is a slave mount of 'Z', then 'B' is also the slave mount of
+	'Z'.
+
+	If 'A' is a private mount, then 'B' is a private mount too.
+
+	If 'A' is unbindable mount, then 'B' is a unbindable mount too.
+
+
+6) Quiz
+
+	A. What is the result of the following command sequence?
+
+		::
+
+		    mount --bind /mnt /mnt
+		    mount --make-shared /mnt
+		    mount --bind /mnt /tmp
+		    mount --move /tmp /mnt/1
+
+		what should be the contents of /mnt /mnt/1 /mnt/1/1 should be?
+		Should they all be identical? or should /mnt and /mnt/1 be
+		identical only?
+
+
+	B. What is the result of the following command sequence?
+
+		::
+
+		    mount --make-rshared /
+		    mkdir -p /v/1
+		    mount --rbind / /v/1
+
+		what should be the content of /v/1/v/1 be?
+
+
+	C. What is the result of the following command sequence?
+
+		::
+
+		    mount --bind /mnt /mnt
+		    mount --make-shared /mnt
+		    mkdir -p /mnt/1/2/3 /mnt/1/test
+		    mount --bind /mnt/1 /tmp
+		    mount --make-slave /mnt
+		    mount --make-shared /mnt
+		    mount --bind /mnt/1/2 /tmp1
+		    mount --make-slave /mnt
+
+		At this point we have the first mount at /tmp and
+		its root dentry is 1. Let's call this mount 'A'
+		And then we have a second mount at /tmp1 with root
+		dentry 2. Let's call this mount 'B'
+		Next we have a third mount at /mnt with root dentry
+		mnt. Let's call this mount 'C'
+
+		'B' is the slave of 'A' and 'C' is a slave of 'B'
+		A -> B -> C
+
+		at this point if we execute the following command
+
+		mount --bind /bin /tmp/test
+
+		The mount is attempted on 'A'
+
+		will the mount propagate to 'B' and 'C' ?
+
+		what would be the contents of
+		/mnt/1/test be?
+
+7) FAQ
+
+	Q1. Why is bind mount needed? How is it different from symbolic links?
+		symbolic links can get stale if the destination mount gets
+		unmounted or moved. Bind mounts continue to exist even if the
+		other mount is unmounted or moved.
+
+	Q2. Why can't the shared subtree be implemented using exportfs?
+
+		exportfs is a heavyweight way of accomplishing part of what
+		shared subtree can do. I cannot imagine a way to implement the
+		semantics of slave mount using exportfs?
+
+	Q3 Why is unbindable mount needed?
+
+		Let's say we want to replicate the mount tree at multiple
+		locations within the same subtree.
+
+		if one rbind mounts a tree within the same subtree 'n' times
+		the number of mounts created is an exponential function of 'n'.
+		Having unbindable mount can help prune the unneeded bind
+		mounts. Here is an example.
+
+		step 1:
+		   let's say the root tree has just two directories with
+		   one vfsmount::
+
+				    root
+				   /    \
+				  tmp    usr
+
+		    And we want to replicate the tree at multiple
+		    mountpoints under /root/tmp
+
+		step 2:
+		      ::
+
+
+			mount --make-shared /root
+
+			mkdir -p /tmp/m1
+
+			mount --rbind /root /tmp/m1
+
+		      the new tree now looks like this::
+
+				    root
+				   /    \
+				 tmp    usr
+				/
+			       m1
+			      /  \
+			     tmp  usr
+			     /
+			    m1
+
+			  it has two vfsmounts
+
+		step 3:
+		    ::
+
+			    mkdir -p /tmp/m2
+			    mount --rbind /root /tmp/m2
+
+			the new tree now looks like this::
+
+				      root
+				     /    \
+				   tmp     usr
+				  /    \
+				m1       m2
+			       / \       /  \
+			     tmp  usr   tmp  usr
+			     / \          /
+			    m1  m2      m1
+				/ \     /  \
+			      tmp usr  tmp   usr
+			      /        / \
+			     m1       m1  m2
+			    /  \
+			  tmp   usr
+			  /  \
+			 m1   m2
+
+		       it has 6 vfsmounts
+
+		step 4:
+		      ::
+			  mkdir -p /tmp/m3
+			  mount --rbind /root /tmp/m3
+
+			  I won't draw the tree..but it has 24 vfsmounts
+
+
+		at step i the number of vfsmounts is V[i] = i*V[i-1].
+		This is an exponential function. And this tree has way more
+		mounts than what we really needed in the first place.
+
+		One could use a series of umount at each step to prune
+		out the unneeded mounts. But there is a better solution.
+		Unclonable mounts come in handy here.
+
+		step 1:
+		   let's say the root tree has just two directories with
+		   one vfsmount::
+
+				    root
+				   /    \
+				  tmp    usr
+
+		    How do we set up the same tree at multiple locations under
+		    /root/tmp
+
+		step 2:
+		      ::
+
+
+			mount --bind /root/tmp /root/tmp
+
+			mount --make-rshared /root
+			mount --make-unbindable /root/tmp
+
+			mkdir -p /tmp/m1
+
+			mount --rbind /root /tmp/m1
+
+		      the new tree now looks like this::
+
+				    root
+				   /    \
+				 tmp    usr
+				/
+			       m1
+			      /  \
+			     tmp  usr
+
+		step 3:
+		      ::
+
+			    mkdir -p /tmp/m2
+			    mount --rbind /root /tmp/m2
+
+		      the new tree now looks like this::
+
+				    root
+				   /    \
+				 tmp    usr
+				/   \
+			       m1     m2
+			      /  \     / \
+			     tmp  usr tmp usr
+
+		step 4:
+		      ::
+
+			    mkdir -p /tmp/m3
+			    mount --rbind /root /tmp/m3
+
+		      the new tree now looks like this::
+
+				    	  root
+				      /    	  \
+				     tmp    	   usr
+			         /    \    \
+			       m1     m2     m3
+			      /  \     / \    /  \
+			     tmp  usr tmp usr tmp usr
+
+8) Implementation
+
+8A) Datastructure
+
+	4 new fields are introduced to struct vfsmount:
+
+	*   ->mnt_share
+	*   ->mnt_slave_list
+	*   ->mnt_slave
+	*   ->mnt_master
+
+	->mnt_share
+		links together all the mount to/from which this vfsmount
+		send/receives propagation events.
+
+	->mnt_slave_list
+		links all the mounts to which this vfsmount propagates
+		to.
+
+	->mnt_slave
+		links together all the slaves that its master vfsmount
+		propagates to.
+
+	->mnt_master
+		points to the master vfsmount from which this vfsmount
+		receives propagation.
+
+	->mnt_flags
+		takes two more flags to indicate the propagation status of
+		the vfsmount.  MNT_SHARE indicates that the vfsmount is a shared
+		vfsmount.  MNT_UNCLONABLE indicates that the vfsmount cannot be
+		replicated.
+
+	All the shared vfsmounts in a peer group form a cyclic list through
+	->mnt_share.
+
+	All vfsmounts with the same ->mnt_master form on a cyclic list anchored
+	in ->mnt_master->mnt_slave_list and going through ->mnt_slave.
+
+	 ->mnt_master can point to arbitrary (and possibly different) members
+	 of master peer group.  To find all immediate slaves of a peer group
+	 you need to go through _all_ ->mnt_slave_list of its members.
+	 Conceptually it's just a single set - distribution among the
+	 individual lists does not affect propagation or the way propagation
+	 tree is modified by operations.
+
+	All vfsmounts in a peer group have the same ->mnt_master.  If it is
+	non-NULL, they form a contiguous (ordered) segment of slave list.
+
+	A example propagation tree looks as shown in the figure below.
+	[ NOTE: Though it looks like a forest, if we consider all the shared
+	mounts as a conceptual entity called 'pnode', it becomes a tree]::
+
+
+		        A <--> B <--> C <---> D
+		       /|\	      /|      |\
+		      / F G	     J K      H I
+		     /
+		    E<-->K
+			/|\
+		       M L N
+
+	In the above figure  A,B,C and D all are shared and propagate to each
+	other.   'A' has got 3 slave mounts 'E' 'F' and 'G' 'C' has got 2 slave
+	mounts 'J' and 'K'  and  'D' has got two slave mounts 'H' and 'I'.
+	'E' is also shared with 'K' and they propagate to each other.  And
+	'K' has 3 slaves 'M', 'L' and 'N'
+
+	A's ->mnt_share links with the ->mnt_share of 'B' 'C' and 'D'
+
+	A's ->mnt_slave_list links with ->mnt_slave of 'E', 'K', 'F' and 'G'
+
+	E's ->mnt_share links with ->mnt_share of K
+
+	'E', 'K', 'F', 'G' have their ->mnt_master point to struct vfsmount of 'A'
+
+	'M', 'L', 'N' have their ->mnt_master point to struct vfsmount of 'K'
+
+	K's ->mnt_slave_list links with ->mnt_slave of 'M', 'L' and 'N'
+
+	C's ->mnt_slave_list links with ->mnt_slave of 'J' and 'K'
+
+	J and K's ->mnt_master points to struct vfsmount of C
+
+	and finally D's ->mnt_slave_list links with ->mnt_slave of 'H' and 'I'
+
+	'H' and 'I' have their ->mnt_master pointing to struct vfsmount of 'D'.
+
+
+	NOTE: The propagation tree is orthogonal to the mount tree.
+
+8B Locking:
+
+	->mnt_share, ->mnt_slave, ->mnt_slave_list, ->mnt_master are protected
+	by namespace_sem (exclusive for modifications, shared for reading).
+
+	Normally we have ->mnt_flags modifications serialized by vfsmount_lock.
+	There are two exceptions: do_add_mount() and clone_mnt().
+	The former modifies a vfsmount that has not been visible in any shared
+	data structures yet.
+	The latter holds namespace_sem and the only references to vfsmount
+	are in lists that can't be traversed without namespace_sem.
+
+8C Algorithm:
+
+	The crux of the implementation resides in rbind/move operation.
+
+	The overall algorithm breaks the operation into 3 phases: (look at
+	attach_recursive_mnt() and propagate_mnt())
+
+	1. prepare phase.
+	2. commit phases.
+	3. abort phases.
+
+	Prepare phase:
+
+	for each mount in the source tree:
+
+		   a) Create the necessary number of mount trees to
+		   	be attached to each of the mounts that receive
+			propagation from the destination mount.
+		   b) Do not attach any of the trees to its destination.
+		      However note down its ->mnt_parent and ->mnt_mountpoint
+		   c) Link all the new mounts to form a propagation tree that
+		      is identical to the propagation tree of the destination
+		      mount.
+
+		   If this phase is successful, there should be 'n' new
+		   propagation trees; where 'n' is the number of mounts in the
+		   source tree.  Go to the commit phase
+
+		   Also there should be 'm' new mount trees, where 'm' is
+		   the number of mounts to which the destination mount
+		   propagates to.
+
+		   if any memory allocations fail, go to the abort phase.
+
+	Commit phase
+		attach each of the mount trees to their corresponding
+		destination mounts.
+
+	Abort phase
+		delete all the newly created trees.
+
+	.. Note::
+	   all the propagation related functionality resides in the file pnode.c
+
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+version 0.1  (created the initial document, Ram Pai linuxram@us.ibm.com)
+
+version 0.2  (Incorporated comments from Al Viro)
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/splice.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/splice.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..edd874808
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/splice.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+================
+splice and pipes
+================
+
+splice API
+==========
+
+splice is a method for moving blocks of data around inside the kernel,
+without continually transferring them between the kernel and user space.
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/splice.c
+
+pipes API
+=========
+
+Pipe interfaces are all for in-kernel (builtin image) use. They are not
+exported for use by modules.
+
+.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/pipe_fs_i.h
+   :internal:
+
+.. kernel-doc:: fs/pipe.c
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5ed4a8494
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============
+SPU Filesystem
+==============
+
+
+.. toctree::
+   :maxdepth: 1
+
+   spufs
+   spu_create
+   spu_run
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/spu_create.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/spu_create.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..83108c099
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/spu_create.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==========
+spu_create
+==========
+
+Name
+====
+       spu_create - create a new spu context
+
+
+Synopsis
+========
+
+       ::
+
+         #include <sys/types.h>
+         #include <sys/spu.h>
+
+         int spu_create(const char *pathname, int flags, mode_t mode);
+
+Description
+===========
+       The  spu_create  system call is used on PowerPC machines that implement
+       the Cell Broadband Engine Architecture in order to  access  Synergistic
+       Processor  Units (SPUs). It creates a new logical context for an SPU in
+       pathname and returns a handle to associated  with  it.   pathname  must
+       point  to  a  non-existing directory in the mount point of the SPU file
+       system (spufs).  When spu_create is successful, a directory  gets  cre-
+       ated on pathname and it is populated with files.
+
+       The  returned  file  handle can only be passed to spu_run(2) or closed,
+       other operations are not defined on it. When it is closed, all  associ-
+       ated  directory entries in spufs are removed. When the last file handle
+       pointing either inside  of  the  context  directory  or  to  this  file
+       descriptor is closed, the logical SPU context is destroyed.
+
+       The  parameter flags can be zero or any bitwise or'd combination of the
+       following constants:
+
+       SPU_RAWIO
+              Allow mapping of some of the hardware registers of the SPU  into
+              user space. This flag requires the CAP_SYS_RAWIO capability, see
+              capabilities(7).
+
+       The mode parameter specifies the permissions used for creating the  new
+       directory  in  spufs.   mode is modified with the user's umask(2) value
+       and then used for both the directory and the files contained in it. The
+       file permissions mask out some more bits of mode because they typically
+       support only read or write access. See stat(2) for a full list  of  the
+       possible mode values.
+
+
+Return Value
+============
+       spu_create  returns a new file descriptor. It may return -1 to indicate
+       an error condition and set errno to  one  of  the  error  codes  listed
+       below.
+
+
+Errors
+======
+       EACCES
+              The  current  user does not have write access on the spufs mount
+              point.
+
+       EEXIST An SPU context already exists at the given path name.
+
+       EFAULT pathname is not a valid string pointer in  the  current  address
+              space.
+
+       EINVAL pathname is not a directory in the spufs mount point.
+
+       ELOOP  Too many symlinks were found while resolving pathname.
+
+       EMFILE The process has reached its maximum open file limit.
+
+       ENAMETOOLONG
+              pathname was too long.
+
+       ENFILE The system has reached the global open file limit.
+
+       ENOENT Part of pathname could not be resolved.
+
+       ENOMEM The kernel could not allocate all resources required.
+
+       ENOSPC There  are  not  enough  SPU resources available to create a new
+              context or the user specific limit for the number  of  SPU  con-
+              texts has been reached.
+
+       ENOSYS the functionality is not provided by the current system, because
+              either the hardware does not provide SPUs or the spufs module is
+              not loaded.
+
+       ENOTDIR
+              A part of pathname is not a directory.
+
+
+
+Notes
+=====
+       spu_create  is  meant  to  be used from libraries that implement a more
+       abstract interface to SPUs, not to be used from  regular  applications.
+       See  http://www.bsc.es/projects/deepcomputing/linuxoncell/ for the rec-
+       ommended libraries.
+
+
+Files
+=====
+       pathname must point to a location beneath the mount point of spufs.  By
+       convention, it gets mounted in /spu.
+
+
+Conforming to
+=============
+       This call is Linux specific and only implemented by the ppc64 architec-
+       ture. Programs using this system call are not portable.
+
+
+Bugs
+====
+       The code does not yet fully implement all features lined out here.
+
+
+Author
+======
+       Arnd Bergmann <arndb@de.ibm.com>
+
+See Also
+========
+       capabilities(7), close(2), spu_run(2), spufs(7)
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/spu_run.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/spu_run.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7fdb1c31c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/spu_run.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======
+spu_run
+=======
+
+
+Name
+====
+       spu_run - execute an spu context
+
+
+Synopsis
+========
+
+       ::
+
+	    #include <sys/spu.h>
+
+	    int spu_run(int fd, unsigned int *npc, unsigned int *event);
+
+Description
+===========
+       The  spu_run system call is used on PowerPC machines that implement the
+       Cell Broadband Engine Architecture in order to access Synergistic  Pro-
+       cessor  Units  (SPUs).  It  uses the fd that was returned from spu_cre-
+       ate(2) to address a specific SPU context. When the context gets  sched-
+       uled  to a physical SPU, it starts execution at the instruction pointer
+       passed in npc.
+
+       Execution of SPU code happens synchronously, meaning that spu_run  does
+       not  return  while the SPU is still running. If there is a need to exe-
+       cute SPU code in parallel with other code on either  the  main  CPU  or
+       other  SPUs,  you  need to create a new thread of execution first, e.g.
+       using the pthread_create(3) call.
+
+       When spu_run returns, the current value of the SPU instruction  pointer
+       is  written back to npc, so you can call spu_run again without updating
+       the pointers.
+
+       event can be a NULL pointer or point to an extended  status  code  that
+       gets  filled  when spu_run returns. It can be one of the following con-
+       stants:
+
+       SPE_EVENT_DMA_ALIGNMENT
+              A DMA alignment error
+
+       SPE_EVENT_SPE_DATA_SEGMENT
+              A DMA segmentation error
+
+       SPE_EVENT_SPE_DATA_STORAGE
+              A DMA storage error
+
+       If NULL is passed as the event argument, these errors will result in  a
+       signal delivered to the calling process.
+
+Return Value
+============
+       spu_run  returns the value of the spu_status register or -1 to indicate
+       an error and set errno to one of the error  codes  listed  below.   The
+       spu_status  register  value  contains  a  bit  mask of status codes and
+       optionally a 14 bit code returned from the stop-and-signal  instruction
+       on the SPU. The bit masks for the status codes are:
+
+       0x02
+	      SPU was stopped by stop-and-signal.
+
+       0x04
+	      SPU was stopped by halt.
+
+       0x08
+	      SPU is waiting for a channel.
+
+       0x10
+	      SPU is in single-step mode.
+
+       0x20
+	      SPU has tried to execute an invalid instruction.
+
+       0x40
+	      SPU has tried to access an invalid channel.
+
+       0x3fff0000
+              The  bits  masked with this value contain the code returned from
+              stop-and-signal.
+
+       There are always one or more of the lower eight bits set  or  an  error
+       code is returned from spu_run.
+
+Errors
+======
+       EAGAIN or EWOULDBLOCK
+              fd is in non-blocking mode and spu_run would block.
+
+       EBADF  fd is not a valid file descriptor.
+
+       EFAULT npc is not a valid pointer or status is neither NULL nor a valid
+              pointer.
+
+       EINTR  A signal occurred while spu_run was in progress.  The npc  value
+              has  been updated to the new program counter value if necessary.
+
+       EINVAL fd is not a file descriptor returned from spu_create(2).
+
+       ENOMEM Insufficient memory was available to handle a page fault result-
+              ing from an MFC direct memory access.
+
+       ENOSYS the functionality is not provided by the current system, because
+              either the hardware does not provide SPUs or the spufs module is
+              not loaded.
+
+
+Notes
+=====
+       spu_run  is  meant  to  be  used  from  libraries that implement a more
+       abstract interface to SPUs, not to be used from  regular  applications.
+       See  http://www.bsc.es/projects/deepcomputing/linuxoncell/ for the rec-
+       ommended libraries.
+
+
+Conforming to
+=============
+       This call is Linux specific and only implemented by the ppc64 architec-
+       ture. Programs using this system call are not portable.
+
+
+Bugs
+====
+       The code does not yet fully implement all features lined out here.
+
+
+Author
+======
+       Arnd Bergmann <arndb@de.ibm.com>
+
+See Also
+========
+       capabilities(7), close(2), spu_create(2), spufs(7)
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/spufs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/spufs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ca0441cbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/spufs/spufs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,273 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====
+spufs
+=====
+
+Name
+====
+
+       spufs - the SPU file system
+
+
+Description
+===========
+
+       The SPU file system is used on PowerPC machines that implement the Cell
+       Broadband Engine Architecture in order to access Synergistic  Processor
+       Units (SPUs).
+
+       The file system provides a name space similar to posix shared memory or
+       message queues. Users that have write permissions on  the  file  system
+       can use spu_create(2) to establish SPU contexts in the spufs root.
+
+       Every SPU context is represented by a directory containing a predefined
+       set of files. These files can be used for manipulating the state of the
+       logical SPU. Users can change permissions on those files, but not actu-
+       ally add or remove files.
+
+
+Mount Options
+=============
+
+       uid=<uid>
+              set the user owning the mount point, the default is 0 (root).
+
+       gid=<gid>
+              set the group owning the mount point, the default is 0 (root).
+
+
+Files
+=====
+
+       The files in spufs mostly follow the standard behavior for regular sys-
+       tem  calls like read(2) or write(2), but often support only a subset of
+       the operations supported on regular file systems. This list details the
+       supported  operations  and  the  deviations  from  the behaviour in the
+       respective man pages.
+
+       All files that support the read(2) operation also support readv(2)  and
+       all  files  that support the write(2) operation also support writev(2).
+       All files support the access(2) and stat(2) family of  operations,  but
+       only  the  st_mode,  st_nlink,  st_uid and st_gid fields of struct stat
+       contain reliable information.
+
+       All files support the chmod(2)/fchmod(2) and chown(2)/fchown(2)  opera-
+       tions,  but  will  not be able to grant permissions that contradict the
+       possible operations, e.g. read access on the wbox file.
+
+       The current set of files is:
+
+
+   /mem
+       the contents of the local storage memory  of  the  SPU.   This  can  be
+       accessed  like  a regular shared memory file and contains both code and
+       data in the address space of the SPU.  The possible  operations  on  an
+       open mem file are:
+
+       read(2), pread(2), write(2), pwrite(2), lseek(2)
+              These  operate  as  documented, with the exception that seek(2),
+              write(2) and pwrite(2) are not supported beyond the end  of  the
+              file. The file size is the size of the local storage of the SPU,
+              which normally is 256 kilobytes.
+
+       mmap(2)
+              Mapping mem into the process address space gives access  to  the
+              SPU  local  storage  within  the  process  address  space.  Only
+              MAP_SHARED mappings are allowed.
+
+
+   /mbox
+       The first SPU to CPU communication mailbox. This file is read-only  and
+       can  be  read  in  units of 32 bits.  The file can only be used in non-
+       blocking mode and it even poll() will not block on  it.   The  possible
+       operations on an open mbox file are:
+
+       read(2)
+              If  a  count smaller than four is requested, read returns -1 and
+              sets errno to EINVAL.  If there is no data available in the mail
+              box,  the  return  value  is set to -1 and errno becomes EAGAIN.
+              When data has been read successfully, four bytes are  placed  in
+              the data buffer and the value four is returned.
+
+
+   /ibox
+       The  second  SPU  to CPU communication mailbox. This file is similar to
+       the first mailbox file, but can be read in blocking I/O mode,  and  the
+       poll  family of system calls can be used to wait for it.  The  possible
+       operations on an open ibox file are:
+
+       read(2)
+              If a count smaller than four is requested, read returns  -1  and
+              sets errno to EINVAL.  If there is no data available in the mail
+              box and the file descriptor has been opened with O_NONBLOCK, the
+              return value is set to -1 and errno becomes EAGAIN.
+
+              If  there  is  no  data  available  in the mail box and the file
+              descriptor has been opened without  O_NONBLOCK,  the  call  will
+              block  until  the  SPU  writes to its interrupt mailbox channel.
+              When data has been read successfully, four bytes are  placed  in
+              the data buffer and the value four is returned.
+
+       poll(2)
+              Poll  on  the  ibox  file returns (POLLIN | POLLRDNORM) whenever
+              data is available for reading.
+
+
+   /wbox
+       The CPU to SPU communation mailbox. It is write-only and can be written
+       in  units  of  32  bits. If the mailbox is full, write() will block and
+       poll can be used to wait for it becoming  empty  again.   The  possible
+       operations  on  an open wbox file are: write(2) If a count smaller than
+       four is requested, write returns -1 and sets errno to EINVAL.  If there
+       is  no space available in the mail box and the file descriptor has been
+       opened with O_NONBLOCK, the return value is set to -1 and errno becomes
+       EAGAIN.
+
+       If  there is no space available in the mail box and the file descriptor
+       has been opened without O_NONBLOCK, the call will block until  the  SPU
+       reads  from  its PPE mailbox channel.  When data has been read success-
+       fully, four bytes are placed in the data buffer and the value  four  is
+       returned.
+
+       poll(2)
+              Poll  on  the  ibox file returns (POLLOUT | POLLWRNORM) whenever
+              space is available for writing.
+
+
+   /mbox_stat, /ibox_stat, /wbox_stat
+       Read-only files that contain the length of the current queue, i.e.  how
+       many  words  can  be  read  from  mbox or ibox or how many words can be
+       written to wbox without blocking.  The files can be read only in 4-byte
+       units  and  return  a  big-endian  binary integer number.  The possible
+       operations on an open ``*box_stat`` file are:
+
+       read(2)
+              If a count smaller than four is requested, read returns  -1  and
+              sets errno to EINVAL.  Otherwise, a four byte value is placed in
+              the data buffer, containing the number of elements that  can  be
+              read  from  (for  mbox_stat  and  ibox_stat)  or written to (for
+              wbox_stat) the respective mail box without blocking or resulting
+              in EAGAIN.
+
+
+   /npc, /decr, /decr_status, /spu_tag_mask, /event_mask, /srr0
+       Internal  registers  of  the SPU. The representation is an ASCII string
+       with the numeric value of the next instruction to  be  executed.  These
+       can  be  used in read/write mode for debugging, but normal operation of
+       programs should not rely on them because access to any of  them  except
+       npc requires an SPU context save and is therefore very inefficient.
+
+       The contents of these files are:
+
+       =================== ===================================
+       npc                 Next Program Counter
+       decr                SPU Decrementer
+       decr_status         Decrementer Status
+       spu_tag_mask        MFC tag mask for SPU DMA
+       event_mask          Event mask for SPU interrupts
+       srr0                Interrupt Return address register
+       =================== ===================================
+
+
+       The   possible   operations   on   an   open  npc,  decr,  decr_status,
+       spu_tag_mask, event_mask or srr0 file are:
+
+       read(2)
+              When the count supplied to the read call  is  shorter  than  the
+              required  length for the pointer value plus a newline character,
+              subsequent reads from the same file descriptor  will  result  in
+              completing  the string, regardless of changes to the register by
+              a running SPU task.  When a complete string has been  read,  all
+              subsequent read operations will return zero bytes and a new file
+              descriptor needs to be opened to read the value again.
+
+       write(2)
+              A write operation on the file results in setting the register to
+              the  value  given  in  the string. The string is parsed from the
+              beginning to the first non-numeric character or the end  of  the
+              buffer.  Subsequent writes to the same file descriptor overwrite
+              the previous setting.
+
+
+   /fpcr
+       This file gives access to the Floating Point Status and Control  Regis-
+       ter as a four byte long file. The operations on the fpcr file are:
+
+       read(2)
+              If  a  count smaller than four is requested, read returns -1 and
+              sets errno to EINVAL.  Otherwise, a four byte value is placed in
+              the data buffer, containing the current value of the fpcr regis-
+              ter.
+
+       write(2)
+              If a count smaller than four is requested, write returns -1  and
+              sets  errno  to  EINVAL.  Otherwise, a four byte value is copied
+              from the data buffer, updating the value of the fpcr register.
+
+
+   /signal1, /signal2
+       The two signal notification channels of an SPU.  These  are  read-write
+       files  that  operate  on  a 32 bit word.  Writing to one of these files
+       triggers an interrupt on the SPU.  The  value  written  to  the  signal
+       files can be read from the SPU through a channel read or from host user
+       space through the file.  After the value has been read by the  SPU,  it
+       is  reset  to zero.  The possible operations on an open signal1 or sig-
+       nal2 file are:
+
+       read(2)
+              If a count smaller than four is requested, read returns  -1  and
+              sets errno to EINVAL.  Otherwise, a four byte value is placed in
+              the data buffer, containing the current value of  the  specified
+              signal notification register.
+
+       write(2)
+              If  a count smaller than four is requested, write returns -1 and
+              sets errno to EINVAL.  Otherwise, a four byte  value  is  copied
+              from the data buffer, updating the value of the specified signal
+              notification register.  The signal  notification  register  will
+              either be replaced with the input data or will be updated to the
+              bitwise OR of the old value and the input data, depending on the
+              contents  of  the  signal1_type,  or  signal2_type respectively,
+              file.
+
+
+   /signal1_type, /signal2_type
+       These two files change the behavior of the signal1 and signal2  notifi-
+       cation  files.  The  contain  a numerical ASCII string which is read as
+       either "1" or "0".  In mode 0 (overwrite), the  hardware  replaces  the
+       contents of the signal channel with the data that is written to it.  in
+       mode 1 (logical OR), the hardware accumulates the bits that are  subse-
+       quently written to it.  The possible operations on an open signal1_type
+       or signal2_type file are:
+
+       read(2)
+              When the count supplied to the read call  is  shorter  than  the
+              required  length  for the digit plus a newline character, subse-
+              quent reads from the same file descriptor will  result  in  com-
+              pleting  the  string.  When a complete string has been read, all
+              subsequent read operations will return zero bytes and a new file
+              descriptor needs to be opened to read the value again.
+
+       write(2)
+              A write operation on the file results in setting the register to
+              the value given in the string. The string  is  parsed  from  the
+              beginning  to  the first non-numeric character or the end of the
+              buffer.  Subsequent writes to the same file descriptor overwrite
+              the previous setting.
+
+
+Examples
+========
+       /etc/fstab entry
+              none      /spu      spufs     gid=spu   0    0
+
+
+Authors
+=======
+       Arnd  Bergmann  <arndb@de.ibm.com>,  Mark  Nutter <mnutter@us.ibm.com>,
+       Ulrich Weigand <Ulrich.Weigand@de.ibm.com>
+
+See Also
+========
+       capabilities(7), close(2), spu_create(2), spu_run(2), spufs(7)
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..df42106ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=======================
+Squashfs 4.0 Filesystem
+=======================
+
+Squashfs is a compressed read-only filesystem for Linux.
+
+It uses zlib, lz4, lzo, or xz compression to compress files, inodes and
+directories.  Inodes in the system are very small and all blocks are packed to
+minimise data overhead. Block sizes greater than 4K are supported up to a
+maximum of 1Mbytes (default block size 128K).
+
+Squashfs is intended for general read-only filesystem use, for archival
+use (i.e. in cases where a .tar.gz file may be used), and in constrained
+block device/memory systems (e.g. embedded systems) where low overhead is
+needed.
+
+Mailing list: squashfs-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
+Web site: www.squashfs.org
+
+1. Filesystem Features
+----------------------
+
+Squashfs filesystem features versus Cramfs:
+
+============================== 	=========		==========
+				Squashfs		Cramfs
+============================== 	=========		==========
+Max filesystem size		2^64			256 MiB
+Max file size			~ 2 TiB			16 MiB
+Max files			unlimited		unlimited
+Max directories			unlimited		unlimited
+Max entries per directory	unlimited		unlimited
+Max block size			1 MiB			4 KiB
+Metadata compression		yes			no
+Directory indexes		yes			no
+Sparse file support		yes			no
+Tail-end packing (fragments)	yes			no
+Exportable (NFS etc.)		yes			no
+Hard link support		yes			no
+"." and ".." in readdir		yes			no
+Real inode numbers		yes			no
+32-bit uids/gids		yes			no
+File creation time		yes			no
+Xattr support			yes			no
+ACL support			no			no
+============================== 	=========		==========
+
+Squashfs compresses data, inodes and directories.  In addition, inode and
+directory data are highly compacted, and packed on byte boundaries.  Each
+compressed inode is on average 8 bytes in length (the exact length varies on
+file type, i.e. regular file, directory, symbolic link, and block/char device
+inodes have different sizes).
+
+2. Using Squashfs
+-----------------
+
+As squashfs is a read-only filesystem, the mksquashfs program must be used to
+create populated squashfs filesystems.  This and other squashfs utilities
+can be obtained from http://www.squashfs.org.  Usage instructions can be
+obtained from this site also.
+
+The squashfs-tools development tree is now located on kernel.org
+	git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/fs/squashfs/squashfs-tools.git
+
+3. Squashfs Filesystem Design
+-----------------------------
+
+A squashfs filesystem consists of a maximum of nine parts, packed together on a
+byte alignment::
+
+	 ---------------
+	|  superblock 	|
+	|---------------|
+	|  compression  |
+	|    options    |
+	|---------------|
+	|  datablocks   |
+	|  & fragments  |
+	|---------------|
+	|  inode table	|
+	|---------------|
+	|   directory	|
+	|     table     |
+	|---------------|
+	|   fragment	|
+	|    table      |
+	|---------------|
+	|    export     |
+	|    table      |
+	|---------------|
+	|    uid/gid	|
+	|  lookup table	|
+	|---------------|
+	|     xattr     |
+	|     table	|
+	 ---------------
+
+Compressed data blocks are written to the filesystem as files are read from
+the source directory, and checked for duplicates.  Once all file data has been
+written the completed inode, directory, fragment, export, uid/gid lookup and
+xattr tables are written.
+
+3.1 Compression options
+-----------------------
+
+Compressors can optionally support compression specific options (e.g.
+dictionary size).  If non-default compression options have been used, then
+these are stored here.
+
+3.2 Inodes
+----------
+
+Metadata (inodes and directories) are compressed in 8Kbyte blocks.  Each
+compressed block is prefixed by a two byte length, the top bit is set if the
+block is uncompressed.  A block will be uncompressed if the -noI option is set,
+or if the compressed block was larger than the uncompressed block.
+
+Inodes are packed into the metadata blocks, and are not aligned to block
+boundaries, therefore inodes overlap compressed blocks.  Inodes are identified
+by a 48-bit number which encodes the location of the compressed metadata block
+containing the inode, and the byte offset into that block where the inode is
+placed (<block, offset>).
+
+To maximise compression there are different inodes for each file type
+(regular file, directory, device, etc.), the inode contents and length
+varying with the type.
+
+To further maximise compression, two types of regular file inode and
+directory inode are defined: inodes optimised for frequently occurring
+regular files and directories, and extended types where extra
+information has to be stored.
+
+3.3 Directories
+---------------
+
+Like inodes, directories are packed into compressed metadata blocks, stored
+in a directory table.  Directories are accessed using the start address of
+the metablock containing the directory and the offset into the
+decompressed block (<block, offset>).
+
+Directories are organised in a slightly complex way, and are not simply
+a list of file names.  The organisation takes advantage of the
+fact that (in most cases) the inodes of the files will be in the same
+compressed metadata block, and therefore, can share the start block.
+Directories are therefore organised in a two level list, a directory
+header containing the shared start block value, and a sequence of directory
+entries, each of which share the shared start block.  A new directory header
+is written once/if the inode start block changes.  The directory
+header/directory entry list is repeated as many times as necessary.
+
+Directories are sorted, and can contain a directory index to speed up
+file lookup.  Directory indexes store one entry per metablock, each entry
+storing the index/filename mapping to the first directory header
+in each metadata block.  Directories are sorted in alphabetical order,
+and at lookup the index is scanned linearly looking for the first filename
+alphabetically larger than the filename being looked up.  At this point the
+location of the metadata block the filename is in has been found.
+The general idea of the index is to ensure only one metadata block needs to be
+decompressed to do a lookup irrespective of the length of the directory.
+This scheme has the advantage that it doesn't require extra memory overhead
+and doesn't require much extra storage on disk.
+
+3.4 File data
+-------------
+
+Regular files consist of a sequence of contiguous compressed blocks, and/or a
+compressed fragment block (tail-end packed block).   The compressed size
+of each datablock is stored in a block list contained within the
+file inode.
+
+To speed up access to datablocks when reading 'large' files (256 Mbytes or
+larger), the code implements an index cache that caches the mapping from
+block index to datablock location on disk.
+
+The index cache allows Squashfs to handle large files (up to 1.75 TiB) while
+retaining a simple and space-efficient block list on disk.  The cache
+is split into slots, caching up to eight 224 GiB files (128 KiB blocks).
+Larger files use multiple slots, with 1.75 TiB files using all 8 slots.
+The index cache is designed to be memory efficient, and by default uses
+16 KiB.
+
+3.5 Fragment lookup table
+-------------------------
+
+Regular files can contain a fragment index which is mapped to a fragment
+location on disk and compressed size using a fragment lookup table.  This
+fragment lookup table is itself stored compressed into metadata blocks.
+A second index table is used to locate these.  This second index table for
+speed of access (and because it is small) is read at mount time and cached
+in memory.
+
+3.6 Uid/gid lookup table
+------------------------
+
+For space efficiency regular files store uid and gid indexes, which are
+converted to 32-bit uids/gids using an id look up table.  This table is
+stored compressed into metadata blocks.  A second index table is used to
+locate these.  This second index table for speed of access (and because it
+is small) is read at mount time and cached in memory.
+
+3.7 Export table
+----------------
+
+To enable Squashfs filesystems to be exportable (via NFS etc.) filesystems
+can optionally (disabled with the -no-exports Mksquashfs option) contain
+an inode number to inode disk location lookup table.  This is required to
+enable Squashfs to map inode numbers passed in filehandles to the inode
+location on disk, which is necessary when the export code reinstantiates
+expired/flushed inodes.
+
+This table is stored compressed into metadata blocks.  A second index table is
+used to locate these.  This second index table for speed of access (and because
+it is small) is read at mount time and cached in memory.
+
+3.8 Xattr table
+---------------
+
+The xattr table contains extended attributes for each inode.  The xattrs
+for each inode are stored in a list, each list entry containing a type,
+name and value field.  The type field encodes the xattr prefix
+("user.", "trusted." etc) and it also encodes how the name/value fields
+should be interpreted.  Currently the type indicates whether the value
+is stored inline (in which case the value field contains the xattr value),
+or if it is stored out of line (in which case the value field stores a
+reference to where the actual value is stored).  This allows large values
+to be stored out of line improving scanning and lookup performance and it
+also allows values to be de-duplicated, the value being stored once, and
+all other occurrences holding an out of line reference to that value.
+
+The xattr lists are packed into compressed 8K metadata blocks.
+To reduce overhead in inodes, rather than storing the on-disk
+location of the xattr list inside each inode, a 32-bit xattr id
+is stored.  This xattr id is mapped into the location of the xattr
+list using a second xattr id lookup table.
+
+4. TODOs and Outstanding Issues
+-------------------------------
+
+4.1 TODO list
+-------------
+
+Implement ACL support.
+
+4.2 Squashfs Internal Cache
+---------------------------
+
+Blocks in Squashfs are compressed.  To avoid repeatedly decompressing
+recently accessed data Squashfs uses two small metadata and fragment caches.
+
+The cache is not used for file datablocks, these are decompressed and cached in
+the page-cache in the normal way.  The cache is used to temporarily cache
+fragment and metadata blocks which have been read as a result of a metadata
+(i.e. inode or directory) or fragment access.  Because metadata and fragments
+are packed together into blocks (to gain greater compression) the read of a
+particular piece of metadata or fragment will retrieve other metadata/fragments
+which have been packed with it, these because of locality-of-reference may be
+read in the near future. Temporarily caching them ensures they are available
+for near future access without requiring an additional read and decompress.
+
+In the future this internal cache may be replaced with an implementation which
+uses the kernel page cache.  Because the page cache operates on page sized
+units this may introduce additional complexity in terms of locking and
+associated race conditions.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8bba676b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,415 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================================================
+sysfs - _The_ filesystem for exporting kernel objects
+=====================================================
+
+Patrick Mochel	<mochel@osdl.org>
+
+Mike Murphy <mamurph@cs.clemson.edu>
+
+:Revised:    16 August 2011
+:Original:   10 January 2003
+
+
+What it is:
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+sysfs is a ram-based filesystem initially based on ramfs. It provides
+a means to export kernel data structures, their attributes, and the
+linkages between them to userspace.
+
+sysfs is tied inherently to the kobject infrastructure. Please read
+Documentation/core-api/kobject.rst for more information concerning the kobject
+interface.
+
+
+Using sysfs
+~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+sysfs is always compiled in if CONFIG_SYSFS is defined. You can access
+it by doing::
+
+    mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
+
+
+Directory Creation
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+For every kobject that is registered with the system, a directory is
+created for it in sysfs. That directory is created as a subdirectory
+of the kobject's parent, expressing internal object hierarchies to
+userspace. Top-level directories in sysfs represent the common
+ancestors of object hierarchies; i.e. the subsystems the objects
+belong to.
+
+Sysfs internally stores a pointer to the kobject that implements a
+directory in the kernfs_node object associated with the directory. In
+the past this kobject pointer has been used by sysfs to do reference
+counting directly on the kobject whenever the file is opened or closed.
+With the current sysfs implementation the kobject reference count is
+only modified directly by the function sysfs_schedule_callback().
+
+
+Attributes
+~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Attributes can be exported for kobjects in the form of regular files in
+the filesystem. Sysfs forwards file I/O operations to methods defined
+for the attributes, providing a means to read and write kernel
+attributes.
+
+Attributes should be ASCII text files, preferably with only one value
+per file. It is noted that it may not be efficient to contain only one
+value per file, so it is socially acceptable to express an array of
+values of the same type.
+
+Mixing types, expressing multiple lines of data, and doing fancy
+formatting of data is heavily frowned upon. Doing these things may get
+you publicly humiliated and your code rewritten without notice.
+
+
+An attribute definition is simply::
+
+    struct attribute {
+	    char                    * name;
+	    struct module		*owner;
+	    umode_t                 mode;
+    };
+
+
+    int sysfs_create_file(struct kobject * kobj, const struct attribute * attr);
+    void sysfs_remove_file(struct kobject * kobj, const struct attribute * attr);
+
+
+A bare attribute contains no means to read or write the value of the
+attribute. Subsystems are encouraged to define their own attribute
+structure and wrapper functions for adding and removing attributes for
+a specific object type.
+
+For example, the driver model defines struct device_attribute like::
+
+    struct device_attribute {
+	    struct attribute	attr;
+	    ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			    char *buf);
+	    ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			    const char *buf, size_t count);
+    };
+
+    int device_create_file(struct device *, const struct device_attribute *);
+    void device_remove_file(struct device *, const struct device_attribute *);
+
+It also defines this helper for defining device attributes::
+
+    #define DEVICE_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store) \
+    struct device_attribute dev_attr_##_name = __ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store)
+
+For example, declaring::
+
+    static DEVICE_ATTR(foo, S_IWUSR | S_IRUGO, show_foo, store_foo);
+
+is equivalent to doing::
+
+    static struct device_attribute dev_attr_foo = {
+	    .attr = {
+		    .name = "foo",
+		    .mode = S_IWUSR | S_IRUGO,
+	    },
+	    .show = show_foo,
+	    .store = store_foo,
+    };
+
+Note as stated in include/linux/kernel.h "OTHER_WRITABLE?  Generally
+considered a bad idea." so trying to set a sysfs file writable for
+everyone will fail reverting to RO mode for "Others".
+
+For the common cases sysfs.h provides convenience macros to make
+defining attributes easier as well as making code more concise and
+readable. The above case could be shortened to:
+
+static struct device_attribute dev_attr_foo = __ATTR_RW(foo);
+
+the list of helpers available to define your wrapper function is:
+
+__ATTR_RO(name):
+		 assumes default name_show and mode 0444
+__ATTR_WO(name):
+		 assumes a name_store only and is restricted to mode
+                 0200 that is root write access only.
+__ATTR_RO_MODE(name, mode):
+	         fore more restrictive RO access currently
+                 only use case is the EFI System Resource Table
+                 (see drivers/firmware/efi/esrt.c)
+__ATTR_RW(name):
+	         assumes default name_show, name_store and setting
+                 mode to 0644.
+__ATTR_NULL:
+	         which sets the name to NULL and is used as end of list
+                 indicator (see: kernel/workqueue.c)
+
+Subsystem-Specific Callbacks
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+When a subsystem defines a new attribute type, it must implement a
+set of sysfs operations for forwarding read and write calls to the
+show and store methods of the attribute owners::
+
+    struct sysfs_ops {
+	    ssize_t (*show)(struct kobject *, struct attribute *, char *);
+	    ssize_t (*store)(struct kobject *, struct attribute *, const char *, size_t);
+    };
+
+[ Subsystems should have already defined a struct kobj_type as a
+descriptor for this type, which is where the sysfs_ops pointer is
+stored. See the kobject documentation for more information. ]
+
+When a file is read or written, sysfs calls the appropriate method
+for the type. The method then translates the generic struct kobject
+and struct attribute pointers to the appropriate pointer types, and
+calls the associated methods.
+
+
+To illustrate::
+
+    #define to_dev_attr(_attr) container_of(_attr, struct device_attribute, attr)
+
+    static ssize_t dev_attr_show(struct kobject *kobj, struct attribute *attr,
+				char *buf)
+    {
+	    struct device_attribute *dev_attr = to_dev_attr(attr);
+	    struct device *dev = kobj_to_dev(kobj);
+	    ssize_t ret = -EIO;
+
+	    if (dev_attr->show)
+		    ret = dev_attr->show(dev, dev_attr, buf);
+	    if (ret >= (ssize_t)PAGE_SIZE) {
+		    printk("dev_attr_show: %pS returned bad count\n",
+				    dev_attr->show);
+	    }
+	    return ret;
+    }
+
+
+
+Reading/Writing Attribute Data
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+To read or write attributes, show() or store() methods must be
+specified when declaring the attribute. The method types should be as
+simple as those defined for device attributes::
+
+    ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, char *buf);
+    ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+		    const char *buf, size_t count);
+
+IOW, they should take only an object, an attribute, and a buffer as parameters.
+
+
+sysfs allocates a buffer of size (PAGE_SIZE) and passes it to the
+method. Sysfs will call the method exactly once for each read or
+write. This forces the following behavior on the method
+implementations:
+
+- On read(2), the show() method should fill the entire buffer.
+  Recall that an attribute should only be exporting one value, or an
+  array of similar values, so this shouldn't be that expensive.
+
+  This allows userspace to do partial reads and forward seeks
+  arbitrarily over the entire file at will. If userspace seeks back to
+  zero or does a pread(2) with an offset of '0' the show() method will
+  be called again, rearmed, to fill the buffer.
+
+- On write(2), sysfs expects the entire buffer to be passed during the
+  first write. Sysfs then passes the entire buffer to the store() method.
+  A terminating null is added after the data on stores. This makes
+  functions like sysfs_streq() safe to use.
+
+  When writing sysfs files, userspace processes should first read the
+  entire file, modify the values it wishes to change, then write the
+  entire buffer back.
+
+  Attribute method implementations should operate on an identical
+  buffer when reading and writing values.
+
+Other notes:
+
+- Writing causes the show() method to be rearmed regardless of current
+  file position.
+
+- The buffer will always be PAGE_SIZE bytes in length. On i386, this
+  is 4096.
+
+- show() methods should return the number of bytes printed into the
+  buffer.
+
+- show() should only use sysfs_emit() or sysfs_emit_at() when formatting
+  the value to be returned to user space.
+
+- store() should return the number of bytes used from the buffer. If the
+  entire buffer has been used, just return the count argument.
+
+- show() or store() can always return errors. If a bad value comes
+  through, be sure to return an error.
+
+- The object passed to the methods will be pinned in memory via sysfs
+  referencing counting its embedded object. However, the physical
+  entity (e.g. device) the object represents may not be present. Be
+  sure to have a way to check this, if necessary.
+
+
+A very simple (and naive) implementation of a device attribute is::
+
+    static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			    char *buf)
+    {
+	    return sysfs_emit(buf, "%s\n", dev->name);
+    }
+
+    static ssize_t store_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			    const char *buf, size_t count)
+    {
+	    snprintf(dev->name, sizeof(dev->name), "%.*s",
+		    (int)min(count, sizeof(dev->name) - 1), buf);
+	    return count;
+    }
+
+    static DEVICE_ATTR(name, S_IRUGO, show_name, store_name);
+
+
+(Note that the real implementation doesn't allow userspace to set the
+name for a device.)
+
+
+Top Level Directory Layout
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The sysfs directory arrangement exposes the relationship of kernel
+data structures.
+
+The top level sysfs directory looks like::
+
+    block/
+    bus/
+    class/
+    dev/
+    devices/
+    firmware/
+    net/
+    fs/
+
+devices/ contains a filesystem representation of the device tree. It maps
+directly to the internal kernel device tree, which is a hierarchy of
+struct device.
+
+bus/ contains flat directory layout of the various bus types in the
+kernel. Each bus's directory contains two subdirectories::
+
+	devices/
+	drivers/
+
+devices/ contains symlinks for each device discovered in the system
+that point to the device's directory under root/.
+
+drivers/ contains a directory for each device driver that is loaded
+for devices on that particular bus (this assumes that drivers do not
+span multiple bus types).
+
+fs/ contains a directory for some filesystems.  Currently each
+filesystem wanting to export attributes must create its own hierarchy
+below fs/ (see ./fuse.txt for an example).
+
+dev/ contains two directories char/ and block/. Inside these two
+directories there are symlinks named <major>:<minor>.  These symlinks
+point to the sysfs directory for the given device.  /sys/dev provides a
+quick way to lookup the sysfs interface for a device from the result of
+a stat(2) operation.
+
+More information can driver-model specific features can be found in
+Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/.
+
+
+TODO: Finish this section.
+
+
+Current Interfaces
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The following interface layers currently exist in sysfs:
+
+
+devices (include/linux/device.h)
+--------------------------------
+Structure::
+
+    struct device_attribute {
+	    struct attribute	attr;
+	    ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			    char *buf);
+	    ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
+			    const char *buf, size_t count);
+    };
+
+Declaring::
+
+    DEVICE_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store);
+
+Creation/Removal::
+
+    int device_create_file(struct device *dev, const struct device_attribute * attr);
+    void device_remove_file(struct device *dev, const struct device_attribute * attr);
+
+
+bus drivers (include/linux/device.h)
+------------------------------------
+Structure::
+
+    struct bus_attribute {
+	    struct attribute        attr;
+	    ssize_t (*show)(struct bus_type *, char * buf);
+	    ssize_t (*store)(struct bus_type *, const char * buf, size_t count);
+    };
+
+Declaring::
+
+    static BUS_ATTR_RW(name);
+    static BUS_ATTR_RO(name);
+    static BUS_ATTR_WO(name);
+
+Creation/Removal::
+
+    int bus_create_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
+    void bus_remove_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
+
+
+device drivers (include/linux/device.h)
+---------------------------------------
+
+Structure::
+
+    struct driver_attribute {
+	    struct attribute        attr;
+	    ssize_t (*show)(struct device_driver *, char * buf);
+	    ssize_t (*store)(struct device_driver *, const char * buf,
+			    size_t count);
+    };
+
+Declaring::
+
+    DRIVER_ATTR_RO(_name)
+    DRIVER_ATTR_RW(_name)
+
+Creation/Removal::
+
+    int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+    void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+
+
+Documentation
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The sysfs directory structure and the attributes in each directory define an
+ABI between the kernel and user space. As for any ABI, it is important that
+this ABI is stable and properly documented. All new sysfs attributes must be
+documented in Documentation/ABI. See also Documentation/ABI/README for more
+information.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysv-fs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/sysv-fs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..89e40911a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysv-fs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==================
+SystemV Filesystem
+==================
+
+It implements all of
+  - Xenix FS,
+  - SystemV/386 FS,
+  - Coherent FS.
+
+To install:
+
+* Answer the 'System V and Coherent filesystem support' question with 'y'
+  when configuring the kernel.
+* To mount a disk or a partition, use::
+
+    mount [-r] -t sysv device mountpoint
+
+  The file system type names::
+
+               -t sysv
+               -t xenix
+               -t coherent
+
+  may be used interchangeably, but the last two will eventually disappear.
+
+Bugs in the present implementation:
+
+- Coherent FS:
+
+  - The "free list interleave" n:m is currently ignored.
+  - Only file systems with no filesystem name and no pack name are recognized.
+    (See Coherent "man mkfs" for a description of these features.)
+
+- SystemV Release 2 FS:
+
+  The superblock is only searched in the blocks 9, 15, 18, which
+  corresponds to the beginning of track 1 on floppy disks. No support
+  for this FS on hard disk yet.
+
+
+These filesystems are rather similar. Here is a comparison with Minix FS:
+
+* Linux fdisk reports on partitions
+
+  - Minix FS     0x81 Linux/Minix
+  - Xenix FS     ??
+  - SystemV FS   ??
+  - Coherent FS  0x08 AIX bootable
+
+* Size of a block or zone (data allocation unit on disk)
+
+  - Minix FS     1024
+  - Xenix FS     1024 (also 512 ??)
+  - SystemV FS   1024 (also 512 and 2048)
+  - Coherent FS   512
+
+* General layout: all have one boot block, one super block and
+  separate areas for inodes and for directories/data.
+  On SystemV Release 2 FS (e.g. Microport) the first track is reserved and
+  all the block numbers (including the super block) are offset by one track.
+
+* Byte ordering of "short" (16 bit entities) on disk:
+
+  - Minix FS     little endian  0 1
+  - Xenix FS     little endian  0 1
+  - SystemV FS   little endian  0 1
+  - Coherent FS  little endian  0 1
+
+  Of course, this affects only the file system, not the data of files on it!
+
+* Byte ordering of "long" (32 bit entities) on disk:
+
+  - Minix FS     little endian  0 1 2 3
+  - Xenix FS     little endian  0 1 2 3
+  - SystemV FS   little endian  0 1 2 3
+  - Coherent FS  PDP-11         2 3 0 1
+
+  Of course, this affects only the file system, not the data of files on it!
+
+* Inode on disk: "short", 0 means non-existent, the root dir ino is:
+
+  =================================  ==
+  Minix FS                            1
+  Xenix FS, SystemV FS, Coherent FS   2
+  =================================  ==
+
+* Maximum number of hard links to a file:
+
+  ===========  =========
+  Minix FS     250
+  Xenix FS     ??
+  SystemV FS   ??
+  Coherent FS  >=10000
+  ===========  =========
+
+* Free inode management:
+
+  - Minix FS
+      a bitmap
+  - Xenix FS, SystemV FS, Coherent FS
+      There is a cache of a certain number of free inodes in the super-block.
+      When it is exhausted, new free inodes are found using a linear search.
+
+* Free block management:
+
+  - Minix FS
+      a bitmap
+  - Xenix FS, SystemV FS, Coherent FS
+      Free blocks are organized in a "free list". Maybe a misleading term,
+      since it is not true that every free block contains a pointer to
+      the next free block. Rather, the free blocks are organized in chunks
+      of limited size, and every now and then a free block contains pointers
+      to the free blocks pertaining to the next chunk; the first of these
+      contains pointers and so on. The list terminates with a "block number"
+      0 on Xenix FS and SystemV FS, with a block zeroed out on Coherent FS.
+
+* Super-block location:
+
+  ===========  ==========================
+  Minix FS     block 1 = bytes 1024..2047
+  Xenix FS     block 1 = bytes 1024..2047
+  SystemV FS   bytes 512..1023
+  Coherent FS  block 1 = bytes 512..1023
+  ===========  ==========================
+
+* Super-block layout:
+
+  - Minix FS::
+
+                    unsigned short s_ninodes;
+                    unsigned short s_nzones;
+                    unsigned short s_imap_blocks;
+                    unsigned short s_zmap_blocks;
+                    unsigned short s_firstdatazone;
+                    unsigned short s_log_zone_size;
+                    unsigned long s_max_size;
+                    unsigned short s_magic;
+
+  - Xenix FS, SystemV FS, Coherent FS::
+
+                    unsigned short s_firstdatazone;
+                    unsigned long  s_nzones;
+                    unsigned short s_fzone_count;
+                    unsigned long  s_fzones[NICFREE];
+                    unsigned short s_finode_count;
+                    unsigned short s_finodes[NICINOD];
+                    char           s_flock;
+                    char           s_ilock;
+                    char           s_modified;
+                    char           s_rdonly;
+                    unsigned long  s_time;
+                    short          s_dinfo[4]; -- SystemV FS only
+                    unsigned long  s_free_zones;
+                    unsigned short s_free_inodes;
+                    short          s_dinfo[4]; -- Xenix FS only
+                    unsigned short s_interleave_m,s_interleave_n; -- Coherent FS only
+                    char           s_fname[6];
+                    char           s_fpack[6];
+
+    then they differ considerably:
+
+        Xenix FS::
+
+                    char           s_clean;
+                    char           s_fill[371];
+                    long           s_magic;
+                    long           s_type;
+
+        SystemV FS::
+
+                    long           s_fill[12 or 14];
+                    long           s_state;
+                    long           s_magic;
+                    long           s_type;
+
+        Coherent FS::
+
+                    unsigned long  s_unique;
+
+    Note that Coherent FS has no magic.
+
+* Inode layout:
+
+  - Minix FS::
+
+                    unsigned short i_mode;
+                    unsigned short i_uid;
+                    unsigned long  i_size;
+                    unsigned long  i_time;
+                    unsigned char  i_gid;
+                    unsigned char  i_nlinks;
+                    unsigned short i_zone[7+1+1];
+
+  - Xenix FS, SystemV FS, Coherent FS::
+
+                    unsigned short i_mode;
+                    unsigned short i_nlink;
+                    unsigned short i_uid;
+                    unsigned short i_gid;
+                    unsigned long  i_size;
+                    unsigned char  i_zone[3*(10+1+1+1)];
+                    unsigned long  i_atime;
+                    unsigned long  i_mtime;
+                    unsigned long  i_ctime;
+
+
+* Regular file data blocks are organized as
+
+  - Minix FS:
+
+             - 7 direct blocks
+	     - 1 indirect block (pointers to blocks)
+             - 1 double-indirect block (pointer to pointers to blocks)
+
+  - Xenix FS, SystemV FS, Coherent FS:
+
+             - 10 direct blocks
+             -  1 indirect block (pointers to blocks)
+             -  1 double-indirect block (pointer to pointers to blocks)
+             -  1 triple-indirect block (pointer to pointers to pointers to blocks)
+
+
+  ===========  ==========   ================
+               Inode size   inodes per block
+  ===========  ==========   ================
+  Minix FS        32        32
+  Xenix FS        64        16
+  SystemV FS      64        16
+  Coherent FS     64        8
+  ===========  ==========   ================
+
+* Directory entry on disk
+
+  - Minix FS::
+
+                    unsigned short inode;
+                    char name[14/30];
+
+  - Xenix FS, SystemV FS, Coherent FS::
+
+                    unsigned short inode;
+                    char name[14];
+
+  ===========    ==============    =====================
+                 Dir entry size    dir entries per block
+  ===========    ==============    =====================
+  Minix FS       16/32             64/32
+  Xenix FS       16                64
+  SystemV FS     16                64
+  Coherent FS    16                32
+  ===========    ==============    =====================
+
+* How to implement symbolic links such that the host fsck doesn't scream:
+
+  - Minix FS     normal
+  - Xenix FS     kludge: as regular files with  chmod 1000
+  - SystemV FS   ??
+  - Coherent FS  kludge: as regular files with  chmod 1000
+
+
+Notation: We often speak of a "block" but mean a zone (the allocation unit)
+and not the disk driver's notion of "block".
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0408c2457
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====
+Tmpfs
+=====
+
+Tmpfs is a file system which keeps all of its files in virtual memory.
+
+
+Everything in tmpfs is temporary in the sense that no files will be
+created on your hard drive. If you unmount a tmpfs instance,
+everything stored therein is lost.
+
+tmpfs puts everything into the kernel internal caches and grows and
+shrinks to accommodate the files it contains and is able to swap
+unneeded pages out to swap space. It has maximum size limits which can
+be adjusted on the fly via 'mount -o remount ...'
+
+If you compare it to ramfs (which was the template to create tmpfs)
+you gain swapping and limit checking. Another similar thing is the RAM
+disk (/dev/ram*), which simulates a fixed size hard disk in physical
+RAM, where you have to create an ordinary filesystem on top. Ramdisks
+cannot swap and you do not have the possibility to resize them.
+
+Since tmpfs lives completely in the page cache and on swap, all tmpfs
+pages will be shown as "Shmem" in /proc/meminfo and "Shared" in
+free(1). Notice that these counters also include shared memory
+(shmem, see ipcs(1)). The most reliable way to get the count is
+using df(1) and du(1).
+
+tmpfs has the following uses:
+
+1) There is always a kernel internal mount which you will not see at
+   all. This is used for shared anonymous mappings and SYSV shared
+   memory.
+
+   This mount does not depend on CONFIG_TMPFS. If CONFIG_TMPFS is not
+   set, the user visible part of tmpfs is not built. But the internal
+   mechanisms are always present.
+
+2) glibc 2.2 and above expects tmpfs to be mounted at /dev/shm for
+   POSIX shared memory (shm_open, shm_unlink). Adding the following
+   line to /etc/fstab should take care of this::
+
+	tmpfs	/dev/shm	tmpfs	defaults	0 0
+
+   Remember to create the directory that you intend to mount tmpfs on
+   if necessary.
+
+   This mount is _not_ needed for SYSV shared memory. The internal
+   mount is used for that. (In the 2.3 kernel versions it was
+   necessary to mount the predecessor of tmpfs (shm fs) to use SYSV
+   shared memory.)
+
+3) Some people (including me) find it very convenient to mount it
+   e.g. on /tmp and /var/tmp and have a big swap partition. And now
+   loop mounts of tmpfs files do work, so mkinitrd shipped by most
+   distributions should succeed with a tmpfs /tmp.
+
+4) And probably a lot more I do not know about :-)
+
+
+tmpfs has three mount options for sizing:
+
+=========  ============================================================
+size       The limit of allocated bytes for this tmpfs instance. The
+           default is half of your physical RAM without swap. If you
+           oversize your tmpfs instances the machine will deadlock
+           since the OOM handler will not be able to free that memory.
+nr_blocks  The same as size, but in blocks of PAGE_SIZE.
+nr_inodes  The maximum number of inodes for this instance. The default
+           is half of the number of your physical RAM pages, or (on a
+           machine with highmem) the number of lowmem RAM pages,
+           whichever is the lower.
+=========  ============================================================
+
+These parameters accept a suffix k, m or g for kilo, mega and giga and
+can be changed on remount.  The size parameter also accepts a suffix %
+to limit this tmpfs instance to that percentage of your physical RAM:
+the default, when neither size nor nr_blocks is specified, is size=50%
+
+If nr_blocks=0 (or size=0), blocks will not be limited in that instance;
+if nr_inodes=0, inodes will not be limited.  It is generally unwise to
+mount with such options, since it allows any user with write access to
+use up all the memory on the machine; but enhances the scalability of
+that instance in a system with many CPUs making intensive use of it.
+
+
+tmpfs has a mount option to set the NUMA memory allocation policy for
+all files in that instance (if CONFIG_NUMA is enabled) - which can be
+adjusted on the fly via 'mount -o remount ...'
+
+======================== ==============================================
+mpol=default             use the process allocation policy
+                         (see set_mempolicy(2))
+mpol=prefer:Node         prefers to allocate memory from the given Node
+mpol=bind:NodeList       allocates memory only from nodes in NodeList
+mpol=interleave          prefers to allocate from each node in turn
+mpol=interleave:NodeList allocates from each node of NodeList in turn
+mpol=local		 prefers to allocate memory from the local node
+======================== ==============================================
+
+NodeList format is a comma-separated list of decimal numbers and ranges,
+a range being two hyphen-separated decimal numbers, the smallest and
+largest node numbers in the range.  For example, mpol=bind:0-3,5,7,9-15
+
+A memory policy with a valid NodeList will be saved, as specified, for
+use at file creation time.  When a task allocates a file in the file
+system, the mount option memory policy will be applied with a NodeList,
+if any, modified by the calling task's cpuset constraints
+[See Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v1/cpusets.rst] and any optional flags,
+listed below.  If the resulting NodeLists is the empty set, the effective
+memory policy for the file will revert to "default" policy.
+
+NUMA memory allocation policies have optional flags that can be used in
+conjunction with their modes.  These optional flags can be specified
+when tmpfs is mounted by appending them to the mode before the NodeList.
+See Documentation/admin-guide/mm/numa_memory_policy.rst for a list of
+all available memory allocation policy mode flags and their effect on
+memory policy.
+
+::
+
+	=static		is equivalent to	MPOL_F_STATIC_NODES
+	=relative	is equivalent to	MPOL_F_RELATIVE_NODES
+
+For example, mpol=bind=static:NodeList, is the equivalent of an
+allocation policy of MPOL_BIND | MPOL_F_STATIC_NODES.
+
+Note that trying to mount a tmpfs with an mpol option will fail if the
+running kernel does not support NUMA; and will fail if its nodelist
+specifies a node which is not online.  If your system relies on that
+tmpfs being mounted, but from time to time runs a kernel built without
+NUMA capability (perhaps a safe recovery kernel), or with fewer nodes
+online, then it is advisable to omit the mpol option from automatic
+mount options.  It can be added later, when the tmpfs is already mounted
+on MountPoint, by 'mount -o remount,mpol=Policy:NodeList MountPoint'.
+
+
+To specify the initial root directory you can use the following mount
+options:
+
+====	==================================
+mode	The permissions as an octal number
+uid	The user id
+gid	The group id
+====	==================================
+
+These options do not have any effect on remount. You can change these
+parameters with chmod(1), chown(1) and chgrp(1) on a mounted filesystem.
+
+
+tmpfs has a mount option to select whether it will wrap at 32- or 64-bit inode
+numbers:
+
+=======   ========================
+inode64   Use 64-bit inode numbers
+inode32   Use 32-bit inode numbers
+=======   ========================
+
+On a 32-bit kernel, inode32 is implicit, and inode64 is refused at mount time.
+On a 64-bit kernel, CONFIG_TMPFS_INODE64 sets the default.  inode64 avoids the
+possibility of multiple files with the same inode number on a single device;
+but risks glibc failing with EOVERFLOW once 33-bit inode numbers are reached -
+if a long-lived tmpfs is accessed by 32-bit applications so ancient that
+opening a file larger than 2GiB fails with EINVAL.
+
+
+So 'mount -t tmpfs -o size=10G,nr_inodes=10k,mode=700 tmpfs /mytmpfs'
+will give you tmpfs instance on /mytmpfs which can allocate 10GB
+RAM/SWAP in 10240 inodes and it is only accessible by root.
+
+
+:Author:
+   Christoph Rohland <cr@sap.com>, 1.12.01
+:Updated:
+   Hugh Dickins, 4 June 2007
+:Updated:
+   KOSAKI Motohiro, 16 Mar 2010
+:Updated:
+   Chris Down, 13 July 2020
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs-authentication.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs-authentication.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5210aed2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs-authentication.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,448 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. UBIFS Authentication
+.. sigma star gmbh
+.. 2018
+
+============================
+UBIFS Authentication Support
+============================
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+UBIFS utilizes the fscrypt framework to provide confidentiality for file
+contents and file names. This prevents attacks where an attacker is able to
+read contents of the filesystem on a single point in time. A classic example
+is a lost smartphone where the attacker is unable to read personal data stored
+on the device without the filesystem decryption key.
+
+At the current state, UBIFS encryption however does not prevent attacks where
+the attacker is able to modify the filesystem contents and the user uses the
+device afterwards. In such a scenario an attacker can modify filesystem
+contents arbitrarily without the user noticing. One example is to modify a
+binary to perform a malicious action when executed [DMC-CBC-ATTACK]. Since
+most of the filesystem metadata of UBIFS is stored in plain, this makes it
+fairly easy to swap files and replace their contents.
+
+Other full disk encryption systems like dm-crypt cover all filesystem metadata,
+which makes such kinds of attacks more complicated, but not impossible.
+Especially, if the attacker is given access to the device multiple points in
+time. For dm-crypt and other filesystems that build upon the Linux block IO
+layer, the dm-integrity or dm-verity subsystems [DM-INTEGRITY, DM-VERITY]
+can be used to get full data authentication at the block layer.
+These can also be combined with dm-crypt [CRYPTSETUP2].
+
+This document describes an approach to get file contents _and_ full metadata
+authentication for UBIFS. Since UBIFS uses fscrypt for file contents and file
+name encryption, the authentication system could be tied into fscrypt such that
+existing features like key derivation can be utilized. It should however also
+be possible to use UBIFS authentication without using encryption.
+
+
+MTD, UBI & UBIFS
+----------------
+
+On Linux, the MTD (Memory Technology Devices) subsystem provides a uniform
+interface to access raw flash devices. One of the more prominent subsystems that
+work on top of MTD is UBI (Unsorted Block Images). It provides volume management
+for flash devices and is thus somewhat similar to LVM for block devices. In
+addition, it deals with flash-specific wear-leveling and transparent I/O error
+handling. UBI offers logical erase blocks (LEBs) to the layers on top of it
+and maps them transparently to physical erase blocks (PEBs) on the flash.
+
+UBIFS is a filesystem for raw flash which operates on top of UBI. Thus, wear
+leveling and some flash specifics are left to UBI, while UBIFS focuses on
+scalability, performance and recoverability.
+
+::
+
+	+------------+ +*******+ +-----------+ +-----+
+	|            | * UBIFS * | UBI-BLOCK | | ... |
+	| JFFS/JFFS2 | +*******+ +-----------+ +-----+
+	|            | +-----------------------------+ +-----------+ +-----+
+	|            | |              UBI            | | MTD-BLOCK | | ... |
+	+------------+ +-----------------------------+ +-----------+ +-----+
+	+------------------------------------------------------------------+
+	|                  MEMORY TECHNOLOGY DEVICES (MTD)                 |
+	+------------------------------------------------------------------+
+	+-----------------------------+ +--------------------------+ +-----+
+	|         NAND DRIVERS        | |        NOR DRIVERS       | | ... |
+	+-----------------------------+ +--------------------------+ +-----+
+
+            Figure 1: Linux kernel subsystems for dealing with raw flash
+
+
+
+Internally, UBIFS maintains multiple data structures which are persisted on
+the flash:
+
+- *Index*: an on-flash B+ tree where the leaf nodes contain filesystem data
+- *Journal*: an additional data structure to collect FS changes before updating
+  the on-flash index and reduce flash wear.
+- *Tree Node Cache (TNC)*: an in-memory B+ tree that reflects the current FS
+  state to avoid frequent flash reads. It is basically the in-memory
+  representation of the index, but contains additional attributes.
+- *LEB property tree (LPT)*: an on-flash B+ tree for free space accounting per
+  UBI LEB.
+
+In the remainder of this section we will cover the on-flash UBIFS data
+structures in more detail. The TNC is of less importance here since it is never
+persisted onto the flash directly. More details on UBIFS can also be found in
+[UBIFS-WP].
+
+
+UBIFS Index & Tree Node Cache
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Basic on-flash UBIFS entities are called *nodes*. UBIFS knows different types
+of nodes. Eg. data nodes (``struct ubifs_data_node``) which store chunks of file
+contents or inode nodes (``struct ubifs_ino_node``) which represent VFS inodes.
+Almost all types of nodes share a common header (``ubifs_ch``) containing basic
+information like node type, node length, a sequence number, etc. (see
+``fs/ubifs/ubifs-media.h`` in kernel source). Exceptions are entries of the LPT
+and some less important node types like padding nodes which are used to pad
+unusable content at the end of LEBs.
+
+To avoid re-writing the whole B+ tree on every single change, it is implemented
+as *wandering tree*, where only the changed nodes are re-written and previous
+versions of them are obsoleted without erasing them right away. As a result,
+the index is not stored in a single place on the flash, but *wanders* around
+and there are obsolete parts on the flash as long as the LEB containing them is
+not reused by UBIFS. To find the most recent version of the index, UBIFS stores
+a special node called *master node* into UBI LEB 1 which always points to the
+most recent root node of the UBIFS index. For recoverability, the master node
+is additionally duplicated to LEB 2. Mounting UBIFS is thus a simple read of
+LEB 1 and 2 to get the current master node and from there get the location of
+the most recent on-flash index.
+
+The TNC is the in-memory representation of the on-flash index. It contains some
+additional runtime attributes per node which are not persisted. One of these is
+a dirty-flag which marks nodes that have to be persisted the next time the
+index is written onto the flash. The TNC acts as a write-back cache and all
+modifications of the on-flash index are done through the TNC. Like other caches,
+the TNC does not have to mirror the full index into memory, but reads parts of
+it from flash whenever needed. A *commit* is the UBIFS operation of updating the
+on-flash filesystem structures like the index. On every commit, the TNC nodes
+marked as dirty are written to the flash to update the persisted index.
+
+
+Journal
+~~~~~~~
+
+To avoid wearing out the flash, the index is only persisted (*commited*) when
+certain conditions are met (eg. ``fsync(2)``). The journal is used to record
+any changes (in form of inode nodes, data nodes etc.) between commits
+of the index. During mount, the journal is read from the flash and replayed
+onto the TNC (which will be created on-demand from the on-flash index).
+
+UBIFS reserves a bunch of LEBs just for the journal called *log area*. The
+amount of log area LEBs is configured on filesystem creation (using
+``mkfs.ubifs``) and stored in the superblock node. The log area contains only
+two types of nodes: *reference nodes* and *commit start nodes*. A commit start
+node is written whenever an index commit is performed. Reference nodes are
+written on every journal update. Each reference node points to the position of
+other nodes (inode nodes, data nodes etc.) on the flash that are part of this
+journal entry. These nodes are called *buds* and describe the actual filesystem
+changes including their data.
+
+The log area is maintained as a ring. Whenever the journal is almost full,
+a commit is initiated. This also writes a commit start node so that during
+mount, UBIFS will seek for the most recent commit start node and just replay
+every reference node after that. Every reference node before the commit start
+node will be ignored as they are already part of the on-flash index.
+
+When writing a journal entry, UBIFS first ensures that enough space is
+available to write the reference node and buds part of this entry. Then, the
+reference node is written and afterwards the buds describing the file changes.
+On replay, UBIFS will record every reference node and inspect the location of
+the referenced LEBs to discover the buds. If these are corrupt or missing,
+UBIFS will attempt to recover them by re-reading the LEB. This is however only
+done for the last referenced LEB of the journal. Only this can become corrupt
+because of a power cut. If the recovery fails, UBIFS will not mount. An error
+for every other LEB will directly cause UBIFS to fail the mount operation.
+
+::
+
+       | ----    LOG AREA     ---- | ----------    MAIN AREA    ------------ |
+
+        -----+------+-----+--------+----   ------+-----+-----+---------------
+        \    |      |     |        |   /  /      |     |     |               \
+        / CS |  REF | REF |        |   \  \ DENT | INO | INO |               /
+        \    |      |     |        |   /  /      |     |     |               \
+         ----+------+-----+--------+---   -------+-----+-----+----------------
+                 |     |                  ^            ^
+                 |     |                  |            |
+                 +------------------------+            |
+                       |                               |
+                       +-------------------------------+
+
+
+                Figure 2: UBIFS flash layout of log area with commit start nodes
+                          (CS) and reference nodes (REF) pointing to main area
+                          containing their buds
+
+
+LEB Property Tree/Table
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The LEB property tree is used to store per-LEB information. This includes the
+LEB type and amount of free and *dirty* (old, obsolete content) space [1]_ on
+the LEB. The type is important, because UBIFS never mixes index nodes with data
+nodes on a single LEB and thus each LEB has a specific purpose. This again is
+useful for free space calculations. See [UBIFS-WP] for more details.
+
+The LEB property tree again is a B+ tree, but it is much smaller than the
+index. Due to its smaller size it is always written as one chunk on every
+commit. Thus, saving the LPT is an atomic operation.
+
+
+.. [1] Since LEBs can only be appended and never overwritten, there is a
+   difference between free space ie. the remaining space left on the LEB to be
+   written to without erasing it and previously written content that is obsolete
+   but can't be overwritten without erasing the full LEB.
+
+
+UBIFS Authentication
+====================
+
+This chapter introduces UBIFS authentication which enables UBIFS to verify
+the authenticity and integrity of metadata and file contents stored on flash.
+
+
+Threat Model
+------------
+
+UBIFS authentication enables detection of offline data modification. While it
+does not prevent it, it enables (trusted) code to check the integrity and
+authenticity of on-flash file contents and filesystem metadata. This covers
+attacks where file contents are swapped.
+
+UBIFS authentication will not protect against rollback of full flash contents.
+Ie. an attacker can still dump the flash and restore it at a later time without
+detection. It will also not protect against partial rollback of individual
+index commits. That means that an attacker is able to partially undo changes.
+This is possible because UBIFS does not immediately overwrites obsolete
+versions of the index tree or the journal, but instead marks them as obsolete
+and garbage collection erases them at a later time. An attacker can use this by
+erasing parts of the current tree and restoring old versions that are still on
+the flash and have not yet been erased. This is possible, because every commit
+will always write a new version of the index root node and the master node
+without overwriting the previous version. This is further helped by the
+wear-leveling operations of UBI which copies contents from one physical
+eraseblock to another and does not atomically erase the first eraseblock.
+
+UBIFS authentication does not cover attacks where an attacker is able to
+execute code on the device after the authentication key was provided.
+Additional measures like secure boot and trusted boot have to be taken to
+ensure that only trusted code is executed on a device.
+
+
+Authentication
+--------------
+
+To be able to fully trust data read from flash, all UBIFS data structures
+stored on flash are authenticated. That is:
+
+- The index which includes file contents, file metadata like extended
+  attributes, file length etc.
+- The journal which also contains file contents and metadata by recording changes
+  to the filesystem
+- The LPT which stores UBI LEB metadata which UBIFS uses for free space accounting
+
+
+Index Authentication
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+Through UBIFS' concept of a wandering tree, it already takes care of only
+updating and persisting changed parts from leaf node up to the root node
+of the full B+ tree. This enables us to augment the index nodes of the tree
+with a hash over each node's child nodes. As a result, the index basically also
+a Merkle tree. Since the leaf nodes of the index contain the actual filesystem
+data, the hashes of their parent index nodes thus cover all the file contents
+and file metadata. When a file changes, the UBIFS index is updated accordingly
+from the leaf nodes up to the root node including the master node. This process
+can be hooked to recompute the hash only for each changed node at the same time.
+Whenever a file is read, UBIFS can verify the hashes from each leaf node up to
+the root node to ensure the node's integrity.
+
+To ensure the authenticity of the whole index, the UBIFS master node stores a
+keyed hash (HMAC) over its own contents and a hash of the root node of the index
+tree. As mentioned above, the master node is always written to the flash whenever
+the index is persisted (ie. on index commit).
+
+Using this approach only UBIFS index nodes and the master node are changed to
+include a hash. All other types of nodes will remain unchanged. This reduces
+the storage overhead which is precious for users of UBIFS (ie. embedded
+devices).
+
+::
+
+                             +---------------+
+                             |  Master Node  |
+                             |    (hash)     |
+                             +---------------+
+                                     |
+                                     v
+                            +-------------------+
+                            |  Index Node #1    |
+                            |                   |
+                            | branch0   branchn |
+                            | (hash)    (hash)  |
+                            +-------------------+
+                               |    ...   |  (fanout: 8)
+                               |          |
+                       +-------+          +------+
+                       |                         |
+                       v                         v
+            +-------------------+       +-------------------+
+            |  Index Node #2    |       |  Index Node #3    |
+            |                   |       |                   |
+            | branch0   branchn |       | branch0   branchn |
+            | (hash)    (hash)  |       | (hash)    (hash)  |
+            +-------------------+       +-------------------+
+                 |   ...                     |   ...   |
+                 v                           v         v
+               +-----------+         +----------+  +-----------+
+               | Data Node |         | INO Node |  | DENT Node |
+               +-----------+         +----------+  +-----------+
+
+
+           Figure 3: Coverage areas of index node hash and master node HMAC
+
+
+
+The most important part for robustness and power-cut safety is to atomically
+persist the hash and file contents. Here the existing UBIFS logic for how
+changed nodes are persisted is already designed for this purpose such that
+UBIFS can safely recover if a power-cut occurs while persisting. Adding
+hashes to index nodes does not change this since each hash will be persisted
+atomically together with its respective node.
+
+
+Journal Authentication
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The journal is authenticated too. Since the journal is continuously written
+it is necessary to also add authentication information frequently to the
+journal so that in case of a powercut not too much data can't be authenticated.
+This is done by creating a continuous hash beginning from the commit start node
+over the previous reference nodes, the current reference node, and the bud
+nodes. From time to time whenever it is suitable authentication nodes are added
+between the bud nodes. This new node type contains a HMAC over the current state
+of the hash chain. That way a journal can be authenticated up to the last
+authentication node. The tail of the journal which may not have a authentication
+node cannot be authenticated and is skipped during journal replay.
+
+We get this picture for journal authentication::
+
+    ,,,,,,,,
+    ,......,...........................................
+    ,. CS  ,               hash1.----.           hash2.----.
+    ,.  |  ,                    .    |hmac            .    |hmac
+    ,.  v  ,                    .    v                .    v
+    ,.REF#0,-> bud -> bud -> bud.-> auth -> bud -> bud.-> auth ...
+    ,..|...,...........................................
+    ,  |   ,
+    ,  |   ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+    .  |            hash3,----.
+    ,  |                 ,    |hmac
+    ,  v                 ,    v
+    , REF#1 -> bud -> bud,-> auth ...
+    ,,,|,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+       v
+      REF#2 -> ...
+       |
+       V
+      ...
+
+Since the hash also includes the reference nodes an attacker cannot reorder or
+skip any journal heads for replay. An attacker can only remove bud nodes or
+reference nodes from the end of the journal, effectively rewinding the
+filesystem at maximum back to the last commit.
+
+The location of the log area is stored in the master node. Since the master
+node is authenticated with a HMAC as described above, it is not possible to
+tamper with that without detection. The size of the log area is specified when
+the filesystem is created using `mkfs.ubifs` and stored in the superblock node.
+To avoid tampering with this and other values stored there, a HMAC is added to
+the superblock struct. The superblock node is stored in LEB 0 and is only
+modified on feature flag or similar changes, but never on file changes.
+
+
+LPT Authentication
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The location of the LPT root node on the flash is stored in the UBIFS master
+node. Since the LPT is written and read atomically on every commit, there is
+no need to authenticate individual nodes of the tree. It suffices to
+protect the integrity of the full LPT by a simple hash stored in the master
+node. Since the master node itself is authenticated, the LPTs authenticity can
+be verified by verifying the authenticity of the master node and comparing the
+LTP hash stored there with the hash computed from the read on-flash LPT.
+
+
+Key Management
+--------------
+
+For simplicity, UBIFS authentication uses a single key to compute the HMACs
+of superblock, master, commit start and reference nodes. This key has to be
+available on creation of the filesystem (`mkfs.ubifs`) to authenticate the
+superblock node. Further, it has to be available on mount of the filesystem
+to verify authenticated nodes and generate new HMACs for changes.
+
+UBIFS authentication is intended to operate side-by-side with UBIFS encryption
+(fscrypt) to provide confidentiality and authenticity. Since UBIFS encryption
+has a different approach of encryption policies per directory, there can be
+multiple fscrypt master keys and there might be folders without encryption.
+UBIFS authentication on the other hand has an all-or-nothing approach in the
+sense that it either authenticates everything of the filesystem or nothing.
+Because of this and because UBIFS authentication should also be usable without
+encryption, it does not share the same master key with fscrypt, but manages
+a dedicated authentication key.
+
+The API for providing the authentication key has yet to be defined, but the
+key can eg. be provided by userspace through a keyring similar to the way it
+is currently done in fscrypt. It should however be noted that the current
+fscrypt approach has shown its flaws and the userspace API will eventually
+change [FSCRYPT-POLICY2].
+
+Nevertheless, it will be possible for a user to provide a single passphrase
+or key in userspace that covers UBIFS authentication and encryption. This can
+be solved by the corresponding userspace tools which derive a second key for
+authentication in addition to the derived fscrypt master key used for
+encryption.
+
+To be able to check if the proper key is available on mount, the UBIFS
+superblock node will additionally store a hash of the authentication key. This
+approach is similar to the approach proposed for fscrypt encryption policy v2
+[FSCRYPT-POLICY2].
+
+
+Future Extensions
+=================
+
+In certain cases where a vendor wants to provide an authenticated filesystem
+image to customers, it should be possible to do so without sharing the secret
+UBIFS authentication key. Instead, in addition the each HMAC a digital
+signature could be stored where the vendor shares the public key alongside the
+filesystem image. In case this filesystem has to be modified afterwards,
+UBIFS can exchange all digital signatures with HMACs on first mount similar
+to the way the IMA/EVM subsystem deals with such situations. The HMAC key
+will then have to be provided beforehand in the normal way.
+
+
+References
+==========
+
+[CRYPTSETUP2]        https://www.saout.de/pipermail/dm-crypt/2017-November/005745.html
+
+[DMC-CBC-ATTACK]     https://www.jakoblell.com/blog/2013/12/22/practical-malleability-attack-against-cbc-encrypted-luks-partitions/
+
+[DM-INTEGRITY]       https://www.kernel.org/doc/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.rst
+
+[DM-VERITY]          https://www.kernel.org/doc/Documentation/device-mapper/verity.rst
+
+[FSCRYPT-POLICY2]    https://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-ext4/msg58710.html
+
+[UBIFS-WP]           http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/doc/ubifs_whitepaper.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ced2f7679
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============
+UBI File System
+===============
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+UBIFS file-system stands for UBI File System. UBI stands for "Unsorted
+Block Images". UBIFS is a flash file system, which means it is designed
+to work with flash devices. It is important to understand, that UBIFS
+is completely different to any traditional file-system in Linux, like
+Ext2, XFS, JFS, etc. UBIFS represents a separate class of file-systems
+which work with MTD devices, not block devices. The other Linux
+file-system of this class is JFFS2.
+
+To make it more clear, here is a small comparison of MTD devices and
+block devices.
+
+1 MTD devices represent flash devices and they consist of eraseblocks of
+  rather large size, typically about 128KiB. Block devices consist of
+  small blocks, typically 512 bytes.
+2 MTD devices support 3 main operations - read from some offset within an
+  eraseblock, write to some offset within an eraseblock, and erase a whole
+  eraseblock. Block  devices support 2 main operations - read a whole
+  block and write a whole block.
+3 The whole eraseblock has to be erased before it becomes possible to
+  re-write its contents. Blocks may be just re-written.
+4 Eraseblocks become worn out after some number of erase cycles -
+  typically 100K-1G for SLC NAND and NOR flashes, and 1K-10K for MLC
+  NAND flashes. Blocks do not have the wear-out property.
+5 Eraseblocks may become bad (only on NAND flashes) and software should
+  deal with this. Blocks on hard drives typically do not become bad,
+  because hardware has mechanisms to substitute bad blocks, at least in
+  modern LBA disks.
+
+It should be quite obvious why UBIFS is very different to traditional
+file-systems.
+
+UBIFS works on top of UBI. UBI is a separate software layer which may be
+found in drivers/mtd/ubi. UBI is basically a volume management and
+wear-leveling layer. It provides so called UBI volumes which is a higher
+level abstraction than a MTD device. The programming model of UBI devices
+is very similar to MTD devices - they still consist of large eraseblocks,
+they have read/write/erase operations, but UBI devices are devoid of
+limitations like wear and bad blocks (items 4 and 5 in the above list).
+
+In a sense, UBIFS is a next generation of JFFS2 file-system, but it is
+very different and incompatible to JFFS2. The following are the main
+differences.
+
+* JFFS2 works on top of MTD devices, UBIFS depends on UBI and works on
+  top of UBI volumes.
+* JFFS2 does not have on-media index and has to build it while mounting,
+  which requires full media scan. UBIFS maintains the FS indexing
+  information on the flash media and does not require full media scan,
+  so it mounts many times faster than JFFS2.
+* JFFS2 is a write-through file-system, while UBIFS supports write-back,
+  which makes UBIFS much faster on writes.
+
+Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS supports on-the-fly compression which makes
+it possible to fit quite a lot of data to the flash.
+
+Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS is tolerant of unclean reboots and power-cuts.
+It does not need stuff like fsck.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its
+journal and recovers from crashes, ensuring that the on-flash data
+structures are consistent.
+
+UBIFS scales logarithmically (most of the data structures it uses are
+trees), so the mount time and memory consumption do not linearly depend
+on the flash size, like in case of JFFS2. This is because UBIFS
+maintains the FS index on the flash media. However, UBIFS depends on
+UBI, which scales linearly. So overall UBI/UBIFS stack scales linearly.
+Nevertheless, UBI/UBIFS scales considerably better than JFFS2.
+
+The authors of UBIFS believe, that it is possible to develop UBI2 which
+would scale logarithmically as well. UBI2 would support the same API as UBI,
+but it would be binary incompatible to UBI. So UBIFS would not need to be
+changed to use UBI2
+
+
+Mount options
+=============
+
+(*) == default.
+
+====================	=======================================================
+bulk_read		read more in one go to take advantage of flash
+			media that read faster sequentially
+no_bulk_read (*)	do not bulk-read
+no_chk_data_crc (*)	skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to
+			improve read performance. Use this option only
+			if the flash media is highly reliable. The effect
+			of this option is that corruption of the contents
+			of a file can go unnoticed.
+chk_data_crc		do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes
+compr=none              override default compressor and set it to "none"
+compr=lzo               override default compressor and set it to "lzo"
+compr=zlib              override default compressor and set it to "zlib"
+auth_key=		specify the key used for authenticating the filesystem.
+			Passing this option makes authentication mandatory.
+			The passed key must be present in the kernel keyring
+			and must be of type 'logon'
+auth_hash_name=		The hash algorithm used for authentication. Used for
+			both hashing and for creating HMACs. Typical values
+			include "sha256" or "sha512"
+====================	=======================================================
+
+
+Quick usage instructions
+========================
+
+The UBI volume to mount is specified using "ubiX_Y" or "ubiX:NAME" syntax,
+where "X" is UBI device number, "Y" is UBI volume number, and "NAME" is
+UBI volume name.
+
+Mount volume 0 on UBI device 0 to /mnt/ubifs::
+
+    $ mount -t ubifs ubi0_0 /mnt/ubifs
+
+Mount "rootfs" volume of UBI device 0 to /mnt/ubifs ("rootfs" is volume
+name)::
+
+    $ mount -t ubifs ubi0:rootfs /mnt/ubifs
+
+The following is an example of the kernel boot arguments to attach mtd0
+to UBI and mount volume "rootfs":
+ubi.mtd=0 root=ubi0:rootfs rootfstype=ubifs
+
+References
+==========
+
+UBIFS documentation and FAQ/HOWTO at the MTD web site:
+
+- http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/doc/ubifs.html
+- http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/faq/ubifs.html
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/udf.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/udf.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f9489ddbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/udf.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============
+UDF file system
+===============
+
+If you encounter problems with reading UDF discs using this driver,
+please report them according to MAINTAINERS file.
+
+Write support requires a block driver which supports writing.  Currently
+dvd+rw drives and media support true random sector writes, and so a udf
+filesystem on such devices can be directly mounted read/write.  CD-RW
+media however, does not support this.  Instead the media can be formatted
+for packet mode using the utility cdrwtool, then the pktcdvd driver can
+be bound to the underlying cd device to provide the required buffering
+and read-modify-write cycles to allow the filesystem random sector writes
+while providing the hardware with only full packet writes.  While not
+required for dvd+rw media, use of the pktcdvd driver often enhances
+performance due to very poor read-modify-write support supplied internally
+by drive firmware.
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The following mount options are supported:
+
+	===========	======================================
+	gid=		Set the default group.
+	umask=		Set the default umask.
+	mode=		Set the default file permissions.
+	dmode=		Set the default directory permissions.
+	uid=		Set the default user.
+	bs=		Set the block size.
+	unhide		Show otherwise hidden files.
+	undelete	Show deleted files in lists.
+	adinicb		Embed data in the inode (default)
+	noadinicb	Don't embed data in the inode
+	shortad		Use short ad's
+	longad		Use long ad's (default)
+	nostrict	Unset strict conformance
+	iocharset=	Set the NLS character set
+	===========	======================================
+
+The uid= and gid= options need a bit more explaining.  They will accept a
+decimal numeric value and all inodes on that mount will then appear as
+belonging to that uid and gid.  Mount options also accept the string "forget".
+The forget option causes all IDs to be written to disk as -1 which is a way
+of UDF standard to indicate that IDs are not supported for these files .
+
+For typical desktop use of removable media, you should set the ID to that of
+the interactively logged on user, and also specify the forget option.  This way
+the interactive user will always see the files on the disk as belonging to him.
+
+The remaining are for debugging and disaster recovery:
+
+	=====		================================
+	novrs		Skip volume sequence recognition
+	=====		================================
+
+The following expect a offset from 0.
+
+	==========	=================================================
+	session=	Set the CDROM session (default= last session)
+	anchor=		Override standard anchor location. (default= 256)
+	lastblock=	Set the last block of the filesystem/
+	==========	=================================================
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+For the latest version and toolset see:
+	https://github.com/pali/udftools
+
+Documentation on UDF and ECMA 167 is available FREE from:
+	- http://www.osta.org/
+	- https://www.ecma-international.org/
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..760a4d83f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,387 @@
+====
+VFAT
+====
+
+USING VFAT
+==========
+
+To use the vfat filesystem, use the filesystem type 'vfat'.  i.e.::
+
+  mount -t vfat /dev/fd0 /mnt
+
+
+No special partition formatter is required,
+'mkdosfs' will work fine if you want to format from within Linux.
+
+VFAT MOUNT OPTIONS
+==================
+
+**uid=###**
+	Set the owner of all files on this filesystem.
+	The default is the uid of current process.
+
+**gid=###**
+	Set the group of all files on this filesystem.
+	The default is the gid of current process.
+
+**umask=###**
+	The permission mask (for files and directories, see *umask(1)*).
+	The default is the umask of current process.
+
+**dmask=###**
+	The permission mask for the directory.
+	The default is the umask of current process.
+
+**fmask=###**
+	The permission mask for files.
+	The default is the umask of current process.
+
+**allow_utime=###**
+	This option controls the permission check of mtime/atime.
+
+		**-20**: If current process is in group of file's group ID,
+                you can change timestamp.
+
+		**-2**: Other users can change timestamp.
+
+	The default is set from dmask option. If the directory is
+	writable, utime(2) is also allowed. i.e. ~dmask & 022.
+
+	Normally utime(2) checks current process is owner of
+	the file, or it has CAP_FOWNER capability. But FAT
+	filesystem doesn't have uid/gid on disk, so normal
+	check is too unflexible. With this option you can
+	relax it.
+
+**codepage=###**
+	Sets the codepage number for converting to shortname
+	characters on FAT filesystem.
+	By default, FAT_DEFAULT_CODEPAGE setting is used.
+
+**iocharset=<name>**
+	Character set to use for converting between the
+	encoding is used for user visible filename and 16 bit
+	Unicode characters. Long filenames are stored on disk
+	in Unicode format, but Unix for the most part doesn't
+	know how to deal with Unicode.
+	By default, FAT_DEFAULT_IOCHARSET setting is used.
+
+	There is also an option of doing UTF-8 translations
+	with the utf8 option.
+
+.. note:: ``iocharset=utf8`` is not recommended. If unsure, you should consider
+	  the utf8 option instead.
+
+**utf8=<bool>**
+	UTF-8 is the filesystem safe version of Unicode that
+	is used by the console. It can be enabled or disabled
+	for the filesystem with this option.
+	If 'uni_xlate' gets set, UTF-8 gets disabled.
+	By default, FAT_DEFAULT_UTF8 setting is used.
+
+**uni_xlate=<bool>**
+	Translate unhandled Unicode characters to special
+	escaped sequences.  This would let you backup and
+	restore filenames that are created with any Unicode
+	characters.  Until Linux supports Unicode for real,
+	this gives you an alternative.  Without this option,
+	a '?' is used when no translation is possible.  The
+	escape character is ':' because it is otherwise
+	illegal on the vfat filesystem.  The escape sequence
+	that gets used is ':' and the four digits of hexadecimal
+	unicode.
+
+**nonumtail=<bool>**
+	When creating 8.3 aliases, normally the alias will
+	end in '~1' or tilde followed by some number.  If this
+	option is set, then if the filename is
+	"longfilename.txt" and "longfile.txt" does not
+	currently exist in the directory, longfile.txt will
+	be the short alias instead of longfi~1.txt.
+
+**usefree**
+	Use the "free clusters" value stored on FSINFO. It will
+	be used to determine number of free clusters without
+	scanning disk. But it's not used by default, because
+	recent Windows don't update it correctly in some
+	case. If you are sure the "free clusters" on FSINFO is
+	correct, by this option you can avoid scanning disk.
+
+**quiet**
+	Stops printing certain warning messages.
+
+**check=s|r|n**
+	Case sensitivity checking setting.
+
+	**s**: strict, case sensitive
+
+	**r**: relaxed, case insensitive
+
+	**n**: normal, default setting, currently case insensitive
+
+**nocase**
+	This was deprecated for vfat. Use ``shortname=win95`` instead.
+
+**shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed**
+	Shortname display/create setting.
+
+	**lower**: convert to lowercase for display,
+	emulate the Windows 95 rule for create.
+
+	**win95**: emulate the Windows 95 rule for display/create.
+
+	**winnt**: emulate the Windows NT rule for display/create.
+
+	**mixed**: emulate the Windows NT rule for display,
+	emulate the Windows 95 rule for create.
+
+	Default setting is `mixed`.
+
+**tz=UTC**
+	Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time.
+	This option disables the conversion of timestamps
+	between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC
+	(which Linux uses internally).  This is particularly
+	useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras)
+	that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of
+	local time.
+
+**time_offset=minutes**
+	Set offset for conversion of timestamps from local time
+	used by FAT to UTC. I.e. <minutes> minutes will be subtracted
+	from each timestamp to convert it to UTC used internally by
+	Linux. This is useful when time zone set in ``sys_tz`` is
+	not the time zone used by the filesystem. Note that this
+	option still does not provide correct time stamps in all
+	cases in presence of DST - time stamps in a different DST
+	setting will be off by one hour.
+
+**showexec**
+	If set, the execute permission bits of the file will be
+	allowed only if the extension part of the name is .EXE,
+	.COM, or .BAT. Not set by default.
+
+**debug**
+	Can be set, but unused by the current implementation.
+
+**sys_immutable**
+	If set, ATTR_SYS attribute on FAT is handled as
+	IMMUTABLE flag on Linux. Not set by default.
+
+**flush**
+	If set, the filesystem will try to flush to disk more
+	early than normal. Not set by default.
+
+**rodir**
+	FAT has the ATTR_RO (read-only) attribute. On Windows,
+	the ATTR_RO of the directory will just be ignored,
+	and is used only by applications as a flag (e.g. it's set
+	for the customized folder).
+
+	If you want to use ATTR_RO as read-only flag even for
+	the directory, set this option.
+
+**errors=panic|continue|remount-ro**
+	specify FAT behavior on critical errors: panic, continue
+	without doing anything or remount the partition in
+	read-only mode (default behavior).
+
+**discard**
+	If set, issues discard/TRIM commands to the block
+	device when blocks are freed. This is useful for SSD devices
+	and sparse/thinly-provisioned LUNs.
+
+**nfs=stale_rw|nostale_ro**
+	Enable this only if you want to export the FAT filesystem
+	over NFS.
+
+		**stale_rw**: This option maintains an index (cache) of directory
+		*inodes* by *i_logstart* which is used by the nfs-related code to
+		improve look-ups. Full file operations (read/write) over NFS is
+		supported but with cache eviction at NFS server, this could
+		result in ESTALE issues.
+
+		**nostale_ro**: This option bases the *inode* number and filehandle
+		on the on-disk location of a file in the MS-DOS directory entry.
+		This ensures that ESTALE will not be returned after a file is
+		evicted from the inode cache. However, it means that operations
+		such as rename, create and unlink could cause filehandles that
+		previously pointed at one file to point at a different file,
+		potentially causing data corruption. For this reason, this
+		option also mounts the filesystem readonly.
+
+	To maintain backward compatibility, ``'-o nfs'`` is also accepted,
+	defaulting to "stale_rw".
+
+**dos1xfloppy  <bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false**
+	If set, use a fallback default BIOS Parameter Block
+	configuration, determined by backing device size. These static
+	parameters match defaults assumed by DOS 1.x for 160 kiB,
+	180 kiB, 320 kiB, and 360 kiB floppies and floppy images.
+
+
+
+LIMITATION
+==========
+
+The fallocated region of file is discarded at umount/evict time
+when using fallocate with FALLOC_FL_KEEP_SIZE.
+So, User should assume that fallocated region can be discarded at
+last close if there is memory pressure resulting in eviction of
+the inode from the memory. As a result, for any dependency on
+the fallocated region, user should make sure to recheck fallocate
+after reopening the file.
+
+TODO
+====
+Need to get rid of the raw scanning stuff.  Instead, always use
+a get next directory entry approach.  The only thing left that uses
+raw scanning is the directory renaming code.
+
+
+POSSIBLE PROBLEMS
+=================
+
+- vfat_valid_longname does not properly checked reserved names.
+- When a volume name is the same as a directory name in the root
+  directory of the filesystem, the directory name sometimes shows
+  up as an empty file.
+- autoconv option does not work correctly.
+
+
+TEST SUITE
+==========
+If you plan to make any modifications to the vfat filesystem, please
+get the test suite that comes with the vfat distribution at
+
+`<http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://bmrc.berkeley.edu/people/chaffee/vfat.html>`_
+
+This tests quite a few parts of the vfat filesystem and additional
+tests for new features or untested features would be appreciated.
+
+NOTES ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE VFAT FILESYSTEM
+=============================================
+This documentation was provided by Galen C. Hunt gchunt@cs.rochester.edu and
+lightly annotated by Gordon Chaffee.
+
+This document presents a very rough, technical overview of my
+knowledge of the extended FAT file system used in Windows NT 3.5 and
+Windows 95.  I don't guarantee that any of the following is correct,
+but it appears to be so.
+
+The extended FAT file system is almost identical to the FAT
+file system used in DOS versions up to and including *6.223410239847*
+:-).  The significant change has been the addition of long file names.
+These names support up to 255 characters including spaces and lower
+case characters as opposed to the traditional 8.3 short names.
+
+Here is the description of the traditional FAT entry in the current
+Windows 95 filesystem::
+
+        struct directory { // Short 8.3 names
+                unsigned char name[8];          // file name
+                unsigned char ext[3];           // file extension
+                unsigned char attr;             // attribute byte
+		unsigned char lcase;		// Case for base and extension
+		unsigned char ctime_ms;		// Creation time, milliseconds
+		unsigned char ctime[2];		// Creation time
+		unsigned char cdate[2];		// Creation date
+		unsigned char adate[2];		// Last access date
+		unsigned char reserved[2];	// reserved values (ignored)
+                unsigned char time[2];          // time stamp
+                unsigned char date[2];          // date stamp
+                unsigned char start[2];         // starting cluster number
+                unsigned char size[4];          // size of the file
+        };
+
+
+The lcase field specifies if the base and/or the extension of an 8.3
+name should be capitalized.  This field does not seem to be used by
+Windows 95 but it is used by Windows NT.  The case of filenames is not
+completely compatible from Windows NT to Windows 95.  It is not completely
+compatible in the reverse direction, however.  Filenames that fit in
+the 8.3 namespace and are written on Windows NT to be lowercase will
+show up as uppercase on Windows 95.
+
+.. note:: Note that the ``start`` and ``size`` values are actually little
+          endian integer values.  The descriptions of the fields in this
+          structure are public knowledge and can be found elsewhere.
+
+With the extended FAT system, Microsoft has inserted extra
+directory entries for any files with extended names.  (Any name which
+legally fits within the old 8.3 encoding scheme does not have extra
+entries.)  I call these extra entries slots.  Basically, a slot is a
+specially formatted directory entry which holds up to 13 characters of
+a file's extended name.  Think of slots as additional labeling for the
+directory entry of the file to which they correspond.  Microsoft
+prefers to refer to the 8.3 entry for a file as its alias and the
+extended slot directory entries as the file name.
+
+The C structure for a slot directory entry follows::
+
+        struct slot { // Up to 13 characters of a long name
+                unsigned char id;               // sequence number for slot
+                unsigned char name0_4[10];      // first 5 characters in name
+                unsigned char attr;             // attribute byte
+                unsigned char reserved;         // always 0
+                unsigned char alias_checksum;   // checksum for 8.3 alias
+                unsigned char name5_10[12];     // 6 more characters in name
+                unsigned char start[2];         // starting cluster number
+                unsigned char name11_12[4];     // last 2 characters in name
+        };
+
+
+If the layout of the slots looks a little odd, it's only
+because of Microsoft's efforts to maintain compatibility with old
+software.  The slots must be disguised to prevent old software from
+panicking.  To this end, a number of measures are taken:
+
+        1) The attribute byte for a slot directory entry is always set
+           to 0x0f.  This corresponds to an old directory entry with
+           attributes of "hidden", "system", "read-only", and "volume
+           label".  Most old software will ignore any directory
+           entries with the "volume label" bit set.  Real volume label
+           entries don't have the other three bits set.
+
+        2) The starting cluster is always set to 0, an impossible
+           value for a DOS file.
+
+Because the extended FAT system is backward compatible, it is
+possible for old software to modify directory entries.  Measures must
+be taken to ensure the validity of slots.  An extended FAT system can
+verify that a slot does in fact belong to an 8.3 directory entry by
+the following:
+
+        1) Positioning.  Slots for a file always immediately proceed
+           their corresponding 8.3 directory entry.  In addition, each
+           slot has an id which marks its order in the extended file
+           name.  Here is a very abbreviated view of an 8.3 directory
+           entry and its corresponding long name slots for the file
+           "My Big File.Extension which is long"::
+
+                <proceeding files...>
+                <slot #3, id = 0x43, characters = "h is long">
+                <slot #2, id = 0x02, characters = "xtension whic">
+                <slot #1, id = 0x01, characters = "My Big File.E">
+                <directory entry, name = "MYBIGFIL.EXT">
+
+
+           .. note:: Note that the slots are stored from last to first.  Slots
+		     are numbered from 1 to N.  The Nth slot is ``or'ed`` with
+		     0x40 to mark it as the last one.
+
+        2) Checksum.  Each slot has an alias_checksum value.  The
+           checksum is calculated from the 8.3 name using the
+           following algorithm::
+
+                for (sum = i = 0; i < 11; i++) {
+                        sum = (((sum&1)<<7)|((sum&0xfe)>>1)) + name[i]
+                }
+
+
+	3) If there is free space in the final slot, a Unicode ``NULL (0x0000)``
+	   is stored after the final character.  After that, all unused
+	   characters in the final slot are set to Unicode 0xFFFF.
+
+Finally, note that the extended name is stored in Unicode.  Each Unicode
+character takes either two or four bytes, UTF-16LE encoded.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b5e8b8af8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,1476 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================================
+Overview of the Linux Virtual File System
+=========================================
+
+Original author: Richard Gooch <rgooch@atnf.csiro.au>
+
+- Copyright (C) 1999 Richard Gooch
+- Copyright (C) 2005 Pekka Enberg
+
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+The Virtual File System (also known as the Virtual Filesystem Switch) is
+the software layer in the kernel that provides the filesystem interface
+to userspace programs.  It also provides an abstraction within the
+kernel which allows different filesystem implementations to coexist.
+
+VFS system calls open(2), stat(2), read(2), write(2), chmod(2) and so on
+are called from a process context.  Filesystem locking is described in
+the document Documentation/filesystems/locking.rst.
+
+
+Directory Entry Cache (dcache)
+------------------------------
+
+The VFS implements the open(2), stat(2), chmod(2), and similar system
+calls.  The pathname argument that is passed to them is used by the VFS
+to search through the directory entry cache (also known as the dentry
+cache or dcache).  This provides a very fast look-up mechanism to
+translate a pathname (filename) into a specific dentry.  Dentries live
+in RAM and are never saved to disc: they exist only for performance.
+
+The dentry cache is meant to be a view into your entire filespace.  As
+most computers cannot fit all dentries in the RAM at the same time, some
+bits of the cache are missing.  In order to resolve your pathname into a
+dentry, the VFS may have to resort to creating dentries along the way,
+and then loading the inode.  This is done by looking up the inode.
+
+
+The Inode Object
+----------------
+
+An individual dentry usually has a pointer to an inode.  Inodes are
+filesystem objects such as regular files, directories, FIFOs and other
+beasts.  They live either on the disc (for block device filesystems) or
+in the memory (for pseudo filesystems).  Inodes that live on the disc
+are copied into the memory when required and changes to the inode are
+written back to disc.  A single inode can be pointed to by multiple
+dentries (hard links, for example, do this).
+
+To look up an inode requires that the VFS calls the lookup() method of
+the parent directory inode.  This method is installed by the specific
+filesystem implementation that the inode lives in.  Once the VFS has the
+required dentry (and hence the inode), we can do all those boring things
+like open(2) the file, or stat(2) it to peek at the inode data.  The
+stat(2) operation is fairly simple: once the VFS has the dentry, it
+peeks at the inode data and passes some of it back to userspace.
+
+
+The File Object
+---------------
+
+Opening a file requires another operation: allocation of a file
+structure (this is the kernel-side implementation of file descriptors).
+The freshly allocated file structure is initialized with a pointer to
+the dentry and a set of file operation member functions.  These are
+taken from the inode data.  The open() file method is then called so the
+specific filesystem implementation can do its work.  You can see that
+this is another switch performed by the VFS.  The file structure is
+placed into the file descriptor table for the process.
+
+Reading, writing and closing files (and other assorted VFS operations)
+is done by using the userspace file descriptor to grab the appropriate
+file structure, and then calling the required file structure method to
+do whatever is required.  For as long as the file is open, it keeps the
+dentry in use, which in turn means that the VFS inode is still in use.
+
+
+Registering and Mounting a Filesystem
+=====================================
+
+To register and unregister a filesystem, use the following API
+functions:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+	#include <linux/fs.h>
+
+	extern int register_filesystem(struct file_system_type *);
+	extern int unregister_filesystem(struct file_system_type *);
+
+The passed struct file_system_type describes your filesystem.  When a
+request is made to mount a filesystem onto a directory in your
+namespace, the VFS will call the appropriate mount() method for the
+specific filesystem.  New vfsmount referring to the tree returned by
+->mount() will be attached to the mountpoint, so that when pathname
+resolution reaches the mountpoint it will jump into the root of that
+vfsmount.
+
+You can see all filesystems that are registered to the kernel in the
+file /proc/filesystems.
+
+
+struct file_system_type
+-----------------------
+
+This describes the filesystem.  As of kernel 2.6.39, the following
+members are defined:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+	struct file_system_type {
+		const char *name;
+		int fs_flags;
+		struct dentry *(*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int,
+					 const char *, void *);
+		void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
+		struct module *owner;
+		struct file_system_type * next;
+		struct list_head fs_supers;
+		struct lock_class_key s_lock_key;
+		struct lock_class_key s_umount_key;
+	};
+
+``name``
+	the name of the filesystem type, such as "ext2", "iso9660",
+	"msdos" and so on
+
+``fs_flags``
+	various flags (i.e. FS_REQUIRES_DEV, FS_NO_DCACHE, etc.)
+
+``mount``
+	the method to call when a new instance of this filesystem should
+	be mounted
+
+``kill_sb``
+	the method to call when an instance of this filesystem should be
+	shut down
+
+
+``owner``
+	for internal VFS use: you should initialize this to THIS_MODULE
+	in most cases.
+
+``next``
+	for internal VFS use: you should initialize this to NULL
+
+  s_lock_key, s_umount_key: lockdep-specific
+
+The mount() method has the following arguments:
+
+``struct file_system_type *fs_type``
+	describes the filesystem, partly initialized by the specific
+	filesystem code
+
+``int flags``
+	mount flags
+
+``const char *dev_name``
+	the device name we are mounting.
+
+``void *data``
+	arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII string (see
+	"Mount Options" section)
+
+The mount() method must return the root dentry of the tree requested by
+caller.  An active reference to its superblock must be grabbed and the
+superblock must be locked.  On failure it should return ERR_PTR(error).
+
+The arguments match those of mount(2) and their interpretation depends
+on filesystem type.  E.g. for block filesystems, dev_name is interpreted
+as block device name, that device is opened and if it contains a
+suitable filesystem image the method creates and initializes struct
+super_block accordingly, returning its root dentry to caller.
+
+->mount() may choose to return a subtree of existing filesystem - it
+doesn't have to create a new one.  The main result from the caller's
+point of view is a reference to dentry at the root of (sub)tree to be
+attached; creation of new superblock is a common side effect.
+
+The most interesting member of the superblock structure that the mount()
+method fills in is the "s_op" field.  This is a pointer to a "struct
+super_operations" which describes the next level of the filesystem
+implementation.
+
+Usually, a filesystem uses one of the generic mount() implementations
+and provides a fill_super() callback instead.  The generic variants are:
+
+``mount_bdev``
+	mount a filesystem residing on a block device
+
+``mount_nodev``
+	mount a filesystem that is not backed by a device
+
+``mount_single``
+	mount a filesystem which shares the instance between all mounts
+
+A fill_super() callback implementation has the following arguments:
+
+``struct super_block *sb``
+	the superblock structure.  The callback must initialize this
+	properly.
+
+``void *data``
+	arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII string (see
+	"Mount Options" section)
+
+``int silent``
+	whether or not to be silent on error
+
+
+The Superblock Object
+=====================
+
+A superblock object represents a mounted filesystem.
+
+
+struct super_operations
+-----------------------
+
+This describes how the VFS can manipulate the superblock of your
+filesystem.  As of kernel 2.6.22, the following members are defined:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+	struct super_operations {
+		struct inode *(*alloc_inode)(struct super_block *sb);
+		void (*destroy_inode)(struct inode *);
+
+		void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *, int flags);
+		int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, int);
+		void (*drop_inode) (struct inode *);
+		void (*delete_inode) (struct inode *);
+		void (*put_super) (struct super_block *);
+		int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
+		int (*freeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
+		int (*unfreeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
+		int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
+		int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
+		void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *);
+		void (*umount_begin) (struct super_block *);
+
+		int (*show_options)(struct seq_file *, struct dentry *);
+
+		ssize_t (*quota_read)(struct super_block *, int, char *, size_t, loff_t);
+		ssize_t (*quota_write)(struct super_block *, int, const char *, size_t, loff_t);
+		int (*nr_cached_objects)(struct super_block *);
+		void (*free_cached_objects)(struct super_block *, int);
+	};
+
+All methods are called without any locks being held, unless otherwise
+noted.  This means that most methods can block safely.  All methods are
+only called from a process context (i.e. not from an interrupt handler
+or bottom half).
+
+``alloc_inode``
+	this method is called by alloc_inode() to allocate memory for
+	struct inode and initialize it.  If this function is not
+	defined, a simple 'struct inode' is allocated.  Normally
+	alloc_inode will be used to allocate a larger structure which
+	contains a 'struct inode' embedded within it.
+
+``destroy_inode``
+	this method is called by destroy_inode() to release resources
+	allocated for struct inode.  It is only required if
+	->alloc_inode was defined and simply undoes anything done by
+	->alloc_inode.
+
+``dirty_inode``
+	this method is called by the VFS when an inode is marked dirty.
+	This is specifically for the inode itself being marked dirty,
+	not its data.  If the update needs to be persisted by fdatasync(),
+	then I_DIRTY_DATASYNC will be set in the flags argument.
+	I_DIRTY_TIME will be set in the flags in case lazytime is enabled
+	and struct inode has times updated since the last ->dirty_inode
+	call.
+
+``write_inode``
+	this method is called when the VFS needs to write an inode to
+	disc.  The second parameter indicates whether the write should
+	be synchronous or not, not all filesystems check this flag.
+
+``drop_inode``
+	called when the last access to the inode is dropped, with the
+	inode->i_lock spinlock held.
+
+	This method should be either NULL (normal UNIX filesystem
+	semantics) or "generic_delete_inode" (for filesystems that do
+	not want to cache inodes - causing "delete_inode" to always be
+	called regardless of the value of i_nlink)
+
+	The "generic_delete_inode()" behavior is equivalent to the old
+	practice of using "force_delete" in the put_inode() case, but
+	does not have the races that the "force_delete()" approach had.
+
+``delete_inode``
+	called when the VFS wants to delete an inode
+
+``put_super``
+	called when the VFS wishes to free the superblock
+	(i.e. unmount).  This is called with the superblock lock held
+
+``sync_fs``
+	called when VFS is writing out all dirty data associated with a
+	superblock.  The second parameter indicates whether the method
+	should wait until the write out has been completed.  Optional.
+
+``freeze_fs``
+	called when VFS is locking a filesystem and forcing it into a
+	consistent state.  This method is currently used by the Logical
+	Volume Manager (LVM).
+
+``unfreeze_fs``
+	called when VFS is unlocking a filesystem and making it writable
+	again.
+
+``statfs``
+	called when the VFS needs to get filesystem statistics.
+
+``remount_fs``
+	called when the filesystem is remounted.  This is called with
+	the kernel lock held
+
+``clear_inode``
+	called then the VFS clears the inode.  Optional
+
+``umount_begin``
+	called when the VFS is unmounting a filesystem.
+
+``show_options``
+	called by the VFS to show mount options for /proc/<pid>/mounts.
+	(see "Mount Options" section)
+
+``quota_read``
+	called by the VFS to read from filesystem quota file.
+
+``quota_write``
+	called by the VFS to write to filesystem quota file.
+
+``nr_cached_objects``
+	called by the sb cache shrinking function for the filesystem to
+	return the number of freeable cached objects it contains.
+	Optional.
+
+``free_cache_objects``
+	called by the sb cache shrinking function for the filesystem to
+	scan the number of objects indicated to try to free them.
+	Optional, but any filesystem implementing this method needs to
+	also implement ->nr_cached_objects for it to be called
+	correctly.
+
+	We can't do anything with any errors that the filesystem might
+	encountered, hence the void return type.  This will never be
+	called if the VM is trying to reclaim under GFP_NOFS conditions,
+	hence this method does not need to handle that situation itself.
+
+	Implementations must include conditional reschedule calls inside
+	any scanning loop that is done.  This allows the VFS to
+	determine appropriate scan batch sizes without having to worry
+	about whether implementations will cause holdoff problems due to
+	large scan batch sizes.
+
+Whoever sets up the inode is responsible for filling in the "i_op"
+field.  This is a pointer to a "struct inode_operations" which describes
+the methods that can be performed on individual inodes.
+
+
+struct xattr_handlers
+---------------------
+
+On filesystems that support extended attributes (xattrs), the s_xattr
+superblock field points to a NULL-terminated array of xattr handlers.
+Extended attributes are name:value pairs.
+
+``name``
+	Indicates that the handler matches attributes with the specified
+	name (such as "system.posix_acl_access"); the prefix field must
+	be NULL.
+
+``prefix``
+	Indicates that the handler matches all attributes with the
+	specified name prefix (such as "user."); the name field must be
+	NULL.
+
+``list``
+	Determine if attributes matching this xattr handler should be
+	listed for a particular dentry.  Used by some listxattr
+	implementations like generic_listxattr.
+
+``get``
+	Called by the VFS to get the value of a particular extended
+	attribute.  This method is called by the getxattr(2) system
+	call.
+
+``set``
+	Called by the VFS to set the value of a particular extended
+	attribute.  When the new value is NULL, called to remove a
+	particular extended attribute.  This method is called by the
+	setxattr(2) and removexattr(2) system calls.
+
+When none of the xattr handlers of a filesystem match the specified
+attribute name or when a filesystem doesn't support extended attributes,
+the various ``*xattr(2)`` system calls return -EOPNOTSUPP.
+
+
+The Inode Object
+================
+
+An inode object represents an object within the filesystem.
+
+
+struct inode_operations
+-----------------------
+
+This describes how the VFS can manipulate an inode in your filesystem.
+As of kernel 2.6.22, the following members are defined:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+	struct inode_operations {
+		int (*create) (struct user_namespace *, struct inode *,struct dentry *, umode_t, bool);
+		struct dentry * (*lookup) (struct inode *,struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+		int (*link) (struct dentry *,struct inode *,struct dentry *);
+		int (*unlink) (struct inode *,struct dentry *);
+		int (*symlink) (struct user_namespace *, struct inode *,struct dentry *,const char *);
+		int (*mkdir) (struct user_namespace *, struct inode *,struct dentry *,umode_t);
+		int (*rmdir) (struct inode *,struct dentry *);
+		int (*mknod) (struct user_namespace *, struct inode *,struct dentry *,umode_t,dev_t);
+		int (*rename) (struct user_namespace *, struct inode *, struct dentry *,
+			       struct inode *, struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+		int (*readlink) (struct dentry *, char __user *,int);
+		const char *(*get_link) (struct dentry *, struct inode *,
+					 struct delayed_call *);
+		int (*permission) (struct user_namespace *, struct inode *, int);
+		struct posix_acl * (*get_acl)(struct inode *, int, bool);
+		int (*setattr) (struct user_namespace *, struct dentry *, struct iattr *);
+		int (*getattr) (struct user_namespace *, const struct path *, struct kstat *, u32, unsigned int);
+		ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t);
+		void (*update_time)(struct inode *, struct timespec *, int);
+		int (*atomic_open)(struct inode *, struct dentry *, struct file *,
+				   unsigned open_flag, umode_t create_mode);
+		int (*tmpfile) (struct user_namespace *, struct inode *, struct file *, umode_t);
+	        int (*set_acl)(struct user_namespace *, struct inode *, struct posix_acl *, int);
+		int (*fileattr_set)(struct user_namespace *mnt_userns,
+				    struct dentry *dentry, struct fileattr *fa);
+		int (*fileattr_get)(struct dentry *dentry, struct fileattr *fa);
+	};
+
+Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless
+otherwise noted.
+
+``create``
+	called by the open(2) and creat(2) system calls.  Only required
+	if you want to support regular files.  The dentry you get should
+	not have an inode (i.e. it should be a negative dentry).  Here
+	you will probably call d_instantiate() with the dentry and the
+	newly created inode
+
+``lookup``
+	called when the VFS needs to look up an inode in a parent
+	directory.  The name to look for is found in the dentry.  This
+	method must call d_add() to insert the found inode into the
+	dentry.  The "i_count" field in the inode structure should be
+	incremented.  If the named inode does not exist a NULL inode
+	should be inserted into the dentry (this is called a negative
+	dentry).  Returning an error code from this routine must only be
+	done on a real error, otherwise creating inodes with system
+	calls like create(2), mknod(2), mkdir(2) and so on will fail.
+	If you wish to overload the dentry methods then you should
+	initialise the "d_dop" field in the dentry; this is a pointer to
+	a struct "dentry_operations".  This method is called with the
+	directory inode semaphore held
+
+``link``
+	called by the link(2) system call.  Only required if you want to
+	support hard links.  You will probably need to call
+	d_instantiate() just as you would in the create() method
+
+``unlink``
+	called by the unlink(2) system call.  Only required if you want
+	to support deleting inodes
+
+``symlink``
+	called by the symlink(2) system call.  Only required if you want
+	to support symlinks.  You will probably need to call
+	d_instantiate() just as you would in the create() method
+
+``mkdir``
+	called by the mkdir(2) system call.  Only required if you want
+	to support creating subdirectories.  You will probably need to
+	call d_instantiate() just as you would in the create() method
+
+``rmdir``
+	called by the rmdir(2) system call.  Only required if you want
+	to support deleting subdirectories
+
+``mknod``
+	called by the mknod(2) system call to create a device (char,
+	block) inode or a named pipe (FIFO) or socket.  Only required if
+	you want to support creating these types of inodes.  You will
+	probably need to call d_instantiate() just as you would in the
+	create() method
+
+``rename``
+	called by the rename(2) system call to rename the object to have
+	the parent and name given by the second inode and dentry.
+
+	The filesystem must return -EINVAL for any unsupported or
+	unknown flags.  Currently the following flags are implemented:
+	(1) RENAME_NOREPLACE: this flag indicates that if the target of
+	the rename exists the rename should fail with -EEXIST instead of
+	replacing the target.  The VFS already checks for existence, so
+	for local filesystems the RENAME_NOREPLACE implementation is
+	equivalent to plain rename.
+	(2) RENAME_EXCHANGE: exchange source and target.  Both must
+	exist; this is checked by the VFS.  Unlike plain rename, source
+	and target may be of different type.
+
+``get_link``
+	called by the VFS to follow a symbolic link to the inode it
+	points to.  Only required if you want to support symbolic links.
+	This method returns the symlink body to traverse (and possibly
+	resets the current position with nd_jump_link()).  If the body
+	won't go away until the inode is gone, nothing else is needed;
+	if it needs to be otherwise pinned, arrange for its release by
+	having get_link(..., ..., done) do set_delayed_call(done,
+	destructor, argument).  In that case destructor(argument) will
+	be called once VFS is done with the body you've returned.  May
+	be called in RCU mode; that is indicated by NULL dentry
+	argument.  If request can't be handled without leaving RCU mode,
+	have it return ERR_PTR(-ECHILD).
+
+	If the filesystem stores the symlink target in ->i_link, the
+	VFS may use it directly without calling ->get_link(); however,
+	->get_link() must still be provided.  ->i_link must not be
+	freed until after an RCU grace period.  Writing to ->i_link
+	post-iget() time requires a 'release' memory barrier.
+
+``readlink``
+	this is now just an override for use by readlink(2) for the
+	cases when ->get_link uses nd_jump_link() or object is not in
+	fact a symlink.  Normally filesystems should only implement
+	->get_link for symlinks and readlink(2) will automatically use
+	that.
+
+``permission``
+	called by the VFS to check for access rights on a POSIX-like
+	filesystem.
+
+	May be called in rcu-walk mode (mask & MAY_NOT_BLOCK).  If in
+	rcu-walk mode, the filesystem must check the permission without
+	blocking or storing to the inode.
+
+	If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle,
+	return
+	-ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode.
+
+``setattr``
+	called by the VFS to set attributes for a file.  This method is
+	called by chmod(2) and related system calls.
+
+``getattr``
+	called by the VFS to get attributes of a file.  This method is
+	called by stat(2) and related system calls.
+
+``listxattr``
+	called by the VFS to list all extended attributes for a given
+	file.  This method is called by the listxattr(2) system call.
+
+``update_time``
+	called by the VFS to update a specific time or the i_version of
+	an inode.  If this is not defined the VFS will update the inode
+	itself and call mark_inode_dirty_sync.
+
+``atomic_open``
+	called on the last component of an open.  Using this optional
+	method the filesystem can look up, possibly create and open the
+	file in one atomic operation.  If it wants to leave actual
+	opening to the caller (e.g. if the file turned out to be a
+	symlink, device, or just something filesystem won't do atomic
+	open for), it may signal this by returning finish_no_open(file,
+	dentry).  This method is only called if the last component is
+	negative or needs lookup.  Cached positive dentries are still
+	handled by f_op->open().  If the file was created, FMODE_CREATED
+	flag should be set in file->f_mode.  In case of O_EXCL the
+	method must only succeed if the file didn't exist and hence
+	FMODE_CREATED shall always be set on success.
+
+``tmpfile``
+	called in the end of O_TMPFILE open().  Optional, equivalent to
+	atomically creating, opening and unlinking a file in given
+	directory.  On success needs to return with the file already
+	open; this can be done by calling finish_open_simple() right at
+	the end.
+
+``fileattr_get``
+	called on ioctl(FS_IOC_GETFLAGS) and ioctl(FS_IOC_FSGETXATTR) to
+	retrieve miscellaneous file flags and attributes.  Also called
+	before the relevant SET operation to check what is being changed
+	(in this case with i_rwsem locked exclusive).  If unset, then
+	fall back to f_op->ioctl().
+
+``fileattr_set``
+	called on ioctl(FS_IOC_SETFLAGS) and ioctl(FS_IOC_FSSETXATTR) to
+	change miscellaneous file flags and attributes.  Callers hold
+	i_rwsem exclusive.  If unset, then fall back to f_op->ioctl().
+
+
+The Address Space Object
+========================
+
+The address space object is used to group and manage pages in the page
+cache.  It can be used to keep track of the pages in a file (or anything
+else) and also track the mapping of sections of the file into process
+address spaces.
+
+There are a number of distinct yet related services that an
+address-space can provide.  These include communicating memory pressure,
+page lookup by address, and keeping track of pages tagged as Dirty or
+Writeback.
+
+The first can be used independently to the others.  The VM can try to
+either write dirty pages in order to clean them, or release clean pages
+in order to reuse them.  To do this it can call the ->writepage method
+on dirty pages, and ->release_folio on clean folios with the private
+flag set.  Clean pages without PagePrivate and with no external references
+will be released without notice being given to the address_space.
+
+To achieve this functionality, pages need to be placed on an LRU with
+lru_cache_add and mark_page_active needs to be called whenever the page
+is used.
+
+Pages are normally kept in a radix tree index by ->index.  This tree
+maintains information about the PG_Dirty and PG_Writeback status of each
+page, so that pages with either of these flags can be found quickly.
+
+The Dirty tag is primarily used by mpage_writepages - the default
+->writepages method.  It uses the tag to find dirty pages to call
+->writepage on.  If mpage_writepages is not used (i.e. the address
+provides its own ->writepages) , the PAGECACHE_TAG_DIRTY tag is almost
+unused.  write_inode_now and sync_inode do use it (through
+__sync_single_inode) to check if ->writepages has been successful in
+writing out the whole address_space.
+
+The Writeback tag is used by filemap*wait* and sync_page* functions, via
+filemap_fdatawait_range, to wait for all writeback to complete.
+
+An address_space handler may attach extra information to a page,
+typically using the 'private' field in the 'struct page'.  If such
+information is attached, the PG_Private flag should be set.  This will
+cause various VM routines to make extra calls into the address_space
+handler to deal with that data.
+
+An address space acts as an intermediate between storage and
+application.  Data is read into the address space a whole page at a
+time, and provided to the application either by copying of the page, or
+by memory-mapping the page.  Data is written into the address space by
+the application, and then written-back to storage typically in whole
+pages, however the address_space has finer control of write sizes.
+
+The read process essentially only requires 'read_folio'.  The write
+process is more complicated and uses write_begin/write_end or
+dirty_folio to write data into the address_space, and writepage and
+writepages to writeback data to storage.
+
+Adding and removing pages to/from an address_space is protected by the
+inode's i_mutex.
+
+When data is written to a page, the PG_Dirty flag should be set.  It
+typically remains set until writepage asks for it to be written.  This
+should clear PG_Dirty and set PG_Writeback.  It can be actually written
+at any point after PG_Dirty is clear.  Once it is known to be safe,
+PG_Writeback is cleared.
+
+Writeback makes use of a writeback_control structure to direct the
+operations.  This gives the writepage and writepages operations some
+information about the nature of and reason for the writeback request,
+and the constraints under which it is being done.  It is also used to
+return information back to the caller about the result of a writepage or
+writepages request.
+
+
+Handling errors during writeback
+--------------------------------
+
+Most applications that do buffered I/O will periodically call a file
+synchronization call (fsync, fdatasync, msync or sync_file_range) to
+ensure that data written has made it to the backing store.  When there
+is an error during writeback, they expect that error to be reported when
+a file sync request is made.  After an error has been reported on one
+request, subsequent requests on the same file descriptor should return
+0, unless further writeback errors have occurred since the previous file
+syncronization.
+
+Ideally, the kernel would report errors only on file descriptions on
+which writes were done that subsequently failed to be written back.  The
+generic pagecache infrastructure does not track the file descriptions
+that have dirtied each individual page however, so determining which
+file descriptors should get back an error is not possible.
+
+Instead, the generic writeback error tracking infrastructure in the
+kernel settles for reporting errors to fsync on all file descriptions
+that were open at the time that the error occurred.  In a situation with
+multiple writers, all of them will get back an error on a subsequent
+fsync, even if all of the writes done through that particular file
+descriptor succeeded (or even if there were no writes on that file
+descriptor at all).
+
+Filesystems that wish to use this infrastructure should call
+mapping_set_error to record the error in the address_space when it
+occurs.  Then, after writing back data from the pagecache in their
+file->fsync operation, they should call file_check_and_advance_wb_err to
+ensure that the struct file's error cursor has advanced to the correct
+point in the stream of errors emitted by the backing device(s).
+
+
+struct address_space_operations
+-------------------------------
+
+This describes how the VFS can manipulate mapping of a file to page
+cache in your filesystem.  The following members are defined:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+	struct address_space_operations {
+		int (*writepage)(struct page *page, struct writeback_control *wbc);
+		int (*read_folio)(struct file *, struct folio *);
+		int (*writepages)(struct address_space *, struct writeback_control *);
+		bool (*dirty_folio)(struct address_space *, struct folio *);
+		void (*readahead)(struct readahead_control *);
+		int (*write_begin)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping,
+				   loff_t pos, unsigned len,
+				struct page **pagep, void **fsdata);
+		int (*write_end)(struct file *, struct address_space *mapping,
+				 loff_t pos, unsigned len, unsigned copied,
+				 struct page *page, void *fsdata);
+		sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t);
+		void (*invalidate_folio) (struct folio *, size_t start, size_t len);
+		bool (*release_folio)(struct folio *, gfp_t);
+		void (*free_folio)(struct folio *);
+		ssize_t (*direct_IO)(struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *iter);
+		int (*migrate_folio)(struct mapping *, struct folio *dst,
+				struct folio *src, enum migrate_mode);
+		int (*launder_folio) (struct folio *);
+
+		bool (*is_partially_uptodate) (struct folio *, size_t from,
+					       size_t count);
+		void (*is_dirty_writeback)(struct folio *, bool *, bool *);
+		int (*error_remove_page) (struct mapping *mapping, struct page *page);
+		int (*swap_activate)(struct swap_info_struct *sis, struct file *f, sector_t *span)
+		int (*swap_deactivate)(struct file *);
+		int (*swap_rw)(struct kiocb *iocb, struct iov_iter *iter);
+	};
+
+``writepage``
+	called by the VM to write a dirty page to backing store.  This
+	may happen for data integrity reasons (i.e. 'sync'), or to free
+	up memory (flush).  The difference can be seen in
+	wbc->sync_mode.  The PG_Dirty flag has been cleared and
+	PageLocked is true.  writepage should start writeout, should set
+	PG_Writeback, and should make sure the page is unlocked, either
+	synchronously or asynchronously when the write operation
+	completes.
+
+	If wbc->sync_mode is WB_SYNC_NONE, ->writepage doesn't have to
+	try too hard if there are problems, and may choose to write out
+	other pages from the mapping if that is easier (e.g. due to
+	internal dependencies).  If it chooses not to start writeout, it
+	should return AOP_WRITEPAGE_ACTIVATE so that the VM will not
+	keep calling ->writepage on that page.
+
+	See the file "Locking" for more details.
+
+``read_folio``
+	Called by the page cache to read a folio from the backing store.
+	The 'file' argument supplies authentication information to network
+	filesystems, and is generally not used by block based filesystems.
+	It may be NULL if the caller does not have an open file (eg if
+	the kernel is performing a read for itself rather than on behalf
+	of a userspace process with an open file).
+
+	If the mapping does not support large folios, the folio will
+	contain a single page.	The folio will be locked when read_folio
+	is called.  If the read completes successfully, the folio should
+	be marked uptodate.  The filesystem should unlock the folio
+	once the read has completed, whether it was successful or not.
+	The filesystem does not need to modify the refcount on the folio;
+	the page cache holds a reference count and that will not be
+	released until the folio is unlocked.
+
+	Filesystems may implement ->read_folio() synchronously.
+	In normal operation, folios are read through the ->readahead()
+	method.  Only if this fails, or if the caller needs to wait for
+	the read to complete will the page cache call ->read_folio().
+	Filesystems should not attempt to perform their own readahead
+	in the ->read_folio() operation.
+
+	If the filesystem cannot perform the read at this time, it can
+	unlock the folio, do whatever action it needs to ensure that the
+	read will succeed in the future and return AOP_TRUNCATED_PAGE.
+	In this case, the caller should look up the folio, lock it,
+	and call ->read_folio again.
+
+	Callers may invoke the ->read_folio() method directly, but using
+	read_mapping_folio() will take care of locking, waiting for the
+	read to complete and handle cases such as AOP_TRUNCATED_PAGE.
+
+``writepages``
+	called by the VM to write out pages associated with the
+	address_space object.  If wbc->sync_mode is WB_SYNC_ALL, then
+	the writeback_control will specify a range of pages that must be
+	written out.  If it is WB_SYNC_NONE, then a nr_to_write is
+	given and that many pages should be written if possible.  If no
+	->writepages is given, then mpage_writepages is used instead.
+	This will choose pages from the address space that are tagged as
+	DIRTY and will pass them to ->writepage.
+
+``dirty_folio``
+	called by the VM to mark a folio as dirty.  This is particularly
+	needed if an address space attaches private data to a folio, and
+	that data needs to be updated when a folio is dirtied.  This is
+	called, for example, when a memory mapped page gets modified.
+	If defined, it should set the folio dirty flag, and the
+	PAGECACHE_TAG_DIRTY search mark in i_pages.
+
+``readahead``
+	Called by the VM to read pages associated with the address_space
+	object.  The pages are consecutive in the page cache and are
+	locked.  The implementation should decrement the page refcount
+	after starting I/O on each page.  Usually the page will be
+	unlocked by the I/O completion handler.  The set of pages are
+	divided into some sync pages followed by some async pages,
+	rac->ra->async_size gives the number of async pages.  The
+	filesystem should attempt to read all sync pages but may decide
+	to stop once it reaches the async pages.  If it does decide to
+	stop attempting I/O, it can simply return.  The caller will
+	remove the remaining pages from the address space, unlock them
+	and decrement the page refcount.  Set PageUptodate if the I/O
+	completes successfully.  Setting PageError on any page will be
+	ignored; simply unlock the page if an I/O error occurs.
+
+``write_begin``
+	Called by the generic buffered write code to ask the filesystem
+	to prepare to write len bytes at the given offset in the file.
+	The address_space should check that the write will be able to
+	complete, by allocating space if necessary and doing any other
+	internal housekeeping.  If the write will update parts of any
+	basic-blocks on storage, then those blocks should be pre-read
+	(if they haven't been read already) so that the updated blocks
+	can be written out properly.
+
+	The filesystem must return the locked pagecache page for the
+	specified offset, in ``*pagep``, for the caller to write into.
+
+	It must be able to cope with short writes (where the length
+	passed to write_begin is greater than the number of bytes copied
+	into the page).
+
+	A void * may be returned in fsdata, which then gets passed into
+	write_end.
+
+	Returns 0 on success; < 0 on failure (which is the error code),
+	in which case write_end is not called.
+
+``write_end``
+	After a successful write_begin, and data copy, write_end must be
+	called.  len is the original len passed to write_begin, and
+	copied is the amount that was able to be copied.
+
+	The filesystem must take care of unlocking the page and
+	releasing it refcount, and updating i_size.
+
+	Returns < 0 on failure, otherwise the number of bytes (<=
+	'copied') that were able to be copied into pagecache.
+
+``bmap``
+	called by the VFS to map a logical block offset within object to
+	physical block number.  This method is used by the FIBMAP ioctl
+	and for working with swap-files.  To be able to swap to a file,
+	the file must have a stable mapping to a block device.  The swap
+	system does not go through the filesystem but instead uses bmap
+	to find out where the blocks in the file are and uses those
+	addresses directly.
+
+``invalidate_folio``
+	If a folio has private data, then invalidate_folio will be
+	called when part or all of the folio is to be removed from the
+	address space.  This generally corresponds to either a
+	truncation, punch hole or a complete invalidation of the address
+	space (in the latter case 'offset' will always be 0 and 'length'
+	will be folio_size()).  Any private data associated with the folio
+	should be updated to reflect this truncation.  If offset is 0
+	and length is folio_size(), then the private data should be
+	released, because the folio must be able to be completely
+	discarded.  This may be done by calling the ->release_folio
+	function, but in this case the release MUST succeed.
+
+``release_folio``
+	release_folio is called on folios with private data to tell the
+	filesystem that the folio is about to be freed.  ->release_folio
+	should remove any private data from the folio and clear the
+	private flag.  If release_folio() fails, it should return false.
+	release_folio() is used in two distinct though related cases.
+	The first is when the VM wants to free a clean folio with no
+	active users.  If ->release_folio succeeds, the folio will be
+	removed from the address_space and be freed.
+
+	The second case is when a request has been made to invalidate
+	some or all folios in an address_space.  This can happen
+	through the fadvise(POSIX_FADV_DONTNEED) system call or by the
+	filesystem explicitly requesting it as nfs and 9p do (when they
+	believe the cache may be out of date with storage) by calling
+	invalidate_inode_pages2().  If the filesystem makes such a call,
+	and needs to be certain that all folios are invalidated, then
+	its release_folio will need to ensure this.  Possibly it can
+	clear the uptodate flag if it cannot free private data yet.
+
+``free_folio``
+	free_folio is called once the folio is no longer visible in the
+	page cache in order to allow the cleanup of any private data.
+	Since it may be called by the memory reclaimer, it should not
+	assume that the original address_space mapping still exists, and
+	it should not block.
+
+``direct_IO``
+	called by the generic read/write routines to perform direct_IO -
+	that is IO requests which bypass the page cache and transfer
+	data directly between the storage and the application's address
+	space.
+
+``migrate_folio``
+	This is used to compact the physical memory usage.  If the VM
+	wants to relocate a folio (maybe from a memory device that is
+	signalling imminent failure) it will pass a new folio and an old
+	folio to this function.  migrate_folio should transfer any private
+	data across and update any references that it has to the folio.
+
+``launder_folio``
+	Called before freeing a folio - it writes back the dirty folio.
+	To prevent redirtying the folio, it is kept locked during the
+	whole operation.
+
+``is_partially_uptodate``
+	Called by the VM when reading a file through the pagecache when
+	the underlying blocksize is smaller than the size of the folio.
+	If the required block is up to date then the read can complete
+	without needing I/O to bring the whole page up to date.
+
+``is_dirty_writeback``
+	Called by the VM when attempting to reclaim a folio.  The VM uses
+	dirty and writeback information to determine if it needs to
+	stall to allow flushers a chance to complete some IO.
+	Ordinarily it can use folio_test_dirty and folio_test_writeback but
+	some filesystems have more complex state (unstable folios in NFS
+	prevent reclaim) or do not set those flags due to locking
+	problems.  This callback allows a filesystem to indicate to the
+	VM if a folio should be treated as dirty or writeback for the
+	purposes of stalling.
+
+``error_remove_page``
+	normally set to generic_error_remove_page if truncation is ok
+	for this address space.  Used for memory failure handling.
+	Setting this implies you deal with pages going away under you,
+	unless you have them locked or reference counts increased.
+
+``swap_activate``
+
+	Called to prepare the given file for swap.  It should perform
+	any validation and preparation necessary to ensure that writes
+	can be performed with minimal memory allocation.  It should call
+	add_swap_extent(), or the helper iomap_swapfile_activate(), and
+	return the number of extents added.  If IO should be submitted
+	through ->swap_rw(), it should set SWP_FS_OPS, otherwise IO will
+	be submitted directly to the block device ``sis->bdev``.
+
+``swap_deactivate``
+	Called during swapoff on files where swap_activate was
+	successful.
+
+``swap_rw``
+	Called to read or write swap pages when SWP_FS_OPS is set.
+
+The File Object
+===============
+
+A file object represents a file opened by a process.  This is also known
+as an "open file description" in POSIX parlance.
+
+
+struct file_operations
+----------------------
+
+This describes how the VFS can manipulate an open file.  As of kernel
+4.18, the following members are defined:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+	struct file_operations {
+		struct module *owner;
+		loff_t (*llseek) (struct file *, loff_t, int);
+		ssize_t (*read) (struct file *, char __user *, size_t, loff_t *);
+		ssize_t (*write) (struct file *, const char __user *, size_t, loff_t *);
+		ssize_t (*read_iter) (struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *);
+		ssize_t (*write_iter) (struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *);
+		int (*iopoll)(struct kiocb *kiocb, bool spin);
+		int (*iterate) (struct file *, struct dir_context *);
+		int (*iterate_shared) (struct file *, struct dir_context *);
+		__poll_t (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *);
+		long (*unlocked_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
+		long (*compat_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
+		int (*mmap) (struct file *, struct vm_area_struct *);
+		int (*open) (struct inode *, struct file *);
+		int (*flush) (struct file *, fl_owner_t id);
+		int (*release) (struct inode *, struct file *);
+		int (*fsync) (struct file *, loff_t, loff_t, int datasync);
+		int (*fasync) (int, struct file *, int);
+		int (*lock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *);
+		ssize_t (*sendpage) (struct file *, struct page *, int, size_t, loff_t *, int);
+		unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long);
+		int (*check_flags)(int);
+		int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *);
+		ssize_t (*splice_write)(struct pipe_inode_info *, struct file *, loff_t *, size_t, unsigned int);
+		ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, loff_t *, struct pipe_inode_info *, size_t, unsigned int);
+		int (*setlease)(struct file *, long, struct file_lock **, void **);
+		long (*fallocate)(struct file *file, int mode, loff_t offset,
+				  loff_t len);
+		void (*show_fdinfo)(struct seq_file *m, struct file *f);
+	#ifndef CONFIG_MMU
+		unsigned (*mmap_capabilities)(struct file *);
+	#endif
+		ssize_t (*copy_file_range)(struct file *, loff_t, struct file *, loff_t, size_t, unsigned int);
+		loff_t (*remap_file_range)(struct file *file_in, loff_t pos_in,
+					   struct file *file_out, loff_t pos_out,
+					   loff_t len, unsigned int remap_flags);
+		int (*fadvise)(struct file *, loff_t, loff_t, int);
+	};
+
+Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless
+otherwise noted.
+
+``llseek``
+	called when the VFS needs to move the file position index
+
+``read``
+	called by read(2) and related system calls
+
+``read_iter``
+	possibly asynchronous read with iov_iter as destination
+
+``write``
+	called by write(2) and related system calls
+
+``write_iter``
+	possibly asynchronous write with iov_iter as source
+
+``iopoll``
+	called when aio wants to poll for completions on HIPRI iocbs
+
+``iterate``
+	called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents
+
+``iterate_shared``
+	called when the VFS needs to read the directory contents when
+	filesystem supports concurrent dir iterators
+
+``poll``
+	called by the VFS when a process wants to check if there is
+	activity on this file and (optionally) go to sleep until there
+	is activity.  Called by the select(2) and poll(2) system calls
+
+``unlocked_ioctl``
+	called by the ioctl(2) system call.
+
+``compat_ioctl``
+	called by the ioctl(2) system call when 32 bit system calls are
+	 used on 64 bit kernels.
+
+``mmap``
+	called by the mmap(2) system call
+
+``open``
+	called by the VFS when an inode should be opened.  When the VFS
+	opens a file, it creates a new "struct file".  It then calls the
+	open method for the newly allocated file structure.  You might
+	think that the open method really belongs in "struct
+	inode_operations", and you may be right.  I think it's done the
+	way it is because it makes filesystems simpler to implement.
+	The open() method is a good place to initialize the
+	"private_data" member in the file structure if you want to point
+	to a device structure
+
+``flush``
+	called by the close(2) system call to flush a file
+
+``release``
+	called when the last reference to an open file is closed
+
+``fsync``
+	called by the fsync(2) system call.  Also see the section above
+	entitled "Handling errors during writeback".
+
+``fasync``
+	called by the fcntl(2) system call when asynchronous
+	(non-blocking) mode is enabled for a file
+
+``lock``
+	called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_GETLK, F_SETLK, and
+	F_SETLKW commands
+
+``get_unmapped_area``
+	called by the mmap(2) system call
+
+``check_flags``
+	called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_SETFL command
+
+``flock``
+	called by the flock(2) system call
+
+``splice_write``
+	called by the VFS to splice data from a pipe to a file.  This
+	method is used by the splice(2) system call
+
+``splice_read``
+	called by the VFS to splice data from file to a pipe.  This
+	method is used by the splice(2) system call
+
+``setlease``
+	called by the VFS to set or release a file lock lease.  setlease
+	implementations should call generic_setlease to record or remove
+	the lease in the inode after setting it.
+
+``fallocate``
+	called by the VFS to preallocate blocks or punch a hole.
+
+``copy_file_range``
+	called by the copy_file_range(2) system call.
+
+``remap_file_range``
+	called by the ioctl(2) system call for FICLONERANGE and FICLONE
+	and FIDEDUPERANGE commands to remap file ranges.  An
+	implementation should remap len bytes at pos_in of the source
+	file into the dest file at pos_out.  Implementations must handle
+	callers passing in len == 0; this means "remap to the end of the
+	source file".  The return value should the number of bytes
+	remapped, or the usual negative error code if errors occurred
+	before any bytes were remapped.  The remap_flags parameter
+	accepts REMAP_FILE_* flags.  If REMAP_FILE_DEDUP is set then the
+	implementation must only remap if the requested file ranges have
+	identical contents.  If REMAP_FILE_CAN_SHORTEN is set, the caller is
+	ok with the implementation shortening the request length to
+	satisfy alignment or EOF requirements (or any other reason).
+
+``fadvise``
+	possibly called by the fadvise64() system call.
+
+Note that the file operations are implemented by the specific
+filesystem in which the inode resides.  When opening a device node
+(character or block special) most filesystems will call special
+support routines in the VFS which will locate the required device
+driver information.  These support routines replace the filesystem file
+operations with those for the device driver, and then proceed to call
+the new open() method for the file.  This is how opening a device file
+in the filesystem eventually ends up calling the device driver open()
+method.
+
+
+Directory Entry Cache (dcache)
+==============================
+
+
+struct dentry_operations
+------------------------
+
+This describes how a filesystem can overload the standard dentry
+operations.  Dentries and the dcache are the domain of the VFS and the
+individual filesystem implementations.  Device drivers have no business
+here.  These methods may be set to NULL, as they are either optional or
+the VFS uses a default.  As of kernel 2.6.22, the following members are
+defined:
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+	struct dentry_operations {
+		int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+		int (*d_weak_revalidate)(struct dentry *, unsigned int);
+		int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, struct qstr *);
+		int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *,
+				 unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *);
+		int (*d_delete)(const struct dentry *);
+		int (*d_init)(struct dentry *);
+		void (*d_release)(struct dentry *);
+		void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *);
+		char *(*d_dname)(struct dentry *, char *, int);
+		struct vfsmount *(*d_automount)(struct path *);
+		int (*d_manage)(const struct path *, bool);
+		struct dentry *(*d_real)(struct dentry *, const struct inode *);
+	};
+
+``d_revalidate``
+	called when the VFS needs to revalidate a dentry.  This is
+	called whenever a name look-up finds a dentry in the dcache.
+	Most local filesystems leave this as NULL, because all their
+	dentries in the dcache are valid.  Network filesystems are
+	different since things can change on the server without the
+	client necessarily being aware of it.
+
+	This function should return a positive value if the dentry is
+	still valid, and zero or a negative error code if it isn't.
+
+	d_revalidate may be called in rcu-walk mode (flags &
+	LOOKUP_RCU).  If in rcu-walk mode, the filesystem must
+	revalidate the dentry without blocking or storing to the dentry,
+	d_parent and d_inode should not be used without care (because
+	they can change and, in d_inode case, even become NULL under
+	us).
+
+	If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle,
+	return
+	-ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode.
+
+``d_weak_revalidate``
+	called when the VFS needs to revalidate a "jumped" dentry.  This
+	is called when a path-walk ends at dentry that was not acquired
+	by doing a lookup in the parent directory.  This includes "/",
+	"." and "..", as well as procfs-style symlinks and mountpoint
+	traversal.
+
+	In this case, we are less concerned with whether the dentry is
+	still fully correct, but rather that the inode is still valid.
+	As with d_revalidate, most local filesystems will set this to
+	NULL since their dcache entries are always valid.
+
+	This function has the same return code semantics as
+	d_revalidate.
+
+	d_weak_revalidate is only called after leaving rcu-walk mode.
+
+``d_hash``
+	called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table.  The first
+	dentry passed to d_hash is the parent directory that the name is
+	to be hashed into.
+
+	Same locking and synchronisation rules as d_compare regarding
+	what is safe to dereference etc.
+
+``d_compare``
+	called to compare a dentry name with a given name.  The first
+	dentry is the parent of the dentry to be compared, the second is
+	the child dentry.  len and name string are properties of the
+	dentry to be compared.  qstr is the name to compare it with.
+
+	Must be constant and idempotent, and should not take locks if
+	possible, and should not or store into the dentry.  Should not
+	dereference pointers outside the dentry without lots of care
+	(eg.  d_parent, d_inode, d_name should not be used).
+
+	However, our vfsmount is pinned, and RCU held, so the dentries
+	and inodes won't disappear, neither will our sb or filesystem
+	module.  ->d_sb may be used.
+
+	It is a tricky calling convention because it needs to be called
+	under "rcu-walk", ie. without any locks or references on things.
+
+``d_delete``
+	called when the last reference to a dentry is dropped and the
+	dcache is deciding whether or not to cache it.  Return 1 to
+	delete immediately, or 0 to cache the dentry.  Default is NULL
+	which means to always cache a reachable dentry.  d_delete must
+	be constant and idempotent.
+
+``d_init``
+	called when a dentry is allocated
+
+``d_release``
+	called when a dentry is really deallocated
+
+``d_iput``
+	called when a dentry loses its inode (just prior to its being
+	deallocated).  The default when this is NULL is that the VFS
+	calls iput().  If you define this method, you must call iput()
+	yourself
+
+``d_dname``
+	called when the pathname of a dentry should be generated.
+	Useful for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to
+	delay pathname generation.  (Instead of doing it when dentry is
+	created, it's done only when the path is needed.).  Real
+	filesystems probably dont want to use it, because their dentries
+	are present in global dcache hash, so their hash should be an
+	invariant.  As no lock is held, d_dname() should not try to
+	modify the dentry itself, unless appropriate SMP safety is used.
+	CAUTION : d_path() logic is quite tricky.  The correct way to
+	return for example "Hello" is to put it at the end of the
+	buffer, and returns a pointer to the first char.
+	dynamic_dname() helper function is provided to take care of
+	this.
+
+	Example :
+
+.. code-block:: c
+
+	static char *pipefs_dname(struct dentry *dent, char *buffer, int buflen)
+	{
+		return dynamic_dname(dentry, buffer, buflen, "pipe:[%lu]",
+				dentry->d_inode->i_ino);
+	}
+
+``d_automount``
+	called when an automount dentry is to be traversed (optional).
+	This should create a new VFS mount record and return the record
+	to the caller.  The caller is supplied with a path parameter
+	giving the automount directory to describe the automount target
+	and the parent VFS mount record to provide inheritable mount
+	parameters.  NULL should be returned if someone else managed to
+	make the automount first.  If the vfsmount creation failed, then
+	an error code should be returned.  If -EISDIR is returned, then
+	the directory will be treated as an ordinary directory and
+	returned to pathwalk to continue walking.
+
+	If a vfsmount is returned, the caller will attempt to mount it
+	on the mountpoint and will remove the vfsmount from its
+	expiration list in the case of failure.  The vfsmount should be
+	returned with 2 refs on it to prevent automatic expiration - the
+	caller will clean up the additional ref.
+
+	This function is only used if DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT is set on
+	the dentry.  This is set by __d_instantiate() if S_AUTOMOUNT is
+	set on the inode being added.
+
+``d_manage``
+	called to allow the filesystem to manage the transition from a
+	dentry (optional).  This allows autofs, for example, to hold up
+	clients waiting to explore behind a 'mountpoint' while letting
+	the daemon go past and construct the subtree there.  0 should be
+	returned to let the calling process continue.  -EISDIR can be
+	returned to tell pathwalk to use this directory as an ordinary
+	directory and to ignore anything mounted on it and not to check
+	the automount flag.  Any other error code will abort pathwalk
+	completely.
+
+	If the 'rcu_walk' parameter is true, then the caller is doing a
+	pathwalk in RCU-walk mode.  Sleeping is not permitted in this
+	mode, and the caller can be asked to leave it and call again by
+	returning -ECHILD.  -EISDIR may also be returned to tell
+	pathwalk to ignore d_automount or any mounts.
+
+	This function is only used if DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT is set on
+	the dentry being transited from.
+
+``d_real``
+	overlay/union type filesystems implement this method to return
+	one of the underlying dentries hidden by the overlay.  It is
+	used in two different modes:
+
+	Called from file_dentry() it returns the real dentry matching
+	the inode argument.  The real dentry may be from a lower layer
+	already copied up, but still referenced from the file.  This
+	mode is selected with a non-NULL inode argument.
+
+	With NULL inode the topmost real underlying dentry is returned.
+
+Each dentry has a pointer to its parent dentry, as well as a hash list
+of child dentries.  Child dentries are basically like files in a
+directory.
+
+
+Directory Entry Cache API
+--------------------------
+
+There are a number of functions defined which permit a filesystem to
+manipulate dentries:
+
+``dget``
+	open a new handle for an existing dentry (this just increments
+	the usage count)
+
+``dput``
+	close a handle for a dentry (decrements the usage count).  If
+	the usage count drops to 0, and the dentry is still in its
+	parent's hash, the "d_delete" method is called to check whether
+	it should be cached.  If it should not be cached, or if the
+	dentry is not hashed, it is deleted.  Otherwise cached dentries
+	are put into an LRU list to be reclaimed on memory shortage.
+
+``d_drop``
+	this unhashes a dentry from its parents hash list.  A subsequent
+	call to dput() will deallocate the dentry if its usage count
+	drops to 0
+
+``d_delete``
+	delete a dentry.  If there are no other open references to the
+	dentry then the dentry is turned into a negative dentry (the
+	d_iput() method is called).  If there are other references, then
+	d_drop() is called instead
+
+``d_add``
+	add a dentry to its parents hash list and then calls
+	d_instantiate()
+
+``d_instantiate``
+	add a dentry to the alias hash list for the inode and updates
+	the "d_inode" member.  The "i_count" member in the inode
+	structure should be set/incremented.  If the inode pointer is
+	NULL, the dentry is called a "negative dentry".  This function
+	is commonly called when an inode is created for an existing
+	negative dentry
+
+``d_lookup``
+	look up a dentry given its parent and path name component It
+	looks up the child of that given name from the dcache hash
+	table.  If it is found, the reference count is incremented and
+	the dentry is returned.  The caller must use dput() to free the
+	dentry when it finishes using it.
+
+
+Mount Options
+=============
+
+
+Parsing options
+---------------
+
+On mount and remount the filesystem is passed a string containing a
+comma separated list of mount options.  The options can have either of
+these forms:
+
+  option
+  option=value
+
+The <linux/parser.h> header defines an API that helps parse these
+options.  There are plenty of examples on how to use it in existing
+filesystems.
+
+
+Showing options
+---------------
+
+If a filesystem accepts mount options, it must define show_options() to
+show all the currently active options.  The rules are:
+
+  - options MUST be shown which are not default or their values differ
+    from the default
+
+  - options MAY be shown which are enabled by default or have their
+    default value
+
+Options used only internally between a mount helper and the kernel (such
+as file descriptors), or which only have an effect during the mounting
+(such as ones controlling the creation of a journal) are exempt from the
+above rules.
+
+The underlying reason for the above rules is to make sure, that a mount
+can be accurately replicated (e.g. umounting and mounting again) based
+on the information found in /proc/mounts.
+
+
+Resources
+=========
+
+(Note some of these resources are not up-to-date with the latest kernel
+ version.)
+
+Creating Linux virtual filesystems. 2002
+    <https://lwn.net/Articles/13325/>
+
+The Linux Virtual File-system Layer by Neil Brown. 1999
+    <http://www.cse.unsw.edu.au/~neilb/oss/linux-commentary/vfs.html>
+
+A tour of the Linux VFS by Michael K. Johnson. 1996
+    <https://www.tldp.org/LDP/khg/HyperNews/get/fs/vfstour.html>
+
+A small trail through the Linux kernel by Andries Brouwer. 2001
+    <https://www.win.tue.nl/~aeb/linux/vfs/trail.html>
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/virtiofs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/virtiofs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fd4d2484e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/virtiofs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. _virtiofs_index:
+
+===================================================
+virtiofs: virtio-fs host<->guest shared file system
+===================================================
+
+- Copyright (C) 2019 Red Hat, Inc.
+
+Introduction
+============
+The virtiofs file system for Linux implements a driver for the paravirtualized
+VIRTIO "virtio-fs" device for guest<->host file system sharing.  It allows a
+guest to mount a directory that has been exported on the host.
+
+Guests often require access to files residing on the host or remote systems.
+Use cases include making files available to new guests during installation,
+booting from a root file system located on the host, persistent storage for
+stateless or ephemeral guests, and sharing a directory between guests.
+
+Although it is possible to use existing network file systems for some of these
+tasks, they require configuration steps that are hard to automate and they
+expose the storage network to the guest.  The virtio-fs device was designed to
+solve these problems by providing file system access without networking.
+
+Furthermore the virtio-fs device takes advantage of the co-location of the
+guest and host to increase performance and provide semantics that are not
+possible with network file systems.
+
+Usage
+=====
+Mount file system with tag ``myfs`` on ``/mnt``:
+
+.. code-block:: sh
+
+  guest# mount -t virtiofs myfs /mnt
+
+Please see https://virtio-fs.gitlab.io/ for details on how to configure QEMU
+and the virtiofsd daemon.
+
+Mount options
+-------------
+
+virtiofs supports general VFS mount options, for example, remount,
+ro, rw, context, etc. It also supports FUSE mount options.
+
+atime behavior
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+The atime-related mount options, for example, noatime, strictatime,
+are ignored. The atime behavior for virtiofs is the same as the
+underlying filesystem of the directory that has been exported
+on the host.
+
+Internals
+=========
+Since the virtio-fs device uses the FUSE protocol for file system requests, the
+virtiofs file system for Linux is integrated closely with the FUSE file system
+client.  The guest acts as the FUSE client while the host acts as the FUSE
+server.  The /dev/fuse interface between the kernel and userspace is replaced
+with the virtio-fs device interface.
+
+FUSE requests are placed into a virtqueue and processed by the host.  The
+response portion of the buffer is filled in by the host and the guest handles
+the request completion.
+
+Mapping /dev/fuse to virtqueues requires solving differences in semantics
+between /dev/fuse and virtqueues.  Each time the /dev/fuse device is read, the
+FUSE client may choose which request to transfer, making it possible to
+prioritize certain requests over others.  Virtqueues have queue semantics and
+it is not possible to change the order of requests that have been enqueued.
+This is especially important if the virtqueue becomes full since it is then
+impossible to add high priority requests.  In order to address this difference,
+the virtio-fs device uses a "hiprio" virtqueue specifically for requests that
+have priority over normal requests.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6402ab8e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,1087 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==================
+XFS Logging Design
+==================
+
+Preamble
+========
+
+This document describes the design and algorithms that the XFS journalling
+subsystem is based on. This document describes the design and algorithms that
+the XFS journalling subsystem is based on so that readers may familiarize
+themselves with the general concepts of how transaction processing in XFS works.
+
+We begin with an overview of transactions in XFS, followed by describing how
+transaction reservations are structured and accounted, and then move into how we
+guarantee forwards progress for long running transactions with finite initial
+reservations bounds. At this point we need to explain how relogging works. With
+the basic concepts covered, the design of the delayed logging mechanism is
+documented.
+
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+XFS uses Write Ahead Logging for ensuring changes to the filesystem metadata
+are atomic and recoverable. For reasons of space and time efficiency, the
+logging mechanisms are varied and complex, combining intents, logical and
+physical logging mechanisms to provide the necessary recovery guarantees the
+filesystem requires.
+
+Some objects, such as inodes and dquots, are logged in logical format where the
+details logged are made up of the changes to in-core structures rather than
+on-disk structures. Other objects - typically buffers - have their physical
+changes logged. Long running atomic modifications have individual changes
+chained together by intents, ensuring that journal recovery can restart and
+finish an operation that was only partially done when the system stopped
+functioning.
+
+The reason for these differences is to keep the amount of log space and CPU time
+required to process objects being modified as small as possible and hence the
+logging overhead as low as possible. Some items are very frequently modified,
+and some parts of objects are more frequently modified than others, so keeping
+the overhead of metadata logging low is of prime importance.
+
+The method used to log an item or chain modifications together isn't
+particularly important in the scope of this document. It suffices to know that
+the method used for logging a particular object or chaining modifications
+together are different and are dependent on the object and/or modification being
+performed. The logging subsystem only cares that certain specific rules are
+followed to guarantee forwards progress and prevent deadlocks.
+
+
+Transactions in XFS
+===================
+
+XFS has two types of high level transactions, defined by the type of log space
+reservation they take. These are known as "one shot" and "permanent"
+transactions. Permanent transaction reservations can take reservations that span
+commit boundaries, whilst "one shot" transactions are for a single atomic
+modification.
+
+The type and size of reservation must be matched to the modification taking
+place.  This means that permanent transactions can be used for one-shot
+modifications, but one-shot reservations cannot be used for permanent
+transactions.
+
+In the code, a one-shot transaction pattern looks somewhat like this::
+
+	tp = xfs_trans_alloc(<reservation>)
+	<lock items>
+	<join item to transaction>
+	<do modification>
+	xfs_trans_commit(tp);
+
+As items are modified in the transaction, the dirty regions in those items are
+tracked via the transaction handle.  Once the transaction is committed, all
+resources joined to it are released, along with the remaining unused reservation
+space that was taken at the transaction allocation time.
+
+In contrast, a permanent transaction is made up of multiple linked individual
+transactions, and the pattern looks like this::
+
+	tp = xfs_trans_alloc(<reservation>)
+	xfs_ilock(ip, XFS_ILOCK_EXCL)
+
+	loop {
+		xfs_trans_ijoin(tp, 0);
+		<do modification>
+		xfs_trans_log_inode(tp, ip);
+		xfs_trans_roll(&tp);
+	}
+
+	xfs_trans_commit(tp);
+	xfs_iunlock(ip, XFS_ILOCK_EXCL);
+
+While this might look similar to a one-shot transaction, there is an important
+difference: xfs_trans_roll() performs a specific operation that links two
+transactions together::
+
+	ntp = xfs_trans_dup(tp);
+	xfs_trans_commit(tp);
+	xfs_trans_reserve(ntp);
+
+This results in a series of "rolling transactions" where the inode is locked
+across the entire chain of transactions.  Hence while this series of rolling
+transactions is running, nothing else can read from or write to the inode and
+this provides a mechanism for complex changes to appear atomic from an external
+observer's point of view.
+
+It is important to note that a series of rolling transactions in a permanent
+transaction does not form an atomic change in the journal. While each
+individual modification is atomic, the chain is *not atomic*. If we crash half
+way through, then recovery will only replay up to the last transactional
+modification the loop made that was committed to the journal.
+
+This affects long running permanent transactions in that it is not possible to
+predict how much of a long running operation will actually be recovered because
+there is no guarantee of how much of the operation reached stale storage. Hence
+if a long running operation requires multiple transactions to fully complete,
+the high level operation must use intents and deferred operations to guarantee
+recovery can complete the operation once the first transactions is persisted in
+the on-disk journal.
+
+
+Transactions are Asynchronous
+=============================
+
+In XFS, all high level transactions are asynchronous by default. This means that
+xfs_trans_commit() does not guarantee that the modification has been committed
+to stable storage when it returns. Hence when a system crashes, not all the
+completed transactions will be replayed during recovery.
+
+However, the logging subsystem does provide global ordering guarantees, such
+that if a specific change is seen after recovery, all metadata modifications
+that were committed prior to that change will also be seen.
+
+For single shot operations that need to reach stable storage immediately, or
+ensuring that a long running permanent transaction is fully committed once it is
+complete, we can explicitly tag a transaction as synchronous. This will trigger
+a "log force" to flush the outstanding committed transactions to stable storage
+in the journal and wait for that to complete.
+
+Synchronous transactions are rarely used, however, because they limit logging
+throughput to the IO latency limitations of the underlying storage. Instead, we
+tend to use log forces to ensure modifications are on stable storage only when
+a user operation requires a synchronisation point to occur (e.g. fsync).
+
+
+Transaction Reservations
+========================
+
+It has been mentioned a number of times now that the logging subsystem needs to
+provide a forwards progress guarantee so that no modification ever stalls
+because it can't be written to the journal due to a lack of space in the
+journal. This is achieved by the transaction reservations that are made when
+a transaction is first allocated. For permanent transactions, these reservations
+are maintained as part of the transaction rolling mechanism.
+
+A transaction reservation provides a guarantee that there is physical log space
+available to write the modification into the journal before we start making
+modifications to objects and items. As such, the reservation needs to be large
+enough to take into account the amount of metadata that the change might need to
+log in the worst case. This means that if we are modifying a btree in the
+transaction, we have to reserve enough space to record a full leaf-to-root split
+of the btree. As such, the reservations are quite complex because we have to
+take into account all the hidden changes that might occur.
+
+For example, a user data extent allocation involves allocating an extent from
+free space, which modifies the free space trees. That's two btrees.  Inserting
+the extent into the inode's extent map might require a split of the extent map
+btree, which requires another allocation that can modify the free space trees
+again.  Then we might have to update reverse mappings, which modifies yet
+another btree which might require more space. And so on.  Hence the amount of
+metadata that a "simple" operation can modify can be quite large.
+
+This "worst case" calculation provides us with the static "unit reservation"
+for the transaction that is calculated at mount time. We must guarantee that the
+log has this much space available before the transaction is allowed to proceed
+so that when we come to write the dirty metadata into the log we don't run out
+of log space half way through the write.
+
+For one-shot transactions, a single unit space reservation is all that is
+required for the transaction to proceed. For permanent transactions, however, we
+also have a "log count" that affects the size of the reservation that is to be
+made.
+
+While a permanent transaction can get by with a single unit of space
+reservation, it is somewhat inefficient to do this as it requires the
+transaction rolling mechanism to re-reserve space on every transaction roll. We
+know from the implementation of the permanent transactions how many transaction
+rolls are likely for the common modifications that need to be made.
+
+For example, an inode allocation is typically two transactions - one to
+physically allocate a free inode chunk on disk, and another to allocate an inode
+from an inode chunk that has free inodes in it.  Hence for an inode allocation
+transaction, we might set the reservation log count to a value of 2 to indicate
+that the common/fast path transaction will commit two linked transactions in a
+chain. Each time a permanent transaction rolls, it consumes an entire unit
+reservation.
+
+Hence when the permanent transaction is first allocated, the log space
+reservation is increased from a single unit reservation to multiple unit
+reservations. That multiple is defined by the reservation log count, and this
+means we can roll the transaction multiple times before we have to re-reserve
+log space when we roll the transaction. This ensures that the common
+modifications we make only need to reserve log space once.
+
+If the log count for a permanent transaction reaches zero, then it needs to
+re-reserve physical space in the log. This is somewhat complex, and requires
+an understanding of how the log accounts for space that has been reserved.
+
+
+Log Space Accounting
+====================
+
+The position in the log is typically referred to as a Log Sequence Number (LSN).
+The log is circular, so the positions in the log are defined by the combination
+of a cycle number - the number of times the log has been overwritten - and the
+offset into the log.  A LSN carries the cycle in the upper 32 bits and the
+offset in the lower 32 bits. The offset is in units of "basic blocks" (512
+bytes). Hence we can do realtively simple LSN based math to keep track of
+available space in the log.
+
+Log space accounting is done via a pair of constructs called "grant heads".  The
+position of the grant heads is an absolute value, so the amount of space
+available in the log is defined by the distance between the position of the
+grant head and the current log tail. That is, how much space can be
+reserved/consumed before the grant heads would fully wrap the log and overtake
+the tail position.
+
+The first grant head is the "reserve" head. This tracks the byte count of the
+reservations currently held by active transactions. It is a purely in-memory
+accounting of the space reservation and, as such, actually tracks byte offsets
+into the log rather than basic blocks. Hence it technically isn't using LSNs to
+represent the log position, but it is still treated like a split {cycle,offset}
+tuple for the purposes of tracking reservation space.
+
+The reserve grant head is used to accurately account for exact transaction
+reservations amounts and the exact byte count that modifications actually make
+and need to write into the log. The reserve head is used to prevent new
+transactions from taking new reservations when the head reaches the current
+tail. It will block new reservations in a FIFO queue and as the log tail moves
+forward it will wake them in order once sufficient space is available. This FIFO
+mechanism ensures no transaction is starved of resources when log space
+shortages occur.
+
+The other grant head is the "write" head. Unlike the reserve head, this grant
+head contains an LSN and it tracks the physical space usage in the log. While
+this might sound like it is accounting the same state as the reserve grant head
+- and it mostly does track exactly the same location as the reserve grant head -
+there are critical differences in behaviour between them that provides the
+forwards progress guarantees that rolling permanent transactions require.
+
+These differences when a permanent transaction is rolled and the internal "log
+count" reaches zero and the initial set of unit reservations have been
+exhausted. At this point, we still require a log space reservation to continue
+the next transaction in the sequeunce, but we have none remaining. We cannot
+sleep during the transaction commit process waiting for new log space to become
+available, as we may end up on the end of the FIFO queue and the items we have
+locked while we sleep could end up pinning the tail of the log before there is
+enough free space in the log to fulfill all of the pending reservations and
+then wake up transaction commit in progress.
+
+To take a new reservation without sleeping requires us to be able to take a
+reservation even if there is no reservation space currently available. That is,
+we need to be able to *overcommit* the log reservation space. As has already
+been detailed, we cannot overcommit physical log space. However, the reserve
+grant head does not track physical space - it only accounts for the amount of
+reservations we currently have outstanding. Hence if the reserve head passes
+over the tail of the log all it means is that new reservations will be throttled
+immediately and remain throttled until the log tail is moved forward far enough
+to remove the overcommit and start taking new reservations. In other words, we
+can overcommit the reserve head without violating the physical log head and tail
+rules.
+
+As a result, permanent transactions only "regrant" reservation space during
+xfs_trans_commit() calls, while the physical log space reservation - tracked by
+the write head - is then reserved separately by a call to xfs_log_reserve()
+after the commit completes. Once the commit completes, we can sleep waiting for
+physical log space to be reserved from the write grant head, but only if one
+critical rule has been observed::
+
+	Code using permanent reservations must always log the items they hold
+	locked across each transaction they roll in the chain.
+
+"Re-logging" the locked items on every transaction roll ensures that the items
+attached to the transaction chain being rolled are always relocated to the
+physical head of the log and so do not pin the tail of the log. If a locked item
+pins the tail of the log when we sleep on the write reservation, then we will
+deadlock the log as we cannot take the locks needed to write back that item and
+move the tail of the log forwards to free up write grant space. Re-logging the
+locked items avoids this deadlock and guarantees that the log reservation we are
+making cannot self-deadlock.
+
+If all rolling transactions obey this rule, then they can all make forwards
+progress independently because nothing will block the progress of the log
+tail moving forwards and hence ensuring that write grant space is always
+(eventually) made available to permanent transactions no matter how many times
+they roll.
+
+
+Re-logging Explained
+====================
+
+XFS allows multiple separate modifications to a single object to be carried in
+the log at any given time.  This allows the log to avoid needing to flush each
+change to disk before recording a new change to the object. XFS does this via a
+method called "re-logging". Conceptually, this is quite simple - all it requires
+is that any new change to the object is recorded with a *new copy* of all the
+existing changes in the new transaction that is written to the log.
+
+That is, if we have a sequence of changes A through to F, and the object was
+written to disk after change D, we would see in the log the following series
+of transactions, their contents and the log sequence number (LSN) of the
+transaction::
+
+	Transaction		Contents	LSN
+	   A			   A		   X
+	   B			  A+B		  X+n
+	   C			 A+B+C		 X+n+m
+	   D			A+B+C+D		X+n+m+o
+	    <object written to disk>
+	   E			   E		   Y (> X+n+m+o)
+	   F			  E+F		  Y+p
+
+In other words, each time an object is relogged, the new transaction contains
+the aggregation of all the previous changes currently held only in the log.
+
+This relogging technique allows objects to be moved forward in the log so that
+an object being relogged does not prevent the tail of the log from ever moving
+forward.  This can be seen in the table above by the changing (increasing) LSN
+of each subsequent transaction, and it's the technique that allows us to
+implement long-running, multiple-commit permanent transactions. 
+
+A typical example of a rolling transaction is the removal of extents from an
+inode which can only be done at a rate of two extents per transaction because
+of reservation size limitations. Hence a rolling extent removal transaction
+keeps relogging the inode and btree buffers as they get modified in each
+removal operation. This keeps them moving forward in the log as the operation
+progresses, ensuring that current operation never gets blocked by itself if the
+log wraps around.
+
+Hence it can be seen that the relogging operation is fundamental to the correct
+working of the XFS journalling subsystem. From the above description, most
+people should be able to see why the XFS metadata operations writes so much to
+the log - repeated operations to the same objects write the same changes to
+the log over and over again. Worse is the fact that objects tend to get
+dirtier as they get relogged, so each subsequent transaction is writing more
+metadata into the log.
+
+It should now also be obvious how relogging and asynchronous transactions go
+hand in hand. That is, transactions don't get written to the physical journal
+until either a log buffer is filled (a log buffer can hold multiple
+transactions) or a synchronous operation forces the log buffers holding the
+transactions to disk. This means that XFS is doing aggregation of transactions
+in memory - batching them, if you like - to minimise the impact of the log IO on
+transaction throughput.
+
+The limitation on asynchronous transaction throughput is the number and size of
+log buffers made available by the log manager. By default there are 8 log
+buffers available and the size of each is 32kB - the size can be increased up
+to 256kB by use of a mount option.
+
+Effectively, this gives us the maximum bound of outstanding metadata changes
+that can be made to the filesystem at any point in time - if all the log
+buffers are full and under IO, then no more transactions can be committed until
+the current batch completes. It is now common for a single current CPU core to
+be to able to issue enough transactions to keep the log buffers full and under
+IO permanently. Hence the XFS journalling subsystem can be considered to be IO
+bound.
+
+Delayed Logging: Concepts
+=========================
+
+The key thing to note about the asynchronous logging combined with the
+relogging technique XFS uses is that we can be relogging changed objects
+multiple times before they are committed to disk in the log buffers. If we
+return to the previous relogging example, it is entirely possible that
+transactions A through D are committed to disk in the same log buffer.
+
+That is, a single log buffer may contain multiple copies of the same object,
+but only one of those copies needs to be there - the last one "D", as it
+contains all the changes from the previous changes. In other words, we have one
+necessary copy in the log buffer, and three stale copies that are simply
+wasting space. When we are doing repeated operations on the same set of
+objects, these "stale objects" can be over 90% of the space used in the log
+buffers. It is clear that reducing the number of stale objects written to the
+log would greatly reduce the amount of metadata we write to the log, and this
+is the fundamental goal of delayed logging.
+
+From a conceptual point of view, XFS is already doing relogging in memory (where
+memory == log buffer), only it is doing it extremely inefficiently. It is using
+logical to physical formatting to do the relogging because there is no
+infrastructure to keep track of logical changes in memory prior to physically
+formatting the changes in a transaction to the log buffer. Hence we cannot avoid
+accumulating stale objects in the log buffers.
+
+Delayed logging is the name we've given to keeping and tracking transactional
+changes to objects in memory outside the log buffer infrastructure. Because of
+the relogging concept fundamental to the XFS journalling subsystem, this is
+actually relatively easy to do - all the changes to logged items are already
+tracked in the current infrastructure. The big problem is how to accumulate
+them and get them to the log in a consistent, recoverable manner.
+Describing the problems and how they have been solved is the focus of this
+document.
+
+One of the key changes that delayed logging makes to the operation of the
+journalling subsystem is that it disassociates the amount of outstanding
+metadata changes from the size and number of log buffers available. In other
+words, instead of there only being a maximum of 2MB of transaction changes not
+written to the log at any point in time, there may be a much greater amount
+being accumulated in memory. Hence the potential for loss of metadata on a
+crash is much greater than for the existing logging mechanism.
+
+It should be noted that this does not change the guarantee that log recovery
+will result in a consistent filesystem. What it does mean is that as far as the
+recovered filesystem is concerned, there may be many thousands of transactions
+that simply did not occur as a result of the crash. This makes it even more
+important that applications that care about their data use fsync() where they
+need to ensure application level data integrity is maintained.
+
+It should be noted that delayed logging is not an innovative new concept that
+warrants rigorous proofs to determine whether it is correct or not. The method
+of accumulating changes in memory for some period before writing them to the
+log is used effectively in many filesystems including ext3 and ext4. Hence
+no time is spent in this document trying to convince the reader that the
+concept is sound. Instead it is simply considered a "solved problem" and as
+such implementing it in XFS is purely an exercise in software engineering.
+
+The fundamental requirements for delayed logging in XFS are simple:
+
+	1. Reduce the amount of metadata written to the log by at least
+	   an order of magnitude.
+	2. Supply sufficient statistics to validate Requirement #1.
+	3. Supply sufficient new tracing infrastructure to be able to debug
+	   problems with the new code.
+	4. No on-disk format change (metadata or log format).
+	5. Enable and disable with a mount option.
+	6. No performance regressions for synchronous transaction workloads.
+
+Delayed Logging: Design
+=======================
+
+Storing Changes
+---------------
+
+The problem with accumulating changes at a logical level (i.e. just using the
+existing log item dirty region tracking) is that when it comes to writing the
+changes to the log buffers, we need to ensure that the object we are formatting
+is not changing while we do this. This requires locking the object to prevent
+concurrent modification. Hence flushing the logical changes to the log would
+require us to lock every object, format them, and then unlock them again.
+
+This introduces lots of scope for deadlocks with transactions that are already
+running. For example, a transaction has object A locked and modified, but needs
+the delayed logging tracking lock to commit the transaction. However, the
+flushing thread has the delayed logging tracking lock already held, and is
+trying to get the lock on object A to flush it to the log buffer. This appears
+to be an unsolvable deadlock condition, and it was solving this problem that
+was the barrier to implementing delayed logging for so long.
+
+The solution is relatively simple - it just took a long time to recognise it.
+Put simply, the current logging code formats the changes to each item into an
+vector array that points to the changed regions in the item. The log write code
+simply copies the memory these vectors point to into the log buffer during
+transaction commit while the item is locked in the transaction. Instead of
+using the log buffer as the destination of the formatting code, we can use an
+allocated memory buffer big enough to fit the formatted vector.
+
+If we then copy the vector into the memory buffer and rewrite the vector to
+point to the memory buffer rather than the object itself, we now have a copy of
+the changes in a format that is compatible with the log buffer writing code.
+that does not require us to lock the item to access. This formatting and
+rewriting can all be done while the object is locked during transaction commit,
+resulting in a vector that is transactionally consistent and can be accessed
+without needing to lock the owning item.
+
+Hence we avoid the need to lock items when we need to flush outstanding
+asynchronous transactions to the log. The differences between the existing
+formatting method and the delayed logging formatting can be seen in the
+diagram below.
+
+Current format log vector::
+
+    Object    +---------------------------------------------+
+    Vector 1      +----+
+    Vector 2                    +----+
+    Vector 3                                   +----------+
+
+After formatting::
+
+    Log Buffer    +-V1-+-V2-+----V3----+
+
+Delayed logging vector::
+
+    Object    +---------------------------------------------+
+    Vector 1      +----+
+    Vector 2                    +----+
+    Vector 3                                   +----------+
+
+After formatting::
+
+    Memory Buffer +-V1-+-V2-+----V3----+
+    Vector 1      +----+
+    Vector 2           +----+
+    Vector 3                +----------+
+
+The memory buffer and associated vector need to be passed as a single object,
+but still need to be associated with the parent object so if the object is
+relogged we can replace the current memory buffer with a new memory buffer that
+contains the latest changes.
+
+The reason for keeping the vector around after we've formatted the memory
+buffer is to support splitting vectors across log buffer boundaries correctly.
+If we don't keep the vector around, we do not know where the region boundaries
+are in the item, so we'd need a new encapsulation method for regions in the log
+buffer writing (i.e. double encapsulation). This would be an on-disk format
+change and as such is not desirable.  It also means we'd have to write the log
+region headers in the formatting stage, which is problematic as there is per
+region state that needs to be placed into the headers during the log write.
+
+Hence we need to keep the vector, but by attaching the memory buffer to it and
+rewriting the vector addresses to point at the memory buffer we end up with a
+self-describing object that can be passed to the log buffer write code to be
+handled in exactly the same manner as the existing log vectors are handled.
+Hence we avoid needing a new on-disk format to handle items that have been
+relogged in memory.
+
+
+Tracking Changes
+----------------
+
+Now that we can record transactional changes in memory in a form that allows
+them to be used without limitations, we need to be able to track and accumulate
+them so that they can be written to the log at some later point in time.  The
+log item is the natural place to store this vector and buffer, and also makes sense
+to be the object that is used to track committed objects as it will always
+exist once the object has been included in a transaction.
+
+The log item is already used to track the log items that have been written to
+the log but not yet written to disk. Such log items are considered "active"
+and as such are stored in the Active Item List (AIL) which is a LSN-ordered
+double linked list. Items are inserted into this list during log buffer IO
+completion, after which they are unpinned and can be written to disk. An object
+that is in the AIL can be relogged, which causes the object to be pinned again
+and then moved forward in the AIL when the log buffer IO completes for that
+transaction.
+
+Essentially, this shows that an item that is in the AIL can still be modified
+and relogged, so any tracking must be separate to the AIL infrastructure. As
+such, we cannot reuse the AIL list pointers for tracking committed items, nor
+can we store state in any field that is protected by the AIL lock. Hence the
+committed item tracking needs its own locks, lists and state fields in the log
+item.
+
+Similar to the AIL, tracking of committed items is done through a new list
+called the Committed Item List (CIL).  The list tracks log items that have been
+committed and have formatted memory buffers attached to them. It tracks objects
+in transaction commit order, so when an object is relogged it is removed from
+its place in the list and re-inserted at the tail. This is entirely arbitrary
+and done to make it easy for debugging - the last items in the list are the
+ones that are most recently modified. Ordering of the CIL is not necessary for
+transactional integrity (as discussed in the next section) so the ordering is
+done for convenience/sanity of the developers.
+
+
+Delayed Logging: Checkpoints
+----------------------------
+
+When we have a log synchronisation event, commonly known as a "log force",
+all the items in the CIL must be written into the log via the log buffers.
+We need to write these items in the order that they exist in the CIL, and they
+need to be written as an atomic transaction. The need for all the objects to be
+written as an atomic transaction comes from the requirements of relogging and
+log replay - all the changes in all the objects in a given transaction must
+either be completely replayed during log recovery, or not replayed at all. If
+a transaction is not replayed because it is not complete in the log, then
+no later transactions should be replayed, either.
+
+To fulfill this requirement, we need to write the entire CIL in a single log
+transaction. Fortunately, the XFS log code has no fixed limit on the size of a
+transaction, nor does the log replay code. The only fundamental limit is that
+the transaction cannot be larger than just under half the size of the log.  The
+reason for this limit is that to find the head and tail of the log, there must
+be at least one complete transaction in the log at any given time. If a
+transaction is larger than half the log, then there is the possibility that a
+crash during the write of a such a transaction could partially overwrite the
+only complete previous transaction in the log. This will result in a recovery
+failure and an inconsistent filesystem and hence we must enforce the maximum
+size of a checkpoint to be slightly less than a half the log.
+
+Apart from this size requirement, a checkpoint transaction looks no different
+to any other transaction - it contains a transaction header, a series of
+formatted log items and a commit record at the tail. From a recovery
+perspective, the checkpoint transaction is also no different - just a lot
+bigger with a lot more items in it. The worst case effect of this is that we
+might need to tune the recovery transaction object hash size.
+
+Because the checkpoint is just another transaction and all the changes to log
+items are stored as log vectors, we can use the existing log buffer writing
+code to write the changes into the log. To do this efficiently, we need to
+minimise the time we hold the CIL locked while writing the checkpoint
+transaction. The current log write code enables us to do this easily with the
+way it separates the writing of the transaction contents (the log vectors) from
+the transaction commit record, but tracking this requires us to have a
+per-checkpoint context that travels through the log write process through to
+checkpoint completion.
+
+Hence a checkpoint has a context that tracks the state of the current
+checkpoint from initiation to checkpoint completion. A new context is initiated
+at the same time a checkpoint transaction is started. That is, when we remove
+all the current items from the CIL during a checkpoint operation, we move all
+those changes into the current checkpoint context. We then initialise a new
+context and attach that to the CIL for aggregation of new transactions.
+
+This allows us to unlock the CIL immediately after transfer of all the
+committed items and effectively allows new transactions to be issued while we
+are formatting the checkpoint into the log. It also allows concurrent
+checkpoints to be written into the log buffers in the case of log force heavy
+workloads, just like the existing transaction commit code does. This, however,
+requires that we strictly order the commit records in the log so that
+checkpoint sequence order is maintained during log replay.
+
+To ensure that we can be writing an item into a checkpoint transaction at
+the same time another transaction modifies the item and inserts the log item
+into the new CIL, then checkpoint transaction commit code cannot use log items
+to store the list of log vectors that need to be written into the transaction.
+Hence log vectors need to be able to be chained together to allow them to be
+detached from the log items. That is, when the CIL is flushed the memory
+buffer and log vector attached to each log item needs to be attached to the
+checkpoint context so that the log item can be released. In diagrammatic form,
+the CIL would look like this before the flush::
+
+	CIL Head
+	   |
+	   V
+	Log Item <-> log vector 1	-> memory buffer
+	   |				-> vector array
+	   V
+	Log Item <-> log vector 2	-> memory buffer
+	   |				-> vector array
+	   V
+	......
+	   |
+	   V
+	Log Item <-> log vector N-1	-> memory buffer
+	   |				-> vector array
+	   V
+	Log Item <-> log vector N	-> memory buffer
+					-> vector array
+
+And after the flush the CIL head is empty, and the checkpoint context log
+vector list would look like::
+
+	Checkpoint Context
+	   |
+	   V
+	log vector 1	-> memory buffer
+	   |		-> vector array
+	   |		-> Log Item
+	   V
+	log vector 2	-> memory buffer
+	   |		-> vector array
+	   |		-> Log Item
+	   V
+	......
+	   |
+	   V
+	log vector N-1	-> memory buffer
+	   |		-> vector array
+	   |		-> Log Item
+	   V
+	log vector N	-> memory buffer
+			-> vector array
+			-> Log Item
+
+Once this transfer is done, the CIL can be unlocked and new transactions can
+start, while the checkpoint flush code works over the log vector chain to
+commit the checkpoint.
+
+Once the checkpoint is written into the log buffers, the checkpoint context is
+attached to the log buffer that the commit record was written to along with a
+completion callback. Log IO completion will call that callback, which can then
+run transaction committed processing for the log items (i.e. insert into AIL
+and unpin) in the log vector chain and then free the log vector chain and
+checkpoint context.
+
+Discussion Point: I am uncertain as to whether the log item is the most
+efficient way to track vectors, even though it seems like the natural way to do
+it. The fact that we walk the log items (in the CIL) just to chain the log
+vectors and break the link between the log item and the log vector means that
+we take a cache line hit for the log item list modification, then another for
+the log vector chaining. If we track by the log vectors, then we only need to
+break the link between the log item and the log vector, which means we should
+dirty only the log item cachelines. Normally I wouldn't be concerned about one
+vs two dirty cachelines except for the fact I've seen upwards of 80,000 log
+vectors in one checkpoint transaction. I'd guess this is a "measure and
+compare" situation that can be done after a working and reviewed implementation
+is in the dev tree....
+
+Delayed Logging: Checkpoint Sequencing
+--------------------------------------
+
+One of the key aspects of the XFS transaction subsystem is that it tags
+committed transactions with the log sequence number of the transaction commit.
+This allows transactions to be issued asynchronously even though there may be
+future operations that cannot be completed until that transaction is fully
+committed to the log. In the rare case that a dependent operation occurs (e.g.
+re-using a freed metadata extent for a data extent), a special, optimised log
+force can be issued to force the dependent transaction to disk immediately.
+
+To do this, transactions need to record the LSN of the commit record of the
+transaction. This LSN comes directly from the log buffer the transaction is
+written into. While this works just fine for the existing transaction
+mechanism, it does not work for delayed logging because transactions are not
+written directly into the log buffers. Hence some other method of sequencing
+transactions is required.
+
+As discussed in the checkpoint section, delayed logging uses per-checkpoint
+contexts, and as such it is simple to assign a sequence number to each
+checkpoint. Because the switching of checkpoint contexts must be done
+atomically, it is simple to ensure that each new context has a monotonically
+increasing sequence number assigned to it without the need for an external
+atomic counter - we can just take the current context sequence number and add
+one to it for the new context.
+
+Then, instead of assigning a log buffer LSN to the transaction commit LSN
+during the commit, we can assign the current checkpoint sequence. This allows
+operations that track transactions that have not yet completed know what
+checkpoint sequence needs to be committed before they can continue. As a
+result, the code that forces the log to a specific LSN now needs to ensure that
+the log forces to a specific checkpoint.
+
+To ensure that we can do this, we need to track all the checkpoint contexts
+that are currently committing to the log. When we flush a checkpoint, the
+context gets added to a "committing" list which can be searched. When a
+checkpoint commit completes, it is removed from the committing list. Because
+the checkpoint context records the LSN of the commit record for the checkpoint,
+we can also wait on the log buffer that contains the commit record, thereby
+using the existing log force mechanisms to execute synchronous forces.
+
+It should be noted that the synchronous forces may need to be extended with
+mitigation algorithms similar to the current log buffer code to allow
+aggregation of multiple synchronous transactions if there are already
+synchronous transactions being flushed. Investigation of the performance of the
+current design is needed before making any decisions here.
+
+The main concern with log forces is to ensure that all the previous checkpoints
+are also committed to disk before the one we need to wait for. Therefore we
+need to check that all the prior contexts in the committing list are also
+complete before waiting on the one we need to complete. We do this
+synchronisation in the log force code so that we don't need to wait anywhere
+else for such serialisation - it only matters when we do a log force.
+
+The only remaining complexity is that a log force now also has to handle the
+case where the forcing sequence number is the same as the current context. That
+is, we need to flush the CIL and potentially wait for it to complete. This is a
+simple addition to the existing log forcing code to check the sequence numbers
+and push if required. Indeed, placing the current sequence checkpoint flush in
+the log force code enables the current mechanism for issuing synchronous
+transactions to remain untouched (i.e. commit an asynchronous transaction, then
+force the log at the LSN of that transaction) and so the higher level code
+behaves the same regardless of whether delayed logging is being used or not.
+
+Delayed Logging: Checkpoint Log Space Accounting
+------------------------------------------------
+
+The big issue for a checkpoint transaction is the log space reservation for the
+transaction. We don't know how big a checkpoint transaction is going to be
+ahead of time, nor how many log buffers it will take to write out, nor the
+number of split log vector regions are going to be used. We can track the
+amount of log space required as we add items to the commit item list, but we
+still need to reserve the space in the log for the checkpoint.
+
+A typical transaction reserves enough space in the log for the worst case space
+usage of the transaction. The reservation accounts for log record headers,
+transaction and region headers, headers for split regions, buffer tail padding,
+etc. as well as the actual space for all the changed metadata in the
+transaction. While some of this is fixed overhead, much of it is dependent on
+the size of the transaction and the number of regions being logged (the number
+of log vectors in the transaction).
+
+An example of the differences would be logging directory changes versus logging
+inode changes. If you modify lots of inode cores (e.g. ``chmod -R g+w *``), then
+there are lots of transactions that only contain an inode core and an inode log
+format structure. That is, two vectors totaling roughly 150 bytes. If we modify
+10,000 inodes, we have about 1.5MB of metadata to write in 20,000 vectors. Each
+vector is 12 bytes, so the total to be logged is approximately 1.75MB. In
+comparison, if we are logging full directory buffers, they are typically 4KB
+each, so we in 1.5MB of directory buffers we'd have roughly 400 buffers and a
+buffer format structure for each buffer - roughly 800 vectors or 1.51MB total
+space.  From this, it should be obvious that a static log space reservation is
+not particularly flexible and is difficult to select the "optimal value" for
+all workloads.
+
+Further, if we are going to use a static reservation, which bit of the entire
+reservation does it cover? We account for space used by the transaction
+reservation by tracking the space currently used by the object in the CIL and
+then calculating the increase or decrease in space used as the object is
+relogged. This allows for a checkpoint reservation to only have to account for
+log buffer metadata used such as log header records.
+
+However, even using a static reservation for just the log metadata is
+problematic. Typically log record headers use at least 16KB of log space per
+1MB of log space consumed (512 bytes per 32k) and the reservation needs to be
+large enough to handle arbitrary sized checkpoint transactions. This
+reservation needs to be made before the checkpoint is started, and we need to
+be able to reserve the space without sleeping.  For a 8MB checkpoint, we need a
+reservation of around 150KB, which is a non-trivial amount of space.
+
+A static reservation needs to manipulate the log grant counters - we can take a
+permanent reservation on the space, but we still need to make sure we refresh
+the write reservation (the actual space available to the transaction) after
+every checkpoint transaction completion. Unfortunately, if this space is not
+available when required, then the regrant code will sleep waiting for it.
+
+The problem with this is that it can lead to deadlocks as we may need to commit
+checkpoints to be able to free up log space (refer back to the description of
+rolling transactions for an example of this).  Hence we *must* always have
+space available in the log if we are to use static reservations, and that is
+very difficult and complex to arrange. It is possible to do, but there is a
+simpler way.
+
+The simpler way of doing this is tracking the entire log space used by the
+items in the CIL and using this to dynamically calculate the amount of log
+space required by the log metadata. If this log metadata space changes as a
+result of a transaction commit inserting a new memory buffer into the CIL, then
+the difference in space required is removed from the transaction that causes
+the change. Transactions at this level will *always* have enough space
+available in their reservation for this as they have already reserved the
+maximal amount of log metadata space they require, and such a delta reservation
+will always be less than or equal to the maximal amount in the reservation.
+
+Hence we can grow the checkpoint transaction reservation dynamically as items
+are added to the CIL and avoid the need for reserving and regranting log space
+up front. This avoids deadlocks and removes a blocking point from the
+checkpoint flush code.
+
+As mentioned early, transactions can't grow to more than half the size of the
+log. Hence as part of the reservation growing, we need to also check the size
+of the reservation against the maximum allowed transaction size. If we reach
+the maximum threshold, we need to push the CIL to the log. This is effectively
+a "background flush" and is done on demand. This is identical to
+a CIL push triggered by a log force, only that there is no waiting for the
+checkpoint commit to complete. This background push is checked and executed by
+transaction commit code.
+
+If the transaction subsystem goes idle while we still have items in the CIL,
+they will be flushed by the periodic log force issued by the xfssyncd. This log
+force will push the CIL to disk, and if the transaction subsystem stays idle,
+allow the idle log to be covered (effectively marked clean) in exactly the same
+manner that is done for the existing logging method. A discussion point is
+whether this log force needs to be done more frequently than the current rate
+which is once every 30s.
+
+
+Delayed Logging: Log Item Pinning
+---------------------------------
+
+Currently log items are pinned during transaction commit while the items are
+still locked. This happens just after the items are formatted, though it could
+be done any time before the items are unlocked. The result of this mechanism is
+that items get pinned once for every transaction that is committed to the log
+buffers. Hence items that are relogged in the log buffers will have a pin count
+for every outstanding transaction they were dirtied in. When each of these
+transactions is completed, they will unpin the item once. As a result, the item
+only becomes unpinned when all the transactions complete and there are no
+pending transactions. Thus the pinning and unpinning of a log item is symmetric
+as there is a 1:1 relationship with transaction commit and log item completion.
+
+For delayed logging, however, we have an asymmetric transaction commit to
+completion relationship. Every time an object is relogged in the CIL it goes
+through the commit process without a corresponding completion being registered.
+That is, we now have a many-to-one relationship between transaction commit and
+log item completion. The result of this is that pinning and unpinning of the
+log items becomes unbalanced if we retain the "pin on transaction commit, unpin
+on transaction completion" model.
+
+To keep pin/unpin symmetry, the algorithm needs to change to a "pin on
+insertion into the CIL, unpin on checkpoint completion". In other words, the
+pinning and unpinning becomes symmetric around a checkpoint context. We have to
+pin the object the first time it is inserted into the CIL - if it is already in
+the CIL during a transaction commit, then we do not pin it again. Because there
+can be multiple outstanding checkpoint contexts, we can still see elevated pin
+counts, but as each checkpoint completes the pin count will retain the correct
+value according to its context.
+
+Just to make matters slightly more complex, this checkpoint level context
+for the pin count means that the pinning of an item must take place under the
+CIL commit/flush lock. If we pin the object outside this lock, we cannot
+guarantee which context the pin count is associated with. This is because of
+the fact pinning the item is dependent on whether the item is present in the
+current CIL or not. If we don't pin the CIL first before we check and pin the
+object, we have a race with CIL being flushed between the check and the pin
+(or not pinning, as the case may be). Hence we must hold the CIL flush/commit
+lock to guarantee that we pin the items correctly.
+
+Delayed Logging: Concurrent Scalability
+---------------------------------------
+
+A fundamental requirement for the CIL is that accesses through transaction
+commits must scale to many concurrent commits. The current transaction commit
+code does not break down even when there are transactions coming from 2048
+processors at once. The current transaction code does not go any faster than if
+there was only one CPU using it, but it does not slow down either.
+
+As a result, the delayed logging transaction commit code needs to be designed
+for concurrency from the ground up. It is obvious that there are serialisation
+points in the design - the three important ones are:
+
+	1. Locking out new transaction commits while flushing the CIL
+	2. Adding items to the CIL and updating item space accounting
+	3. Checkpoint commit ordering
+
+Looking at the transaction commit and CIL flushing interactions, it is clear
+that we have a many-to-one interaction here. That is, the only restriction on
+the number of concurrent transactions that can be trying to commit at once is
+the amount of space available in the log for their reservations. The practical
+limit here is in the order of several hundred concurrent transactions for a
+128MB log, which means that it is generally one per CPU in a machine.
+
+The amount of time a transaction commit needs to hold out a flush is a
+relatively long period of time - the pinning of log items needs to be done
+while we are holding out a CIL flush, so at the moment that means it is held
+across the formatting of the objects into memory buffers (i.e. while memcpy()s
+are in progress). Ultimately a two pass algorithm where the formatting is done
+separately to the pinning of objects could be used to reduce the hold time of
+the transaction commit side.
+
+Because of the number of potential transaction commit side holders, the lock
+really needs to be a sleeping lock - if the CIL flush takes the lock, we do not
+want every other CPU in the machine spinning on the CIL lock. Given that
+flushing the CIL could involve walking a list of tens of thousands of log
+items, it will get held for a significant time and so spin contention is a
+significant concern. Preventing lots of CPUs spinning doing nothing is the
+main reason for choosing a sleeping lock even though nothing in either the
+transaction commit or CIL flush side sleeps with the lock held.
+
+It should also be noted that CIL flushing is also a relatively rare operation
+compared to transaction commit for asynchronous transaction workloads - only
+time will tell if using a read-write semaphore for exclusion will limit
+transaction commit concurrency due to cache line bouncing of the lock on the
+read side.
+
+The second serialisation point is on the transaction commit side where items
+are inserted into the CIL. Because transactions can enter this code
+concurrently, the CIL needs to be protected separately from the above
+commit/flush exclusion. It also needs to be an exclusive lock but it is only
+held for a very short time and so a spin lock is appropriate here. It is
+possible that this lock will become a contention point, but given the short
+hold time once per transaction I think that contention is unlikely.
+
+The final serialisation point is the checkpoint commit record ordering code
+that is run as part of the checkpoint commit and log force sequencing. The code
+path that triggers a CIL flush (i.e. whatever triggers the log force) will enter
+an ordering loop after writing all the log vectors into the log buffers but
+before writing the commit record. This loop walks the list of committing
+checkpoints and needs to block waiting for checkpoints to complete their commit
+record write. As a result it needs a lock and a wait variable. Log force
+sequencing also requires the same lock, list walk, and blocking mechanism to
+ensure completion of checkpoints.
+
+These two sequencing operations can use the mechanism even though the
+events they are waiting for are different. The checkpoint commit record
+sequencing needs to wait until checkpoint contexts contain a commit LSN
+(obtained through completion of a commit record write) while log force
+sequencing needs to wait until previous checkpoint contexts are removed from
+the committing list (i.e. they've completed). A simple wait variable and
+broadcast wakeups (thundering herds) has been used to implement these two
+serialisation queues. They use the same lock as the CIL, too. If we see too
+much contention on the CIL lock, or too many context switches as a result of
+the broadcast wakeups these operations can be put under a new spinlock and
+given separate wait lists to reduce lock contention and the number of processes
+woken by the wrong event.
+
+
+Lifecycle Changes
+-----------------
+
+The existing log item life cycle is as follows::
+
+	1. Transaction allocate
+	2. Transaction reserve
+	3. Lock item
+	4. Join item to transaction
+		If not already attached,
+			Allocate log item
+			Attach log item to owner item
+		Attach log item to transaction
+	5. Modify item
+		Record modifications in log item
+	6. Transaction commit
+		Pin item in memory
+		Format item into log buffer
+		Write commit LSN into transaction
+		Unlock item
+		Attach transaction to log buffer
+
+	<log buffer IO dispatched>
+	<log buffer IO completes>
+
+	7. Transaction completion
+		Mark log item committed
+		Insert log item into AIL
+			Write commit LSN into log item
+		Unpin log item
+	8. AIL traversal
+		Lock item
+		Mark log item clean
+		Flush item to disk
+
+	<item IO completion>
+
+	9. Log item removed from AIL
+		Moves log tail
+		Item unlocked
+
+Essentially, steps 1-6 operate independently from step 7, which is also
+independent of steps 8-9. An item can be locked in steps 1-6 or steps 8-9
+at the same time step 7 is occurring, but only steps 1-6 or 8-9 can occur
+at the same time. If the log item is in the AIL or between steps 6 and 7
+and steps 1-6 are re-entered, then the item is relogged. Only when steps 8-9
+are entered and completed is the object considered clean.
+
+With delayed logging, there are new steps inserted into the life cycle::
+
+	1. Transaction allocate
+	2. Transaction reserve
+	3. Lock item
+	4. Join item to transaction
+		If not already attached,
+			Allocate log item
+			Attach log item to owner item
+		Attach log item to transaction
+	5. Modify item
+		Record modifications in log item
+	6. Transaction commit
+		Pin item in memory if not pinned in CIL
+		Format item into log vector + buffer
+		Attach log vector and buffer to log item
+		Insert log item into CIL
+		Write CIL context sequence into transaction
+		Unlock item
+
+	<next log force>
+
+	7. CIL push
+		lock CIL flush
+		Chain log vectors and buffers together
+		Remove items from CIL
+		unlock CIL flush
+		write log vectors into log
+		sequence commit records
+		attach checkpoint context to log buffer
+
+	<log buffer IO dispatched>
+	<log buffer IO completes>
+
+	8. Checkpoint completion
+		Mark log item committed
+		Insert item into AIL
+			Write commit LSN into log item
+		Unpin log item
+	9. AIL traversal
+		Lock item
+		Mark log item clean
+		Flush item to disk
+	<item IO completion>
+	10. Log item removed from AIL
+		Moves log tail
+		Item unlocked
+
+From this, it can be seen that the only life cycle differences between the two
+logging methods are in the middle of the life cycle - they still have the same
+beginning and end and execution constraints. The only differences are in the
+committing of the log items to the log itself and the completion processing.
+Hence delayed logging should not introduce any constraints on log item
+behaviour, allocation or freeing that don't already exist.
+
+As a result of this zero-impact "insertion" of delayed logging infrastructure
+and the design of the internal structures to avoid on disk format changes, we
+can basically switch between delayed logging and the existing mechanism with a
+mount option. Fundamentally, there is no reason why the log manager would not
+be able to swap methods automatically and transparently depending on load
+characteristics, but this should not be necessary if delayed logging works as
+designed.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-self-describing-metadata.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-self-describing-metadata.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b79dbf36d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-self-describing-metadata.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,352 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================
+XFS Self Describing Metadata
+============================
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+The largest scalability problem facing XFS is not one of algorithmic
+scalability, but of verification of the filesystem structure. Scalabilty of the
+structures and indexes on disk and the algorithms for iterating them are
+adequate for supporting PB scale filesystems with billions of inodes, however it
+is this very scalability that causes the verification problem.
+
+Almost all metadata on XFS is dynamically allocated. The only fixed location
+metadata is the allocation group headers (SB, AGF, AGFL and AGI), while all
+other metadata structures need to be discovered by walking the filesystem
+structure in different ways. While this is already done by userspace tools for
+validating and repairing the structure, there are limits to what they can
+verify, and this in turn limits the supportable size of an XFS filesystem.
+
+For example, it is entirely possible to manually use xfs_db and a bit of
+scripting to analyse the structure of a 100TB filesystem when trying to
+determine the root cause of a corruption problem, but it is still mainly a
+manual task of verifying that things like single bit errors or misplaced writes
+weren't the ultimate cause of a corruption event. It may take a few hours to a
+few days to perform such forensic analysis, so for at this scale root cause
+analysis is entirely possible.
+
+However, if we scale the filesystem up to 1PB, we now have 10x as much metadata
+to analyse and so that analysis blows out towards weeks/months of forensic work.
+Most of the analysis work is slow and tedious, so as the amount of analysis goes
+up, the more likely that the cause will be lost in the noise.  Hence the primary
+concern for supporting PB scale filesystems is minimising the time and effort
+required for basic forensic analysis of the filesystem structure.
+
+
+Self Describing Metadata
+========================
+
+One of the problems with the current metadata format is that apart from the
+magic number in the metadata block, we have no other way of identifying what it
+is supposed to be. We can't even identify if it is the right place. Put simply,
+you can't look at a single metadata block in isolation and say "yes, it is
+supposed to be there and the contents are valid".
+
+Hence most of the time spent on forensic analysis is spent doing basic
+verification of metadata values, looking for values that are in range (and hence
+not detected by automated verification checks) but are not correct. Finding and
+understanding how things like cross linked block lists (e.g. sibling
+pointers in a btree end up with loops in them) are the key to understanding what
+went wrong, but it is impossible to tell what order the blocks were linked into
+each other or written to disk after the fact.
+
+Hence we need to record more information into the metadata to allow us to
+quickly determine if the metadata is intact and can be ignored for the purpose
+of analysis. We can't protect against every possible type of error, but we can
+ensure that common types of errors are easily detectable.  Hence the concept of
+self describing metadata.
+
+The first, fundamental requirement of self describing metadata is that the
+metadata object contains some form of unique identifier in a well known
+location. This allows us to identify the expected contents of the block and
+hence parse and verify the metadata object. IF we can't independently identify
+the type of metadata in the object, then the metadata doesn't describe itself
+very well at all!
+
+Luckily, almost all XFS metadata has magic numbers embedded already - only the
+AGFL, remote symlinks and remote attribute blocks do not contain identifying
+magic numbers. Hence we can change the on-disk format of all these objects to
+add more identifying information and detect this simply by changing the magic
+numbers in the metadata objects. That is, if it has the current magic number,
+the metadata isn't self identifying. If it contains a new magic number, it is
+self identifying and we can do much more expansive automated verification of the
+metadata object at runtime, during forensic analysis or repair.
+
+As a primary concern, self describing metadata needs some form of overall
+integrity checking. We cannot trust the metadata if we cannot verify that it has
+not been changed as a result of external influences. Hence we need some form of
+integrity check, and this is done by adding CRC32c validation to the metadata
+block. If we can verify the block contains the metadata it was intended to
+contain, a large amount of the manual verification work can be skipped.
+
+CRC32c was selected as metadata cannot be more than 64k in length in XFS and
+hence a 32 bit CRC is more than sufficient to detect multi-bit errors in
+metadata blocks. CRC32c is also now hardware accelerated on common CPUs so it is
+fast. So while CRC32c is not the strongest of possible integrity checks that
+could be used, it is more than sufficient for our needs and has relatively
+little overhead. Adding support for larger integrity fields and/or algorithms
+does really provide any extra value over CRC32c, but it does add a lot of
+complexity and so there is no provision for changing the integrity checking
+mechanism.
+
+Self describing metadata needs to contain enough information so that the
+metadata block can be verified as being in the correct place without needing to
+look at any other metadata. This means it needs to contain location information.
+Just adding a block number to the metadata is not sufficient to protect against
+mis-directed writes - a write might be misdirected to the wrong LUN and so be
+written to the "correct block" of the wrong filesystem. Hence location
+information must contain a filesystem identifier as well as a block number.
+
+Another key information point in forensic analysis is knowing who the metadata
+block belongs to. We already know the type, the location, that it is valid
+and/or corrupted, and how long ago that it was last modified. Knowing the owner
+of the block is important as it allows us to find other related metadata to
+determine the scope of the corruption. For example, if we have a extent btree
+object, we don't know what inode it belongs to and hence have to walk the entire
+filesystem to find the owner of the block. Worse, the corruption could mean that
+no owner can be found (i.e. it's an orphan block), and so without an owner field
+in the metadata we have no idea of the scope of the corruption. If we have an
+owner field in the metadata object, we can immediately do top down validation to
+determine the scope of the problem.
+
+Different types of metadata have different owner identifiers. For example,
+directory, attribute and extent tree blocks are all owned by an inode, while
+freespace btree blocks are owned by an allocation group. Hence the size and
+contents of the owner field are determined by the type of metadata object we are
+looking at.  The owner information can also identify misplaced writes (e.g.
+freespace btree block written to the wrong AG).
+
+Self describing metadata also needs to contain some indication of when it was
+written to the filesystem. One of the key information points when doing forensic
+analysis is how recently the block was modified. Correlation of set of corrupted
+metadata blocks based on modification times is important as it can indicate
+whether the corruptions are related, whether there's been multiple corruption
+events that lead to the eventual failure, and even whether there are corruptions
+present that the run-time verification is not detecting.
+
+For example, we can determine whether a metadata object is supposed to be free
+space or still allocated if it is still referenced by its owner by looking at
+when the free space btree block that contains the block was last written
+compared to when the metadata object itself was last written.  If the free space
+block is more recent than the object and the object's owner, then there is a
+very good chance that the block should have been removed from the owner.
+
+To provide this "written timestamp", each metadata block gets the Log Sequence
+Number (LSN) of the most recent transaction it was modified on written into it.
+This number will always increase over the life of the filesystem, and the only
+thing that resets it is running xfs_repair on the filesystem. Further, by use of
+the LSN we can tell if the corrupted metadata all belonged to the same log
+checkpoint and hence have some idea of how much modification occurred between
+the first and last instance of corrupt metadata on disk and, further, how much
+modification occurred between the corruption being written and when it was
+detected.
+
+Runtime Validation
+==================
+
+Validation of self-describing metadata takes place at runtime in two places:
+
+	- immediately after a successful read from disk
+	- immediately prior to write IO submission
+
+The verification is completely stateless - it is done independently of the
+modification process, and seeks only to check that the metadata is what it says
+it is and that the metadata fields are within bounds and internally consistent.
+As such, we cannot catch all types of corruption that can occur within a block
+as there may be certain limitations that operational state enforces of the
+metadata, or there may be corruption of interblock relationships (e.g. corrupted
+sibling pointer lists). Hence we still need stateful checking in the main code
+body, but in general most of the per-field validation is handled by the
+verifiers.
+
+For read verification, the caller needs to specify the expected type of metadata
+that it should see, and the IO completion process verifies that the metadata
+object matches what was expected. If the verification process fails, then it
+marks the object being read as EFSCORRUPTED. The caller needs to catch this
+error (same as for IO errors), and if it needs to take special action due to a
+verification error it can do so by catching the EFSCORRUPTED error value. If we
+need more discrimination of error type at higher levels, we can define new
+error numbers for different errors as necessary.
+
+The first step in read verification is checking the magic number and determining
+whether CRC validating is necessary. If it is, the CRC32c is calculated and
+compared against the value stored in the object itself. Once this is validated,
+further checks are made against the location information, followed by extensive
+object specific metadata validation. If any of these checks fail, then the
+buffer is considered corrupt and the EFSCORRUPTED error is set appropriately.
+
+Write verification is the opposite of the read verification - first the object
+is extensively verified and if it is OK we then update the LSN from the last
+modification made to the object, After this, we calculate the CRC and insert it
+into the object. Once this is done the write IO is allowed to continue. If any
+error occurs during this process, the buffer is again marked with a EFSCORRUPTED
+error for the higher layers to catch.
+
+Structures
+==========
+
+A typical on-disk structure needs to contain the following information::
+
+    struct xfs_ondisk_hdr {
+	    __be32  magic;		/* magic number */
+	    __be32  crc;		/* CRC, not logged */
+	    uuid_t  uuid;		/* filesystem identifier */
+	    __be64  owner;		/* parent object */
+	    __be64  blkno;		/* location on disk */
+	    __be64  lsn;		/* last modification in log, not logged */
+    };
+
+Depending on the metadata, this information may be part of a header structure
+separate to the metadata contents, or may be distributed through an existing
+structure. The latter occurs with metadata that already contains some of this
+information, such as the superblock and AG headers.
+
+Other metadata may have different formats for the information, but the same
+level of information is generally provided. For example:
+
+	- short btree blocks have a 32 bit owner (ag number) and a 32 bit block
+	  number for location. The two of these combined provide the same
+	  information as @owner and @blkno in eh above structure, but using 8
+	  bytes less space on disk.
+
+	- directory/attribute node blocks have a 16 bit magic number, and the
+	  header that contains the magic number has other information in it as
+	  well. hence the additional metadata headers change the overall format
+	  of the metadata.
+
+A typical buffer read verifier is structured as follows::
+
+    #define XFS_FOO_CRC_OFF		offsetof(struct xfs_ondisk_hdr, crc)
+
+    static void
+    xfs_foo_read_verify(
+	    struct xfs_buf	*bp)
+    {
+	struct xfs_mount *mp = bp->b_mount;
+
+	    if ((xfs_sb_version_hascrc(&mp->m_sb) &&
+		!xfs_verify_cksum(bp->b_addr, BBTOB(bp->b_length),
+					    XFS_FOO_CRC_OFF)) ||
+		!xfs_foo_verify(bp)) {
+		    XFS_CORRUPTION_ERROR(__func__, XFS_ERRLEVEL_LOW, mp, bp->b_addr);
+		    xfs_buf_ioerror(bp, EFSCORRUPTED);
+	    }
+    }
+
+The code ensures that the CRC is only checked if the filesystem has CRCs enabled
+by checking the superblock of the feature bit, and then if the CRC verifies OK
+(or is not needed) it verifies the actual contents of the block.
+
+The verifier function will take a couple of different forms, depending on
+whether the magic number can be used to determine the format of the block. In
+the case it can't, the code is structured as follows::
+
+    static bool
+    xfs_foo_verify(
+	    struct xfs_buf		*bp)
+    {
+	    struct xfs_mount	*mp = bp->b_mount;
+	    struct xfs_ondisk_hdr	*hdr = bp->b_addr;
+
+	    if (hdr->magic != cpu_to_be32(XFS_FOO_MAGIC))
+		    return false;
+
+	    if (!xfs_sb_version_hascrc(&mp->m_sb)) {
+		    if (!uuid_equal(&hdr->uuid, &mp->m_sb.sb_uuid))
+			    return false;
+		    if (bp->b_bn != be64_to_cpu(hdr->blkno))
+			    return false;
+		    if (hdr->owner == 0)
+			    return false;
+	    }
+
+	    /* object specific verification checks here */
+
+	    return true;
+    }
+
+If there are different magic numbers for the different formats, the verifier
+will look like::
+
+    static bool
+    xfs_foo_verify(
+	    struct xfs_buf		*bp)
+    {
+	    struct xfs_mount	*mp = bp->b_mount;
+	    struct xfs_ondisk_hdr	*hdr = bp->b_addr;
+
+	    if (hdr->magic == cpu_to_be32(XFS_FOO_CRC_MAGIC)) {
+		    if (!uuid_equal(&hdr->uuid, &mp->m_sb.sb_uuid))
+			    return false;
+		    if (bp->b_bn != be64_to_cpu(hdr->blkno))
+			    return false;
+		    if (hdr->owner == 0)
+			    return false;
+	    } else if (hdr->magic != cpu_to_be32(XFS_FOO_MAGIC))
+		    return false;
+
+	    /* object specific verification checks here */
+
+	    return true;
+    }
+
+Write verifiers are very similar to the read verifiers, they just do things in
+the opposite order to the read verifiers. A typical write verifier::
+
+    static void
+    xfs_foo_write_verify(
+	    struct xfs_buf	*bp)
+    {
+	    struct xfs_mount	*mp = bp->b_mount;
+	    struct xfs_buf_log_item	*bip = bp->b_fspriv;
+
+	    if (!xfs_foo_verify(bp)) {
+		    XFS_CORRUPTION_ERROR(__func__, XFS_ERRLEVEL_LOW, mp, bp->b_addr);
+		    xfs_buf_ioerror(bp, EFSCORRUPTED);
+		    return;
+	    }
+
+	    if (!xfs_sb_version_hascrc(&mp->m_sb))
+		    return;
+
+
+	    if (bip) {
+		    struct xfs_ondisk_hdr	*hdr = bp->b_addr;
+		    hdr->lsn = cpu_to_be64(bip->bli_item.li_lsn);
+	    }
+	    xfs_update_cksum(bp->b_addr, BBTOB(bp->b_length), XFS_FOO_CRC_OFF);
+    }
+
+This will verify the internal structure of the metadata before we go any
+further, detecting corruptions that have occurred as the metadata has been
+modified in memory. If the metadata verifies OK, and CRCs are enabled, we then
+update the LSN field (when it was last modified) and calculate the CRC on the
+metadata. Once this is done, we can issue the IO.
+
+Inodes and Dquots
+=================
+
+Inodes and dquots are special snowflakes. They have per-object CRC and
+self-identifiers, but they are packed so that there are multiple objects per
+buffer. Hence we do not use per-buffer verifiers to do the work of per-object
+verification and CRC calculations. The per-buffer verifiers simply perform basic
+identification of the buffer - that they contain inodes or dquots, and that
+there are magic numbers in all the expected spots. All further CRC and
+verification checks are done when each inode is read from or written back to the
+buffer.
+
+The structure of the verifiers and the identifiers checks is very similar to the
+buffer code described above. The only difference is where they are called. For
+example, inode read verification is done in xfs_inode_from_disk() when the inode
+is first read out of the buffer and the struct xfs_inode is instantiated. The
+inode is already extensively verified during writeback in xfs_iflush_int, so the
+only addition here is to add the LSN and CRC to the inode as it is copied back
+into the buffer.
+
+XXX: inode unlinked list modification doesn't recalculate the inode CRC! None of
+the unlinked list modifications check or update CRCs, neither during unlink nor
+log recovery. So, it's gone unnoticed until now. This won't matter immediately -
+repair will probably complain about it - but it needs to be fixed.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/zonefs.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/zonefs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..394b9f15d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/zonefs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,485 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================================================
+ZoneFS - Zone filesystem for Zoned block devices
+================================================
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+zonefs is a very simple file system exposing each zone of a zoned block device
+as a file. Unlike a regular POSIX-compliant file system with native zoned block
+device support (e.g. f2fs), zonefs does not hide the sequential write
+constraint of zoned block devices to the user. Files representing sequential
+write zones of the device must be written sequentially starting from the end
+of the file (append only writes).
+
+As such, zonefs is in essence closer to a raw block device access interface
+than to a full-featured POSIX file system. The goal of zonefs is to simplify
+the implementation of zoned block device support in applications by replacing
+raw block device file accesses with a richer file API, avoiding relying on
+direct block device file ioctls which may be more obscure to developers. One
+example of this approach is the implementation of LSM (log-structured merge)
+tree structures (such as used in RocksDB and LevelDB) on zoned block devices
+by allowing SSTables to be stored in a zone file similarly to a regular file
+system rather than as a range of sectors of the entire disk. The introduction
+of the higher level construct "one file is one zone" can help reducing the
+amount of changes needed in the application as well as introducing support for
+different application programming languages.
+
+Zoned block devices
+-------------------
+
+Zoned storage devices belong to a class of storage devices with an address
+space that is divided into zones. A zone is a group of consecutive LBAs and all
+zones are contiguous (there are no LBA gaps). Zones may have different types.
+
+* Conventional zones: there are no access constraints to LBAs belonging to
+  conventional zones. Any read or write access can be executed, similarly to a
+  regular block device.
+* Sequential zones: these zones accept random reads but must be written
+  sequentially. Each sequential zone has a write pointer maintained by the
+  device that keeps track of the mandatory start LBA position of the next write
+  to the device. As a result of this write constraint, LBAs in a sequential zone
+  cannot be overwritten. Sequential zones must first be erased using a special
+  command (zone reset) before rewriting.
+
+Zoned storage devices can be implemented using various recording and media
+technologies. The most common form of zoned storage today uses the SCSI Zoned
+Block Commands (ZBC) and Zoned ATA Commands (ZAC) interfaces on Shingled
+Magnetic Recording (SMR) HDDs.
+
+Solid State Disks (SSD) storage devices can also implement a zoned interface
+to, for instance, reduce internal write amplification due to garbage collection.
+The NVMe Zoned NameSpace (ZNS) is a technical proposal of the NVMe standard
+committee aiming at adding a zoned storage interface to the NVMe protocol.
+
+Zonefs Overview
+===============
+
+Zonefs exposes the zones of a zoned block device as files. The files
+representing zones are grouped by zone type, which are themselves represented
+by sub-directories. This file structure is built entirely using zone information
+provided by the device and so does not require any complex on-disk metadata
+structure.
+
+On-disk metadata
+----------------
+
+zonefs on-disk metadata is reduced to an immutable super block which
+persistently stores a magic number and optional feature flags and values. On
+mount, zonefs uses blkdev_report_zones() to obtain the device zone configuration
+and populates the mount point with a static file tree solely based on this
+information. File sizes come from the device zone type and write pointer
+position managed by the device itself.
+
+The super block is always written on disk at sector 0. The first zone of the
+device storing the super block is never exposed as a zone file by zonefs. If
+the zone containing the super block is a sequential zone, the mkzonefs format
+tool always "finishes" the zone, that is, it transitions the zone to a full
+state to make it read-only, preventing any data write.
+
+Zone type sub-directories
+-------------------------
+
+Files representing zones of the same type are grouped together under the same
+sub-directory automatically created on mount.
+
+For conventional zones, the sub-directory "cnv" is used. This directory is
+however created if and only if the device has usable conventional zones. If
+the device only has a single conventional zone at sector 0, the zone will not
+be exposed as a file as it will be used to store the zonefs super block. For
+such devices, the "cnv" sub-directory will not be created.
+
+For sequential write zones, the sub-directory "seq" is used.
+
+These two directories are the only directories that exist in zonefs. Users
+cannot create other directories and cannot rename nor delete the "cnv" and
+"seq" sub-directories.
+
+The size of the directories indicated by the st_size field of struct stat,
+obtained with the stat() or fstat() system calls, indicates the number of files
+existing under the directory.
+
+Zone files
+----------
+
+Zone files are named using the number of the zone they represent within the set
+of zones of a particular type. That is, both the "cnv" and "seq" directories
+contain files named "0", "1", "2", ... The file numbers also represent
+increasing zone start sector on the device.
+
+All read and write operations to zone files are not allowed beyond the file
+maximum size, that is, beyond the zone capacity. Any access exceeding the zone
+capacity is failed with the -EFBIG error.
+
+Creating, deleting, renaming or modifying any attribute of files and
+sub-directories is not allowed.
+
+The number of blocks of a file as reported by stat() and fstat() indicates the
+capacity of the zone file, or in other words, the maximum file size.
+
+Conventional zone files
+-----------------------
+
+The size of conventional zone files is fixed to the size of the zone they
+represent. Conventional zone files cannot be truncated.
+
+These files can be randomly read and written using any type of I/O operation:
+buffered I/Os, direct I/Os, memory mapped I/Os (mmap), etc. There are no I/O
+constraint for these files beyond the file size limit mentioned above.
+
+Sequential zone files
+---------------------
+
+The size of sequential zone files grouped in the "seq" sub-directory represents
+the file's zone write pointer position relative to the zone start sector.
+
+Sequential zone files can only be written sequentially, starting from the file
+end, that is, write operations can only be append writes. Zonefs makes no
+attempt at accepting random writes and will fail any write request that has a
+start offset not corresponding to the end of the file, or to the end of the last
+write issued and still in-flight (for asynchronous I/O operations).
+
+Since dirty page writeback by the page cache does not guarantee a sequential
+write pattern, zonefs prevents buffered writes and writeable shared mappings
+on sequential files. Only direct I/O writes are accepted for these files.
+zonefs relies on the sequential delivery of write I/O requests to the device
+implemented by the block layer elevator. An elevator implementing the sequential
+write feature for zoned block device (ELEVATOR_F_ZBD_SEQ_WRITE elevator feature)
+must be used. This type of elevator (e.g. mq-deadline) is set by default
+for zoned block devices on device initialization.
+
+There are no restrictions on the type of I/O used for read operations in
+sequential zone files. Buffered I/Os, direct I/Os and shared read mappings are
+all accepted.
+
+Truncating sequential zone files is allowed only down to 0, in which case, the
+zone is reset to rewind the file zone write pointer position to the start of
+the zone, or up to the zone capacity, in which case the file's zone is
+transitioned to the FULL state (finish zone operation).
+
+Format options
+--------------
+
+Several optional features of zonefs can be enabled at format time.
+
+* Conventional zone aggregation: ranges of contiguous conventional zones can be
+  aggregated into a single larger file instead of the default one file per zone.
+* File ownership: The owner UID and GID of zone files is by default 0 (root)
+  but can be changed to any valid UID/GID.
+* File access permissions: the default 640 access permissions can be changed.
+
+IO error handling
+-----------------
+
+Zoned block devices may fail I/O requests for reasons similar to regular block
+devices, e.g. due to bad sectors. However, in addition to such known I/O
+failure pattern, the standards governing zoned block devices behavior define
+additional conditions that result in I/O errors.
+
+* A zone may transition to the read-only condition (BLK_ZONE_COND_READONLY):
+  While the data already written in the zone is still readable, the zone can
+  no longer be written. No user action on the zone (zone management command or
+  read/write access) can change the zone condition back to a normal read/write
+  state. While the reasons for the device to transition a zone to read-only
+  state are not defined by the standards, a typical cause for such transition
+  would be a defective write head on an HDD (all zones under this head are
+  changed to read-only).
+
+* A zone may transition to the offline condition (BLK_ZONE_COND_OFFLINE):
+  An offline zone cannot be read nor written. No user action can transition an
+  offline zone back to an operational good state. Similarly to zone read-only
+  transitions, the reasons for a drive to transition a zone to the offline
+  condition are undefined. A typical cause would be a defective read-write head
+  on an HDD causing all zones on the platter under the broken head to be
+  inaccessible.
+
+* Unaligned write errors: These errors result from the host issuing write
+  requests with a start sector that does not correspond to a zone write pointer
+  position when the write request is executed by the device. Even though zonefs
+  enforces sequential file write for sequential zones, unaligned write errors
+  may still happen in the case of a partial failure of a very large direct I/O
+  operation split into multiple BIOs/requests or asynchronous I/O operations.
+  If one of the write request within the set of sequential write requests
+  issued to the device fails, all write requests queued after it will
+  become unaligned and fail.
+
+* Delayed write errors: similarly to regular block devices, if the device side
+  write cache is enabled, write errors may occur in ranges of previously
+  completed writes when the device write cache is flushed, e.g. on fsync().
+  Similarly to the previous immediate unaligned write error case, delayed write
+  errors can propagate through a stream of cached sequential data for a zone
+  causing all data to be dropped after the sector that caused the error.
+
+All I/O errors detected by zonefs are notified to the user with an error code
+return for the system call that triggered or detected the error. The recovery
+actions taken by zonefs in response to I/O errors depend on the I/O type (read
+vs write) and on the reason for the error (bad sector, unaligned writes or zone
+condition change).
+
+* For read I/O errors, zonefs does not execute any particular recovery action,
+  but only if the file zone is still in a good condition and there is no
+  inconsistency between the file inode size and its zone write pointer position.
+  If a problem is detected, I/O error recovery is executed (see below table).
+
+* For write I/O errors, zonefs I/O error recovery is always executed.
+
+* A zone condition change to read-only or offline also always triggers zonefs
+  I/O error recovery.
+
+Zonefs minimal I/O error recovery may change a file size and file access
+permissions.
+
+* File size changes:
+  Immediate or delayed write errors in a sequential zone file may cause the file
+  inode size to be inconsistent with the amount of data successfully written in
+  the file zone. For instance, the partial failure of a multi-BIO large write
+  operation will cause the zone write pointer to advance partially, even though
+  the entire write operation will be reported as failed to the user. In such
+  case, the file inode size must be advanced to reflect the zone write pointer
+  change and eventually allow the user to restart writing at the end of the
+  file.
+  A file size may also be reduced to reflect a delayed write error detected on
+  fsync(): in this case, the amount of data effectively written in the zone may
+  be less than originally indicated by the file inode size. After such I/O
+  error, zonefs always fixes the file inode size to reflect the amount of data
+  persistently stored in the file zone.
+
+* Access permission changes:
+  A zone condition change to read-only is indicated with a change in the file
+  access permissions to render the file read-only. This disables changes to the
+  file attributes and data modification. For offline zones, all permissions
+  (read and write) to the file are disabled.
+
+Further action taken by zonefs I/O error recovery can be controlled by the user
+with the "errors=xxx" mount option. The table below summarizes the result of
+zonefs I/O error processing depending on the mount option and on the zone
+conditions::
+
+    +--------------+-----------+-----------------------------------------+
+    |              |           |            Post error state             |
+    | "errors=xxx" |  device   |                 access permissions      |
+    |    mount     |   zone    | file         file          device zone  |
+    |    option    | condition | size     read    write    read    write |
+    +--------------+-----------+-----------------------------------------+
+    |              | good      | fixed    yes     no       yes     yes   |
+    | remount-ro   | read-only | as is    yes     no       yes     no    |
+    | (default)    | offline   |   0      no      no       no      no    |
+    +--------------+-----------+-----------------------------------------+
+    |              | good      | fixed    yes     no       yes     yes   |
+    | zone-ro      | read-only | as is    yes     no       yes     no    |
+    |              | offline   |   0      no      no       no      no    |
+    +--------------+-----------+-----------------------------------------+
+    |              | good      |   0      no      no       yes     yes   |
+    | zone-offline | read-only |   0      no      no       yes     no    |
+    |              | offline   |   0      no      no       no      no    |
+    +--------------+-----------+-----------------------------------------+
+    |              | good      | fixed    yes     yes      yes     yes   |
+    | repair       | read-only | as is    yes     no       yes     no    |
+    |              | offline   |   0      no      no       no      no    |
+    +--------------+-----------+-----------------------------------------+
+
+Further notes:
+
+* The "errors=remount-ro" mount option is the default behavior of zonefs I/O
+  error processing if no errors mount option is specified.
+* With the "errors=remount-ro" mount option, the change of the file access
+  permissions to read-only applies to all files. The file system is remounted
+  read-only.
+* Access permission and file size changes due to the device transitioning zones
+  to the offline condition are permanent. Remounting or reformatting the device
+  with mkfs.zonefs (mkzonefs) will not change back offline zone files to a good
+  state.
+* File access permission changes to read-only due to the device transitioning
+  zones to the read-only condition are permanent. Remounting or reformatting
+  the device will not re-enable file write access.
+* File access permission changes implied by the remount-ro, zone-ro and
+  zone-offline mount options are temporary for zones in a good condition.
+  Unmounting and remounting the file system will restore the previous default
+  (format time values) access rights to the files affected.
+* The repair mount option triggers only the minimal set of I/O error recovery
+  actions, that is, file size fixes for zones in a good condition. Zones
+  indicated as being read-only or offline by the device still imply changes to
+  the zone file access permissions as noted in the table above.
+
+Mount options
+-------------
+
+zonefs defines several mount options:
+* errors=<behavior>
+* explicit-open
+
+"errors=<behavior>" option
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+The "errors=<behavior>" option mount option allows the user to specify zonefs
+behavior in response to I/O errors, inode size inconsistencies or zone
+condition changes. The defined behaviors are as follow:
+
+* remount-ro (default)
+* zone-ro
+* zone-offline
+* repair
+
+The run-time I/O error actions defined for each behavior are detailed in the
+previous section. Mount time I/O errors will cause the mount operation to fail.
+The handling of read-only zones also differs between mount-time and run-time.
+If a read-only zone is found at mount time, the zone is always treated in the
+same manner as offline zones, that is, all accesses are disabled and the zone
+file size set to 0. This is necessary as the write pointer of read-only zones
+is defined as invalib by the ZBC and ZAC standards, making it impossible to
+discover the amount of data that has been written to the zone. In the case of a
+read-only zone discovered at run-time, as indicated in the previous section.
+The size of the zone file is left unchanged from its last updated value.
+
+"explicit-open" option
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+A zoned block device (e.g. an NVMe Zoned Namespace device) may have limits on
+the number of zones that can be active, that is, zones that are in the
+implicit open, explicit open or closed conditions.  This potential limitation
+translates into a risk for applications to see write IO errors due to this
+limit being exceeded if the zone of a file is not already active when a write
+request is issued by the user.
+
+To avoid these potential errors, the "explicit-open" mount option forces zones
+to be made active using an open zone command when a file is opened for writing
+for the first time. If the zone open command succeeds, the application is then
+guaranteed that write requests can be processed. Conversely, the
+"explicit-open" mount option will result in a zone close command being issued
+to the device on the last close() of a zone file if the zone is not full nor
+empty.
+
+Runtime sysfs attributes
+------------------------
+
+zonefs defines several sysfs attributes for mounted devices.  All attributes
+are user readable and can be found in the directory /sys/fs/zonefs/<dev>/,
+where <dev> is the name of the mounted zoned block device.
+
+The attributes defined are as follows.
+
+* **max_wro_seq_files**:  This attribute reports the maximum number of
+  sequential zone files that can be open for writing.  This number corresponds
+  to the maximum number of explicitly or implicitly open zones that the device
+  supports.  A value of 0 means that the device has no limit and that any zone
+  (any file) can be open for writing and written at any time, regardless of the
+  state of other zones.  When the *explicit-open* mount option is used, zonefs
+  will fail any open() system call requesting to open a sequential zone file for
+  writing when the number of sequential zone files already open for writing has
+  reached the *max_wro_seq_files* limit.
+* **nr_wro_seq_files**:  This attribute reports the current number of sequential
+  zone files open for writing.  When the "explicit-open" mount option is used,
+  this number can never exceed *max_wro_seq_files*.  If the *explicit-open*
+  mount option is not used, the reported number can be greater than
+  *max_wro_seq_files*.  In such case, it is the responsibility of the
+  application to not write simultaneously more than *max_wro_seq_files*
+  sequential zone files.  Failure to do so can result in write errors.
+* **max_active_seq_files**:  This attribute reports the maximum number of
+  sequential zone files that are in an active state, that is, sequential zone
+  files that are partially writen (not empty nor full) or that have a zone that
+  is explicitly open (which happens only if the *explicit-open* mount option is
+  used).  This number is always equal to the maximum number of active zones that
+  the device supports.  A value of 0 means that the mounted device has no limit
+  on the number of sequential zone files that can be active.
+* **nr_active_seq_files**:  This attributes reports the current number of
+  sequential zone files that are active. If *max_active_seq_files* is not 0,
+  then the value of *nr_active_seq_files* can never exceed the value of
+  *nr_active_seq_files*, regardless of the use of the *explicit-open* mount
+  option.
+
+Zonefs User Space Tools
+=======================
+
+The mkzonefs tool is used to format zoned block devices for use with zonefs.
+This tool is available on Github at:
+
+https://github.com/damien-lemoal/zonefs-tools
+
+zonefs-tools also includes a test suite which can be run against any zoned
+block device, including null_blk block device created with zoned mode.
+
+Examples
+--------
+
+The following formats a 15TB host-managed SMR HDD with 256 MB zones
+with the conventional zones aggregation feature enabled::
+
+    # mkzonefs -o aggr_cnv /dev/sdX
+    # mount -t zonefs /dev/sdX /mnt
+    # ls -l /mnt/
+    total 0
+    dr-xr-xr-x 2 root root     1 Nov 25 13:23 cnv
+    dr-xr-xr-x 2 root root 55356 Nov 25 13:23 seq
+
+The size of the zone files sub-directories indicate the number of files
+existing for each type of zones. In this example, there is only one
+conventional zone file (all conventional zones are aggregated under a single
+file)::
+
+    # ls -l /mnt/cnv
+    total 137101312
+    -rw-r----- 1 root root 140391743488 Nov 25 13:23 0
+
+This aggregated conventional zone file can be used as a regular file::
+
+    # mkfs.ext4 /mnt/cnv/0
+    # mount -o loop /mnt/cnv/0 /data
+
+The "seq" sub-directory grouping files for sequential write zones has in this
+example 55356 zones::
+
+    # ls -lv /mnt/seq
+    total 14511243264
+    -rw-r----- 1 root root 0 Nov 25 13:23 0
+    -rw-r----- 1 root root 0 Nov 25 13:23 1
+    -rw-r----- 1 root root 0 Nov 25 13:23 2
+    ...
+    -rw-r----- 1 root root 0 Nov 25 13:23 55354
+    -rw-r----- 1 root root 0 Nov 25 13:23 55355
+
+For sequential write zone files, the file size changes as data is appended at
+the end of the file, similarly to any regular file system::
+
+    # dd if=/dev/zero of=/mnt/seq/0 bs=4096 count=1 conv=notrunc oflag=direct
+    1+0 records in
+    1+0 records out
+    4096 bytes (4.1 kB, 4.0 KiB) copied, 0.00044121 s, 9.3 MB/s
+
+    # ls -l /mnt/seq/0
+    -rw-r----- 1 root root 4096 Nov 25 13:23 /mnt/seq/0
+
+The written file can be truncated to the zone size, preventing any further
+write operation::
+
+    # truncate -s 268435456 /mnt/seq/0
+    # ls -l /mnt/seq/0
+    -rw-r----- 1 root root 268435456 Nov 25 13:49 /mnt/seq/0
+
+Truncation to 0 size allows freeing the file zone storage space and restart
+append-writes to the file::
+
+    # truncate -s 0 /mnt/seq/0
+    # ls -l /mnt/seq/0
+    -rw-r----- 1 root root 0 Nov 25 13:49 /mnt/seq/0
+
+Since files are statically mapped to zones on the disk, the number of blocks
+of a file as reported by stat() and fstat() indicates the capacity of the file
+zone::
+
+    # stat /mnt/seq/0
+    File: /mnt/seq/0
+    Size: 0         	Blocks: 524288     IO Block: 4096   regular empty file
+    Device: 870h/2160d	Inode: 50431       Links: 1
+    Access: (0640/-rw-r-----)  Uid: (    0/    root)   Gid: (    0/    root)
+    Access: 2019-11-25 13:23:57.048971997 +0900
+    Modify: 2019-11-25 13:52:25.553805765 +0900
+    Change: 2019-11-25 13:52:25.553805765 +0900
+    Birth: -
+
+The number of blocks of the file ("Blocks") in units of 512B blocks gives the
+maximum file size of 524288 * 512 B = 256 MB, corresponding to the device zone
+capacity in this example. Of note is that the "IO block" field always
+indicates the minimum I/O size for writes and corresponds to the device
+physical sector size.